Church Missionary Record [New Zealand sections only]

First published by Church Missionary Society in 1831-1855 [gaps]

Digitised and made available online by the University of Auckland Libraries and Learning Services, Auckland Libraries and Auckland War Memorial Museum.

Epub © 2015 Early New Zealand Books Collection

Church Missionary Record

[New Zealand sections only]

1830

[This book was digitised in partnership with Auckland War Memorial Museum]
http://www.aucklandmuseum.com

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

THE attention of the Society was directed to this part of the world, in the year 1808, by the Rev. Samuel Marsden, one of the Colonial Chaplains in New South Wales, then on a visit to England. The two large Islands in the Great South Sea, called New Zealand, to the East of New Holland, and almost the antipodes of Great Britain, were selected as a sphere for the Society's exertions. In order to facilitate the introduction of the Gospel among the savage inhabitants of these Islands, it was deemed advisable to form a Settlement; and, for this purpose, two persons accompanied Mr. Marsden on his return to New South Wales, in 1809.

Various obstacles retarded the execution of this plan till 1815, when it was at length carried into effect; a Grant of Land, about 200 acres in extent, having been made to the Society, by two Native Chiefs; one of whom, Ahoodee O Gunna, was the King of Rangheehoo, where the first Station of the Society was formed. The site, of the Settlement is in the Bay of Islands, on the northeast coast of the Northern Island: the Grant was made out and executed, and the Land publicly set apart for the use of the Society, in the presence of a number of Chiefs who were assembled on the occasion. Here the Settlers commenced their peaceful labours, in the erection of dwellings for themselves and their families, and the cultivation of the soil. It might be expected, that, in an undertaking of this nature, many serious difficulties would arise: the god of this world would contend fiercely for the dominion which he had so long exercised over these degraded people; and, at his instigation, they would be led to acts of insult and violence towards those who were seeking to do them good. This expectation has been realized in the history of the Mission, from its commencement to the date of the most recent accounts; and those, who have been engaged in it, have had many seasons of painful trial. In the midst, however, of the perils to which they have been subjected, they have been sustained and defended by Him in whose service they were engaged; He has compassed them with His favour, as with a shield; and by His over-ruling arm, some of the Chiefs – particularly Shunghee, whose name must be familiar to our readers – were made the instruments of

affording them protection. Since the commencement of the Mission, other Stations, in addition to that at Rangheehoo, have been formed, at Kiddeekiddee and Pyhea: a fourth was contemplated some time ago; but the intention was, on fuller consideration, abandoned; and it has subsequently been deemed advisable to give up Rangheehoo, in order to strengthen the other Stations. The original Settlers have been followed, at various times, by other persons, who, in various capacities, have gone out to engage in the instruction of the Natives; and the total number of Missionaries, Catechists, and Settlers, thus sent forth, is 32; and there are at present connected with the Mission, 4 Missionaries, 3 of whom are married; 10 Male Lay-Instructors, and 13 Female.

The means of regularly conveying stores from New South Wales, for the support of those who were engaged in the Mission, the want of which had been much felt at the commencement of the Settlement – the obtaining provisions from various parts of the Islands, for the maintenance of the Native Scholars – and the facility of access to the inhabitants along the coast, strongly suggested the importance of a Vessel which might be thus employed in the service of the Mission. Under the direction of one of the Missionaries, whose professional skill enabled him to superintend the undertaking with considerable advantage, a Vessel of about 100 tons, the "Herald," was commenced: it was completed and launched in 1826, and, soon after, made a voyage to the Colony; but, in the following year, was driven on the rocks on the coast of New Zealand, and became a wreck. It has since been replaced by another Vessel, the "Active;" which, it is hoped, has ere this reached its destination.

The erection of Buildings for the purposes of the Mission, and other secular matters, have necessarily occupied a large portion of the time of the Society's Labourers, which, under other circumstances, would have been appropriated to the instruction of their ignorant neighbours: this circumstance, however, has afforded them daily opportunities of intercourse with the Natives in their employ, and many facilities of becoming acquainted with their character and language. The chief objects to which their labours have been directed, are, the instruction of the Natives collected at the various Stations – visits to the Neighbouring Tribes – the fixing the Language; and the preparation of a Grammar and Vocabulary, with Elementary Books for Schools – and the Translation of the Scriptures and Liturgy into the Native Tongue. In the Schools which have been established, there are about 200 persons, Adults and Children, under Christian Instruction; the generality of whom have made a satisfactory proficiency. Portions of the Books of Genesis and Exodus, and of the Gospels of St. Matthew and St. John; the Lord's Prayer; a part of the Liturgy; and some Hymns, have been translated and printed for the use of the Natives: the Missionaries are proceeding in the work of Translation. The beneficial influence of the Gospel of Christ is visible, in the general declension of the native superstitions, in the ascendancy which the Missionaries have obtained over the minds of the people, and in the readiness with which their instructions are listened to; and, though they have had to wait in faith for a full blessing on their labours, some seals to their Ministry have been given them in this land of darkness and blood; and the recent spirit of inquiry, which is noticed in some of the subjoined accounts, encourages them to hope that God will shortly fulfil His promises in a more abundant measure, and glorify His Name in the conversion of many more of these savage people to the Faith of Christ.

While, in every part of the Society's extensive operations, new opportunities for Missionary Labours arise, and new demands are made on the faith and zeal of the Church, the state of the Society's Finances has for some time forbade it to engage in any undertaking which involves additional expense; and it is the peremptory, though painful duty of the Committee, to continue this restriction. But the Secretary of State for the Colonies having made known to the Committee the desire of His Majesty's Government to take measures for the Religious Instruction and Social Improvement of the Aborigines of New Holland – and having proposed that the Society should furnish two Religious Teachers to labour among them for the prosecution of this object, for whose support 500l. per annum would be set apart out of the Colonial Funds – the Committee gladly availed themselves of this opening, and two individuals are under preparation for this scene of labour.

NEW ZEALAND.

The Rev. Alfred N. Brown, with Mrs. Brown, left New South Wales on the 10th of November, and arrived in New Zealand on the 29th. It is intended that Mr. Brown should take charge of the education of the European Children connected with the Mission; and, with that view, it has, after much deliberation, been decided by the Missionaries that his residence, for the present, should be at Pyhea. Serious apprehensions are entertained for the safety of Mr. and Mrs. Charles Davis and Mrs. Hart: they left Port Jackson, in the "Haweis," on the 18th of October, since which time no tidings have been received. In reference to this, the Rev. Henry Williams writes on the 23d of March: –

It is now nearly five months since the "Haweis" sailed, and has not yet been heard of: many are our conjectures. She might have been dismasted or upset, or, what is still worse, have been taken by the prisoners who may have secreted themselves in her. We received Letters two days since from Port Jackson: nothing had been heard. Our only hope appears in news from Tahiti.

The Rev. S. Marsden arrived in New Zealand on the 8th of March: the Rev. W. Yate, who had gone to the Colony for the purpose of carrying through the Press some of the Translations which had been completed, and on other matters connected with the Mission, supplied his place during his absence. From the various communications before us we collect the following accounts of the state and prospects of the Mission: –

RANGHEEHOO.

During the last three months I have, with Mr. Shepherd, attended to the School. On account of the indisposition of our Natives with the Hooping Cough, and of our own Families, the School has not been so regularly attended as usual.

The Sundays have been spent in Divine Service, and in visiting the Natives in their own dwellings; and they have, in general, behaved orderly, and paid attention to what has been said. We have met together occasionally, to improve in the Language. The numbers in our Schools are, 16 Men and Boys, and 12 Girls.

Makohia, a Chiefs Son, who was the fowardest Youth in the School, and had lived with us about five years, died in October last: he was a truly promising young man, and was evidently seeking salvation through Jesus Christ. Previously to his illness, he joined in prayer and singing; and listened, with apparent satisfaction, to the Truths of God, to the end of his life. – – - [T. King, Jan. 6, 1829.

Through the kind Providence of God, we enjoy tolerably good health, and have, till the last month, been enabled to go on in our work with some satisfaction. the number of our School is, however, greatly diminished; owing, perhaps, partly to the unsettled state of the various Tribes in the Bay of Islands, and partly to the Ships which have lain opposite our Settlement for a week or two past. We buried a Young Man last week who had been with me ever since I came to Rangheehoo: the last words which I heard him utter were in prayer to God that he might be

prepared to dwell happy with Jesus Christ in heaven. – – - [J. Shepherd, March. 1829.

The Natives have regularly attended the Means of Grace: those at Matauri and the neighbouring Villages have not been visited as often as in the last Quarter, on account of our other engagements. We have had in the Settlement 29 Men and Boys, and 12 Girls. – – - [J. King, July 1829.

KIDDEEKIDDEE.

During the last Quarter I was employed as usual, excepting that I sometimes visited the Natives down the river. The Translation of St. Paul's Epistles to the Corinthians has continued to engage our attention, in the hours usually devoted to the study of the Native Language. The number of Natives living in our Families and attending School are, Boys 38, Girls 24. – – - [Rev. W. Yate, Jan. 1829.

My time, for the last three months, has been chiefly occupied in attending to the general instruction of the Natives, to the Language Meetings, and the instruction of the European Children belonging to the Settlement: I have also visited the Natives on the banks of the Kiddeekiddee River on Sundays, and at Waimate and other places occasionally, – – - [J. Kemp, Jan. 1829.

My occupations during the Quarter have been little different from those of the preceding: the Native and European Schools have occupied a part of every day; visiting the Natives, and the study of the Language, have, as opportunity offered, been attended to; the remaining part has been devoted to the Natives in the secular employ of the Settlement. The Girls' School has been attended by Mrs. Kemp, Mrs. Clarke, Mrs. Hamlin, and Mrs. Baker. – – - [G. Clarke, Jan. 1829.

A horse having been purchased for my use, I have been able, in the last Quarter, to spend 18 days amongst the Natives, and have generally found them attentive at the moment of speaking to them. There have been in the Schools, 36 Boys, and 24 Girls. – – - [Rev. W. Yate, April 1829.

I have, with the Brethren, attended to the instruction of the Native and European Children in the Settlement, and in visiting the Natives at Waimate and Ahuahu, to instruct them in the Truths of the Gospel. At present, I do not observe any of the Natives at all anxious or desirous of being instructed in those truths which we endeavour to disseminate amongst them. – – - [J. Kemp, April 1829.

My time during the Quarter has been occupied in the European and Native Schools, with the Brethren in the Translation of the Scriptures, and in occasionally visiting the Natives in the interior. With the assistance of Messrs. Kemp and Hamlin and the Natives, I have erected a commodious School Room 38 feet by 18, which I hope we shall be able to use in about a month. – – - [G. Clarke, April 1829.

We have had, during the Quarter, 50 Men and Boys, and 29 Girls, under instruction: most of them seem desirous of improving. I have spent 15 days amongst the Natives: the weather prevented me from being out more. [Rev. W. Yate, July 1829.

I am happy to say that our School Room, and another small Room, 12 feet by 11, for the convenience of a fire, are so far complete as to enable us to use them. We feel thankful that we have now a convenient place where we can assemble our Natives, to instruct them in Reading, Writing, &c, and for the still more important part of our work – the instructing them in the Gospel of Christ. – – - [G. Clarke, July 1829.

The Natives that live with us are, I hope, on the whole, gaining knowledge in temporal and spiritual things. Several of our Lads have made considerable improvement in Carpentry and other useful branches of trade; but we find, that, in order to bring them on in the knowledge of those useful Arts, we must devote most of our time to them: this we find we cannot do, and visit the Natives at their residences also, which appears to us to be of the first and greatest importance. We find, that, for want of a better principle than their natural one, whatever they have learned of the Arts, we are never sure of them; for on occasions which we have lately been called to witness, when any disturbance takes place, many of them will join the Natives, and return to their former habits. We would hope that there are some few who have felt something of a principle of Grace formed in their souls, and who, we trust, will be living witnesses of the power and efficacy of that Grace in restraining and keeping under the Native Habits and Customs. – – - [J. Hamlin, March 1830.

The Schools go on pretty well: the Boys are getting on in Reading, Writing, and the First Rules of Arithmetic: the Girls are also making progress, though but slowly: they are attended to by our Females alternately; and are instructed in Reading, Writing, and Needle-Work, and some can sow very neatly. The greatest difficulty is in keeping them in our houses; the shipping is such a temp-

tation to draw them from us; and their parents encourage them in all that is wicked: many of the Girls from our Settlements are taken by their parents on ship-board, so great is their thirst for powder. This is one of the greatest trials which we have to encounter; and nothing less than the Grace of God can subdue this evil. Mrs. Kemp has now living under her care 7 Girls: two others are married and settled with us, both of whom have families. – – - [J. Kemp, March 1830.

Our Schools, under the care of Mr. Baker and myself, go on much the same as usual: our Partners attend daily to the instruction of the Native Females, and are not without encouragement in their work.

The Natives living in the Settlement under our more immediate instruction are especially the objects of our anxious solicitude. Many of them know the great and fundamental Principles of Christianity; and some, I trust, feel themselves condemned by that Law which is holy, just, and good: after addressing them, they sometimes seriously inquire how they may escape the impending danger, and how – to use their own words – they may please the Father of Heaven. Many seem to go from day to day with a burdened conscience, yet not sufficiently humbled to apply to the only Remedy. May the Lord, in His own good pleasure, soon complete what, I trust, he has begun! – – - [G. Clarke, March 1830.

Itinerating among the Natives has been especially attended to during the last two months, the weather having been so fine as to enable us to get out among them; but we feel that we labour under great disadvantages, from the unsettled state of the people, who are continually wandering from place to place: we sometimes travel forty miles to see 200 Natives, they being so much scattered up and down the country. We hope the time is not far distant when they will assemble themselves to hear the Word of God: at present we are obliged to visit from family to family to deliver our message, but are endeavouring to persuade them to meet together at convenient places for Religious Instruction, which some seem to approve. When we can accomplish this object we shall be able to do a vast deal more work with far less labour: our prospects are however, on the whole, cheering, amongst the Natives whom we visit; and that day will, I trust, soon dawn, for which we labour and pray. – – - [The Same, March 1830.

PYHEA.

My attention during the Quarter has been devoted to the Native and English Schools, Translation, and visiting the Natives at their Settlements, in conjunction with the rest of the Brethren. The Natives in the School at Pyhea have amounted to nearly the same number as last Quarter, and their behaviour and progress have been satisfactory. The number at present, in the Boys School, is 66; in the Girls' 33; total 104. The English Female School has been attended to as usual, by Mrs. H. and W. Williams. – – - [Rev. W. Williams, Jan. 1829.

During the past Quarter, the conduct of the Natives round us was good. My time was occupied in attention to the Schools European and Native, to the Language, &c. I have visited the Natives at the distant Settlements, eleven days, at various opportunities. – – - [Rev. H. Williams, April 1829.

Nothing particular has occurred among the Natives. The number of Natives in the School is, 76 Men and Boys, 37 Women and Girls; total 113. The keel of a boat was laid down a fortnight since, for the general purpose of transporting stores from the Shipping to Kiddeekiddee. – – - [The Same, July 1829.

Thus far the Lord has helped us, His most unworthy creatures, in this land of darkness and death. Our work is going on; our prospects are bright; but our trials are not few. We are on the field of battle, and we have a powerful enemy to contend with. Pray for us: pray that we may live personally in communion with God. While all is right within, all will go well without. – – - [R. Davis, Dec. 28, 1829.

Our Schools continue to go on with increasing numbers, and, I trust I may add, with increasing improvement. Many there are whose minds are stored with much Scriptural Knowledge, and who are occasionally employed to teach others: the whole of them are more or less employed each day. There are a few set apart for the Carpentring Department, some of whom have made great improvement: on the whole, I believe the New-Zealand Mission was never under more encouraging circumstances than at this time. – – - [W. Fairburn, March 1830.

General Examination of the Schools.

An Examination of the Schools took place at Kiddeekiddee in the month of December, the particulars of which cannot fail of interesting our readers. The Rev. W. Williams writes: –

The 8th of December was the day appointed for our Annual Examination, which was to be held at Kiddeekiddee. At an early hour, the whole Settlement was in motion; and a little after 7 o'clock the European Families and Natives embarked in four boats and one large canoe: Mr. Davis, and a small party of Natives, remaining in charge of the Settlement. In our passage, we fell in with Mr. King's boat, and one canoe; and then proceeding together, we arrived at Kiddeekiddee about 11 o'clock. The native mode of salutation, at such times, is with a rush on both sides, and a sham-fight; but this was exchanged for the more sober welcome of three British cheers. The numbers met together were about 290; viz. 12 European Families, amounting to 72 – Native Girls 68 – Men and Boys 150. As soon as we had dined, the Europeans met in the Chapel; when, after the Evening Prayers, I addressed the Brethren, and Mr. Yate administered the Lord's Supper.

The following morning at 9 o'clock, after Prayers, the Examination commenced; first in the two Catechisms which we have prepared, then in Writing and Accounts. The First Class was exercised in Sums, in Addition, Subtraction, Division, and Compound Addition. In the afternoon the Natives dined off temporary tables: the food, which consisted of pork, beef, potatoes, and bread, was served up in little baskets, after the native fashion. They had not been eating more than five minutes, when all, with one consent, left their seats, and scampered off with the remainder of the food; it being the native custom never to leave any thing which is set before them, but to carry off what they cannot consume at the time. The Sewing of the Native Girls was afterwards examined, when some highly satisfactory specimens were shewn: and the next day we met in the Chapel, to award a few Prizes to the most deserving. Work by the Native Carpenters was brought forward which would have done credit in a civilised country. The principal things were, a pannelled door – a pannelled gate – a sash – a table – and a stool. During the morning I spoke to the Natives from Matthew iii. 2.

On this occasion, Mr. Clarke writes –

During the Examination, I could not but contrast, in my own mind, the present appearance of these Natives with their past situation. Here, thought I, are a number of poor Cannibals collected from the different Tribes around us, whose fathers were so rude, so savage, that for ten years, with much pain and vexation and exposure, the first Missionaries lived among them often expecting to be devoured by them. A few years ago they were ignorant of every Principle of Religion: many of them, like their fathers, had glutted in human blood, and gloried in it: but, now, there is not an individual among them who is not, in some degree, acquainted with the Truths of the Christian Religion, which, with the blessing of God, may be the means of his conversion. Not six years ago they commenced on the very rudiments of learning: now, many of them can read and write their own language with propriety, and are completely masters of the First Rules of Arithmetic. But very few years ago, a chisel made out of stone, of which many specimens have been sent home, was the only tool: now, they have not only got our tools, but are learning to use them. It is true, that this is but the day of small things: still, greater and more permanent blessings await New Zealand. The Gospel is preached; the Bible is translating; Scriptural Precepts are taught with Scriptural Doctrines, and will, I hope, soon be practised; and then the whole train of blessings following the Preached Gospel must be theirs also. I do appeal to our friends in England, and ask them, whether (taking into consideration all circumstances, in the course of so few years) the Lord has not done wonders, yea, marvellous things, in this dark land.

He adds –

It may be asked, Where are the Converts to Christianity? How many have received the Truth, in the love of it? How many have been turned from darkness to light? &c. To which I would answer: Some few have left the world witnesses of the power of the Gospel, confessing that they were sinners, and resting all their hopes for eternity on Christ the Rock: others are statedly attending a Preached Gospel; and, in the Lord's good time, will, we may hope, become living epistles, known and read of all men With such prospects, and such promises, we may well lift up the hands that hang down, having ocular demonstration that our labour cannot be in vain in the Lord.

Spirit of Inquiry among the Natives at Pyhea.

You will rejoice to hear, that there has been, for some time, serious inquiry after Divine Truth among the Natives in this Settlement; though those without remain, as they were, insensible to the Gospel Call. Two men and one woman have been baptized: they are living in the Settlement. Within these few weeks several others have expressed much concern as to their eternal state; and, though they have only now made their profession, yet an entire change of conduct has been observable, for many months, in several of them. This has brought us much important and interesting work: we meet all who are disposed, every evening, for Religious Conversation and Prayer. This being contrary to the natural habits of the Natives, must put their sincerity to the test; as they early retire to rest, or spend their evenings in dancing, singing, or talking: but this appears altogether laid aside; and now they assemble, in each other's houses, for Prayer; and I trust that the Lord is with them. – – - [Rev. H. Williams, March 1830.

Baptism of Three Converts.

Feb. 7, 1830. – Sunday – This morning my Brother baptized Peter and his Wife Mary, and Taiwanga. It will not be uninteresting to hear some account of these persons, who have now been living with us some years. Peter, who joined this Settlement at the time of my arrival is a Native of a quiet disposition, and rather inclined to indolence. It is now nearly three years since he shewed a disposition to attend to the truths which it is our part to inculcate; but some circumstances occurred, which occasioned us to doubt the sincerity of his professions. His Wife is a Slave, whom he took captive at the Southward some years ago, The last trip which the "Herald" made to Tauranga, Mary embarked, with her Husband's consent, to see her friends, and was to return at a future opportunity; but, in the mean time, the "Herald" was lost, and Peter was glad to avail himself of the departure of some Natives from our Bay for the Southward, and joined the party in order to fetch home his Wife. On this occasion, he was absent about twelve months; and we were apprehensive that he would gain nothing by his absence from us. We heard, however, in the mean time, from some strangers, that he was in the habit of talking much to the Natives in that quarter about the things which he had heard from us. Shortly after their return, Mary was taken very ill, and was not expected to live. It was on this occasion that she first shewed any signs of a change for the better; for before her departure to the Southward she had been living in Mr. Davis's family, and was so exceedingly troublesome that she was turned away from the house. She now spoke in a most distinct manner of her trust in Jesus Christ for the pardon of her sins, and of the hope of soon being with Him in heaven. Since her recovery, a watchful eye has been kept over her, and both she and her Husband have walked with great consistency.

Taiwanga is a man of a very different disposition. He lived first at Kiddeekiddee with Mr. Butler; and afterwards went to Port Jackson, where he was staying with Mr. Clarke at Black Town. Hearing there that some of his friends had been killed in battle, and that Shunghee was going to fight with the enemy, he determined to join him, and accompanied Mr. Clarke to New Zealand for the purpose. He was with Shunghee in ten different fighting expeditions: on this occasion, he particularly distinguished himself by killing a principal Chief of the opposite party. On his return, he came to live with Mr. Davis at this Settlement, where he has continued ever since; not, however, without repeated temptations from his relations to join them in their fighting expeditions. A little more than two years ago he had a strong conflict with his evil passions, which threatened to withdraw him entirely from us. He has a Female Slave, a relation to his Wife, whom he was minded to take as a Second Wife. He was told that he must either break off all connection with her, or leave the Settlement. After wavering some little time, he decided on the former, and sent the Slave away inland; ever since which time a change in his mind seems gradually to have been taking place. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

Beneficial Effects on the other Natives at Pyhea.

The Lord was pleased to make this an awakening season to the souls of others: they soon began to wish for instruction, and to inquire what they should do to be saved. This necessarily led to private meetings, which I trust have been a blessing to their souls. I have met the poor creatures several evenings with delight, and, I trust, profit to my own soul.

How it would have rejoiced those who have long prayed for the conversion of the New Zealanders, to have witnessed the pleasing scene! My meetings with the Natives commenced in the following manner. On Wednesday the 25th of last month, it being my turn to address them, and having observed their attention, at the close of my discourse I told them that those who were particularly desirous for the salvation of their souls should come to my house, where I should feel a peculiar pleasure in conversing with them on the nature of those things which belong to their everlasting peace. In consequence of this invitation, about 30 Men and Boys followed me home, and I had the pleasure of spending a delightful evening with them. I requested them to be free in their conversation, and make me acquainted with the state of their minds, in order that I might be enabled to give them a suitable word of advice. After we had prayed for a blessing, one of the newly-awakened Natives stood up and spoke in a very affecting manner. He requested all present to be seriously attentive to the things which were told them by us, whom he styled Messengers of God; to leave off and forsake all sin; and to go to God continually, by prayer, for grace, to enable them so to believe that their souls might be everlastingly saved. Another said: "Yes, let us all do as you say; let us live to God, and then we shall be happy." Peter spoke next, in a very pleasing way; and said: "Yes, it is a happy thing indeed to believe in God; for I have found it so: it is the only good thing in the world." Another said: "Since I have continued to pray, and to think on God, my heart has been full of light; consequently, I am happy." Another said: "I am very much afraid of everlasting fire: at times it seems as though I were near to it." Another said: "My heart is hard; and it has been so for a long time. Some time ago my heart was not dark, but light; this was when I used the Means of Grace: but having been home for a time [he being a Native from Tauranga], and having also neglected the Means of Grace, my heart has become hard, like a stone." Some said that they had a great desire: others, that they had a little desire to believe in God. At the close of their several conversations, I endeavoured to give each person a suitable word of advice: and, from what I have heard from them since, at recent meetings, I have reason to hope that my labour has not been in vain.

These poor creatures meet together themselves, for prayer and conversation, in their respective houses alternately; and I trust their meetings are profitable. Last night I heard Peter deliver a most suitable address to our little audience; and, at the close, Taiwanga engaged in prayer in a very impressive manner. My Eldest Daughter meets our Girls and our Men's Wives every evening: their prayers are very affecting. Thus is the Lord, in mercy, blessing this benighted Country. Peter has often been out on a Missionary Excursion among the Natives: a few evenings ago, he came home highly satisfied with what he had heard from the people whom he had visited; and said, "It is well for me to give my heart entirely to God." I also heard Taiwanga, yesterday, address a fighting-party of Natives in a very bold pleasing manner. – – - [R. Davis, March 1830.

Hostilities among the Native Tribes.

In the midst of these encouragements, there is melancholy proof of the dominion which Satan continues to exercise over the mass of this unhappy people; though the events detailed in the following accounts abundantly shew how God is pleased to use His Servants for restraining their ferocious passions, and encourage the hope that these shall be ultimately overruled for the good of the Mission. On the 5th March, the Rev. W. Williams writes: –

The Natives around us have been assembling for some days at Kororarika, on the opposite shore of the Bay, about two miles distant from our Settlement, expecting an attack from the Natives of Wangaroa, Rangheehoo, and Kiddeekiddee. Hearing this morning that Ururoa, the Chief of the party that had been sent for, had arrived, we thought it would be well to go over to the contending parties, to endeavour to restrain them from mischief. Landing at Kororarika, we passed over the hill, and found the assailants feasting on the kumera, or sweet-potatoes, which they had just pulled up from the garden at which they had landed. Tohitapu, our neighbour, was in the act of holding an harangue, the purport of which was to restrain Ururoa from going to any greater length, and to content himself with having plundered the kumera-garden, as a satisfaction for the bad language used by the other party; while

Ururoa seemed to be as resolutely bent on going to Kororarika the following day.

Of their interview with the Chiefs the Rev. Henry Williams gives the following account: –

We found Tohitapu in the midst of the Council, making an harangue. As soon as we came in sight, they received us in a most gracious manner, and prepared the way for us. We took our station for the purpose of speaking to them, which they desired us to do; and commanded silence, that all might hear: we communicated as freely with them as ever we had done, and nothing was more satisfactory than the attention which they paid. They afterwards turned out their forces, that we might see their strength. Tohitapu, who is on the opposite side, greatly admired them, and, with feeling of great pride, pointing to the different tribes, exclaimed, "Those are mine! – and those are mine!" We returned after two hours, and I did not apprehend any mischief.

In this anticipation Mr. Williams was disappointed; for on the following day he writes: –

March 6, 1830 – About nine o'clock much firing at Kororarika: by our glasses we could observe persons running in all directions; and the canoes pulling off to the shipping, filled with people. Mr. Davis and I immediately went over in the boat and, after communicating with Capt. King, on board the Royal Sovereign, went on shore, to endeavour to put a stop to the firing. Landed at the scene of action; but could not see any one of any rank, as all were concealed by fences and screens, The parties were about twenty yards apart I made as much noise as I could, but to no immediate effect. Passed on to our old friend Tohitapu, who was resting on his arms, at the extremity of the beach I endeavoured to persuade him to accompany me to the opposite party, to draw them off; but he would not move. Tuaiangi, a young Chief, was deputed to accompany me. We had not proceeded far before the firing ceased. Rewa came forward, and waved to the parties to desist. As we drew near to the spot, we learnt that many were killed and wounded. I was conducted to Ururoa, who was scarcely able to speak: however, numbers surrounded me, and all attention was given to what I had to say. They acknowledge the correctness of our arguments with them, and that they were urged to this madness by Satan. In a short time the people in the boats landed from the shipping, to witness the distressing scene: many were dead, others dying, and the wounded no one knew. I here observed, with great wonder, the conduct of this people. Within a quarter-of-an-hour after the firing ceased, very many of each party were dispersed indiscriminately amongst their opponents; and we found that parents, children, and brothers had been fighting against one another.

On a review of the melancholy proceedings of the day, Mr. R. Davis writes: –

Alas! what a day of horror and distress this has been! Last night we left the contending parties, apparently desirous of making peace; but this morning, hearing the firing, and concluding that they were fighting, we launched our boat, and went over to the shipping. As the "Royal Sovereign," Captain King, was lying not more than 200 or 300 yards from the scene of action, we went to his ship. I went on board: but Mr. Williams went on shore, and landed; and endeavoured to stop the fighting, but was obliged to retreat to his boat, as a very brisk fire was kept up by both parties. This was a hazardous attempt on the part of Mr. Williams, as he was in much danger of being shot. The deck of the "Royal Sovereign" presented a woeful spectacle of horror and despair: many of the wounded men had been brought on board, and were lying on the deck in a mangled state: the surgeon was employed dressing their wounds, assisted by as many of the people as could be spared. Besides the wounded, there was a great number of women and children, who had fled on board, from the village, for protection. I stayed on board, at the urgent request of the Captain, to assist him in the management of the Natives, &c. As the village was expected to give way, and the Natives to fly to the shipping for protection, and as they were likely to be followed there by the victors, the ships were put in a posture of defence, and the worst prepared for. But I had not been long on board, before the assailants gave way, and fled in all directions. On seeing this, I went on shore, accompanied by Captains King and Dean. The sight was dreadful, as nearly 100 people were killed and wounded. Soon after we had landed, the assailants were

permitted to come and carry away their dead and wounded Chiefs, but the bodies of their dead slaves they left behind. As one of the bodies left behind was that of a Chief, but one of little note, a Chief of the village ran out, and with a hatchet cut the body open, and took out a small piece of the liver: this they told me was for the New-Zealand god. After having visited both parties, and remained with them till near midnight, we returned home.

The proceedings of the next day are thus noticed by Mr, Williams: –

March 7, 1830: Sunday – At the dawn of day I was awoke by the firing of musketry at Kororarika: before sun-rise it ceased. About seven o'clock, observed Ururoa's canoes crossing the Bay for Maturoa. Canoes from Kororarika arrived all day, with men, women, and children, bringing with them all their possessions: our Service delayed on account of the wounded: the Natives outside making a great noise, but quiet in their behaviour. At three in the afternoon observed the houses on fire at Kororarika; and all the canoes leaving the beach, and pulling in various directions. At sun-set, Ururoa, with Tohitapu, came to our beach to take up their quarters with us; and shortly after, Rewa, with his family. All was commotion, and various reports as to the intention of the Napui.

On the following day, Mr. W. Williams writes –

March 8 – A number of our Natives returned from their Pa at the Kauakaua, to observe the movements of the enemy. We told them, that we should endeavour to make peace, if possible; at which they seemed well satisfied, doubting at the same time whether the opposite party would be likely to agree to terms. In the mean time a vessel hove in sight; which proved to be from Port Jackson, having on board our old friend Mr. Marsden, with one of his Daughters.

Mr. Marsden's arrival was hailed with joy, both by the Missionaries and Natives; and his presence greatly conduced to the accomplishment of the object which they had in view – the restoration of peace. He thus describes the state of things on his arrival: –

When I arrived at the Bay of Islands, I found the Missionaries in considerable agitation: the Natives were up in arms against one another, in great numbers. On the 6th instant they had a battle on the opposite beach, in which it appears 70 were killed or wounded: their bodies were then lying on the beach. My arrival at this trying moment afforded the greatest relief to the Missionaries, as they were in hopes that I should have influence with the contending Tribes, to make peace between them. Messengers had been despatched to different parts, to their respective friends and allies; and it was expected that some thousands would be in the Bay in a few days. Some of the Chiefs immediately waited on me, and requested that I would interfere between them. Both parties were equally our friends, and I was well acquainted with the leading Chiefs on both sides. I promised that I would, with the Rev. H. Williams, visit both their camps the following morning, and hear what each had to say. Accordingly, early on the 9th, we proceeded to the camp of those who had obtained the victory: they received us with the greatest cordiality. We immediately entered on the subject of our mission; and, after a long discussion, which was maintained by the Chiefs with much ardour and warmth, it was agreed that we should proceed to the camp of their enemies, and state to them the substance of what had taken place. Their camps were about four miles apart. On our arrival, we were received with much respect by the Chiefs; and they were willing to hear any thing which we had to advance. The Rev. H. Williams opened the business; and, after many arguments, it was determined that we should proceed with one of the principal Chiefs to the Island of Maturoa, about five miles off, where a large body of their friends were encamped, and learn their sentiments; which we consented to do, and immediately set off for the island. When we arrived, we found the beach covered with war-canoes, and Natives prepared for action. We stopped some hours with this party: many of the Chiefs spoke with much force and dignity; but yielded to our wishes so far, that we were authorised to proceed to their enemy's camp and to make some friendly propositions to them. After these matters were arranged, we returned home about nine o'clock in the evening. The terms of peace are not yet finally settled. I have been negociating for peace ever since my arrival, and I hope it will shortly he ac-

complished. I am not under much concern for the Missionaries, as all parties are most friendly towards them; but they have never had such a trial before: they have lived in much peace until now. I think when this difference is settled, it will extend their influence far and wide: many of the distant Chiefs will see who and what they are, and what their object is.

Of the cause of these unhappy disturbances Mr. Marsden adds –

The origin of this present war proceeds from the most infamous conduct of the Master of a Whaler. The Chiefs contended, that as the war did not originate with them but with an European, the Europeans were answerable for all the consequences, as a nation: they wished to know what satisfaction we would give them for the loss of their friends who had been killed – it was their right to demand satisfaction, and it was just that the Europeans should give it: it was not their own quarrel. I replied, that all I could do was, to write to England, to prevent the return of the Master to New Zealand. They requested that I would not do this: they wished to get him into their possession; which they would do, should he return; and then they would take satisfaction themselves. The immoral conduct of some of the Whalers is dreadful.

The efforts of the Missionaries towards obtaining peace are thus detailed by Mr. Williams: –

March 9, 1830 – Mr. Marsden and I went up to the Pa, where the Kauakaua Natives were assembled: every attention was paid to what we had to say; and it was unanimously agreed, that Kororarika should be given up to the opposite party, as a payment for Shunghee and for the numbers who had been slain. The universal word was 'Peace.' We afterwards pulled to Kororarika; when they appeared desirous for peace, and it was agreed that Tarea and Titore should accompany us to Ururoa, who was at Maturoa. The wind being favourable, we soon arrived, and had a very pleasant conversation. All, with the exception of one or two, appeared disposed for peace.

March 10 – At day-light, the Urikapana passed through the Settlement. They stopped for a short time, to hear the news, and to see Mr. Marsden. After dinner, went over to Kororarika, to see Ururoa, who had just come from Maturoa. He said that it would be needful to wait till all had assembled, before peace was made: he appeared apprehensive that the opposite party was not sincere.

March 11 – After breakfast, Rewa, Mr. Marsden, and I, went up to the Pa. We hoisted the white flag, by Rewa's request, as a signal that we were come to treat for peace. On our arrival, all assembled; and I told them we were come to receive their instructions as to the message to Ururoa, whether peace or war: it was now high time. Before the assembling of the multitude, they replied, that it wis very good; but that Ururoa must depute some Chief to meet them in the Pa, and afterwards some one from the Pa should go to them. This being concluded, we proceeded to Kororarika, and net Ururoa and other Chiefs. They appeared of one opinion; but they waited the arrival of Mungo and Kakaha, the two sons of Shunghee, the Chief of Tako, who was killed; as the duty of seeking revenge now devolves upon them for the death of the father. I told Ururoa we were weary of going about; but he and others replied, that we must not be weary, but strong, and very courageous; that should these two men come in the course of the night, they would send a canoe over to us, and peace should be concluded in the morning.

March 13 – At breakfast, Tohitapu came, and spoke about the necessity of making peace; – that the distant Tribes would arrive, and then there would be no restraining them.

March 14: Sunday – Tohitapu and Rewa very urgent that communication should be held with Ururoa and others at Kororareka; as several canoes were observed to pull over from Maturoa. I therefore went over by myself; and took the opportunity of speaking to them upon their present state, and offers of eternal peace held out by Jesus Christ. All were inclined for peace. In the evening, Service as usual. Warenui came from the Pa, apparently under much concern by the delay in making peace.

March 16 – After breakfast, Mr. Davis and I went to Maturoa, to see Kakaha and Mungo, the sons of Shunghee. When in the middle of the Bay, we picked up old Kossin, who was in a small skiff of a canoe and would certainly have been upset, had we not gone to his assistance. The Natives at Maturoa

appeared disposed to hear all that we had to say; and, before we left, they said they should pull over in the morning, and perhaps might go up the river.

March 17, 1830 – At sun-rise, observed a great number of canoes, and that many were pulling towards the entrance of the river. Launched two boats, each having a white flag; and pulled to the canoes, which had landed.

March 18 – The Natives, who went up with us yesterday to make peace, came down this morning with some from the Pa, on their way to Kororarika, to ratify the peace. We acompanied them, in two boats, as yesterday; and every mark of native respect was shewn us. The speeches were much better than yesterday.

The happy accomplishment of their object is thus detailed by Mr. W. Williams: –

March 17 – The minds of the Natives, in reference to peace, having been ascertained, both parties equally manifesting a disposition to put an end to hostilities, it was fixed that a meeting should take place to-day, according to the native custom. At an early hour, we observed several canoes in motion from Kororarika towards the Kauakaua; and immediately we put off, in two boats, to meet them. The party amounted to about 300, which advanced till within a mile of the opposite party; when the Ambassadors of Peace, three in number, proceeded with us to the Pa. On landing, we proceeded towards the principal Chiefs; when all sat upon the ground, leaving a narrow space for the Speakers to walk backward and forward, which is always the native manner. First, one of the Ambassadors held forth, and intimated that the peace would not hold good, because a Chief of his People had not been killed, as an equivalent for Shunghee; and that he should be afraid to remain at his own place, and would go to live at Kaipara, a river to the S. W. He was followed by several others, some of whom spoke to the purpose, and some not to the purpose. And when this was over, the different Tribes mustered on a rising ground and had a war-dance. It was a larger body of fighting-men than I have seen before at one time, amounting to about 1000 men, more than half of whom had muskets. The three Ambassadors remained in the Pa for the night; which part of the ceremony, was to be repeated the next day by the people of the Pa.

March 18 – The Ambassadors returned this morning, with three others, from the Pa; and calling at our Settlement, we accompanied them to Kororarika. A similar scene occurred to that we witnessed yesterday. The final ratification of the peace, as far as I could understand it, was the following: – A Chief from Ururoa's party repeated a long song, with a small stick in his hand, which, at the conclusion, he broke, and threw down at the feet of one of the Ambassadors from the opposite party: the meaning of which was, that hostilities were broken off: the latter Chief then repeated a similar form of words, and cast down his broken stick at the feet of the former speaker. The Natives speak of this peace as made by the Europeans; and I believe they have been much influenced herein by the presence of Mr. Marsden.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

New Zealand.

A GENERAL View of the Proceedings of the Society in New Zealand, together with many interesting particulars, was given at pp. 179-186 of our Volume. We now present our Readers with some Extracts from the Journals of the Rev. William Williams and the Rev. William Yate.

Extracts from the Rev. W. Williams's Journal.

May 22, 1829 – Went to Kauakaua, with Mr. Davis, for the purpose of examining some land, which we have thought of purchasing for the benefit of the Society. It did not answer our expectation, and the people are unwilling to part with that which is of better quality. We spoke to as many Natives as the time would allow, and retired to our tent. In the evening, we were much interested by an account given by a Chief, who has lately visited Tahiti. He simply confirmed the testimony given by others before, that the Natives of that Island have undergone a very great change. I asked if they never fought now? "Fight!" said he, "they are all become Missionaries." The Natives, who listened to him, said they should like to go there, and live at Tahiti, but that their own Island would never leave off its present customs.

May 23 – Went to Waiomio, distant four miles from Kauakaua. A Niece of Christian Ranghi has lately left my house in a dying state, and is with her father at this place. The family is in a pleasing state, and have generally paid more attention to us than other Natives. The father made a striking remark to the child, when calling her to come to me. He said, "This is your parent, who is come to see you, who has taken care of you so long." She has lived in our house about a-year-and-a-half, and I hope has not been with us in vain: she has never been very communicative; and the most I have been able to obtain from her, relative to her Saviour, is, that she prays to Him in her heart.

May 27 – Set out with my Brother on an inland expedition. We proceeded on our way about two hours, when the weather became bad; and, after being wet through, we resolved to return. The rain afterwards blowing over, we retraced our steps, and reached the Aute in the evening, just in time to put up our tent before the weather assumed

an unfavourable aspect. We took no harm, and were much refreshed for our journey in the morning.

May 28, 1829 – Spoke to two parties at the Aute. The people were very civil, but for our message to them they manifest as much indifference as any Natives we know: this we attribute, in part, to the frequent intercourse which this Tribe has had with the ships. We afterwards proceeded to Taiamai, and returned to our old quarters in the evening. Some of the people of the latter place have behaved very ill to us on various occasions, and we went into their neighbourhood with the expectation of meeting with some insult: but we did not fall in with the party in question; and in that district they were restrained, as they have been on many other occasions.

May 29 – At the Aute we spoke to other Natives, who have had no connection with the ships, and were as attentive as those yesterday were careless. Passing through several villages in the course of the day, at each of which we spoke, we returned in the rain, and were completely drenched by the time we reached home.

June 1 – Prayer-Meeting at Pyhea, which was attended by three of the Brethren from Kiddeekiddee. The greater part of three days was spent in revising Chapters iii. iv. v. of St. Matthew.

June 2 – I was obliged to leave the Meeting; and go to Kiddeekiddee, to see Rewa, who had seriously injured his hand by the bursting of a gun. It was necessary to amputate three of his fingers, which I proposed to do; but the superstition of the people was so great, that every one was opposed to it: and I was also given to understand, that if I had cut his hand, a party of strange Natives, who had just arrived from the southward, would probably have been cut off by Rewa's Tribe, as a payment for his accident.

June 21: Sunday – The Wicked One is now especially on the alert, to prejudice the Natives against us, in the matter of their temporal diseases. They say, that before we came to the land, few persons died before they were old; and that we have imported sickness among them, to which all ages fall victims. This was the principal subject of conversation with two parties to-day.

June 22, 23 – Attended a Meeting for Language at Kiddeekiddee, when Chapters iii. iv. of 1 Cor. were examined, and passed. On our return, we found that a party of 70 Natives had been, during the day, to take away a large canoe, which we had bought a few days before: the canoe was stolen by the Party from whom we purchased it.

July 5: Sunday – We have occasional causes of difference with the Natives, in consequence of thefts committed in our Settlement. I met with a party to-day at Waitangi, which has been often troublesome; and some of the Slaves committed considerable depredation last week. It is not unworthy of remark, that the Chiefs expressed their disapprobation of the conduct of the Slaves, and treated me with civility.

July 14 – Went to Kauakaua with Mr. Davis: one of the principal Chiefs has been much afflicted with bad eyes, and is strongly impressed with the idea that he is bewitched: several others are sick. I was most interested by two Natives from Waikato, just arrived, with a large party, to trade frith the Bay of Islanders. I gave them an outline of our Message, of a part of which they seemed to have some idea. They said, that a woman of Waikato had been up to heaven lately, and reported it to be a very good place: there were great multitudes of people, who lived peaceably: that when they had any slight quarrel, they had rushes to fight with instead of guns, and leaves of flax instead of the stone "meris" (mayree).

July 19: Sunday – The day was wet, and I was unable to leave the Settlement. I had a cheering conversation with Pita, one of our Natives. He and his Wife have lived with Mr. Davis more than four years, and for some time past have manifested much attention to instruction. From the nature of Pita's remarks to-day, I think him a proper subject for Baptism: every question on material points he answered most properly. I particularly questioned him on the last subject from which I had spoken – that of Baptism. The Natives have a baptism for their children; but, as Pita observed, their baptism is intended to make them wicked, while ours makes them holy. Of Prayer, he said, that, after our daily Evening Service, he and his wife were in the habit of praying to Jesus Christ; and that, if at any time they neglected it, they felt very uncomfortable. I had spoken a short time previously on the words Give us this day our daily bread: the spiritual meaning of them he received,

I believe, in his heart – that Christ was the salvation of his soul, as bread is that of the body. His wife was not present; but she is in a similar frame of mind.

July 20-22, 1829 – Meeting for the Language at Pyhea, when Chapters vi. vii. viii. of St. Matthew were examined for printing.

July 26: Sunday – We received a public application from Taiwanga last night, in behalf of his children, whom he wishes to have baptized. His Letter is short, and, being much to the purpose, will not he uninteresting: –

Here am I thinking of the day when my Son shall be baptized. You are Messengers from God; therefore, I wish that he should be baptized according to your ways. I have cast off my native ideas of rectitude, and my native thoughts. Here I sit thinking, and untying the rope of the Devil; and it is shaken, that it may fall off. Jesus Christ, perhaps, is near, to see my evils, and to look into the hearts of men. It is well, perhaps, that the heart should grieve in the morning, in the evening, and at night, that every sin may be blotted out.

Aug. 6 – Went to see one of our neighbouring Chiefs, who has had his hand blown to pieces by the bursting of a gun. I had an opportunity of speaking to some Natives from the southward, who are on the eve of their return: they have heard a few important truths while here, which may not be without effect.

Aug. 8 – The Chief whose hand is injured was removed to this Settlement, for the purpose of being attended to. The Natives are exceedingly superstitious; but we oblige them to break through many of their practices, at these times.

Aug. 11 – Went up the River Kauakaua. The people were as attentive as I ever found them; but they are still, I believe, without exception, in a state of darkness.

Aug. 14 – The Chief with the wounded hand was removed from our Settlement this morning. In consequence of excessive irritation from the mangled parts – which, when I first went to see him, he would not by any means have removed – lock-jaw came on, and there is now little hope of his recovery. He could not understand at all how his back and jaw could be affected by the hand, and attributed this new affection to some neglect of the "tapu" in the erection of a little house which his relations have constructed here to shelter him. Others, again, think it is owing to my applications to his hand, after the Native Priest had exercised his priestcraft over it; and, that if it had been left entirely to me, or entirely to the Priest, it would have done well.

Aug. 16: Sunday – Spoke to a party of Natives at Waitangi. It is reported that a Slave has been shot, on account of the Chief.

Aug. 17, 18 – Attended a Language Meeting at Ranghehoo, when Chap. iv. of St. John was examined, and passed for printing.

Aug. 22 – After attending to the instruction of the European Children in the morning, engaged, during the rest of the day, in translating the Baptismal Service for Infants into the Native Language.

Aug. 23 – It having been considered that the application made by Taiwanga in behalf of his children should be attended to, I baptized his four children, together with my own little Boy, after the Second Lesson. The names given to them were, Richard Hill, Samuel Marsden, Mary Anne Davis, and James Davis. Mr. Yate, Mr. Clark, and all at this Station, were Sponsors; the nature of this office having been previously explained to Taiwanga. The Service was very affecting, and the attention of the Natives marked; and I think this public celebration of the Rite, in their own language, will not fail, under the Divine Blessing, of making some of them thoughtful on this point. Pita observed, afterwards, that he wished to be "wakatapu." that is, consecrated by this ordinance to God, as soon as possible. In the afternoon, in addressing the Natives, I explained to them, that, by Baptism, a Believer is admitted into the visible Church, and that without it none could be considered members of the same; while, unless the outward sign was accompanied by inward grace, it would be of no avail. I endeavoured also to shew the reasons why Infants are received.

Aug. 24 – Went up the River Waikari, accompanied by Mr. Yate; but found very few Natives, the body of people being absent, planting potatoes. Old Toru, the principal Chief, was lying sick. He observed, as many others have done, that he was sick because he did not attend properly to our "karakia," and asked, with apparent sincerity, what he must do.

Aug. 25, 26 – Engaged in School, and translating the Catechism. This morning, a Priest of some celebrity made a commotion among our Natives. He was ex-

hibiting the vocal powers of the native god "Witi;" which was nothing more than a whistling sound, which he made to proceed from his head by a trick of ventriloquism. We told him that, in England, people would make an oyster or even a dead man talk, but they were not called gods on that account. I then asked, "Why, if this is a god, does he not cure your sick people?" "The Native God," said the man, "is dead since you are come to the, land, and can do nothing." This is something like the Oracle of Delphi ceasing to prophesy on the first promulgation of the Gospel.

Aug. 27, 28, 1829 – We all went to work at our Fortification behind the Settlement; which we hope to finish so far this season, as to afford us a place of retreat in case of danger. It is currently reported, as on a former occasion, that the Natives of the River Thames are thinking of paying a hostile visit to the Bay in the summer.

Sept. 6: Sunday – Last night, a party of Natives were in the Settlement, one of whom has been a cause of much trouble to us. I expected to meet this party at Waitangi to-day, but found only one of the Chiefs, He is a quiet old man, and Chief of the Tribe. He spoke more rationally than most of the Natives, in reference to our instruction; and seems disposed to be friendly. Conversing with another party, whose faces I did not recollect, my Brother, who was with me, asked whether they had heard before of our God. A woman replied, that she had heard from me; and that I had told her father to pray for a new heart, which he had continued to do ever since.

Sept. 7 – The Monthly Prayer-Meeting at Pyhea, when Messrs. Yate, Kemp, Baker, and King were present. On this and the following day we examined a Translation of the Catechism for the use of the Natives, and the 9th Chapter of Matthew.

Sept. 14 – Went to Rangheehoo, to see Mrs. Shepherd, who has been ill for the past week from an attack of influenza.

Sept. 15, 16 – The weather being unfavourable for our expedition, we remained at home, and examined the 5th and 6th Chapters of the First of Corinthians.

Sept. 17 – Returned to Pyhea, by way of Rangheehoo; where we found Mrs. Shepherd much worse, and in very considerable danger.

Sept. 19 – Went to Rangheehoo with Mrs. Williams, and remained there until the 21st. Mrs. Shepherd is still in a very precarious state, and frequently delirious: when her mind is collected, she appears to be in a pleasing frame.

On Sunday, the 20th, I went, with Mr. Shepherd, to visit some of the neighbouring Natives, who were, for the most part, busily employed about their nets. Waikato, who went to England with Shunghee, is as superstitious as any of the Natives, and would not, on any account, neglect one of his tapus. With a new net there is very much ceremony; and the whole of the sea in the immediate neighbourhood of Rangheehoo is now sacred in consequence, and no canoe allowed to pass under any pretence. Waikato would fain have prevented my boat from returning on the morrow; and I was only allowed to pass on the promise of steering as far from the net as possible. Mr. Yate's boat, from Kiddeekidee, was the same day obliged to return, without reaching Rangheehoo; and the day following, on going there to see Mrs. Shepherd in spite of their tapu, he and Mr. Kemp and the crew were treated with great violence. Waikato justifies himself, by saying that we have our sacred days, and are angry if they are violated; and that they have a right to do the same.

Sept. 24 – In the evening, we had a merciful deliverance from fire. Taiwanga's house, which is very near to Mr. Davis's, caught fire, together with other Native Dwellings built of rushes, and presented a most awful spectacle. The wind was high, and blowing direct on Mr. Davis's house, which is built of the same material. Particles of fire were alighting on the house in showers; and one spark, if left, would have kindled the whole. Great exertions were used, by Natives and Europeans who were stationed all over the roof, to beat out the fire as fast as it came down: but that the house was preserved from danger I can only attribute to the merciful interference of our Heavenly Father. It was also a providential circumstance that no strange Natives came near us. There was a troublesome party not far off, who would have taken great advantage if on the spot; but they were ignorant of the event till the next day.

Sept. 29 – Mrs. Fairburn was brought to the border of the grave, and was as speedily restored. In consequence of exertion at the fire on the 24th, she was so alarmingly ill, that I thought, for a time, she was actually dying, and felt it necessary to apprise every one in the

Settlement of what was to he expected. Her mind, in the mean time, was in a gratifying state; and it was cheering, to those who beheld her, to have the evidence which she was then enabled to manifest. It was as it were in a moment that she was brought back from the brink of eternity. Thus, in the short space of a week, mercy on mercy has been heaped upon us, and our cup has overflowed with blessings.

Oct. 11, 1829: Sunday – At the conclusion of our Afternoon Service, we were much disturbed by the violent conduct of Tohitapu, a Chief who has been many times mentioned from his causing trouble in the Settlement. He has for some time manifested himself friendly towards us; but, occasionally, he exhibits his native disposition, and shews how little any outward good conduct avails until there is a change of heart. His anger was caused this afternoon by the escape of a Girl out of my house, whom he was minded to take as a wife: when he found that his prey was gone, he came before our Chapel and vociferated his intentions of burning our houses and driving us all away. In a little time his rage was spent, and he left the Settlement quietly.

Oct. 21 – Accompanied my Brother up the River Waikari. The principal Chiefs were occupied with a new fishing-net, which was just completed. Though the whole neighbourhood was sacred, we were permitted to approach them, and had a very pleasant conversation.

Oct. 22 – Mr. Hamlin came from Kiddeekiddee in a boat, to fetch me to see Mrs. Kemp, who was taken dangerously ill. He had occasion to pass within half-a-mile of Waitanga, where the Natives are preparing a large mackarel-net. The sea, for some distance around, is sacred; and a very troublesome Native being the person principally concerned in the net, he determined to give us some trouble, and brought his party, about 50 in number, at full speed towards our Settlement. Mr. Hamlin's crew, in the mean time, seeing what was passing on shore, pulled as if for their lives, and reached our beach just in time to put themselves in array against the assailants: a rush on the boat immediately ensued, in hopes of finding some booty there, which, according to native custom, would have been lawfully forfeited. Not succeeding in this, an attack was made on the boat's crew, which occasioned many of us to interfere also: the result was, that Marupo, the Chief, was upset by one of the Kiddeekiddee Natives, and his musket and cartridge-box thrown into the sea. It was not until the affray was nearly over that I learned the occasion of Mr. Hamlin's coming. Such occurrences as these would a little disturb some of our good friends in England; but we are obliged to meet with them not unfrequently. On arriving at Kiddeekiddee, I found Mrs. Kemp dangerously ill, but somewhat relieved.

Oct. 23 – Went to Rangheehoo to see Mrs. King, who is also seriously ill. We were told that we should pass another sacred net in our way; and, accordingly, we went prepared to stand an assault, with a crew of twelve Natives. We were allowed to pass this time, without being pursued.

Oct. 24 – Returning to Pyhea on horseback, I found our friend Marupo in a very different mood, and very ready to put me across the River Waitangi in his canoe; and I learned, afterward, that he had been smartly reprimanded by a superior Chief.

Oct. 20 – Went to Kiddeekiddee to see Mrs. Kemp, who is now materially recovered.

Oct. 28 – We have been threatened for some days with a hostile party from Taiamai, to obtain satisfaction for a trifling offence committed by one of our Natives: we deemed it expedient to meet them in their own territories, in a quiet manner; making our journey at the same time, a Missionary Expedition. My Brother and I set out this morning, and slept at the Aute, where we found but few Natives; and the next morning early proceeding on our way, we met the party in quest of which we were going, and settled the difference in few words. They afterwards continued in our immediate neighbourhood for some time, and received our visits among them with attention.

Nov. 3 – Went with my Brother to Maunganui, the fishing-ground for Mackerel, near the south-east head of the Bay of Islands: nearly the whole of the Natives of this part are gone thither, and this is a most convenient season for visiting them. At twelve o'clock at night we reached a small island about four miles from the place, and pitched our tent for the night. The next morning, we found ourselves in the midst of parties from almost every Settlement with which we are connected, all brought together within

the space of about a mile: their behaviour was, for the most part, pleasing.

Nov. 14. 1829 – For the last month, we have each, according as we have had opportunity, been occupied every afternoon in building chimneys, and in plastering Mr. Davis's house, excepting those days which have been spent among the Natives. Our mornings, till dinner-time, are fully taken up with Native and English Schools, and translation of the Scriptures.

Nov. 15: Sunday – During our afternoon Service, (which, excepting the Psalms and one Lesson, is in the Native Language,) I baptized a Native Lad by the name of Robert, who has for some time manifested a very pleasing change. There are others, also, who are, I hope, proper subjects for this Ordinance: one man, Taiwanga, said afterwards, that he felt inclined to come forward to be baptized himself, but that he did not like to do so of his own accord.

Nov. 20 – The Baptized Native, Robert, is rapidly declining in health, having been now ill for nearly a twelvemonth; but his mind is in a peaceful state, and his hope is in his Saviour. He does not furnish one of those striking instances of conversion which we sometimes meet with, but there is a satisfactory evidence that his trust is on the right foundation: he suffers much from his disease, and is desirous to be removed by death.

Nov. 27 – The state of the weather has prevented us from visiting the Native Settlements during the week; our principal occupation has therefore been In the Schools and in Translation. We are preparing the Burial Service, in expectation of the death of Robert, who is drawing fast towards his end.

Nov. 29: Sunday – Mr. and Mrs. Browne arrived this evening, in the "Edinburgh Castle," after a passage of 19 days from Port Jackson. Mr. and Mrs. C. Davis, and Miss Hart, sailed a fortnight since in the "Haweis," but have not yet been heard of.

Nov. 30 – Buried the Native Boy, Robert. His death has not excited much thought among the Natives: they are content with thinking that he was a Believer and is gone to heaven, without desiring the same blessing for themselves.

Dec 16 – Went to the Native Settlement at Wangai. There is one point in the New Zealanders different from many other Heathens: they do not commonly cavil at what we say to them; but, while they yield their assent in such a way as is oftentimes gratifying to us, there is a degree of apathy withal which is so frequently witnessed in our Native Land. My conversation with the Natives to-day would strike a new comer; but I am afraid to expect much.

Dec. 21 – Two Chiefs, a man and woman, have been just murdered, under the pretext that they had bewitched several persons who have died lately. Some other woman dreamt that such was the case, and this dream was sufficient in the eyes of a Native. The bodies were taken to Kororarika, the Bay frequented by the shipping; and cooked and eaten.

Extracts from the Journal of the Rev. William Yate.

Feb. 5, 1829 – A large number of Natives passed through our Settlement: they were part of the Tribe Urikapana: they stayed more than an hour, and were trying to get into all our places. There was one Chief among them, who had formerly been a very wicked fellow; but he says his wickedness to the white men is gone, and he loves them now, and will not be troublesome any more.

Feb. 6 – Visited the Natives at Pyhea; but saw only three small parties: the others were gone inland, to their cultivations: they were very careless about my message. All their thoughts and words ran upon the number of ships now in the Bay of Islands: they were so full of these things, that I could scarce speak to them on any other subject. I did, however, at last, manage to gain their attention, by telling them of the shipwreck of Paul: they said, it was not on New Zealand that he was wrecked; for if any thing of the kind had happened here, Paul would not have been taken into their houses, unless it had been to be killed and eaten.

Feb. 9 – Matapo, a Chief of Taiamai, killed a Slave this morning: the reason which he gave for it was, that she had bewitched Tekoki, the Chief of Kauakaua, and caused his illness. After Matapo had killed her, that old wretch Taria roasted and eat her. I have noticed Taria as being the most barbarous man in the island: he has killed and eaten three persons since I have been in New Zealand.

Feb. 16 – Paue, one of our great men at Waimate, died this morning, after a lingering and painful illness. He was a Native of very pleasing manners, but never gave the least signs of conversion. His friends sent down to us for a blanket.

to wrap up the body previous to interment. There is nothing in which they are more particular than in their respect for the dead.

Feb. 17, 1829 – A great number of our Boys went inland to-day, to attend the funeral of Paue. They generally go when a great man dies; and cut themselves in a most terrific manner, which they say is to force themselves to cry, and to shew their great love for the departed person. The whole concludes with a feast. The latter is, I conceive, the grand attraction to our boys: if there was nothing given away, I question whether they would go.

Feb. 18, 19 – Went out on Wednesday Morning, amongst the Natives, with Mr. Clarke: we went to Waimate and Awaawa. As soon as we had pitched our tents, it began to rain very hard; and on Thursday Morning, at daybreak, we were obliged to give up all thoughts of further visiting, and to hasten home lest we should be unable to ford the rivers. We were obliged to wade up to our middle during a great part of the day: during the whole journey, it rained tremendously; and, when we arrived at home, which we did, by the blessing of God, in about four hours, we found a large flood in the Kiddeekiddee River. On the Wednesday, Mr. Clarke took one way, and I took another: we both met with a large number of Natives, so that our journey was not in vain. I went to the residence of Paue, who was said to be dead: I found him alive, but he died in a few hours after my arrival. No one was allowed to go near him, as the place was tapued: I, however, paid no regard to what they said, but rode up to his little shed, and made him some tea, and endeavoured to improve the opportunity. A great number of Natives were present, waiting for his death: they were all attentive. I spent nearly four hours among them; and I trust that the time was not spent in vain.

Feb. 23 – Visited the Natives at Paitai: I saw four parties. Kopiri was returned from Maunganui; and his being there served much to increase the number of my auditors. I called at the residence of the late unhappy Mautaku: it was the picture of desolation and misery.

Feb. 26 – Visited Waimate, and called at seven residences; but did not meet as great a number of Natives as I expected, because they were busy in clearing away the woods. However, I found enough at the various places to employ me for three hours. It is quite cheering to our minds to go out amongst the Natives, they generally are so ready to listen to all we have to say. I feel myself more in my work when engaged in this way, than I do at any other employment: and now I have a horse I can visit much more than before, and, at the same time, not neglect the other important part of our occupations – the translation of the Scripture into the Native Language.

Feb. 27 – Visited the Natives at Tako, a large Settlement on the coast, about 12 miles from Kiddeekiddee: I went on horseback, and took two of my Boys to shew me the road, which, in some places, is very bad and dangerous. The Chief of Tako, Wata, was gone to Wangaroa, to see Ururoa, who is ill: his wife was at home, and all her people. I had never been at this place before; nor has it been visited more than twice by Europeans. My reception was very gracious: the old lady scolded her Slaves at a furious rate, because they were so long in cooking food for myself and Boys. I spoke to five parties, and declared to them the unsearchable riches of Christ. When I had crossed the river, on my return home, a party came up from the southward. Tetore, a Chief of Waimate, was going to the place which I had left: he was carrying a small piece of stick, as a memento of the late Paue, which was fastened to the top of a spear; and he, as the bearer, was tapued, and dared not eat till he had delivered it to the person for whom it was intended. I offered him a piece of gingerbread which I had in my pocket; but when he saw it, he fled from it as from a serpent.

Feb. 28 – Taria came down to our house; but we would not speak to him, on account of his late ill behaviour.

March 6 – Seven messengers, from different Chiefs at Waimate, came for medicine for their masters: a great number of diseases at present rage amongst the Natives.

March 10 – About 100 Natives passed through Kiddeekiddee very hastily, on their way to the residence of the late Koikoi; where they are going to take away all the food, for some bad words which the old man said just before his death. We never say any thing to dissuade them from this, as it is quite right according to native custom; and an interference in their regulations, except

where life is at stake, would be productive of no good.

March 14, 1829 – Went down to Rangheehoo, and visited the Natives at Pyhea on my way. Heard of the destruction of Mr. Campbell's Brig, the "Haweis," by the Natives at the southward; and afterwards heard the whole truth: three of her crew were killed and eaten, but the vessel and the rest of the crew were saved by Captain Clarke.

March 18 – A large number of Natives from Shukeanga passed through the Settlement: Patuoni was with them, and they consequently behaved very well. I this evening addressed our Natives on the willingness of Christ to receive all that come to Him.

March 19 – Visited the Natives down the river; and met with a large number, about 250: they were full of levity, being on a stripping expedition, and would not listen to me at all.

March 20 – Went to Ware Puke, to see after some trees which were carried down the river in the last flood: I set my Boys to cut one up, and to split it into lathes for my house, which will soon be ready for plastering. Warepu and Ane, two old servants in the Settlement, were married this evening: they are likely to do exceedingly well: their marriage is not a hurried thing, but has been in contemplation for more than twelve months.

March 22: Sunday – Preached to the Europeans at Kiddeekiddee from Eph. v. 1, 2. and administered the Lord's Supper: Rewa, our principal Chief, was present at our Morning Service. In the afternoon, I attended School, and addressed the Natives. Went up the hill, and to Kororiko, and spoke to two large parties of Natives who were waiting for the tide: they were attentive.

March 23-25 – Messrs. W. Williams, Puckey, and Shepherd came to Kiddeekiddee on Monday last; and we spent three days in close application to the language.

March 26 – Visited the Natives at Waimate: I found but very few at home, as great numbers were gone to the other side of the Island, on a stripping expedition; and to give an invitation to attend a Hahaunga, or removal of bones, which will take place at Waimate in about six weeks.

March 31 – Visited the Natives at Mauperi Lake: I went by way of Waimate, and slept at the residence of the youngest Brother of the late Shunghee. I spoke to fourteen parties; some of whom were attentive, and others exceedingly careless.

April 12: Sunday – Preached to the Europeans at Kiddeekiddee, from John viii. 21: in the afternoon, attended School, and addressed the Natives: there were 80 Boys and Girls present.

April 14, 15, 1829 – Went to Waimate, Pukenui, and Mauperi: I met some very large parties, and spoke at 17 different villages. I am in sad want of a good tent: the one which I have at present is so very small, that I cannot lie down in it; and I am very much exposed to damps daring the night, which are extremely pernicious. The Natives made many excellent remarks about what I had said to them at my last visit. They certainly do not forget much; and only require to be often visited, to cause them to retain a great deal of the letter of the Gospel. During my round, I saw two old women most cruelly cutting themselves with cockle-shells: all that I could say to them had no effect: for more than three-quarters of an hour they continued their barbarous employment, and perfectly astonished me at the quantity of blood which they lost.

April 16 – Shunghee's eldest Son paid us a visit this morning, from Wangaroa: he brought two pigs as a present.

April 17 – This being Good Friday, I preached to the Europeans at Kiddeekiddee, from John xix. 30; and in the afternoon, from Acts viii. 32, 33: in the evening, I addressed the Natives from the latter text; they were all very attentive. Although this is a fast-day, we were obliged to give the Natives a feast of rice and pork: we cannot keep any of the Fasts or Festivals of our Church without the Natives being treated with something.

April 18: Sunday – In the middle of Service, Mr. Baker's house was broken into by one of his Natives; so that I was prevented administering the Sacrament till evening, as Mr. Kemp and Mr. Hamlin went after the thief. In the afternoon, attended the School, and addressed the Natives.,

April 24 – Visited the Natives at Waimate: they were most of them gone to the Hahaunga, or removal of bones. The bones were those of the late Shungee. This is the third, and I believe the last time they will be removed.

May 4-6 – Went to Rangheehoo, in company with Messrs. Clarke and Kemp,

to our Monthly Meeting: we examined the translation of the First Chapter of St. John, and prepared it for the press.

May 12, 1829 – Old Wata, a very venerable man, a Chief of Tako, came down, according to the promise which he made me on Saturday last, and sold us twenty-four baskets of Indian Corn of very excellent quality: he brought twenty-four Slaves to carry it; and they had to bring it, over a very bad road, more than fourteen miles. The payment was two best blankets.

May 13, 14 – Visited the Natives at Waimate and the Ahuahu. I spoke to fifteen parties, in number about 350. On my way, I was met by the Wife of Titore: she was going to Kiddeekiddee, to fetch me to her husband, who is very ill: he is a man of great consequence, second only to Rewa. I found him lying by the side of a small brook, with no other covering but the heavens: I bled him, and gave him some medicine, and advised his going under some shelter. He said, "No," that he was under a tapu, and therefore dared not to go. "If," said he, "I were now to go into a house, the Atua would be very angry; he would cause this stone to pass through my ribs and to enter my heart, and I should die. As it is," he continued, "there are bullets inside me; one in my arm, another in my thigh, and one in my throat." I endeavoured to reason him out of so absurd a belief; but he was so superstitious, that he turned a deaf ear to all that I said on the subject. When I had bled him, he said, "There, that is good: now there is a hole, and perhaps the bullets may be permitted by the Atua to pass out of me, and I shall live." Before I passed on my way, I boiled him some tea, which he drank: it evidently refreshed him, the depression of his spirits vanished, and he felt himself much better.

I verily believe that there is nothing which a New Zealander feels more than a little attention paid to him when sick. Any thing which we can do in that way, either to the rich or the poor, is almost certain to gain us friends. On my return to Kiddeekiddee I found the Tribe Nga-te-rahairi there: they consisted of about 300: they were on their way to a feast at Tako. They behaved very well, but were extremely noisy.

May 15 – I have this day witnessed what I never did before in New Zealand – a number of Natives come into the Settlement and being troublesome. It was not, however, intended for us: it was right according to their native customs. A Boy of Mr. Baker's had been inland, and during that time had married a Girl living at Mr. Clarke's. This Girl had been some time set apart for her father-in-law, and consequently could not marry any other without subjecting, not only herself, but also her husband to death. After they were married, they returned to Kiddeekiddee; and two days after, the whole Tribe came down, to take the bride away, and to give the bridegroom a thorough beating: they dared not to go further lengths than this, because he is a great man amongst them. In searching for the bride, the Natives were very unruly: the presence of Rewa could not keep them from jumping over our fences, and running all over our places, to find the hidden-one: they at length discovered her retreat, gave her a beating, and carried her in triumph away. It all passed off very well: but it might have been of serious consequence, as her brother pointed his gun, and was just about to shoot her, when it was snatched away by a friend. She will not now receive any further injury; but I know not whether she will be returned to her husband, or kept some little time longer for her father-in-law.

May 16 – A Native came this morning, to take away a Girl of Mr. Kemp's, who but a short time before had been redeemed: he tried very hard, but was unable to gain his point. Unahanga, a Boy of mine, who went last week with an intention of going with the Wangaroa Natives to a battle, returned, and said he would rather sit with me in peace.

May 30 – A Chief from Waimate, named Moka, came down to sell some pigs: he brought me payment for a hatchet, which his wife stole from me some months ago.

June 1-3 – At Pyhea, at our Monthly Meeting. We examined Chapters iv. and v. of Matthew. During my absence, a very large party from the southward came to pay a visit to Rewa. In paying them the usual compliments, his gun burst, and his hand was very much wounded. On this account, all his food and blankets and other possessions will be taken away from him by his friends, as a mark of disrespect.

June 11, 12 – Visited the Natives at Waimate. There were a vast multitude of Natives assembled together, from all parts of the Island, to a feast given by the people of Waimate, at the remo-

val of the bones of Paru. I had an excellent opportunity of speaking to them; and, on the whole, they were attentive.

June 21, 1829: Sunday – Baptized the Infant Children of Messrs. Baker and Hamlin, and also the Daughter of Tana and Ranghi, a married couple who have long been living with Mr. Kemp: in the evening, I addressed the Natives on the subject of Baptism.

June 28: Sunday – Opened the new School-Room, as a temporary Chapel. I preached in the morning, read a Sermon in the afternoon, and addressed the Natives in the evening. Our Morning Service is conducted in the Native Language, except the Sermon; our Afternoon Service all in the English Language; and our Evening Service entirely in Native.

June 30 – A large party from Wangaruru came up to Kiddeekiddee this morning: they very soon left for Shukeanga. I went to meet them at Kororiko, their landing-place, but could not get in a word. They had a sham-fight with our Boys, and concluded with their hideous dance.

July 31 – A large party of the Nga-te-mau took their departure this morning: they were loaded with guns and powder, their gods, and presents from the Nga-puhi. I visited them at Kororiko. They were too much engaged to listen to my message.

Aug. 2: Sunday – A number of Sailors came on shore, from a vessel lying at Rangheehoo: their behaviour was worse, far worse, than any thing I ever witnessed before. Certainly the English Sailors are a dreadful curse to this land.

Sept. 22 – Went with Mr. Kemp and Mrs. Hamlin to the Settlement at Rangheehoo: we were stopped in our way down the river, because it was tapued; but when we reasoned with the Natives, they let us pass. When we arrived at Rangheehoo, we were very ill-treated by the Natives there: they took our sails, beat our Boys, and did every thing but offer us personal violence. No conduct could well be worse. We found Mrs. Shepherd dangerously ill. Returned by night to Kiddeekiddee.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

Australasia Mission – The Society's Schooner, the "Active," arrived at Port Jackson on June 20th; and, after taking in some flour and other supplies for the New-Zealand Mission, sailed, on the 19th of July, with the Rev. W. Yate, and Mr. and Mrs. Chapman. Mr. Yate, while at Sydney, had carried through the Press some Portions of Scripture, and some Hymns, which had been translated into the New-Zealand Language. He also took with him a Printing Press, and a Lad named Smith to assist him in the use of it.

The Corresponding Committee, after noticing the return of the Rev. S. Marsden from his visit to New Zealand, make the following remarks: –

The information which we have received from our friend Mr. Marsden, of the progress of the work of faith among the New Zealanders, is cheering. We know it may be said, "What are the few which believe, to the many in New Zealand." But we rejoice that improvement is manifest – that a very few are inquiring after the way of holiness. The work having begun, the Master of the work will carry it on, for His own Glory, and His people's good.

Church Missionary Record

[New Zealand sections only]

1831

[This book was digitised in partnership with Auckland War Memorial Museum]
http://www.aucklandmuseum.com

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

New Zealand.

VARIOUS particulars relative to this Mission are given in our last Volume, pp. 181-190, and 230-239.

It has been already stated, that the Rev. Samuel Marsden had paid another visit – his sixth – to New Zealand. It extended from the 8th of March, 1830, when he landed at Paihia, to May the 27th, when he embarked on board the "Prince of Denmark," schooner, on his return to New South Wales.

On Mr. Marsden's arrival, he found the Tribes in the neighbourhood of the Bay of Islands engaged in hostilities; which, through the blessing of God, he, in conjunction with the Missionaries, was the means of appeasing. The result of this friendly interposition has been, considerably to extend the influence of the Missionaries over the Chiefs in the vicinity of the Missionary Settlements.

During Mr. Marsden's sojourn in New Zealand, he had repeated conferences with the Missionaries on the circumstances of the Mission; which led to the adoption of various measures, with a view to adapt the future operations of the Missionaries to its present advanced state, and to the prospects opening before them.

The Despatches before us come down to the 27th of September; and their contents present an encouraging view of the progress of the Mission, though the situation of the Missionaries continues to be one of much peril and difficulty, and which subjects their faith and patience to severe trials. They earnestly solicit a constant interest in the prayers of their friends in this Country.

We now proceed to detail the most material parts of the information comprised in the communications lately received from the Mission.

Pacification of the Native Tribes.

Various particulars relative to the successful exertions of Mr. Marsden and the Missionaries to terminate hostilities among the Native Tribes are given in our last Volume, pp. 186-190: the following notices relative to that event, extracted from Mr. Marsden's Journal, lately received, will, however, be read with interest.

March 8, 1830 – Soon after I had landed, some of the Chiefs came and informed me what had taken place, and what was likely to happen; requesting that I, with the Rev, H. Williams, would, early the next morning, visit the Camps of Rewirewi and Ururoa, the two contending

Chiefs, and see if any thing could be done to bring about a reconciliation before their different friends arrived; stating, that no time was to be lost, to accomplish this purpose.

March 10, 1830 – This morning, as soon as the day dawned, a Chief, named Temorenga, knocked at my bed-room window, and said that he wished to see me directly: he had just arrived from Taiamai, with his Tribe. I immediately arose; and Mr. W. Williams went with me, to speak to him. He had brought his Tribe to join the people at Kauakaua, to support Rewirewi. Temorenga had lived with me, at Parramatta, some years before: he was very glad to see me; and observed, that the New Zealanders would not attend to the good advice which he and I had formerly given them, when I was with them. He had been my constant companion, when I went to the River Thames, the Bay of Plenty, and the west side of New Zealand: he was always much attached to me; and is a man of great consequence amongst his countrymen. I urged him to use his influence, with the contending parties, for peace; and he promised he would.

After we had urged all the arguments we could, to bring about a reconciliation, we walked over the ground where the battle had been fought, and where the remains of some of the bodies of the slain were lying unconsumed on the fires. The air was extremely offensive, and the sight most disgusting: we could not but bitterly lament these dreadful effects of sin, and the baneful influence which the Prince of Darkness has over the minds of these poor Heathens: we then took our departure, with the hope that peace would be made.

March 13 – In the last interview we had with Ururoa's party, we pressed upon them to bring the negotiations for peace to an end; saying, that we were tired with visiting both parties without their coming to any final determination. They replied, that we must not be tired, but must act with firmness, and continue to go backwards and forwards until the difference should be settled; for they could not make peace themselves.

March 15 – This day has been very stormy and wet. We could not visit the fighting Natives at their Camps, and therefore spent the day, in a great measure, in conversation on the evils of war, with such Chiefs as were at our Station; using what arguments we could to induce them to lay aside their destructive habits: telling them, that to kill one another was the greatest cruelty, as well as folly; that they ought to save every New Zealander's life they could, for the protection of themselves and their Country; that the time might come when a Foreign Enemy would visit them; and that, when they wanted protection, they would have no man to protect them. They heard us with attention, admitting the justice of our observations; and I have no doubt but that they will reflect upon them, as they appeared forcibly struck. The Chiefs at Paihia wished us to keep up a constant communication with both parties, in order to make peace, though the weather was so wet and stormy.

March 17 – Early this morning, Tohitapu, a Chief, called at my window, and said the army was moving from the Island of Moturoa, and he wished me to get up. I arose immediately, and was informed that thirty-six canoes had been counted passing between the Main and the Island. I saw a long string of war-canoes proceeding, in a line, across the Bay. We launched our boats, and went to meet them; and were rejoiced to find that they were directing their course to the point agreed on the preceding evening. When we came up with them, we found that they had left their women and children upon the island; and that they were all fighting-men, well armed, and ready for action at a moment's notice. I counted more than forty men in one war-canoe. They stopped when we came up with them, and we held a consultation relative to our future operations. We were anxious that the two main bodies should not come within gun-shot of each other, for fear of consequences. It was agreed that three Chiefs should accompany us, as Commissioners, to Rewirewi's Camp; and that their party should take their station on the east side of the harbour, upon a high hill, opposite to Rewirewi's camp – in sight of it, but at such a distance that they could do no injury.

When these matters were settled, the three Commissioners accompanied us in a small canoe, which they paddled themselves. The fighting-men ran up to the top of the hill, naked, like so many furies; firing their muskets every moment, until they got to the station fixed on. Here they remained, constantly discharging their muskets, in the sight of the enemy. When we approached near the shore, the

Commissioners brought their canoes between our two boats, and in that position we approached the beach: they told us, that if they were killed, we must be given up as a sacrifice for their lives; but we were under little apprehension of danger, from our repeated communications with both parties: and as both parties placed the utmost confidence in us, we were fully persuaded that the Commissioners would be cordially received. As soon as the canoe touched the shore, they immediately jumped out, without speaking a word to any person, and ran with the utmost speed to the place where the Chiefs were assembled: we followed as fast as we could. It was not easy to make our way through the crowds of Natives that pressed upon us on every side: at length we joined the assembly. One of the Commissioners, known by the name of Captain Campbell, and who is a very great Priest among them, having sat for a short time in silence, stood up and addressed the Chiefs. After saying a few words relative to his own party, informing them that the sun was beginning to shine on them and that their prospects were brightening, he sang a song, or a kind of incantation or prayer, the meaning of which none of us could understand: he then proceeded with his Address, and was listened to with much attention and respect. Several of the Chiefs spoke in rotation. They generally held a small stick in their hand while they were speaking, walking at the same time backwards and forwards before the audience; and at length broke the stick in two, signifying that their anger was broken. Several Chiefs replied to what was said by the Commissioners; until the conditions of peace were closed, as far as they could be at that time.

The Commissioners appointed by Rewirewi and his allies were to call at the Missionary Station the next morning; for us to accompany them, as we had the other Commissioners, and to witness the final ratification of peace. As soon as these points were settled, the assembly broke up; and the Chiefs repaired to their respective Tribes, which formed separate parties under their own Chiefs, each Chief taking the command of his own men. They were naked, having only their belt and cartridge-box. They all loaded their muskets, each Tribe firing, by itself, several rounds, and dancing their war-dance. At length they all formed one dense body, repeatedly fired their muskets, and went through their various exercises, which they closed with a general war-dance. Their dance and yell made the air sound like the roaring of the sea in a storm, when the waves dash against the rocks. The party on the opposite hill began to fire their muskets, and dance, in a similar way. We now took our departure from these wild and savage scenes with much satisfaction, as we had obtained the object we had been labouring for.

March 18, 1830 – As soon as matters were settled, the different Tribes began to depart to their respective districts. Canoes left the Cove in all directions; and we returned to Paihia with much satisfaction.

March 19 – Early this morning a number of muskets were fired at Paihia, from two war-parties who were returning home. I have no doubt but that the present disturbances will tend to extend the influence of the Missionaries among the Natives, and be overruled for good. Numbers were brought together from distant parts of the Country, whom the Missionaries had never seen; and we had an opportunity of speaking to them from day to day, at all our Public Meetings; which Addresses will leave an impression on their minds. I also met with many Chiefs whom I had formerly visited; and whom I should not have seen, unless they had been called together on the present occasion.

Mr. Marsden thus contrasts the state of the Missionary Settlement with that of the Natives, during this season of turbulence and alarm.

March 14: Sunday – The Rev. H. Williams went and spent the forenoon with the Natives, with a view of allaying their angry feelings, and strengthening the impressions we had already made on their minds for peace. The Rev. W. Williams, the Rev. A. N. Brown, and myself, proceeded to the Chapel, to perform Divine Service. The contrast between the east and west side of the Bay was very striking, though only two miles distant: the east shore was crowded with different Tribes of fighting-men, in a wild, savage state, many of them nearly naked, and, when exercising, entirely so: nothing was to be heard but the firing of muskets, and the din and confusion of a savage military camp; some mourning the death of their friends, others suffering from their wounds; and not one but

whose mind was involved in Heathen Darkness, without one ray of Divine Knowledge. On the west side, there was the pleasing sound of the "Church-going bell;" the Natives assembling together for Divine Worship, clean, orderly, and decently dressed, most of them in European Clothing: they were carrying in their hands, the Litany, and the greater part of the Church Service, with their Hymns, written in their own language. The Church Service, as far as it has been translated, they can both write and read with the greatest ease. Their whole conduct, and the general appearance of the Settlement, reminded me of a well-regulated English Country Parish. In the Chapel, the Natives behaved with the greatest propriety, and joined in the Church Service. Here might be viewed, at one glance, the blessings of the Christian Religion, and the miseries of Heathenism, with respect to the present life: but when we direct our thoughts into the Eternal World, how infinite is the difference! The Rev. W. Williams read the Litany, and nearly the whole of the Church Service, excepting the Lessons and Psalms, in the New-Zealand Language, in which the Natives joined apparently with much pious feeling: many of them have a sincere desire to acquaint themselves with the True God, and to learn His ways.

I consider this Sabbath to be one of the most pleasing and interesting I have ever spent. The Day-Star from on high hath evidently begun to shine upon these poor benighted Heathens: some have begun to inquire what they must do to be saved. Though the Missionaries are situated in the very centre of Satan's Dominions, where he practises all his hellish arts, and where the degradation of human-nature appears in all its horrors, through men's depravity, called forth into exercise by the influence of the Prince of Darkness; yet they shall see the day when Satan will fall like lightning from heaven. God has promised, that His glory shall be revealed, and all flesh shall see it together; and the Scriptures cannot be broken: the time will come, when Human Sacrifices and Cannibalism shall be annihilated in New Zealand, by the pure, mild, and Heavenly Influence of the Gospel of our Blessed Lord and Saviour. The work is great; but Divine Goodness will find both the means and the instruments to accomplish His own gracious purposes to fallen man: His Word, which is the sword of the Spirit, is able to subdue these savage people to the obedience of the Faith. It is the duty of Christians to use the means, to sow the seed, and patiently to wait for the heavenly dews to cause it to spring up; and, afterwards, to look up to God in Faith and Prayer, to send the early and the latter rain.

After the Rev. W. Williams had read the Service, I preached to the Europeans from the two last verses of Romans viii.; when I endeavoured to shew what the Apostle meant by the love of God in this passage; what was the great power of the Apostle's persuasion; and that, whatever dangers the Christian may be called to encounter, whatever trials to sustain, whatever privations to suffer, or whatever enemies may conspire against him, there is nothing, in earth or in heaven, that shall ever be able to separate him from the love of God. I stated, also, the perilous situations of many of the Saints, both of the Old and New Testament; out of which it appeared, to human reason, impossible for them to be saved; yet God gave them a glorious deliverance: and, as the Missionaries had the same God to protect them from evil, they might safely rely on Him.

Notices of Mr. Marsden's Conversations with the Natives.

March 23, 1830 – We arrived at Waimate in the evening. In this Settlement there are a number of different Establishments belonging to different Chiefs, all either relatives or friendly allies. We had no sooner pitched our Tent, than we were surrounded by the Natives. Rewa, and some of the principal Chiefs, spent the evening with us. Our conversation turned upon the miseries of New Zealand, arising from their constant wars with each other: we told them, if they wished to enjoy their Native Land, they must not kill one another: if they continued to do so, they would have no man to protect their Country from any Foreign Enemy, should any, at a future period, wish to take it from them: they seemed sensible of this, and blamed Captain Brind for all the public evils that had lately happened. In addition to Politics, we introduced the subject of Religion. One Chief, whom the Rev. W. Williams had formerly visited, was there: he had told Mr. Williams that he had prayed to God every day, in consequence of what the Missionaries had said to him; but, he said, God was a great way off: he did

not know whether He heard him or not, as he had received no answer. I was much struck with this observation: it evidently appeared that his mind was impressed with a desire to know the Only True God. He reminded me of the Roman Centurion, Cornelius, who prayed to God alway, until, through the medium of an Angel, he received instruction from Heaven to send for Peter, who would tell him words by which he would be saved. Mr. Kemp, one of the Missionaries who occasionally visits Waimate, told me that the Natives asked him why the Missionaries did not come to live with them. "You tell us," said they, "about your Religion, when you come; but we forget what you told us before you come again, you are so long absent: you should live with us, and tell them to us to-day, and to-morrow, and the next day after; and then we should not forget them." Such are the observations which they make; and it is to be wished that their desires should be complied with.

March 28, 1830: Sunday – About seven o'clock, I retired to Mr. Kemp's, where I lodged. He informed me there were several Young Men and Women who wished to come into the room, to have some conversation on Religious Subjects. I replied, that I had no objection; when twelve Young Persons came in: their anxious countenances expressed the inward workings of their minds: their object was, to learn what they were to do to be saved. I endeavoured to represent to them the love of Jesus in coming from Heaven to die for a ruined world; and mentioned many instances of the love and mercy which He manifested to poor sinners, when on earth; such as – His compassion to the two blind men who sat by the way-side, begging – to the Woman of Samaria, who met Jesus at Jacob's well – to the Woman who was a sinner, who fell down before Jesus, and washed His feet with her tears, and wiped them with the hairs of her head – to the Woman who was taken in adultery, and brought into the Temple to Jesus – and to others: all of whom He had graciously received into His favour and love, and shewed Himself ready to pardon and to save them. I told them that they were exactly in the same state as those whom I had mentioned. They heard, with tears and deep attention, all I had to say. What I could not clearly express, Mr. Kemp interpreted. When I had spoken to them for about an hour, we all kneeled down to Prayer; when, to my utter surprise, a Young Native Woman began to pray. I never heard any address offered up to Heaven with so much solemn awe, with so much pious feeling, with so much sweetness and freedom of expression, with such humility and heavenly-mindedness. I could not doubt but that this Young Woman prayed with the spirit, and with the understanding also. She prayed, fervently, that God would pardon her sins, and preserve her from evil; and for the Natives in the room, that they all might be preserved from falling into temptations by which they were surrounded. Her very soul seemed to be swallowed up by the sense she had of the evil and danger of sin, and the love of Jesus, who came to save sinners. Her voice was low, soft, and harmonious: her sentences were short, and fully expressed in the true spirit of Prayer. I never expected to see, in my day, any of the Natives of this barbarous Nation offering up their supplications for pardon and grace to the Only True God, with such godly sorrow and true contrition. The aged Widow of the late Chief, E'Ongi, and two of his Daughters, were in the room. When we arose, the old woman exclaimed, "Astonishing! Astonishing! Astonishing!" and then retired. I must confess I was not less astonished than she was, as the circumstance was equally unexpected by me as it was by her.

State of the Mission.

The following Extracts from the communications of the Rev. Samuel Marsden and the Missionaries will illustrate that improvement in the state of the Mission to which we have already referred.

May 6 – I dined with Mr. Hamlin: a Young Woman waited at table. She seemed very much concerned about her future state, asking Mrs. Hamlin, with great simplicity, if there was any more room in Heaven? She said, her mind was very dark, and her heart very hard; and wished Mrs. Hamlin to tell her what she must do. Mrs. Hamlin told her, she must pray to God. She asked, "What must I pray?" Mrs. Hamlin told her. She said, "O Mother!" which they use as a term of strong affection, "they are the very words we used last night, when I and some of the Girls were praying together; but I am afraid God will not pardon me, I am so great

a sinner." She is humble, and meek in mind. I was much interested by her simple statement. I took tea with Mrs. Hamlin. They have some Domestic Servants who are deeply impressed with the importance of Eternal Things: the Word of God has produced a wonderful effect upon their minds; and the communications of the Spirit, both in their convictions and consolations, appear to me very uncommon: yet their experience seems perfectly agreeable to that of some of the Heathens in the Apostles' time.

A Pious Youth died at Rangihoua a little before my arrival. Mr. King informed me, that a little book, containing part of the Church Service and a portion of the Scriptures, which had been translated, was his constant companion. His afflicted Mother, when he died, put the book into his hand, and expressed her conviction, from his attachment to his book, that he had gone to Heaven. The late Duatara's Son, a fine youth, died the day after my arrival. He was very anxious to see me; but before I landed, he was dead. His friends were much distressed about him. – – - [Rev. S. Marsden.

Since the affair at Kororarika, the Natives here have been very quiet, though with much watchfulness: about five weeks since, a party from Matauri went down to the Southward, to seek revenge for the death of E'Ongi, the principal Chief, who fell on that occasion: they killed a considerable number; falling on them by surprise, and in a time of peace. This circumstance may probably involve them in much trouble, if not loss of lives. However, I rejoice to say that all parties pay us every possible respect, and receive our Message. We visit them as frequently as we can; and shew them all that we are their common friends, desiring not theirs but them, and that they may turn from their lying vanities to the One Only True God, and Jesus Christ whom He has sent. As we are situated between both parties, it frequently occurs that they meet here and deliver their harangues. The Natives in the Settlements behave with great order; and there is no doubt but the work of Divine Grace has begun amongst them: several here have been baptized, and there are many others in a pleasing state. The Mission has certainly never been in so prosperous a state as at present. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

It will, I doubt not, much cheer you, to hear that our work, at length, affords some prospect of an abundant recompense for the labour which has been carried on for so many years. The number baptized during the past year has been 8 Adults and 5 Children: two of the Adults are since dead. Many are in a most promising way. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

The following passages from the Rev. William Williams's Journal confirm the opinion thus expressed.

April 25, 1830 – Went up to the Pa, with Mr. Davis, and spoke to the Natives. There are again rumours of hostilities being renewed, in consequence of some slight aggressions from the opposite party. In the mean time, while the Natives outside continue unsettled, we have very much encouragement from our own Natives: the spirit of inquiry continues among them; and those who have been admitted into the Church conduct themselves consistently; with one exception, by which we have been put to much pain.

April 30 – Conversing with our Natives in the evening, I spoke closely to those who seemed to be most attentive. One observed, that he is like a person at the bottom of a tree: he looks up to those who have already ascended, and are eating the fruit – meaning thereby, those who have made progress in Spiritual Knowledge; – but that he knows not whether he shall ever mount the tree himself.

May 23 – Went, in the afternoon, to the Pa. One of our Baptized Natives went with me, and spoke very pleasingly to some of the people. When he began, he was asked what he knew about the matter. "Know!" said he; "do you think we do not know these things from the Word of God? According to Native Ideas," continued he, "old people only have understandings; but young people are able to understand the Word of God."

June 10 – At Kororarika I met with the Chief from the Southward. He said that the inhabitants of the Southward wondered that the Napuhis, who lived with the Missionaries, and were instructed by them, should fight with one another.

June 19 – Spoke, in the evening, to our own Natives, who profess a desire for Religious Instruction. One more, I hope, will soon be added to our little band of Believers – a man, whose outward conduct has long been satisfactory; and his heart seems now to have partaken of a real change.

June 23 – Went up the river, to the

Pa of the Kauakaua Natives, with Mr. Brown. All I can say of our visit is, that the Natives were never more attentive. One of Mr. Fairburn's Natives requested permission to see his Master, who still continues confined to his bed. When he entered the room, he wept for some time; then, after making many pleasing remarks, he asked if he might pray with him; and, kneeling down, he prayed, most affectionately, that God would restore his Master to health.

July 15, 1830 – -The state of our Natives indicates a gradual change taking place among them. In conversing, this evening, with those who are more seriously inclined, I had reason to bless God for the progress of His work. When our little party was dispersing, I detained one man, and mentioned to him the subject of Baptism. He and some others also have, I believe, turned to the Lord Jesus Christ in sincerity.

July 18 – Visited Natives at Kororarika. A party in connexion with this place, and who were concerned in the late contest, are about to proceed to the Southward, to fight with any party they meet; though they are at hostility with none in that quarter. It is said, they are going to obtain satisfaction for one of their Chiefs who fell in the action at Kororarika: they cannot conveniently obtain it from the people who killed him; so they purpose spending their vengeance on innocent people who are more defenceless. While, therefore, we have much encouragement around us, you will perceive that some of their most barbarous practices prevail as much as ever.

July 30 – Spoke to some of our Natives in the evening. Taiwanga, a Baptized Native, observed, that God is now chastising him for his sins. "I am an obstinate Child," said he, "and God is now whipping me." His natural disposition is exceedingly turbulent; and it has, I doubt not, caused him much sorrow: Two of his Children have lately been sick; and this he considered to be on account of his hardness of heart.

Aug. 8: Sunday – Spoke to Natives at Otuihu. In the evening, visited a sick Native, named Rape, living with my Brother. For some months past he had been exceedingly careless and indifferent to any thing good: now, however, he has shewn a disposition to inquire; and this change may be attributed, under God's Blessing, to the instrumentality of those Natives about him who have received the Truth. He is now exceedingly ill. He told me, that he thought much of Jesus Christ, and that He would take him to Heaven when he dies. "I pray to Him to come and sleep with me, and take care of me, lest the Devil should come to tempt me. My body," he observed, "has not been baptized; but Jesus Christ will baptize my soul, by His Holy Spirit." I told him, that if he is sincere in believing in Christ, we will baptize his body now; for that Christ has told us to baptize those who believe.

Aug. 15 – The Native Boy, Rape, was baptized this day, by the name of John: he has given every evidence of which, in his situation, he is capable, that his professions are sincere. The language of his lips is every thing that can be wished: he seems to enjoy conversation on Religious Subjects alone; and by the profession he makes, he can expect no temporal advantage whatever.

Aug. 20 – Last night Rape died. A few hours before his departure, I went to see him; and after saying a few words upon the blessed prospect he had before him, I engaged in Prayer. Seeing that I was about to leave him, he pressed me to stay longer and talk with him, I have already said that his mind had not long been seriously impressed, though sufficiently long to give every satisfaction to us. His health has been in a declining state for some months; and some of his companions, who had felt the benefit of Religion, were concerned for him, and paid him occasional visits. Matthew Pouter told Mr. Davis that he had been with him, but that he felt no concern about what was said to him. Mr, Davis told Matthew he must not despair, but be very urgent with him, and pray with him and for him. In a few days, he told Mr. Davis, with great delight, that Rape's heart began to feel; and from that time he has made a steady advance. I committed his remains to the grave in the afternoon; and in the evening I conversed with those Natives who are desirous of instruction, at my own house. After they were dispersed, Rebecca, a Native Girl living in my Brother's Family, came back to converse with me about her own state: she is so far decided, that I trust she will shortly be received into our little band of Christians. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

On the Rev. W. Yate's return from New South Wales, at the end of July, he writes: –

I cannot but feel great pleasure in the

improvement which has taken place among our Natives, during my absence. I was very forcibly impressed with it, the day after my arrival; and I lave had no reason since that time to believe that my impressions were incorrect. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

Mr. Yate's subsequent Journal contains these notices of the state of the Natives: –

Aug. 15, 1830: Sunday – I this day preached twice to the Europeans; and once addressed the Natives, on the subject of Infant and Adult Baptism. I was led to speak on the subject from having, in the afternoon, baptized two Native Children; the Parents of one living in the service of Mr. Clarke; of the other, in that of Mr. Kemp. Some of the Parents are very anxious for the Sacrament to be administered to them. If they go on as well for the next fortnight as they have done for the last three months, I think I shall admit them. Indeed, I see no reason why they should not become partakers of that Ordinance, which has been such a blessing to numbers of Converted Heathens.

Aug. 22: Sunday – I was much pleased to-day with the conduct of the Boys in our Settlement: the change which I perceived in their outward character was very striking. In one house was a group of seventeen persons, asking each other the questions of the Catechism; and proposing other questions which occurred to them, as arising out of the written answers. In another was a group of six, practising hymns. In the road, were three, with the Scriptures in their hands, explaining them, as far is they knew, to a large party of strange Natives; who listened to the simple tale of the Gospel, and regarded it as some new matter. Jesus Christ was held forth as the Saviour of Sinners. His willingness to deliver all who go to Him for salvation, was told again and again; whilst Hell, and eternal damnation, were boldly and plainly declared to be the portion of all who neglected the offer made to them in the Gospel. These truths, thus told from day to day, and from Native to Native, cannot long be without their effects. The blessing of God must attend His own Word; and, by its instrumentality, many in this Land must be turned from darkness to light, and from the power of Satan unto God.

Sept. 5: Sunday – Preached twice to the Europeans, and administered the Sacrament. In the evening, addressed the Natives. W. Puckey, being here, spoke to them in the morning: I was very much delighted with his manner of speaking to them, it was such pure Native; and his matter was equally excellent. After this Evening's Service, some of the Natives desired to stay in the Chapel for conversation: of course, I remained with them. The subject turned upon the great desire they had to be permitted to enter the Church of Jesus Christ. A more pleasing state of mind than some of them manifested it is impossible to conceive. My whole heart was rejoiced at the confession which they made of their faith in Jesus Christ, as the only Saviour of Sinners. They spoke of their inability to believe, without some other assistance than that which they were now receiving: and then said, that they did seriously and earnestly pray for the Holy Ghost, to give them strength, and to teach them what they really ought to do, and how they ought to act, under their present circumstances. Oh that God would give us all grace, and teach us, His Servants, that we may be enabled to teach these poor inquiring sinners the way to obtain everlasting life and happiness! – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

I am happy to say, that I trust the Lord is carrying on the work which He has begun in the hearts of some of the poor Natives who are living in our Settlements. I think I may say, that many are lifting up their hearts at a Throne of Grace, and praying fervently to Almighty God for the pardon of all their sins, through the blood and righteousness of Jesus Christ. This has been gradually working in the hearts of many, over whom we have closely watched for months past; and we have reason to believe that they are seriously disposed, from their Christian-like conduct – very different from what it once was. I have, of late, had some pleasing conversations with several who live in our Settlement; who, a few months ago, were quite opposed to all that is good, but are now making a public profession of the Religion of Christ, and that not without many scoffs from their poor ignorant Countrymen: they have been enabled to stand against all; and will, I trust, be living witnesses of the power of the Gospel. I doubt not but our gracious Lord will, ere long, raise up a Church in this dark corner of the earth, against which the gates of Hell shall never prevail.

We continue to visit the Natives as fre-

quently as we can, for the purpose of holding intercourse with them on religious subjects; and, generally, they hear what we have to say with attention. I believe the Natives at large are thinking more about the things which we make known to them than ever they did; and I hope the time is not far distant, when the little leaven which is working amongst them will leaven the whole lump. – – – [Mr. J. Kemp.

My last Letter was written to you under rather peculiar circumstances, arising from the very disturbed state of the Natives about us; but I am happy to date this in more peaceable times, and with brighter prospects of usefulness among the New Zealanders. That darkness, that almost impenetrable darkness, which, for such a length of time, hung over the New-Zealand Mission, seems to be giving way; and day, yea, the glorious Gospel Day, is breaking upon the long-benighted New Zealander. Some begin to say and feel, that, though once spiritually blind, now they have light in the Lord. Others are walking in, and adorning, their Christian Profession. The Sabbath is more strictly regarded in our Settlements than in any Christian Country that I am acquainted with; and many are reading the Word of God, not only for themselves, but also for others. The Rev. S. Marsden, with one of his Daughters, having once more visited New Zealand, and having spent between two and three months with us, will be able to give you much valuable information respecting the Mission, and of our general proceedings. The good old Gentleman's heart seemed to overflow with love and gratitude to God for what He had done: he said he could hardly have expected to see so much done in his day; knowing, as he did, the difficulties which were in the way of benefitting them, in a spiritual point of view. While residing with us, he often spoke of their present appearance and conduct, compared with what they were fifteen years ago; and often exclaimed, "What hath God wrought, for His Own Name's sake, among the poor Heathens!" You will, however, perceive that our difficulties are not lessened, but rather increased, by the change of times. We have to watch and pray, that, when the good work is begun, it may be carried on: and we need especial grace, that we may be enabled to warn, to reprove, to correct, where necessary; that those who believe may be thoroughly furnished unto all good works.

May the Lord give us understanding in all things! – – - [Mr. G. Clarke.

The Natives manifest a considerable change in their behaviour. While some are seeking the way to the Heavenly Kingdom with their faces thitherward; others, though not influenced by the same principles, are yet altered in their outward deportment. It is observable, that, during the last six months, the Natives in the School have discovered a greater desire to learn to read and write. As the School at this Station has, during the last four months, devolved altogether upon me, I feel better able to speak respecting the conduct of the Natives. A year ago, it was not an easy thing to keep any sort of order in the School; and even within the last six or eight months we have had the same difficulty to contend with: now, nearly as good order is kept up as in many English Schools. During Divine Service, also, we had the same disorderly conduct to bear with; but now the very reverse is the case. On every occasion, whether on Sunday or on a week-night, the deportment of the Natives is becoming; and, of some, truly serious. Not long ago, the Natives would not endure plain speaking, without being disorderly, and sometimes rude; but now the plain truths of the Gospel are listened to with apparent interest. May the Holy Spirit accompany the Word, to the salvation of many precious souls! Being bought with the same price, may they be reconciled to God! I doubt not but the day of their redemption is at hand: let the Society be unceasing in prayer to our Heavenly Father, that it may even now dawn upon us. It is remarkable, that at the time when our prospects were very gloomy, the Lord was pleased to give us indications of good being done. How kind to us, in our low estate! – – - [Mr. C. Baker.

I find, by experience, that all the changes and distressing circumstances which have taken place amongst the Natives, from time to time, have been preparing the way for the Gospel of Jesus Christ. Many of the Natives confess, that their System of Religion is bad; that their hearts and lives are very wicked; and that their laws and customs are opposite to the welfare of their Country; but that they are at a loss to know, in their situation, how to do better. However, there are some in the Schools who are seeking the Lord in earnest; who are daily praying for His grace and mercy; and are endeavouring to instruct others.

May the God of all Grace strengthen and confirm them in the knowledge of themselves as sinners, and of Jesus Christ as their only Saviour and Redeemer; and direct their feet into the way of peace! – – - [Mr. J. King.

We feel thankful that we are still preserved in health and peace. We have cause for rejoicing that the Lord is making bare His arm, in the sight of the Heathen. I believe we can say of individuals in the different Settlements, "Behold! they pray!" I trust that we shall have living witnesses from among the poor New Zealanders, that the Gospel of Christ is the power of God to salvation to every one that believeth. The Means of Grace are, in general, pretty well attended, and we are encouraged to visit the Natives around. The average number of Natives in our Settlement is about 30: they make advances in their learning: the major part of them can read and write, and some of them can cipher. I hope that we shall soon have Native Teachers among us: indeed, some of them have actually commenced praying with their Countrymen. The Natives of Rangihoua behave well: they have lately manifested the good effects of Missionaries residing among them. On being requested, by a party with whom they are connected, to go with them to war against some Natives living near the River Thames, they replied, "No: we have heard what the Missionaries say against these things, and therefore we will not join you." They were then put in mind of their Baptism; in which they were educated to the Devil, to do his work; one part of which is, that they may be strong to kill and to destroy: they replied, "We have lately heard what Mr. Marsden says against these things, and will not join you." – – - [Mr. J. Shepherd.

My inexperience prevents my entering at all into any detail of the New-Zealand Mission; but certainly, as a stranger, I cannot but perceive that a "good work" is begun here; and, that many are inquiring the way to Zion – certainly not among those still remaining in their own Settlements, but among those in connexion with the Schools and Establishments. These, being many of them Sons of Chiefs, will return to their homes, and to their brethren, bearing, I trust, the precious seed with them; and thus become Fellow-helpers with us in Christ. – – - [Mr. T. Chapman.

A great and glorious work of Divine Grace is going on in the hearts of some few of the Natives living with us. Those who have been baptized continue to walk consistently, and to manifest the nature of the Gospel in their walk and conversation. Several are on the eve of Baptism; while some others are under concern for their immortal souls. Thus has the Lord begun to shew mercy even to the Savage New Zealanders. It would, indeed, rejoice the hearts of those who have long been praying for the conversion of these poor despised Heathens, to be present at one of their Prayer-Meetings; to hear their fervent petitions at a Throne of Grace, in their own behalf, and in the behalf of others. I often hear them pray for grace, to make them Missionaries, that so they may become useful to their Countrymen. May we not hope – nay, have we not every reason to hope – that their prayers may be heard and answered, and that many of them will become Missionaries to their Countrymen? In fact, some of them already act the part, and do the work, of Missionaries.

I shall not enter into a detail of the work of Divine Grace going forward at this Station (Paihia), as I fully expect that you will have received an account of it from the Rev. H. and W. Williams. One instance, however, I will venture to lay before you, which I consider to have been a singular and peculiar blessing attendant on the use of the means. Some few weeks ago, one of the Te-Puki Natives, who had lived with us some years, was lying very ill; and, to all appearance, his illness was likely to end in a speedy dissolution. During the whole of the period in which he lived with us, up to the time of which I write, he had always manifested a careless indifference to the Things of God, as well as inattention to what was taught in the Schools; so much so, that, when he could stay away from School, he would do so from choice. Finding that the poor careless Lad was drawing so near his end, I could not but feel for the apparently lost estate of his immortal soul. In the midst of my dilemma, the thought struck me forcibly that I would speak to the Natives, in public, about him. I did so: for, it being my turn, that evening, to address them, it was no sooner thought of than done. I spoke to them of the awful state of the poor Lad's soul; and requested them to endeavour to visit him; and so to use the Means of Grace, that, under the Divine Blessing, the poor Lad may be plucked as a brand from the burning. That same evening, nearly the whole of the Converted Na-

tives met together, and prayed with him and for him. Thus they continued to visit and pray with the sick man, for about a week; when one of them came to me, and, with similar sensations of joy to those which pervade the Heavenly Hosts at the conversion of a sinner, he said, that Rape had begun to love Jesus Christ The same Native had before lamented to me the hardness and impenitency of the sick man's heart; but now he seemed filled with joy and gratitude, on account of the apparent marks of his conversion. The poor sick Lad continued to grow rapidly in grace; so that it might have been truly said of him, that, as his outward man decayed, his inward man was renewed day by day. The last time I saw him was on the 15th of last month. He was then in a most pleasing state of mind; and, literally, rejoicing in the prospect of being delivered from this world of sin and misery, and of being with his Redeemer. He told me, that his soul had been washed by the blood of Christ; and that he had no desire to remain longer here. The next day, being Sunday, he was baptized; and, four days after, his happy soul was dismissed from its clay tenement, and, I trust, safely lodged in the everlasting embraces of the dear Redeemer. This was, indeed, a brand plucked from the burning – a glorious triumph of Divine Grace! In this way the Lord was pleased to own, and bless, the labour of love, even of the poor Converted New Zealanders: this was indeed choosing the weak things of this world to confound those that are mighty. To the great Name of the Ever-Blessed God be all the glory!

The sick Girl, mentioned in my last Letter, is still alive, and in a most pleasing state of mind; but, to all appearance, her glass is almost run out. There are very few evenings in which she is not visited by some of the Praying Natives. A few evenings ago, a scene of a very gratifying nature took place. A Lad who has lived with me from a child, and whom I redeemed about two years ago, came in to converse and pray with the sick Girl. This was very gratifying, both to us and to her; as none of us knew that he was under a Divine Impression. It is but a few days since, that I heard of two other Natives, who had also been brought under Divine Impression: thus is the work of God making a slow and silent progress here. Blessed be His Holy Name, that I have lived to see these days and to witness such triumphs of Divine Grace!

The work of Divine Grace, at present, seems restricted to those Natives only who are living with us in the different Settlements; as I do not know an instance in which Faith has shewn itself, in a saving way out of the Settlement, except in the case of Christian Rangi. This, evidently, points out the utility of taking out the Natives, in a certain way, from among their Countrymen, and bringing them under the rules and regulations of Christian Discipline. It no doubt appears very strange to many people in England, that upwards of 100 Natives should be fed and clothed at the Society's expense, in our Settlement at Paihia: but, let it be remembered, that the present state of this Country is a peculiar one; as those feuds and broils, to which the Natives are so much exposed, and to which they are naturally so much addicted, when living in their native places, have a direct tendency to distract their minds, and draw their attention from every other object. This seems to be Satan's very stronghold in this Country. Let it be remembered, also, that these Natives are our Labourers, both men and women. Some of the men are very useful as Mechanics; some are Carpenters; some are Brickmakers; some are Plasterers, &c. It is by these people we get our work done. I hope and trust that the day is not far distant, when it will not be necessary thus to collect the Natives together; because the bulk of the work at the Missionary Stations will be done, after houses are built for the Missionaries; and, by that time, I trust many of our Young Men will become so far established in grace, as to return to their respective homes, and there preach the Gospel to their benighted Countrymen – not only with their lips, but by their lives. But, at present, it appears to me as a thing of the greatest importance, that a certain portion of Natives should be selected together from among their Countrymen, in order that they may have an opportunity to wait on the Lord without distraction. – – - [Mr. R. Davis.

Since our last, we have been all peace with the Natives, and the work of the Gospel is gaining ground. The Baptized and the Candidates for Baptism, are going on as well as we could expect or wish. To God's Holy Name be all the praise, for these tokens of His favour, and these seals to our labours amongst the Heathen! [Mr. W. Yate.

I think I may say of all here, they are well, and doing well. We claim a continued interest in your prayers – that we may walk worthy of the high vocation wherewith we are called; and that a double portion of that Spirit, without whose assistance all our labours would be fruitless, may be poured upon us from on high. – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

Administration of the Ordinances of Religion.

The circumstances attendant on the Administration of Religious Ordinances afford further indications of the influence of Divine Truth on the minds of the Natives.

March 21, 1830 – I preached in the Chapel this morning, from Acts x. 43 – shewed what were the first Doctrines preached to the Heathens; namely, Remission of Sins, through faith in Jesus Christ – and pointed out the wonderful effects produced by the first Sermon; for the Holy Ghost fell upon all those who heard the Word; and they were all immediately baptized, and received the knowledge of salvation in the remission of their sins; – and, that the same Gospel, preached to the New Zealanders, would, through the Divine Blessing, produce similar effects upon them. A very strong and deep impression has been made on the minds of some of the New Zealanders by the Preaching of the Gospel, and they are now earnestly inquiring what they are to do to be saved. As a good work has begun, we may hope that God will carry it on. When these New Zealanders come fully to embrace the Christian Religion, and Missionaries are raised up amongst themselves, they will then be able to declare the wonderful words of God in their own tongue to their Countrymen; and will be more likely to gain attention. I was much gratified at one circumstance which came to my knowledge: some women had gone to Kororarika, to attend their husbands in the late disturbances: in the evening, they assembled, sang a Hymn, and prayed together in one of their huts: they were laughed at by some of the Natives; and Tetore, one of the head Chiefs, who happened to be near, reproved those who ridiculed them. Some of these women, I know, would not have performed their Sacred Devotions in the midst of such a scene of bustle and confusion, before they lay down to rest, unless their hearts had been deeply engaged with the subject of Religion. One single fruit will shew the nature of the tree. I had now been twelve days in New Zealand. – – - [Rev. S. Marsden.

May 11 – This being Easter Sunday, it was observed with much solemnity. I preached in the morning. In the time of Divine Service, a Native Man, his Wife, and Child, were christened; and also a Daughter of Mr. Davis. It was a very solemn season: the Natives were deeply affected with this Ordinance. The Man and his Wife had long been anxious to obtain salvation, and had repeatedly expressed their wishes respecting this Sacred Ordinance: their lives and conduct had been becoming their profession; and they were convinced of the necessity they were under to apply to Jesus for the pardon of their sins. All the Europeans in the Settlement were present; and a great number of Natives, both men and women. The Church and Baptism Services were in the Native Language; in which the Natives joined. The Grace of God, which bringeth salvation, is most evidently appearing in the lives and conversation of the Natives who reside at the Missionary Stations. They wish also to be married according to our Forms; I mean those who are anxious to adopt our customs. The Rev. H. Williams married two Native Men and Women. – – - [The Same.

Schools.

On Sundays, the Scholars have attended regularly on the Means of Grace: on other days, as usual; excepting the last month, during which they have been very irregular; most of the Boys have been absent on account of a disturbance among the Natives. In the School we have had 17 Men and Boys, and 10 Girls. – – - [Mr. J. King, Rangihoua, March, 1830.

During the last Quarter, my occupations were much the same as in the preceding; viz. attending to the European and Native Schools; occasionally visiting the Natives, to afford them Religious Instruction; and, the secular duties of the Station. The Girls' School, as usual, has been attended to by Mrs. Kemp, Mrs. Clarke, Mrs. Hamlin, and Mrs. Baker. Number of Men and Boys, 44, Girls, 22. – – - [Mr. G. Clarke, Kerikeri, March, 1830.

There are in the School, 77 Men and Boys, and 25 Women and Girls: our Wives have attended, as usual, to the Instruction of the Female Natives. – – - [Rev. H. Williams, Paihia, March, 1830.

No house being at present erected to receive the Children from the other Sta-

tions, I have only those resident at Paihia, seven in number, under my instruction. – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown, Missionaries' Children, March, 1830.

Ever since I have been here, I have taken a part in the Native School; and, lately, it has devolved principally upon me. In this particular part of my labours I feel much satisfaction. I have been pleased by seeing many of the Natives in good earnest at their learning: many of them can read the Scriptures; and not a few have made considerable progress in Arithmetic. – – - [Mr. C. Baker, May, 1830.

Our Schools go on much as usual. Mr. Yate having been to the Colony, got some more of the Scriptures, the Liturgy, Catechisms, and Hymns, printed, which will be of very great use. We stood much in need of them, as the Natives were quite at a stand for something to go on With. – – - [Mr. J. Kemp.

The Press.

It was noticed in our last Number (p. 288), that the Rev. W. Yate had taken a Printing Press with him to New Zealand, on his return to the Mission in July last. The Press had been sent from this Country, at the instance of the Missionaries; and is likely to prove highly serviceable to the Mission.

I am about to take with me to New Zealand, a Youth, aged 15 years, very strongly recommended by Mr. Marsden: he is to assist me in printing; for which purpose I have put him in the Gazette Office, till we sail. I have no doubt but that he will be fully employed. I send to you, by this conveyance, a few copies of the Work which I have been superintending. – – - [Rev. W. Yate, July, 1830.

Sept. 1, 1830 – Employed with James Smith in printing off a few Hymns in the Native Language: we succeeded beyond our most sanguine expectations. [The same.

We thank you for the Press; and have no doubt but that, with the blessing of God, it will be an instrument of great good in this Land. You will perceive, by the copy of a Hymn forwarded by this conveyance, that we shall be able, in a short time, to manage it. We have made a requisition for some figures, and other little articles connected with the Press; which we hope you will forward as soon as possible. [The Same, Sept. 1830.

The Schools will receive great benefit from the Press; for we shall be able to get portions of the Scriptures printed, as they are wanted. – – - [Mr. J. Kemp.

During Mr. Yate's stay in New South Wales, he carried through the Press an Edition of 550 Copies of a small Volume of Translations into the New-Zealand Language. These comprise the first three chapters of the Book of Genesis; the first eight chapters of the Gospel according to St. Matthew; the first four chapters of the Gospel according to St. John; the first six chapters of the Epistle of St. Paul to the Corinthians; parts of the Liturgy and Catechism; and nineteen Hymns. The Natives already take much interest in this little Volume; and it will, we trust, prove the means, under the Divine Blessing, of imparting to them the saving knowledge of a Crucified Redeemer. Mr. Yate remarks: –

The Natives are much pleased with the Maori (Books), and are very willing to purchase them: they will work a month for a book, to call it their own. I think, by purchasing their books, they will value them much more than if they received them gratis: besides, a large expenditure of other property will be saved to the Society.

Some further particulars relative to this Mission will be given in our next Number.

SINCE the principles of the New-Zealand Language were settled by Professor Lee, in the Grammar of that Dialect compiled by him in the year 1820, a very material change has been made in the Spelling. The old Orthography has hitherto been followed in the Publications of the Society, while the new one is employed by the Missionaries. As that used by them appears to be now, in a considerable degree, settled, it has been judged advisable to introduce it into print. The difference, however, between the two forms of Spelling is so great, that it has been found requisite to insert the following Vocabulary of the terms most frequently occurring in the communications of the Missionaries, to enable our Readers to recognise those heretofore employed under the form in which they now appear.

PROPER NAMES.

Persons.

Old Orthography. New Orthography.

Ahoudee O Gunna..... U'di o Kuna
Atua.............Atua
Duaterra..........Duatara
Enackee..........E'Noke
Houpah. ..........Aupa
Korrokorro........Korokoro
Mayree...........Maire
Matanghee........Matangi
Moka............Moka
Moodeepanga.....Mudupainga
Moodeewhy.......Mudiwai
Mowhee..........Mawi
Mowenna.........Moana
Moyanger........Maunga
Nana.............Nana
Patuona..........Patuone
Pomarree.........Po Mere
Racow...........Rakau
Shunghee.........E O'ngi
Tarria............Tareha
Teeterree.........Titeri
Teekopedee.......Tekopidi
Temmarangha.....Temorenga
Tekokee.........Tekoki
Teranghee........Terangi
Tetawnuee........Tetaonui
Tippahee.........Tepahi
Tooi.............Tuai
Toohoo...........Tohu
Towha...........Toa
Towhee..........Toe
Warreemaddoo.... Waremadu
Werrie...........Ware
Werrepork........Wareporka
Whykato.........Waikato
Whytarrow........Waitaro
Ururoa...........Ururoa
Ranghi... ........Rangi

Places.

Cowa cowa........Kauakaua
Kiperro...........Kaipara
Kiddeekiddee......Kerikeri
Korrorareka.......Kororarika
Manowowra.......Manaooura
Mutoroa..........Moturoa
Ocoolo, Okoora.... O'kura
Parroa...........Paroa
Pooka newee......Pukenui
Poonakketerre.....Punaketere
Pyhea............. Paihia
Rangheehoo.......Rangihoua
Showrakkee.......E'Aurake
Shukeangha.......E'O'keanga
Tiani............Taiamai
Tippoonah........Tepuna
Wangaree.........Wangare
Wedeea...........Widia
Whangarooa.......Wangaroa
Wyecoto, Whykote.... Waikato
Wyeteemattee.....Waimate
Wyeroa...........Wairoa
Wycaddee........ Waikadi
Wytanghee........Waitangi

Things.

Old Spelling.... New Spelling.

Ahoodoo-Pa (sepulchre).. U'dupa
Amoko (the tattooing).... Moko
Areekee (Priest).......Ariki
Hippah (Fortification).... E Pa
Koko (a tool)............Koko
Koomeras (sweet potatoes) Kumara
Taboo (to make sacred)... Tapu
Whydua (Spirit)..........Waidua

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

IN our last Number, pp. 9-21, a series of extracts was given from the communications of the Missionaries on the general state of the Mission. It was there mentioned, that during the Rev. S. Marsden's stay in New Zealand some important measures were adopted, with a view to the extension and increased efficiency of the Mission. A view of these will now be presented to our Readers.

Formation of a New Settlement at Waimate.

This important step was taken after full conference with the Missionaries, and with their cordial concurrence. In order to enable our Readers to appreciate the reasons which led to this determination, it will be necessary briefly to trace the history of the Mission.

The first Missionaries landed at Rangihoua, on the north side of the Bay of Islands, on the 10th of June, 1814; where a Settlement was formed in the beginning of the ensuing year. Through the influence of Mr. Marsden the Missionaries were placed under the protection of Duatara, one of the principal Chiefs in that part of the Island. The second Settlement was formed at Kerikeri, in 1819, on a river which falls into the Bay of Islands, on the west side, at the distance of about 16 miles from Rangihoua. The third Settlement, Paihia, on the south side of the Bay, about 16 miles southeast of Kerikeri and about 10 miles south from Rangihoua, was formed in 1823.

Mr. Marsden thus explains the views with which the first Settlements were formed: –

When this Mission was originally formed, it was of the first importance to place the Missionaries where they would not be murdered. Rangihoua was the only spot where they could be safe. I was personally known to the principal Chiefs, who had under their authority, at that time, a very powerful Tribe; and with them I had made arrangements for the Missionaries to settle with the inhabitants of the village. The local situation was not good, as it respected the land, which was hilly, cold, and stiff, and could not be cultivated with advantage; but at this time we had no choice. The Natives of Rangihoua have treated the Missionaries with great kindness, from the day of their landing to the present time; but, on account of the stiffness of the soil, not much wheat has been raised there.

The following incident shews that Mr. Marsden took his measures with accurate information of the state of the Island at that time.

Mr. – – - went over to the south side of the Bay; and selected a situation for himself, about eight miles from Rangihoua, because the land was good. As soon as he informed me, I objected to

his settling there, as I was apprehensive he would be murdered; and I determined to take him back with me to Port Jackson. At length he made me a promise that he would settle at Rangihoua, if I would allow him to remain: to which I agreed. After my departure Mr. – – - forgot his promise, and removed with his family to the place which he had formerly selected. He had not been there long before a party of Natives plundered him of his property, and were very near murdering both him and his wife; but, after being cruelly beaten, they were saved by the interference of a friendly Native, aided by the boats of a whaling ship which was anchored off the place. These boats took Mr. and Mrs. – – -, with their remaining property, back to Rangihoua. Mr. – – - had some cattle there, which were all afterwards killed.

With reference to Kerikeri Mr. Marsden writes: –

When the Rev. John Butler and his colleagues came out (in 1819), they took up their station at Kerikeri, about 12 miles to the westward, under the protection of EO'ngi, the late Chief. The land here is much better; but things did not go on well in Mr. Butler's time; so that little was done in cultivation whilst he remained there, and not much since, in raising grain.

The formation of the Settlement at Paihia is thus noticed by Mr. Marsden: –

When the Rev. Henry Williams arrived (in 1823), he fixed his station at Paihia, on the west side of Kororarika Bay, under the protection of a friendly Chief. There he has resided, to the present time, with several of the Brethren. The land is most unfavourable to agriculture: it faces the sea, and is backed in by high barren hills. There may be, adjoining to the beach, about seven or eight acres of low land, part of which is wet and swampy. Little improvement can be made here in the land: I therefore consider it very objectionable, as a permanent Settlement; and also on account of the shipping, which anchor opposite to it.

Mr. Marsden proceeds: –

These Stations were selected, at first, for personal safety and convenience; but now that the views, principles, and characters of the Missionaries are known to the Natives, and friendships are formed between them, they may with safety extend the sphere of their operations into the interior.

General Views by which the Formation of the New Settlement is recommended.

Of the site of the New Settlement Mr. Marsden observes: –

Waimate holds out every local advantage for a permanent Station: it is situated more than 20 miles from the shipping; the land is extensive and of a fair quality, generally level, and well adapted for the productions of agriculture; and there is a very numerous population.

Mr. Marsden's views with regard to this undertaking are further unfolded in the following extracts from his communications: –

From the first formation of the Mission, I have always looked upon agriculture, as a secondary consideration, to hold out the best inducements for the Natives to form industrious habits; and, from that conviction, I have from time to time urged this important subject upon those employed in the Mission, not only for the general benefit of the Natives, but to guard themselves against the want of bread. The demand for flour from New South-Wales, for the present supply of the Mission, is about 50,000 lb. per annum: 25,000 lb. for the Europeans, and the same quantity for the Natives.

The argument which I have generally heard urged, by some individuals, against agriculture here, is, that flour could be prepared cheaper in New South-Wales than it could be in New Zealand. Admitting this to be correct, which I cannot admit until experience has proved it to be so, it still appears to me most desirable that the Europeans should make the attempt to grow wheat. The Natives will never do it, unless the Europeans set them the example. Maize has been introduced for some time back. Of this valuable grain the Natives now grow considerable quantities, and are very fond of it: the climate and soil answer well for its production. I have no doubt, from the maize I have seen growing, but that a sufficient quantity may in time be purchased to supply the Mission with 25,000 lb. of maize-meal for the support of the Natives who are attached to the different Stations, in lieu of the 25,000 lb. of flour now purchased in New South-Wales. This would open a small market for their produce, and act as a stimulus to their in-

dustry. What they would want in exchange would be principally blankets; which are most valuable articles to them, being in constant demand, and in wear night and day.

In another communication Mr. Marsden adds –

I have been most anxious to establish a Station in the interior, for many important reasons. As about 50,000 lb. of flour are annually required for the support of the Mission, and as the climate of New South-Wales is not very favourable to the growth of wheat, I consider it of great moment that the Missionaries should not depend upon that Colony for their supplies of flour, but that they should use every means in their power to provide for themselves. Whenever they can supply themselves with bread, the Society will be relieved of part of the expenses of the Mission; besides which, the Natives will derive great advantages from agriculture. The cattle are increasing very fast; supplying the Missionaries with milk and butter, and occasionally with fine beef. They have slaughtered three beasts since my arrival; and are going to salt down several, for their winter supply. This will tend to reduce the expenses. In the interim, the Missionary will be in the centre of his work, and removed from the annoyances of the shipping. This will save him much labour; which he now has to undergo, in travelling to visit the Natives. The Missionaries go with safety to Waimate, as the most perfect confidence and friendship exist between them and the Chiefs. The land selected is very good; and the inhabitants numerous, on account of the goodness of the soil. They will very willingly part with a portion of their land; they are so anxious to get the Missionaries to live with them. Messrs. Clarke and Hamlin are nominated to form the interior Station: they are two most excellent, active, and laborious men; amiable in their dispositions, industrious in their habits, firm in their conduct to the Natives, and wholly devoted to the work of the Mission. I have great hopes that they will succeed well. Mr. Hamlin, I am informed, has an extraordinary talent for learning the language. When once the Missionaries have got an interior Station, and grow what grain they want for their own consumption, I shall consider the Mission as permanently established: but not until then.

Again: –

I have no doubt but that you and the Parent Committee will not only see the propriety, but also the necessity, of this measure, for the permanent good of this Mission. I could state many other reasons why a Station should be formed in the interior; such as, the establishment of a Sabbath Day amongst the Natives; the beneficial influence which the moral and religious conduct of the Missionaries will have upon those around them; the raising of provisions for themselves and for the Schools; the instructing of the Natives in agriculture, gardening, and other simple arts; and also the opportunity which they will have of marrying many of the young men and women who live with them as domestic servants or labourers, and settling them in cottages around, with a small spot of ground on which they can raise their native food. These are all important considerations. The Natives wish to have the Missionaries in the interior: they ask the Missionaries, when they go to preach to them, "Why do you not come and live amongst us? You should not tell us these things to-day only, but you should tell us to-day, and to-morrow, and the day after, and then we should remember them; but what you tell us when you come, we forget before you come again, you are so long from us."

The land at Waimate, according to my judgment, is of a good quality for cultivation; and capable of producing fine crops of grain of all kinds, as well as vegetables. In every direction are streams of most excellent water; on some of which, water-mills could be easily erected to grind the grain: and I have little doubt but that, at no very distant period, they will be used for that purpose. From the nature of the soil, and other local advantages, it will at all times ensure a considerable population. Men, whether in a savage or civilized state, will fix their residence, when they have a choice, where they can live in the greatest ease and plenty. As far as my own judgment enables me to decide, I should strongly recommend that some attempts be made to establish a Missionary Station at Waimate, if it be even on a small scale. If a Station were formed there the Missionary would be in the centre of his work; which would give him great facility in the discharge of his Missionary Duty. The example, of the Missionary in his whole conduct and oc-

cupations, whether employed in teaching or in cultivation, would have the most beneficial influence upon the Natives around him.

Mr. Marsden further remarks: –

As houses must have been built at Kerikeri for Messrs. Baker and Hamlin, it will be less expensive to erect them at Waimate, where there is plenty of timber.

The judgment of the Missionaries, in reference to the formation of the New Settlement, will be seen from the following extracts from their Letters: –

The importance of paying some attention to the cultivation of wheat has been often urged by the Society, and has been reciprocally felt by the members of this Mission. Many attempts have been made, from time to time, under great disadvantages; and it seemed almost in vain to look for success, especially as the Natives refused to sell land suitable for this purpose. The way is now opening; and those Chiefs who before opposed are now as anxious to promote this object. In addition to which, the consumption of the Mission has become so great, as to make it important that some means should be used, if practicable, to render the Mission independent of the Colony, where the crops are uncertain; and at the same time to lessen the general expense. In conformity with these views we have for some time past been making arrangements for the accomplishment of this object; and Mr. Marsden, on his arrival amongst us, warmly seconded the proposal. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

I think the Settlement will be of the greatest importance to the spiritual welfare of the Natives; for we shall be in the midst of a large body of them. To this Inland Station I am appointed. We have, of late, often been invited there by the principal Chiefs, who are pleased that we are making preparations to go; which I hope will soon be put into execution. To this end, I and Mr. Clarke, who is also appointed there, have been engaged in looking out for a cart-road, in order to avoid the swamps, of which there are several in the way that the Natives go; and we have succeeded better than we expected, for we have found out a way which, although a little farther round, is firm, and not hilly. In order to accomplish our purpose, we have, however, to build two bridges; one across the Waitangi, which will be 64 feet across, and is partly done: the other will be a small one, and may be built in a week or two. We have also to cut a way through a wood, which is about a furlong in length, before a cart can pass. These are the principal difficulties; which, I presume, will not cause much expense, as the work will be done by the Natives with our superintendence. This has been a long-wished-for object; but there has always been an obstacle on the part of the Natives: now they are continually asking us to come, and the door is opening before us. The place fixed on for the Settlement is about the middle of Waimate; so that we shall not be more than a mile and a half from the farthest Natives of the place, and within 10 miles of a large body of Natives at Pukenui, and of several other parties. I trust that the advantages which the Natives will have therefrom will be incalculable. – – - [Mr. J. Hamlin.

You have probably heard from some of us, as well as from the Corresponding Committee in New South-Wales, of the intention of forming an Inland Station at Waimate; where an attempt is to be made at a Farming Establishment, to render the Mission as independent as possible of supplies from Port Jackson. My family is to be one of the three families to form the Inland Station. I will state, as briefly as possible, some of the reasons which have induced me cheerfully to undertake so great a work: – 1. I have lamented, from time to time, the distance at which we were situated from the body of the Natives, who need line upon line and precept upon precept. By the formation of the Inland Station I shall be in the midst of a large body of Natives; to render them assistance, either in a temporal or spiritual point of view. 2. The difficulty of collecting the Native Children into a School for instruction, on account of our living so far from their parents, will in a measure be obviated. 3. The influence which the whole of our proceedings must have upon the inhabitants among whom we may live; and the more than probability of maintaining a large Establishment at a comparatively small expense; with a prospect of general usefulness amongst the Natives.

You may probably be apprehensive that the formation of a New Settlement may incur some very considerable extra

expense. To which I would thus reply: – As there have not yet been buildings erected for the different Missionaries in the Stations where they are now fixed, and as the building materials which have been already procured can be taken to the Inland Settlement, the necessary buildings may be erected there without involving the Society in more expense than if erected at the old Stations. The Farming Establishment may, I think, be carried on with far less expense at the Inland Station than at any of the old ones: indeed, it seems to all of us impossible to form a good Farming Establishment at any of the old Settlements, as there is neither good land nor a sufficient supply of wood for such an Establishment. The labour of erecting buildings will be principally done by ourselves and the Natives; and no Mechanic will be employed unless wanted in the Farming Establishment. So that, if this be approved of by you, and the blessing of God be upon our labours, I hope you will hear, in the course of a few years, that a good Station is formed in the heart of the Enemy's Country. – – - [Mr. G. Clarke.

From the time of my arrival in this Country to the present hour, I have never lost sight of an Agricultural Establishment. During the last twelve months I have been particularly anxious about it, and deeply impressed with the necessity of making an immediate trial on some of the best lands adjoining Kerikeri. At a Committee held at Kerikeri, Oct. 16, 1829, the necessity of an immediate attention to agriculture was suggested, for the three following reasons; viz.

1. From the signs of the times, it is not only possible, but probable, that the time may not be far distant when our Christian Friends in England may not be so well able to keep us as they now are: consequently, we should so prepare, while we have it in our power, as to be able in some measure to furnish ourselves with some of the necessaries of life.

2. Our numbers are increasing, our families becoming large, and some of our children growing up; so that our expenses increase, and are already become considerable: consequently, it appears necessary that we should endeavour to do something in order to lessen the expense.

3. If we do not attempt agriculture while we have the means in our power of paying working Natives to clear the land, and our resources should fail at home, we shall have no means of support, and may be obliged at length to leave the Island and our Work; which would not only be wicked in the sight of God, but cowardly in the sight of the Natives: whereas, were we to set about doing something, by way of agriculture, we may be able to support ourselves in a partial manner, and continue to labour in the Lord's Vineyard, while the gathering storm is disemboguing itself over Europe.

This point was unanimously carried; and a Resolution passed, that the lands adjoining the Kerikeri should be purchased. As we had not wherewith to purchase those lands at that time, things remained as they were until Mr. Marsden came down; when it was resolved, that the Agricultural Establishment should be undertaken at Waimate. There is not a doubt, in the mind of any one of us, as to the superiority of Waimate for such an Establishment; because it possesses two principal advantages which Kerikeri does not possess, which are, good land and timber. – – - [Mr. R. Davis.

The situation is decidedly approved by all: and the Natives are not only willing to part with their land, but anxious for us to go and take up our residence immediately amongst them. The way appears to me perfectly clear for an Establishment of the proposed kind: and my way to go seems equally plain, or I certainly should not leave the Kerikeri. By going inland, I shall, or rather we shall, make a bold entry into the very heart of the Enemy's Country. We have, hitherto, been sitting upon the borders of that Country, because the way has been so blocked up as to render it impossible to proceed further: but the mountains are laid low, and the valleys are exalted; the crooked things are made straight, and the rough places smooth: a highway is prepared for us; and the voice of Divine Providence distinctly says, "This is the way." Surely it is our duty to listen to that voice, and to walk in that way, that we may find rest and peace to our souls! If we studied personal comfort, I should say, by all means stay at Kerikeri; but, as we look at the good of the Natives, and at the objects which the Society have in view for them, it is plain that we ought to remove. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

There are certain advantages de-

rived from the purchase of land, growing out of the custom of the Natives, which are thus explained by Mr. Marsden: –

When any Missionary Station is formed, it is of great importance to purchase the land from the Natives. When this is done it becomes neutral ground; and Natives from any part will come, without hesitation, to reside with the Missionaries. The Natives do not like to live away from their own Tribe, because they are liable to be insulted; but on neutral ground they can meet and unite together: this will tend greatly to reconcile the different Tribes. I found Chiefs' Sons and Daughters from different parts of New Zealand living with the Missionaries; some of them 140 miles from their own District. On the neutral ground they were at home, and were not liable to be offended. When these Youths have learned to read the Scriptures, and to write their own Language, they may spread the knowledge far and wide, amongst their own Tribes.

Cultivation of Maize in New Zealand.

Mr. Marsden has been led to attach considerable advantage to the introduction of the cultivation of Maize: his reasons he thus assigns: –

I have already made some observations on the growth of maize in New Zealand; but as it is, in my judgment, an object of such national importance, I think it merits a more particular consideration. Maize is a most nutritious food, both for man and beast: it is now the principal bread-corn in many parts of Europe and America, where the climate is favourable for its production. For the food of man, it may be prepared in a greater variety of ways than wheat can be. One bushel of net maize will weigh 56 lb.; and, when well ground, will yield 18 lb. of good sifted meal. In the field it is not liable to the same injuries as wheat, either when growing or after it is ripe: the farmer may gather his maize into his barn when it suits his convenience, as, in a fine climate, it may remain upon the stalk, without injury, for a long time after it is fit to gather. When brought into the granary it will keep much better than wheat: when ground into meal, the Natives would easily make it into cakes or homony. When they have experienced the advantage of it, they will consider it as the first necessary of life; and will apply themselves to grow as much as they want for their own consumption; and also as much as they can get a market for.

At present the Mission requires, for the support of Schools and Domestic Servants, about 25000 lb. of flour per annum, which must be purchased in New South-Wales. I apprehend this quantity will cost the Society not less than 1l. per cwt.; and when the freight, casks, and other contingent expenses are added, the cost of 25,000 lb. of flour will be 250l. sterling. One hundred blankets would purchase more maize from the Natives, if they are encouraged to grow it, than would produce the above quantity of meal. The hundred blankets, if purchased in England, would cost the Society about 30l. sterling; which if laid out in maize, the produce in maize-meal would be 28,800 lb.; so that 9 1/2 lb. of maize-meal would be purchased for the same as the 1 lb. of flour. The 30l. laid out in England in blankets would be expended in New Zealand for the benefit of the Natives; and be of more advantage to them than 250l. laid out in flour purchased at Port Jackson. There is nothing they are so anxious to obtain as a good blanket; they wear it night and day, as long as it will hang together: so that blankets will be always in demand. At present, 1 lb. of flour, mixed with water, is allowed each day to five Natives who are in the Schools, or in the service of the Mission. This is but poor support; and it costs the Society as much as 9 1/2 lb. of maize-meal would cost. In addition to the 1 lb. of flour, a few potatoes and some other native food is allowed them; but these also are purchased at the expense of the Society. To make Schools general and permanent in New Zealand, they must be supported, eventually, by the industry of the Natives, and also taught by Native Schoolmasters.

Proposed Erection of a Water-mill.

The Natives having now become acquainted with the superior value of wheat and maize as articles of food, a mill for grinding corn is urgently required. Some years ago, stones were sent out from this Country for the erection of a water-mill; but circumstances retarded the execution of the design. The following passages from Mr. Marsden's communications not only shew the beneficial bearing which a mill

is likely to have on the advancement of the people in comfort and civilization; but present a lively picture of their solicitude to avail themselves of the use of wheat and maize, as articles of food.

Much advantage would be obtained by having a water-mill to grind the maize, as well as much expense eventually saved. The mill-stones are in New Zealand; and there are numerous falls of water, upon which a mill may be placed. I have anxiously wished for a mill to be erected, for the last two years. Since I have been here I have pressed again on the Missionaries the infinite advantages that would accrue to the Mission, if the above object were attended to. They might then give a pound of Indian meal to an old, sick, or hungry Native, which would not cost more than one farthing; which it is not in their power, at present, to do. This would also have the happy effect of increasing the wants of the Natives; by which their industry would be stimulated. When a Native has been accustomed to a blanket, he cannot do without it, and would pay any price to obtain one: and when they have been accustomed to bread, they will not be satisfied without it. A Chief who was with me at Parramatta observed, one day after breakfast, "I can eat, in New Zealand, two baskets of sweet potatoes at one meal: afterwards I lie down, and sleep, for I am not able to walk about: but when I have eaten with you as much bread as I can, I can walk about without any inconvenience." He wished me to explain how this was. He was so much gratified with the taste of the bread, and with the effects he experienced, so different from those produced by his native food, that he spoke in the highest praise of bread. The Natives are now particularly fond of bread; and when they can scrape a little of the cob of the corn with a shell, and mix it with water, and afterwards boil it in an iron pot, they like it better than flour. From all that I have seen, I am fully convinced that maize, which was introduced into New Zealand two or three years ago, will prove one of the greatest temporal blessings to the inhabitants, especially when it can be ground into meal.

At the present time there is abundance of maize; but they have no means of grinding it. About three days ago I saw a Chief's Wife, sitting upon the banks of the river, scraping a bit of maize with a shell, and reducing it to meal as well as she could. She could only just take the top of each grain off, and was a long time before she got a little meal; which she mixed with water, wrapped it up in a small basket, and put it into her oven to cook with steam. They grow a good deal of maize, but the old people and young children cannot eat it unpulverized. They soak it in water for several days, to soften it; but before it becomes soft it is offensive. A Miller, who could make and work a mill, would be of infinite service to the Mission, and to the Natives. I have no doubt but the Natives would pay for grinding, in maize.

Mr. Marsden thus assigns the reasons which, in his opinion, justify and enforce attention to secondary objects in carrying on such an undertaking as the New-Zealand Mission: –

The objects I am now speaking of are essentially necessary for the comfort and support of civil society, and also for the permanent success of the Gospel among the Heathen. The Israelites were obliged to gather the Manna for six days, or to go without; and on the sixth day they were to provide for the Sabbath. They were commanded to labour for the six days as strictly as they were commanded to rest on the seventh. Elisha was ploughing, behind his yoke of oxen, when Elijah cast the mantle upon him. David was with his father's sheep when Samuel went to anoint him King over Israel; and it was said of a greater than David, Is not this the Carpenter? If these secondary objects were necessary in Civilized Countries, much more are they in uncivilized ones. There are no wells dug, nor vineyards planted, nor houses built, in New Zealand. A Missionary here enters upon a new scene of labours: he requires much wisdom, much patience, much perseverance, and much fortitude, as well as the most serious consideration, in every step that he takes. The eyes of the Christian World are upon him for good; the eyes of the ungodly for evil; and the eyes of the Heathen around are upon him, watching all his actions and words, to see what they can approve or disapprove. On these accounts it requires the utmost circumspection in him to keep in the path of duty; so that he may, on the one hand, faithfully propagate the Gospel of Christ, and, on the

other hand, give due attention to secondary objects.

The Individuals whom it is intended to settle at Waimate are, the Rev. William Yate, Mr. Richard Davis, Mr. George Clarke, and Mr. James Hamlin.

Present Establishments of the Old Stations.

Rangihoua – Mr. John King, Mr. James Shepherd.

Kerikeri – The Rev. Alfred Nisbet Brown, Mr. Charles Baker.

Paihia – Rev. Henry Williams, Rev. William Williams, Mr. Thomas Chapman, Mr. William Fairburn, and Mr. William Puckey.

Rangihoua

It had been in the contemplation of the Committee to relinquish this Station, with a view of strengthening the others. It was found, however, that the Chiefs were extremely averse to the Missionaries leaving them. Mr. Marsden states: –

They applied to me, to know whether the Missionaries were to be taken away or not, and demanded the reason. The head Chief, Wareporka, asked Mr. King what they had done? "Have we robbed you? Have we injured you or your families? Tell us what we have done to you. If we have injured you in any way, you have a right to leave us; we will not blame you: but if you have nothing to allege against us, it will be a shame for you to leave us. When you are gone, no one shall touch your houses; but they shall stand empty, until they rot, and fall down: and when any Europeans come on shore and inquire whose houses they are, we shall tell them, 'They belonged to the Missionaries, who left us without any cause; and they now stand as a monument of their disgrace.'"

This affecting appeal was irresistible. Mr. Marsden promised that the Missionaries should not be removed until he had written to England and obtained an answer from the Committee, and with this reply they were satisfied. The Committee have, in consequence, directed Messrs. King and Shepherd to remain at Rangihoua.

The Society's Schooner, the ACTIVE.

In the Thirtieth Report, p. 70, it is stated that a Schooner, named the ACTIVE, had been sent out from this Country to replace the HERALD, which was wrecked in entering the E'O'keanga. The ACTIVE arrived at Port Jackson on the 20th of June; and sailed from thence for New Zealand on the 19th of July, with the Rev. William Yate, Mr. Thomas Chapman, Mrs. Chapman, and James Smith, Printer, as Passengers, and a cargo of Supplies for the Mission. The ACTIVE arrived in the Bay of Islands July the 31st. Should that part of the object which was proposed by the formation of the Settlement at Waimate be attained, by adequately supplying the Mission with food, it is possible that the use of the ACTIVE may eventually be dispensed with.

Mr. C. Davis, Mrs. Davis, and Mrs. Hart.

In our last Volume, p. 181, it was stated that serious apprehensions were entertained for the safety of the above-named friends, who had not been heard of since they sailed from Port Jackson in the "Haweis," on the 18th of October 1829. We regret to state, that at the date of our recent advices from New Zealand no tidings had been heard of them. A vague report had been circulated, that the vessel had been seized by Convicts, who had secreted themselves on board, and had been carried into Valparaiso; but we fear it is a mere rumour. In reference to this mysterious dispensation, Mr. Yate remarks, under date of the 2d of September last: –

We deeply regret that we have it not in our power to announce to you the arrival of our friends, Mr. and Mrs. C. Davis and Mrs. Hart. Doubtless they have been removed from us for some wise purposes, the drift of which we are not at present permitted to see. We cannot, however, for a moment suppose but that it is among the all things which are working together for our good, and for the glory of God. Though we cannot always clearly trace the designs of our Heavenly Father, He is daily teaching us simply to trust in His mercy and truth; and is frequently shewing us that He is "too wise to err, and too good to be unkind." Our

faith in His never-failing promises requires to be strengthened; and we earnestly entreat you to be more frequent in your applications to the Throne of Grace on our behalf; that, under the peculiar circumstances in which we are placed, we may be strengthened with might in the inner man, and may hourly grow in grace and in the knowledge of our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ, and may have power given us to be faithful to the trust which it has pleased God, through the means of the Society, to repose in us, His weak and unworthy Servants.

Rising Importance of New Zealand, in a Commercial Point of View.

In one of the Letters before us it is remarked –

That New Zealand is now becoming a place of importance to this Colony, both with respect to the Whale Fishery and the Trade in Flax, there can be no doubt; and it is probable that some persons are aware that the influence of the Missionaries tends much to the safety of the Crews of the Vessels which are employed either in the Flax Trade or in Whaling.

Further Illustrations of the State of the New-Zealand Mission.

Since the preceding half sheet was put to press, communications have been received from New Zealand, by way of New South-Wales, from which the following passages are selected. The extracts are made from Letters addressed to the Rev. S. Marsden.

I have only just time to say that we are all well. You will, I am sure, be happy to hear of the good conduct of the generality of the Natives, and of the rapid progress which the Gospel is now making amongst them. We were a long time sowing with the tears of expectation: we now see the good Seed springing up, in good ground; and ere long we shall be called to gather in our harvest. We are going on, with all possible speed, at Waimate. I am going there; and Mr. Brown is going up to Kerikeri, to take the European Children under his care: he will have Mr. Clarke's house, as soon as vacated by him. Mr. Davis undertakes the Farm. The land is all purchased; and the Natives are particularly satisfied. There are a hundred more from the Southward come to take refuge here ake ake ake (for the future). Our Boys and Girls are going on very well: they are daily improving in knowledge, and, I doubt not, also in grace. Tomorrow week I intend to admit several of them into the Church by Baptism. I have not been in a hurry about it, but have watched over them very jealously; and their life, walk, and conversation, are such as become the Gospel of Jesus Christ. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

As the "Active" is about to sail for the Colony, I embrace the opportunity of writing you a few lines; for I am sure it will give you great pleasure to hear that the work of grace is, as I hope, carrying on in the souls of many of the Natives who are living amongst us. Your old friend Rangi is, I trust, going on well: she manifests a growing desire to know more and more of the mind and will of her Saviour. She often speaks of you with a great deal of pleasure. Tawa, her husband, is, I hope, also going on well: his conduct is very pleasing: also, Ann and her husband appear desirous of walking in the paths of holiness and truth. If all be well, they will, on Sunday next, be admitted to the holy Ordinance of Baptism. May our gracious Lord baptize them with the Holy Spirit sent down from above, that they may be the Members of Christ and Children of God! It will, doubtless, give you pleasure to hear that many other Natives in the Settlements are inquiring the way to Zion, with their faces thitherward: and I do hope the time is not far distant, when the light of the glorious Gospel of Jesus shall shine into the hearts of this people, to give them the light of the knowledge of the glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ. I have, of late, observed a very great stir amongst the Natives at large, particularly as it respects the keeping of the Sabbath; and I think there are many who make it a point of conscience not to work on that day. I think I mentioned to you, before you left, about a Native named Toratora. I recollect your saying you saw a woman scraping some corn: I believe you saw this man at that time. He lives at Waimate; and regularly on the Sabbath visits the Natives at their respective Villages, to converse with them on religious subjects. I believe in many villages about him they have given over work on the Sabbath. He appears very warm in the Cause, and will, I hope, be the means of doing good. I have no doubt, but that the Station inland will tend much to the

furtherance of the great work, both in a temporal and spiritual sense. – – - [Mr. J. Kemp.

Since you left us I have been very busy with Mr. Hamlin and the Natives, in preparing Waimate. We have built a good strong bridge over the Waitangi River, which I hope is secure from all floods: we have had several very heavy floods to try, but it is still secure: the Natives are very much surprised at its strength and stability. The conduct of the Natives living in our Settlements is very pleasing. It is Mr, Yate's intention to baptize, on Sunday Week, several Adults, whose conduct up to the present time has been very consistent; and numbers more will, I hope, be added to the Church of such as shall be saved. You will be pleased to hear that the Great Head of the Church still gives us peace, both among ourselves and with the poor Heathens; and the work of the Lord is, I hope, prospering in, every Settlement. – – - [Mr. G. Clarke.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

Australasia Mission. – Advices have been received from New Zealand to the 4th of March. At that period the Missionaries were all well, and the blessing of God continued to rest on their labours; though the Natives were in a very excited state, and hostilities had taken place between two Tribes in the vicinity of the Missionary Settlements.

We regret to say that these communications extinguish the hope which had been excited, of the preservation of Mr, Charles Davis and his Wife. In pursuance of the intentions mentioned in our last Number, pp. 147, 148, the Society's Schooner, the "Active," sailed in quest of these friends on the 5th of January last. In a Letter, dated March the 4th. the Rev. W. Yate thus recounts the circumstances and result of the voyage: –

You will perceive by a former Letter of mine, that I was requested by the Committee of Missionaries to accompany the "Active" in her search for Mr. and Mrs. Charles Davis. I accordingly embarked, in the beginning of January, accompanied by Mr. W. Puckey, and sixteen Natives of New Zealand. After a month's rough passage, we arrived, by the blessing of God, at Tongataboo; where we found Messrs. Turner and Cross, the Wesleyan Missionaries, labouring with great success in the cause of our Common Redeemer. Having received all the advice I could from that quarter, and had a Letter of Capt. Christie's put into my hands, I determined to proceed to Lefooga; where I met with Chiefs from Feejee, Hamoa, Vavaoo, Niua, and several other Islands. The intelligence which I received from them, and also from a European, put the matter beyond all doubt, that the vessel spoken of was the "Cypress," taken by prisoners from Van Dieman's Land. No other vessel has been heard of, or seen, at any of the other Islands; so that there was not the least possible clue for any further research. With the advice of the Captain, Mr. Puckey, and Mr. Thomas, I departed from Lefooga to Tonga, on my way to New Zealand. where I arrived last midnight, after an absence of two months.

Mr. Yate promises further particulars by the next opportunity of despatching Letters, which it was expected would soon occur.

Mr. James Preece (p. 124) arrived in New Zealand on the 6th of February. He thus describes his impressions on entering on the scene of his labours: –

I arrived at Sydney on the 21st of December; and remained at the Rev. R. Hill's till the 15th of January, 1831; when I came from Sydney to New Zealand by the "Olive Branch," belonging to the London Missionary Society; and arrived at Paihia on the 6th of February.

Arrived at Paihia on Sunday Afternoon, just before my dear Brethren were going to the English Service. My heart was greatly refreshed by the appearance of so many Natives attending the Service of God in this distant land. In the Evening of the same day I went to the Native Service. There were, I think, about one hundred present: they were very attentive and orderly. The Rev. W. Williams preached to them, in their own language. The Christian Chief, Taiwanga, frequently stopped Mr. Williams, and asked him questions, which Mr. Williams answered. This mode seems to excite the Natives to great attention; and I trust it will bring many to inquire what they must do to be saved. I have visited all the other Stations; and the same pleasing prospects appear

I have been with my dear Brethren into several of the Native Villages; and there

seems to be a spirit of inquiry amongst the people for the things that make for their everlasting peace. The Committee have stationed me at Waimate, which appears to be well selected for husbandry. There is an extensive field of usefulness opened to us there. We could form Missionary Stations in all parts of the land, if we had Missionaries enough to form them. Almost all the Tribes are inviting us, nearly in the language of the Macedonians of old, Come over and help us. Oh! did but the love of Christ dwell in the hearts of young men in England who call themselves Christians, there would be no want of Teachers when the Heathen are calling for help. If they could but behold the difference between those to whom the Gospel is preached and those that hear it not, I am sure that they would no longer refuse to come forward in this great Cause, the Author of which is God. I have frequently heard the Christian Natives, at midnight, praying and singing praises to their Creator and Redeemer.

NOTICES OF THE DYING SICKNESS OF BETTY, A NEW-ZEALAND GIRL.

Church Missionary Record.

No. 8.] AUGUST, 1831. [Vol. II.

Biography.

NOTICES OF THE DYING SICKNESS OF BETTY,

A NEW-ZEALAND GIRL.

WE have already stated (p. 167) that recent communications from New Zealand, which came down to the beginning of March, represent the Mission to be prospering, under the Divine Blessing. In a Letter dated September 25, 1830, Mr. Richard Davis relates the following interesting particulars relative to the sickness and death of a New-Zealand Girl, named Betty.

Since my last Letter to you it has pleased Almighty God to take to Himself the soul of my Native Girl, Betty. As the gracious dealings of God were so manifestly displayed towards her, I send you the following Narrative, which was drawn up by my Daughter Marianne, at my request.

About five years ago, Betty was left at our house by a Kaipara Chief, who had fled to the Kauakaua, to Tekoki, for protection, at the time that the Napui Tribe first began to make inroads into that now depopulated country. When first brought to the house she was a sickly-looking Slave Girl, and rather more stupid than others; but regular living had a good effect on Betty's constitution: she soon became a growing healthy girl; and, after a time, became valuable in the house as a servant, although her abilities were not of the first rate.

For some time previous to the baptism of Peter 1 and others, Betty appeared unusually thoughtful and steady; but said nothing as it respected her views on religious subjects. A few days afterward she went to my daughter, and told her, that it was her wish to give her soul to God that night; at the same time requesting Marianne to meet her and the other girls who were living with us, and converse with them on the exceeding great love of Christ in dying for sinners. This request was agreed to; and they have been regularly met by my daughter, twice a-week, in a private room, from that period to this day; and I have no doubt but their meetings have been a mutual benefit. She appeared always much affected when the agony of Christ previous to His sufferings was spoken of.

On the 11th of April she was received into the visible Church of Christ, through the ordinance of Baptism. When she returned from church, she expressed great joy at having been admitted to the Sacred Ordinance; and from that time till her death she seemed to enjoy much peace of mind. Soon after her baptism she became poorly, and symptoms of a consumption were visible upon her. She was very fond of two of the Native Girls who were living with us, and prayed with them every evening for a long time previous to her death. She exhorted them to turn to God ere it was too late. She would very often cry over one of the girls, whose name is Tuari, and say, "Oh Tuari! Tuari! it will not be long before I shall be gone from you; and why do you not believe? Do you think that God will not listen to your sorrows and prayers? Yes: He will listen gladly to all who pray to Him from their hearts. He is not like the Natives: He does not bear malice towards Believers. His love is great: it is not like the love of this world which soon dieth away, but it lasteth for ever and ever." She has been frequently heard to say to Tuari: "Tuari, go you and try the good things of God: if you do not like them, or if you find them less agreeable than a life of sin, then leave them: but I know, if you go the right way to find Christ, you will love Him too much to leave him again. He will hide your sins in His sepulchre; He will wash your heart in His blood: and when you are washed from your sins you will be happy, and not till then."

During Betty's illness, Tuari was

attentive to her: on which occasions she would say, "Tuari, you are very kind to my body, but you care not for my soul. I used to pray with you; but as I can do that no longer, I will now pray for you." She would also talk very seriously to another of our girls, who made great profession of Religion, and say, "Rama, you profess to believe, you pray at our Prayer-Meetings, you exhort your friends, but your works do not correspond, as they ought to do, with your profession. Do pray, earnestly and often, that God, of His mercy, would preserve you when you are tempted. Mind, you cannot deceive God. No: He can see every thing; and He knows every thing."

A little before she took to her bed, she requested that the Men and Boys who were thinking on good things, and who wished to have Christ for their Saviour, might be permitted and requested to visit her alternately, in order that she might hear what they also had experienced of the love of God. At these visits she tried to impress on their minds the necessity of endeavouring to make their peace with God while they were in health; because they knew not the time when they would be called hence. She entreated all to turn to God, to pray that He would take the deceit out of their hearts, and wash them and make them clean through the blood of Christ.

On the 21st of July she was much worse; and was obliged to keep her bed, go that she was seldom up more than an hour a-day. Her conversation now became more heavenly, and she seemed to enjoy much peace in her soul. When the other girls were talking on trifling subjects, or were noisy around her, she would say, "Why do you continually talk of those things? they will afford you no comfort when Christ comes to judge the world. You are always talking about, and doing for, your bodies; but you forget your souls. You are now covered with a thick darkness from Satan; but perhaps, after I am gone, Jehovah will let the rays of His Sun dispel it from before your eyes, and then all will be light and joy and peace."

As my daughter generally spent a portion of time with her every evening, besides her regular Meetings for Prayer, she was always anxious for prayer-time to come, that she might, to use her own words, get food for her soul. "I am," she would say, "very hungry: come and read to me David's Prayer," meaning the 51st Psalm. "Tell me what St. Paul said about death, and its power. I am not afraid to die." She was asked why she was not afraid of death? "Because," said she, "Christ died for me. He passed the lonely road before me, and He will also be with me. It is only now that I have seen the great love of Christ in giving Himself to die for my sins." About this time of her illness a Native Girl died in the Settlement, after a short illness. When Betty heard of it, she anxiously inquired whether she had sought and found Christ previously to her death; and when she was told that she had died in a cold, careless state, she sighed, and said, "It is very good to he afflicted with a lingering illness, because there is more time to think and pray." Being asked whether she would not like to recover again and live longer, she answered, "No; because I should sin again, and make God angry. When I think of my former sins, it makes my heart very dark and sorrowful; but then, if I pray, God hides my sins from me, and puts His Spirit into my heart, and that makes it light again."

As her illness increased, her anxiety for the salvation of the souls of others increased also. But Betty was not without her trials. In the beginning of August, I presented her with a copy of the translation of portions of the Scriptures which Mr. Yate got printed when he was in Port Jackson: this she valued very much. About three days after the book was presented to her, the other girl, Rama, being jealous on account of the gift of the book to Betty, said it was thrown away upon her, a sick girl. As these words were spoken in her hearing, they affected her very much; so much so, that she wished me to take back the book again. When I heard what had taken place, I went and reprimanded the girl who had made use of the expression, and endeavoured to comfort Betty. In the evening she was asked by my daughter, why she took so much notice of the words which were spoken by the girl. She answered, "Because I had not prayed in the morning, and consequently, not having been fed with food from Heaven, I was not strong: but as Rama prays for me, why did she say those bad words to grieve me?" My daughter asked her if she was angry with Rama. She said, "No. God has forgiven my sins, and shall I be angry with my friend for

one word? No, no! I forgive her." A few days after, my daughter found her in tears, and asked her why she wept. Her answer was: "My path is almost trodden, and my love for my companions is great: will they repent and be sorry for their sins? Will they think on Him who died for them? Will they pray to Him for His assistance?" My daughter told her to pray earnestly for them. She said, "Yes: I often pray for them."

During her illness she frequently conversed with Mary Peter, entreating her to live near to God, and instruct her girls in the ways of righteousness, and endeavour to lead them to the only refuge for needy sinners. The remainder of the Narrative I will give in my daughter's own words: –

Towards the latter end of August, a serious change took place in our poor Betty: her pain became more severe, and her cough much more troublesome; but, through mercy, she was so strengthened from on High, that I never heard her repine: on the contrary, she would frequently rejoice in the prospect of a happy release from all her bodily pains. On the 14th of September we saw but too plainly, from the poor girl's appearance, that she would speedily be taken from us. I went and stood by her bed, and asked how she was. She said, "Sit down by me." I did so. I said, "Betty, your pain is great." She said, "Yes, my pain is very great; but it is nothing to what my Saviour suffered: I feel happy." I asked how she felt in the prospect of death, and if she was not afraid to die. She said, "No, I am not afraid: Christ is waiting at the end of the road. I want to go. Do not let the girls make a noise to rouse me, and I shall soon be gone." She then gave me her book, and requested me to read to her. I did so; but while I was reading, she fell asleep. When she awoke, she said, "Why did you let me go to sleep? It is but a little while, and I shall hear you read no more." Seeing me much affected with her affectionate manner of expressing herself, she said, "Marianne, do not grieve: we shall be separated but for a short time." I was so affected, as to be obliged to leave her. When I returned to her, she said, "Do not leave me: come, sit down, and talk to me about Heaven." But looking up, and observing that I was still much affected, she said, "Call father." I did so, and my father came and talked to and prayed with her. After this she seemed more composed.

On the 15th she was much the same, and continued so during the whole of the 16th: but on the morning of the 17th, death was plainly depicted on her countenance. But, although her bodily pains were very great, she bore them with a great degree of composure. During the afternoon, she took leave of my mother and sisters, and of her companions. In the evening, as I was walking in the garden, a messenger came to tell me that Betty was dying. I immediately hastened to her. While I stood by, looking stedfastly at her, she opened her eyes; and seeing me, she stretched out her hand, took hold of my hand, and, in a faint whisper, bade me farewell. In a little time, I endeavoured to draw my hand from her; but she continuing to grasp it tight, I said, "Farewell, Betty; you are now going to Jesus." She said id a whisper, "Yes; I am light, light." After this, she spoke no more. I now went to my father, and acquainted him with her state: he returned with me, and prayed; but her marble features were now fast setting in death. We had not long risen from our knees, and were standing waiting the awful, or rather happy, moment, when her soul should leave its tenement of clay to join its gracious Redeemer, when one deep-drawn sigh informed us that her immortal part was fled. I took hold of her clay-cold hand, but her pulse had ceased to beat, and her happy soul had, we trust, winged its way to glory. – Thus far, my daughter's Narrative.

As soon as we had ascertained that the soul of our poor suffering girl had quitted its frail tabernacle of clay, we again prayed. The prayers of the Believing Natives were very solemn and impressive. Truly it was a solemn season.

During the poor girl's illness, she was much visited, and prayed with, by all the Converted Natives; and I trust their prayers and conversations were a mutual and lasting benefit to their souls.

Thus have we given an account of the gracious dealings of a compassionate Redeemer with the soul of a humble Slave in New Zealand. Much, very much, might have been written; but I have merely sent you this, in order that those servants of Christ who have long prayed for New Zealanders may rejoice with us in the faithfulness of a Prayer-

answering God. In the case of this poor girl, Christians will be able to see a faithful God dealing in the same gracious manner with the soul of a New Zealander, as with the soul of the privileged Englishman; and those gracious dealings having the same gracious effects.

The Native Girl, Rama, mentioned in the above narrative, died a few months after Betty. It is consolatory to learn that there is also hope in her death. In a Postscript to Mr. Davis's Letter, dated February the 22d, 1831, he writes: –

Since I wrote the above Narrative, the Girl Rama has died: her end, I trust, was also peace. Her evidences were satisfactory, but not so bright as my poor Betty's were; yet I trust their happy souls have now met together in everlasting glory.

He adds: –

The poor Natives are dying and decreasing fast. Oh that Christians would but be very earnest in prayer for them! The Gospel is gaining ground. I hope, in about a fortnight, to see about ten more Natives received into the visible Church of Christ.

Thus have we reason to bless God for the testimony given to the word of His grace in New Zealand. May the call of the Missionary on British Christians for their prayers be answered! May an increased outpouring of the Holy Spirit be vouchsafed in return to their supplications! And may that glorious Kingdom which is righteousness and peace be fully established among the barbarous people of these remote Islands, to the glory of Him who loved us, and washed us from our sins in His blood!

1 Feb. 7, 1830.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

New Zealand.

IN our Numbers for January and February last (pp. 9-22, 27-36), very full details were given of the state and prospects of the New-Zealand Mission. Communications have since been received from the Missionaries, coming down to the 15th of March, the substance of which we now present to our Readers. Though in the midst of dangers and barbarism, the Missionaries take their rest in safety, under the defence of the Most High; and, through His blessing, their labours continue to prosper.

The following extracts detail the course of the labours of the Missionaries and Catechists, and present many encouraging indications of the

Hopeful Influence of the Gospel on the Natives.

Nov. 11, 1830 – We have nine Baptized Natives in this Settlement, and several who are Candidates. Though this number is small, the time was when that number of Natives would not remain with us; but now we are extending, and are nearly 200 souls here. The citadel of the great Enemy is giving way, and we have great cause to rejoice.

When we look back, and compare the present day with those which we have witnessed, we cannot but thank God, and take courage. His promise is sure: we have found it so: and His arm has been very manifest on our behalf; for nothing but the Spirit's operation could have wrought upon the minds of this people.

Jan. 20, 1831 – You will be pleased to hear that several of our Young Men are now sent, occasionally, to speak to the Natives. We generally appoint them to go to their own friends and relations, and have been greatly delighted and encouraged to hear them.

Feb. 16 – My Boy, Taha, came to me after our Prayer-Meeting, to converse

with me upon the state of his mind. The poor Lad had his thigh broken some time ago, while getting up a large log of timber in a gale of wind: he has ever since been very attentive to School and to the Means of Grace. He had well nigh paid the debt of nature upon that occasion. He has constantly a strong desire after the Truth. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

Sept. 19, 1830: Sunday – We were permitted again to witness the blessed effects of the Gospel upon the Natives living with us. I baptized six of our Natives; 2 namely, three Young Men, one Married Woman, the Wife of Taiwanga, and two Girls. The decision of their conduct for some time past was such as entirely to satisfy us of their sincerity.

Oct. 21 – One of our old School Boys, Wakawehi, having left us some weeks ago, returned, apparently in a decline, wishing for medical relief. He witnessed the death of Rape, 3 and afterwards that of a Little Boy. While the Boy was lying sick, he was frequently visited by Matthew Pouter. It was then, for the first time, that Wakawehi began to listen to better things. "I thought," said he, "when Matthew was speaking to the Boy, this is perhaps the salvation for me." From that time he sought, and found, the object of his desires, and has made a rapid progress – a progress about which no ambiguity exists. He is now at the point of death, being in the last stage of dropsy. He suffers much bodily pain, but his mind is remarkably cheerful. I proposed to tap him; but not succeeding in the operation, he said, "This body is a corruptible thing, take no more trouble about it. Why should it not die, that I may be the sooner made whole." I asked him what he thought of his sins: how God would regard them. "They are all gone," he said: "Jesus Christ has washed them away." He was looking forward with desire for the next Sunday, when it had been proposed that he should be baptized. "I wish," he said, "to be given up to God."

Oct. 23 – Perceiving that Wakawehi was drawing near his end, I proposed to my Brother that his baptism should not be longer delayed. He was therefore received into the Church of Christ; and the following day he died.

Nov. 29 – We are looking forward to our Annual Examination. It is a season which the Natives think much of. They have to prepare for the occasion three Catechisms; two of which have been compiled by us; and a third is the Church Catechism, which is used only by the more-advanced Natives. These they seem to take great pleasure in learning. I observed, this morning, one Girl, with my Brother's youngest Child in her arms, teaching another, who was at work at the wash-tub; and generally, in the evening, you may hear the sound of the Catechism from one end of the Settlement to the other.

Dec. 18 – On the 15th I baptized a Native Youth, who has long been lying on the bed of sickness, and is now on the point of death. He has given abundant proof that he possesses the faith which is in Christ Jesus.

Feb. 6, 1831: Sunday – At night, after speaking to the Natives in the Chapel, one of my Boys, named Puru, came to speak to me. Our conversation was nearly to the following effect: – "What is it you are thinking about?" "I wish you to talk with me." – "What think you of Jesus Christ?" "That he is my preserver. I pray to him every day, to take care of my heart, that sin may not remain there." – "What views have you of your sins?" – "I see my sins; and I know that I am wicked." – "What do you wish for?" "To be baptized, that my heart may be given up to Jesus Christ." – " Are there any other persons in the house in which you live, who pray?" "Yes, there are three of us. We pray together every night and morning. But I have not much time in the morning; for when I have milked my cow, the bell rings for Prayers at the Chapel. On Sunday Morning we have more time; and then, when we pray, the Word of God is very sweet to me."

Feb. 7 – The following Epistle, written on a slate, was brought to me by one of my Boys, in the evening: –

Mr. Williams, Brother, I am praying to Christ, to my Father in heaven, to give His strength to me, in order that the things which you tell us may be effected; for the words of God are wasted by me. May our belief on Jesus Christ, our Father in heaven, be hastened! This prayer in my heart is from God. When wickedness comes forth to me, I pray to Jesus Christ, my Saviour. I wish also to be corrected by the Holy Spirit.

Feb. 12 – We sent out two Baptized Natives, to visit the Settlement up the River Waikare. My Boy, Puru, accompanied them. He told me, at night,

that the people were glad to see them, and that some of the worst Natives were very attentive. "It is very good," say they, "for Natives to visit us, because we understand them better than we do the Europeans." On speaking to my Boy about prayer, he observed, "I did not think that a wicked person, like me, could have said any thing at the Native Village; but I prayed secretly to God, and he enabled me to speak."

Feb. 13, 1831: Sunday – Went to Waitangi. The old blind Chief, Hepatahi, who has lost much of this world's comfort, listens, with some apparent satisfaction, to the account of blessings which are to be obtained in another. In the evening, I conversed with five Candidates for Baptism. One of them, in answer to the question, "What think you of Christ?" said, "The love of God has been great to me; and His gift is unlike any thing in this world. Worldly possessions may be great, but they are left behind; a man's name may be great, but it dies with him; but the gift of God, Jesus Christ, was a very great rangatira (chief). I am a very insignificant person, but He died as a payment for my sins."

Feb. 15 – Another of our Natives was mentioned as having a great desire to converse with me; and a Note was brought, of which the following is a translation: –

Brother of Mr. Williams, I think much of Jesus Christ: His love to my heart is great. I am a very bad man. My sins were lately very many; but they have been taken away by Jesus Christ. His love does not disappear. The affection towards Him in my heart is very great. I cannot hide the affection of my heart. The joy of the Holy Spirit in my heart is great. Because I have a great heart, I write to you; although man says, "Is it true, indeed, that He (Jesus Christ) will come to look at my heart?" This Letter is written by me, Wakarae. I pray continually to Him, by day and by night: when I go to sleep, I pray to Him: in the morning I pray to Jehovah, our Father in heaven. My heart is sore on account of the sacred words of Jesus Christ, which are suppressed by us. By-and-by, in the evening, I will pay you a visit.

Feb. 21 – I had some trouble to-day with a Chief, whose Daughter has been living with us for the last twelve months. He wished to take her out of the house; stating, that he is going in a ship, now at anchor, to the southward, where he intends to live; and that his child should go with him. I was not without suspicion that he wished to take her away for a worse purpose. The Child, however, refused to go, ran into my study, and locked herself up. The Father was still very urgent, and demanded to have her brought out; saying, that he would sit all that day, and all the next, until he gained his object. I told him, I would not prevent her going, but that I should not let her go against her will. "She has now two fathers," said I: "you are one, and I am the other: and she has great love for me and my Wife, and will not go with you." The Girl kept to her hiding-place, and the man was obliged to leave her. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

Sept. 26, 1830: Sunday – In the Afternoon, I baptized Tuau and Rangi, Waiapu and Ane, married Natives; and Wakahahi and Waikari, unmarried. Their deportment, during the time that the Ordinance was being administered, was very solemn and pleasing; and the conduct of the whole of the Natives in the Chapel was all we could wish it to be. Some of the Baptized were affected to tears, and all were evidently under the influence of strong religious feeling. May God, of His infinite mercy, grant that this impression may remain! We look to Him for the blessing; and we feel assured that it will not be withheld. In our Liturgy, we are taught to place our whole dependence upon a reconciled God, through a Crucified Redeemer: Christ, and Christ alone, is there made the foundation of our hope of pardon and of everlasting blessedness: and I believe it is the sacred truths which are in our Book of Common Prayer, and which are constantly sounding in the ears and falling from the lips of the Natives, that has been the good means of bringing them to their present state of mind. We have need to bless God that He ever put it into the hearts of His Servants to compose so excellent, because so Scriptural, a manual of devotion. It has been translated into the New-Zealand Language about eighteen months, and is in that language most strikingly beautiful. When any strange Natives come into the Chapel, and hear it, they say, "Ay, those are not native prayers! If we did as those persons pray for us to do, we should be any other than what we are; and should cast away all our sins; and should believe in their God, and be made like them in all their doings."

Nov. 5 – All is going on well with us. The Baptized Natives are walking worthy of the vocation with which they are

called. Others are making a profession; in many of whom I have no doubt it is sincere. The work is everywhere going on, and the grace of God is manifest.

Nov. 26, 1830 – I have still, with thankfulness to God, to inform you of our peace and prosperity amongst the Natives. Every day shews us the power of the Gospel of Jesus Christ to keep people in the way of life, when once it has introduced them into that way. Our Natives who have made an open profession are walking worthy of their vocation, and are a source of very great encouragement to us all. Not unto us, O Lord, not unto us, but unto Thy Name be all the praise! for it has not been by might nor by power, but by the Spirit of the Lord, that the change in the hearts of the Heathen has been brought about. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

Nov. 14 – Visited a few Natives, with Mr. King. I was struck with some sentiments which a Native Youth of Mr. King's had written in a blank page of a book, of which I subjoin a translation: –

O Jesus, we cannot perfectly believe in Thee! Bound by the Evil Spirit, he will not let our hearts go, lest we believe in Thee, O Christ! lest we also be saved by Thee, O Jesus, the Son of God ! O Jesus, how great is Thy love to us! Thou descendedst from heaven, when thou didst understand the anger of thy Father to all mankind. They were going to the place of torment: they were not going to Him. Thou saidst to Thy Father, "Cease Thine anger to mankind: I am the payment: I go to the natural world, to be slain, as a payment for their sins. I will purchase them with my blood." – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

Nov. 29 – I copy a Paryer written by Ouru, a Lad who has, for some months past, endeavoured to make himself useful to his countrymen: –

O Jesus Christ, let Thy Spirit come to us, to preserve our hearts, and to drive out the Evil Spirit! Soften our hearts by Thy Holy Spirit. Cleanse our hearts by Thy blood. O Jesus Christ, our Master! Thou didst purchase us Thy servants, O Jesus Christ our Lord, the Son of the Almighty and Everlasting God! – – - [Mr. J. Shepherd.

The following passages will serve to illustrate the improved state of many of the Natives who have not yet been brought to the actual reception of Christianity.

Oct. 19, 1830 – Visited the Kauakaua. The Natives were all busily employed in planting food; but, in every case, we found them ready to leave their work, in order to listen to the glad tidings of Salvation. I was much struck with one very promising Lad, who left our Settlement some months ago, just before the period when the attention of many was excited in behalf of their spiritual welfare. I told him that two of his former companions had been baptized, and were now realizing the benefit of the Gospel; but that he was left behind by them. Leaving the party to their work, I proceeded to his father's house. As we were walking on, he said, "I have been thinking of these things for some time; but the Natives here laugh at me, and say they are not true." I recommended him to take an opportunity of seeing his former companions, and of asking them what they thought of the matter. "I saw one of them," said he, "on Sunday, and he recommended me to be thoughtful." In conversing with his father, I appealed to this Boy for an account of the most essential truths of Christianity, which he gave me, in most satisfactory terms.

Jan. 7, 1831 – I visited Titere. He is a great Chief, and married a sister of EO'ngi. He spoke to-day of the difficulty of restraining Natives who are disposed to quarrel with their neighbours. He said that EO'ngi was repeatedly checked by him and other Chiefs. They would ask him, "Why do you wish to go? Why do you not sit still, and cultivate your land?" To which EO'ngi's restless spirit would reply, "Oh, I must go this once; and then I shall remain at home." This he practised until he received the fatal wound.

One of Titere's people, speaking of his own goodness in believing what we tell them, gave as a proof, that they sit still on the Sunday. Titere said, "That is not the believing they mean." – I know of few Natives who are in a more promising state than this man. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

Oct. 15,1830 – Ware-rahi, and a few Natives, came down in a very peaceable manner, to inquire the reason why we killed one of their pigs. When we explained to them, and they understood it was a mistake, they were perfectly satisfied; and went home again, quite contented with the usual payment of a pig. Time was, when they would have been very rude about such a matter, and would have pulled down our fences, and have taken something away by force, as a satisfaction for their loss; but there is a manifest improvement in their general

conduct towards us, though I fear there is nothing which is yet radically good. The slightest symptom of amendment is however encouraging.

Oct. 31, 1830: Sunday – Old Ware-rahi came up the river. He sent word, that, as it was Sunday, he would not come near me to-day, although he very much wanted to see me about some medicine for himself and his younger son. Strange Natives always regard the Sabbath in the Settlement. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

Though the preceding Extracts present an encouraging view of the state of the Mission, the God of this world maintains a powerful hold on the people; and the Missionaries have, in consequence, still to encounter much to try their faith and patience. The Rev. W. Yate writes: –

Sept. 20, 1830 – Collected about 30 Natives together at Kororipo; but found them most stupidly careless about the things which belong to their everlasting peace. They were quiet and respectful; and said, it was very well for us to talk, and for them to listen; and then it was very well for them to forget all we had said.

Oct. 20 – On my way home, I met a sick Native Boy, being carried in a sling, upon the shoulders of four men. They stopped; and I could not omit the opportunity of speaking to them on the subject of Death, of the Resurrection, and of Judgment to come. They listened attentively; and then said it was all nonsense; and their loud laughter, at the idea of rising again after death, followed me to some distance.

Attempt to reconcile Hostile Tribes.

The following narrative, by Mr. Baker, of an attempt to reconcile two hostile Tribes, not only manifests that their ancient customs and manners continue powerfully to influence the minds of the Natives, but that the Missionaries are liable to be exposed to serious personal danger in their benevolent endeavours to restore peace among them, when at war.

Jan. 18, 1831 – I set out, with Mr. Shepherd, for Mangakahia. Titere, one of the principal Chiefs of the Bay, went over to Mr. Williams, and informed him of the present serious affair between the Natives of Mangakahia and those of Wairoa; and also requested that some of the Brethren would go with him to the Natives of Wairoa; and that others would go with the Nga-te-Waki to Mangakahia, to endeavour to effect peace between the parties at war with each other.

Jan. 19 – The Nga-te-Waki arrived, last night, from the Bay; and we were told, that they would be ready to march onward this morning.

Jan. 20 – We had much rain in the night. Set out at about six o'clock this morning. Reached Mangakahia by five or six in the evening, and were well received by the Natives of the Pa (fortification).

Jan. 21 – The two contending parties are yet as hostile as it is possible for them to be. There were two persons shot yesterday, or the day before, close to this place; a man, who still lives, and a woman, who was shot dead. Each party of Natives have enclosed themselves within a very high and strong fence. Whole trees are used for the purpose. There is also a minor fence of light materials. I consider that these fences are impregnable to a very strong party of Natives, with a little vigilance from those within. This inclosure is called by the Natives a Pa.

Jan. 22 – Set out with the Nga-te-Waki, and a good number of armed Natives from this Pa, to see the Natives of an adjoining Pa, the place where the body of Natives of this party is staying. Our object was, to speak to the Natives at large, on the subject of making peace. When we approached the Pa, the Natives belonging to the place, together with others who were staying there, came out to meet us; when, after the usual salute, Temorenga, the principal Chief staying there, began to speak, strongly advocating for peace. Iha, an old Chief, spoke after the same manner, together with Matangi, Huaruhi, and Tapireo. There was, on the part of those Natives belonging to the Pa, a backwardness to propose the terms of peace. After considerable speaking for and against making peace, we went into the Pa, and spent the remainder of the day in conversing with the Chiefs on the subject. It was the opinion of several of the principal Chiefs, that a good number of them, accompanied by us, should go down to the other party. It was also arranged, that the Natives should not approach the enemy's Pa, until we had

first been to know their disposition concerning peace being made. The matter rested here, all the Natives agreeing to the proposition: and as the next day was the Sabbath, the Natives agreed to sit quietly and listen to us.

Jan. 23, 1831: Sunday – We had Service this morning, at an early hour, at our quarters in the Pa. Most of the Nga-te-Waki were present, together with many others: in short, we had a crowd of hearers. I read part of the Liturgy &c, and a portion of Scripture, in the native language; and Mr. Shepherd spoke to the Natives at considerable length, on a subject suitable to the occasion. The attention of the Natives was truly pleasing.

About 9 o'clock this evening, an old Priest belonging to the E'O'keanga party told the Natives of the Pa, that he had been dreaming, and had seen his God; and said, that his God told him that neither he nor any of the Natives must go down to the other party; and that if they would go, some of them would be shot. From this, several of the Chiefs resolved to return to their residences, and not to interfere with the contending parties. This is an instance of their minds being led away with strong superstition.

Jan. 24 – Rose at an early hour, and inquired of the Natives what their intentions were respecting the movements of the day. We soon found that they were influenced by what the lying Priest said, or by something which we knew not. After some thought on the subject, I consented to go, if a sufficient number would go with us; together with two of Mr. Shepherd's Natives, one of mine, and two others. The Natives were very pressing upon us to go; saying, that, being Europeans, we should not be shot at by the other party.

We set out, not altogether without fear for our personal safety; knowing that parties of murderers were out in the woods, like ravenous beasts, seeking whom they may devour. We had not proceeded far before we saw foot-marks of Natives in the paths in which we went, plainly shewing to us that a party had passed us. It was evident, that when these Natives approached us, either from fear or from knowing us, they had turned out of the path, and had passed us at a distance. Our guides pointed out to us the places where several Natives had been shot in fighting. Stakes have been driven down into the ground, to shew where they fell; and the bodies of most of them have been thrown into the woods. Passing on, we came to a place where a Native had been shot, and his head fixed upon a pole: the scull was quite perfect. He had worn a great mass of hair, which had fallen by the side of the pole, forming a complete wig. A little further on our way, we saw a skeleton of a Native who had been murdered with the hatchet: the flesh of this body, our Natives told us, had been eaten. Several other places were pointed out to us, where some of each party have been slain, and their bodies either removed by their friends or thrown into the woods.

We walked very fast, hoping to arrive at Wairoa this evening, though our Natives repeatedly told us that it would be impossible. However, as we drew near to the place, they said that we should be able to reach there. About half-past six o'clock, we were told that in a few minutes we should be in sight of the Pa. We therefore cut a staff for our white flag. We were about half-a-mile from the Pa when we first appeared in sight: the Natives, therefore, might not at first know us. From this consideration, we pressed forwards; though the Pa was in the greatest distraction – firing, shouting, and dancing. One of our Natives observed, that their firing was to urge us on the faster; and, as we proceeded onward, we felt well assured that they knew we were Missionaries, and also knew our object.

We drew up within gun-shot; when they commenced firing upon us, shouting loudly, "They are Europeans – shoot them." Previously to this, they had been firing up in the air; but now, not less than thirty shots were aimed at me, most of which came very near to me: the effect of them I plainly saw, whilst they were whistling through the fern. Mr. Shepherd was at some distance, and sheltered from the shots. Our Natives had already run away, to a wood close at hand. I felt assured, that, although the Natives of the Pa manifested a determination to fire, we should be more secure amongst them – as there might be some within the Pa who would protect us – than in the wood; it being probable that some of the murderous Natives would have followed us. As there was a river running between them and us, we knew that they could not come nearer to us

without some difficulty, the water being deep. Meanwhile, we sought a sheltered place; and called out loudly to the Natives, telling them who we were, whence we came, and for what purpose. By this time, some of the principal Chiefs were come out, to prevent the Natives from following us, and from firing any longer. After some hesitation, we ventured close to the water; where many questions were asked us by the Natives of the Pa. Our Natives still kept at a distance, not knowing what the result of our near approach would be. The Natives of the Pa urged us to cross the river, and to enter their Pa; but we felt concerned about our Natives: we therefore requested that they might be called, which was done, and all of us entered the Pa. This fortification was much on the principle of the others, and there were several hundred Natives within.

Our first business was, to protest against their conduct in shooting at us; as they knew that we were Missionaries; and knew also our object, from the circumstance of our hoisting a white flag – which they know is a sign of peace. The principal Chief said, in an indirect manner, "Why should we not shoot the Europeans? – we are strangers to them." Another Chief said, that the other party had been made gentlemen of by us; – meaning, I suppose, that their being over others by whom they are surrounded is owing to the trade &c. which they have from us; – and therefore they shot at us. Others said, that they thought we had been European Devils – a term applied to sailors, and others, who are living as they list amongst the Natives; – and therefore they shot at us: observing, that this class of Europeans had furnished them with muskets and powder, and that it was right that they should feel the effects of them.

We pitched our tents amongst this rude mob; and, after much talking, we retired to rest; but were unable to sleep before midnight, on account of the continual din and noise of the Natives.

Jan. 25, 1831 – Was disturbed by the noisy talk of the Natives long before daylight. Rose at an early hour. We informed the Chiefs that we purposed returning to-day, and that we should be glad if they would give us an answer; viz. whether they were willing for peace or not. The whole body of Natives consequently collected together, and commenced speaking. The whole of the speeches were to us discouraging, for not one of the speakers contended for peace. There was a notorious murderer, Moetarau, a Native from Kaipara, there, the same person who shot the three Natives close to the other Pa, previous to our arrival there. I never saw so lionlike a man in my life, and his language agreed with his appearance.

We stated to the Natives our views respecting them; and pressed upon them, in a serious manner, the consideration of their present and immortal state. Seeing that they were not disposed for peace, we set out on our return; but it was with much fear and trembling, knowing that there was a party of murderers in the woods.

Jan. 26 – Rose before day-light, and, after prayer, set out on our way. Most of the Nga-te-waki proceeded on the other way, a few miles further, to bring up the bones of a relation who had been slain. We arrived at the Pa at about eleven o'clock this morning, where we related the events of our journey. After spending about two hours, we set out for Tukarauao Pa; intending to spend the night there, and to set out for home the following morning.

Jan. 27 – We set out for Kerikeri. The day was very uncomfortable, from the constant and heavy rain.

Jan. 28 – Spent a most uncomfortable night in the bush; but I felt thankful to God that we were out of the reach of those murderers who haunt the woods between Mangakahia and Wairoa. Our tent was not proof against so rainy and dismal a night. I think I never knew so much rain fall in one night before. We set out this morning with a prospect of having many rivers to cross. Our journey was very laborious to-day; but, blessed be God! we were able to reach the Kerikeri before night, and found all well. Bless the Lord, my soul! and forget not all his benefits. – – - [Mr. C. Baker.

General Views of the Schools.

The Schools are going on well. We have stemmed the torrent of opposition respecting the Girls; and I hope shall be able to proceed more agreeably. The shipping have had a sad influence upon the Natives generally; and I have frequently been filled with wonder at the great changes which have taken place. There are about fifty females at this Settlement, all behaving in an orderly manner; and very many in a most pleasing way. Several have been reclaimed

from the vessels, and are settled amongst us. In both Male and Female Schools are persons well advanced in life, as well as Infants. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

Annual Examination of the Schools.

The Annual Examination of the Schools is become an object of lively interest, not only to those under instruction, but to the Natives generally who are connected with them.

The account of our Examination you will receive from various persons; and, from the whole, may probably obtain a tolerably correct statement. It was truly gratifying in itself, and the assemblage of out-door Natives added much to its interest; especially, considering that they formed the leading characters of the contending armies at Kororarika, 4 and every man under arms, prepared for action, should circumstances require it. But as they came, so they departed, in perfect quietness, highly delighted with all they had seen, and with the attention paid to them. Our Settlement is considered neutral by all, which is an advantage not known elsewhere. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

Dec. 12, 1830: Sunday – -The attention shewn by our Boys and Girls to the Catechism, and to their learning generally, is well deserving of mention. For many days we hear them repeating, morning, noon, and night: indeed, they are most indefatigable; and most of them have today assembled themselves, of their own accord, in groups, for this purpose. It is more striking, as we have been obliged, from the pressure of work, greatly to neglect the school of late.

Dec. 13 – Several parties of Natives arrived from Kororarika, the Pa, and elsewhere, evidently to attend the Meeting. They were exceedingly quiet: all the Boys in high glee, and hard at work. I was much astonished this afternoon at witnessing two persons, and several of the Girls, relatives of the parties, sitting close by, repeating their Catechism, apparently regardless of what was taking place. Nothing can exceed their desire to perfect themselves for the Examination. – – - [The Same.

Dec. 14 – Having been making preparation for some days past for our Annual Examination, we were in expectation, at an early hour this morning, of the arrival of our friends. We had carefully avoided giving any invitation to Natives not connected with us; but, notwithstanding, since yesterday morning several canoes have arrived, and the people wait as though they expected something out of the common way. Two canoes are come from Wangaroa, 30 miles to the northward; the Chief observing, that Mr. Williams paid him a visit some time ago, and that he is now come to return it. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

After breakfast, I went and paid my respects to our friends outside the fences. Calculated them at 500, all sitting as quietly as possible. About eight o'clock the boats hove in sight, and came forward in a very pleasing manner. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

The morning was lovely, and the Bay smooth: the approach of the boats from Kerikeri and Rangihoua, with banners waving in the air, the Natives clad in new garments, and pleasure depicted on every countenance, formed, indeed, an animating scene. The preaching of the Gospel among the Heathen has rendered them susceptible of feelings of happiness to which they were utter strangers before. – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

The uniform appearance of the Boys gave an imposing effect. Our own Boys formed a line, of their own accord, to receive them, and each saluted the other with three hearty cheers. All was immediate bustle, in conducting our visitors to their respective quarters. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

At 10 o'clock, the number of Natives very much increased; and by night it amounted to not less than 800 men, women, and children; but principally men, from all the different tribes around us. At three o'clock we had Service for the Europeans; at which were present 12 Missionaries, with the Wives of 9, and 45 Children; exclusive of two Wesleyan Missionaries, their Wives and two Children. After a Sermon by Mr. Yate, from Psalm cxxxiii. 1., the Sacrament was administered to all the Adults. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

Dec. 15 – At an early hour this morning, the Natives belonging to the Settlement were on the alert, making preparation for the Feast. Owing to the large number now assembled, we allowed them to cook in the native mode. For this purpose, about sixteen holes were prepared, five feet in diameter, and about eighteen inches deep. A large wood fire was then made in the cavity; a proportionate number of stones, about one or two pounds' weight each, were thrown upon the wood; and the fire kept up,

until the stones were nearly red hot: a sufficient number to cover the bottom of the hole is then left, the rest being reserved. Upon the lower stones is placed a layer of grass, or green herbage of any kind; and upon this the pork or potatoes is heaped up, being profusely sprinkled with water for the purpose of creating steam. A layer of grass, similar to the former, covers the whole; and upon this the remainder of the hot stones are placed, which again are covered with a thick layer of grass; and, lastly, the grass is buried with earth. Food thus prepared is exceedingly well cooked, and by no means to be despised by an English palate. To keep this part of our proceedings in motion, which to the majority was by much the most important, it was necessary to keep a few of the Boys back, while the rest were assembled in the Chapel for prayers and examination.

At nine o'clock our business commenced; when the whole of the Classes, thrown into three divisions, were respectively examined in the Catechisms, Writing, Reading, and Accounts. Their improvement since the last Examination was not so great as might be wished: but where a deficiency has been made manifest, we are better able to apply the remedy. The number present was 179 Men and Boys, and 92 Girls; total 271.

At two o'clock a plentiful supply of food was laid out; consisting of beef, pork, potatoes, and bread. That for the Natives in the Schools was arranged in my Brother's garden, in green baskets made for the occasion; while a portion for the principal Chiefs, together with a plentiful supply of boiled flour sweetened with sugar, was carried outside the fence, and divided according to the respective Tribes. The number of strangers was larger than we have known in the Settlement on any former occasion; but it is worthy of remark, that we have never witnessed them so peaceably disposed; – not the least attempt, with one solitary exception, to be in any way troublesome; while all were well satisfied, and pleased with the repast we had provided for them. As soon as the dinner was ended, the two parties of strangers danced, and in a little time dispersed to their respectives homes. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

The strange Natives were very peaceable for New Zealanders; yet the contrast between their appearance and manners, and those of the Natives under instruction, was very striking. – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

Dec. 16, 1830 – Before the Natives assembled this morning, the English-Girls' School was examined by Mrs. Brown, Mrs. Chapman, and Mr. Yate; and much satisfaction given. At nine o'clock, the Natives assembled for prayer, and were addressed by Mr. Yate: after which, the names of those who had passed the best examinations were read, and a few prizes given to the most deserving. In the afternoon, our friends from Kerikeri and Rangihoua left us, to return to their respective homes. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

Progress of the New Settlement at Waimate.

While the following passages detail the progress of the new Settlement at Waimate, they bring under the view of our Readers the bodily toil which the Missionaries are obliged to undergo in this Mission.

Sept. 11, 1830 – Went to Waimate, to purchase the land. The Natives were all assembled, and were anxiously waiting to receive their payment. They were perfectly satisfied with what they received, and willingly signed the deeds of conveyance. When it was concluded, they fired a volley of muskets; and one of the principal men rose to make speech. He was listened to with great attention; and we were much pleased with the advice which he gave his assembled friends. He said: "Be gentle with the Missionaries, for they are gentle with you: do not steal from them, for they do not steal from you: let them sit in peace upon the ground which they have bought; and let us listen to their advice, and come to their prayers. Though there are many of us, Missionaries and Native Men, let us be all one, all one, all one! That is all I have got to say." This was the pleasing conclusion of the old man's speech; after which, the assembly broke up; and all returned to their respective houses, well satisfied with the business of the day.

Sept. 13 – Employed in superintending my Native Boys in making a road up to the Chapel, and in other work connected with the Settlement.

Sept. 14 – Mr. Clarke went inland, to assist in erecting another bridge over the Waiwakaata, on the road to Waimate. When this bridge is erected, and a small wood cut through, there will be an excellent road for a cart to the new Settlement.

Sept. 27 – Mr. Clarke went inland, to

complete the bridges over the Waitangi and the Waiwakaata.

Oct. 6, 1830 – Tareha, and a large party, came up from Kororarika, to agree about the remaining portion of the land for the farm at Waimate. Messrs. Davis, Clarke, and Hamlin, went inland with them, to fix the boundaries.

Oct. 7 – This morning was ushered in by a tremendous firing of muskets, which commenced long before cock-crow: it has, indeed, been a day of great bustle. We bought from the Natives nearly 800 acres of most excellent land, bounded by a beautiful river, and having many smaller streams intersecting it. There was a large number of Natives; who made a great noise, and prevented us from securing our bargain till after two o'clock. When all was concluded, the papers signed, and every one satisfied, we brought out a large quantity of boiled flour, over which was sprinkled a little sugar. The Natives were much delighted with the feast; and returned home well pleased with their possessions, and delighted with the prospect of our soon going to live in the midst of them.

Oct. 18, 19, 20 – On Monday morning I went to Waimate, and visited all the Natives in this extensive district. I found them very numerous, much more so than I expected. I was much pleased with the face of the country, and the great attention which they everywhere paid to the message of mercy which I had to deliver to them. At night, I pitched my tent at the residence of Hara, a Chief of Taiamai. The Natives at Taiamai behaved very well; and did not attempt to disturb me, though I was alone in my tent, and it was the first time of my paying them a visit in this place. When I told them how much I was tired, they said, "Come, let us cook the Missionary's food for him: let him eat: and we will cease our noise, that he may sleep, and rise up in the morning to talk with us." On Wednesday morning, after having looked over some land, and advised Hara where to fence it for his cows, I returned to Kerikeri.

Nov. 5 – Messrs. Davis, Clarke, and Hamlin, with their Natives, are labouring very hard at the bridges and new road to the inland Settlement. This Station, even if it were not considered as a farming establishment, will be by far the most important, as it respects the Natives. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

[RECORD, Sept. 1831.]

Nov. 29 – We have been more than ordinarily busy, in making a good road from the Kerikeri to Waimate; and have succeeded, so as to be able to take our horses and cart through to the intended Station. In a month or six weeks, I hope to remove, with my family, into a temporary dwelling, about to be erected on the spot by myself and Natives.

Feb. 21, 1831 – 1 have just returned, weary, from Kerikeri to Waimate, with our two horses and cart. Mr. Hamlin and family, myself and family, have removed to Waimate. Mr. Davis, we hope, will join us in about a month, with his family. Our movements to the interior have at once brought into operation all our mechanical powers; and engaged us in road-making, bridge-making, and a number of other employ-ments, before unknown among the Natives. A bridge which we have erected over the Waitangi River has much astonished the Natives: it is a single arch; the span, sixty-four feet. Our horses and carts also afford them a subject of much conversation; and the whole of our movements will, I hope, further the great object which we have in view – their temporal and spiritual welfare. We are now situated In the midst of the body of Natives of Waimate and Pukenui: and in a circuit of about five miles, we can visit from two to three thousand Natives, without the great inconvenience of leaving our families in several days together, as we used to do. We have reason to believe that many of the Natives living around us cease from work on the Sabbath Day; and had we a Church on the spot, I have no doubt but that it would be filled. We have been able to purchase a good supply of potatoes; so that we have every prospect of seeing our large Establishment carried on at a moderate expense. Although we have not yet been able to commence School, the religious instruction of the Natives has every day, and especially on the Sundays, been attended to; and we hope to commence school as soon as we can get a temporary place for that purpose. – – - [Mr. G. Clarke.

Proposed New Settlement.

The Missionaries have had their attention turned to the formation of a new Settlement to the southward of the Bay of Islands, where the

labours and influence of Missionaries are much needed. Our Readers will be glad to know that the atrocious occurrence mentioned by Mr. R. Davis has been brought under the notice, both of the Government of New South Wales and of his Majesty's Government at home.

We have many serious thoughts about forming a new Settlement on or about Entry Island, in Cook's Straits. It appears necessary that something of the kind should be attempted as speedily as possible; but it will require prudence and care, as many outrages have been committed on the coast by our wicked countrymen; one of which, I trust, from report, is unparalleled in the annals of History: the account, or rather report, is as follows: –

A Brig which sails from Sydney went to Cook's Straits, to trade for flax. On her arrival, she inquired for the article of which she was in quest; when the Captain was told by the Natives, that they would give him two cargoes of flax if he would assist them to revenge themselves on their enemies, of a certain place on the second island. To this, it is reported, the perfidious man agreed, took two hundred Natives on board, and sailed for the place in question. When he arrived, it is reported that he decoyed the principal Chief on board, and put him in confinement: also, that a great number of Natives were decoyed on board, put to death, and actually cooked; and that after they could no longer succeed in decoying the Natives on board, the Captain and Natives went on shore, and burnt, killed, and destroyed all and every thing that came in their way; and then returned, in more than brutal triumph, to the place from which they set out.

This report has been circulated in the Bay, by many vessels and by Natives; but, yesterday, I heard the above account, nearly word for word, from the mouth of a Captain who has just come from Cook's Straits. – – - [Mr. R. Davis.

General Views of the State of the Mission.

We close these extracts with some passages explaining the views of the Missionaries as to the general state and prospects of the Mission. May the blessing of the Lord rest in increasing measure on His Servants, and the arduous and perilous work in which they are engaged!

Nov. 29, 1830 – Our own condition, and that of the Natives around us, continues much as heretofore. The parties who lately contended at Kororarika are disposed to continue at peace, and to attend to the occupations of peace. The Natives in our own Settlement continue, I hope, advancing; but those who have been admitted into the Church require much care: they are like little children, often out of sorts. We are now preparing the Communion Services, hoping soon to receive some of them to this Holy Ordinance. We are looking forward te the time when many shall be prepared to go out to the more distant Tribes, bearing the glad tidings of the Gospel. The immense increase of intercourse with the southern part of New Zealand, carried on by the shipping of Port Jackson for the purpose of the flax-trade, is likely to tend to the furtherance of our great object. I lately saw the Master of one of these vessels, who speaks of a very numerous Tribe at Cook's Straits – that is, numerous for New Zealand – being 1500 fighting men, each man armed with a musket. Since the supply of fire-arms has been more equalized, the disposition to fight has been much on the decrease. For though a New Zealander will boast of dexterity in avoiding a musket-ball when fired at him, he is very unwilling to make frequent exercise of his activity. It is to this, and other points of the Island, I hope we shall be able to obtain Native Missionaries, to prepare the way. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

Nov. 29 – We have need to thank the Father of all mercies that we enjoy a tolerably good state of health, and live in uninterrupted peace with the poor Natives. I continue to visit the Natives to the northward; and find them civil, and attentive to my addresses. Our School is doing tolerably well: the Natives make considerable advances in their learning. Our Chapel is generally full on the Sabbath; and the hearers give more than ordinary attention. I hope that the time draws near when a Church shall be raised up here, against which the gates of Hell shall not be able to prevail. The Natives of Rangihoua, I hope, have begun to reverence the Sabbath: their attendance on the Means of Grace is a pleasing indication. I hope that the Lord has caused His Word to take root in the hearts of some of the Natives

more immediately connected with us. Their knowledge of the truths of the Gospel is certainly extensive, and their whole deportment is highly gratifying to us. They have regular morning and evening prayer, to our knowledge; and one in particular has for some months past endeavoured to make himself useful to his countrymen. – – - [Mr. J. Shepherd.

Dec. 27-29, 1830 – In looking back upon the past year, I cannot but consider it as, by much, the most eventful one during the existence of this Mission. Disturbances among the Natives we have had continually; and we ourselves have been threatened with danger. Never before has a contest taken place immediately under our eyes, as was the case ten months ago; but this difference among them has been amicably settled. In the mean time, a spiritual change has taken place; having sprung out, as it were, from the wreck of Satan's schemes of mischief. The Natives, who have been for some time connected with us, are shaking off the iron fetters; and, feeling the sweets of liberty, are ready to invite others to share it with them. The number of baptisms, during the past year, in Paihia, is 21; of which 15 were of Adult Natives, and six of European and Native Children. – – - [Rev. W. Williams. .

Jan. 20 ,1831 – The people around us, it is true, are generally desirous of peace; but still, amongst them, there are, here and there, characters who may be denominated common disturbers. These are bound by no law. Each Chief is independent of the other, and does not stand accountable to any. They are so connected by intermarriages, that even an invading party, however distant, could not be repulsed without bringing about our ears those with whom we are immediately connected. Of this, we have latterly seen many instances: consequently, we feel, at present, that it will be more proper to confine ourselves to the duty of Teachers, and mediators in those broils to which they are frequently subject, looking to the Lord our Master for protection in time of danger. A single accident, either of ours or of any of our Natives, might have subjected us to an entire overthrow; but we have been, and are still, protected by the mighty hand of Jehovah; and to Him be all the praise!

The accounts from the southward are distressing. Many have been cut off within the last year. The trade with Port Jackson has considerably extended; consequently, the importation of muskets and powder has been very great. During these four months past, much fighting has taken place amongst a people about thirty miles to the southward. There has also been much fighting in the neighbourhood of EO'keanga. We have a prospect of more tranquillity; but what we fear is, the rekindling of that flame which was extinguished at Kororarika. We are continually with the different parties, and thereby hope to maintain some influence over them: they all treat us with great kindness. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

Jan. 29 – Though wars and rumours of wars are on every side, our Master, whose we are and whom we serve, is very gracious unto us: we are kept in peace. In the eye of the world, our situation might, at the present moment, appear to be one of extreme danger; but,

"We hear a voice they cannot hear;
We see a hand they cannot see:"

and that voice tells us to go forward; and that hand is pledged to protect us, and finally to bring us off more than conquerors, through Him that loved us. – – - [Rev.A. N. Brown.

Feb. 10 – While the Natives on the other side of the Islands have been fighting, some on this side have been praying, and listening to the glad tidings of the Gospel. Two in our School are to be baptized soon: one is a Young Man who has been living with me between three and four years: others are seeking to know and to understand the way of Salvation. The work is the Lord's: He hath begun, and will carry it on. The Schools bid fair to produce a number of Young Men who will be able and willing to instruct their countrymen in the great truths of the Gospel, as the Lord shall open the way before them. – – - [Mr. J. King.

Feb. 25 – The Natives living under our immediate care are well disposed to receive instruction; and I do hope there is a growing desire to be more and more acquainted with the things of God: this desire, I trust, arises from an inward conviction of the vanity of the native superstitions, and of their own insufficiency to do any thing to merit the favour of God. I am also happy to say, that those Natives belonging to our Settlement, who have made a public profession

of the Christian Religion, are walking consistently, and afford us encouragement to persevere in our labours. The Lord has, I trust, begun a good work in this land, which will not stop, but spread further and further; till these Islands shall, from one end to the other, echo with the praises of Jehovah; and Churches be raised up, against which the gales of Hell shall never prevail.

At present, only Mr. Baker and myself remain at the Kerikeri Settlement. We have living in our two families about forty Natives, including men, women, and children, all under a regular course of instruction. The Kerikeri has many advantages, as to the supporting a number of Natives, who may settle around us and form a Christian community; which will doubtless be the case. Many of our Natives are marrying; and some have already families of two and three children, who must be supported: and the only way to us seems to be, by their settling around us, and cultivating the ground; – a most desirable object, which will lessen the Society's expense, and set the Natives on a plan of supporting themselves, while at the same time they live where they may enjoy the benefit of constantly hearing the Word of Life. We do hope that the time is not far distant, when, from amongst our Natives who are seeking the Truth, some will go forth as Teachers to their poor countrymen, to proclaim amongst them the unsearchable riches of Christ. This appears to us the great means by which the conversion to God of this people will be accomplished: and if the Lord should permit us to prepare some of this glorious work, to Him we will ascribe all the praise and glory. – – - [Mr. J. Kemp.

Feb. 26, 1831 – There is, in our Settlement-Natives, a regular and becoming attention to the Word of God, which is spoken to them from time to time. Whilst we would, with gratitude, record instances wherein success has attended our labours, we feel, as we are made to feel, that all glory is due to God. I know that many of our friends in England think, that because we are engaged in Missionary work, our souls are always alive to the Sacred Cause. Would that they were! Believe me, that we need more than ordinary grace, to enable us to live a life of devotedness to God in New Zealand.

We have Natives living with us who can carry their books, and read and preach to their countrymen. I believe, that the Gospel of Christ will spread more by attention to Schools, than by any other means. – – - [Mr. C. Baker.

March 15 – Our Standard, which is hoisted on the Sunday, not only shews the way to God's earthly Court, but stands as a warning to them, and says, Remember the Sabbath &c.: and I have every reason to believe that the Natives do generally cease from work on that day; and many come to the Settlement, to join with the Natives in our families, in worshipping God. I have been living about two months without any fence round my house, and for some time without a lock to my door; and yet have had, comparatively, but little trouble, and no loss of property; being perfectly safe. You remember well what Wareporka said respecting Mr. Baker's going to form the Inland Station; viz. that he would lose both his iron-pot and flour. I am happy to tell you, that I have lost neither the one nor the other; but am enjoying the same temporal blessings, and, I hope, spiritual also, which I enjoyed while living at Kerikeri. – – - [Mr. J. Clarke.

2 At their own request, they were named Martha, Rebecca, Margaret, Samuel, Paul, and Abraham.

3 See our Number for January, pp. 15,18, and 19.

4 See pp. 9-11.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

Australasia Mission – We have heard from Mr. Matthews (p. 58), of his safe arrival at Rio de Janeiro, on the 23d of May. He had been mercifully preserved in the midst of impending danger; a conspiracy having been formed by the Convicts to take the vessel. It was intended to carry their wicked designs into effect, when the officers and crew were assembled on deck for Divine Worship; but their intentions were providentially discovered, and the accomplishment of them happily prevented.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

Australasia Mission – Our intelligence from New Zealand is still of a pleasing character. The Rev. S. Marsden, under date of May 1, writes: –

I received, a few days ago, several Letters from the Missionaries in New Zealand. They were all well, and the Natives are very kind to them. The Rev. W. Yate, Messrs. Davis, Clarke, Hamlin, and Preece reside at Waimate, and are very happy together. Mr. Yate is much delighted with his Station; and all, I believe, are now convinced of its vast importance to the Mission. The Missionaries will be more united than ever. Where there are many residing together, little matters will continually occur to create some unpleasant feelings; but when separated, this danger is avoided. Waimate is also remote from the shipping: they will not be liable to be annoyed by the Masters and crews of vessels.

Church Missionary Record

[New Zealand sections only]

1832

[This book was digitised in partnership with Auckland War Memorial Museum]
http://www.aucklandmuseum.com

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

New Zealand.

COMMUNICATIONS have been received from this Mission to the 17th of September last. From these we carry forward the account of its progress which was given in the September Number of our last Volume (pp. 196-208). Our Readers will rejoice to learn that the blessing of God continues to rest on the labours of His Servants; though they have still to struggle with many difficulties, arising out of the turbulence and barbarism of the Natives, their warlike disposition, and the feuds which exist between the different Tribes, in addition to that enmity of the carnal mind against God which characterizes the whole of our fallen race.

State and Progress of Religion among the Natives.

From the different communications of the Missionaries, we collect the following interesting details of the state and progress of Religion among the Natives.

PAIHIA – June 6, 1831 – Observed this evening, with much delight, the Natives in the Chapel by themselves, as we were all engaged. Unobserved by them, I looked through a back window, and saw the whole sitting in perfect silence and order, with their eyes fixed upon the Youth who was addressing them: as they were by themselves, he felt himself at full liberty, and spoke exceedingly well. These meetings frequently take place.

July 20 – My Boy, Matui, prayed at our Evening Service: he especially begged that we might be preserved from the evil communication of the shipping. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

June 4 – The spirit of inquiry among our Natives does not decline; and those who have made some advance seem to draw after them the more thoughtless. Two of my Boys, who, a year ago, were the most unpromising, are now much altered for the better. They were present in the battle at Kororarika; and, in consequence of their dispositions, were called my soldiers.

June 13 – My Native Boy, Edward, came to me in the evening, and said he had a question to ask. His countenance brightened up as he repeated again, that he had something to ask me about. At length he said: "Will it be correct for the Baptized Natives to have

a meeting to themselves on the night of your Prayer Meeting? Because," he added, "there is one of us who says it will be wrong, because it will be making ourselves like the Europeans." I told him, of course, that they could not employ their evening better. He then inquired how the Spirit works upon the heart. I said, "He brings sin to our knowledge, and enables us to overcome it." – "And does sin return again? Yes," I replied; "and again we must fight with it." – "Aye," said he, "this is my case."

July 15, 1831 – Ururoa, the Chief of Wangaroa, was in the Settlement, speaking of his place, that no vessels ever go near it. We told him, that they are afraid, on account of the cutting-off of the "Boyd." My brother told him, that if Missionaries went, they would not listen to them; for that they had not regarded those who lived there before. His reply is remarkable: "It will not be long before the Natives believe; for the Uriohua have already believed." The Uriohua are a Tribe living near Waimate, the Chief of whom is in a very pleasing state.

July 17: Sunday – At Rangihoua. A greater number of Natives were present at the Morning Service than usual, whom I addressed. Between the Services, I accompanied Mr. Shepherd to the native village. From Mr. King I learnt that a vessel lately put into Rangihoua for supplies: it was direct from Tauranga, where the Captain could procure neither pork nor potatoes for his powder, the Natives telling him that they were reserving them to sell to the Missionaries for blankets, and that they expected them shortly.

Aug. 8 – Returned to Paihia. As I was leaving Waimate, I overtook a Native, who asked me to call and see his father on my way. I inquired if he were ill. "No," he replied; "but I want you to talk to him about the good things."

Aug. 26 – Had an interview with a Chief from Rotorua. He tells us, that he was sent by the principal Chief to ask for a Missionary; that the people wish to sit still and to be instructed. My brother and I promised that the little cutter, the "Karere," should go down, and that we would examine the place. Rotorua is situated a few miles from Tauranga, in the Bay of Plenty. A part of the Tribe was cut off some years ago by EO'ngi, but it still contains as many people as the whole of the Bay of Islands. Tauranga is equally populous; and the two districts together have more inhabitants than are to be found from the Bay of Islands to the North Cape. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

August 30 – A Chief from the southward, whose daughter is living at our house, is now at this place, requesting that a Mission may be formed in his neighbourhood. I do trust that this appeal, Come over and help us, will be answered. It is an important field, on account of the number of Natives: important too, I think, as a means likely, under the blessing of God, to produce a reconciliation between them and the inhabitants of this part of New Zealand, with whom they are now continually at war. They know nothing of Him whom to know is life eternal; and the only intercourse they have with Europeans, is with men who pander to their hateful passions, and keep alive their thirst for bloodshed, by supplying them with muskets and powder in exchange for flax. – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

Sept. 7 – Our Natives in the School are becoming more and more seriously attentive, and inquiring after the things which concern their immortal welfare; whilst those without become daily more pressing for Missionary Visits, as well as for Missionaries to reside amongst them. Several of the Baptized speak to them with a holy boldness, and reprove sin with severity, even in those who are much their superiors in rank – a thing which, under any other circumstances, they dare not do. The seeds of Divine Truth are spreading fast through this land. Many Natives, as far distant as 200 miles from the southward, have had the opportunity of being both eye and ear witnesses of the effect of the Gospel on their countrymen at this place; who, on their return home, have delighted their friends with their recital of (Te mahi o te Mitanere) the work of the Missionary – a term often used by the Natives. They are now calling aloud for Missionaries in almost every part of the Island. They wish, they say, to leave off fighting; but how can they tell what to do, unless the Missionaries go to instruct them. Their calls are loud and frequent; and I do hope the Society will take into their consideration the propriety of establishing a Missionary Station at one of the many eligible places at the southward; as I believe it would tend much, under the Divine Blessing, to break

up their sanguinary wars amongst each other. – – - [Mr. W. Fairburn.

RANGIHOUA: Sept. 12, 1831 – The Natives in general continue to behave well toward us. Those in the School are teaching the Natives around the principal truths of the Gospel. Two have been baptized, and their conduct is consistent. Here is a great stir and inquiry among the Natives about believing in Christ; and much more respect is paid to the Sabbath-day than I ever before witnessed in New Zealand: they are in general ready to hear the Word of God, and to join in Public Worship. [Mr. J. King.

KERIKERI: Sept. 4 – A good feeling continues to be manifested by the Natives who are living in our Settlement, and by others also who attend the Means of Grace on the Sabbath. It is also pleasing to observe a general desire amongst the Natives to cease from all manual labour on the Sabbath; and many make it a point to attend the Place of Worship on that day. A growing attention is paid to the Word of God, whenever it is spoken to them; and also a greater desire to learn to read the Scriptures for themselves.

Mr. Baker superintends the Boys about two hours every morning. Mrs. Chapman attends the Native Girls' School four days in the week, morning and afternoon; Mrs. Kemp and Mrs. Baker assisting her as much as their family circumstances will allow.

The Religious Instruction of the Natives is regularly attended to on two evenings in the week, as well as on the Sabbath, by Mr. Baker, Mr. Chapman, and myself. Our Chapel is well attended on the Sabbath-day by our Natives in the Settlement. Of late, we have had many pressing invitations to go and live more immediately amongst the Natives. Their reasons for wishing us to go among them are, that they may hear more frequently the Word of God – may know and more fully believe in Him whom to know is life eternal. – – - [Mr. J. Kemp.

Sept. 2 – The Natives of our Settlement are very orderly in their general conduct; and there are some who are influenced by religious principles. Those of our Natives who have dedicated themselves to God in Baptism are living a life consistent with their holy profession: they give full proof that a Work of Grace has been begun in their hearts. It is now usual for travelling parties, who are passing through our Settlement, to desist from travelling on the Sunday, and to attend the Means of Grace. We have our Morning Service at 9 o'clock. We afterwards visit a Native Settlement about two miles distant; where we address a company of attentive hearers on the important subject of Religion. Here, too, we have cause for thankfulness for the prospect given us of good being done; as the circumstance of these poor benighted people's listening to the Word of Eternal Life is encouraging to us. The Native School is also going on as well as circumstances will allow us to expect. I am training a few of the more promising Young Men to the interesting employment of teaching their countrymen. This is a point we feel anxious to gain. – – - [Mr. C. Baker.

Sept. 2 – I have generally visited the Natives at the A'huahu and Mangakauakaua, where each party, at their own place, have met together, in one of their kumara (sweet-potatoe) houses, for Service. The number of those who have met at the A'huahu is from 100 to 150; and those at Mangakauakaua from 6O to 100. About a month ago I visited Kaikohi, and spoke to above 200 there. On leaving them, they pressed me very much not to visit them now and then, but to visit them continually; which I promised to do, if I could. Mrs. Hamlin has a Girl in this place, who is, I trust, in the way to Zion, and has done what she could to instil Gospel principles among them. Some of the Natives of our Settlement have also visited them, when we could not. Last Saturday, as I was sharpening a saw, three Natives came and asked if none of us would go and see them; for they had been sitting still on Sundays, waiting for some one to come and teach them the things of God. I spoke to them for some time; and promised them that one of us would go and see them on the morrow, if the weather permitted; but it did not. I think there has been a greater door opened since the battle at Kororarika for the preaching of the Gospel than was ever known before. – – - [Mr. J. Hamlin.

Sept. 11, 1831 – There is much encouragement, both for the Society and for us who are here, to go forward. Many savage New Zealanders, by the grace of God, have renounced the ways of Satan, and turned to the True and Living God. The Natives from many places at a distance are continually coming to invite us to their villages, to speak to them from the Word of God. Numbers have left off working on the Sabbath. It would make

many Professing Christian blush to see the behaviour of these poor Heathens on the Sabbath, contrasted with that of our native country; whose inhabitants call themselves by the name of Christ, but many in life and works deny Him; who have a name to live, but yet are dead in trespasses and sins. – – - [Mr. J. Preece.

Mr. Richard Davis relates the following interesting particulars relative to the influence of the Gospel on the mind of Ripi, a Chief in the vicinity of Waimate.

WAIMATE: Sept. 5 – It will be necessary for me to revert to a conversation which took place at Paihia, on Sunday Evening, September 20, 1829.

Seeing a group of Natives in the Settlement, I went to them, and endeavoured to have a little conversation with them on the eternal interest of their never-dying souls. I found the party to be from Mawi – a place on the borders of the Lake called O'mapere, which lies south-west of our Settlement, about three miles and a half distance – and relations of Taiwanga. Their minds seemed to be very much occupied by the muskets which they had purchased from the shipping, and the manner in which they made their bargains. After I had looked at one of their muskets, I said: "We have no desire that you should not possess muskets and powder; but that you should use them with discretion, and not suffer your minds to be thus engrossed by them: we wish you to think of the salvation of your souls, as well as the salvation of your bodies." Taiwanga, being present, said: "Yes, it will be well for you to think of these things, and to pray to God to give you His Holy Spirit." The principal Chief, Ripi, said: "God will not hear." Taiwanga told him that God would hear, and that He would even listen to his thoughts &c; and that, although he might find his desires small at first, yet God would enlarge them. "Did you not," said Taiwanga, "get that musket, which you have in your hand, from the ship, by asking for it? In like manner will God give you his Holy Spirit, if you ask for it." I then said: "Would you have possessed that gun if you had continued to sit at your place, and not gone to the ship to ask for it?" "No." – "Neither," said I, "will God give you his Holy Spirit, unless you pray for it from your heart."

After the above-mentioned conversation, Ripi was now and then a visitor at our Settlement; and, when there, he always attended the Means of Grace. But when we commenced our roads for this Settlement, about eleven months ago, having several Boys, or rather Young Men, with us, who belonged to Ripi's Tribe, and who were related to him, a connexion was opened between us: Ripi came to see them; and they visited him pretty regularly on Sunday, and, as far as their knowledge went, preached the Gospel. Aparahama, a young man who had been previously baptized at Paihia, seems to have been the principal speaker. At that time Ripi's eldest son was lying very ill, and it was apparent that Aparahama felt anxious for the salvation of his soul. In the course of a few weeks after they commenced their visits, the young man died; and Aparahama told me, he thought that he died a Believer in Jesus Christ. Whether he was capable of judging or not, will be seen at the last Great and Decisive day. As Aparahama is rather a reserved young man, he very seldom said any thing to me on the subject of his visits; but merely, that he thought the Chief, Ripi, a person likely to possess correct thoughts of the things of God. One Saturday, however, when I returned to Paihia, I found that a young man, a slave of Ripi, who was living with me, had received a Letter from Aparahama, in which he pointed out the state of Ripi's mind. On the receipt of the letter, the poor lad, who had been just baptized by the name of William, was much rejoiced. I said to him, "What makes you so happy?" "O!" said he, "should I not rejoice in the prospect there is of the salvation of my master's soul?"

After my arrival here with my family, I went to visit Ripi at his place; and found both him and his people, apparently, attentive hearers of the Word of Life. On the second Sunday, I went in company with Ripi himself, who had been to our Settlement, as an attendant on the Means of Grace, on the morning previous. On our arrival at the Native Village, he whistled loudly; and the Natives assembled, in number about 100, and listened, with apparent attention, again to the Word of Life. Ripi, for some time after this, attempted, and I believe in a great measure succeeded, to introduce Daily Prayer into the Families of his Tribe. After he had succeeded in this attempt, he went to visit his relations at

Kaikohi, which is the district of the tribe. called Natetautahi: it is about ten miles distant from us, and lies nearly in the same direction as Mawi. Here he told the people what he had heard from us and returned much elated with the reception he had met with. As he always sleeps on Saturday nights, with Aparahama, at my place, he told me, on the following Saturday, the manner in which he had been received at Kaikohi by the principal Chief; and requested me to allow some person to go with him, wh0 possessed a greater share of knowledge than he possessed of the things of Christ. Aparahama volunteered to go; and they went away together, and returned the following day. They told me of the manner in which they had been received, &c.; and that the Natives of Kaikohi wished them to return to them again. Ripi said, that when he went at first, the principal Chief received him very graciously; and after he had told him what he had heard from us, respecting the state of the New Zealanders, the Chief said; "Come here, my child: you are my child. It is a long time since you came last to see me; and now, having heard something from the White People which you believe to be good, you are come to make me acquainted with it also: this is very good; but, as you don't know much about it yourself, return, and bring a person with you, from the Missionaries, who understands more of the nature of these things." "That was the reason," said Ripi, "why I wished Aparahama to go with me this time. – Ah!" he said, "I have been thoughtful about the things of God for some time; ever since you spoke to me, on a Sunday Evening, at Paihia." He then rehearsed nearly the whole of the conversation, before mentioned, which took place between us.

When Aparahama returned from his next visit, he said that they had established Prayer among themselves; and that two of them, he thought, were seeking in earnest to know the nature of the good things of God. The poor lad certainly seemed to rejoice in his inmost soul, and with his whole heart, at the prospect of the Gospel being received by these people.

Aparahama and Ripi still continue to visit these people, and seem to be much encouraged in their labours. Yesterday, the old Chief returned, in company with them, to our Settlement, and attended our Evening Lecture: in short, we had several of those Natives here during the whole of Sunday, apparently for the purpose of attending Divine Service.

At the A'huahu, which is a place about a mile on this side of Mawi, there is a congregation of about 100 people, who assemble together regularly, as soon as they see us approaching them, on the Sundays, for the purpose of hearing the word of God: these people also daily meet together for Prayer. At Mawi, their Congregation generally consists of from 100 to 150 people. They have made a road for my horse, nearly half-a-mile in length, through very high fern, and partly through a wood. This was rather a laborious job, as they had to remove many heavy stones, and to roll timber out of the way; but it was done entirely at their own instigation: it has greatly facilitated our visiting them.

I do not pretend to tell you that these natives are converted; but they attend on, and use, the Means of Grace: and in this it is our privilege to rejoice, because we know that faith cometh by hearing. When I go to either of the above-mentioned places, on Sundays, there is scarcely a person to be seen in the villages: I generally find them all collected together in their respective Places of Worship.

Sept. 7, 1831 – There are many rumours abroad, that the Natives are about to strip the Chief, Ripi, and to send him away to Kaikohi altogether, because he goes to speak to his fellow-countrymen about the things of God: but I much doubt their authenticity, although there is no doubt but that, should he prove really serious, he will have his share of persecution. The fact seems to be this: the great body of the people are intending to go to light, or, they say, to make peace, with a party of the Southward, which beat and destroyed a party of the Napui, in fair fighting, some few months ago; and the chief, Wanui, sent Ripi a large piece of lead some time since to make balls for himself, in order that he might be prepared to go with him to the battle: but Ripi refused to be one of the party, and returned the lead, telling them that his mind was altogether altered as to those proceedings, and that it was not his intention to go. With respect to Ripi, he seems to be a consistent character. His wife says, that before he heard of the things of God he was in the habit of swearing at her and using very harsh language; but that he his now left that off, and only speaks kindly to her.

Progress of Translation.

This important branch of the labours of the Missionaries is steadily carried forward; though, from the care which is taken to secure a faithful, perspicuous, and idiomatic translation, progress is necessarily slow.

April 20 & 21, 1831 – Held a Language Meeting at Paihia; which was attended by Mr. Yate, W. Puckey, and myself. We revised 4 Chapters and a-half of Matthew for the press. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

April 28 – We have lately made a different arrangement with respect to the language. The revision is left to a Committee, consisting of Mr. Williams, William Puckey, and myself. In two days last week, we prepared 191 verses of St. Matthew's Gospel for the Press. We shall not, however, be able to print it here. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

We insert the general confession in the New-Zealand Language; with a literal translation.

E te Matua, atawai, kaha rawa!
O the Father, merciful good, strong-est very!

kua he matou, kua marara ke i ou
been wrong we, been scattered distant from Thy

ara me te hipi ngaro. Kua wakarongo
paths as the sheep lost. Been hearkened

matou ki nga hiahia o-o matou ngakau; kua
we to the desires of our hearts; have

tutu matou ki ou ture tapu; ko nga mea
disobeyed we to the Thy Laws Holy; the things

tika i tukua noatia e matou;
straight let go for nought by us (have been, im-

kua oti te mea e matou nga mea ko
plied); finished the thing by us things that

te tikanga kei te wakarere; a kahore
the good would be to cast away; and not

he ora i a matou. Oti ko koe, E Jhowa,
a life in us. But Thou, O Jehovah,

kia tohu i a matou, te hunga pouri rawa i
be saving to us, the people dark-ened by

te hara! E te Atua, tohungia ratou e waki
the sin! O the God, spare them confessing

ana i o ratou hara! Wakaorangia ratou e
are their sins! Save them who

ripeneta ana; kia rite hoki ki ou meanga
repenting are; like as to thy sayings

i wakakitea ki te tangata i a Jhu Karaiti
showed to the men by Jesus Christ

to matou Ariki! A tukua mai hoki ki
our Lord! And let go come hither to

a matou, E te Matua, atawai: mona i
us, O the Father, merciful; because he

mate, ko a matou mea, hoki ake nei,
died, that our work, (thing) hereafter

kia tapu, kia tika, kia marie tonu; ki te
be sacred, be straight, be calm very; to the

kororia hoki o tou ingoa tapu! Amine.
glory of Thy Name Holy! Amen.

State of the New Settlement at Waimate.

The new Settlement at Waimate, the formation of which was stated in our Number for February of last year (pp. 28-34), is advancing with the most encouraging prospect of its realizing the views with which it was undertaken. It is peculiarly gratifying to observe the bearing which this Settlement is likely to have, through the Divine Blessing, on the diffusion of the Gospel among the Tribes in the interior of the Island.

April 28 – On the 14th instant we arrived safely here with our family, and took possession of our new house. It is at present rather cold, as we have no chimney, and our house is neither wind nor water tight; but I hope to be able to make it more comfortable in a short time. The Natives have hitherto behaved pretty well to us, and I trust there is a prospect of usefulness before us: consequently we have every reason to expect that Satan will endeavour to bring his forces against us in some shape or other, in order to hinder our usefulness, so that he may be able to hold his goods in peace; but the counsel of Jehovah must stand, and He will do all his pleasure, in spite of every effort which Satan, with his withered, puny arm, can bring against Him or His Cause.

I much fear that this Settlement will, for the present, add considerably to the expenses of the Mission; but, as an individual, I cannot for a moment doubt of its utility. – – - [Mr. R. Davis.

April 29 – I am happy to inform you that, since my last, I have commenced a Native School at Waimate, and have the pleasing prospect of its being largely attended: between 70 and 80 attend, for daily instruction. Our prospect of present and future usefulness is very pleasing. We are surrounded by Natives, many of whom seem quite prepared to receive Religious Instruction. The Natives in the villages about us so far respect the Sabbath, as generally to cease from work on that Sacred Day: this affords us a good opportunity of communicating Religious Instruction to them. Numbers attend our Public Instruction; which puts us to the pleasing necessity of erecting, with all possible speed, a little Chapel, to serve as a School-room also: the whole will be done without the assistance of any other mechanic than those connected with the Settlement; and, indeed, with very little assistance from them, any further than a general superintendence; the Natives living with us being quite competent to the undertaking. I mention this

circumstance not only to show the progress which the Natives are making, but also to remove from the minds of the Committee the least apprehension of involving them in any additional expense by the erection of the above-mentioned building. – – - [Mr. G. Clarke.

May 13, 1831 – Rewa, and several other Chiefs, came up from the sea this morning, to pay us a visit, and to wonder at the progress which has been made in the new Settlement at Waimate. They were all very particular in their inquiries; and wished to know how it was that so much more work was done by White People, and by Natives being with them, than by Natives living in the bush. I told them that White People use their hands, and Natives only their mouths. – – - [Rev. W. Yate

Aug. 5-7 – At Waimate. The temporal concerns of this Settlement have made a very rapid progress, and speak much for the activity of those who reside here. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

Sept. 2 – When I last wrote to you, I had just removed with my family inland, into a house purposely built for a store; but which will, nevertheless, be my dwelling-house, till another can be erected. I have since been employed in finishing the same, and in making some addition to it. I have also been employed in digging a well, having at least to go a quarter of a mile to fetch water. This, for the present, is finished; but, as the water is not more than three feet in depth, I fear I shall have to dig deeper when the summer returns. The water, however, is very good: the well is 44 feet deep. I have, further, been employed with my Natives in clearing an acre and a half of land, which is sown with wheat; and in fencing it in. – – [Mr. J. Hamlin.

Sept. 5 – At present we have done but little in agriculture; and our doings in that branch cannot be extensive for some time to come; as we have all our buildings and mechanical labour on our own hands, in order that the Station should be formed at the least expense possible. We have succeeded in putting in two and a half acres of wheat; but, at present, it does not look so well as I could wish. Breaking up the land and preparing it for the plough, I fear, will be attended with great labour; but, if spared, I have no doubt we shall succeed, by a steady perseverance. – – - [Mr. R. Davis.

Sept. 6 – Hitherto the Settlement has exceeded our most sanguine expectations; and we have to praise and bless our Heavenly Father, for such an opening of usefulness in this land, and for permitting us to be the honoured instruments.

Before we had time to make our temporary abodes fairly habitable, we were compelled, by the number of Natives who came on the Sunday for instruction, to leave for a time our own dwellings, for the purpose of erecting a Place of Worship. We commenced a weather-board building 40 feet by 20, in the beginning of May; and by the beginning of July it was so far completed, as to enable us to use it as a Place of Worship for our Public Services; and, to the praise and glory of our Heavenly Father, it has been well filled ever since! This used not to be the case in New Zealand. What is not God doing, for His own Name's sake, among these poor Heathen! On account of the great demand on our time in the formation of a new Station, we have not been able to visit the Natives at a distance from us, only on Sunday; but in our Sunday Visits we are greatly refreshed by the Natives assembling themselves together for Religious Instruction. But a very little time ago we were obliged to go from house to house, and were glad if we could only find a few poor Women who would listen to our instruction; but now they begin to assemble in Congregations of from 50 to 200, to listen to the blessed Gospel of Peace. We feel very much the advantages of our Sunday Visits. We have an opportunity of observing the general disposition of the Natives respecting the Day of Rest. They formerly used to tell us they had no one among them to remind them of the Sabbath, nor to instruct them: now, they feel that they have no plea on that head, and I am glad to say that hitherto they have ceased from work on the Lord's Day; for, in passing from village to village, I rarely see a Native at work. Indeed I may with propriety say, that the Sunday, for miles round, is better regarded than in many countries called Christian. The establishment of the Sabbath gives us another advantage. We feel that on that day we have a demand on their attention: they cannot make their business an excuse; and Satan is thereby thrust out of one of his strongholds. We feel also that we are better providing for the instruction of the poor Slaves, by giving them one day out of seven to attend to Religious Instruction; and I am very thankful to see the Slave beginning to claim his day of rest, and his

master allowing the justness of his claim. While, however, we have every encouragement, both from the precious promises of God and from the signs of the times, yet I hope no mistake will arise from my statements. Let it be remembered, that various are the motives from which the poor Heathen act: some from a desire of conformity – some for the sake of the loaves and fishes – some out of a deep-rooted superstition – attend the Means of Grace. There are also, I trust, many who are anxious to know the Truth as it is in Jesus; yet, whatever be the motives which actuate the poor Heathen, we do and will rejoice in such opportunities of pointing out to them Christ the hope of glory, the sinner's Friend, and Saviour of a lost and guilty world; not doubting but that that will be the means of still further breaking the strong-holds of sin and Satan, and of eventually introducing them into the full liberty of the Children of God.

I have thought fit to make the above cautionary remarks, because at present all is novel. We have been here but a few months; and there is considerable excitement among the Natives, arising from our living immediately among them. For the last four months, I have been able to carry on a Boys' School at Waimate; and our partners have pretty regularly attended the Girls' School. Several of the Boys from the villages attend; and I do hope soon to see the Children of the villages instructed at a very little expense to the Society: those who attend from the villages being no further expense to the Society than imply their instruction. Our local situation is such as to enable our Wives also to visit the Females at the villages, and to give them instruction on points more immediately connected with Female Duties. We have a number of Natives living in our different families; and the conduct of several is truly Christian. Several are on probation for Baptism, whose conduct is pleasing, and, on the return of our dear friend, Mr. Yate, will be admitted to that Ordinance. As it respects the Agricultural Concern, I think there is a good prospect of its succeeding well in the course of a few years; and I do not hesitate to say that it is only in the farming establishment that any extra expense will be incurred by our inland Station; but the farming will, I hope, eventually lessen the expenses of the Mission, as well as prove both beneficial to the Natives at large and to our own Children. – – - [Mr. G. Clarke.

Sept. 11, 1831 – Waimate appears to me to be a most promising Station. It is situated in a plain, which extends nearly as far as the eye can reach, surrounded by all the beauties that Nature can present, and in the midst of Native Villages. In a short time, as soon as the Natives have made a few more roads, we can visit all the villages from this one Station; and nearly 3000 individuals may hear the glad tidings of the Gospel of Christ every Sabbath. – – - [Mr. J. Preece.

Proposal for the Formation of a New Settlement.

One of the favourable indications of the present state of this Mission is the growing facilities which are afforded for the formation of new Settlements. The principal Chief of Rotorua has expressed his desire to have a Missionary settled with him, for the instruction of his people. The Rev. William Williams thus notices the subject to the Committee, in a Letter dated Sept. 1, 1831: –

We have, during the last week, received an application from the principal Chief of Rotorua, which is situated in the Bay of Plenty, stating that he wishes to have a Missionary to teach his people. I questioned one of the Natives, and expressed a doubt whether he did not wish for Missionaries because they possess blankets. He replied: "No: he wishes that his people should sit quietly, and believe; and that, if Europeans do not go at present, some Natives may go, who are able to instruct them." Rotorua is about as far from Tauranga as the distance is from Paihia to Wangaroa; but at either of these places singly are as many Natives as are to be found in the whole Bay of Islands.

Mr. Williams adds –

Again, at the North Cape, where the inhabitants are as numerous as at Tauranga, a fine field is open. The people are on good terms with those of the Bay of Islands, and are at peace among themselves.

It was the view of Mr. Williams, that two Europeans, with two or more Baptized Natives, should be placed at Rotorua or Tauranga, and a similar number of each class at the North Cape. The only obstacle to

the execution of these promising plans for extending the Mission, is, the depressed state of the Society's Funds. The Committee have requested the Missionaries to prepare, with care, an estimate of the expense which would be incurred by the formation of anew Settlement; and will very thankfully sanction the extension of their operations, should the funds of the Society admit of their doing so.

At an earlier period of the Mission, it was necessary to concentrate a large number of Europeans at each Station, for their personal safety, and to afford them the means, at the same time, to itinerate in the neighbourhood of it. Now, the Missionaries have, happily, so gained the confidence of the Natives, even in distant parts of the Island, that this necessity no longer exists; and individuals may be spared from some of the old Stations, to engage in the formation of new ones. By this arrangement, the expense of forming a new Station will be much less than it would otherwise be. The manner, too, in which the Missionaries are now enabled to avail themselves of the agency of the more advanced and baptized Natives both facilitates and encourages the extension of their labours.

The Missionaries' unavoidable Secular Employment.

The peculiar nature of this Mission imposes on the Missionaries the necessity of occupying themselves in a variety of secular employments, some of which are very laborious. These are very irksome to the Missionaries, from the extent to which they occupy that time which would otherwise be employed in a manner more congenial to their feelings. Under the actual circumstances of the Mission, however, they cheerfully perform the duties thus, for a season, providentially imposed upon them; and from which they will, we trust, be in a great measure relieved, at no distant period, by the steady progress of the Mission. A few extracts from the Rev. Henry Williams's Journal will serve to impress the minds of our Readers with a lively idea of the nature of these employments.

June 27, 1831 – Commenced mixing mortar, and building chimney at the School-house. Much interruption from the Natives.

June 29 – At work on the chimney.

July 1 – Returned to Paihia, and resumed my work at the chimney.

July 7 – Engaged with bricks and mortar.

July 16 – Employed all the week plastering the School; and to-day commenced building the chimneys. Laborious work! though several of the Native Boys are now very useful, and able to take our place in this dirty work.

July 18 – Employed still on the chimneys.

July 26 – Various points of business to settle with the Natives, which occupied nearly all day.

July 27 – Settled with Hiamoe and others respecting some land in immediate connexion with the Settlement.

July 28 – Occupied finishing off Mr. Brown's house.

Sept. 8 – All the afternoon employed at Mr. Brown's house, anxious for its completion, that the School may be commenced.

Sept. 9, 10 – At work at Mr. Brown's house.

It may be considered, by some, to be out of my place thus to be toiling at bricks and mortar &c. while Mr. Yate is otherwise employed; but be it remembered, that family men here have a great weight and responsibility to endure: they are dependent upon one another; and, as they constantly require the assistance of their neighbours, so must they give in return: thus are we, therefore, without distinction, required to assist ourselves, and all who may stand in need; and I trust that our children and grandchildren will behold, for years to come, with pleasure and admiration, those exquisite pieces of work which their forefathers accomplished in the infant state of things in this land.

Disputes & Commotions among the Natives.

The feuds which exist among the Native Tribes, arising out of their mutual hostilities and injuries, keep

them in a state of constant excitement and commotion, and involve the Missionaries in much difficulty and inconvenience. The influence of the Missionaries, in allaying the animosities of the Natives, and restraining their warlike propensities, is a happy consequence of the confidence which the Chiefs repose in the Missionaries; though they are not always successful in their benevolent endeavours to prevent war and bloodshed.

March 6, 1831: Sunday – Went to Waitangi. News had just arrived, that a party of about fifty Natives from Takou, – a bay to the North of Rangihoua – which went down to the Southward about two months ago, to kill all who came in their way, are entirely cut off at Tauranga, after having done very much mischief. The old Chief of Takou was at Waitangi: he has lost two sons and two nephews, besides many relations. He says that it serves them right, because he did not wish them to go; but that it will be necessary to go and seek satisfaction for their death.

March 11 – Visited the Natives at Otuihu. A few Natives, belonging to Wangaruru, joined the expedition from Takou which has been cut off at the Southward. A large party from inland, friends of the people of Wangaruru, are now gone thither to eat up the food of those who have been killed, while the children and wives will be left destitute. This is New-Zealand sympathy! – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

May 3 – This late disturbance takes its rise from the affair at Kororarika, where EO'ngi was killed by a Chief from the Northward. After peace with these people had been effected, his sons conducted a party to the Southward, to seek satisfaction for the death of their father: at this time peace existed between them and the party against whom they were going; but they were in quest of blood, and consequently regarded no law: every one was their enemy, and their hand was directed against every one. After killing vast numbers, who were unprepared for such an attack, they, in their turn, got cut off to a man. The accounts from the Southward are very distressing; and generally through the improper conduct of English Captains of Vessels, who have been on the coast for flax, &c. &c.; and we are prepared to hear of very extensive mischief, even upon our own people.

I think I may say that the people hereabout are in a promising state. These disturbances bring us into closer contact with them; and we are thereby enabled to give our Message wide circulation: Natives from distant parts are brought within hearing. They acknowledge the evil of fighting: "But," say they, "when we buy a gun, we must needs go and prove it." They have frequently told us to write to King George to prohibit ships from bringing guns and powder; and though they express their joy on the arrival of ships, still their better judgment is against the traffic in these things. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

June 15 – A small cutter has returned from Tauranga, which left the Bay about a fortnight before. When she went, she took from Rangihoua thirty Natives, headed by the Chief, Wareporka, who went on board for the purpose of ascertaining the truth of a report that a sister of his had been killed by the people of that place. Their intention was to fight, taking advantage of being on board the vessel. As it happened, they returned without doing any mischief, because they were overawed by the superiority of numbers. Had they accomplished their object, the blame, according to English views, would have rested on the Captain. It is this kind of conduct which contributes much to render communication with distant Tribes unsafe. A similar case lately occurred at the Southward, in which many Natives were cut off; and the Captain has been tried for his life in the Colony. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

July 23 – We have been threatened, for some days, with a mob from the Waitangi Natives, to kill, burn, and destroy all before them. The cause of offence is not in our own Natives, but in some strangers who are staying here. The party arrived at Waitangi, from inland, this afternoon. Towards sunset, I was told that Mahikai, brother to the principal Chief, was at my door, with a wound through his wrist. The case was, he came to the Settlement to speak to me; but he was urged past my door, by a Chief in company with him, on to the place where the offending Natives were living. Mahikai here met with the brother of Taiwanga; and, in the act of giving him a push, he received, though

accidentally, a wound through the wrist, from a bayonet. Toe, the brother of Taiwanga, immediately gave the wounded man the bayonet, a musket, and a blanket, as a compensation. When I had dressed the wound, he told me that he was come to ask us whether the mob should wait till Monday, as the next day was Sunday. This circumstance exhibits to us an entirely new mode of warfare; consulting the wishes of the opponents, rather than their own naturally impetuous dispositions. – – - [Rev. W. William*.

Mahikai would not have hesitated to have the other arm served in the same way, for the sake of a similar payment. After dark, the alarm was given, that the Natives had come from Waitangi, on account of Mahikai's hand. Before I could get out, several muskets were discharged, and a few shot passed over our heads. I took some of our Young Men belonging to the party, and went to Waitangi, to learn the reason of this nightly visit, as being altogether out of order. Old Marupo at first was very angry, and used very threatening language; but he gradually grew milder, and desired that some of us would visit them in the morning. Returned home at midnight. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

July 24, 1831: Sunday – My brother went to Waitangi, during the time of our Morning Service, to keep the mob quiet; and I went, for the same purpose, in the afternoon. I could not gain much attention from the people, when conversing on religious matters: they were too much bent on mischief. Their fire-arms were all arranged in a row, more than sixty in number. They settled that some of us were to go with them the following morning; and that they would not move towards our Settlement till we went.

July 25 – My Brother and Mr. Fairburn went off early this morning to Waitangi. In the mean time, our Natives were in great suspense, being doubtful as to what extremities the mob might proceed to. At ten o'clock they approached, being preceded by my brother; and when about a third of the distance through the Settlement, they made their rush toward the house occupied by the offending parties: before, however, they reached the place, they were stopped short by some of the Chiefs. Marupo, their leader, then came forward; and directing himself principally to David Taiwanga, he gave him a good scolding, because his brother had accidentally wounded the Chief on Saturday. This harangue ended by Marupo rubbing Taiwanga's nose; when, finding that the matter was here to terminate, we entertained our visitors with a mess of boiled flour. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

It was proposed to them by the Missionaries, that instead of stripping and firing the man's house, according to their native custom, the little property belonging to the offender should be brought out, and given quietly as a compensation. This arrangement they seemed satisfied with; but after venting their anger in a long speech, and partaking of a large mess of boiled flour, they all went contentedly away, without taking any thing as an U'tu (price). – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

The turbulent conduct of the Natives occasionally involves the Missionaries in difficulties. The following; extract from the Rev. H. Williams's Journal presents an instance of this, and of the prudence and temper of the Missionaries in resisting; and controlling their impetuosity.

August 17 – Went up the river, in consequence of some Natives having commenced planting in our ground. Wakaria pulling up the seed-potatoes, upon the plea of not having received any payment for the ground: had a good deal of trouble with him.

August 18 – Very unpleasant conversation with Natives, relative to our settling amongst them, and taking their land. Heard that some strangers were fencing at Waitangi, upon our ground, without leave; at which we were much perplexed: however, felt determined, by the grace of God, to resist these encroachments. Went up the river with Tohitapu and Pumuka. Wakaria there, with several others: he danced about in good style, as we approached the place, bidding us defiance; at which we laughed heartily at him. After a good deal of talking, we marked a portion of ground for him; and told all present we did not want the ground for ourselves, but for those Natives who were living with us. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

Desolating Effects of Natives' Wars.

The desolating; effects of the wars which take place between the different Tribes are affectingly depicted in the following passages.

March 5 – Went to Rangihoua. A desperate battle has been fought at the Southward. Only one man has returned,

out of the party that went from Takou and the neighbourhood, consisting of 20 Chiefs and about 40 slaves, with 7 canoes and 2 cannon. It is stated that this party, before they were cut off, had surprised and destroyed, at different places, three hundred Natives. One of the Takou Chiefs who was slain had lived with me several months, and attended the school at Paihia. The hands of the Missionaries in this land would often hang down, and their hearts fail, were it not for the thought that the work in which they are employed is the Lord's; who will assuredly, in His own good time, accomplish all that He has spoken in His Word for the encouragement of His people. – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

Sept. 7, 1831 – Two months ago I went round the Coast, about forty miles distance. I took Rawiri with me – a baptized Native, formerly Taiwanga, a name well known in the Register. He is a man of considerable information respecting his own country, men, and manners. As soon as we had cleared the Heads of the Bay of Islands, he called my attention to the many deserted and desolate fortifications and villages along the coast, many of which I have not the least doubt he had formerly taken an active part in the destruction of: not a vestige of either smoke or fire was to be seen – the Native mode of welcoming strangers. "But where are all the inhabitants?" I asked. "Killed, taken slaves, and the rest dispersed," was the reply. "Is Hatana (Satan) idle? Is it not his own work?" asked he. – – - [Mr. W. Fairburn.

Depredations of the Natives.

While the following instances exhibit the thievish propensities of the Natives in a somewhat ludicrous point of view, they also show, that there are now, among them, those who feel the obligations of justice and honesty.

May 14, 1831 – Went down to Rewa's residence, and visited the Wakatohea Natives, who are come down from the southward, and have placed themselves under the care of the Matakaraha. They are a sad thievish set. Whilst I was talking to them they stole part of my bridle. I, however, accused them of the theft, and they instantly restored the stolen property. The same persons, a short time ago, picked the nails out of the blacksmith's bellows; and when we searched for them, we found them concealed in their mouth. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

July 9 – A party of Natives, from inland, came by night and stole two blankets, and a few trifling articles; but they no sooner arrived at Waitangi than they were deprived of their booty by a Chief living there, who brought the things back to the Settlement the next morning. Among the things which they took was a bag of lime, which they supposed to be flour; but, having carried it a short distance, they found out their mistake, and left it. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

Native Feasts.

The Natives occasionally assemble in great numbers for a Hahunga, or Feast. The following particulars relative to two of these festivals are extracted from the Rev. W. Yate's Journal: –

March 18, 1831 – I went to see the feast that is prepared, which is to, be distributed on Monday next. Many hundreds of Natives were present; all peaceable, and in good humour one with another. There are upward of 1000 bushels of potatoes, in as many baskets, piled upon one another in a strong frame, erected in the shape of a pyramid, thirty-four feet diameter at the base, about eighty feet high, terminating in a point. The pile was decorated with flags, made of Tongatapu cloth; and put me very much in mind of the prints of the Temple of Juggernaut, which I have seen in the Missionary Register. There was here and there suspended a joint of beef and a joint of pork, with a quantity of young shark dried in the sun, which is considered a great delicacy by the Natives; indeed it would not be a feast without it. I never recollect having heard such a confusion of sounds before – men dancing and singing – lads playing the native flute – children crying – women squabbling – dogs barking – guns firing – and all at the same moment. I was really glad when I could get away. The grand speaking-day is to be Monday; when we shall all attend, and put in our word; which we hope, by the blessing of God, will not be without its effect. The whole body of Natives have promised to sit still tomorrow, as it is the Sabbath, and not to continue their feasting and merriment until the next day. I could not help wishing that some of our good English friends could have a peep at us: I think they would have enjoyed it for a short, though only for a short, time. We feel it our duty to go amongst the Natives

at such times; as, by our presence, we certainly prevent many abominations; and if we interfere in their matters of pleasure, and enter into conversation with them respecting their little diversions, we can, with a better grace, interfere when they assemble for warlike purposes, and are bent on spreading misery and devastation around them.

June 13 & 14, 1831 – Went to Owaiawai, with 29 of our Natives, to a Hahunga. About 5000 persons were assembled together. There were 3000 bushels of kumara (sweet potatoes) for presents: 2000 more would be consumed; with 290 pigs, which had been killed for the occasion. My portion of the feast was 25 bushels of kumara and 4 pigs. I had the pigs sent me alive. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

Sympathy of the Missionaries with their Native Country.

The communications from New Zealand contain the following affecting instance of the sympathy of the Missionaries with their Native Country, in the season of her distress and peril.

July 20 – Last Thursday we received Letters and Publications from England, and heard of the great political, commercial, and agricultural distress which prevails among our dear fellow-countrymen. I thought it desirable to appoint this day, in the two Settlements of Kerikeri and Waimate, for humbling ourselves before God. Accordingly, I held Service at Kerikeri in the morning, and preached from Psalm ix. 9, 10; and in the evening at Waimate. Though so widely separated from Britain, and not here politically connected with her, being from under the protection of her laws, we are in other points identified with her. She cannot be in distress and we not be distressed also; she cannot mourn and we not mourn; she cannot rejoice and we not rejoice. We have, in some measure, been partakers of the nation's sins: we must expect also to be partakers of her sorrows. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

We purpose lo make some further extracts from the communications of the Missionaries in our next Number.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AGREEABLY to the intimation given in our last Number (p. 67), we resume our extracts from the communications of the Missionaries in New Zealand.

Exercise of the Ministry in the Settlements.

The following passages present a gratifying view of the effects of the Ministerial Labours of the Missionaries in the several Settlements.

PAIHIA: April 24, 1831 – In the after-noun held Service, when three canoes came over from Kororarika, with Ware, Haumia, and others: after tea, I went to them, and had a most pleasing conversation with Haumia; but Ware, too much like his father, rejected every word, and turned away. With Haumia, however, I was much delighted. I do not remember, at any time, any party appearing more interested. The resurrection of the body gained their attention; and they expressed their delight at the idea of young and old being alike, and at the prospect of that eternal rest which remaineth for the Children of God. They asked many questions respecting the time of our going to visit them; as they said they should certainly soon believe, were we to go to them frequently. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

April 26 – In a conversation with some of our Natives, I was told of some very promising inquiries made by a Chief at the Kauakaua. He came to the Native Youth, who mentioned the circumstance, at break of day, and said, "I want you to talk to me about the things of God." He replied: "I cannot, because I am not a believer myself; but am only inquiring, like yourself." The Chief continuing to urge the point, the lad spoke to him to the best of his abilities.

July 2 – Baptized a sick girl to-day, named Tuhi, who has been declining in health for some months past. Before the commencement of her illness, she had, I believe, no serious impressions; but during her illness she has been frequently visited by some of the Baptized Natives; through whose instrumentality, for the most part, she has been brought to her present state of mind. I have for some time past considered her a fit subject for Baptism; as the declaration of her faith was simple and clear, though unaccompanied by that bright evidence which we sometimes witness. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

March13 – Our hearts have been rejoiced to-day, at witnessing three more Natives publicly taking upon themselves, in the Ordinance of Baptism, the profession of Christ and Him crucified. They were named Edward, William, and Henry. – – - [Rev, A. N. Brown.

KERIKERI: Tuesday, Nov. 16, 1830 – This evening I married, according to the Form set forth in the Church of England, four of our domestic natives, Hongi and Ruhi – Wahanga and Pahuia. They were very serious during the ceremony, which was performed in presence of all the Natives in the Settlement. I translated the Form in the morning, and read it over to them before they went up to the Chapel. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

WAIMATE: Sunday, Aug. 6, 1831 – At Morning Service we had a very good Congregation, about half of which consisted of strange Natives, who voluntarily come together for the purpose of instruction. In the Chapel at Waimate I perceived a young man who about three years ago was living at Paihia for about a fortnight, when he made off with a volume of Matthew Henry, belonging to my brother; which he afterwards sold for five pigs. I was told by Mr. Davis that he now regularly frequents the Chapel, coming a distance of three miles for the purpose. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

May 12 – This evening spoke to our Natives from the Parable of the Lost Sheep: some of them seemed much affected. One of the boys after Service told me, as a great secret, that all the

time of Service he tried to think good thoughts; but that something, he did not know what, always came and pushed them all out. "What," added he, "am I to do? – and how is it that a Native Man's heart is so deceitful, when a White Man's – a Missionary's – is so true?" Poor fellow! he little thinks what we have to contend with, and how many vain and evil thoughts rush in upon us and spoil our most sacred services.

May 22, 1831: Sunday – Preached, and administered the Sacrament to the Europeans at Kerikeri in the Morning; and conducted the same Service at the Waimate in the Afternoon. In the Evening, addressed the Natives in the Settlement on the influences of the Holy Spirit upon the heart. They all said, when I had concluded: "Well, if it is true what you have now said, we are none of us Christians," or, as they express it, "we are none of us Christified." They further said: "Our thoughts tell us that you are right; but what are we to do? We cannot help our thoughts; and our hearts being bad, we were born bad, and there's an end of the matter. Why did not you come before we were born, and make our parents good? then we should have been born good: the fault rests with you, not with us." Of course, I had to correct their erroneous opinions with respect to the sinfulness of our nature. – – - [Rev W. Yate.

Sept. 5 – We have now a few Natives who are Candidates for Baptism in this Settlement; but some of them do not make so much progress in Divine Knowledge as is desirable. Since we have been here, one of my Natives has been baptized; and has subsequently died, I trust, a believer in Jesus Christ. [Mr. R. Davis.

Itinerating among the Natives.

Itinerating among the Natives has long been a regular part of the Missionaries' labours in New Zealand. The following passages illustrate the beneficial effects of this practice.

Feb. 27, 1831: Sunday – Went to Kororarika. A party of strangers, from Wangaruru, was very attentive. One of the Chiefs, to my surprise, had a great deal to say about Tatai, one of our Natives, who died at the examination, having been baptized. He told, the rest that he, Tatai, did not suffer as the Natives generally do; and that, though he was in pain, he did not complain; and that he was anxious to die, that he might go to heaven. Such a testimony from a stranger, shows that he believed there is some reality in this new way. Another party, consisting of residents at the place, I was obliged to pass by; they were so much engrossed by their own concerns. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

March 23 – Went up the Kauakaua, to propose our having a small Settlement, for the purpose of more regular instruction: was kindly received. Observed a considerable improvement in their attention: several have been inquiring after truth. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

March 27 – Visited the Natives at Otuihu. A large assemblage came together at two different places. The sight of all the Principal Chiefs rising, at call, from their own concerns, and following a Missionary to the spot which he may select as the place for religious conversation, could not fail to strike those European Sailors who live at this place, and would much gratify any one interested in the cause. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

April 1 – Went, after Service, with Mr. H. Williams, to Kororarika. The Natives did not appear to pay much attention; but one of the Chiefs remarked – "We do attend to what you say, in making peace with each other; but we cannot understand your 'karakia' (preaching)." – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

April 25 & 26 – Visited the Natives at some distance from the Settlement. Slept in my little tent at the A'huahu. In the evening of Tuesday returned to Waimate, thoroughly wearied with my day's work, having spoken to 23 different parties of Natives – in all amounting to 391, not including the Children. I never met with such attention before: all seemed eager to understand what I said to them. At Taumatawerowero and Torangatua, they were particularly attentive; and one old man asked many questions; while his wife, with a volubility and jabber peculiar to this land, denied all that I said, and declared that she knew much better than I did, for she was so much older. At another place, a poor blind old woman was very inquisitive; and wanted to know whether, if she had lived in the times of the Saviour, He would have restored her to sight. I told her that He was here now, and willing, if she asked Him, to restore to her the sight of her mind. She said, "Well, then I will go to Him, as soon

as I am free from this tapu (being made sacred) which is upon me. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

April 27, 1831 – Went up the Kauakaua, with three of our Baptized Natives. We separated in different directions: and were thus enabled, in the space of two days, to visit nearly all the people in the district. Many of the Natives are very anxious to have instruction. We have a rush-house preparing for our own accommodation, and the Natives are about to prepare a Chapel at their own expense. When this is built, we have promised to hold Service there every Sunday, as at Paihia. A Chief, and his wife, I found to be very desirous after information, and the remarks which they made indicate much sincerity. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

May 12 – Went up the Kauakaua, to see the Natives: had much difficulty to stem the current, owing to the late rains. My Boys had erected a very good house, in which we were very glad to shelter ourselves from the cold, and kindle a fire. Very many came and attended our Evening Service: they behaved very well, and made many inquiries. Many old men were present.

May 29: Sunday – After Service, went to Waitangi. Saw Kahakaha and party – was very much pleased with them: though many of them were out of the Bush, and had had little communication with Europeans, none attempted to contradict our statements, but asked many pleasing questions. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

May 31 & June 1 – Visited the Natives at Waiawai. Upward of 200 listened attentively to the sound of the Gospel. They were preparing for a great feast, which they are going to give to the Nga-te-wake. As the night was very rainy, I pitched my tent under a shed, which was erected for the visitors at the feast. The Chief of the place came and sat for nearly two hours; when I told him all our object in coming to this land. He answered very sensibly; and acknowledged the entire ignorance of the native mind before we arrived; and their continued ignorance, because of their inattention, since our arrival. In the morning I was awaked long before I wished – for I had but little sleep, being very cold during the night – by an old man, named Taki, coming to tell the news of a party of Natives having left home on a war-expedition to the Southward. At half-past seven, I mounted my little poney, and rode to Taiamai and Manawenua. It was raining hard, and was bitterly cold. I was, however, abundantly paid for my journey, by the marked attention of the inhabitants of this populous district. They told me, that they did not like the Christian Religion, for it made people too good for them. Their hearts, they said, were rejoiced at evil, and were averse to good. Returned to Waimate in the evening, cold, wet, and weary; but much gratified with this my first visit to Taiamai and Manawenua. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

June 12 – In the afternoon went over to Taiamai: spoke at several places; some very attentive, others laughed exceedingly at the idea of the resurrection of the body.

June 13 – Went to Owaiawai: a great assemblage of Natives, all preparing their temporary houses. In the evening, conversed with some of the leading men on the general feeling of the Natives relative to Tauranga: much satisfied with what passed. About sixty of our Natives, belonging to the other Settlements, assembled at Evening Prayers; to the great astonishment of many, who had never witnessed these things before.

June 26 – After Service, went to Kororarika, to see the Natives. A dreadful place – the very seat of Satan! The Natives very far beyond the Europeans in behaviour. – – - [Rev H. Williams.

Sept. 2 – Itinerating amongst the Natives, for the purpose of publishing the Gospel, has been a great means of bringing the Natives to their present state of good feeling toward us; and has, no doubt, been attended with good to the souls of many. – – - [Mr. C. Baker.

The Rev. H. Williams thus relates the circumstances of a visit to a Tribe at Oruru, which had not been before visited by the Missionaries.

Aug. 3 – In the afternoon, sailed in the "Karere," for Oruru: my eldest boy on board.

Aug. 5 – A canoe came off in the afternoon, to pilot us in. Pulled the cutter in to the entrance of Oruru. As the tide was flowing, we went in rather faster than we wished, and grounded upon a very rough bottom, on the left hand going in; and, as it appeared shoal-water all round, we were glad to haul out into deep water, where we lay quietly all night.

Aug. 6 – Mahu made his appearance this morning; having followed us in his canoe, and just arrived.

Aug. 7, 1831: Sunday – After breakfast, held Service on shore, on the grass, with those Natives who were near the place: they were very attentive, and expressed their ignorance in these things, but strong desire that Missionaries might reside near them, through whom they might be enabled to understand. This was the first Sabbath ever observed in this place, and all had abstained from work; but without Teachers all would soon forget.

Aug. 8 – In the afternoon, took my coat of many pockets, and, attired as a pedlar, with samples of my trade, consisting of combs, scissors, knives, fishhooks, &c. &c, went up the river with the flood-tide, in company with Mahu and some of his relatives. At dark, landed at Oruru. The Natives, when we landed, as uncouth as any I recollect to have met with: no food offered. Had but little conversation with them, as their ideas ran wholly upon trade; and some of the more-knowing ones were dealing in most marvellous tales about our general mode of purchasing at our own places, and that here we expected to have their things for nothing. Trading of any kind is a most unthankful office.

Aug. 9 – Passed a rough night; very cold; and found ourselves close to a pigsty, the inhabitants of which made so much noise as almost to deprive us of sleep. At daylight, we moved up the valley, passing through several little Settlements. Some hills which were a few miles distant, I was told, separated this place from Mangamaka, one branch of the E'O'keanga river; – the Rarawa, an extensive tribe, to the north, and Wangaroa to the south. These Natives have never been visited by us; though all, with whom I have conversed, appear a promising people, and very desirous of coming under our care. Obtained a few seed-potatoes, and returned by the ebb-tide. Taeapa, one Principal Chief, brought some potatoes and corn: bought also some from another man. Having satisfied myself that not many potatoes were at this place beyond what they would require as seed for themselves, I consented to their bringing corn, at which they appeared well pleased. Had some very agreeable conversation with Taeapa and his friends: he solicited hard for some of us to reside here before he died, and wished that my boy Edward might be left as a companion for his son. I promised him we would converse on the subject when I returned home. The Ngapuhi, he said, were attending to us because we lived among them: the last Sunday was the first they had kept here, as they were unable to know when it took place. I told them I would lay their case before the Committee for consideration, and we would see what could be done. In a political point of view, it will be a great mercy to this people to establish a Missionary Station in this quarter: they begin to see the folly of war; and experience the influence we have in restraining the various Tribes, and in turning their thoughts to better things: but still we have to work against every opposition; for, while we on one hand warn them to lay aside their evil practices, hundreds of our countrymen are continually supplying them with the means of destruction, and thus cherishing that thirst for blood so inherent in them. But we have to look beyond this, to the salvation of the soul; and in this we are not without encouragement: their argument is true: 'the Ngapuhi (the general name for all the tribes around the Bay of Islands) are surprisingly altered within these two years'; for which we thank God, and take courage.

Aug. 10 – Some old women brought 24 small baskets of potatoes for a double blanket: as 28 was the number stipulated for, I would not receive them: several persons appeared inclined to be very insolent: gave them a good scolding, with which they became satisfied and quiet. This trading is the worst part of our work; for it is impossible to proceed without much noise, especially with those Natives who live far from our Settlements: not being acquainted with us, they manifest every feeling of jealousy, lest we should overreach them; and thus we are too apt to fall out for a time.

Aug. 13 – Weighed, and pulled out. Mahu accompanied us some distance out. I gave him a hoe for all his attention: he promised to return the compliment in the summer, in potatoes. All the Natives very civil, and made anxious inquiries respecting our return in the summer.

Agency of Natives as Religious Instructors.

One of the most encouraging circumstances in the present state of the Mission is the extent to which the Missionaries are now enabled to employ the agency of Natives in imparting religious instruction to

their countrymen. Mr. R. Davis remarks on this head –

You will, no doubt, be exceedingly glad to hear that the Natives are beginning to itinerate among their countrymen, to preach the Gospel. Surely good times are near at hand for this country! Some of the lads who are living with me, and who have been principally brought up by us, go out now every Sunday, when the weather is fine, to speak to their relatives on the subject of Religion; and the desire which these young men manifest for the salvation of the souls of their countrymen evidently points out the nature of the Religion which they profess.

Superstitious Practices of the Natives.

The following instances of the superstitions of the Natives disclose a painful view of their degradation and wretchedness: –

Dec. 4, 1830 – Went up the hill, to endeavour to administer consolation to Mawi; but he refused to be comforted, because his child was not, it having died two hours before. It was a most melancholy scene. Here was the corpse placed in the corner of a shed, dressed up with feathers and other finery: there was the father prostrate at its feet, weeping bitterly, and bleeding at every pore, from self-inllicted wounds. Next to him sat the mother, singing a mournful lamentation over the dead body of her son; and accompanying every stanza with a deep gash across her neck or arms, with a piece of glass bottle. Around were three friends and relations, falling in with the chorus, and wounding themselves in a dreadful manner. At a little distance was a man preparing to kill a slave, as a satisfaction to the manes of the departed. I reasoned with him on the folly of such a practice; and he promised that he would desist from his bloody purpose: whether he will or not, remains to be proved. The scene altogether was most affecting; and I was forced, after a short time, to go away, or I should have been overpowered with it

April 12, 1831 – Visited the Natives in the near villages. Met with but few. In one place, however, I saw the ceremony of consulting the Oracle, as it may be called, whether or not they shall be successful in the war in which they are about to engage. The ceremony was as follows: – After the two men, who called themselves priests, were strictly tapued (made sacred), they retired for a time, to pray that they might be rightly directed in the important business before them. In about five minutes they returned; each with a cockle-shell in his hand, with which the hair was immediately cut off the forehead; each one performing, very ceremoniously, the office for the other. When their hair was finished dressing, they ate some sacred food; and then, with another cockle-shell tied to their garments, they went into the thickest of the fern; where, having cleared a small circular space, they sat and prayed again. Two small sticks were then cut with the cockles, and nicely balanced upon another stick stuck in the ground for the purpose. The circle, from the thickness and height of the fern, was well sheltered from the wind, and the sticks were left balanced when the priests retired. They are to return again at sun-set, when, if the sticks have not fallen down, their deity has not heard their prayers, and the whole ceremony is to be repeated: but if they have fallen toward the rising sun, success will attend their undertakings; and if, on the contrary, they have fallen toward the setting sun, they will meet with no success, but will be attended with disgrace, and most likely the whole Tribe be cut off.

I endeavoured to reason the people out of their belief of such absurdities; but they are deeply rooted in all their superstitious notions. I showed them how easy it was for them to be imposed upon by those whom they entrusted to communicate to them the pleasure of the gods; and directed them to the Holy Spirit and Word of Jehovah, as the only sure guides to the will of the Lord. They heard me with patience, for half an hour, preach unto them Christ, crucified for their sins, and raised again for their justification; and, when I retired, priests and people acknowledged that I was right, and that they were all wrong. I am sure that these people have long been convinced of this: but then the devil has got such hold of them, and their own superstitions fall in with their corruptions, and fit on to their carnal nature so nicely, that they will not let their convictions have their full and proper play. I never saw that Scripture more clearly fulfilled, than in the Natives of this land – Light is come into the world; but men love darkness rather than light, because their deeds are evil. Indeed and in truth, they desire not the knowledge of the Name of Jesus; as they themselves say,

It is too holy; and His Religion is too holy for them." – – – [Rev. W. Yate.

Sept. 5, 1831 – A few days ago, the Chief from the A'huahu sent a messenger to me, to say that his son was dying; and it afterwards appeared that the messenger had also orders to bring their family priest with me. Both the messenger and priest called for me, and we went away together. During our walk, I asked the priest whether he did not consider that the young man was bewitched. He said, "Certainly I do? What should I think else? Did he not let a person of the Natuvatua Tribe smoke out of his pipe? and did he not eat part of his food? Yes, bewitched, certainly." On passing through a wood, the old priest said he saw the evil spirit which had killed the young man. I asked what the spirit was like, and in what posture he saw him. He said that he was standing under one of the trees; and put himself in the posture in which he said the evil spirit was standing. I said to him, "I know the devil is still going about, seeking whom he may devour; but he cannot be seen by bodily eyes. If the spirit was seen by you, how was it that I did not see him?" "O," said he, "there are but few people that can see the New-Zealand god; but I have seen him a great many times, with my blind eye." The priest, having bad eyes, can see but very little with one of them; but he told me it was always with that eye that he saw the god. He said the spirit he had just seen was no doubt Satan; as he was very cruel, because he came so often to kill the natives.

During our walk, I observed the old priest was very careful not to go near any fire-place, or where food had been cooked; but walked very carefully, with a short stick in his hand, sometimes in the road, and sometimes out, in order to avoid all defilement to his person. On our arrival at the place where the young man was lying, the priest began to vociferate in a very extraordinary manner. He first ordered him to get up; and then began to scold him for having allowed the person to smoke out of his pipe, and for having eaten part of the man's food; and, last of all, for having broken the laws of New Zealand altogether, by going where food was cooked &c. &c.: this was all done without any ceremony, or the least previous introduction. After he left off scolding, he made use of some incantations, in language which I did not understand; nor, I believe, scarcely any person present. During these proceedings, the whole family of the sick person presented one of the most complete spectacles of woe imaginable. The father was sitting at the feet of his son, with tears streaming down his face; with the other branches of the family around him, manifesting the deepest sorrow of mind and dejection of spirits.

After the old priest had finished his incantations, I went to the young man and felt his pulse, and soon found that there was nothing very serious the matter with him. I told him I was sorry to see him so much frightened as he was; because, if he had been a believer in what he had heard, and in the True God, he would not have been thus afraid of the New-Zealand god. I then addressed a few words to them as a body; in which I endeavoured to prove to them the nature of the cruel bondage in which they were held by Satan, and the security which the sincere believer in Jesus Christ enjoys; and that it was now in their power, through grace, to become partakers thereof. I then began to prepare some medicine for the sick man to take, and a blister for his chest. While I was thus occupied, the father was telling the priest what the young man had suffered, and the manner in which he had cried out in the agony of his pain: "But," he said, "as soon as you drew near, he became easier." This the poor man attributed to the fear which the evil spirit had of me. After I had applied the blister, and the young man had taken his medicine, we went to prayer. I then told them I had no idea that the young man would die; but that he would soon be restored, through God's mercy, to his former health: upon which the countenances of the poor forlorn creatures brightened up very much; and I left them in a very different state to that in which I found them. It was very evident to me that these poor creatures were trembling for fear of the power of the New-Zealand god; because, having been in the habit of assembling themselves together to hear the Word of Life, they had no doubt been less scrupulous in attending to their native superstitions; and it was, doubtless, on this account that Satan stirred up the old priest to scold the sick man as he did. The next lay I visited the sick man, and found him quite recovered. – – - [Mr. R. Davis.

Influence of the Missionaries over the Natives.

The growing influence of the Missionaries over the Natives is attended with the happiest effects on their temporal as well as on their spiritual condition; though the Missionaries sometimes find the love of war and plunder, and the thirst of revenge, too powerful to be controlled.

April 4, 1831 – In the evening, received a message from Modunga, to go up to the Pa in the morning; as the Natives were preparing to go to the southward, to fight.

April 5 – Went up to Otuihu. Chiefs very civil. They told me, that if our anger was very great, they should not go; but that we must proceed with them to Kororarika, to attend the Council which would take place to-morrow, if it should be fine. Prom the Pa we went to Kororarika, to see the Ngapuhi: the conversation with every one very favourable.

April 7 – Went up to the Pa: saw Kauweti, Hihi, &c., who were very kind, and attentive to all I said. Kuki came up from Kororarika, to converse about the projected fight – a very friendly man, and well disposed. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

April 12 – This being the day appointed by Kauweti for moving with his party to Kororarika, we were on the look out to join them; and as soon as the canoes came in sight, my brother, Mr. Brown, and myself, pulled off to meet them. There were 12 canoes, containing between 200 and 300 men. After the landing, a considerable delay intervened before the commencement of business; during which a supply of food was sent by the people of Kororarika, the cooking of which occupied the next three or four hours. Late in the day, the two parties respectively danced; and then came into close quarters, when the speaking commenced. The purport of it was, that the auxiliary party should return, and sit quiet. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

April 13 – At sun-rise, observed the Taua on the move. We joined, in two boats. There were twelve canoes well manned, besides several others, containing women and children. As we drew near the beach, muskets were discharged, and all began dancing and singing. When we landed, we learned that Moka had blown his hand nearly off, by the bursting of his musket. At three o'clock the Natives began their speeches; when it was concluded that they should return to their own places, and wait for the summer; which meeting we trust the Lord will frustrate. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

– This was the first meeting that has taken place between this party and the Ngapuhi, since they fought on the 6th of March 1830. In the speeches that were made, the Chiefs seemed more disposed for peace than war; but one old woman, who was urging them to go and fight, stated that her brothers had been killed at the southward; then baring her bosom, she mentioned the names of the Chiefs whom she had suckled, and added, that her family was now destroyed, and she only was left to bale water out of the Canoes. – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

April 18 – Went to Kororarika, where I found Tirarau, Chief of one of the contending parties at Mangakahia, who his been previously mentioned. He came to offer his services to go to fight; but will return, as Kauweti has done before him. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

April 20 – Mr. Brown and I went to the Ti by water; and passed on to Tapieta and Takou, where we arrived by dusk. We were met by all the Natives of the Settlement, and conducted into the Pa. Old Wata was very attentive to our wants, and in a short time we had the tent up and our tea prepared. As this was the first time of our coming here, all thronged round us, and several intruded within the tent. Old Wata lay down in the centre, and the Natives at his back, reserving the remainder for us. Every prospect of being overrun with fleas and kutus (lice): however, as it was an important period, they being the principal people in the projected fight, as the people who had been so lately killed were their immediate relations, we conversed about the death of their friends – the war – and peace with God through Jesus Christ our Lord. Certainly I never was more gratified. They paid great attention. They stated their ignorance, and pleaded the necessity of instruction; and their savage desire for fighting appeared to vanish. We kept talking till 11 o'clock, when we cleared our quarters with some difficulty and laid down to rest. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

April 21 – Our Natives had to procure fire, this morning, by rubbing two pieces of dry wood together; for although there was a fire burning on the spot, the Natives objected to our taking a light, on account of some superstition connected

with it; it having been lighted in expectation of their proposed expedition to the Southward. – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

April 22, 1831 – Went to Kororarika with my brother, principally for the purpose of seeing Mate, a Chief of Mangakahia, the antagonist of Tirarau. He also is come to join the party to the southward. We found the Natives of Takou and Matauri, to the northward, who had just arrived on their way to the southward. This is the party most aggrieved by the late slaughter at Tauranga, therefore the worst to deal with. They were sitting apart, according to custom, at the place where they landed; and Titere and Tareha had, as yet, had no communication with them. They recommended us to go and talk to them about giving up the expedition. We went accordingly, and gave them our thoughts: they made but little reply. After the ceremony of eating was ended, the parties met, as on the 12th, when the Chiefs spoke as differently as possible. Titere, Tareha, and Rewa, the Chiefs of Kororarika, told the other party that they were glad to see them, but that they would do better to return. "You are welcome to Tauranga," said they; "for this is Tauranga, where we now sit. (Tauranga means a landing-place; and thus, by a play upon the word, was applied to Kororarika.) But go home, and eat the food you have worked for, and sell to the Europeans. Who goes to fight in the winter, to be killed by the cold? Wait till the summer, and we will go together." The other party urged the necessity of the expedition being undertaken immediately; that they could not relish their food, through sorrow for their relations who have been killed. They were, however, overruled, and it was agreed to wait till summer. Thus a very great point has been gained – an expedition has been set aside, at least for the present, entirely, I believe, through our interference, under the blessing of God. The Natives acknowledge that it never so happened before, that the Natives should sit still after a movement had once been made. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

April 24 – At the Native Service this morning there was a party of Natives from Matauri on the North Coast, who paid very great attention. They were returning to their homes, it having been decided that they should not go to the southward. In the evening, while Mr. W. Williams was preaching, Taiwanga said that he had been to Kororarika, and the Chief, Tareha, told him he had been praying to Jesus Christ to send back the "fight;" and that that was the reason the different Tribes had returned home, instead of going on their intended war-expedition. Tareha has paid but little attention to the message of the Missionaries, and there was probably a good deal of superstition connected with his remark; but it is encouraging to hear a poor Heathen ascribe such a work to its right source – the power of our Lord and Saviour. – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

May 3 – In the various interviews which we have had with the Chiefs, we experienced nothing but kindness, and every encouragement in our work amongst them: they recognise us as their friends and teachers; and their general attention is far greater than I ever knew it at any former period: but still our labour is difficult; it is a work of faith and patience. The great intercourse with the shipping is the very curse of the land: the Natives begin to see it, but have not power to resist those great temptations which are thus brought before them; every female is polluted by these men; and were it not for the promises of God, it would be impossible to sustain all we have to contend with: however, the word of the Lord is sure; and on it we rest our every hope. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

Thus happily did the Missionaries succeed, through the divine blessing, in dissuading the Natives, at least for the time, from their warlike designs.

Aug. 1 – A singular scene took place at our Settlement this morning. A short time since, a Slave of Tohitapu had committed the crime of adultery, punishable, by native law, with the death of the offender and his family. Tohitapu requested that the man might stay with me, as the house we are about to occupy is further from his place than the houses of the other Brethren; and he feared, he said, that he should shoot his slave, if he came in his way. This morning, Tohitapu had a meeting with the man, to obtain some satisfaction; but he was contented, instead of shooting him, to throw some stones at him, and break a spear over his back. This affair would not have terminated thus, had it happened a few years since; for Tohitapu has killed many persons in past years for much less heinous offences. The Lord is evidently giving His Servants a great influence amongst the Natives. May they employ it, in season and out of

season, in declaring the truth as it is in Jesus! – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

Aug. 27, 1831 – Matui's Brother arrived from Rotorua, with a young Chief from thence, named Waretutu: had much conversation with them as to the behaviour and disposition of the Natives in that quarter. Generally in arms, bidding defiance to Ngapuhi: though at Rotorua they were quiet, and were much wishing that Missionaries should be sent amongst them. They had been fighting, and were still doing so on all opportunities, and were likely to continue; but if Missionaries were to go there, they should then learn the good and the right way, and sit quietly, as Ngapuhi did. In the evening, conversed with the above Chief, in company with several of our lads. Very pleasing. I trust the Lord may have directed him to us for inquiry: intend to bring the question forward. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

Interesting Letters of Natives who are Candidates for Baptism.

We close these Extracts by presenting to our Readers a literal translation, by the Rev. W. Yate, of several Letters addressed to him by Natives, Candidates for Baptism; and which, in a very striking and affecting manner, illustrate the influence and effects of Divine Truth on their minds. The heart of the sanguinary and untutored New Zealander is as the heart of the civilized and polished Englishman. In each case, the Gospel is the power of God to salvation to every one that believeth. And in each case the same are the principles wrought in the heart – the same the humiliation for sin – the same the valuing of the sacrifice and merits of a Crucified Saviour – the same the ardent desires and supplications for the renewing and sanctifying influences of the Holy Spirit. May the hearts of the New-Zealand Converts be established with grace! And may the word of the Lord have free course and be glorified among them, till all New Zealand become obedient to the faith!

LETTER I. – From Wahanga, a Married Native living in Mr. Kemp's Family.

Sir, Mr. Yate – Listen to my speech to you. Great is my heart toward God, because He has taken care of me all my days, and has shown the greatest extent of love for me. It is good for me to be sanctified by Him, and, by being baptized, to be let go into His holy Church on earth; in order that when I die I may be taken into His Church above in the heavens.

Who can bear the pain of the fire which burns for ever? I want to make haste to Jesus Christ, that I may be saved from it. As the wind digs up the waves of the sea, so the devil digs up sin in my heart: he is always, always, this day and that day, at work there. If I wake in the middle of the night, he wakes also to contend with me, and to hold fast my soul, that I may not fly to the Saviour; or to stop my mouth, that I may not pray to Him.

This is all my Letter to you, Mr. Yate. I love you, even I, – – - WAHANGA.

LETTER II. – From Pahuia, Wife of Wahanga.

Mr. Yate – It is true, it is very true, that it is a good to tell to Jehovah all that is in our heart, whether it is good or whether it is evil. My desire is, that my soul may be saved in the Day of Judgment. It will not be long before Jesus Christ appears to judge all mankind; and I also will be judged. It is right that I should be judged,, and that I should be condemned; for my heart is very wicked, and will not do one good thing, not one, not one, not one, that Jesus Christ, nor God, nor the Holy Spirit say is good: if I am angered by them, it will be just. But will not the Son of God save me? You say He will; and I believe it. You say that, bad as it is, He will wash my soul in His blood, and make it good and clean: that is what I want. I want to be admitted into His Church, and to be made His Child, and to be taught His lessons out of His Book; and to be taken care of by, and to be done what with, done what with, done what with – Thou, O Lord Jesus, say what!

Mr. Yate, listen, this is all from me, from – – - PAHUIA.

LETTER III. – From Unahanga, a Young Man living with Mr. Yate.

Sir, Mr. Yate – My heart is desirous of being permitted to enter the Church of Jesus Christ. I wish altogether to turn to our Father which is in heaven, and to cast away all the evil-speaking of this world,; and the evil acting. I am thinking inside me what can be the reason I have two hearts, which are always struggling one with the other. The one is a very good heart; the other altogether bad. I am wondering which will be thrown down and put undermost at last –

perhaps the good one; perhaps the bad one: O how they fight! Will you baptize me, or will you not? As I have two hearts, perhaps you will not, and perhaps you will.

My writing to you this time is finished: From me, from your son,

UNAHANGA.

LETTER IV. From Reo, a Youth living with Mr. Kemp.

This is a Letter from me to you, Mr. Yate – Here I am sitting in darkness and sitting in sin: perhaps it is sin that makes it dark. Listen, Mr. Yate, there are two evils with me; the one is old clothes, the other an evil heart. I have a great deal of evil within me, and very little good. The devil holds fast the evil, and will not let me throw it away: he also blocks up the road, and will not let the good come in. What am I to do? I have no strength, and Satan does as is good to him. What shall I be done with? I will ask God to give me His Spirit: perhaps that is the way. I will ask you to baptize me: perhaps that is the way. I will think about Jesus Christ: perhaps that is the way. I am tired and sick of sin: where, or how, shall I throw it away from me?

How do you do, Mr. Yate? Sit in peace. This Letter is from me, from the Child to whom you have been good, from – – - REO.

LETTER V. – From Naonao, a Young Man living with Mr. Clarke.

Mr. Yate – Here I am writing to you, about that you were talking the other day – about Baptism. Is it indeed true that you will let me go with the others. Take care, and make your saying true. The will of my heart is toward Christ; and it is a long time since I first began to think about Him and His ways. Am I Christified, or am I not? I love that which is good, but I do evil: I hate evil, but I do no good. I only hear about the Gospel, and read about it, and think about it: sometimes I believe it, sometimes I do not. Perhaps, by and by, belief may be altogether fixed in my heart: I wish it to be so now. Being admitted into the Church of Jesus Christ will, in my thoughts, be the real way to believe altogether.

There is no more in this book: it is quite full of writing from me to you, from – – - NAONAO.

LETTER VI. – From Pahau, a Slave redeemed by Mr. Yate, and living with him an a Domestic. This man accompanied Mr. Yate in his Voyage to New South Wales, and to the Friendly Islands, and always behaved with great propriety.

Sir, Mr. Yate – I, Pahau, am now writing a Letter to you. Perhaps you will not be pleased with it, and send it back; and then, perhaps, my heart will be sad, and I shall cry. Now, then, I am going to begin to write to you. Read it first, from the top to the bottom, on this side and on that side, before you say, "Nonsense," and throw it away from you and tear it to pieces. Now, Mr. Yate, listen to what I am going to say upon this paper. I have been thinking and thinking about what I am going to write; and now I am thinking you will shut your ears, and will not listen to me. This is what I am going to write: – Remember, that if you say "Nonsense," it was you who said we were to put down our wishes in a book. Now, I wish to be made a Child of God, that I may sit down at last in the Kingdom of Heaven. You know whether I believe in Christ or not; for you tell me more of my heart than I know myself. Sometimes I say that I believe: then you come and tell us that a Believer in the Son of God will not do this or that, or that or this sin, and I just before have been doing it: then I think, "Ah! I am no Believer, if what Mr. Yate says is true." When I tell you that I wish to believe, and that I cannot, you will say, "No, Pahau shall wait till he becomes good." Well, if you say wait, I must wait: if you say I believe, I will say I believe: if you say I do not, I will say so too.

This is all now. Do not be angry, Mr. Yate, at him you made your son – at – – PAHAU.

LETTER VII. – From Ngapuhi, a Boy living with Mr. Yate.

Sir, Father, Mr. Yate – My ink is not good, my paper is dirty, and I am altogether ashamed. Do you remember, when you came to New Zealand, I was a little boy just like you were twenty years ago; and I was living in Mr. Clarke's house; but Mr. Clarke said, "Go Ngapuhi and live with Mr. Yate;" and you said, "Come Ngapuhi, and live with me;" and I said, "Aye;" and then Henry Kemp said so. You called me a dirty child, a dirty New-Zealand boy, and gave me a piece of soap, and lent me Flora's comb; and when I was clean washed in the Kerikeri, you gave me clothes, European clothes, which I put on and was proud. I never was proud before. And when I heard you say, in the House of Prayer, that it was very bad to be proud, and that God was angry with the proud every day, I sold my white-man's clothes for a Native mat, and dirted my hands and my face, and made myself a not-proud New-Zealand

boy again. Since then I have been learning Catechisms, and reading Matthew and Genesis, and Paul and John; and I have been listening to Mr. Kemp, and Mr. Davis, and Mr. Williams, and Mr. Clarke, and Mr. Hobbs, and you; and I know all about Abraham and Jonah and David, and Jesus Christ; and I have been at Prayers every day, every day, every day; and I have gone long journeys with you, when you have been going to tell the Natives about salvation from hell; and I have given away all my wages, without keeping any for myself: and when I was enticed away by my cousin, I listened to what you said, and came back again, and told you that if I was not full of love for you I should not come back: and when all the other boys went to the feast, I did not go, but stayed at home to clean your horse Lion: yet with all this, and many other good things, I am as bad as ever. My heart is dark, and black, and dirty, and hard, and devilified; there are no good thoughts in it; it will not let me think good: and though I wish to do as the white people say, and as God wishes, the end is this, I cannot; no, I am sure I cannot. Where is the place that the Spirit of God teaches in? He, you say, will help us. Why do you not pray to your Heavenly Father to send him down to us? You must tell us more and more about the Saviour; and write more of His Word in a book: that is the way some of us have been made straight, and that is the way we shall all be made straight. Mr. Yate, what do you say? Will you take me into the Church of Christ? or will you say, "Go along Puhi, you are too bad; the Saviour will not say any thing to you, but will be angry if you go near Him?"

This is all, from your son, – – - NGAPUHI.

LETTER VIII. – From Poti, a Married Native, living with Mr. Clarke.

How do you do, Mr. Yate? Here I am, your friend Poti: listen to these my thoughts. My heart is not very great to lay hold of the things of Jesus Christ. I think, that great will be my sorrow and pain, if I am not saved by Jesus the Saviour. It would give me great joy, and make my heart very light, if you would let me be baptized; and say before the face of every body, Europeans and Native men, that I love the Lord. This is the second time I have spoken to you about it. You would not let me go into the Church of Jesus Christ when you came from Port Jackson; then I went with you to Tongatapu: and now I want to know what is wrong, that I may make it right, or ask God to give me His Holy Spirit to make it right for me. If I am made right, and made new by the Holy Spirit, shall I not go to heaven when I die; and sit at the right hand, or rest in the bosom, of the Son of God, who died for my sins, and who paid His blood to save me? Mr. Yate, teach me about Baptism, and let me be admitted into the Church – that is my wish to you, that is my prayer to God, that is my thought in the night and in the day, in the day, and in the day, and in the night – when I am at work – when I am eating – when I am at play – and when I am in the House of Prayer. This is all from your friend, from – – - POTI.

LETTER IX. – From Auheke, a Redeemed Slave, living with Mr. Davis.

Sir – This is my saying to you; and I say it because I wish to stand in the Assembly of God's People in His Church, that we may all stand with joy before His judgment-seat, and sit down together in His great Kingdom. Now the love of Jesus Christ is come down, and is fixed in the earth; and therefore I say to you, Set me apart to be His Servant, and baptize me in the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost. Mr. Yate, it is good to be sanctified to God, and to leave behind all that is evil. The great love of our Saviour toward us makes me love Him again, and makes me wish to be His. He died as a satisfaction for Believers; and God's anger is gone to nothing, through Him. From your loving friend, from

AUHEKE to Mr. Yate.

LETTER X. – From Hongi, a Married Native, living with Mr. Clarke. He has been with him upward of six years.

Sir, Mr. Yate – Listen to my thoughts. I am seeking a heart for the good things of God. I have heard with my ears His glad words, but I am not able to make myself His child, because I struggle so for sin. We have all heard His glad news out of His Book. They are good, and gracious, and loving words; and are signs from the Holy Spirit, to guide the spirit of man. When I think upon the writing, my heart is glad within me: when they are fixed in my soul, joy wakes me in the very middle of the night, to think about it. How are your thoughts toward us? Are they as they were? If they are, we have heard them. You say our souls must feel pain, for having by our sins crucified the Lord of Life and Glory, the Son of God, our Saviour Jesus Christ. I say to you,

that my heart has been pained long ago; and is pained now, because I have wasted the blood of Him who died for me. And now my thoughts and my heart are very great to be made one of the baptism. I am very proud; I walk in pride; and sometimes say, "Ha! What are all the things of God to me? I am only a New Zealander: they will do very well for white and learned people; but as for us!" – This is the devil hardening and tempting me, that I may fall into his evil and burning residence. You tell us we must pray. So we do. But what have our prayers done? Have they Christified our hearts, or made us love and serve God and do his will? Mr. Yate, I am one; and here I am sitting and wishing to be by you baptized – I, your old companion in the boat to Paihia and Ranghihoua,

HONGI.

LETTER XI. – From Hamo, a Redeemed Slave, living with Mr. Davis.

Sir, Mr. Yate. – I am Hamo. This is the first time I ever wrote to you; and my writing is about the things of God, a showing forth of tears on account of the love of God, which has been disregarded by me. Now I possess a will toward Jehovah, and wish to be made His. I have been seven years living with my father, Mr. Davis, and have never thought about the soul. When I have spoken or prayed, it has not been with my heart, but with my lips only. Now I see, and know, and feel the love of God, my heart is very sorrowful; great is my pain for the evil I have done. Very large are my desires to be baptized. I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God, and Saviour of sinful men. My crying to the Lord is: "O Jehovah, give me Thy Holy Spirit, to rub out the sins of my heart with the blood of Jesus."

From HAMO to Mr. Yate, sitting in Mr. Clarke's house at the Waimate.

LETTER XII – From Rewa, a Youth living with Mr. Davis.

Sir, Mr. Yate – Now I am writing a Letter to you, do you listen to me. When our sins are consumed by the love of God, do we not turn to God? I want to have my sins washed away, that I may turn to Him. It is a good thing to have our eyes fixed on salvation. When will the time come? I wish to-day. I say, Mr. Yate, how are your thoughts toward me? are they good or are they evil? If they are good, and you are willing to let me have my wishes, say so, that I may come, and be instructed about Baptism: if they are evil, so it must be.

A writing of mine from me, from REWA to Mr. Yate.

LETTER XIII. From Ngori, a Young Man living with Mr. Davis.

Sir, Mr. Yate – From my desires to God the Saviour, this Letter is written from me to you. His love is fixed in my heart, and for ten months I have been thinking about him. Our Father in heaven gave me the thoughts, and he keeps me thinking about them. Mr. Yate, I write to you in order that you may say you will let me enter the Church of Jesus Christ, or that you will not let me enter. I cannot, of myself, lay hold of the good things of God, though they are laid before me. I want the Holy Spirit to help my weakness, for I am weak. – – - NGORI to Mr. Yate.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

New Zealand.

THE state of the New-Zealand Mission was brought under the notice of our Readers in our Numbers for March and April last (pp. 55-67, 79-90). The accounts since received are of an encouraging nature. From them the following information is derived.

State of the Ministry.

RANGIHOUA: July 4, 1831 – The Natives in general whom I have visited appear more and more attentive to the word spoken: individuals among them are desirous to hear and understand the way of Salvation, and are offering up petitions to God for His Holy Spirit to teach them. Satan rages and trembles at the sure and steady progress of the Gospel of Peace. Two of the Natives belonging to the School have been baptized, and their conduct is agreeable thereto.

Dec. 26 – The behaviour of the Natives in general gives hope. Some of them have attained a good deal of Bible Knowledge. A party of Natives was here a few weeks ago, on a Sunday: in the evening, they collected together on the beach. One asked questions out of the Catechism, without any book, and the others answered: what one had forgotten, the others remembered. They then gave out a Hymn, and sang it; repeated the Confession and Prayers of their book; and closed with the Lord's Prayer. Afterward, they were attentive, and desirous to know the meaning of God's words, and different sentences in the Prayers, &c. As the Lord has done so

much for them, I doubt not but that He will give these Heathen to His Son for His inheritance, and the uttermost parts of the earth for His possession. Let us ask daily, then, for the outpouring of His Spirit, and it shall be done. – – - [Mr. J. King.

KERIKERI : July 4, 1831 – Three Natives living with me are Candidates for Baptism: their conduct, for some time past, has been very pleasing.

Jan. 3, 1832 – It will afford you pleasure to hear that the Natives under our care and instruction are making greater improvements in all things; and particularly, there appears a growing desire to be more acquainted with the things of God. Nine Natives have been admitted by Baptism into the Church; viz. six men and three women. Their conduct is pleasing and satisfactory. Others are also anxious to be instructed in the things of God, and are inquiring after the Truth.

For want of more Translations of the Scriptures, the Natives are almost at a stand: some have committed to memory all that has been printed: I hope this will soon be remedied by more being printed. Many of the boys can read very well. The desire to learn to read is growing more and more amongst the Natives at large; and this encourages us to look forward to the time, which does not appear at a great distance, when all shall be able to read the Scriptures for themselves in their own tongue; which must be a great blessing to them, sooner or later. May it be made the power of God unto salvation to many! At our Settlement, at the Kerikeri, we attend alternately to the Religious Instruction of the Natives. During the last quarter, I have been able to visit the Natives, on the Sabbath, at two villages, where we have sometimes met from 150 to 200 Natives: the name of the principal residence is Takou, about twelve miles distant from Kerikeri, on the north coast; where we have, within reach of our Settlement, at not more than twenty miles' distance at the furthest, from 500 to 600 Natives. Many are anxious to be instructed; and have expressed their strong desire for us to visit them regularly, which I hope we shall be able to do on the Sunday, and endeavour to form a Congregation to hold Service with on Sundays. Mr. Baker and myself have visited them several times on the Sunday, during the last three months; and all expressed their satisfaction at our visiting them. – – - [Mr. J. Kemp.

Dec. 26 – -Through the blessing of God, we have had prosperity and peace around us since I last wrote to you. The work of Grace is evidently deepening in the hearts of those amongst us who are not ashamed to own Christ. We have abundant proof that the work going on amongst the Natives is not the device of men. The word, declared in plainness, is the power of God unto salvation. The Natives living with us continue to be attentive to the Means of Grace; and though many of them are not real Christians, yet their outward conduct is as good as that of many professing Christians.

Our Schools, too, afford us much encouragement. The Natives manifest a strong desire to learn to read the Scriptures. There is also a good number of them who can read for themselves the word of life. The influence that our Baptized Natives have with the others living with us is very considerable. The three Printed Catechisms have been the means of communicating the saving truths of the Gospel to many. Whenever I go amongst the Natives, I hear portions of the Catechism repeated. One Native, who, though he cannot read, has learned a considerable part of the Catechisms, puts the Questions to those around him; and then he and the others repeat the answers. By this practice, many, at a distance from us, have a knowledge of many important truths of Christianity.

The attention paid to the Means of Grace by the out-door Natives is also a proof that the word of God is at least reverenced; but I believe there are some who listen to the heavenly truths with a desire to know the way of salvation. Our Natives do much, by way of preparing our path amongst the out-door Natives: as there are many who can read the Scriptures to their relations and friends, the word, by this means, becomes more generally known. The highway for the coming of the Lord is, to the eye of faith, now ready. Our expectation is now from the Lord. Whilst we would diligently labour in the appointed means, we would look up fixedly to God for the out-pouring of the Spirit.

I conclude by entreating you, and the Society at large, to pray for us. The things which I have mentioned are a source of rejoicing to us. I forbear to speak of our trials: they are known only to God and ourselves. Pray that our faith fail not. – – - [Mr. C. Baker.

PAIHIA: Sept. 17 – Went to Waimate.

On the following day, Sunday, I accompanied Mr. Hamlin to two native villages. Ripi, the Chief of Mawi, still goes on in a promising way; but, on account of his perseverance in attending to good things, he meets with some of those trials which are incident to a true profession of Christianity. He has paid a few visits to a neighbouring tribe at Kaikohi, for the purpose of calling their attention to the truths which he has learnt to value. He came to-day, much cast down because he had received a message to discontinue his visits to that place; as Wareporka of Rangihoua, and two Chiefs of Waimate, have sent to desire the Chief of Kaikohi not to attend to any thing which either Native or European Missionaries tell him. About ten Young Men from Kaikohi came with Ripi on Saturday, and stayed over the Sunday at Waimate.

Oct. 2, 1831: Sunday – Went to Kororarika. The Chiefs were assembled at a Native Baptism, which was concluded before I arrived. The circumstance furnished me with a subject for conversation. The Natives on these occasions yield their offspring to the Devil; and pray that they may be courageous, cruel, and impudent; that they may kill their enemies, and take many slaves. Tetore says he cannot attend to what we say, until he returns from fighting at Tauranga; but that when he returns he will give himself up to us. A Chief asked me, with apparent sincerity, whether it is lawful for a Believer to go to fight. He says that he is going, because a relative of his has been murdered by the people at the southward; but he seems to have scruples about it.

Oct. 16: Sunday – For want of a bell, I had a gun fired at 8 o'clock, when about 70 Natives came to the place where I slept; and behaved with great reverence and attention while I held Service with them.

Oct. 20 – Spoke with five Candidates for Baptism; but found four of them still needing instruction in the very first principles. They have been inquiring the way for a long time past, and their conduct has been satisfactory.

Nov. 30 – A young Chief living with me, who was about to go from the Settlement on the morrow, came and requested to speak with me. Among other questions, he asked for information on the subject of prayer; whether it is right to pray alone; and whether it is rightly offered when a person is walking or working.

Dec. 5 – Spoke with some of our Baptized Natives on the subject of the Lord's Supper. None have yet been admitted to this Ordinance; but most of the Baptized have behaved consistently since they were received into the Church.

Dec. 25 – After Morning Service, I went out with Mr. King to the Natives who were at some distance from the Settlement. I conversed with the principal Chiefs; and with a few Chiefs from the northward, who were on their way, with a party of 200 people, to go against Tauranga. Wareporka said a great deal about their children dying in consequence of coming to our Schools. It is very true that the mortality of late years has been very great; and he enumerated many families which are now likely to become extinct. After he had done speaking, for he would not allow me to interrupt him, I mentioned several persons who had been in our Schools, and who died after they left us. "And how is it," said I, "that the Mission Families prosper, and very few are carried off by sickness?" "Because your God takes care of you." – "But why do the Native Families continue healthy, which are living with us?" "Because," he replied, "your God also takes care of them. There are Tohu's children, who live, because they have been baptized in the European, and not in the Native manner." – " Very true," said I; "our children, and those of the Natives living with us, are preserved by our God, and your children are cut off by your God; and yet you refuse to come under the protection of our God, who is ready to take the same care of you which he affords to us." He acknowledged the justness of the observation, and was silent. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

At the close of the last extracts from my Journal, I mentioned that a Chief from the southward was at this place, soliciting that a Mission might be established in the neighbourhood. On the 18th of October he returned in our little cutter, accompanied by the Rev. H. Williams and Mr. Chapman, from whom you will doubtless receive an account of their most interesting visit, which has much cheered our hearts. They left behind them a Native, who lived with me from the time of Mr. Davis's leaving for the Waimate Station. He wrote to me on Mr. Williams's return, and I subjoin a literal translation of his Letter.

Mr. Brown – How do you do? Great is my love for you, and for Mother also. Here am I and my wife living at Rotorua. We are talking of the good things of God and of Jesus Christ. The men of this place have just begun to listen to the things of God and of Jesus Christ. My heart is glad about the men of Rotorua. Will you, the messengers of God, remember me? You must pray to God for me, Peter – for all the men that believe.

In another part of his Letter he thus wrote to the Native Girls who are living with us: –

How do you do? You must think of God and of Jesus Christ. Ye that believe, pray unto God for the men who now believe in this place, at Rotorua. Great is my love toward the Children who have now learnt to understand the School. Mary Peter is the Teacher of Girls. Waitohi and Paretuahu are the Teachers. You must be glad. That is my writing to you.
– – Signed) PETER, Paihia, Rotorua.

Join with us in fulfilling Peter's wish for us to pray for him, and for all the men that believe.. The Converts claim a peculiar interest in our prayers, that they may not look back from the plough to which they have set their hands; for Satan desires to sift them as wheat, knowing that every Convert drawn by Divine Grace to a Crucified Redeemer is, as it were, taking away a foundation-stone from the strong castle which he has erected in this heathen land. – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

July 4,1831 – Our Natives, I am happy to say, manifest a pleasing attention to instruction generally; particularly those who have received the Ordinance of Baptism. Many others, who have not yet received that Ordinance, are, I trust, earnestly inquiring the way to Zion, with their faces thitherward. – – - [Mr. W. Fairburn.

WAIMATE: Nov. 16 – I baptized eight Adult Natives at Waimate last Sunday: it was indeed a time much to be remembered.

Dec. 29 – The Waimate is going on prosperously, and is answering our warmest expectations. The pleasing attention of the Natives to our Message gives us great encouragement. We know that our labour here has not been in vain, and we are assured that it never shall be in vain in the Lord. [Rev. W. Yate.

Sept. 19 – The grand enemy of souls seems to be considerably alarmed for the safety of his subjects in this land of darkness; as it is evident he is endeavouring to stir up a spirit of persecution amongst us. I informed you that the Chief, Ripi, was in the habit of going,

[RECORD, Sept 1832.]

with Aparahama, to talk with the Natives of Kaikohi, and that, from their reports, there appeared to be a way open for the preaching of the Gospel to that tribe; but at present there seem to be obstacles thrown in the way by the adversary. On Saturday a message was sent, to say that Ripi and Aparahama were not to go there again on a teaching errand. It appears that one of the Kaikohi Chiefs has been to the Bay, where he has been persuaded by different Chiefs not to pay any attention to what the Missionaries had to say; but to continue on in his native course, and do as his fathers did before him. But I hope good has already been done. We had thirteen of the Natives here yesterday, for the purpose of attending Public Worship. One of the young men complained very much of the wicked conversation which was made use of toward them by their friends: even in their daily labour, he said, their conversation was so bad, that he and a few others were obliged to work by themselves, at a distance from them. I have been given to understand that some of these young men wish to come and live with us, in order to escape persecution, and learn, in quiet, the ways of truth and righteousness. This may be the best step which they can take, or perhaps that we can take for them, as their knowledge of the truths of God must be very small at present: consequently, they are not, humanly speaking, so well prepared to meet persecution as they will be hereafter, should the Lord be pleased to pour out His Holy Spirit into their souls. And, although the Chiefs have prohibited Aparahama and Ripi from visiting them, yet they have not prohibited the younger branches of their respective families from coming here to hear the Gospel preached.

Nov. 28 – The young people above mentioned came, and have now been with us nearly two months: they are about twenty in number; and, to all human appearance, some of them bid fair for the Kingdom of Heaven. The Chief, Ripi, continues to walk in a satisfactory manner, and I hope is growing in knowledge. He has a son, about a month old, whom he has been very anxious to have baptized; but, as he has not yet been baptized himself, we see a difficulty in baptizing the child. The child has not been baptized by the native baptism. – – - [Mr. R. Davis.

State of the Schools.

KERIKERI: July 4, 1831 – The Girls' School has been conducted by Mrs. Kemp, Mrs. Baker, and Mrs. Chapman. The behaviour of the Natives has been uniformly good. We have living with us, and who attend School, 22 Women and Girls, and 47 Men and Boys. – – - [Mr. C. Baker.

PAIHIA: July 4 – In the School are 66 Men and Boys, and 31 Women and Girls.

Dec. 21 – At daylight all in motion. At nine o'clock assembled for examination: Chapel well filled. After Prayers, Natives were examined – Boys outside, Girls within – until 11 o'clock: the English Children until one o'clock. At two o'clock, all belonging to the School, and several Chiefs, were served with baskets of potatoes and pork, and a roll of bread. In the evening each had tea and a small cake. The work of the Girls was of the first order: each produced something; all passed off well.

Dec. 22 – At nine o'clock assembled the Schools for the distribution of the prizes, nearly all of which fell to the Girls. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

Employment of the Natives.

The Missionaries employ the Natives who reside with them in those kinds of labour which render them at once useful to the Mission, and impart knowledge and form habits calculated to promote their civilization and social welfare. The following passages illustrate this branch of the operations of the Mission.

KERIKERI: July 4 – -The Natives under my care have been employed in shingling, fencing, burning lime, carpentering, and landing stores. – – - [Mr. J. Kemp.

PAIHIA: Sept. 28 – Went to Kauakaua, to attend to my potatoe planters. If our crops yield moderately, we shall raise, in this Settlement, food for about 100 days, independently of any purchases from the Natives. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

WAIMATE – Our consumption of ironware is much less than it has ever. been. Almost all our Native Boys, who labour in the various Settlements, desire clothing for payment; which we encourage in every possible way. We do not now give them any. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

With the assistance of Natives I have erected a weather-board building, 40 feet by 20, with a skilling at the back, which we intend using for our Chapel and School. – – - [Mr. G. Clarke.

As to our mechanical labour, we do it all with the assistance of our Natives; such as carpentering, blacksmith's work, &c. We have just finished making 50,000 bricks for our chimneys, and are now employed getting timber and other materials for building our permanent dwellings, barns, &c. – – - [Mr. R. Davis.

With my Natives I have been employed upon my house, in putting up fences, &c. I have also, assisted by the Settlement Natives, burnt a quantity of lime for the purpose of the European School. – – - [Mr. C. Raker.

Employed in attending to native sawyers, to natives digging a well, and to natives clearing land. – – - [Mr J. Hamlin.

Influence of the Missionaries over the Natives.

We give in detail the following negociation, between the Missionaries and the Natives, to prevent a war; as we could not otherwise adequately impress our Readers either with the difficulties involved in such an undertaking, or with the degree of influence which is required to succeed in it.

Nov. 24 – Accompanied my brother to Kororarika, for the purpose of ascertaining the disposition of the Ngapuhi to make peace with Tauranga. We found Warenui busily employed in preparing his canoe, as were also several other Chiefs; but they all left their work, to come to us. On asking what their intentions were, Rewa, a Chief of Waimate, rose up, and made a violent harangue, saying that they intend to fight and take slaves; and that it will not be well for any of the Missionaries to go down with them, because they would only be offended with the sights which they would witness. When he had concluded, we obtained a quiet hearing; and he told us privately that it did not rest with him to make peace, and that we were at liberty to go down with them if we liked. They had been somewhat disconcerted, the day before, by a report that the Natives of the Kauakaua intend to go and kill their wives and children as soon as they are gone on this expedition; and they requested us to go and speak to them the next day.

Nov. 25, 1831 – Went with my brother up to Otuihu, where the Chiefs disclaimed all idea of attacking the families at Kororarika. By thus interesting ourselves in their temporal welfare, we are permitted to obtain great ascendancy over them, which will doubtless be made to work for good. They naturally look for our opinions on their State questions. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

Nov. 28 – My brother and I went to Kororarika, accompanied by Tohitapu. Rewa spoke for some time for war, but afterwards more moderately. Fears were expressed on account of Kauweti, lest he should fall upon the women and children during their absence. Commissioned to see him in the morning, and report the result. Temorenga came from the interior. Natives talking till midnight, over the affairs of the nation.

Dec. 2 – Saw the Chiefs at their respective residences. Was grieved to hear some of their expressions relative to the war. They were respectful, and appeared reconciled to the idea of some of us going to the southward. I was much distressed at the apparent state of things. All is in agitation, and ready for some desperate act. Angry feelings continually expressed, and the tribes jealous one of another. True, we experience but the shadow of those evils and trials which have been taking place in Europe; but these evils are desperate: here nothing less than the utter annihilation of Tribes is in contemplation. Were it not for the still small voice of God heard amidst all this confusion, encouraging us to look to Him, and put our whole trust in Him as our salvation, we should certainly have been in despair, and considered that our strength was in vain. The Chiefs, generally, on the expedition, are our most intimate friends – men who have distinguished themselves latterly in preserving peace; but now they appear actuated by a new spirit, to work all manner of wickedness. I told them, that if they were strangers we should not say so much; but that they were our friends and relations: therefore if they determine to go, we must go also. May the Lord grant that this may work for good!

Dec. 7 – Observed several canoes under sail, standing for Kororarika. Tohitapu came, and urged our going over; which we immediately did. He observed, on our way, that we must be very urgent with the Natives, and not regard their objections to our interference. We walked up to the residence of Moka, where we met the principal Chiefs of Ngapuhi. We were received in a most gracious manner, very different from any thing which I had before observed. After talking for some time, wc all walked toward Ururoa, with whom I had much conversation. He certainly showed that he had no great desire for fighting on the present occasion; and appeared disposed to go or stay, as the Ngapuhi might give the word. Afterwards saw Tetore, who came over to Paihia, and remained till sunset. As he was the principal leader of the present expedition, it was needful to know his mind respecting our movements. He was afraid to speak in public; but said, before he left, that the Natives must proceed on: that when we approached near to Tauranga, something might be effected. Messrs. King, Baker, Davis, and Clarke, arrived during the day, to consider whether or not any step could be taken by us to check the movements of these men in their present desperate affair.

Dec. 8 – After hearing every thing which could in any way bear upon the question before us, we concluded that a sufficient opening presented itself for us to act; – that it would be our duty for some of our body to accompany the expedition, and influence the Natives by any means in our power.

Dec. 10 – In the afternoon, Tohitapu ran into the house considerably agitated, and said that we must proceed immediately to Kororarika, as Tetore and Tareha were fighting. My brother and I accompanied him. Before we could leave the beach, a great gun and a volley of musketry were fired. We found the Natives in much confusion, especially the principals. Several persons said that we must remain all night, to keep the peace, as it was expected that Tetore would set fire to his houses, which would be a signal for a general battle. With Tareha we could do nothing. Tetore expressed his determination to go inland; which we were glad to hear, as we hoped thereby all would come to nought.

Dec. 11 – Passed a comfortable night on the beach with these people; a bundle of sticks for my pillow. Tareha in a sour mood: would not listen to any terms. After some time, he returned to Paihia to Service. After dinner, went over to Kororarika, by appointment, to see how matters were going on. Tetore

had taken his departure soon after our leaving in the morning, and had expressed his determination to go on by himself to Tauranga. The Natives full of the transaction of yesterday. Had many fears as to the result of these things.

Dec. 13, 1831 – Three canoes came over from Kororarika, in which were Tareha, Rewa, Moka, and others. Prepared breakfast for all, with five baskets of potatoes, &c. for the Chiefs. Rewa appeared in full spirits, and all seemed disposed to be very polite. Their language now was totally altered; and they desired that both the vessels might go in company with the fleet of canoes. Not a word was mentioned about killing and eating their enemies; but all for peace should the opposite party be disposed.

I could not but praise the Lord for having effected the great change. Day and night have our hearts been lifted up to Him, that He might confound their wicked imaginations, and bring their devices to nought. This great effort of Satan shall doubtless redound to the glory and praise of God and the Redeemer, the Holy One of Israel. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

The result of the interpositions of the Missionaries to appease the strife of these hostile Tribes has not yet reached us. It is, however, a matter of much thankfulness and encouragement to find these truly Christian offices so far acceptable to a people whose ruling passions are thirst of revenge, and love of war.

Missionary Excursion to the Southward

The Missionaries having built a small vessel, named The Karere, (Messenger), the Rev. H. Williams and Mr. Chapman made a coasting voyage in her to the southward of the Settlements, to visit the Tribes in that part of the Northern Island. The excursion proved, in many respects, highly interesting. The following particulars relative to it are extracted from the Rev. H. Williams's Journal.

Oct. 18, 1831 – At noon, all embarked on board our little vessel, "the Karere."

Oct. 20 – Our Boy, who acted as co?? not approving of his title, we changed it for Doctor, which relieved his mind. At four o'clock, every appearance of bad weather; and being close to Tauranga, we determined to run in. Came on to blow and rain very hard: could scarcely see Maunganui, though close to it. By the good providence of God, we entered safely, and found ourselves in still water, to our no small joy.

Oct. 21 – At break of day, several canoes came off: all the people well behaved: all approved of our errand. At low water, weighed, and sailed up the river, to Maungatapu. Many changes since last here. Several Europeans, and some new Settlements. The Natives appeared very numerous, and seemed to recognize in us old friends. They spoke of their numerous guns, and quantities of lead and powder: each boy had two or three guns, and men ten. They are an interesting people. I have not known of their going against any other Tribes since their possessing the means of attack, but to act on the defensive. They would gladly have Missionaries with them; not altogether for our property, which would be dispersed amongst them; but for instruction. May the Great Head of the Church guide us in this important duty of rightly dividing our strength, so that these people may be brought under our protection!

Oct. 22 – Strong gale all night: no prospect of going on shore. After breakfast, rain commenced, and continued all day. The Boys occupied themselves in repeating their Catechism and singing Hymns, and appeared very comfortable.

Oct. 23 – A canoe came off with three baskets of potatoes, for which they wanted a hoe. We reminded them of the day (Sunday). They replied, that they just recollected, and immediately pulled away. After dinner, we went on shore, when all was immediately in motion. We were conducted up the Pa (fortified place); but the rain coming on, they proposed to adjourn to a large building which would hold us all. We accordingly moved on, and entered a spacious house, about fifty feet by thirty. All sat in order, and were attentive to what we had to say. All appeared much interested. We spoke for a considerable time, and afterward entered into conversation with them. They appear to remember that we were the first who came here, and to regard us as old acquaintances, and, indeed, as particularly connected with them. It is doubtless an important field for Missionary work; and I trust that, ere long, something may be done.

Oct. 25, 1831 – We met several parties of Natives, who had come to welcome us. We came up to a large party, sitting on the brow of a hill, waiting our arrival. As we drew near, they gave us the usual salutation; and immediately set up their horrid crying, at meeting several of their relations who were with us. All was speedily in motion, in preparation for the night; and we were glad to rest for a short time. After a little refreshment, we assembled for Prayer, about 200: we severally addressed a few words to them. They were very attentive, and asked many questions. The appearance of our camp at night was very interesting, presenting thirteen large fires, and groupes of Natives.

Oct. 26 – We embarked in two large canoes; and pulled but a short distance to Houkaka, where we remained, owing to the wind being very strong. A pig was brought forward, in compliment to our vessel; and as our Boys were weary, we allowed it to be killed for them. Before sunset, all were assembled for Evening Worship: every attention was paid. None of the Natives attempted to intrude within our tent.

Oct. 27 – At first dawn of day, all in motion. Embarked, as yesterday, in two canoes. The Natives managed the canoes very dexterously; and, by watching the seas, we landed, in about hour at Arorangi, and were met in a most gracious manner. We had an opportunity of speaking to a considerable number on the object of our Mission, to which all paid the utmost attention: after which a most sumptuous supply of food was brought forward – potatoes, kumaras (sweet potatoes), and fish. This being the place of Taiwanga's father-in-law, the Chiefs addressed themselves principally to him, which gave him an opportunity of stating our desires respecting them. We afterwards passed on in the the canoes to Kaiwaka. Our reception was much the same as that at Arorangi. On landing, we found that all our party had taken their seats in the warm bath, which was close at hand. The bath consisted of various compartments, each of a different degree of heat, which was regulated by the introduction of fresh water from the lake. After the speeches were delivered, welcoming us to this part of the country, we assembled for Evening Prayer. In the Evening Service, Chiefs came to the tent to converse; and expressed their desire that we should return to the Bay of Islands, loaded with potatoes.

Oct. 23 – Passed a comfortable night. The warm bath filled at break of day. Had a good deal of conversation with the Natives, on the impropriety of men, women, and children bathing together. After Prayer, at which all were present, we embarked for Inemutu, and landed in about an hour: there were between 400 and 500 persons. After the ceremony of landing was over, we were conducted to the Pa, and received the usual tokens of welcome. After several Chiefs had spoken, Taiwanga introduced the subject of our errand. When he had concluded, I was told that it was needful to make a speech; and I felt considerable satisfaction in being able to open my mind to them. In the afternoon we walked through the Pa, and revisited the warm baths, and the boiling springs in which the Natives cook their food: these were very wonderful. We entered a large house in which they sleep, which, from the heat of the ground, was like an oven. We spoke to several parties of people during the day, who appeared well disposed to receive our Message. The children at all these places seem far more numerous than in the Bay of Islands: they were assembled to repeat the Catechism; but it was not confined to them, as very many men and women came also, and repeated with them. After employing them as long as we felt it proper to do so, we walked to see a hot spring whieh possesses the quality of washing without soap. Several things were washed in it, which became perfectly clean. On our return, we were presented with a baked pig, and several small baskets of potatoes. Before sunset, assembled all for Prayer: at the conclusion, one of the Natives addressed the people in a pleasing manner; but as they expected me to say something, I spoke for a short time. Taiwanga, however, did not wish them to disperse until he had said a word or two, as we had come a long distance, aud should return in a few days. After he had concluded, several Chiefs, in turn, arose, and expressed the necessity of not allowing us to return without plenty of potatoes for our journey; for when we returned, it would be said that they had no love for us. In the evening, a large party came round the tent door, to see us at supper, and to converse upon various subjects: their behaviour very good.

They expressed great surprise at our using knives and forks, and indeed at all they beheld.

Oct. 29, 1831 – Taiwanga came at break of day, to say that three canoes were going over to Mokoia. respecting a dispute about some land. From what the Natives said, we deemed it well to accompany them, of which they approved. Before we landed, it was agreed by all to leave the question to Taiwanga and myself. We accordingly proceeded, and communicated with the opposite party. After some angry expressions from the people of the place, the question was settled. We had also a second suit to settle: each was respecting but a few square yards of land. After all was concluded, the Natives assembled together: we gave them a few words upon the one thing needful. Several Chiefs spoke of the importance of accompanying us en our return, and providing potatoes for us; otherwise the Ngapuhi would say that they had no respect for us. We returned to our quarters at Inemutu about noon. After a little rest, the Natives came round, to talk. One young man began to ask the meaning of letters. I wrote them down for him; and in half an hour he knew them all, and was teaching several outside. Numbers of others came, until I had no paper left of any description on which to write a copy. At length they brought small pieces, to have the letters written for them; and about 200, old and young, were soon employed teaching and learning the letters with the greatest possible interest. At 3 o'clock, about 150, male and female, were assembled to learn the Catechism: amongst them were several old women. They afterwards returned to their letters, and continued till the time of Evening Prayer, when I took the opportunity of speaking on the Service of the morrow, and on the necessity of keeping the Lord's-day holy. Kept in close conversation with several until dusk. This has been, I trust, a day of great importance, truly gratifying, and of great encouragement to us. Every thing far exceeds our utmost expectations. I have neither seen nor heard any thing to equal it in the land. Both young and old appear to possess an interest altogether new; and I do trust the Lord will appear in their behalf, to give deliverance.

Oct. 30: Sunday – Hoisted a sheet for a flag, as a signal for Sunday, the first ever seen in this quarter. At 7 o'clock A. M. assembled the Natives in a long house, as it was beginning to rain. The house was about fifty feet long. They removed one partition, and cut some holes to admit light and air. I was very apprehensive that it might be insupportable; but did not experience any particular inconvenience, though it was as full as possible. Before Service commenced, the Boys brought their papers for me to hear them their letters. Most appeared to know them, and asked what they were to learn next. After Service, I addressed the Natives on the necessity of a New Birth, which brought on an interesting and important conversation among the Chiefs generally. Assembled the Youths for Catechism. All the Natives of the Pa came, and appeared delighted. They afterward repeated their letters. At 5 o'clock we held Evening Service; when I spoke on the fall of man, and his salvation by Christ, the Light of the world. This must have been an astonishing day to these Natives. Many new things have they heard today, surprising in their savage ears. May the Lord bless and sanctify the same to them.

Oct. 31 – At day-break, Chiefs came to request us to stop, as a party was on the way to see us: agreed to remain. After Prayer, assembled all to school. Formed them into classes: they were much delighted. In the afternoon, strangers observed at a distance: all went out to meet them. Before their arrival, the Chiefs requested me to give some account of our laws relative to theft, &c. They expressed great wonder, that Chiefs were as amenable to the law as poor men; and said, that it would not be so with them. When the strangers arrived, the usual meeting took place, and several of the Chiefs spoke. They called on me, in conclusion, to make a speech. The strangers gazed with much surprise at hearing things so entirely opposed to their ideas. They returned to the Pa for refreshment; while those belonging to the Pa assembled for School. Before sunset, all came together for Evening Prayer, when I addressed them. Numbers of Natives round the tent, in close conversation with us, till near 10 o'clock.

Nov. 1 – At break of day, Chiefs came, as we were to move this morning. Obliged to shave in public, to their great amusement. Called to select a place for the School. As we were about to depart, we were surrounded by all, and took breakfast in public. At 8 o'clock we

were ready to depart. The Boys who had been nominated for the Schools at Paihia and Kerikeri were desired to remain, as it was apprehended that they might be employed to fetch firewood, or be set to work, or their hair burnt, when cut, instead of being deposited in some sacred place. The children came for fresh lessons to the last, even after we had taken our seats in the canoe. Can we question their desire for instruction? Left the beach, after taking leave of all. Arrived at our former sleeping-place by 6 o'clock, to wait for our train.

Nov. 17, 1831 – Entered the head of Wangaruru at dusk.

Nov. 18 – After midnight, came to anchor. Despatched a Native in our small canoe, to fetch one sufficiently large to convey us to the landing-place. In about an hour he returned, bringing a canoe with him, and four men to take us up the river. Arose immediately, though all were greatly fatigued; and soon prepared for our journey. Landed at break of day; and commenced our march with light hearts, being better able to calculate the probable time of our arrival at home. The morning was exceedingly fine, and the birds were singing on every side. The walk was truly delightful; more particularly so, from being released from the vessel: yet there were many painful feelings, as we passed along without meeting with, or seeing, a single individual, though but a few months since all this neighbourhood was in a high state of cultivation; but since Taramiti was killed, his people have been compelled to flee. About 10 o'clock A. M. we arrived at Waikari. The Natives were very civil, and provided a canoe. The tide being out, the canoe was with difficulty dragged down the river. We landed with some difficulty, and were immediately met by some of our Boys. They danced and ran about, and were about to give notice at the Settlement, but were prevented. We were happy to learn that all were well; and were soon relieved by the sight of those whom we held most dear on earth. All were much concerned on account of our delay, and the "Active" was ready to sail the next morning in quest of us.

Chiefs' Letter to the King.

A report having been spread that the French Government had it in contemplation to take possession of New Zealand, thirteen of the Chiefs addressed a Letter to the King of England, soliciting his interference, to prevent such an occurrence. The document shows the favourable disposition of the Chiefs toward this country, and their regard for the Missionaries who labour among them.

TO KING WILLIAM, THE GRACIOUS CHIEF OF ENGLAND –

King William – We, the Chiefs of New Zealand, assembled at this place, called the Kerikeri, write to thee: for we hear that thou art the Great Chief of the other side the water; since the many ships which come to our land belong to thee.

We are a people without possessions. We have nothing but timber, flax, pork, and potatoes. We sell these things, however, to your people; and then we see the property of Europeans. It is only thy land which is liberal toward us. From thee also come the Missionaries, who teach us to believe on Jehovah God, and on Jesus Christ His Son.

We have heard that the Tribe of Marian 5 is at hand, coming to take away our land: therefore we pray thee to become our friend, and the guardian of these Islands; lest the tearing of other Tribes should come near to us, and lest strangers should come and take away our land.

And if any of thy people should be troublesome, or vicious toward us – for some persons are living here who have run away from ships – we pray thee to be angry with them, that they may be obedient; lest the anger of the people of this land fall upon them.

This Letter is from us, from the Chiefs of the Natives of New Zealand.

(Signed)

WARERAHI, KEKEAO, HARA, REWA, TETORE, ATUAHAERE, PATUONE, TEMORENGA, MOITARA, NENE, RIPI, MATANGI, TAUNUI.

We believe the French have disavowed the intention of taking possession of New Zealand. The English Government has hitherto rejected all proposals to colonize the Island, on the humane principle, it is conceived, that the destruction of the aboriginal population is the inevitable consequence of colonizing a country, the inhabi-

tants of which are in a state of barbarism. The success of Missionary labours will, with Christianity, introduce civilization. Under this process, the Natives are not only preserved, but have imparted to them all the blessings which flow from the Gospel of Christ and an improved social condition. It affords us satisfaction to add, that though the British Government decline to colonize the country, they have appointed a Consular Agent, Mr. James Busby, to reside on the Northern Island, at once to watch over our commercial interests – for a considerable trade in Timber and Flax is now carried on between New Zealand and New South Wales; and more especially with the view of repressing the outrages and wrongs which have heretofore been perpetrated by British Subjects, to a frightful extent.

General Views of the Mission.

The following extract presents a cheering view of the whole result of the labours of the Missionaries, in the midst of the various difficulties by which they have been, and continue to be harassed and opposed.

Sept. 19, 1831 – Here I would raise my Ebenezer, and say, with the Prophet of old. Hitherto the Lord hath helped us. I bless the Lord that I have lived to see great changes in this land; and although the present dispensation, from some of the leading Chiefs being so much bent on the present fighting expedition, seems to be dark and gloomy, yet I will rejoice in what the Lord has done, and in what He is about to do; as I have no doubt but even this fighting expedition will ultimately tend to the extension of His Kingdom and Cause in this land. I have now been here nearly eight years; and I can truly say that nothing but mercy and truth have followed me, even to the present moment; so that, from the gracious dealings of God with me, I can write faithfulness and truth on all His promises. – – - [Mr. R. Davis.

Few of our Readers probably are ignorant of the attacks made by writers of a certain class, on Missionary Societies, relative to different parts of their operations. Among these, the Protestant Missions established in the Islands of the South Sea have been assailed with peculiar virulence. The Church Missionary Society's New-Zealand Mission has not been exempted from such attacks. In a recently-published Volume, serious charges are brought against its Missionaries in the Island. The passages containing these charges have been extracted and extensively circulated, in our own country, in several Periodical Publications, and a degree of currency in consequence given to them, calculated to injure the Society itself, as well as the individuals more immediately implicated. While, therefore, we are desirous to abstain from a particular examination of the charges alluded to, which would lay us under the painful necessity of pursuing a course of recrimination which we are solicitous to avoid, we think it right thus far to allude to them; and to assure the Members of the Society, that the Committee have reason to believe that the charges are either altogether unfounded, grossly exaggerated, or grounded on totally erroneous views of the principles on which a Mission to the Heathen should be conducted. Though, however, the Committee have the fullest confidence in the prudence and Christian character of the Missionaries, they have considered it due to them to forward to them a copy of the work referred to, and to direct their attention to the accusatory passages, that they may have an opportunity of giving such explanations, and making such remarks upon them, as they may judge necessary, in order to put the Committee fully in posession of the whole case.

Having occupied so much of our space with the above communications, we must postpone the account of our HOME PROCEEDINGS, and our usual CONTRIBUTION LIST, till next month.

5 The French.

HOME PROCEEDINGS.

At a Meeting held on the 18th of September, the Instructions of the Committee were delivered, by the Rev. W. Jowett, to Mr. J. A. Wilson and Mrs. Wilson, on occasion of their departure for the New-Zealand Mission. The Rev. J. Hough addressed to them a few words of counsel and encouragement; and the Rev. J. N. Pearson commended them in prayer to the favour and protection of Almighty God.

Mr. and Mrs. Wilson left London on the 21st ult, on board the "Camden," Convict Ship, Captain Clayton; but they did not reach Plymouth till the 5th inst, having been in considerable danger from a severe gale on the night of the 2d.

HOME PROCEEDINGS.

Departure of Missionaries.

WE inadvertently omitted to notice, at the time, the departure of Miss Maria Coldham for New Zealand

The loss of Mrs. Hart in the "Haweis" (Vol. II. p. 34), who was proceeding to New Zealand to assist in the charge of the domestic concerns of the Mission Families, led the Committee to accept the offer of Miss Coldham, Sister of Mrs. H. Williams, to occupy the place in the Mission designed for Mrs. Hart.

Mr. John Morgan, who received the instructions of the Committee on the 30th of May, p. 137, left Liverpool on the 6th inst. for New South-Wales, on his way to New Zealand, on board the "William," Captain Boag.

Church Missionary Record

[New Zealand sections only]

1834

[This book was digitised in partnership with Auckland War Memorial Museum]
http://www.aucklandmuseum.com

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

IN our last Communications from New Zealand (see pp. 247-261, 1833), and in former accounts, we have given the reports regularly transmitted by the Missionary Labourers actually engaged in the field. It may be very advantageous to their cause, as well as gratifying to our Readers, to have the additional testimony of an eye-witness, who is not connected with their work, otherwise than as the heart of every sincere lover of the Gospel must be attached to those who labour to carry its blessed tidings to the uttermost parts of the earth. This testimony we are enabled to present in the following communication from Captain W. Jacob, of the East-India Company's service on the Bombay Establishment, to the Secretary of the Society's Corresponding Committee in New South Wales.

New Zealand.

From the letter alluded to, bearing date, Sydney, March 13, 1833, we make the following copious extracts; premising that it was about two months previous to that date that Captain Jacob took his passage from Sydney for New Zealand.

General Remarks.

I landed at Paihia in the Bay of Islands on the 9th of February, after a voyage of fourteen days from this place; and met with a kind and cordial reception from the Rev. Messrs. W. Williams and A. N. Brown, and Mr. Fairburn. The Rev. H. Williams had, two days previous to our arrival, proceeded to Tauranga in the Bay of Plenty, in company with Mr. Chapman, in the hope of being able to arbitrate between the contending Chiefs; who, for some time past, had been assembling there, to renew the contest of last year, and with the same object in view, viz. to wipe off the stain contracted by the battle which was fought at Kororarika in Feb. 1830, all of which grew out of the dispute between two of the wretched objects who had been welcomed on board the – – - by her Commander. If the evil consequence of the immorality of too many of the visitors to the Bay of Islands were required to be exhibited, nothing could better display it than these transactions to which I have briefly referred; for they owe their origin entirely to that improper intercourse which it is lamentable to find is too generally allowed between the most degraded portion of the native population and the shipping, to the scandal of our Country in that part of the world.

Paihia

The day on which I arrived at Paihia was Saturday; and on ascending the beach immediately in front of the Mission Settlement, I observed a venerable Native Chief and his attendants seated, wrapped up in their mats, on the bank. These men had, I was told, come all the way from Wangaroa by sea, in their open canoe, for the express purpose of attending the Religious Services of the following day at the Mission Station, the distance being about 50 miles; – a pleasing indication of their anxiety for instruction.

The next morning I awoke to the enjoyment of one of the most interesting and delightful Sabbaths I ever spent.

The Church bell summoned us to the Sanctuary at 8 o'clock; and on entering it, I found it completely filled with Natives, who were seated on forms, the males on one side and the females on the other, leaving a passage down the centre to the organ, which is opposite to the pulpit and altar. The Mission and other families sat round the pulpit at the east end, which part was somewhat raised above the great body of the Church. The Rev. W. Williams officiated; and never did I witness a more attentive, orderly, and devout Congregation, even in a Christian country. The whole Congregation appeared to join In the singing, and in the responses and repetitions of our excellent Liturgy, with the greatest possible propriety and devotion: indeed, so intensely interested was I in the Service, that it was with considerable difficulty I could suppress my feelings, when the notes of the organ were almost drowned by the full burst of the voices of these Native Worshippers, who, from having once been savage cannibals, were now uniting in the praises of God. The whole of the Service, with the exception of the Psalms, was in the New-Zealand Language. 6

The sermon was from Luke, v. 21, 20. and was delivered in the Native Language by Mr. Williams, with much solemnity, and with a fluency and propriety which ensured attention from the Congregation. After the Native Sermon, the Rev. A. N. Brown delivered an admirable one, in English, to the European portion of the Congregation, from 1 Tim. i. 15; when the Morning Service closed.

I accompanied the Rev. Messrs. W. Williams and A. N. Brown, between the Services, to the village of Kororarika, on the opposite side of the Bay, about two miles from Paihia; where, ringing their bell, we assembled a Congregation of about 70 Natives in the division of the village belonging to the Chief Rewa. Here also I was much astonished and gratified by seeing the apparently savage Natives take out their books from under their mats, and turn over to the Hymn and to the other parts, as the Clergyman proceeded; both singing, and joining in the responses, as with one voice, with much solemnity and propriety. I was not

prepared to find, among a people who had previously no written language, so many who had benefitted by the instruction given in our Mission Schools; and I was not a little delighted to witness the attention and evident interest, which every face exhibited, as the preacher addressed them, every eye being directed toward him.

There is much to discourage Missionary efforts in this village, from the scenes of immorality and vice which are constantly exhibited, through the intercourse which subsists between it and the shipping, and the dissolute habits of too many of the inhabitants which that intercourse has engendered. Their efforts have, however, so far been blessed, that some few of the wretched victims of that intercourse have been rescued from their evil courses, and are now residing in the Mission Settlement, where they have given satisfactory evidence of their sincerity, in their altered life, and their readiness to gather further instruction in the Schools. The Missionaries are, moreover, pressed by some of the Natives not to discontinue their Lord's-Day visits to Kororarika; and such a Congregation as I beheld there was a satisfactory evidence of their visits not being thrown away. While we were solemnizing Divine Service at that place, we were much concerned to find that, within hearing and within sight of our little Congregation, two boats full of Europeans, from the whalers in the Bay, were rioting, in a state of brutal intoxication, to the disgrace of their country. These are among the numerous hindrances which at present exist to any extensive reception of Christianity by the people, and they present the most serious obstacle to their civilization and improvement.

The following day I attended the Male School, at 6 o'clock A. M. The little Church was nearly full of Natives, male and female; and the Morning Prayers were read and a Hymn sung with their usual propriety, when the males fell into their classes, and commenced school. The circulating System of Mutual Instruction is followed; and I was much gratified to observe the facility, order, and regularity with which the whole was conducted by the Natives themselves. Here, too, I observed all ranks and ages, Chiefs and subjects, old and young, bond and free, receiving and communicating instruction, with a degree of decorum and regularity which would have reflected credit on a school of the same kind even in England. Catechisms, reading, spelling, writing on slates from dictation, and ciphering, formed the employment of the upper classes, while the lowest were engaged in learning the alphabet and forming letters. The former disinclination of the Natives to attend School has now happily entirely subsided, and given place to an anxiety for instruction, which appears to be rapidly extending. There are 71 Native Males in the School I have mentioned; and in fine weather they generally adjourn to the churchyard, for the more convenient formation of the classes.

After the Male School closes, at 8 o'clock, the Females assemble, of whom there are 44 now under instruction at Paihia. I was struck with the appearance of so many grown-up women at school; and particularly at observing mothers, not deterred by the claims of their families, bringing their infants at their backs, and falling into their classes. The senior classes read remarkably well, and write equally so from dictation on slates: they all learn Catechisms, and are much more advanced than I expected to find them. They now actually feel it a deprivation to be kept at home, so great is their anxiety to attend the Mission Schools. Men of hostile tribes, even, now lay aside their antipathies, and unite for instruction, disregarding the person of a teacher, even if a slave, and valuing instruction even from a child. This I myself saw, and a more gratifying spectacle I never beheld in my life.

The Infant School contains 26 little children. I found 18 of them assembled, some of whom were Europeans; who, from the present smallness of their numbers, are associated with the native infants in this interesting School. The assiduous superintendence of the female members of the Mission appears evident, in the manner in which these little creatures go through their exercises; and there cannot be a doubt, but the moral culture which this system engenders, no less than the mental improvement of the scholars, will make it a blessing to the Mission.

The Station of Paihia has several advantages, from the facility which water-carriage gives to the Missionaries, in visiting the numerous villages in its vicinity. Thus some one or other of the Paihia Mission regularly attend, every Lord's Day, at Moto Roa, Kororarika, and the villages up the Waitangi and Kauakaua Rivers; besides conducting three entire Services in the Mission Settlement; of which, that in the afternoon is the only one purely English.

At Paihia, as well as subsequently at the other Stations, I was much pleased

with observing the neatness of the artificers' work, undertaken entirely by Natives who have been instructed by the Catechist Missionaries. The window-sashes, doors, and other household work, were even better made than those sent from this colony, made by Europeans. One Native, a Chief baptized by the name of David, had built himself a stone house in the English style, without an upper story, but with doors and windows and fire-places, floor and ceiling, in a very creditable style; – at once, a proof of their attachment to the comforts of life, and of the progress of civilization among them.

The Female School at Paihia is one of peculiar interest. I saw the needle-work of some who had been instructed here; which, in point of neatness of execution, equalled any thing I had ever witnessed in any other part of the world; and their reading and writing were most creditably executed; giving a satisfactory proof of the unremitting zeal and diligence with which they have been instructed by the Wives of the Missionaries.

– Waimate.

From Paihia I accompanied Mr. Clarke, the Catechist, to Waimate, fourteen miles direct distance. Here I was much gratified with witnessing the advanced state of the Settlement. It was only formed early in 1831; and already they have a row of excellent houses nearly finished, and several acres enclosed with a neat paling fence, and under cultivation with wheat, barley, Indian-corn, and potatoes, enough for the supply of the whole Mission for half-a-year to come. As the farming establishment advances, they will be able to accomplish more; and next year they hope to raise sufficient to make the whole New-Zealand Mission independent of these colonies for their hitherto periodical supplies of flour, &c, besides providing against the usual wants of the Natives in the Settlement, for whom they have hitherto had to purchase potatoes from the villagers; which will, I apprehend, be found a material saving to the Mission.

The little Church at Waimate was run up in six weeks, for the present emergency; and, being too small to contain their present Congregation, will, I conclude, be shortly replaced by a more permanent and suitable edifice.

The Schools, like those of Paihia, exhibit abundant proofs of the zealous attention of the persons composing this Mission. The writing of the senior classes was really better than that of most school-boys in England; and, what struck me much, it was remarkably free from orthographical mistakes; which can only be accounted for from the simplicity of their language, each letter of which admits but of one simple sound. Here, also, I observed Chiefs and subjects, old and young, freemen and slaves, all incorporated into classes; one only distinction, viz. that of proficiency in learning – a remarkable feature in all the Schools of the New-Zealand Mission. I attended their Daily Morning and Evening Prayers, in the Church, where order, devotion, and a becoming solemnity, characterized the worship of these poor savages, elevating them at once from the degradation of their generation, into the scale of civilized society; – not, it is true, in the outward garb of their dress, or in the refinements of society, but – in what is of infinitely greater moment, because affecting their present and future happiness – in the high moral culture which their lives exhibit.

I have already observed, that Education is extending, and that its advantages are beginning to be felt by the Natives. I need not go further for a proof of this, than the Station and neighbourhood of Waimate. During my stay there, I visited almost all the villages around; and was not a little delighted to find, in many of them, regular houses of Public Prayer, in which the villagers are daily assembled by the sound of "their bell;" which, however, was but the humble substitute of an iron hatchet or hoe, suspended by a string, and struck by a mallet. In one of these villages, Pukenui, they have, among themselves, actually established a Village School, without any direct interference or superintendence of the Missionaries; where the system of Mutual Instruction, by circulating classes, is successfully conducted. This School assembles after daily Morning Prayer, which consists of the Morning Service of our Church, read by a Native who has been instructed in the Mission School: and in the Village School I have mentioned, old and young, bond and free, write indiscriminately. This is a prominent feature in the present state of the Mission, and forms a striking contrast to the times not long passed, when the utmost difficulty was experienced in collecting even two or three Natives together in the Mission Settlement for the purpose of instruction.

Visiting these villages, I proceeded

along some few miles of newly-made road, constructed by the neighbouring Chiefs expressly to facilitate the visits of the Missionaries to their villages. One of these Chiefs, Temorenga, on being asked, by Mr. Davis, what he had to say to me about the Good Word, replied significantly, "Aye, that's what I wish to talk to him about: tell him to look at my road!" – the best proof he could give me of his anxiety for Religious Instruction. This Chief spoke with much affection of the Rev. S. Marsden, who was accompanied by him during his first tour in New Zealand, in 1814; which appears to have made a considerable impression on his mind.

In another direction, I fell in with the Chief Ripi, a Convert, baptized by the name of Broughton, who, with his people, we found engaged in cutting a road through a dense forest, to enable the Missionaries to get at a village beyond it, for the purpose of extending to them the same blessings which he and his people have now learnt to enjoy. I was struck with the dignified appearance of this man; and when contrasting his present employment with that in which he was a few years since constantly engaged with hostile tribes, I felt the power and the beauty of the simile he himself used, when reasoning with another Chief on the evil of his former courses, he said: "The name and reputation which a Native acquires by war and bloodshed, is like the hoarfrost, which disappears as soon as the sun shines upon it; but when a man is brave in seeking the things of Jesus Christ, his name lives for ever." Such a contrast as this man's character now exhibits, to what it once was, is indeed calculated to fill the mind with gratitude and praise, and is worth a hundred arguments in support of Missionary labours. In his village he has regular Daily Prayers; and his example is calculated to do much good in the country.

I was present at a marriage in the Mission Church at Waimate; a ceremony which was deeply affecting, from the interest generally felt by Natives in this Christian Service, whenever solemnized: and at its conclusion, I gladly affixed my signature, as one of the witnesses, under that of the married couple, who, as in England, write their names in the Parish Register, with which each of the Mission Parishes in New Zealand is furnished. Publicity appears, among all nations not truly savage, to be thought a desirable thing in such ceremonies; and to this are superadded, in the Service of our Church, vows which I had opportunities of knowing were felt to be binding on the consciences of these simple-minded people – vows which involve reciprocal duties, such as man and wife have never hitherto acknowledged in that heathen land. Our Matrimonial Service is, therefore, highly prized by them.

I quitted Waimate grateful for the many kind attentions I had received from the persons composing the Mission, taking with me a large quantity of native letters addressed to the Rev. W. Yate by his flock, giving evidence of their attachment and affection for their absent Pastor. He is indeed evidently beloved by them; and most deservedly so, from his affectionate and considerate disposition, and the zeal he has evinced in their service. That these barbarians, as they but yesterday were, should now be able thus to convey their feelings twelve hundred miles, is an affecting proof of the importance of the instruction that has been conveyed to them; and it furnishes also a satisfactory evidence that the Missionaries have not laboured there in vain.

– Kerikeri.

I reached Kerikeri, ten miles distant from Waimate, safely, having been kindly accompanied by the Rev. W. Williams of Paihia, and Mr. Clarke. Kerikeri, once the tragic scene of human sacrifices and barbarous superstitions, and that only a few years since, now exhibits the tranquillity and security of an English village. The little Church on the hill is well filled with attentive worshippers; and here the truths of the Gospel are declared, by those who have themselves tasted that the Lord is gracious. They have 20 Baptized Natives, of whom 12 are Adult Converts; and in their Schools they have 68 males and females under daily Christian Instruction.

– Tepuna.

(Formerly Rangihoua) – I must draw to a conclusion, by the brief notice I shall now take of the last Mission Station I visited in New Zealand, at Tepuna.

This Station was first established about two miles from its present site, at the village of Rangihoua; but on the buildings becoming dilapidated, it was removed to Tepuna. Here I found Mr. King, and his family, who are now nearly grown up. His co-adjutor, Mr. Shepherd, I did not see, as he was in the woods, cutting timber for the new Church now in progress of construction at this Station. Mr. King

was one of the first Missionaries in New i Zealand.

Capt. Jacob left New Zealand for New South Wales, in the schooner "Fortitude," on the 16th of February. He closes his Letter with the following cordial and highly satisfactory attestation to the good now effecting at this Mission of the Society: –

In concluding my brief notice of the New-Zealand Mission, I can only say, that I had not, previously to my visit there, seen any notice of the operations of that Mission for some time past, having been a traveller for the last year and a half; and that since my return to New South Wales, I have carefully looked into the Missionary Reports of the place, and I am bound to say that they are any thing but exaggerations, so far as I have had opportunity of judging from personal inspection. Indeed, I may affirm, that in no one thing was I disappointed, and in most I was very agreeably surprised at what I saw of Missionary Labours in that most interesting country; and should my humble testimony be of any service you are perfectly at liberty to use it, in any way that may be calculated to benefit the good cause in which the Society is embarked.

6 Captain Jacob notices, that, in addition to the Prayer which the Missionaries of course use for their own British Sovereign, there is introduced also into their Service; a petition for the Chiefs of New Zealand. The reader may be reminded by this circumstance of the precept in Jeremiah xxix, 7.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

VERY copious Despatches have been received from this Mission, which will enable us to continue our accounts of it from p. 12 of the Volume for the present year.

New Zealand.

It is a twofold work of mercy in which our Missionaries are engaged in this Island. Their main duty is that of preaching peace by Jesus Christ; but they are also very often called to the office of negociating pacific measures between the miserable Tribes that are thirsting for war and bloodshed. In order to present to our Readers a distinct view of the later proceedings of the Missionaries, we shall first give the account of two voyages to the southward; the one on a message of pacification; the other, for the purpose of exploring a suitable situation for the founding of a new Station, more near to the centre of the Island, as contemplated some time since by the Committee, at the suggestion of the Missionaries. (See Church Missionary Report for 1833-34, p. 59.) We then purpose, in a subsequent Number, to present, in systematic order, a view of all the general Missionary Operations in the four Stations already established by the Society.

Of the two voyages above referred to, the one is related by the Rev. Henry Williams; the other, partly by him, and partly by one of his fellow-labourers, the Rev. Alfred Brown.

Of the copious account given by Mr. Williams, it may be remarked, that probably many parts will be of no inconsiderable value to persons who may hereafter visit those

regions: very little abridgment, therefore, has been adopted. Perpetually, in the course of his narrative, incidents are interspersed, which serve to shew, in the most touching manner, the power of the god of this world over that unhappy Island, as well as to excite the fervent hope and prayer that the Son of Righteousness may arise upon it, with healing in His wings.

Departure from the Bay of Islands.

Mr. Williams writes –

Feb. 7, 1833 – The morning was very fine, and the Bay perfectly smooth, with a light air from S. S. W. Much hustle in placing the baggage in the boats; which had been collected with considerable care, both for quality and compactness of stowage, and for convenience; as we contemplated an absence of many weeks, and should have to abide in tents during the period. All was prepared and ready for departure by eight o'clock; and we took leave at nine, the Natives in the Settlement saluting us with their guns. Mr. Chapman was in his own boat; and the "Karere" in company, for the purpose of taking potatoes for the boys, and of rendering assistance, if needed; the "Tacapo" and an American ship standing out of the Bay. Our sailing was very pleasant; and at noon we rounded Cape Brett. The wind shifted to the sea-breeze. At two o'clock, we observed a strange sail to the northward, but could not make her out. Much admired the action of our boat: she sailed with elegance, and possessed great accommodation. At six o'clock we landed at Wangaruru; and pitched our tent in a quiet spot, among the bushes. Discovered a place where a human head had but recently been prepared. Obliged to retire early to bed, owing to a severe head-ache occasioned by long abstinence; not having taken any food, and being exposed to a burning sun.

Feb. 8 – Woke several times, in consequence of fleas, the occupants of the land. Found myself much better for rest: moved on at daylight with a pleasant breeze; the "Karere," a few miles distant. At nine o'clock, pulled into Wananuke, a fine broad river for small vessels. We here breakfasted: the coffee was excellent. At one o'clock we entered Tutukaka, having left Mr. Chapman far behind: took some oysters, which we found in great abundance, and pulled on to Taiharuru. As we approached, the wind suddenly shifted to the south, and blew strong. With difficulty we found an entrance, as the sea was breaking heavily on the rocks. We passed in safely, and obtained snug quarters, within a long chain of rocks, which broke off the sea, and formed a good shelter for canoes and boats.

Feb. 9 – Fine morning. We were delayed two hours, owing to the tide being out: had not sufficient water for the boats: took breakfast, and pulled out. Passed on, with a fine breeze, to Te Wara, the outer head of Wangari. The wind increasing, we pulled, with great difficulty, into the harbour. We were much disappointed at not finding the "Karere" here; but more so at learning that there were no Natives up the river, all having been dispersed some time since by a party from Waikato. A large fire was observed to the southward, supposed to be kindled by the Rarawa (a Native Tribe). No inhabitants hitherto seen: all desolation: wind very strong during the remainder of the day: every one felt weary from the heat of the weather, and the long and heavy pull into the harbour. We occupied the place we did last year; but no one was here but ourselves.

Feb. 10: Sunday – Much rain in the night, but a fine morning: no signs of any living creature near us: determined to proceed up the river, to see for ourselves if there were no one in the neighbourhood with whom we could communicate upon the nature of eternal things. We accordingly took advantage of the flood-tide, but to no purpose. We saw the wreck of an Englishman's house, but not a creature. When last here, there was a large party at the Pa, and several Europeans were in various places around; but all are gone, showing the distressing effects of war. Landed our messenger for Paihia, and returned to our quarters. This Sunday appears a blank; every one feeling out of order. In the evening, held Service with our boys.

Feb. 11 – At half-past three o'clock, woke the boys, to proceed on: clouds flying fast over the moon, though but little wind with us: dark hazy morning. We had an agreeable sail, with a fair wind, as far as Mangawai, by nine o'clock. From appearance, the Rarawa must have left in the night, as their foot-marks were not washed out on the sand. Had a comfortable breakfast; but the wind was so much increased, that we were glad to

put back, after getting under weigh. The boys employed themselves in fishing. At two o'clock, put out, under close-reefed sails, and passed along very comfortably, keeping close to the shore. At half-past three o'clock, observed fires at Wakatuwenua; and, by five, landed among the Rarawa. We were glad to find Rawiri among them: they were all very kind. I had a long conversation with them; and afterward we all assembled for prayers, previously to our leaving them to pull round to the "Karere," which was at Omaha, our old and favourite spot. It was near eight o'clock before we arrived at our quarters; where we immediately kindled fires among the trees, pitched our tents, and soon found ourselves at home: took supper, had prayers, and went to bed weary.

Feb. 12, 1833 – Fine night. No one disposed to rise early, being very tired, from yesterday's movements. Wind strong from the westward: fleas very numerous: learnt that the Rarawa had passed on to Hauturu (the little barrier) in the night. As the distance across the Thames to Cape Colvel is great, and the sea generally considerable, we decided to remain quiet, and arrange our things. Toward evening, as the wind had much abated, and the weather was clear, we thought it well to take the opportunity to put across. We moved off at sunset, in company with the "Karere." After about two hours, the wind began to muffle, which caused a good deal of sea for a boat; but we passed on surprisingly well, the boys admiring the abilities of our frail bark.

Feb. 13 – Fresh breezes. By one o'clock we came into smooth water; shortened sail and ran close in shore, pulled round Port Charles, and came to an anchor till daylight: we did not wish to land, as the boys were somewhat apprehensive of Parekeawiowio, a noted character, lord of this part of the land, and one who has killed many a traveller while reposing within his dominions. At day-break, we landed in a quiet bay, where the boys immediately commenced exploring the neighbourhood for karakas, and some to get shell-fish. Our breakfast was very refreshing; and, by the aid of a good wash and a good fire, we were soon able to continue our voyage, after a short examination as to the nature of this port as laid down on the chart. We were much interested with all we saw here, as it was near this place we so narrowly escaped shipwreck last year. Examined the bay or inlet called Port Charles, which is incapable of affording any shelter, even for the "Karere." The sea breeze suddenly came on, and, for some time, it appeared doubtful whether the little vessel would work out. Passed on to Ahuahu, the northernmost of the Mercury Islands, where we found refuge in the "Active" last year: very snug quarters among the bushes, the "Karere" lying in the river. The boys were disposed to reconnoitre. Some of them returned, loaded with dried shark, apparently left behind in flight – a fine prize for the boys! As we came out of Port Charles, we took particular notice of the rocks and coast, which had well nigh marked our tomb on the 8th of April last; and I consider that the "Active" could not have been more than half-cable length from the shore when so mercifully preserved. Assembled our boys to prayers at dusk, and retired to rest very weary.

Feb. 14 – Cloudy: wind W. N. W.: a week from home this morning: but one interview with any Natives, and only one day's sail from Tauranga; yet we cannot proceed until the Rarawa come on, unless we go direct to Maketu.

Feb. 15 – Felt very unwell. Boys getting fern-root, in order to spare our stock of provision, as we must not expect to be able to purchase any. Many human bones lay scattered upon the surface of the ground, the remains of some of their horrid repasts. Saw no appearance of the fires of the Rarawa. Prospect of rain: prepared accordingly.

Feb. 16 – Determined to remain quiet until Monday, and proceed: continued unwell. Some of the boys brought in dried shark. Prepared for departure on Monday.

Feb. 17: Sunday – Continued unwell. Held a very comfortable Service with the boys after breakfast: much indisposed during the remainder of the day.

Feb. 18 – Wind and rain, with lightning: could not move from our quarters. The boys foraging for food, shell-fish, fern-root &c. In the evening, fine. Prepared for a move in the morning.

Feb. 19 – At daylight, dark cloudy weather: light airs from the west, and the scud flying rapidly: left our retreat, and moved out: soon found a wind and sea: passed most rapidly along. A little after seven o'clock, entered Mercury Bay: landed on a quiet beach to breakfast; a fine stream of water falling from a cliff close to us, and the trees overhanging us.

Having concluded our repast, we sang a Hymn with the boys, and offered up our morning sacrifice to the Lord of heaven and earth. I could not but reflect, while preparation was making for our proceeding, that of the multitudes who have passed over the very stones on which we were sitting, in their expedition to and from the war, none had been found to give praise to the Lord: that this was, in all probability, the first time since the Creation that any one had approached the Throne of Grace in this part of the world. It was past eight o'clock before we loosed from this quiet spot, to engage a fine breeze and foaming sea which was running at this time, for the wind was very strong. Our run was very considerable to day.

Feb. 20, 1833 – Rain more or less through the night: my tent perfectly tight, by the assistance of some painted cloths. At daylight the weather cleared off a little; but as the wind was not fair, we kept our place. Boys catching eels, and shell-fish, and digging fern-root. In the evening, the weather more favourable: prepared for a move in the morning.

Feb. 21 – Quiet night. At daylight, cloudy, but little wind from S. S. W. Rawiri, Hamu, and her dog, joined us in the boats: weather doubtful: a pleasant sail to Wangamata.

Feb. 22 – Dreary stormy night; but our tents did not give way, nor did the rain penetrate. Our health is in no wise affected by the damp around. The sea roars with awful majesty at the entrance of the river, being one perpetual foam. Our situation begins to be tedious and wearisome. It is now more than a fortnight since we left our houses, and we have seen no one, except the Rarawa at one interval, and we cannot proceed until the sea is smooth; but it is the Lord's work in which we are engaged: it is His honour we seek, and we would desire to commit ourselves to Him.

Feb. 23 – Wind died away in the night: every appearance of fine weather, in which the birds seem to rejoice: their melody fills the surrounding woods and bushes.

Feb. 24: Sunday – Clear morning: sea smooth: no signs of life; no sound of the Church-going bell. How melancholy is the reflexion, that once these hills and valleys were peopled, though with savage hordes; but, of late years, they have been hunted as the deer, until few remain, and they are driven into the interior!

After breakfast, assembled our little Congregation under the shade of the wide-spreading Pohutukaua, and held Service. It was sweet and refreshing, to know that we, with all the Israel of God, were engaged in the Service, and enjoying the presence, of our common Father and Friend; though absent in body, still present in spirit with them: these are the privileges of the Christian.

Where two or three, with sweet accord,
Obedient to their Sovereign Lord,
Meet to recount His acts of grace,
And offer solemn prayer and praise;

There (says the Saviour) will I be,
Amid this little company;
To them unveil my smiling face,
And shed my glories round the place.

Feb. 25 – A quiet night and clear morning; but the surf was roaring at the entrance. Took breakfast, struck our encampment, and pulled out to take a view of the sea, which we found very considerable, with a heavy swell. The breeze springing up from the eastward, we were obliged to return to our old quarters, and were most severely beset with namus: they were ravenous, and found their way through every covering: we were obliged to bind up our hands and feet on account of them, but could not effectually keep clear of them. At sunset, a clear sky. The boys returned from foraging: they brought a good quantity of fern-root.

Feb. 26 – Intended to move at break of day; but the boys were apprehensive of a southerly wind: delayed till nine o'clock, when we pulled out in quest of a wind. A breeze sprung up at last, which shifted, in the course of the day, to the north. Passed on, at a pleasant rate, to Karewa. Entered Tauranga by nine o'clock: landed under the great hill "Maunga Nui." Ran to-day about forty miles.

Arrival at Maketu, a principal Station of the Warring Tribes.

Feb. 27 – At break of day, all were in the boats and on the move. As we passed out of the harbour, several guns were discharged from Maungatapu on gaining sight of us. We passed along, with a gentle breeze, about three-quarters of a mile from the beach. Several of the Nateawa on shore, gazing at us, not knowing what to make of us, whether we were friends or foes. One canoe, fishing off the Pa, pulled out of our way: we waved to them, but they would not trust

us. When abreast of the Tumu, a great gun was fired. The fence appeared of a temporary nature, and the canoes lay carelessly about. As we drew near to Maketu, we observed the flag hoisted half-mast high; and soon learnt that ten persons had yesterday been killed by the opposite party, on the road to Rotorua. We were received very graciously by all on shore: every one turned out to meet us, and give us the news of the day. Had some interesting conversation with the leading persons; and, from what I can discern, the Ngapuhi would be glad to return. It was, however, proposed to remain quiet until the Natives should be assembled, and then to have a general inquiry as to what should be done, whether there should be peace or war. The people appear far better disposed than I could have expected, and I sincerely hope that something may be accomplished. There is much pleading for Missionaries to be dispersed among them, to preserve peace.

Feb. 28, 1833 – At day-light, our boys, and a number of the Natives of the place, repeated the Catechisms, to the apparent admiration of all. A fine Kahawai sent for our breakfast. Numbers of spectators during the day. Long conversation with several Chiefs respecting war: general expression of hope for peace, and desire for some of us to come among them: many insisted upon Mr. Chapman's remaining. Long dispute respecting the superstitions of the New Zealanders: much wonder expressed at what I said to them respecting the state of our forefathers, and the similarity between the two people. The doctrine of the Resurrection of the Body also gained their serious attention, though they observed that it was a hard saying; who could believe it? Peta's misconduct has caused much evil. This man and his wife were baptized about four years since, and accompanied Mr. Chapman and myself in our first visit to this neighbourhood: we had pleasing expectations of him then, though not so much so of his wife; but he appears altogether to have fallen away: yet often have I rejoiced to hear him engage in prayer and address his countrymen, as he far exceeded in ability our old friend Rawiri, who is more slow and somewhat heavy, yet very sincere. Peta endured for a while, and the Natives paid much respect to him. In the afternoon we walked through the Pa, a dirty filthy place: no order or plan in the arrangement of the works; every thing in a careless state.

Continued Stag with the Natives – Honors of their Modes of Warfare – Various Accounts of Religious Intercourse held with them by the Missionaries.

March 1 – Fine morning: boys out to get fern-root. Titore came to make a call. Intelligence of several persons having been killed to the southward by a distant people. A party, just arrived from the interior, came, and sat for two hours in close conversation. In the afternoon, a fresh party came, who found me reading: they desired me to put down my book, and talk with them; which request I, of course, immediately complied with. They observed, that I spoke of many strange things; for my subject was Jesus and the Resurrection: they were a good deal interested, and expressed a desire that we should remain with them.

March 2 – About forty persons set off this morning from the Pa toward the Tumu, the Pa of Nateawa, to give challenge, in consequence of the individuals killed on Tuesday. A few shots were exchanged, but with every feeling of respect. But very few persons came near us this morning, owing to the scolding of Korokai last evening. In the evening they gathered round, and we had much conversation with them. A good number at Evening Prayer. In the evening, the old Chief, Korokai, was sitting with a few others, talking with us. I considered it a good opportunity to give him a blanket, for his kindness to us on our former visit. I brought one out, and spread it over him. The poor old man quite jumped with astonishment, and was much delighted. Truly he could appreciate the value of a present of this nature: yet our words upon spiritual things appear little better than idle tales; he listens with indifference to the intelligence of peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, and of eternal rest to believers beyond the grave. Orders given this morning to prepare for the morrow, as it was the "Ra tapu," when no one was to move, either to fish or for any other purpose.

March 3: Sunday – Fine morning. The Natives came out about nine o'clock, and assembled around us to attend Service: there was a goodly company. We were glad to see Titore and others of his party, among the number; as it was more than we had expected, from the strong opposition he had shown at home:

their attention was good. When all was concluded, I joined Titore, who is the principal person here, and had a long conversation with him. He observed that my speech or sermon was good. Poor fellow! it is a great thing for him to express any mark of approbation on such subjects. Before he left us, he mentioned that he expected to go in the morning to meet the Rarawa, and that we must not go over to the enemy in his absence – that we must be courageous, and sit quietly for a few-days, until all were assembled. One old Chief, covered with wounds, introduced himself: he appeared a restless being, and spoke of nothing but obtaining satisfaction for persons who have been killed. It does not enter into their theory to make peace, unless they receive an eye for an eye, a tooth for a tooth; and hence their perpetual wars. We should have been glad to have gone to-day to the Tumu, the Pa of Nateawa, but must obey orders. In the afternoon, a messenger from Rotorua told us, among other news, that Te Rauparoha, the Chief at Entry Island, had crossed over to the southern island, carrying destruction with him. How dreadful this continual bloodshed! When shall the word of the Lord be fulfilled, They shall beat their swords into ploughshares, and their spears into priming-hooks: nation shall not lift up sword against nation, neither shall they learn war any more? What a field of labour lies open before us! and who shall see the end thereof? I have been much encouraged by the observations of this people respecting Missionaries, and their desire for their appearance here, to check the evil which abounds.

March 4, 1833 – While we were at dinner, my boy Patu was announced on the opposite side of the river. He was immediately surrounded by these Natives, who appeared disposed to treat him roughly, as coming from, and belonging to, the enemy, though he had lived for four years past with me. The poor boy was relieved of his blanket before we could send our lads to his assistance: it was recovered after some difficulty. The boy came from the "Karere," which was at anchor at Waikorire. No particular news, except that Kiaroa sent his kind regards, and wished to see us.

March 5 – Fine night. The "Tacapo," the vessel in possession of the Ngapuhi, sailed this morning in quest of the Rarawa. Several arrivals through the day from Rotorua and Wakatane. A terrible howling, throughout the day, was set up by the women, who are always the chief performers in these ceremonies. These are frequently accompanied by the cutting of their faces and arms, to indicate their great affection for their newly-arrived friends, while the men are engaged in relating the transactions of the day, or the scenes through which they have passed since last they met: their account is delivered with great spirit and animation. The noise of the women in the Pa every evening is quite intolerable: they require much improving, even in a temporal point of view: their shrieks and yells are truly dismal. Appearance of a gale from the east.

March G – Much rain through the night, but the wind died away. Several strangers through the day. Pango arrived from Rotorua: he came and paid his respects. He appeared quite in another character from that in which he was when among the Ngapuhi: then he was in fear for his head, though a visitor among them; but here he felt himself at home. He jumped about like a kitten, and spoke of our remaining with him. In the evening we had a good assemblage.

March 7 – Wind N. E. Appearance of a gale. News that four hundred men had departed, to lay wait for the Nateawa. We inquired into the truth of this account; which being confirmed, we sent for some of the leading men, to whom we observed that we must leave them as soon as the weather should clear up, as they appeared determined to follow their own inclinations. This led to much conversation, and a visit from all the officers of state. There was also a second council in the Pa, to which I was introduced. Some urged the necessity of having one or two days good fighting, as a kind of finishing stroke, and settlement of all differences. Can there be any reasoning more Satanic? I told them, that if there should be any fighting on the part of these people while we were among them, we would leave them immediately. They promised there should be none; and strongly urged the necessity of our remaining until Titore should return. Poor creatures! they are as kind as they can be, but in a sad state of ignorance and superstition; living in a careless filthy state, scarcely out of gunshot of their enemy.

March 8 – At day-light we shifted to the westward: appearance of fine weather. A party of the Nateawa showed themselves, to invite a skirmish, which invitation was soon accepted. They

crossed the river, but each observed a respectful distance. They fired a few shots, and then retired to their respective places. While observing their movements, I learned, that when Warepapa, a Chief of Ngapuhi, was killed in a late engagement here, Titore's wife took a rope, gave it to his widow, and told her to go and hang herself; which she accordingly did, retiring unattended to a Wahitapu among some bushes. She was found a few hours afterward, quite dead. These circumstances were not uncommon some years since, but lately of rare occurrence; and would not, in all probability, have taken place in this instance, but as a display of courage before the Natives of Rotorua. It was a practice formerly to kill some slaves on the death of a Chief; but this has gradually ceased in the neighbourhood of the Bay of Islands and E'O'keanga.

March 9, 1833 – Went to see Waihihi, a river a short distance to the southward, too shallow for small vessels, but important for boats &c. The ground in the neighbourhood fair for cultivation, and a flax swamp extending many miles to the southward.

March 10: Sunday – At ten o'clock, assembled the Natives to Service: more attentive than last Sunday. Spoke of the invitations of the Gospel; and compared their state with that of believers. Felt thankful in being able to speak to these people of the things which relate to their eternal peace. Conversation afterward upon the present position of affairs, and upon the unhappy consequences of war, which involves them in perpetual confusion, and restrains them from hearing and receiving the Truths of the Gospel of Jesus Christ.

Mar. 11 – Natives, as usual, in close attendance, and in general conversation most part of the day. In the afternoon, several idle youths crossed over to the Nateawa, to offer them battle: a few shots exchanged. Toward sunset the parties increased, when one person was brought back dead. Immediately all was confusion and noise, firing guns, wailing and howling in a horrid manner. This last part exclusively belonged to the women, who arranged themselves before the corpse, throwing their bodies into every attitude, and filling the air with their lamentations, cutting themselves till the blood gushed out, and besmearing their faces and arms. The frantic widow sat in grief upon the body of her husband – a most distressing spectacle! – tossing her head and arms around her, like one deranged. The Chiefs retired to their respective places, apparently much chagrined that we should witness their folly, knowing that we should be highly displeased at their proceedings. What a state of wretchedness and woe, without God and without hope! What hath sin wrought, that thus the hand of each should be lifted up against his fellow! As the Natives had not acted in conformity to their declaration to us on our arrival, to remain quiet until the Chiefs should assemble, we felt it needful to say that we should retire as early as possible. No one from the Pa came near us, neither was there any noise through the night.

March 12 – Several of the Chiefs came, to know if we were going; and urged us, evidently with much feeling, to remain a little longer; as, if we left them, there would be no hope of effecting a reconciliation between the parties. We did not give a definite answer, wishing to see the "Karere" off, the first opportunity. Numbers of Natives hanging about all day, keeping us in close conversation.

March 13 – The bar very smooth: made every preparation for towing our little vessel out; which we easily effected with the two boats at high water, by renewing the ballast in the boats, and delivering it again when out of difficulty. Felt very thankful we were thus much nearer our departure. Returned on shore, and prepared for our departure; which we must endeavour to accomplish this evening, if possible. Passed through the Pa, and saw the widow of the man killed on Monday. She was still sitting by the corpse, keeping off the flies, and has continued at her station night and day: her face and arms were still smeared over with blood and filth – a prisoner of Satan, held fast bound in chains of superstition and darkness! Returned to the camp, and put things in order, to move at the rising of the moon, as the wind is off shore during the night. The people thronged around, and the Chiefs showed that they did not approve of our decision. They pointed to some fires on the road; and said they wished us to remain until we heard from the party in the bush, as nothing could be done unless they were here. We determined to remain a little longer. Numbers of the Natives in close conversation, till very late.

March 14, 1833 – We resolved to wait one more day. After breakfast, heard the firing of musketry beyond the Tumu; When the Natives immediately prepared themselves for action, and crossed over, with all despatch, to attack this side of the Pa, under the idea that their allies were assaulting the opposite part. They appeared utterly to disregard any thing we had to say, and left but a few old women and children behind. They expressed their confidence that the Pa of the enemy would be taken to-day. The sea-breeze by this time had set in; otherwise we should have taken our departure. Titore's vessel in sight: he will decide whether it is to be peace or war. The Natives, as they landed on the opposite side of the river, assembled around their priests, who stood in the water, while they went through their religious ceremony, sprinkling them occasionally with water; at the conclusion of which they caught up a handful of sand, and, throwing it into the river, ran off with speed toward the enemy. As these mad-headed creatures approached the Pa, we perceived that they slackened their pace materially, and that most of them sat down very contentedly under cover of a small hill: but few seemed disposed to turn out to be fired at. After about two hours they returned, bringing two wounded: none were killed. The firing continued beyond the Pa, supposed to be from the other party of these Natives.

At half-past two o'clock, a party of the troops, which had been sent against the Tumu, came, in their wild and naked state, exclaiming [it was afterward found to be a false report] that Tupaea, a Chief of Nateawa, and twenty of his people, were killed, and their bodies taken; upon which all the women set up a dance and screaming, tossing up their heads and hands, presenting a most frightful picture. It was impossible not to grieve for their wretched condition. There was some loss on this side. We were a little relieved to learn, in a short time, that the bodies of the Nateawa were not brought away. After a little quietness had been obtained, we heard that the two men, belonging to these tribes, who were killed, were left behind, and consequently they will be eaten by the enemy; and moreover, that only four of the other party were killed. We may probably find that even this exceeds the truth. Near sunset, we witnessed a religious ceremony, upon the return of a party which had been out some days to waylay the enemy near one of the Pas. The party assembled naked: every person had a bunch of grass in each hand. The priest, an old grey-bearded man, and of such slight material that a puff of wind would blow him down, stood up in front, with out-stretched arms, holding three blades of long grass in each of his hands, and repeated over them his karakia or prayer, to Tu, the god of war. At the conclusion of the old man's service, the party delivered one bunch of the grass to him, they then all stood up, and chaunted a few words, clapping their hands at the same time; after which they ran down to the river, and, wetting the second bunch of grass, ran back, and returned it to the priest. I could not understand a word of the ceremony, nor was I able to prevail upon any one to explain it. We were a good deal cast down by the proceedings of the day. Every appearance of a gale: prepared accordingly.

March 15 – A most severe night: wind and rain. Unable to sleep, from the thoughts of this deluded people. We must now bend our course homeward: we must retire, but do not retreat. Satan fights us hard, being enraged lest these his slaves should become the children of the Living God. The people now involved in the war are those whom we have long desired to take under our more immediate care, by placing Missionaries among them. In the afternoon, I heard that Te Amahau, the father of the man who was shot on Monday, after he had concluded his crying over the corpse, addressed himself generally, and said, that, "as he had now lost a child in the war, it was for him to deliver his sentiments, and that he should proceed with the Missionaries, and make peace. He desired no satisfaction on account of his child, but that these proceedings might be stayed." We went to the Pa to learn the state of feeling, but most were asleep: a few were disposed for conversation, but nothing particularly to the purpose. At length we heard that Te Amahau was inquiring for us. When we met him, he spoke of our going to the Tumu, for the purpose of consulting upon the propriety of making peace: he had now lost a son, and was therefore entitled to speak, and proposed to send one of my boys in the morning with a letter to some of the leading men; and, should they be willing, that we should

then go round in my boat to Tauranga. to meet Titore and the Rarawa. The poor man appeared very earnest in his desires, again saying that he did not want satisfaction on account of his son, but peace. He afterward came to us, and gave he needful instruction to the boy who was to go in the morning. I also wrote a letter, of his own dictation, to some of the leading men of Tauranga.

March 16, 1833 – As soon as the messengers were despatched, a large party of strangers paid us a visit. One poor man was very importunate for a blanket, and declared that peace should not be made unless he had one: he intruded himself within the tent, and sat upon part of the bed, before I was aware of his movements. However, as these are difficult times, I kept them in good tune, and they soon departed. The messengers retuned in the afternoon: they had met with a good reception. Tupaea, the Chief mentioned as having been killed on Thursday, was at the Pa, and well: only two men were killed on that occasion. The Chiefs of the Nateawa expressed themselves well disposed. Pango and others came in the evening, and seemed more favourable than I had expected. It was determined to send the boys again in the morning.

March 17: Sunday – The Natives in the Pa very busy consulting their sticks (see Volume for 1833, p. 117) as to the probable result of the present conference, whether peace or war: a great noise. Held our Service at the usual time: very few persons besides our boys. At the conclusion, the old priest came, and desired to say, that his Atua had revealed to him that there would be shedding of blood. I replied, that his Atua was the author of all mischief, by whom the country had been depopulated: that his own arm had been broken by his Atua; and that Te Aramiti, a great priest, and his party, the instigators of this war, had been deceived by their Atua; and thus it was continually the case among them, lamentation end mourning and woe. All present assented to what was said, that there was no good thing among them. I then warned the old man to flee from the wrath to come, and seek to obtain peace with God through Jesus Christ. After dinner, went into the Pa: many disposed to cavil, extolling the power and excellency of their gods; but they were soon brought to silence: others appeared desirous to hear us speak upon these things. The boys returned from the Tumu before sunset, bringing a good report, and stating that they were anxious to see us. Were much encouraged at the conversation of our people, and at their gradually giving way and desiring peace. It is a period of much anxiety, and very difficult to do any thing with such overgrown, self-willed, perverse children, where each has his own opinion, and liberty of acting independent of the other. We should have but little hopes of effecting any thing, were it not for the promises of the Lord's assistance and blessing.

March 18 – Some of the Chiefs came early- They expressed their opinion that peace would be made; and urged the necessity of not leaving them to themselves, but that we must return, and that some Missionaries should be here to move continually among them, to preserve peace; as, by these means alone, peace had been preserved in the Bay of Islands, and all the region round. They are truly in the gall of bitterness, and in the bond of iniquity; unable to trust any one, and consequently living in constant fear.

March 19 – News from the Tumu that the Rarawa had entered Katikati, and had attacked a party of men, women, and children, who were residing in a careless, unprotected way: two old persons, who were unable to make off, were killed. We accordingly prepared to depart: our friend, Te Amahau, was unwilling to accompany us: we did not press him. As we passed the Tumu, Kiaroa came to the boat: the poor old man seemed glad to see us, and expressed a hope that we might be able to effect peace.

March 20 – Entered the harbour about three o'clock. Found a brig at anchor, which appeared a great deal alarmed at us, not knowing who we were, or disposed to understand: they threatened to fire at us. However, we laid down and rested till day-light. Made an attempt to pass up the river to the Rarawa. Considerable sea, owing to the flood-tide, which obliged us to turn back.

March 21 – Went up the river in quest of Titore. We found the Rarawa nearer than had been expected, sitting in a free and easy way, living, at the expense of their enemies, upon kumara potatoes and pumpkins. As we approached the beach, the troops were turned out to salute us: they divided into two parties, and gave us one of their dances. As it was intended as a compliment, it was needful to receive it as such. I was conducted

into the presence of the general officers, Titore, Papahia. &c.; and introduced to Rohu, a Chief from Natemaru, who had joined them with about seventy men. We reported all the news we possessed, and learned theirs. Had conversation with the different parties, particularly the Natemaru, whom I now met for the first time. They appeared much pleased and surprised that any European should come among them for the purpose of turning them from their ancient custom of killing each other. They related their own sufferings from war, and their strong desire that Missionaries might be among them to preserve peace- I replied, that this was our desire; but that it was impossible, unless it became a general wish. I inquired of Titore what was the proposed movement, and what I was to say to the opposite party – the Nateawa? He first told me that they should fight; but, after a long private conversation with Papahia, he told me to go to Otumoetai. The Natives assembled on our landing; and as they all seemed in anxious expectation of hearing something important, I addressed them, and spoke to them upon the object of our coming among them, namely, to endeavour to stop proceedings; as many had been killed since we last were here. I expressed our desire to see peace established, in order that Missionaries might come among them. I told them what Titore had said: after which, a young Chief arose, and said that what I had spoken was not correct; that we had brought the Ngapuhi down, and also potatoes for them, in a ship; and that Titore was not true to his word. He continued for some time, and called upon others to confirm his statements. I, at length, replied to him, calling to mind the many services we had rendered to them. The potatoes in question were for the boys in the boats; and as for the ship the Ngapuhi came in, all knew it did not belong to us. He soon turned away, much confused, all expressing their approbation of my statements. They appeared rejoiced at the prospect of peace, though doubtful of the veracity of Titore's statement. They said they hoped we should return to the Ngapuhi in the morning, and acquaint them with the result of our meeting.

March 22, 1833 – A squally rough night: heavy rain toward morning: wind suddenly changed about seven o'clock, and cleared up. Soon heard the sound of distant musketry; and, with our glasses, observed the Ngapuhi making an attack on Otumoetai, though with much caution; the people of the Pa, in their trenches, not returning their fire. As this was an act contrary to the promise Titore had made to me, we determined not to go near him. Much grieved at the perverseness of their ways. Went up the river, to Maungatapu. I did not perceive any Chief of note in the Pa, and but few men: the fences also were very much out of repair, as at Otumoetai. Nuka civil, and desirous that we should still have communication with the Ngapuhi; but all appeared very indifferent.

Mar. 23 – Morning very fine: not a cloud to be seen, and the wind fair for our return home; but detained by the non-arrival of the old lady who came with us to see Kiaroa, and whom we must not leave behind. Despatched two messengers to the Tumu, to fetch her. As we were obliged to remain, we went up to the camp of the Rarawa; not that we had any hope of effecting any thing, but in compliance with the wish of the poor Natives of tins place. Titore did not immediately appear, in consequence of the firing of yesterday. He said that it was altogether against his will, and that it was merely a party going out to forage. As it was in all probability our last visit to them, I called up all my ability to speak to them upon the evils they were bringing upon themselves. If they fought, many must fall: there was much to lose, and nothing to gain. Titore and Papahia listened attentively and expressed their opinion that they might te required to fight. While deeply engaged in our council, we observed an instantaneous uproar among the Natives, who were running in all directions. We soon learned that a slave belonging to Rohu, a leading person from the Thames, had run over from Otumoetai. He was much alarmed for some time; but as he acquired confidence, he gave a statement of the position of the enemy, in all points agreeable to the desires of the persons among whom he now was. When all the news was obtained which this youth had to communicate, there was a general scuffle for his person: many of the Chiefs rushed upon each other with savage fury, and several were soon rolling in the dust; others caught up their guns; while Titore and the rest exercised their abilities with unwieldy sticks, driving all before them. After some time, order was, in a degree, restored, when all turned out to "Haka." We took our leave at this period, glad to retire from so grievous

a scene, and, with many downcast feelings, proceeded to Otumoetai. We did not remain long after relating to them the state of feeling among the Rarawa, but returned to our encampment by dusk. We learned from our boys, that, as we were retiring, Titore and Papahia called back one of them, to say that they could not ask us to remain longer with them, for they were unable to controul their people; but they would endeavour to move on Monday morning, in which case we should all proceed to Maketu. This in some measure cheered our spirits: we thought we discerned a ray of hope.

March 24, 1833: Sunday – Went up to Maungatapu. On landing, we observed the Europeans busily engaged in pressing flax, and sending it on board the brig: numbers of Natives occupied with them. What an example to these poor creatures! But few Europeans among them, and they publicly showing their entire disregard to the sacred day of the Most High. We assembled the people of the Pa, and spoke to them upon eternal tilings; though my heart was much cast down at the dreadful condition they were in. Closely beset on all sides. About three hundred of the enemy in the rear; the Rarawa but a short distance in front; and not more than a hundred and fifty men in the Pa, and they in a most careless state. Spoke a few words to Nuka, and returned to our quarters.

March 25 – A sleepless night, under the expectation of the Rarawa pulling out for Maketu, when we were to join them. The morning cloudy. No appearance of our friends, whom we particularly wished to see. At eight o'clock, heard musketry in the old quarter at Otumoetai; and observed the Rarawa in their favourite corner, evidencing, with their usual caution, extreme disinclination to partake of the indigestible provision of the Nateawa. After some considerable time, they retired from the field. The clouds moving from the N. W., we did not attempt to go homeward. The namus so troublesome, that we could scarcely keep clear of them, though killing them by thousands. In the afternoon, the Rarawa returned to their corner near the Pa, and kept up their firing till sunset. Sometimes they appeared to be in close action; the Nateawa reserving their fire, and sallying out occasionally. Sent the boat to Otumoetai, to learn particulars. Two men and one woman belonging to the Pa were killed, and some wounded: of the Rarawa, three men killed; two of whom were taken into the Pa, and consequently will be devoured. Titore was a good deal vexed at the result of this day's work; and declared to our boys that the people would not listen to him. Every appearance of a gale from the northward: prepared accordingly.

Departure, on their Return to the Bay of Islands.

March 20 – A quiet night. At daylight, calm, but cloudy: afraid to move out. No stir among the Natives: all quiet. At five o'clock P. M. a light air from the N. E.: left the harbour, on our way home; in all, there were seventeen, including Hamu, our old lady, who accompanied us from the Bay: our boat was very full. We pulled to Karewa, a small island, eight miles from Tauranga. Some of the boys landed here, to look for birds and potatoes. Upon the island are Ruatara, a species of the lizard, about a foot long, which are regarded by the Natives as Atua (sacred beings): strict orders were given not to disturb them in their holes, lest we should be upset. About one o'clock, a light air from the southward: got under weigh, and stood on our course.

March 27 – Light airs from the southward. About two o'clock a large fish struck the boat, which much startled the boys. The weather suddenly came on very thick. Between three and four o'clock, lost sight of Mr. Chapman, which gave us much uneasiness, as he had not a compass. Shortened sail; and the boys exerted their lungs, to let them know where we were; but no answer. At daylight, black threatening clouds around: the land seen in places through the haze: observed Mr. Chapman a long distance astern. Tho breeze gradually increased; and, by eight o'clock, we were close to the headland of this deep bay, when we regarded ourselves, as it were, at home, being able to put ashore at any time. At ten o'clock, abreast of Wangamata; and at one P. M. we landed at Wakahau. Proceeded immediately to pitch our tents, as the gale was fast breaking upon us. Mr. Chapman landed in less than an hour. We were scarcely snug, when the rain began to fall violently; but we were in good quarters, the boats hauled well up, every thing was in its place, and plenty of fires were burning. We felt thankful to our Heavenly Father for this renewed instance of His protecting care.

March 28 – A most forbidding night; the tent shook violently, from the gale;

and the rain continued, without intermission, until long after sun-rise.

March 29, 1833 – Clouds clearing away: breeze the same as last evening. Launched the boats; packed up our baggage; took breakfast; and were soon under weigh. Considerable swell from the late gale; but we passed comfortably along with the breeze. At three o'clock P. M. fine. Put into a small bay, to cook some food for the boys, and proceeded on our voyage. Wished, if possible, to double Cape Colvel; as we should then be in a fair way to cross the Thames, or run up, as circumstances might admit: the moon in her first quarter, which would materially assist us on our way, as we could proceed night and day. As we drew near Port Charles, the swell was very considerable, and the boys tired. We determined to put in till morning. With care, we found our way in, and obtained a quiet place, where we came to an anchor, but did not like to venture on shore in the dark: we lay down in the boat, under cover of a great hill.

March 30 – The night very clear and cold. Parrots making a great noise in the trees close to its; but we slept well till daylight. Endeavoured to pass to Omaha; but as the tide was strong, and we feared that the sea might thereby be raised, we determined to alter our course, and go up to Haurake, and pass across from thence. About ten o'clock at night we landed on one of the numerous islands, where the water was perfectly smooth: kindled a large fire, and had supper under an overhanging cliff – a pleasing change from the boat. We formed our bed of the stones, and soon fell asleep.

March 31: Sunday – Slept comfortably last night. Daylight showed us more particularly our position. The island was a shapeless mass of detached fragments of rock, which had once been in a fluid state. Blocks of granite, of various dimensions, hung suspended to the ceiling, in so slight a manner as to strike us all with wonder how such considerable weights were kept from falling. After we had breakfasted, and held prayers with the Natives, we pulled up, with the flood-tide, to the place at which we had wanted to land last night. We saw many fires; but on approaching, we observed that the people fled with all expedition; and it was not until they discovered that we were in boats, and not canoes, that some ventured to come near us. When they were convinced that we belonged to the Mission, they came forth with evident pleasure, and began immediately to provide food. They had been apprehensive that we formed part of an expedition which they had received notice was quartered at Aotea, under Marupo, and directed against them. They treated us kindly. The children appeared very interesting: we should have been glad to have taken them with us. The people here wished us to proceed further up the river. We consequently passed on to Waiau, Koromandel Harbour; several of the Chiefs going with us. The Natives, as we approached, were greatly alarmed, and fled, but returned as soon as they heard the voices of their friends. In the evening we had Service, and delivered our message in the name of the Lord. We observed a poor fellow sitting among them, who had received a dreadful wound in the back of his neck, which must nearly have severed his head from his body. He was one of a party at Ahuahu, among the Mercury Islands, when Te Aramiti scoured the place: he was left for dead, but toward evening he contrived to creep among some rushes, and afterward constructed a canoe of "raupo," and crossed over to the main. The wound was about nine inches long, and must have been inflicted by a bill-hook, by which the spine was preserved.

April 1 – Much refreshed by a sound sleep upon my bed. Sleeping in the boat, or upon stones, by no means desirable. Our friends were talking nearly all night. At break of day, after breakfast, some of the leading men entered our boats; and we passed on to the southward, to another place, several being particularly desirous that we should have some conversation with Kawero, a Chief noted for his bad qualities: he appeared quite a savage, and had a full, quick, suspicious eye. Our friends introduced us to him; told him we were Missionaries, and that one of our objects was to induce all to live quietly and in peace, and that he must attend to what we had to say. He pleaded the necessity of the case. I prevailed with him to let a son of his accompany me to the Bay. A general crying took place previous to the boy's departure, and many injunctions were give not to deliver him up to the Ngapuhi to be killed. We took our departure under a salute of many guns, and passed over to the large island called Waiheke: much pleased with our visit hitherto. The large island, which

stands in the middle of the Thames, appears to possess many advantages; as it is nearly encircled with smaller ones, forming various anchorages, well protected from wind and sea. The island is well covered with timber; and there is a considerable quantity of land for cultivation, though very hilly, and fine streams of water.

April 2, 1833 – Fine night. At 2 o'clock A. M. we proceeded on our voyage, as the tide had sufficiently flowed for us to pass between the Islands. As we drew near to Maurangi, we had to contend with a considerable sea, owing to the tide. To a person not experienced in boat sailing, I consider this place dangerous; as, from the strength of the tide, a sea may be tossed up in a few minutes, which it would require great care and prudence to pass through. As we approached the entrance of the river, we observed Mr. Fairburn, in our settlement boat, coming toward us from a small river to the left. We were happy to learn, that he, with Mr. Shepherd, was on a visit here; and we were thereby enabled to receive news from home of the welfare of our families, and we felt thankful to the Father of all Mercies for His unspeakable care. Much refreshed after a good breakfast and a little putting to rights. Conversed with several Natives, and some principal Chiefs, Rauroha and Kupenga: they appeared much gratified at the prospect of any Missionaries coming into this neighbourhood. Great abundance of shark, of a small kind, taken here in the season: it forms an important article of food.

April 3 – The night very cold and fine: the wind had shifted, and become fair for both parties. Messrs. Shepherd and Fairburn took their departure for the southward, and we for the northward. Patuone hindered us for a long time, by crying with Hamu, our old lady, who was a near relative. We went to see them, in order to break up the assembly: they presented a shocking spectacle; besmeared with blood, we could not recognise any person. Took our departure about 1 o'clock; wind S. S. W.; and, after some rough sailing, arrived at our favourite little cove at dusk: took dinner, and prepared for a continuation of our voyage during the night.

April 4 – Fine clear night: fresh breeze occasionally, but, as we kept close to the land, the water was smooth. At 3 o'clock we were close to Te Wara; high land of Wangari. At day-light, close to Tutukaka; but the swell was so great, that we did not like to enter: felt very weary, not having been able to take a wink of sleep, as there was no one to whom I could entrust the helm. Gave the boys some fragments of food; and pushed on, until we rounded Cape Brett, about 4 o'clock P. M.: we kept them in close exercise, in reefing and making sail, as the wind varied. With difficulty we doubled the Cape, owing to the strength of the wind; pulled into Maunganui, and partook of our first meal for the day. At dusk, we again took our seats in the boat; and, as we had now arrived at the last stage of our voyage, and the wind had subsided, the boys pulled in good style. By 11 o'clock, I landed on our beach, and, in a few minutes, learned the gratifying intelligence that all were well. It was a season of much gratitude, when I thus met my family, my wife and nine children, all in good health, after an absence of nine weeks.

Bless the Lord, O my soul! and all that is within me, bless His Holy Name! Bless the Lord, O my soul, and forget not all His benefits!

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

THE account of this Mission is continued, as was promised from the last Number, p. 173.

New Zealand.

The following is the account, by the Rev. Henry Williams, of the voyage made by a detachment, consisting of four of the Missionary body, from the Bay of Islands to the River Thames, for the important object of selecting a site for the establishment of a new Settlement, placed as near as possible centrally in the island. Mr. H. Williams thus relates their proceedings on their

Departure from the Bay of Islands, Southward – Various Adventures on the way.

Oct. 22, 1833 – At break of day, appearance of the weather promising: boys placing things in the boat. At twenty minutes past eight, having taken leave of my family, our friends, and our natives, we made sail, with the wind N. W., which allowed us to lay out clear of Tapeka. Breeze continued favourable; and did not increase, as we had apprehended. At forty minutes past eleven, rounded Cape Brett; the sea perfectly smooth; a steady breeze, and good run. At half-past five, entered Wananake: a reef of rocks runs out some distance from the north head, in N. E. direction, of which it is needful to take particular care. We passed further up than formerly: no sign of inhabitants. The scenery very beautiful; but the river shoal, fit only for very small vessels. Pitched our four tents among the bushes; dined; held Evening Service; and retired to rest early, rather tired; the boats having been previously anchored in the river, ready for a move at break of day. The sky was beautifully clear, giving us every hope of a fine day.

Oct. 23 – The owls, and other nocturnal birds, croaking during the night. Slept well, except occasionally waked by musquitoes. At daylight, all under weigh: light air from the northward: passed comfortably on to Tutukaka to breakfast. Assembled the boys in the shade, and held Morning Service. At ten, moved on; and at two, close to Te Wara: breeze shifted to N. W. at five; pulled into Mangawai by dusk; breakers, at the entrance. Much care required to secure the boats, owing to the great stones. Our tents soon put in order. Dined, and retired early.

Oct. 24 – Fine. All in motion at daylight; and by sun-rise, pulled out; and, with a pleasant breeze from the north, passed on to Omaha, our favourite spot – I found it as agreeable a retreat as formerly – determined to remain the day, to adjust our things, and send the boys for a stock of fern-root and fish; some in quest of pigeons. Our sportsmen soon returned; one having lost his flint, the other having spilt his shot in the bush; replenished their stock, and started afresh: the lads returned early, with ten pigeons, and a large collection of fine fish, which occupied them till dark to cook as sea-stock. Dined at six o'clock: had our boxes and ourselves comfortably put in order; and were much refreshed, and every thing re-embarked, preparatory to an early start in the morning: the boys also appeared well satisfied – a very important point. Assembled all to prayers about five o'clock, and at ten retired to rest. The evening cloudy; appearance of rain and wind from the northward. Namus and musquitoes trying and vexatious.

Oct. 25 – Mr. Morgan called us up before three o'clock, telling us it was a fine morning, and little wind. As the moon had not yet set, we concluded it was daylight, and all hurried up. The sky looked dark and hazy; and a few gusts of wind seemed to indicate an approaching gale, as it passed over the hills and among the trees. We loosed from our pleasant retreat, and were soon outside, where we found sufficient wind. As we drew near the point of land, going into the Thames, the sea became irregular, owing to the ebb-tide, and threatened to break on board; but we soon rounded, and were immediately in smooth water: we continued on to Motu Kauwau, a large island: landed in a fine bay, perfectly secure from wind. Here we pitched our tents; brought every thing on shore; and prepared for a gale, which was fast breaking upon us. The boys behaved well; and our encampment soon appeared like a little town among the trees, which protected us from the wind. The rain fell for two or three hours, when the wind shifted to S. S. E., and blew strong. The afternoon

was cold; but, by the assistance of a good fire at our tent doors, we were very comfortable. No namus or musquitoes.

Oct. 26, 1833 – At first dawn of day, was waked by the sweet sound of the bell-birds: their varied notes fill the woods, and continue till sun-rise, when they cease. Fine clear morning; but the wind strong from S. E.: could not move on our way. After breakfast, we went to explore a river a little distance from us. We found sufficient water, and perfectly secure for any vessel, and a place which it is highly important to know, as a refuge in bad weather; – vast quantities of fine oysters growing to the rocks. In the evening we were thrown into considerable alarm, owing to the absence of three of our boys, who had gone with the rest in the morning to forage for food, and were not returned: apprehensive lest they might have been climbing over the rocks after birds, and fallen. One of the boys was Puhi, son of Rauroha, one of the principal chiefs here, who died a few months since. Had any thing happened to this lad, all our hopes and views here would have been frustrated for a season, as the Natives would have looked to us for satisfaction.

Oct. 27: Sunday – The three boys returned in the night: they had lost themselves: we felt very thankful to see them. On what a slender thread do all our joys and consolations here depend! how far concealed from our feeble sight are all future events! We know not what an hour may bring forth. My rest had been much disturbed through the night, under the apprehension that mischief had befallen this lad, and that we should not therefore dare to proceed on our way. This might have been, but was not permitted. The Lord is our Shepherd, and our Guide! At half-past ten, assembled in a shady spot, and held Service: it was retired from the busy hum of man; for naught was heard but birds of sweet and varied note, skipping from branch to branch, as though surveying the group of mortals who had landed on their isle, and had intruded upon the quiet of their abode: however, they did not betray fear, and, as we sang the praises of God and our Redeemer, their voice was also distinctly heard with ours. But I felt a kind of indescribable something, as I viewed the ground on which we sat. For many successive years, this neighbourhood has been the seat of war, in its most savage and infernal state. Not content with killing, but tearing even limb from limb, has the foul demon taught his subjects to protract human misery; and at times, ere life has been extinct, have they commenced the work of cannibalism. Doubtless this spot has witnessed many scenes like this: but now I view it as an earnest for good, that the Lord has heard the prayers of his people, and that the place is consecrated to His presence. At sunset, appearance of wind and rain – obliged to shift the position of some of the tents.

Oct. 28 – Waked in the middle of the night, by the barking of a dog: at first, I thought that a party of strangers had landed; but, as the wind was still strong, concluded it must be a stray creature from the bush: had some apprehension respecting our stock of provision, as, on our journey to Rotorua, we lost all, through these merciless intruders. After breakfast, we crossed over to the south point of the island, to take bearings of the various islands, points, &c, around us. Considerable difficulty in ascending the hills, owing to the fern, shrubs, &c. with which it is covered: however, our view was good, and I was enabled to take a sketch of the islands and country around. Evening fine; wind more from the westward; – launched the boats, and put every thing on board, except our beds, in prospect of an early move.

Oct. 29 – Cloudy, and symptoms of strong wind: determined to make the attempt to cross: shipped some water as we drew into the tide way; but the boys pulled well into Mahurangi, by a quarter past eight: landed, in a quiet bay, to breakfast. After assembling our boys to our Morning Service, we proceeded up the harbour, to see Mr. G. D. Brown: we found him well, and living in perfect quietness with about thirty of his Natives: he gave us much information, and furnished us with a more correct chart of this part of the Thames. We left this beautiful place about three, for Wangaparaua, and passed over in an hour and a quarter: the wind was strong, but we passed on comfortably: we were some time finding a place where to land and pitch our tents, as the coast was very forbidding and stony: hauled the boats on shore, lest they should ground upon them in the night. Was obliged to lie down immediately on landing, owing to a severe head-ache, in consequence of a long fast and exposure to the sun.

Oct. 30 – Cloudy. Wind scant: were

therefore undetermined how to proceed. At high water, pulled to windward; and finding the weather moderate and water smooth, we crossed over on the ebb-tide, and by twenty minutes past eleven landed in a small bay on the east side of Motutapu. We here found a small party, with Warekaua. As we came in sight, they immediately began to prepare for defence, while the women and children ran off; but as the boats came nearer, they knew us, and discharged their pieces as a salute. We had some of their relations with us, who had been on a visit with us to the Bay of Islands. After a long and dismal cry, we had some conversation with them: they were going in an opposite direction to us. Before I left this spot, I mounted the hill, and took a view of the islands and their bearings, preparatory to correcting the chart. At half-past three we took our departure, and about five landed in a small bay on Motuihu. We had to contend with a rough sea for a short time, as the weather-tide was making strong; but as we drew near to land, we found it quiet; and soon went to work upon our quarters for the night. Sent off a party to fish: they soon returned with a large quantity. In passing among these islands with a boat, it is highly expedient to consult the time of tide, as a sea is tossed up in a few minutes: it is therefore more prudent to pass along on the lee-tide.

Oct. 31, 1833 – Cloudy: appearance of rain. As our distance was short, we intended to go to-day: we packed up at daylight; but our lads, whose independence cannot be exceeded, gave us to understand that we could not move without their assistance: we were consequently an hour and a half before we left the beach, and six hours before we arrived at Mokoia, a distance of about nine miles. As the labour of pulling fell upon them, I did not feel disposed to express my displeasure, though I had the misfortune to feel it: we at length arrived in a small basin, which had something romantic about it. The entrance was narrow, between rocks, overhung with small trees and shrubs: we here landed, at Mokoia, famous in New-Zealand history – the spot where, about twelve years since, stood the Pa of Hinaki, which was then taken by E'Ongi, and very many put to death. The people in the Pa had at that time about eight muskets; while every man of Ngapuhi was well provided with every thing, fully equipped for the field. The land was now overgrown with fern and tupakihi bushes: no signs of an inhabitant could be observed, in any direction. Part of a human scull lay on the ground close to us, which was more than half an inch thick: there were three deep cuts on it from a hatchet, most probably inflicted at the time of the general massacre. The country around appeared very level for a great extent; and the general report of the Natives (for we could not examine far) is, that it is of the same quality with that here; but it cannot be occupied by Europeans for a length of time, as there is no timber near the place. The river on which this place stands runs up a long distance, to within half a mile of Manukau, which empties itself on the western coast: it passes through Waikato.

Nov. 1 – Cloudy, uncomfortable morning. As there did not appear any thing to detain us here, as we had no guide to Waikato, we concluded to proceed some distance on our way. As we arrived at the heads of the river, the wind had so increased, that we were obliged to pull for a beach, to windward, for shelter. On our way, we came suddenly among stones; when Mr. Fairburn's boat ran on one, and stove a great hole: she filled immediately, and was obliged to run on shore, to prevent her sinking. This was a sad check to our proceedings. We made the best of our way to a beach, about a mile distant, to repair our damages. The fracture was near three feet in length. We pitched our tents, under the impression that we should be detained till after Sunday. This beach, which is nearly a mile in length, is where Rangituhe, son of old Tikoke, was killed, about five years since. It was therefore interesting to us, and to our boys, who had the battle to fight over again, in their narrative.

Nov. 2 – Very fine morning: sea-breeze set in about ten: obliged to remain in an inactive state, as we could not proceed, owing to the accident of yesterday. Our little bark was finished in the afternoon: and as there was no paint, we were obliged to substitute candle-grease, to keep out the water.

Nov. 3: Sunday – No Native near us, to whom we could communicate the glad tidings of peace: very considerable disappointment! but hope to be with them to-morrow. Assembled our little congregation, and held Service. The musquitoes, &c. numerous – so numerous, had but little prospect of sleeping, until I deter-

mined to fit up a canopy with a spare sheet. When I lay down, I was soon covered with these tormenting insects, buzzing around, though I was perfectly secure.

Nov. 4, 1833 – Fine calm morning. We were a good deal hindered by the tide being so far out, as the boats were high and dry. We did not move off till seven o'clock: the breeze fair, which soon carried us on to Pakihi. We landed on a fine steep beach, and had breakfast, tat were first obliged to fish for it: we afterward passed on to Wairoa, a river abreast of this island, on the main. We went up two or three miles; but could not see any native until our return, though fires were burning in several directions. As we were returning, a young man showed himself, fully prepared for action, with his gun and cartouch-box. Having satisfied himself who we were, he came forward: he invited us to the settlement, which was some distance up the river; but we could not go, as the tide was low. On our return, we consulted as to the best movements to make; when it was determined to wait here for the "Karere" until Thursday morning; and then proceed, without her, up to the head of the Thames, should she not have arrived. The evening was cold; but, by the aid of good fires, we made ourselves very comfortable.

Nov. 5 – Had some rain in the night. In the afternoon, we crossed over to a large island, in order to give the boys opportunity to dig fern-root, as our stock of provision is getting low, and no appearance of the "Karere." Wt ascended one of the hills, from which we had a commanding view. The island on which we were, was large, and abundance of ground for many families, the rocks were covered with oysters, and pipis on the mud banks, which run out for a long distance, and the sea full of fish of all kinds: it was melancholy to look around; all was perfect stillness: except here and there a bird, no bustle of active life; no vessels, boats, or canoes, moving on either hand, over the surface of these waters, which spread, like magnificent rivers, among these numerous islands. The hills in the rear are clothed with timber, without rendering service to any. Traces of former towns and settlements were visible, as we came along, and wherever we turned; but all were either destroyed, or the inhabitants taken captive or fled.

Nov. 6 – Wind continues westerly; and we doing nothing, waiting for the "Karere." The boys employed in fishing and digging fern-root. All in readiness by sun-set, for a move at daylight.

Arrival at the site first proposed for the New Settlement – Disappointment at the quality of the land – Surprise of Natives on seeing the young New Zealanders receive letters.

Nov. 7 – At break of day, all in motion: struck our tents, and proceeded on our voyage; having left a note for William Lewington, suspended to a stick, with directions to follow us. The morning was extremely fine, and sea smooth: a light air from the westward: we came to a beautiful point of land, which ran far into the sea. Here we had some conversation with a small party, who wished us to land and take refreshment; but we were necessitated to proceed on: they brought, however, a basket of stinking corn, which had been soaking in water for some weeks: this to them is a great treat, though the stench was unbearable to us. We passed on a little further, and put into a small bay to breakfast. The Natives here were relatives to Puhi and Ngaiwi, youths who had been with us some time: they sat down and had a long cry. Having concluded breakfast, we continued our course with the sea-breeze, which had now set in: we met a canoe with a number of Natives, who had come to meet us: they saluted us with their muskets, and we proceeded together some distance; but landed at a small settlement, in order to make some examination of the quality and general character of the country, as it had been proposed to establish the new settlement on part of this. It was so thickly wooded, that we could not see far before us; but generally light timber. The soil appeared good: in the rear were hills covered with timber. We walked on to the top of the bank toward the sea, about a mile; but soon got off the good land, and passed over an entire bed of pudding-stones, from ten to fifty pounds weight each. We found our walking very uncomfortable; and again entered our boats, and continued on for about two miles; the hills coming close down to the water for some distance, when the land again improved, the hills retiring nearly two miles back. As this was the spot where it had been considered the houses should stand, we landed. Messrs. Brown, Fairburn, and Morgan, entered the wood. My attention was occupied in speaking to the Natives, about forty in number. I felt glad of the opportunity: numbers soon gathered

around, and we had an interesting meeting. The few patches of land here, which had been cleared, seemed very rich; but it did not continue far to the southward. We now passed on to Wakatiwai: our road lay along the bank of stones, which continued all our way: this made our walk heavy, and cut our feet. We arrived at the Pa about four o'clock; where we saw our old friends Patuone, Kupenga, &c, and a good number of men, women, and children. All flocked around, to gaze upon us and our baggage, which the boys, in our absence, had brought out of the boats, and put in a heap before them, to our great annoyance. After some trouble, we obtained dinner, of which we stood much in need. Before sun-set, we assembled about a hundred and thirty Natives, with whom we held Service. In the evening, Patuone presented two pigs: he expressed great concern at not having any children: he complained that the Europeans had large families, but they had none. – It certainly is a mystery to them, how we become so numerous, and they so few: they tell us we are like the cattle, and shall soon cover the land; we never die as they do, but multiply exceedingly. I told him their great wickedness and abominations were the cause of all their distresses; they were corrupt in all their ideas and ways.

Nov. 8, 1833 – Appearance of rain, but cleared off at ten o'clock: went to see the country around the Pa. All the low land exceedingly good, but to no extent. At noon, we took the boat, and pulled to the land we had looked at yesterday, where it was considered the houses would stand. We walked directly through the wood, and found it very stony for some distance. The low land did not exceed a quarter of a mile; when we came to a rising ground, covered with kaikatoa: very ordinary: we continued to the southward in a parallel direction to the line of coast, and then struck through the bush to the sea; but were much surprised to find that the whole of the low land here was one continued bed of round stones, with scarcely any perceptible soil. This fact, added to several other objections, appears to close our examination in this neighbourhood. On our return, we were much relieved by the sight of the "Karere" standing toward this place: she anchored at sun-set, and delivered letters from our wives and children, and from many of our Natives, for ourselves and boys. This was an interesting particular for the people of the place, as they were thus enabled to perceive the nature and value of written characters, by the testimony of these their countrymen. Our boys seemed to look for, and read over their letters, with as much pleasure as we did ours, to the delight of all around: they repeated them aloud, to the admiration of their auditors, who were struck with wonder at hearing, as they described it, "a book speak:" for though they expect that a European can perform any extraordinary thing, yet they cannot understand how it is that a New-Zealand youth can possess the same power. Our communications were gratifying; – all were well; praised be the name of the Lord! At dusk, had Evening Prayers. Mr. Fairburn addressed the party.

Visits, and Religious Conversations with the Natives – Their surprising knowledge of the mode of performing Divine Service – Choice of a suitable spot for the New Settlement.

Nov. 9 – Fine calm morning. Mr. Lewington breakfasted with us, and gave us the news from Paihia. Dr. and Mrs. Ross had come with him to Mahurangi. Our friends here, Kupenga and Herua, appear jealous of our moving elsewhere. At low water, after much difficulty, we took our departure; the boys and the Natives of the place wishing us to remain. The sea-breeze had set in, and soon carried us across. The "Karere" passed over the flats well, and we all arrived at Kopu by three o'clock. The Natives here gave us the usual welcome, firing guns, &c. I met several who had seen me in the Bay of Islands: we were immediately surrounded; and while the boys were putting the boats and baggage in order, I sat down, and had a long conversation with our friends. We contrived to get dinner before sun-set; after which, we had Evening Prayers, and gave a few words of address to these poor people: they told us they had observed the Ra Tapu [had kept the Lord's-day]; but that was all they knew, as there was no one to instruct them. The country here is singularly beautiful: on the left are gigantic hills, the most varied of any I have ever yet seen in this island, well covered with timber. The opposite side of the river is perfectly level, and an extent of wood beyond the reach of the eye. Horeta soon arrived, a man of noble appearance. – Retired to rest, very weary.

Nov. 10, 1833: Sunday – The Natives congregated around our tents at sun-rise. After breakfast, assembled all for Service: Mr. Fairburn addressed them. It was our intention to have pulled up to Turua, to have seen the Natives there; but the tide was so late, and the banks of the river so muddy, we could not accomplish it. A number of Natives sitting about all day. Toward sun-set, held Evening Service with the people of the place. I spoke to them upon the New Birth: it was doubtless as new and strange to them as it was, 1800 years ago, to Nicodemus: they were attentive. While assembled, Parekeawiowio arrived – a man of renown. I have, for a long time, been desirous to see him. He has borne a notoriously bad character, as a sly murderous fellow: he is now blind: we had a good deal of conversation with him; but he was as wild as a hyaena, and seemed desirous of returning to the woods: he spoke with greater rapidity than any one I ever heard. Many inquiries through the day, as to the time when the Mission would be established here. Much jealousy expressed. The Natives were very kind. Our attention was called to the cruel acts of the Ngapuhi at Te Totara, &c.; though it appears, that till within these twenty-five years the Ngapuhi used to be driven before these people.

Nov. 11 – Packed up the baggage, and sent the boats on board the "Karere." Walked with the old man, Horeta, to see some of his plantations. The land over which we passed was perfectly level, and far more extensive than we had anticipated: our walk was perfectly superb: in some places, as we passed among the trees, it had quite the character of a shrubbery: we continued till we came to a small river, which runs among the hills. The scenery here was very fine; the hills at the back run very high and irregular, covered with timber, giving a fine finish to the landscape. We here took leave of our friend Horeta; and returned by Te Totara, a Pa which had been taken by the Ngapuhi about thirteen years since, before guns were introduced among these people. The Ngapuhi had been sitting near the Pa several days, receiving presents, and holding friendly intercourse; but having obtained their confidence, they rose upon them and killed a very great number, and took all, whom they could seize, as slaves. The most horrible cruelties were practised, and many chiefs were cast alive into their ovens. Some of the posts of the fence are still standing; and, from the extent of the ground we passed over, constituting the side of the Pa, there must have been a considerable number of people. Human bones lay scattered up and down; and the spot was pointed out where their relatives had been killed and eaten. We arrived on board the "Karere" by one o'clock, and prepared for our journey to Waikato. We left at three; and were soon carried up by the tide to Turua, where we landed; but no Natives here: we examined the land in the neighbourhood, but found it low and swampy; the wood extending all along the right, without a break. Continued our course, and overtook a canoe: learnt from them that the people were up a small river, at their cultivations. We followed them, and soon found ourselves at an interesting settlement. The Chief came forward to welcome us with "Hareru mai poe?" (How do you do, my boy?) They expressed great pleasure, when they learnt who we were. We much admired this spot, as the land lay high, was of good quality, and considerable extent. We walked immediately to see their plantations, as the sun was now low. We were particularly pleased with the place, and people, a long train of whom accompanied us: from our landing, to the foot of the hills, which were covered with timber, is about a mile and a half, with a fine stream of water winding through the valley. The Natives made many inquiries when any one was coming to be with them, as they were people who attended to our "karakia." Having taken our evening repast, we assembled all, about 150 or 200, to Evening Service: it was a pleasing sight. They were confined for room in front, owing to a plantation of corn, and were consequently obliged to extend to the right and left. We had several fires in front of our tents, which, with some torches held by those in the distance, gave a striking effect to the scene. We commenced, as usual, by singing a Hymn: but what was our surprise, when we heard our whole congregation join and correctly sing with us; and in the prayers also, the responses were given by all, as the voice of one man. We had not heard the like, and could scarcely believe our ears. It was very cheering to us; and we believed that the Lord had now led us to the spot, where His Altar should be

erected. I addressed them, and found them very attentive: many inquiries were made for books and slates: slates we had none, but concluded to give one of our new books to Tuma. We retired to rest about eleven, tired, though highly gratified by the day's proceedings, and thankful to the Lord. We found three boys here from the Mission, who had lived in our families for some time, and had acted as Teachers. Thus we see the work of the Lord prevail.

Nov. 12, 1833 – Our Natives slept around; and after Morning Prayers with these people, we took leave about seven o'clock, and pulled up the river with the flood-tide. The scenery was very beautiful. The land was perfectly level on each side of the river: on the right, the wood continued, and stretched along to the S. E. On the left, the hills were our boundary at a short distance, with woods here and there. We did not remain at Te Kari Pa, as the people were all dispersed at their plantations. The river here narrowed, with the trees hanging over the bank on each side. As the tide was making strong against us, we landed, about noon, at a place where was a small party clearing ground: the people were uninteresting. At four, we again entered our boats, and pulled on, generally in a S. E. direction: a little before sun-set we landed, for the night, on the left bank, a fine clear spot: an extensive tract of level ground here presented itself to view. We pitched our tents, and had dinner between eight and nine o'clock. Various accounts of the road, which lies before us: according to some, we have more days' journey to accomplish now to our desired goal, than when we set out. Fires very comfortable this evening.

Nov. 13 – Slept soundly. Took breakfast before moving, to allow time for the tide to flow. We arrived at Rau Pa by nine o'clock. No one here; nor any fences up, to indicate a fortress. Trees of various kinds spread their branches over the river; and occasionally the kowai was very conspicuous, whose tender boughs hung elegantly over the stream, like the weeping willow; giving a beautiful variety, very different to any thing I have seen to the northward. The creeping plants, of which there are great varieties, were here in full bloom. The land, on either side, of the same character as yesterday. Several places on the banks cleared for cultivation, and small parties of Natives – a pleasing circumstance, as we see thereby that they are beginning to live in greater security. We arrived at Wanake by a quarter past ten – a party of the Wakatohe. We landed for a few minutes; but were afraid to remain, owing to the reported length of our journey. At eleven we landed, to dine, and rest the lads, who had been pulling hard all the morning, and against the current, as we had now arrived beyond the influence of the tide. At two, came into a clear country; no trees on either side: in about an hour, we again entered a wood, and continued on to Tirau. We landed for a short time: but few Natives present. Our guide was very solicitous that we should remain here; but, after much persuasion, we again moved on, up the winding stream, sometimes steering W. and again S. E. We landed for the night at half-past four, as the boys said it was going to rain.

Nov. 14 – Left our quarters at six; and at half-past seven landed at Te Ruakoawa; our course sometimes N. E., S. E., and S. We here secured the boats, and concealed the paddles, &c, and prepared for our march. Took breakfast, and left at half-past nine. The day was the hottest we have experienced for a long time; not a cloud, nor a breeze. Our attention was drawn to the ascending of a column at no great distance from us; which was at first supposed to be smoke, but was discovered to be the ashes of fern carried up by a whirlwind: it appeared very remarkable, for there was not a breath of air near us: there were two other columns at a short distance. We halted at two o'clock, for dinner, at the edge of a wood; much overcome with the heat, but thankful for the retreat: it was refreshing. Our guide here left us, to proceed on to Waharoa; by which we inferred that the distance was not so very great: he went forward, to apprise him of our approach. Four strangers arrived, who informed us that the old man was near at hand, and pointed out a wood where he resided. We were well refreshed by four o'clock; and at dusk, turned aside, to go down to the bank of the river for the night. We here fell in with four Europeans, and a few of their Natives: they were civil. We soon pitched our tents, lit up some fire, took a good wash, and had supper. The Natives had Prayers this evening by themselves; and while they were singing the hymn, the Europeans, who were near us in

a raupo-house [rush-house], and who rank among the New-Zealand merchants, struck up their vocal powers, and sang the well-known ballad, "Old King Cole," &c. The land over which we came to-day was perfectly level, with a few swamps; our course S. S. E.; a chain of high irregular hills close on the left, under which the river winds its way. Several places pointed out, where battles had been fought, great men had fallen, and murderous scenes taken place.

Nov. 15, 1833 – Did not move till late, understanding that the place we were going to was only a short distance. We passed through many swamps: the last was very deep, but I was carried over comfortably by the aid of two poles, though the bearers frequently sank in the mud up to the chest. We entered a wood; and soon found ourselves at the cultivations of the old man, Waharoa, who was sitting in state, in the midst of his nobles. We were here welcomed graciously, and potatoes and a pig soon handed for us. After taking some refreshment, we all passed on to Matamata, the Pa. We here pitched our tents, in a clear spot; a good assemblage watching our movements with much interest. In the evening, worship held here, for the first time, to the one True and Only God: Mr. Fairburn addressed them.

Nov. 16 – Rain commenced in the night: lay comfortably till morning, when I found a serious leak over my bed. The old man appeared early at the tent door. I had a long conversation with him. About ten, the weather cleared up: took a short turn, to see where we were. The land very good, and cultivation extensive. The Natives related many sad accounts of attacks having been made upon them by the people of the Thames and Ngapuhi: particularly at the time when the expedition went against Tauranga, a party made a sudden attack upon this place, under the idea that there were but few men here: they returned, however, without effecting much mischief. In the afternoon, sent a blanket to Waharoa, as a present, in return for his attention to us. Many Natives around, all the afternoon. Before sun-set, assembled all to prayer – very attentive. I spoke to them for a short time, and particularly told them to remember that to-morrow would be the Ra Tapu [the Lord's-day]: they expressed much pleasure, and begged for a Missionary to abide with them. We obtained a good deal of information as to the situation of this people.

Nov. 17: Sunday – Fine morning. The Natives soon gathered around. We endeavoured to assemble the people in a large new house, which was not quite finished; but this was objected to, as it was as yet tapued, and the women must not enter: the men might do so. This was sufficient for us to drop the question: we therefore congregated together beneath the trees in an adjoining wood, and held our Service – all very attentive. Our old friend Waharoa appeared much interested, and asked many significant questions; and at last inquired what they were to do, without a Missionary to teach them. This man has been a great warrior; and it is highly gratifying to see him thus, as a little child, making inquiries. Our congregation formed a pleasing picture: it was composed of all ages, and many were perched about upon the branches and stumps of trees. In the evening, again assembled for prayer. I addressed them. The old man was again foremost in his inquiries: we were all highly delighted with him: he was desirous that we should remain, and he would conduct us to the various places of Waikato: but we cannot remain, our time being expended. The leading men spoke of the necessity of seeing those of Natemaru, that they might not be "tutu," vexatious toward them, as heretofore; and gave an invitation to any of the Chiefs of Ngapuhi to come, that a good understanding might be established, and all fighting cease. They pleaded hard for a Missionary. I trust the establishing a Station in the Thames, and in Waikato, will be attended with very beneficial effects. May the Lord hear our prayers, and crown our feeble efforts with success! Waharoa is a venerable grey-bearded man, bold, determined in his undertakings, and possessed of much natural good sense. Our conversation continued until dusk.

Nov. 18 – At half-past five, all on the move homewards: the old man accompanied us three miles on our road, through the first swamp: it was a dirty place; with difficulty we crossed. The old man very particular in his last injunctions, to return to him, and bring with us some of the Chiefs of Natemaru and Ngapuhi: he was very kind, and gave us two small pigs and two baskets of potatoes; though, there is scarcely a basket to be obtained, as all are planted. We arrived at a wood, where we dined; and

at five we brought up, on the edge of a wood, our boys appearing tired: – our distance to-day eighteen miles, through several swamps and some little wood. Our boys commenced immediately to kill and clean one of the pigs, and to pitch our tents: we were soon in snug quarters, and passed an agreeable evening. The night-air cool; fires necessary.

Nov. 19, 1833 – Passed a refreshing night. At twenty minutes past five, were on the move toward the boats; and after two hours' walk, and occasionally through some short swamps, we arrived at the boats, thankful to find all safe. Our distance from Matamata computed at twenty-five miles. After a good wash in the river, of which we all stood much in need, took breakfast, and proceeded down the stream; and by six o'clock we entered the creek leading to Te Puriri. Our distance on the river, as near as we could determine, must have been forty miles. Our movements here received considerable check, as the tide was out, and not room for the boats: we with great difficulty effected a landing, by laying down a quantity of fern-tops on the mud. Took supper, and lay down till high water; and then moved up the river.

Nov. 20 – Natives around at first peep of day, wishing to hear the news. After breakfast, previous to our entering upon any arrangements with the Natives of the place, we held a counsel, as to the most desirable place of all we have seen in the Thames, upon which to form the proposed Station; when it was concluded that none had presented itself equal to the one we now are at: we accordingly took a survey of the ground, wishing to give the Natives some idea as to the portion required: we walked to the wood in the rear, and signified our wishes. There did not appear any objection, and with the wood there is level land in abundance, fit for any purpose, with freshwater streams running in various directions. Orders were given for the erection of three houses. Assembled the Natives in the evening, and spoke to them as usual. This place, though deficient in some points, yet possesses many important advantages: it is central, and will stand between these two parties as a restorer of wounded feelings which have long existed between these people, even the tribes of this river, who have but one common enemy, the Nateawa, Waikato, and Ngapuhi.

Nov. 21 – Much rain through the night, which cleared off at day-light. The people in general consultation as to the erection of the houses: some of the old women very vociferous in their harangue. At high water, took leave of these people, with many expressions of regard on their part, and many desires on ours that they might be blessed with every spiritual blessing. In two hours, arrived on board the "Karere," lying off Kopu – all well. We immediately commenced our preparation for departure in the morning, should the weather permit; which however did not look very promising.

Preparations for returning home – Incidents by the way – Arrival home, after a six-weeks' absence.

Nov. 22 – Rough night. Rose at daylight, and found the little vessel dancing in good style, lying across the tide: no moving out to-day: wind directly against us, and strong. We shifted our quarters to the shore – a quiet exchange. Rain commenced. Not many Natives in the Pa. A long discussion upon the murder which took place here a few months since. Determined, therefore, not to take any one with us from hence, though several applied to return with us.

Nov. 23 – Much wind and rain through the night: no appearance of moving. Some few Natives, in the course of the day, uncivil in their behaviour, and importunate for payment for wood and water required by us and the little vessel. In the evening, several strangers, Porua, &c. Had long conversation with them upon their sad and wretched state: they replied, they were very well before the Europeans came and brought muskets to Ngapuhi, and the god of the Europeans, Warake, had carried off great numbers in sickness. They acknowledged, however, that the news we had now brought them was good, and they hoped all would attend. It is a lamentable truth, that wherever we find Europeans, void of religious feeling, established, the Natives are far worse – their manners more insolent, more corrupt, than those who are more remote.

Nov. 24: Sunday – Wind more moderate. Horeta came this morning. Messrs. Brown, Fairburn, and Morgan, went to a settlement about eight miles on the coast to the northward, and some of our Natives to Puriri. While at Ser-

vice, our old friend Urumihia came, in her canoe: she was very gracious, and continued with us all day: our congregation small. In the afternoon, called on the young man residing here as flax agent: several youths at work, fencing, on his premises. Weather more promising for a departure in the morning.

Nov. 25, 1833 – Our hopes of moving vanish, by a strong breeze N. N. W.: weather very warm: our friend Horeta took his departure for his plantations.

Nov. 26 – Heavy gale through the night. with rain. At day-light, rain ceased, and at nine o'clock more promising: proposed to make the attempt to cross to Wikitiwai. Went to the "Karere;" and having put our provision in order, pulled out at the latter part of the ebb; and, after three hours' struggle with the wind and tide, and two hours' sailing, we landed near Warekaua, to dinner. We met here a number of men, women, and children. They inquired the news from the river and Waikato. We gave them a few words upon eternal things; and took our departure at nine, wishing to avail ourselves of the breeze, now fair. We called at a place where Herua was residing, and left word for him to join us in the morning: we could not land, owing to the stones on the beach.

Nov. 27 – A most lovely night; the moon shone bright: it was after midnight when we landed at Pakihi, the nearest island. We soon kindled good fires, pitched our tents, and, after a cup of coffee, retired to rest. Herua, with a large party, arrived before eight, and brought the two boys left behind; they were much disappointed, when told that the Mission would be established among another tribe. At noon, landed on the west end of Waiheke; wind having shifted to N. W., by which our hopes of reaching home this week are all blighted. After refreshing the boys and ourselves, we again put off, at half-past three, for Motu Tapu: flood-tide. Several dangerous rocks were with difficulty avoided. As we passed along, we found ourselves suddenly in a race, and the sea boiling in a frightful manner. We felt thankful the distance was not great, and we soon pulled clear: the boys were a little alarmed, and extolled the merits of the boat in being able to accomplish such wonders: had she been a canoe, we must have been upset. We landed on Motu Tapu, in a lovely retired sheltered spot, where the clematis and convolvulus and other creeping plants hung beautifully around: on the opposite side of the small channel to where we landed, was Rangitoto. While the boys were arranging the tents and our supper, we crossed over, to make some examination of this strange place, of which we had heard so much; as the Natives described it as being impossible to walk there, owing to the wounds inflicted on the feet by the rocks; – and indeed no wonder! for the character of the place was as totally different from any land around us as was possible to imagine. The island is one pile of lava, in block and masses of various sizes, in all shapes and descriptions, which have been torne asunder at some subsequent age: some resembled dross from a furnace; the small points and corners of which were so sharp, that it is almost impossible for a Native to escape: the edges of oyster-shells must be a trifle to this. At sun-set, appearance of a gale from the northward: prepared accordingly. Our distance to-day about eighteen miles; from home 150; anxious to hear from them.

Nov. 28 – Quiet and refreshing rest. A gale at north: the summit of Rangitoto enveloped in clouds; walked across the narrow channel, which was dry, to examine more particularly this curious place. Notwithstanding the stones lay in huge masses, with frequent openings and fissures, the depth of which could not be ascertained, yet bushes and shrubs appear to cover the whole island. I was enabled to obtain some good specimens, the best I ever saw, and as fresh as though but just set. In many places it lay like the foaming sea; and many large flakes, like the feathered wave, when driven by a strong wind. I had now more leisure to view and contemplate this wonder of the Great Maker of all. In all parts of New Zealand are volcanic remains; but none like this, which retains such strong evidence of the once liquid state of this matter. In the afternoon, heavy rain: our fires were very necessary, and comfortable.

Nov. 29 – This morning wind shifted to S. W., but too strong to venture across to Wangaparaua. Went over to Rangitoto, to explore; and certainly these wonders of the Almighty, as here displayed, must strike the beholder with awe. We walked about a mile toward the mount, over broken lava; which required our utmost circumspection, lest we should fall into some abyss below.

We at length arrived at a clear open space – many acres, which appeared like newly-broken ground: it was free from moss, or vegetation of any kind, except in a few small patches, where were some plants, as though left by design. I was much struck with this variation from the general disorder around. In the afternoon the weather was more moderate: prepared for a move at high-water, as we concluded the wind would die away in the morning. At nine, left this place; but little wind: crossed comfortably, by midnight, to Wangaparua.

Nov. 30, 1833 – Fine night. At three, entered Mahurangi: discovered it with difficulty: lit fires, and lay down to take some rest. At seven, proceeded to Mr. G. D. Brown: we did not long remain here. At two, arrived at Omaha: wind south; no "Karere" here: took a hurried dinner, and continued our course toward home. We entered Wangamata at dusk. The breakers were running in an ugly way at the mouth of the river; but the flood-tide soon carried us in, when we took possession of our old quarters, and enlivened the scene by good fires, plentifully supplied with wood: night cold. We felt thankful we were thus far on our way: fifty-nine miles since nine o'clock last evening.

Dec. 1 – All weary. Held comfortable Service with our boys. Saw the "Karere" some distance in the offing, standing to the northward; wind N. E.: fearful of another detention. At sun-set, clouds moving fast from the southward.

Dec. 2 – Fine night. At two o'clock, all in motion, preparing for departure. Pulled out of this ugly place at low-water, the breakers extending across the river; but passed out well. Continued our course, with a little wind, to Tutukaka, where we arrived by eleven o'clock to breakfast. We here remained three hours, to rest the boys, who had been pulling all the morning. In the afternoon, again proceeded on our way: little wind, but considerable swell. At sun-set, landed on a quiet beach: boys too tired to continue; no wind; threatened for rain.

Dec. 3 – At two o'clock, all on the move, and in good spirits, in the expectation of being at home in a few hours: breeze south, which carried us by eight o'clock round Cape Brett, and into smooth water. As the "Karere" hove insight, we waited for her, and landed on one of the islands in Paroa Bay to breakfast, and put our persons a little to right previous to returning home, as we were in our travelling garbs, which were rough enough. We all sailed on together, with a sea-breeze; and by noon were greeted by our families and friends, whom we found in health and peace, after an absence of exactly six weeks.

We have thus given, at considerable length, the principal parts of Mr. H. Williams's Journal. A shorter account has been communicated by the Rev. Alfred Brown, the only other Clergyman attending this expedition. The chief part of it has been necessarily anticipated by Mr. H. Williams's narrative: but we select one or two particulars, which either contain additional matter, or more particularly illustrate what has been already related.

Mr. Brown thus remarks, under date of October 31, 1833, concerning the volcanic remains alluded to: –

At the back of Kiakiku, where we spent the day, is a large volcanic hill, called by the Natives Maungu rei, which we ascended. The view from the top is exceedingly grand. On one side we could see both sides of the Thames, and the numerous islands with which its frith is studded; and on the other, a tract of flat country, calculated by Mr. Fairburn at 50,000 acres. We could also trace in their windings three noble rivers, which empty themselves, through the same opening, on the Western coast; but, from our great distance, we could not discern whether there were any Native residence on the banks of these rivers. The low land appeared destitute of timber, but the distant hills were covered with it; and great facilities seemed to present themselves for its conveyance by water-carriage.

The remark made by one of the Chiefs, at a scene already described, Nov. 10, concerning the necessity of having Missionaries, is very touching and simple; and not less so is Mr. Brown's appeal for more help in this blessed work. He states –

Nov. 10 – At our Morning Service, we had one hundred and fifty Natives present, besides our boat's crew. I read Prayers, and Mr. Fairburn addressed them. At the close, a venerable-looking old man (Horeta, the principal chief),

remarked, that the speech which had been made was very good; but unless a Missionary was to reside among them, and tell them often of these things, he could not keep them in his heart. Poor Natives! they have indeed need of line upon line, precept upon precept! When will the love and zeal of the Christian Church burn bright enough, fully to supply their wants? After dinner, most of the schoolboys were employed repeating the Catechisms, &c.

At another place, seven days after, Mr. Brown thus describes the acceptableness of the Missionaries among the Natives, who long to see useful Labourers come to dwell among them.

Close to the Pa, the Natives are building a large and handsome reed house; and as the weather was very sultry this morning, we proposed holding Service in it; but we found that only men would be allowed to enter, as the house was tapued to women and children until completed. We therefore crossed a little stream, which runs beside the Pa; and beneath the shade of some trees assembled one hundred and eighty Natives (including our own). I read Prayers, and Mr. Fairburn addressed them. They listened with more attention than could have been expected from such a barbarous band; and I trust that the precious seed sown this day in weakness among them will yet spring up, and bear fruit, to the praise and glory of our Lord and Master. At our Evening Service there were about one hundred present, and Mr. Williams addressed them. Wahara, with much apparent earnestness, repeated his wish that a Missionary should be sent to instruct him, and his tribe; and he seemed much pleased when he was promised that the subject should be taken into consideration.

AUSTRALASlA MISSION.

Church Missionary Record.

No. 10.] OCTOBER, 1834. [Vol. V.

AUSTRALASlA MISSION.

THE Report of this Mission is continued from p. 202 of the last Number. The deep interest felt for the progress of the Gospel in these remote parts of the world will be increased by the perusal of the following accounts.

New Zealand.

From a copious collection of Letters and Journals transmitted by the Missionaries, we propose to present, as was done in the corresponding Number of last year, a condensed and systematic view of the proceedings of the Society at its four Stations, and in their respective neighbourhoods. This will extend over a part of the year 1832, the whole of 1833, and the commencement of the present year.

General Character and Proceedings of each Station.

TEPUNA – The Mission was removed to this place, on the 13th Sept. 1832, from Rangihoua, where it had been established for eighteen years. The distance of the two places is very little. On a review of past years, Mr. J. King, who is the senior of all our Labourers in New Zealand, makes the following remarks: –

This Mission had to commence civil and religious life in the midst of savages, without a word of their language, or any knowledge of their customs and manners – without a book or letters to instruct them in – without a Sabbath. A long time elapsed, before the Natives seriously thought of attending to religion: their minds were taken up in obtaining a supply of axes, hoes, &c. for the cultivation of their land; and guns and powder to revenge their wrongs, and to defend themselves and property. I remarked, some time ago, to a Chief, that we had been living a long time among them. "True," he said, "all the past is lost, and cannot be recovered: we were ignorant, and bent upon fighting; and we are only now beginning to think seriously about our souls. Let us have some one out of the Schools to instruct us in God's Word, that we may improve the time to our eternal welfare." – The work is the Lord's: He has wrought, and made bare his arm in the sight of the Heathen. Blessed be His name! His is the power, and His shall be the glory. I cannot think on our preservation without gratitude and astonishment. When I look back and ask, How have we been preserved? I can only say, God hath preserved us. Daniel was preserved in the den of lions, one night, by miracle; and the three children in the fiery furnace; but we, for a course of years, in the midst of wolves, without a miracle.

The Natives are very slow in their improvement. We are in haste to see a great change, and a rapid progress; but hitherto the work has been slow and gradual. However, a good portion of the New Testament is in print; as also Prayers, and Hymns, and Catechisms, which are well calculated to spread the knowledge of God through the islands. And, as many of the Natives are looking for light and seeking the Truth, who can tell how soon or how large a measure of grace it may please God, in answer to prayer, to bestow upon them, to make these truths effectual, and cause their barren hearts and barren land to blossom as a rose. Then shall this island yield her increase; and God, even our own God and Father in Christ Jesus, give us His blessing.

KERIKERI – On the changes which have repeatedly taken place at this Station, Mr. J. Kemp makes the following remarks: –

During the last three or four years, there have been many changes in Keri-keri. On the formation of the Waimate Station, most of its Members were from Kerikeri. Since then, Mr. Chapman has removed to and from the Kerikeri,

and he is now in charge of the English Boys' School at Paihia; and Mr. Shepherd is moving up to Kerikeri, to take charge of the public stores, in the place of Mr. Chapman. These movements have much unhinged the Natives; and we have not been able to proceed with our Schools and with visiting the Natives so regularly as we could have wished; but I hope they have tended to the furtherance of the great work in which we are engaged. Mr. Baker, who now resides at Kerikeri, expects to proceed to the Southward, as soon as the new Station is formed there. I cannot but look upon the Kerikeri as having been highly honoured in sending so many of its Members to new Stations, and, in a great measure, preparing them for their work.

PAIHIA – The general character of proceedings at this Station appears to have become increasingly of a spiritual nature. This will be seen in a subsequent part of the present Report; but we here select a very few passages to this effect, from the communications of the Rev. Henry Williams.

The places which have been more generally visited, are, Kororarika, Puketona, Waikare, Wangai, and Kauakaua. At Kororarika, a School has been in progress, conducted by the Natives themselves. Some of the Chiefs have offered violent opposition to these proceedings, viewing them as seriously affecting the gain of their iniquitous intercourse with the shipping. At the other places, the attention of the Natives has varied. Some of the Outposts have also been visited by our Christian Natives.

Our Sabbath Services have been very gratifying. We have generally had very full Congregations, from the attendance of Natives not living with us, of the European Families in the Bay, and, occasionally, of officers and crews from the shipping. There have been times when we could not provide accommodation.

May 24, 1833 – In the evening, met our Christian Natives, previous to administering the Sacrament on Sunday: they expressed themselves with pleasing simplicity. Our work grows upon us; for as these lambs of the Lord are brought into the fold, they need our constant care. They are but children, even little children, yea, as new-born babes; and require to be fed with milk, and that continually.

In the evening, many of the Natives came, as usual, to inquire after Truth. Though these assemblies frequently occur when we are weary with the fatigues of the day, still it is impossible to refuse their solicitations. I have known them often wait for hours, with the desire of having a few words from us.

WAIMATE – Concerning this Station, the Rev. William Yate remarks –

One of the objects for which the Waimate Station was formed, was a Farming Establishment; and the accomplishment of this object necessarily involves us in a variety of secular engagements; more especially so, at the commencement of operations, which, in a measure, precludes that extensive itinerating for which the local situation of the Settlement is so well adapted, and which it is the earnest desire of its Members to pursue. We have, however, on the Sabbath, and on other days, regularly visited the native villages around us, and to the distance of ten miles. Divine Service has been regularly held every Sunday, unless prevented by bad weather, in eight different Congregations, exclusive of the Settlement, containing an average attendance of upward of 600 Natives. Roads have been cut, and bridges built by the Natives, to facilitate our visits among them. Several neat little houses for Chapels have been built, and others are building, in order the better to meet together for Public Worship.

Introduction of Marriage among the Natives of Tepuna.

Nov. 18, 1832: Sunday – A number of Natives assembled, expecting Ropata and Turanga to be married. Among the rest came a distant relative of Turanga, to forbid the match; saying, that Ropata was a slave, and he would not consent, but would kill him; although he had been redeemed some considerable time. Mr. W. Williams performed Divine Service, and we had a profitable Sabbath.

Nov. 19 – A present has been sent to the relative, which had the desired effect. The father had been observing to his friend, that the morning was serene and the sea calm and quiet, and advised him to let his heart be calm and quiet too; so he, and the father and mother of Turanga, and several other relations and friends, came to witness the ceremony. Ropata Oru was a baptized young man;

and he and Turanga had been living with us several years. Mr. Williams married them, in the presence of her relations; and the Chiefs who attended looked on with surprise. They all partook of a feast, a thing which Natives are fond of: all appeared well pleased; and in the evening they all returned to their respective homes, and left Ropata and his bride in peace, contrary to the custom of New Zealand, as they often get a beating. In general, the relations, or a party concerned, think it their duty to give the new-married couple some blows, and severe ones too: these two were greatly favoured: no blows, no dispute. The Natives said this was a good way of marrying, being done in a quiet and peaceable manner. – – - [Mr. John King.

Progress of Christian Knowledge and Piety among the Natives.

Our Readers will see with thankfulness, from the subjoined series of extracts, that the work of the Lord is prospering at the several Stations. Some simple and touching evidences are given of the power of the Gospel

– At Tepuna.

April 17, 1833 – Went to Tangitu. Conversed with a small party of Natives, who listened with attention, and joined in prayer and praise. There is a man of this place who appears in earnest about salvation; by his walking three or four miles to our Morning Service on Sabbath-days; by his desire of instruction in the truths of the Gospel; by his behaviour when I visit his place, in calling his friends, and urging them to hear the word spoken; and in using all his influence with them to observe the Sabbath, although he has already met with opposition from his family and friends.

April 4 – A young man came to my house to converse about spiritual things: he spoke of his sins against God, his fear of the Day of Judgment, and of the punishment of those who fear not God's Word. I spoke to him of the love of God in Christ, and of the way whereby a sinner may be reconciled unto God through the death of His Son, and be made meet and holy, by the sanctifying influence of the Word and Spirit of God, for the kingdom of heaven, without which no man can be happy hereafter.

Oct. 7 – During the last quarter our Morning Service his been well attended. I have made two journeys. The Natives in general attend to the word spoken, and some of them appear desirous to know the Way of Salvation: they need line upon line, and precept upon precept. The gloom, which was said to hang over this Station, has, I am happy to say, disappeared. I cannot find that declared hostility to the Gospel that was reported to exist among the principal Chiefs of this place. Wareporka has, on all occasions, done what he could to protect and assist us; and has engaged to bring all the sawn timber up in his canoe from Wairua, to build a Chapel at Tepuna; and would have completed the same, I doubt not, had he not been prevented by us. He often attends our Morning Service on Sundays; and since the death of his eldest daughter, who was brought up in our house, he has left a younger daughter under our care and instruction. On every side, far and near, I find the Natives ready to hearken to the word Spoken. – – - [Mr. John King.

Oct. C: Sunday – After Morning Prayers, I set off, accompanied by Mr. King's son, on my first Missionary Visit to the Natives. We walked, across a neck of land, to the opposite side of the coast, about, three miles, and visited a party: the Chief was an inquiring and very promising Native. About twenty Natives collected together in a small rush house, where we had Service. Mr. King's son read part of John iii., which, through his medium, I expounded to the little circle. All paid attention, and behaved with much apparent devotion. The Chief himself made several pleasing remarks, which plainly showed the interest felt by him in the blessed Gospel. On asking whether any among them could read, he replied that he was the only one, and that he had taught himself; which I afterward ascertained to be a fact. He added, with much seriousness, "I can read it," pointing to the sacred page, "with my eyes, but not with my heart." Speaking of the Day of Judgment, he said many of his countrymen would continue in unbelief till it would be too late for repentance; and then, when the day arrived, and not till then, they would lament their incredulity. – – - [Mr. J. A. Wilson.

– At Kerikeri.

On Sundays we have made several visits to the Natives on the banks of the Kerikeri River and Okura. – – - [Mr. Kemp,

The Natives living in the Station are conducting themselves well. We have much less trouble with them now than

we once had. Their attention to the Schools, and the Means of Grace, is regular and encouraging. We have not had any baptisms lately; but there are some who are evidently in earnest, in seeking their eternal salvation. Those who have been baptized, with the exception of one, continue to hold on their way, and give good proof of their sincerity.

We have had much to encourage us lately in the prosecution of our work. Wherever we go, we find that the Natives are not only willing, but glad to hear us. For some months past there have been many Natives staying on the banks of the Kerikeri; and on the Sundays we have had good opportunities of attending to them. In both my journeys to Wangaroa (in Nov. and Dec. 1832), I saw much to gratify me. Many of the young people in connexion with Wangaroa have lived in the Kerikeri Schools: some have recently left us, and others seven or eight years ago. We might have supposed that their learning was lost upon them; but it is observable, that those who left us eight years ago are now bringing into practice what they learned while in the Schools. Rewarewa, brother-in-law to the late E'Ongi, has given his approval to Religious Services being performed at his residence. The Sabbath is now regarded, and Service held by the young men living with him. At another place in Wangaroa, a Chief, named Tupu, has, with his party, built a commodious Chapel, altogether of their own accord. Here too, Service is regularly held on the Sunday by the party themselves, except when any of us happen to be there. – – - [Mr. Raker.

The conduct of the Natives in general is certainly improving, and the attention of many at the places which we visit is highly encouraging. How exceedingly pleased would our friends in England be to see from fifty to a hundred poor Heathens join in Divine Service with reverence and apparent interest! how highly delighted would they be to hear them make their simple and honest inquiries concerning the Divine Word; and above all (could they understand them), to hear them pour out their souls in humble petitions to the Throne of Grace! I think that, from what we have seen, we may conclude that Zion's cords are lengthening, and her stakes are strengthening. – – - [Mr. Shepherd.

Sept. 8, 1833 – Preached to the Europeans and Natives at Kerikeri. Temorenga was there, and was very attentive. This is the old man who accompanied Mr. Marsden in so many of his excursions, when the Mission was first formed. Poor fellow! he has stood out a long time against his convictions. For nearly eighteen years he has heard the Gospel from time to time, and his stubborn heart is at last broken, and his self-righteous feelings dashed to the ground. He acknowledges himself a sinner, and looks to the Saviour for the pardon of his sins. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

– At Paihia.

August 19, 1832: Sunday – Several strange Natives at Service; after which went to Kororarika. None of the leading men present. About seventy persons were present; many sitting at some little distance, wholly regardless of our message. One young man alone made some inquiries; but stated that the people would not receive our message. Left them, and returned home much depressed in mind at the hardness of their hearts. After Evening Service, two boys came to unburden their minds, which raised my spirits and encouraged me in the work.

Nov. 25 – Two canoes came over from Kororarika, with about a hundred Natives, to attend Service: several other strangers here also. We were crowded to excess. Administered the Sacrament to our Natives. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

July 28, 1833: Sunday – At the Kauakaua. On arriving at the usual place of assembly, I was much pleased to find the people assembled in a small building, which they have appropriated as a Chapel: it was completely filled, and we mustered about seventy, who were as attentive as it was possible for Heathens to be. There were many who did not come; but, as a day of small things, it is gratifying.

Aug. 29 – Spoke to several Natives who are inquiring after the Truth. Observing one whom I have hitherto considered to be exceedingly careless, I asked him what had brought him there. He replied, "I have for a long time been making my way through the bushes, and I have but now found my way out;" referring to his beclouded ideas.

Sept. 10 – Spoke to Candidates for Baptism. One of them, who is elder brother to Edward Puru, who died a few months back, mentioned a circumstance, which is a pleasing testimony respecting his departed brother. When near death, he observed his brother crying. "Weep not for me," said he: "it is all right with

me; and I have no cause to grieve, if I may only leave you behind me a believer in Christ."

Oct. 6, 1833: Sunday – Went up the Kauakaua. Our work, and almost every thing connected with it, are now strikingly different from what they were a little time ago. The crew which I took in the boat consisted of two Christians, and four Candidates for Baptism; and this happened without any particular arrangement on my part, but because the majority of those who are with us are in this situation. As we passed up the river, many questions were put to me relative to passages in our new Book; and I could not but notice, in one Native in particular, that a very diligent use must have been made of it since it came into his possession. On our arrival, we found the people assembled; and having made arrangements for my companions to proceed to two villages, about three miles distant, I held Service with about one hundred and twenty Natives. There is certainly a great change for the better in this people; and they expressed a wish to-day that one of our Christian Natives should remain constantly with them, to afford them daily instruction.

Dec. 1: Sunday – After Morning Service, went to Tepuke. The little congregation was, as usual, waiting to receive me; and we had a truly refreshing Service. After we had concluded, Rha, the Chief, who for a long period has been an attentive hearer, asked me, with much apparent sincerity, what steps I could recommend him to take, in order that he may become a believer. I told him to turn his whole attention to the sins which lay in his heart, and, above all other things, to seek to be rid of them. I encountered a party at Waitangi on my return, but they were as hardened as they well could be, and disposed to cavil at every word I said. After Evening Service, I conversed with a Chief, who often comes the distance of four miles to stay one Sunday with us. He seems to be in the right way, but wants a little resolution. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

The Natives who have been baptized since the last Report are, eight Adults and two Infants. There are several Candidates for Baptism, and others who are seriously inquiring after Truth. The Natives in employ in the Settlement have been generally engaged in preparing fencing and in cultivation. – – - [Rev. H. Williams, June 50, 1833.

Baptisms during the quarter: four adults, two children. Number of men and boys, 84; women and girls, 43; infants, 18. My own Natives were employed in preparing fencing in the former part of the quarter. – – - [Rev. W. Williams, Oct. 1, 1833.

June 27, 1832 – Koropu is repairing the front of the Chapel. Mr. Yate arrived from the Waimate. A sailor died at Kororarika, belonging to a ship lying there. Our Native Rawiri, on Sunday last, found out this poor fellow, who was lying sick in one of the native houses, and he was observed praying with him. The sailor could not, in all probability, understand a word of what was said; but Rawiri prayed in the only language which he knew, and to the Lord of Heaven and Earth, the Disposer of all events. It was a pleasing circumstance, for it was done in much simplicity.

Sept. l, 1833. – From the gradual decline of Wehe, and considering the great earnestness which she has manifested for instruction, and joy in spiritual conversation, for a length of time, with her apparent delight in the prospect of a blessed immortality, we deemed it proper that she should be admitted a member of the Church of Christ, by baptism. Accordingly we assembled our little Christian Band this afternoon for that purpose, and gave unto her the right-hand of fellowship. The Service was very pleasing; and when I recollected the life which she once led, I could not but praise the Lord, and exclaim, Surely this is a brand plucked out of the fire! She seemed particularly strong; and gave the responses with great clearness, and with evident feeling. All who have conversed with her have expressed much gratification and satisfaction. Her history is interesting. It is now about nine years since her younger sister, Piri, came to live with us; and in those days there was much difficulty in keeping any girls, owing to the influence of the shipping. After a short period, Wehe, who was a companion of those who frequented the ships, came and took her sister away, against all remonstrance; and we saw nothing more of them till about fifteen months since, when the younger applied to be received into the house, stating that she was weary of her sad depraved mode of living. A trial was given her, when her elder sister made application to be admitted into the family. She had been unwell for several months, and asked for permission to come

and die among us, as she knew she should not recover. Her deportment was good, and her attention to school and general instruction very great. She would frequently speak to those around her, though in great quietness, and reprove any impropriety which she might observe in them. She invariably gave a good account of the Sermon; and showed that our labour was not in vain, nor her profession mere idle words. While her strength would admit of it, she was very diligent, and frequently has been required by Mrs. Williams to lay aside her work. This is an outline of the character of this young woman, who has long been in the school of vice, and is now fast approaching the verge of the grave. This is the Lord's doing, and it is marvellous in our eyes. Many are in a very pleasing state. Several of the Natives come to speak during the day, as opportunity offers, upon spiritual matters.

Oct. 7, 1833 – While absent at Otuihu in the afternoon, Wakarae died. Mrs. Williams, on returning from school, passed the door of the house where he was: it was closed; and many were assembled inside, singing a hymn: they had been with him in his last moments. How different to former days! Then they were dark; but now, light in the Lord. They sorrowed, but not as those without hope: their faith, though simple, enables them to receive with joy those many great and precious promises held out to all who mourn in Zion. This youth was, for a long time, a Candidate for Baptism, before he was admitted into the Church. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

June 22 – Our old Chief, Tohitapu, is now dangerously ill, and not likely to recover. This man has often made a prominent feature in our proceedings. As a Chief, he is much respected, though his influence is not so great as it was when his priestcraft was in greater repute. He has been, by his own account, a great wretch, having butchered very many of his countrymen for the violation of the native superstitions, or for other causes. But, of late, these practices have been discontinued, which he attributes to his respect for our religion, though we have had no reason to suppose that his respect was any more than external. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

July 14 – Visited the Natives at Te-puka. When I appeared in sight from the neighbouring hill, their Church-going bell – if the term may be applied to a suspended broken spade, struck with the broken barrel of a musket – saluted my ears; and I was pleased to find that they had erected a small rush-house for the purpose of daily worshipping God in. The Natives paid very great attention, and requested that some of the Missionaries would regularly visit them. One of the Chiefs said that he would clear a horse-road by next Sunday, if I would promise to go there: for, he said, he wished to get on faster in a knowledge of good things; but his heart was very lazy. Tohitapu died. – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

– At Waimate.

June 30 – Our Public Services at this Station have been well attended; so much so, that we are under the necessity of very considerably enlarging our Chapel, in order that we may accommodate our Native Congregation. During the year, five Natives have been baptized, among whom was a Chief of very considerable influence, named Ripi, with whose general conduct we have every reason to be satisfied; and who has continued to render important services to the cause of Christ, in instructing the Natives living around him, and in visiting more distant tribes for the purpose of preaching the Gospel to them. We have several Native Candidates for Baptism, whom we hope soon to see added to the Church, through that ordinance. Those who have been already admitted, with one or two exceptions, continue to adorn their profession; and though we do not see that progress and growth in grace, nor that improvement in outward circumstances, which we could wish, yet we cannot doubt their being partakers of a new and living principle. Some of them assist us and the cause, by itinerating among their countrymen, to the distance of twenty miles from the Settlement; and others are active and useful in the Schools.

Oct. 1 – Since my return from New South-Wales, which was on August 5th last, I have been occupied in visiting the Natives in the neighbourhood; administering medicine to the sick; copying portions of the Translations; attending to the duties of the Settlement at Waimate; and, on alternate Sundays, at Kerikeri. I made one journey to Kaikohi and Otaua. At the former place, about 120 persons can repeat the whole of the Catechisms, and they showed great attention to the instruction afforded them. During the evenings I spent at Otaua, not more than sixty people were present; the men being, for the most part, at their

cultivations at a distance. Nearly all those whom I saw could repeat the Catechisms. I have baptized, at the Waimate, since my return, six adult Natives, and seven Native Children. Our Chapel has been crowded, every Sunday, with a very attentive and interesting Congregation. The Schools have been conducted, as usual; and the number of Natives living in the Settlement is 96 males, 42 females, and 17 Infants.

March 7, 1834 – Went to Otaua. Dined under a wide-spreading Kauri, in the woods of Kotuhei. On my arrival at Otaua, I was most heartily welcomed by the inhabitants. After refreshing myself with tea, I assembled the people, and addressed them on their breach of God's commandments, and on the only way of being saved from the consequences of their delinquencies, by the blood and righteousness of our Lord Jesus Christ. After Service was concluded, I heard, or rather overheard, a conversation which took place between some portion of my congregation. "I say; does that man tell true? Are we all bad?" "No, I am no murderer. I only told my slave to knock the man on the head; but I did not do it myself." "Truly; but did not Mr. Yate say, that he who wished another to die was a murderer before God?" "Aye, then it must be as he says. Besides, we have stolen, and spoken lies, and done evil on the Sabbath; and in order that Jehovah may not be angry with us, let us all believe on His Son Jesus Christ, and pray to Him for a new heart." – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

The villages which we visit on the Sunday present a scene truly grateful, not only to the Missionary, but even to the mere philanthropist. The Sunday is a day of rest. The fire-wood necessary for cooking their potatoes is regularly prepared and provided on the Saturday, that no work may be necessary on that day. Whether visited or not, in the morning they commence the day by reading and prayer; and we always find some of them watching for our appearance. Immediately they see us, they commence ringing their bell, which consists of an axe or West-Indian hoe; and in some places a gun-barrel is suspended, which they strike, in order to collect the Natives together for Service. When assembled, we find them orderly, and very attentive; and some of them generally follow us for two or three miles, to propose questions on what they have heard, or to tell us the state of their minds. The remaining part of the day they spend in reading and with the Catechism. In most of the places we visit there is a School, where numbers, both old and young, are learning to read and write.

On Sunday, Sept. 8, 1833, four adults were baptized. Several more are waiting to be admitted by that ordinance to Church-fellowship. Oh, how it would gladden the hearts of Christian Friends in England, could they witness the courage and boldness with which they come forward, and, before the congregation, confess Christ and Him crucified. – – - [Mr. G. Clarke.

Mr. Clarke makes also the following general observations: –

I have, as usual, taken charge of the Native Boys' School at Waimate, which continues to be well attended. Many are making progress in their learning; and, as a considerable portion of the New Testament is translated into the Native Language, the Natives are becoming more extensively acquainted with its contents. It would cheer the hearts of Christians at home, as well as shame those who only bear the name, to see how a Sabbath is now spent in New Zealand, at our Settlements and the Out-Stations which we regularly visit. Long before Service commences in the morning, you see the Natives drawing together in little groupes around the Chapel, reading the Word of God, and hearing it read. Immediately the Chapel door is opened, an effort is made to get a place in the Chapel; and, at times, in about five minutes afterward, the Chapel is completely filled: for want of room, numbers are obliged to remain outside. The after-part of the day is spent much as the former: all is silence and order, except hearing from the little cottages the voice of praise, by two or three little families met together for that purpose. In visiting the Out-Stations, there is much to encourage us to perseverance and diligence. Although they are situated from three to ten miles from us, there is still the same order which is observed in the Settlement where we live. They cease from all labour, and have the appointed time for Morning and Evening Services, &c. Many read, and others hear read, the Word of God; join in the responses of our excellent Liturgy; and listen most intently to the instruction afforded them by us. The Gospel is making a great change in this part of New Zealand; I mean, a great and general outward change, and, in

some of the poor Natives, an inward one also. The Natives in connexion with Missionary influence and instruction have almost lost their ferocious appearance; and, instead of seeing them rushing about with their muskets and spears to revenge every little insult, we not unfrequently see the old tattooed warrior coming from a distance of three, four, or more miles, and, with the greatest simplicity, ask how best to settle the real insults and losses which they sustain from a more unprincipled neighbour. Those Chiefs and Natives who still adhere to their native customs afford us a convincing proof, by the confusion which they manifest when we meet them on the Sunday, that they are not ignorant of the untenable nature of their superstitions, and of the blessed truths of the Gospel; and they seem to say, Hast thou found me, O my enemy? when we unexpectedly come in contact with them, and affectionately warn them to flee from the wrath to come. – – - [Mr. G. Clarke.

April 17, 1833 – This morning went to Taiamai, to see Temorenga, who is ill. I found the poor old Chief feeble apparently, and poorly, according to his own account, from a cold which he caught when be came to see me last; but I was pleased to see no appearance of native superstition, either in himself or his attendants. In the afternoon I sent him, by one of my boys, a bottle of warm tea and a little bread. In the course of our conversation, this morning, he said that he had been visited by one of the Mawi Chiefs, who told him that it was good to believe in God; but that it was not well to let the whole heart go after those things, but to make some reserves for the things of this life. I told him, I did not consider the Chief, who had thus conversed with him, to be a believer; and that what he had heard from him was false, which he must not receive. He said, he thought it could not be right; for if a man were to be caught in a trap, and to get out but partly, he could not be said to be free.

April 21 – Our Congregation has not been so large at Waimate to-day as it usually is. When I arrived at Temorenga's place, Taiamai, I found but very few people collected together; and when I saw that the old Chief was not present, my soul sank within me from fear of his being ill, and of the handle which Satan might make of it, in deterring the people from receiving the Gospel. But Temorenga, although weakly, came out of his house, and saluted me very kindly, and sat down as usual; and no more notice was taken till Service was over. When I came to take leave of them, one of the other principal Chiefs said, "Well, what do you think? Those two people" – pointing to Temorenga and his own son, who is a man grown, "are very ill, and I think they will die. Cannot you look into your Book, and tell us whether they will recover or not?" I told him, I could do no such thing. On feeling the young man's pulse, I found he had considerable fever. He requested me to bleed him, but I had not a lancet with me; but having some jalap powder in my pocket, I gave him a strong dose, which I hope the Lord will bless to his restoration to health. Temorenga seemed rather feeble and low-spirited; but as there did not appear to be much the matter with him, I did not give him medicine. I said to them, "I plainly perceive you are frightened on account of this sickness, and are jealous that it is occasioned by my coming here; but do not be afraid: Satan is a chained enemy. Turn to Christ: He is strong, and He will protect you: He is willing to receive you, and waiting to be gracious: fear not the strength of your native gods, for they can have no power over God's children." Temorenga now told me how he had been, and that he had been much frightened by his dreams, in which he thought Satan was continually endeavouring to pull him into the fire. I told him that I was troubled with such dreams, when I was first awakened to a sense of sin. "Oh," said he to his people, "this person has also had similar dreams to mine;" and seemed a little relieved in his mind. The Chief, who first spoke to me of the illness of these two Chiefs, also said, "We shall continue to listen to these things of God, although these people may die." On the whole, it was very evident to me that these poor people were really afraid that their native gods were endeavouring to kill them, because they wished to believe in God; and that was the reason why the Congregation had not assembled together as usual.

May 5 – Just as Mr. Puckey reached Temorenga's place, a party arrived from the Bay, to pay him a visit; but the party was not attended to until after Divine Service; when an old Chief went to them, and said, "We scrape and prepare potatoes for you when you visit us; but, as it is Sunday, we cannot do it now." The old man then pointed out to them

where to go for food, and left them to get it themselves.

May 15, 1833 – The chief Kahakaha, from Waihu, paid me his promised visit. He spoke very warmly in behalf of the Christian Religion, in the midst of a large assembly of Chiefs. He said, he had been a murderer, and a leader of murderous parties; and, in fact, he made it appear that he had been at the head of every thing that was evil: "But," said he, "I have now left it all off, and am searching after Jesus Christ." I directed him to the Lamb of God that taketh away the sin of the world. Some of the Chiefs present seemed quite astonished when they heard the old Chief speak so in behalf of the cause of Christ. A few years ago, this man was the terror of the country.

July 2 – This morning the Kaihu Chief came to me, in order, as he said, to get some food for his soul. He also gave me to understand that it was his wish to be made useful to his countrymen, if possible. 1 In my conversation, I rather checked him with respect to his becoming a preacher; and requested him first to examine well the state of his heart. and pray much for the Divine teaching of the Holy Spirit, before he commenced the important work of teaching. But when he opened his mind more fully to me, I became quite astonished, as I found him not only an inquiring, but what I considered to be an advanced, Christian; in fact, he appeared to me to be altogether a Bible Christian, although he could scarcely read a letter in that part of the Sacred Word which had been translated.

July 26 – Broughton has been to see me, in company with Timu, one of the Candidates for Baptism: their conversation was cheering. In the course of our conversation, Timu remarked – "Sin is planted in the heart, from the sight of the eye, from the hearing of the ear, from the speech of the mouth, and from the work of the hands; and, after being thus planted, it does not fail to produce a crop of evil deeds."

July 28: Sunday – Rough day. Chapel pretty well filled. At Tartaka found but a very small congregation, the people being at E'O'keanga, at a feast. At Mawi, my congregation was much as usual. After Service, as I had taken down two of their names as Candidates for Baptism, I waited to have a little conversation with those who wished to converse with me. Having conversed some time with the male part of my congregation, and taken down a few more names, I addressed myself to the female part, and urged them to be in earnest in looking after the interest of their souls. An old woman, a sister of Rawiri, made the following observation to me – "When I hear the bell (which is an old French hoe), I send my children, and come myself. And when I can get upon the rising ground, and get a sight of the suburbs of the place in the distance, it enlightens my heart. I have been spoken to by some person, that I must repent. I do repent: I confess my sins; I have been a very wicked woman; I have been a thief, a liar, an adulteress; I have been stubborn, noisy, and covetous: but I have done with it all: all I now seek and want, is, Christ! When Rawiri was here, some time ago, he asked me how my heart was, but I told him there was nothing there: no, it was not Rawiri that made me feel: it was not man – it was God." It is not in my power to give a literal translation in English of the most beautiful figure of speech which is contained in her first sentence. By the rising ground, on which she represented herself as sometimes standing, I understood her to mean, the ordinance of Public Worship; in the use of which she sometimes had a distant view, as it were, of the suburbs of the heavenly world.

Sept. 15 – Being Sunday, my sick carpenter's wife and child were baptized, in company with several others. The young man had long wished for the baptism of his child; and although in the last stage of a deep decline, preparations were made this morning to carry him to church, in order that he might be gratified with the sight thereof; but, alas! even the preparation was too much for him; and he was taken so much worse, that we thought his soul was about to leave its clay tenement.

Sept. 23 – This morning the young man died, leaving behind him a young weeping widow and a healthful babe. Blessed be God! we trust he is now lodged for ever in the everlasting embraces of that Saviour whom he so much wished to love. I brought him up from a child, having redeemed him at a very early age: he was always quiet and obedient; and as he learnt carpentry at Paihia, he has been very useful to me since I have been at Waimate: as, from

my many pressing avocations, I have been able to attend but very little to building, he has carried on that department for me, very much to his credit. Since his baptism, which took place Nov. 13, 1831, and for some time previous, he walked consistently as a Christian. In all things he looked to me as to a father, and our affection for each other was mutual. In his death, I have suffered a great loss; but my loss is, I trust, through Christ, his eternal gain. But here I would not forget to acknowledge the goodness of God to me, in providing for me, but a little time since, a successor in the room of the dear Youth, whom, I trust, He has taken to himself. This young man lived with Mr. C. Davis during the time he was in New Zealand; consequently he acquired some knowledge of carpentry. Soon after Mr. C. Davis left, to return to England, he went and joined himself to the party of a Chief who is at present one of the greatest warriors in the Bay of Islands. When this Chief, Titore, took his army first to Tauranga, this young man formed one of his party; and was, during the former part of their first campaign, one of the foremost in every danger. But one day, as he was going out with a skirmishing party, he told my Natives that what he had heard from us, from time to time, came into his mind, with much power, and he felt that he was not prepared to die; and the consequence was, that, instead of going on to fight, he returned back to his hut to pray; and the first opportunity that offered he embraced it, and returned to the Bay of Islands, and very soon commenced something like a School at Kororarika; but not being satisfied to remain there, he offered to join me again, and I received him gladly: since that period he has gone on very well; and although he is by no means so good a workman as his predecessor, yet I cannot but acknowledge, with thankfulness, the timely assistance which the Lord has thus kindly provided for me. – – - [Mr. R. Davis.

My heart has often rejoiced when I have accompanied my brethren, and seen the little Congregations assembled together to hear the words of eternal life. I feel convinced that God is carrying on a great work in this part of the island: there is an evident shaking among the dry bones. Breathe, O Lord! upon these slain, that they may live. A few Sundays ago, I accompanied Mr. Davis to Kaikohi. We left Waimate about eight o'clock, and, when passing through the wood, we met the Chief Ripi: he was going to spend the day in telling his poor benighted countrymen what the Lord had done for his soul; and to invite them to lay hold, by faith, upon the hope set before them in the Gospel.

At twelve o'clock we arrived at Kaikohi. Shortly after we came in sight of the village, our ears were greeted with the sound of the church-going bell; and when we arrived, we found the Natives assembled already, but in such numbers, that the house where they usually met together would not hold them. After a very delightful Service, we left them; but had not proceeded far on our way, when we again heard the bell ringing for the Sabbath School. This School is conducted by a Native, who formerly lived with Mr. Hamlin. From the badness of the roads, and one of the native bridges being very much injured by the heavy rains, it was rather late when we reached Mawi (Ripi's place). The Natives soon assembled; and after a very interesting Service, we went on our way. There was yet one place more at which we ought to have called; but Mr. Davis thought it was too late to go there, and therefore determined to go direct home: but, as we approached the village, we saw, by the light of the moon, which was shining very brightly at the time, two men, at a short distance, coming toward us. We soon found that they were from the village, and had come to meet us, and to request that, although it was late, we would not pass by, but accompany them back; to which request we joyfully assented. When we arrived, we found them assembled at prayers. They appeared very glad to see us; and we were as glad to see them so anxious to hear the Gospel of the grace of God. I was much interested at their anxiety to obtain a light: one of them got a small piece of tin, with the edges turned up; others brought bits of pork fat, which they carried in a leaf of the Indian-corn, as their contribution toward it. The fat was put into the tin dish; and when all things were ready, a piece of reed was put in one corner for a wick; it was then lighted, and gave a tolerable light during the Service. – – - [Mr. Morgan.

Mr. Hamlin furnishes the following1 account of the

Hopeful Death of Two Natives at Waimate.

A Native, whose name was Huka, had a wife and child before I knew him. It seems that his master had threatened to kill him (for he was a slave); and he ran away to me, and asked if I would take him; which I did. He was very dull to learn, but steady and quiet, and at length became valuable to me as a rough carpenter. Although dull to learn his work, and perhaps to read, yet he outstripped many in scriptural knowledge; for, on my hearing some of my Natives read a chapter in the New Testament, and asking them some questions concerning what they had read, he answered many very satisfactorily, which none of the others could do. Nor do I think it was head-knowledge alone; for I believe he was led to see himself as a sinner, and Jesus Christ as his Saviour. He would often converse on Divine subjects, when engaged about his worldly employment. Nor was his religion in words only; but he manifested, by his general conduct, that he believed what he said. Last summer he was taken with bleeding from the lungs very profusely, which greatly weakened his constitution. He, however, recovered, and got to work again. Early in June he was again taken ill. I applied all the means recommended in such cases, but ineffectually. I often conversed with him during his illness, and found him very patient under his sufferings, although his little daughter was lying by his side also ill, and his wife every day expecting to be confined. His daughter survived him only one day. When speaking to him of heaven, he would say, "Shall I ever get there – one so sinful?" I said, "Yes, I hope so; for Christ died in the stead of sinners, that they might live with Him." "Yes," he would say. Two days before his death, I asked him how be did. "I do net know," he replied. – I asked him if Christ was not very sweet. "Yes," said he; "but my sins, how many, how great! – " But do you not know that Christ's righteousness is placed to our account; and, by receiving Him, we become possessed of His perfect righteousness, with which we shall stand before God, not having spot, or wrinkle, or any such thing?" "That," he said, "is very sweet." – I replied, "How great ought our love be to Christ?" He said, "If I were His, I should love Him more." – "Do you not then love Him?" I asked.

"My loving heart." said he, "is small; but my praying heart is very great. I could pray all day." – I replied, "You could not thus delight in praying to Him. if you did not love Him. In a short, time." I continued, "you will be where you will love Him more, and that without ceasing or interruption." This was the last conversation which I had with him. He died on the second day after.

Another Native, baptized by the name of James, at Kerikeri. was among the first, who were baptized at that Settlement. He was naturally of a curious temper, and had, in consequence, much to struggle against. But after his baptism, he, on the whole, adorned the doctrine of God his Saviour in all things. He was by no means of a strong constitution, and a very little would lay him up; consequently he was often ill. He was clean in his person, clothes, and all that he did; and what he did, he endeavoured to do well; but was naturally reserved. During the last two years, I think, he was not well enough to be at work above eight months. His last illness commenced with bleeding from the lungs, which no doubt greatly hastened his death. On going to him, one day, as he lay ill, I asked him what he thought of himself. He said, "I do not know." – "Do you think," I asked. "that you will ever get about again or not?" "I do not know," he answered; "perhaps not." – "I do not myself think you will," said I. "I shall often see you," I continued: "tell me, before you depart, by some means or other, whether Christ is true to His promises or not – that He will be with His children in every trial, and will never leave nor forsake them." I often conversed with him on the blessings which sinners receive, by believing in Jesus Christ. As his end drew near, his views of Christ, and of being justified by His merits, became more clear, which gave him great peace of mind. I often inquired if he felt that his sins were removed by Jesus Christ; if there was nothing to obstruct his sight, and thereby cause fear: to which he answered, "No." About three weeks before he died, he told me that he had found Christ faithful to His promises thus far, and doubted not but He would carry him safely through. During the last week he was often in much pain, and sometimes a little delirious. On the evening before he died. I, with some Christian Natives, sung a hymn and

prayed with him. He died the next morning about four o'clock.

In addition to the preceding, we have received from Mr. Yate a more extended account than that which appeared at p. 91 of our last Volume, of a Native Woman, who died at Kerikeri, May 1st, 1832.

Memoir of Ann Waiapu.

Ann Waiapu was, for many years, an inmate of the family of Mr. Kemp, at the Mission Station at the Kerikeri. She was not what, by the New Zealanders, is generally termed a slave; but was treacherously detained by E'Ongi's party, when in company with her parents and other friends on a visit to the Bay of Islands.

At her own request, when quite a little girl, she was taken into the family of Mr. Kemp; and was, for many years, a diligent, faithful, and affectionate servant – remarkably clean in her person, and industrious in her habits. Notwithstanding all the Christian Instruction which she received in the school and in the family, she clung to her native superstitions with a frightful eagerness; and the message of mercy and invitations of grace, which were from time to time addressed to her, passed unregarded by; and, to all appearance, it seemed as though they would eventually prove a savour of death unto death to her soul.

In 1828, she was married to Waiapu, a steady young man, who had been long living with Mr. Clarke in the employ of the Mission, and to whom she was sincerely attached. By him she had two children, a boy and a girl. As a mother, she was a pattern of affection and care – as a wife, of kindness and submission; and, when in her native state, was far from exhibiting those independent feelings which wives generally manifest toward their husbands in this savage land.

At the commencement of the year 1830, Waiapu was enticed to Kororarika, where he was engaged in the battle which took place between some of the neighbouring tribes for the possession of that harbour. He was spared in the midst of slaughter, and returned in safety to the Mission and to his home. Not many days had elapsed ere he was visited with strong and overwhelming compunctions of conscience, on account of his conduct in the battle. He deemed himself a murderer. His heart was smitten, and the arrows of the Almighty, which to him felt as though their barbs were poisoned, stuck fast in him.

They were, however, not the shafts of death, but the messengers of mercy: they drove him for succour to the Cross of Christ; where he found pardon for all his sins, and balm for the deepest and most painful wounds of his soul. His after-conduct answered to his professions; and, with his Wife, who had at length learned a salutary lesson in the afflicting School of Christ, he made a public confession of his faith, and was baptized on Sunday, Aug. 26, 1830.

Her convictions were very gradual; and it was only one by one, and as she discovered the fallacy of the native prayers and superstitions, that she gave them up, and embraced the humbling and consoling doctrines of the Gospel. With the truth as it is in Jesus she was, verbally, well acquainted; and when she experienced its power in her heart, she found the benefit resulting from that acquaintance.

Always of a delicate constitution, the birth of her second child confirmed a disorder the latent symptoms of which had before frequently made their appearance, and had been the cause of much anxiety to the friends with whom she was living. Her disorder was consumption, to which the New Zealanders are very subject. Flattered, as those labouring under this complaint frequently are, by moments of ease and comparative health, she had scarcely a thought that she was so soon to be removed from this world. Her mind was calm and peaceful, and, under all that she had to endure, no murmuring escaped her lips. Frequently during her illness she showed anxiety to be employed; and expressed her shame that she should have received so much, and done so little for "Mother Kemp."

Her thoughts were much turned toward her infants. Her conversation, when not more immediately engaged in telling tales of mercy, was directed to James her Husband, and to the eternal welfare of her children. One day as I was standing in the outer room, I heard her say to him: "James, do not keep my children from going to heaven. I think now I must die, but do not keep Sarah and William from going to heaven. Take them to the House of Prayer: never take my girl on board ship; but let them both go to God, the Great and the Good."

She began gradually to grow weaker. Her days were well nigh spent; but she was becoming more meet to be transferred to the immediate presence of her

God and Saviour. The burden of her song now was Praise – praise for that everlasting love wherewith the Son of the Most High had loved her. "Ah, Mother Kemp," said she, as that kind woman was soothing her, "Alas! Mother Kemp, good bye! I am going to Jesus Christ, who greatly loves me. I shall see Him now. I have seen Him with my heart, and now I love Him with my heart: it is not my lips only that believe, but belief is firmly fixed within me."

She wished to partake of the Sacrament of the Lord's Supper. I explained to her its nature. She listened very attentively for some time, and then said, "Yes, Jesus did indeed die upon the cross for me; and, but for Him, I should now die a native death, and go to a place of darkness and punishment for ever, Mr. Yate, do you tell me – shall I be carried up to the House of Prayer on the next Sacred Day? and will you let me and James eat of the bread and drink of the cup which the Saviour said, Do in rememhrance of Me?" She then added, "What are we to remember?" I said, "That Christ loved us and died for our sins." "Ah, I shall never forget that," was her quick reply. – "But," I continued, "Jesus sometimes at His Supper reveals Himself more clearly to His children: they see more of His love. He is set forth as it were crucified among them; and when they see this, they love Him more, and try to serve Him better." "Then, James," was her expression, "James, get a litter ready, that I may be carried up to the House of God on Sunday, for I desire to try His love."

The Sabbath arrived; and it was the last which she ever spent in an earthly sanctuary. She was brought up carefully in the middle of the Service; and, as she was laid down near the table upon which were spread the sacred elements, I could not help giving vent to my tears; for I thought she was brought by her Husband and laid at the feet of her Saviour, to be healed of the worst malady that ever affected the human frame – the malady of Sin. The Sacramental Service was peculiarly solemn. It was the first time that I ever administered it to Natives, or in the Native Language; and the circumstances were altogether of such a nature as to lead to melancholy, though joyful feelings – one of our little number tasting of the cup, just before she was about to drink it new with her Redeemer in the kingdom of heaven – a short time, and her earthly course was to terminate, her tabernacle of clay to mingle with its kindred dust.

She now became fully aware that she could not recover; and, from the moment when a conviction of the truth of her state flashed on her mind, her affection for all around seemed much to increase. She loved to have the infants sleeping on the same bed with herself: she longed for the company of her husband: she rejoiced in the frequent visits paid her by Mr. and Mrs. Kemp and myself. Never was the Gospel more triumphant in an individual: never was its power more manifest than in the case of Ann Waiapu. "Jesus Christ is mine, Mr. Yate," she said; "and I am Jesus Christ's. I know Him now! I know Him now! He is come here" – fixing her hand on her breast – "and He will not go away any more." I asked her if she wished to return to the world, and to be restored to health. "What!" was her reply, "and Jesus the Saviour sometimes with me and sometimes not! and I, sometimes thinking evil and sometimes thinking good! I am not willing. No! No! No! Mother Kemp will be a better Mother to my babies than I shall be. I will go!" A growing insensibility to every earthly object marked the progress of her disease; and not less surely did her composure mark her advances in grace and holiness, and submission to the Divine Will, It was a pleasure and a delight to spend a few moments by the side of her death-bed, we there saw so much of what the grace of Christ can bestow – such tender solicitude for the welfare of others, and such real affection beaming to the very last upon her countenance. Just before that total insensibility took place, which preceded and was the harbinger of her death, she called for her children; and, committing them to her God and Saviour, she wept over them, and delivered them to her Husband. Almost her last words were, "James, I am going – remember! – I am full of pain – I am going above, away from pain," and some such expressions as would not be erroneously translated into the language of the first verse of that most beautiful Hymn –

When languor and disease invade
This trembling house of clay,
'Tis sweet to look beyond my cage,
And long to flee away.

She became insensible: all around her were aware that she was dying. Her

head rested on the knees of Mary Taua, who, in sickness and in health, had been her companion and friend. At her feet sat her disconsolate Husband, nursing his babes; weeping over them, and, like Rachel, refusing to be comforted. By her side was seen her childless and wifeless father; and in various places, within and around the house, were many Natives of the Settlement, mingling their tears, and accompanying with sighs to heaven the spirit of their friend. The scene was too much for me: I could bear it no longer, but retired to my room, and there indulged the feelings which I had before such difficulty to restrain. With respect to this saint of God, gathered to the fold and out of reach of danger, we can only say, Not unto us, O Lord, not unto us, but to thy name be all the praise! Precious in thy sight is the death of thy saints.

State and Progress of Education.

TEPUNA – Mr. J. King states, that, having removed from Rangihoua to this Station, September 13, 1832, he had, on the 17th of that month, commenced School out of doors, having no School-house. At the date of April 1833 he had in the School 18 men and boys, and 9 girls.

KERIKERI – Concerning this Station, it is reported, prior to the period that Mr. and Mrs. Chapman were transferred to Paihia –

We have in our Station, at present, from forty to fifty men and boys, and from twenty to thirty women, girls, and children, whose instruction has been attended to as regularly as circumstances would admit. – – - [Mr. J. Kemp.

Our Schools have been tolerably well attended, and the progress pleasing, considering every disadvantage. There is a great and manifest desire to learn to read and write. By this means the light of the Gospel will spread far and wide.

Mrs. Kemp, Mrs. Baker, and Mrs. Chapman have devoted as much of their time to the instruction of the Native Females as their family duties would allow. Mrs. Chapman has also devoted much time to the education of those of the English Children not yet of an age to enter the Schools. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

PAIHIA – From the following extracts will be seen, generally, the progress of education at this Station: –

In the morning, attended to the English Boys' School. In the afternoon, attended the Native Girls' School, to form it into circulating classes: 38 present; 10 absentees. Boys preparing land for potatoes.

July 26, 1832 – Exercising the girls at school in the afternoon.

July 27 – Employed as yesterday in the afternoon.

Our Schools are kept in action between the Services; and the Missionaries and Christian Natives move out in various directions, to declare the glad tidings of the Gospel of Peace. The Schools, five in number, have been conducted as heretofore. There are at this time, in the English Boys' School, 14; English Girls, 6; Native Boys, 71; Native Girls, 44; Infant School, 26. The Annual Examination took place on Dec. 19, 1832, and gave great satisfaction. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

Dec. 8, 1833: Sunday – Visited our Congregation at the Kauakaua. I was late in arriving there, and our Native, Paul, had just concluded prayers; so that I addressed them, and concluded. After an interval of about a quarter of an hour, at the conclusion of Service, Paul sounded his bell (a hoe), as the signal for school; it being necessary, as he observed, to hold it immediately, before the Natives dispersed to their respective dwellings. He first collected the men, to the number of twenty-four, within the building, and went through two of the Catechisms; and afterward he proceeded in the same manner with the women, to the number of eighteen. It is extremely gratifying to witness old and young, in the native villages, thus willingly coming forward to be instructed. My daily engagements at the English Boys' School, and in the translation, continue as usual, when no interruption occurs. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

With regard to the European Boys' School, Mr. Chapman reports his having been appointed to it in the place of Mr. Brown, owing to the continued ill health of Mrs. Brown. Under date of October 1, 1833, he states –

My School duties, of the present half-year, commenced on Aug. 12. There are in the house nine boys, boarders, and six day scholars. Mrs. Chapman renders all the assistance in her power in the Native School.

He takes, also, an encouraging view of a circumstance connected

with Education, which had at first appeared to him very disheartening.

I have spoken of nerve: it would try your nerve to see about 150 New Zealanders, as was the case last Sunday, in the most orderly manner going through the whole Litany of our Service, with many even of utter strangers to us, musically, or rather plaintively, joining in the responses and the loud Amen: "a-mi-ne," they say, dwelling upon a, and terminating the last syllable in a peculiar manner, that strikes you as very sweet. For myself, I never find my nerves really unstrung, except in seasons of native baptism. The tide of ages – dark ages, bloody ages, ages of murder and treachery, cruelty and hatred – rolls, as it were, before me; and yet here stand the children of murderers, accepting offered mercy, and desiring to wash all their guilty stains away! Thoughts such as these force themselves upon me, and I must weep.

The accounts which you have lately received from this quarter must have given you the most heartfelt pleasure, and, I am sure, the purest sensations of gratitude to our kind and gracious God: and, what is more, the good work is still going on, and the spirit of inquiry increasing, in a surprising manner. We find, too, that our little messengers, the Catechisms, are winging their way in every surrounding part. Perhaps the idea may just strike you – But they cannot read them. Now see how things work. Lads and girls come to our Settlements, and are received by us, employed, and taught. Some, perhaps, are fetched away by their parents or masters: others leave us from causes over which neither we nor they have any controul; and some others, perhaps, behave ill and leave us; but, you will observe, all carry away something: some carry away a great deal; and few but can tell something to interest their, perhaps, distant friends. How many times have we been vexed and tried by these things, because we could not see the end? I mean, by lads and girls leaving us just as they seemed worth the trouble which we had previously had with them, yes, just as they were become worth the daily food which they consumed. How good, then, is it to hope and quietly to wait for the salvation of our God! Thus, you see, these lads and girls have greatly assisted in the work that is now going on; and as the Natives themselves are beginning to build their own Hut Chapels, and keep school, we really have great cause to believe that much good is preparing to be done among them. Mr. W. Williams and myself, last Sunday, walked out together, as our journey lay in the same direction for about a mile. I remarked to him how much visiting on a Sunday was increased among us, since my arrival in the land. "Yes," he remarked; "at that time we were like young birds, willing to fly, and able to fly a little, but too timid to venture far, and always fearful of danger (no simile could be more apt). "Now," said he, "we have confidence in ourselves, and entire confidence in all around us: now we use our wings, and enjoy our flying." The little party which I visited received me in their own Hut Chapel; and, having been for a long time regularly visited, were enabled to join in the Liturgy and Hymns in a pleasing manner.

WAIMATE – Mr. Yate reports –

About seventy men and boys have regularly attended the morning school at this Station: the women and girls have also been instructed in reading, writing, and needlework. An Infant School, containing seventeen native children, has been formed during the past year; and a School of European Children, eight in number, conducted by Miss Davis.

Four Schools have been formed by the Natives at the villages, and are in daily operation; where old and young are taught to read and write. Chiefs have visited us from the distance of sixty miles for instruction; and application is continually making for books and slates, that they may learn to read and write.

Mr. Puckey, under date of January 24, 1831, states –

We have been here upward of twelve months preparing materials, and acquiring useful knowledge for the said (Waimate) Station, and are now ready for our departure, which will be in about a month. I look forward with joy to the period when I shall be able to go out among the Natives of that part. They are very anxious for instruction: they often say, when spoken to on religious subjects, "We cannot learn, except you come and live among us." We were down there a little time ago for two months, employed in building our rush houses, which we have finished. During that time, we began school with the Natives. They all seemed to be very attentive, the young Chief of the place especially, who would get up before any of the rest, and ring the bell, or rather beat two pieces of

iron, to call the rest to assemble to prayers. Moreover, when he thought we were in want of food, he would go out into the villages to purchase for us and our lads, who were employed with us. I think, in the course of two days' travelling, we may be able to visit 1200 Natives: the children are very numerous. We shall, in the course of a little while, be able to have a very nice Infant School: there is a very great field before us. May the God of all mercy and truth give us grace to prove that we are faithful labourers in His vineyard! May we spend and be spent in His service! I have one great privilege beyond many of the brethren; that is, a good knowledge of the language. Having come to the land when very young, I had a particular advantage in acquiring the language. I spend a good portion of my time in translating the Scriptures. After I have translated a part, I take it to the elder brethren, who make such alterations as are necessary. I am now translating the Second Epistle to the Corinthians.

Mr. J. Matthews has been employed principally in the introduction of the Infant-School System. From a Letter of his, dated Waimate, Jan. 20, 1834, we have made the following extracts, as they exhibit in a forcible manner the value of that System, and its tendency to supplant the ferocious tempers early instilled into the native children.

I was very happy in teaching the Infant School which I had organized; and from what I have observed, I should conclude, that were the Infant System to obtain a good footing in the villages of the Natives, it would soon change the moral face of nature in New Zealand. No English Children ever enjoyed the system more than those native children to whom I taught it. It is an undeniable fact, that the savage learns to be a savage in his infancy: he only waits for power and opportunity to display his ferocious nature. The custom of the Chiefs is, to make known every thing of importance to the child. I have noticed the principal Chief of Kaitaia (a very promising man indeed) talking to his little boy as though the child was able to give him advice. The father would stedfastly look his son in the face, while describing the scene which took place; and the son would as earnestly behold the father, and show, by his strict attention, that every word was digested. The infant race are remarkably quick in observing every action of the Missionary. The children of the Natives run about naked, and are dirty and filthy, both in person and conversation. They go astray (most emphatically so), speaking lies, as soon as they are born. I said, that a savage learns to be savage when a child. Previously to our finally determining on establishing the Kaitaia Station, we took a Missionary trip among the tribes of the Rarawa. We spent the second Sabbath at Wangape, a noted place for the strength of the fighting men. We pitched our tent near the house of one of the principal Chiefs, named Huhu, a brother of the noted warrior, Papahia. Huhu is seeking after Truth, and is an interesting character. You have heard of the Chief, Ripi, who is now named Broughton. Broughton, seeing me making a box to travel with, and knowing that it was the intention of Mr. Puckey and myself to call at Wangape, wished me to write a word to his old friend Huhu. It was this. "Be strong: take the things of God. Very great the love of Jesus Christ to us." When I opened my box, and told him that Broughton had sent a word to him, he was all attention, and wished to hear. "Repeat it again," said he, "lest I forget it. I suppose Paratene means, that I should be strong to take the Word of God." While sitting in the tent door, I observed a number of children flock to a small rush house, which was about ten yards from our tent, evidently very anxious to peep in. They peeped in, as fast as they could; and as they peeped, they smiled. At what did they smile? They smiled and evinced their joy at the sight of the heads of victims who have lately fallen in battle. Thus the infant race of New Zealanders are taught to delight in the savage, and worse than brutal, habits of their parents. Now it is just as easy to teach them the orderly habits of an Infant School, as to teach them the habit of delighting in war. This little incident taught me a great lesson. There are many obstacles in the way of setting these Schools a-going: but there is reason to hope that the day is not far distant, when Infant Schools shall become general. While at Kaitaia, nine weeks, I opened a Sunday School, which was well attended. On the Monday I opened a Morning School, commencing with reading the Word of God, singing, and prayer; and this also was well and

regularly attended; and, beyond my expectation, I had an Infant Class; and it would have delighted any of the patrons of Infant Schools, to have seen the interest which this class excited among the grown-up people: they would sometimes stop their lessons to hear the infants say theirs. I began to teach them Watts's Child's Catechism, and other lessons. One of the old Chiefs would frequently act as Sexton, to keep good order; and go out and about to call all into school.

Visits of Rev. W. Yate among the Natives.

It will have been observed, that this practice is constantly pursued by all the Missionary Labourers at the various Stations. We have, however, selected, out of various communications to this effect, the following diversified sketches by Mr. Yate.

Nov. 5-14, 1833 – On the 5th, at eight o'clock A. M., left the Waimate, with eight Natives, for a journey across the country. When about two miles from the Settlement, it began to rain; but, as, in so long a journey, I must expect to be wet several times, I resolved not to turn back again. At noon, arrived at Kaikohi, and took some refreshment at the entrance of a wood through which I had to pass: it was raining all the time. As my boys wished to proceed, we trudged on our way, through thick and thin, in an extensive forest. At five P. M. we came to a beautiful little opening, nearly surrounded by the River Punaketere. There are two small rush-huts erected in this little opening, on account of its nearness to some native cultivations: Wakatoro is the name given to the place. It is an exceedingly pretty situation, about two miles and a half from Hikurangi Hill; on one side confined by the wood through which we had passed, and on the other, by hill rising above hill, and forest planted upon forest. The beauty of nature, untouched by art, is here seen in her loveliest form: the winding of the river; the varied tints of the foliage on its banks; the lofty kouri-tree; the splendid, though more humble, karaka; the elegant flowers of the bush-wood; and the unpresuming lowly-minded creeper, proclaim the exquisiteness of the works of creation; while the murmuring of the brook and the melody of the birds, in the perfect stillness of the evening, give an idea of peace, when all is peace within, not to be surpassed. At eight o'clock, I had prayers with my attendants; and on my bed of fern, laid me down to sleep in my tent, under the care and protection of my Heavenly Father. At day-break on the 6th, struck my tent, and marched on toward Hikurangi. We met with some difficulties in our passage, on account of our not having kept the direct road. We had to pass over places where, in all probability, the foot of man had never before trodden: we had to cross over brooks which certainly, in those places, had never before been crossed by any animal; and every inch of our road, for the last mile, we had to cut through with our hatchets. After a hard day's travelling, having climbed almost perpendicular steeps and descended into deep ravines, we arrived in safety at the valley of Mangakahia, where the very hearty welcome which we received from the Natives abundantly made up for the fatigue which we had undergone. They fired away for nearly an hour; killed two pigs, as provision; and set the ovens going with the best the place would afford. I pitched my tent at Pukauanui, Hotaiwa's village, and lay down; but was so throughly wearied, that I could not sleep a moment; and, in the morning of the 7th, arose with so very violent a head-ache, that I was forced to lie down again, and to rest the whole day. On the 8th, I visited Mate's Pa, at the other extremity of the valley, and was cordially welcomed by the whole tribe. They showed me every thing which they thought I could wish to see; and there was not the least inclination manifested by any of them to obtrude. I conversed with them for two hours, and then returned for the night to my tent; where, in the evening, all the people of the place, in number about 200, assembled to hear what I had to say: they were very attentive. I distributed a few of the Catechisms among them; and those who could read promised to teach their friends, who all seemed not only willing, but anxious to learn. On the 9th, went along the plain, as far as I could travel, toward Wangaru, leaving Mate's residence on the right. I saw that Wangaru lies about fifteen miles to the N. E. of where I was standing, and Kaipara about thirty miles to the S. E. The road to both places, from where I turned my horse's head, was hilly and swampy, and otherwise apparently impassable for a horse. Arrived at my tent in the evening, and held another Service with the Natives. Sunday, the 10th, had Service in the morning' with

the Natives of the village. In the afternoon, held School, and, for three hours, catechized the people, both old and young. Ever since my last visit here, they have observed the Sabbath regularly, and in the knowledge of the Scriptures made much improvement. In the evening, seated at the door of my tent, I held another Service, which was attended by all within two miles of the place. All was breathless silence: the wind, which during the day had been high, had died away almost to a calm; the sun had just shed his parting rays upon the hills, the halo of his glory seemed to linger after he was gone, and the birds of the air were just retiring to their resting-places, when we commenced our first hymn. The effect was wonderfully pleasing – unharmonious, it is true, to a critical ear, but, I doubt not, much melody was made, in the hearts of some, unto God. The old Chief of the place thought, at the conclusion, that he must say something. "Come, friends," he cried, "let us all believe! it will do us no harm. Believing! what will it do? It will not kill us, for the White People do not die: it will not make us ill, for the White People are not ill: it will not make us ashamed, for the White People are not ashamed. Therefore let us all believe; and perhaps it will make the White People's God gracious to us, and our souls will not be any longer devilified, but will be Christified, and we shall all, all, all go to heaven: let us believe, let us believe!" On the 11th, went a long way in search of a road to Kaui and Kaipara: I think I have succeeded in finding one. Spoke to five small parties of Natives, and returned to my tent. At five in the morning of the 12th, left Mangakahia for the Waimate; where, after hard and fatiguing travelling, I arrived on the following day, having been much delighted with my journey, and encouraged by the conduct of the Natives.

Feb. 8, 1834 – Breakfasted this morning at Kaikohi; and then proceeded to Otaua, the residence of the tribe Ngaitu. The journey is exceedingly pleasant in the summer, as all the swamps are dried up, and we have almost every variety of natural scenery, except water – hill, vale, wood, plain, and every thing to delight the eye; to which may be added, the pleasantness of a ride through a New-Zealand forest, in a hot summer's day. The residence of the Ngaitu is situated on the banks of a river, from whence it takes its name, and is a perfect amphitheatre, through which the river serpentines, and sometimes seems almost to meet itself, and to blend its waters with another stream. The hills, mountainous in their elevation at the back of the residence, run almost due East and West; and the river flows down a beautiful valley, till it joins the tide with the River Punaketere at E'O'keanga. I assembled about sixty people, who listened attentively, and seemed pleased that I had paid them this visit. There were eleven who had books in their hands; and, from the readiness with which they turned to the chapter from which I addressed them, they appeared as though they could read their contents. I found that they had been instructed by one of our boys who had been in the School. At seven P. M. arrived at Kaikohi: took tea; had prayers with the Natives; examined some who professed themselves Candidates for Baptism; and then retired to rest.

Feb. 9: Sunday – Held three Services at three native villages. The first, in the morning, at Kaikohi, where I slept last night. In this place the Sabbath, as far as outward observance goes, is strictly kept. Its silence and stillness were rather imposing, compared with the bustle of last evening: all food was prepared, and all work laid aside. It was one of those lovely mornings which we sometimes have in New Zealand. The heat of summer had been tempered by a gentle shower of rain: all nature seemed enjoying itself: the grasshoppers were merrily chirping; and the Natives, in little groups, were reading to each other the wonderful works of God, or, in their rude way, were attempting to sing His praises. One hundred and twenty-nine assembled in the place they call their Chapel. It is a miserable building, not capable of accommodating half their number. I remonstrated with them for not building another and a more spacious one. They are visited every Sunday, when the weather permits, by one of our number from the Waimate. After Service, I proceeded to Mawi, and found the people, about a hundred, all assembled and ready for Worship, only waiting for my arrival. Here are a number of Natives who make a profession of Religion; but I fear, with most of them, it is a mere profession. I addressed them from Matt. vii. 21; and then went on to the Tautoka, and found there also about twenty-five people waiting for me.

I spoke to them on the same subject as to those at Mawi; and returned to the Waimate to tea, pleased and gratified with all which I had heard and seen in my journey.

Feb. 16, 1334: Sunday – The tribe of Ngatiwahea, from the other end of the valley, came down this morning, at eight o'clock, to see me. There were about two hundred of them. At nine o'clock the old hoe was set going for Service: upward of three hundred people assembled. As there had been a great flood here last week, which had swept away a large portion of their cultivations, and had done much serious damage to their houses, I took occasion to speak to them of the general Flood by which the world was destroyed, and of that still greater flood of God's wrath which will overtake and overwhelm the ungodly, should they not repent and believe the Gospel. After Service, catechized the Natives of the Pa; and in the evening held another Service, which was attended by all within a reasonable distance.

March 9: Sunday – -Held a full Service at Kaikohi. The place in which the Natives assembled was full; and such great numbers were outside, that I removed my seat into the verandah of the house, in order that all might hear. At two o'clock, arrived at Mawi, and found waiting for me there all the people living within three miles of the Chapel. They have, in this place, erected a building capable of holding from two to three hundred people, since I was last here. It is yet in an unfinished state, but, for a native building, will be very neat. The roof-beam, which stretches from one end to the other, is supported by a pole in the centre, and is painted red and white: the rafters are of the same colours, and the principal ones are carved at the ends. It is gable-ended, and is thatched with rushes. The ceiling is very neatly plaited: the sides are done up with bark, secured by strong slips of native flax; and, when completed, will be perfectly wind and water tight: the door is placed in the centre of one of the sides; and there is a good-sized window at each end. The room was full when I arrived. I baptized in it the two children of J. D. Ngare, a Chief of the village: Ripi was one of the sponsors. On leaving, I heard the following remark made by one of the Natives: – "Now persons have been baptized in this place, it is indeed 'tapu,' and we shall not use it for any other purpose but for the service of God."

Letters of Natives who are Candidates for Baptism or Admission to the Lord's Supper.

From a few of these communications, transmitted by Mr. Yate, we select the following. On comparing them with those given in our Volume for 1832, pp. 87-90, it will be observed that there is much similarity of style: some of these, however, express more advanced experience in the Divine Life. When, which is easily done, allowance is made for the simplicity of the diction, the pious Reader will discover in these Letters the same marks of humility, faith, and love, by which believers in every age and country are distinguished. For these, and all other Converts, it should be our earnest prayer, that they may continually grow in grace, and in the knowledge, of our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ.

LETTER I – From John Taua, and Mary Taua, his Wife.

Sir, Mr. Yate – It is now many moons since I and Mary were baptized by you in the Chapel at the Kerikeri; and since then I have been thinking many things, and doing many things. Sometimes I think of the things of this world, and sometimes I think of the things of God: sometimes I do right, and then I do wrong. Does anybody, who has the love of Jesus Christ in his heart, ever do wrong, and laugh when he sees others do wrong? I do so: here am I, and I do so. It is when we two do not remember the love of the Saviour that we sin. When I and Mary think of His love, we love Him, and try to do what He says in His Holy Book. If you let me, and my wife Mary, come to the Sacred Table, perhaps we shall remember more of Jesus' death and love. Say, Yes, Mr. Yate, or, perhaps, say No. There are many mistakes in our two's Letter; and Mary says, 'Do not send it: wait and talk when he comes to the Kerikeri.' Here are we writing to you, your friends,

JOHN TAUA. MARY TAUA.

N. B. These two have long been an ornament to the Christian Profession, and are bringing up their children in the fear of God. (Signed) W. YATE.

LETTER II – From Henry and Rebecca Wahanga.

Father, Mr. Yate – Is the Sacred Supper a remembrance of Jesus the Saviour's dying upon a tree for us – -for me, and for my wife Rebecca, and for you? My soul is happy, because it knows something of the love of God; and I wish to know more and to remember more of the great and good things which God hath done for me by Jesus Christ; and I want more to fulfil His will, and to do His bidding. My old heart is not carried away yet: it remains inside me; and when I am on my bed at night, my heart says, Henry, do something that is not good to-morrow: and then my thoughts think about it; and then tomorrow I think about it again; and my native heart says, Do it; and I think again, and then I do it; and then my thoughts tell me I was wrong; and my heart tells me I am an unbelieving, bad man: and then Satan comes and tells me, I am none of Jesus Christ's, but am his, and shall go to his place, and do his work for ever, and ever, and ever. Mr. Yate, what do you think? You have brought the Scriptures printed from the other side the water, and I have got a book; and Rebecca says I must read it to her when she is ill bringing to the birth, and I must look into it every day, every day, and pray more to God when I am reading, and then I shall soon altogether know what I am to do, or to be done with. Your heart, and Mr. Kemp's, and Mr. Davis's, and all of yours, are always thinking good: but, as for ours! Rebecca says, this is to be her Letter and my Letter; for they are our two's thoughts, and our hearts are one.

This is all from us two, from HENRY WAHANGA, and from REBECCA WAHANGA, to our father, MR. YATE, living at the Waimate.

LETTER IV – From Kaheke, Son of a Chief at Kaikohi, a Candidate for Baptism.

Friend, Mr. Yate – My heart is very dark and sad; and the reason is, because God is not there. God resting in the heart causes the heart to be glad; because, when He is there, evil is driven away. My will is, to have nothing more to do with evil, but to forsake it altogether, and live as God and Jesus Christ say we must. I wish to talk with you, and for you to talk with me. I wish to ask you how I can be brought to stand nearest to the presence of the Saviour? Perhaps, by baptism I may be brought near: perhaps, by praying for a new heart. Yate, you say how. Let me take upon me a new name: for though the Native Chiefs scoff at me, and say, "Who is Kaheke, that he should believe? it is all nonsense," I am not ashamed of saying to everybody, that Jesus died for my sins, and is my Saviour and my God.

This is all to you, Mr. Yate, from your friend – from KAHEKE.

LETTER V. – From Piripi, a Redeemed Slave.

Sir, Mr. Yate – My parents have long been dead. My heart is broken. I find I am an orphan; and though Mr. Davis has been my father, and Mother Davis has been my mother, this year, and that year, a great many years, I am looking for another Father, and that Father must be God. Now will you not say, Piripi, you are a dirty thoughtless boy? Yes, I am; but I have no clothes for my wife to wash. But what are clothes? they have nothing to do with the heart. Did you not tell us, last Prayer-day, that it is what comes out of a man's heart that makes him evil, not what garments he is clothed with? With me, there is nothing but evil inside and outside; but though evil is great, it is not so great as the love of God. There is one thing that is often knocking me down, that is, sin; but the love of God raises me up again. I have long thought about being baptized. I have thought, I, who know so much, ought to say so to Mr. Yate, and ask him, if he thinks my letting into the Church will make me know more, or make me love Jesus the Saviour more than I now do. Sit in peace, Mr. Yate; from me, from your son, – – - PIRIPI.

To Mr. Yate, living at the Waimate.

LETTER VI – From Paru, a Young Man who has been living with me from my first arrival in New Zealand.

Father – From me, from Paru, is this Letter. Great is the grace of God within my heart: therefore my heart is large with love, and is pricked on account of sin. The words of Jehovah are good, and they cause a desire in my heart to pray to Him, and to stick close to Him. This is my thought; that I should heap up the words of the Lord within me, and not forget them by day nor by night. Sir, Mr. Yate, listen. When will a good heart be deep within me, not to go away again? Sometimes I say, within myself, my thoughts shall be fixed on God: then I think about sawing, and the payment I am to have for sawing, when I have finished my tree. This is the way I am,

this day, and this day, and this day. Mr. Yate, what are your thoughts? Should I he baptized? perhaps Yes; perhaps No.

From me, from your man, from PARU, is this Letter to Mr. Yate.

LETTER VII--From Wana, a Young Man living at Waimate.

Friend, Mr. Yate – When am I to be permitted to enter the Church of Jesus Christ? My soul is very great, oh how great! to be baptized. When shall you cause "Yes" to he said? You know me.

This book is from WANA.

LETTER VIII. – From Hau, a Native Chief.

Friend, Mr. Yate – Perhaps you are thinking that I am thinking about good things – the good things of God. This is my thought, and my saying to you. I have wished a long time to be baptized, because I love God. Do you remember asking me, the other day, why I love God, and how much? I love God, because He is my Father, and Jesus Christ, because He is my Saviour; but all my love for them is very little; just as much as one grain of sand. I am pained, because my heart is fixed in this world. This is all my book to Mr. Yate.

HAU.

LETTER IX – From Kupa, a Chief of Otuhere, married to the Daughter of Paparangi.

Sir, Mr. Yate – I am very desirous of being let by you into the holy Church, in order that the knowledge of the love of God may spring up in my heart, and that I may quite see His love to me. There is no evil that I have not done. Before my heart began to listen to the words of Jehovah, I was a liar, a murderer, an adulterer, a fornicator, a thief, a troublesome man; but now I wish to cast all these things away, all, all, all. Sometimes I am afraid it is my ears only that listen to good things; and that my heart has not heard, nor said Yes, to them. Mine is, I am thinking, all lip-service; and my heart is deceitful within me, because I am angry and covetous, and think that if I do as the Missionaries tell me, they will be good to me, and give me medicine for my child. Mr. Yate, I will tell you about my thoughts when I come to the Waimate. Send back a Yes, or a No, by my wife, if you will permit me to enter the inside Church of the Saviour.

This all from me to you. My book is full. From KUPA.

Progress and Acceptableness of Scripture Translations.

Upon this interesting subject we shall extract, from the different communications of our Missionary Labourers, such remarks as tend to show the value which they put upon the portions of Scripture already translated, and the hopes which they entertain respecting the prosecution of the work.

You cannot conceive the eagerness of the people for the Scriptures. In a short time we shall have the whole of the New Testament ready for the Press, say, in eighteen months or two years. I am convinced that it would be less expense, and that a very few months, say three months more, would be the utmost extent of absence required, in a journey to England, to carry it through the Press, than in one to New South-Wales. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

Sept. 16, 1833 – A Native came from Kororarika for a book. As the man had never been to school, I tried him in a part of the new translation, and was much pleased to find that he could read very respectably. I have no doubt but that, in a little time, we shall have a large proportion of the population able to make use of the Scriptures. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

Sept. 12 – Much pleased with the conduct of Rae, John Poti's brother, to whom I sent a present on account of his near relationship to the new bride: he sent back a messenger to say he should be glad if I would exchange it for a book of the Scriptures. Of course I did, and was rejoiced in such an opportunity and such a requisition. – – - [Rev. w. Yate.

Nov. 26 – After a severe season of drought, which has threatened us with great scarcity, the potatoe crops being almost dried up, we have been favoured with a most gracious rain; so that now there is a prospect of abundance. I was glad of the opportunity of introducing the beautiful Form of Thanksgiving in our Liturgy, into our Native Service. We hear, at the same time, from the Colony, that God has blessed our Society with a great increase of funds. He slumbereth not, nor sleepeth, but watches over His inheritance, and sends help when He sees that His people are prepared for it. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

We are anxious now to get out something in the Tract way; and as nothing of this kind ever yet met their eye, I have no doubt but the desire for them would be immense. – – - [Mr. T. Chapman.

There is a pleasing feature in this part of the island. Instruction is rapidly

increasing. The musket is getting into disuse, and the people more into peaceable habits. It is now no uncommon thing to see men, who have not lived with us, instead of having the cartouch-box slung over the shoulder, carrying in their girdle that portion of the Scripture which is translated; and, instead of polishing up and adorning their gun, to see them now, under the shade of a tree, reading the Gospel of Jesus Christ to themselves or those around. These things greatly encourage us; and though we see, daily, cause not to be high-minded, but to fear, we cannot but praise the Lord, in full assurance of faith that this wilderness shall, ere long, rejoice and blossom as the rose. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

We have now within our reach the means of establishing Schools in the various districts, which will be placed under the charge of Christian Natives; and a reading population, whose only book is the Word of God, cannot fail to make a great moral change in the face of the country, as soon as that Word begins to take effect. You will, ere this, have seen our little Publication, which has been printed in Port Jackson. It places in the hands of our people some of the most important parts of the Sacred Volume, and has been, hitherto, received by them as an inestimable treasure. It is, however, but a small portion, compared with the whole; and our desire is, that the whole may be given to them as speedily as possible. But how soon this great work may be effected, I am afraid to conjecture, so many and various are the interruptions which occur. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

The Epistles to the Galatians, Ephesians, Philippians, and Colossians, have been completed during the quarter. – – - [Rev. W. Williams, Oct. 1, 1833.

The following translations have been accomplished during the year: – St. Paul's Epistle to the Romans; St. Luke's Gospel, and the last Six Chapters of St. John's. – – - [Rev. H. Williams, Oct. 30, 1833.

The Rev. W. Williams thus speaks of the

Copiousness and Beauty of the Language.

The language itself, I think, will be found sufficiently copious to make a good translation attainable. You will be surprised when I tell you that we expect to have at least 12,000 words in our Vocabulary; not to be made up by a medley of proper and common names, as in Kendal's Vocabulary, but merely of those words which ought to find place in a Dictionary. The language will, I also think, be found to possess much beauty. It contains no guttural sounds; and as every syllable terminates with a vowel, it has a softness and harmony of expression which cannot well be surpassed.

Enmity of some Natives, stirred up chiefly by Calumnies of Europeans.

It is not, however, to be supposed that the labours of our Missionaries are received without opposition, or at least indifference, from some quarters. Some instances of such cases we here give.

May 16, 1832 – The boys are preparing a "Wata," a high stand for native food, about 16 feet long and 10 wide, and 16 feet from the ground, to preserve it from the English rats, which are now beginning to infest all parts of the land, having found their way by means of the shipping. The Natives have expressed considerable alarm, and have brought this forward as another evidence of the anger of the Atua for not observing more rigidly their religious ceremonies. Thus we find the Great Adversary meets us at every point, and disputes every inch of the ground, attributing all evil to the presence of the Missionaries. But the Lord, He is our God, our Shield, and Strength!

June 17: Sunday – In the midst of the Sermon, put into great commotion by a party of Nga-te-Hine, who had landed unobserved, and had commenced stripping the houses belonging to Mr. Fairburn's boys, in consequence of the marriage of Heme and Hera. Every body was obliged to turn out, for a general scuffle. Launched two boats, to search the canoes afloat: recovered every thing, excepting a gown: our boys took a cartouch-box from them: the victory on our side. The party were much ashamed, and returned quietly home. This is the fourth disturbance wherein the Natives have watched the opportunity while we have been engaged in Divine Service. Much troubled through the day by the outrage of the morning.

July 22: Sunday – Several strangers from the Taua at the Service. Administered the Sacrament to eight Natives. Rawiri came from Wangaroa, having paid a visit of instruction to his old friends and companions in arms there. Tupe, a Chief who was wounded at Kororarika, wishes for a teacher: if not a European, he desires that a Native may go to reside with

him. We have heard many pleasing things relative to this man. May the Lord grant that a door may be opened in this quarter, for the introduction of the Gospel through the means of Native Teachers! Several canoes entered the Bay from the South, from the expedition. The Natives said their guns would not shoot straight; for though they were frequently quite close, the shots flew off from the object. This they attribute to the influence of the Missionaries.

Oct. 14, 1832: Sunday – Mr. Brown and I went to Kororarika. Tohitapu met us on landing; but learning that we were going among the less-important part of the community to hold our usual Service, he turned back with an exclamation of "Who was going to sit among those slaves!" As we drew to the spot, the tinkling of a little bell saluted our ears; and in a few minutes about a hundred persons were assembled. An arm-chair was brought forward for the "Patene" (Parson). We formed a snug congregation in a small enclosure, and I found every one very attentive: they informed me that they had just concluded School. Very much has been said lately among the Natives concerning the great mortality which has long prevailed in the land. This they have attributed to the influence of the Missionaries; and I here learnt that Wareporka and Waikato, when with the expedition at Maketu, circulated the idea that, the Missionaries were "he iwi makutu" (bewitching people); and that they had obtained this information from Europeans of the ships, and in the Bay. These two men have always been regarded as very substantial friends of ours, and, externally, they have appeared such; but they have certainly been the authors of much mischief among their countrymen.

Feb. 3, 1833: Sunday – A goodly number of Natives at Service: Chapel very full. In the afternoon, a large congregation of Europeans. Much cast down on account of the Natives at Kororarika. Tarea in a great rage to day with Rawiri. He came toward him when at Kororarika, roaring like an infuriated bull, in consequence of some of the answers in one of the Catechisms being opposed to his views of strict propriety, inasmuch as all men, without distinction of rank, are brought under condemnation, who believe not in the Name of the Son of God. This doctrine, it is observed, may do for Slaves and Europeans, but not for a free and noble people, like the Nga-puhi; therefore they will not receive it.

April 21 – After Service, went over to Kororarika: between 70 and 80 in attendance: a considerable number is in the place. After we had concluded our Service, one of the Chiefs desired to know the meaning of the intelligence communicated to them by Tumi and Captain Boulger, of our receiving dollars for every "tangata wakapono" (believer). I referred him to them, as it was equally new to us as to himself. It appears that Satan, through the means of these his agents, has been very industriously circulating the idea of our intention to seize the Chiefs, in a short time, and have them conveyed to England; and that for those who receive instruction we are to receive dollars, according to the rank of the individual. Passed on to Tarea, Rewa, and Tohitapu. All very civil; but spoke upon the subject of the dollars, and inquired how many we had received on account of Ripi and Temorenga. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

March 17 – Accompanied Mr. King in the afternoon to Hauai, and spoke to a few Natives there. There was one hard-mouthed man, who indulged himself freely in giving vent to the reports which some of our countrymen have raised against the Mission. After he had gone on in this strain some time, I was enabled to answer him effectually; so that the Natives remarked that, he had the worst of it. It is astonishing with what industry some captains of ships, and others whom I could name, have sought to poison the native mind. They have told them, most seriously, that our object is only to obtain possession of the land: that when they are made Christians, we shall make slaves of them, and send them out of the land. In addition to this, the Devil seems to be particularly active, at this time, in raising other prejudices among them; so that many, of whom we had hoped well, have disappointed our expectations. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

June 30 – Went with Mr. Fairburn to Puketona. Saw three parties of Natives, small in number, but pretty attentive. A Chief inquired whether he should go to heaven when he died, if he became a believer in Jesus Christ? On being answered in the affirmative, he rejoined, that he knew his forefathers were not there; and he could not bear to be separated from them. – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

Sept. 27, 1833 – Took along round among the Natives. Visited the Ahuahu, Ohaiahai, Manawenua, and Taiamai, and the villages connected with these residences. Spoke to eleven parties of Natives: all very attentive. Temorenga seems to be in a very pleasing teachable state. Taki, an old man at Ohaiahai, said he was quite satisfied to go to hell, so that he could only get what he wanted in this world before he went there, as he was quite sure he should never reach heaven. There was, he said, too much to be done in the road to heaven, for the New Zealanders ever to think of reaching there. I told him of many who had already arrived at that happy place, He said, with much emphasis, "It is all a lie, a lie, a lie!" – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

Civilization, Agriculture, and Useful Arts.

Upon these topics we have, at different times, communicated such extracts to our Readers as might set before them the situation of the Missionaries in respect to their temporal wants. A few such extracts are here subjoined.

May 17, 1832 – Again required to comply with the request of some of our friends to pay a visit to Wangai, to attend a Hahunga: nothing particularly interesting. Thirty baskets of kumaras were brought forward for our party, which are always expected to be carried away. These feasts take place at this season of the year, called the "Ngahuru," or tenth month, when the harvest of kumara is gathered in; and they cease to count the months until the time of planting again comes round.

June 26 – Boys repairing the front of the Chapel. They are now acquiring the capability of executing this work with little of our attention, in comparison with what they used to require.

July 19 – Rode, in company with Messrs. Clarke and Davis, to the woods and saw-pits. My horse managed to get into a hole, and to tumble me into the mud, which was the extent of the damage. The woods were very fine: vast quantities of Kauri, of the largest description, many running seventy feet and upward without a branch, nine feet in diameter at the butt, and six feet at the head. Two such trees would build a house for any family.

Aug. 14 – Exceedingly cold day. Boys digging, and preparing seed potatoes. As our method did not correspond with the native ideas, they were not sparing in their remarks, and quite ridiculed the cutting of the potatoe. They were much astonished that we should be able to gain from books any knowledge of this description, or of the nature of the ground, and manure required for it.

July 9, 1833 – Rode to Hihi's Pa, in company with Messrs. Clarke, Brown, and Fairburn. Pomare was busily engaged in completing the line of potatoes which were brought out for the feast. He, with some others of distinction, did not take any notice of us for some time: at length they came forward, and were very civil, and handed out some baskets of potatoes and a pig. In the afternoon, went out to see the ploughers, two parties – a pleasing sight, the first I had witnessed in the land. I tried my hand, and found it more easy than I had anticipated. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

We have erected our permanent dwelling-houses, and other out-buildings, at Waimate; and are removed into them, although in an unfinished state. We intend finishing them as we may have an opportunity. Twenty acres of land have been cleared, fenced, and brought into a state of cultivation, on a spot where, but little more than two years ago, fern-tops and native pine were only to be seen. Twenty-five young men and women, with their interesting little families (about twenty infant children), have settled with us, and erected little cottages, some of which are weather-boarded. We have attached a piece of land to them, sufficiently large to grow potatoes for the maintenance of their families. More than four months' provision for our Natives was raised in the Settlement; and we hope soon to be independent of Port Jackson for our supplies of flour, and of the Natives for our supply of native food. The Natives living with us have been employed in furthering the object of the Mission, in assisting in the Schools, and in visiting the neighbouring tribes to impart religious instruction: others have been employed in carpentry, sawing timber, assisting in making agricultural implements, and in agriculture; and some have rendered us important services in charge of our horses. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

You will learn, from our Quarterly Reports, that I have found it absolutely necessary to give Mr. Davis every possible support in his great and arduous duty, as well as to attend to the superintendence

of the work connected with the erection of a water-mill, and of other works necessary for our large establishment.

Ploughs, carts, harrows, &c. have not only, for the first time, had a portion of my time in making; but I have, for the first time in my life, had the pleasure of using them. The work of the water-mill is in a forward state, and we are just commencing the mill-house &c. I fear we shall not be able to get the mill at work before next November. You are aware that we have, in connexion with the Waimate Station, a good deal of travelling on horseback, in visiting the Natives at the distance of twenty or thirty miles; and that travelling on horseback is attended with considerable danger, owing to the number of pigs rushing across the path just under the horse's feet. The paths are so very narrow, and the fern on each side so high, that it is impossible for the animal to see them at a distance; and if ever so docile, the rider is in danger of being thrown. Having been witness to two or three accidents in New Zealand, from falls from horses, I beg leave to suggest to you sending us a few pairs of safety stirrups.

You will hear from Mr. Davis the progress we are making in the farming department. Our time will be a good deal occupied this summer in erecting a water-mill. The expense to the Society will scarcely be felt, as the greater part will be native labour; and it will, eventually, be a great saving to the Society, as well as a great comfort for the Natives, who will be able to get their Indian-corn ground as food for their poor children; who, for want of proper food, from the time when they are weaned till they are two or three years old, are very great sufferers. I believe that two-thirds of the children in New Zealand die for want of proper nourishment for them after weaning from the breast. Many a poor mother have I visited, who has actually brought herself to a premature grave by suckling; and when we have told them that they should wean their children, they reply, "We have no food for our poor child: should it die?" By the erection of a mill, the poorest family about us will be able to procure nourishing food for their children: we gladly, therefore, undertake the erection of a mill, believing that it will add much to their comfort. – – - [Mr. G. Clarke.

You may, perhaps, give us some credit for nerve here; and, most truly, at times we need it, and the better reliance too; but we have seasons, and, lately, lengthened ones, of easy rest from any agitative excitement, although our life is a round of busy doings altogether unaccountable, and of circumstances for which we can never stand prepared. Indeed I am, as all others are, often quite at a loss to know, when night comes, how the day has gone. I rise at break of day; and as our days are now lengthening, we generally breakfast by seven, and next week purpose to begin regularly at half-past six; and as I am seldom in bed before eleven, you will perceive, occupied as one is, in some way or other, from the time of rising to retiring to rest, that we are not likely to rust out in New Zealand. But never mind! the Lord of our vineyard is smiling upon our labours. – – - [Mr. T. Chapman.

Baneful Introduction of Ardent Spirits into New Zealand.

It is deeply distressing, and even appalling to the Christian Mind, to reflect upon the subject now brought before our Readers. No sooner have the messengers of peace and holiness obtained settled habitations in this interesting land, than the children of riot and intemperance set up their banners. It is the war of Satan against Christ. As to which will ultimately prevail, there is no doubt; but in the mean time it is most affecting to contemplate the scandals, sins, and miseries which may, or rather must, attend in the train of this flagitious practice – the intemperate use of ardent spirits.

How far Legislation should act, in reference to this evil, as a powerful and commanding auxiliary to Religion, Public Decency, and Humanity, is a noble problem, now, almost for the first time, largely to be discussed by the British Nation. We feel it a bounden duty to contribute to the general mass of information the following brief facts, which cannot fail to excite in Christian Minds the earnest prayer, that, by every wise and effectual method, this poisonous stream, which threat-

ens to overflow New Zealand, may be arrested as quickly as possible.

The poor unhappy Natives connected with that dreadful place, Kororarika, have lately taken to drink ardent spirits, which they are distributing about the country as much as they can. The effects are very manifest; and the sin for which those will have to answer who first introduced them, and forced them upon the Natives, is very great. An attempt has been made to introduce spirits among the Natives in the Mission Settlements; but it came to our ears, and has failed. There cannot be any thing done but we are sure to hear of it. It requires, however, the utmost vigilance and care on our part, and, I have no doubt, will cause us much distress. – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

Aug. 5, 1832: Sunday – After Service, went to Kororarika: a good assembly. While Rawiri was occupied in prayer with the Natives, Gray, the blacksmith, who two years since made great profession of Religion, was carried through the midst, insensible from intoxication. There were also many drunken sailors, and some few Natives, among whom was Hakiro, Tareha's son. The Natives whom we met behaved very orderly, and paid a good deal of attention.

Dec. 4 – Assisting Mr. Brown in his house. Had conversation with Tohitapu upon the affairs of the Southward. Went to the Toretore, to see a sick Englishman, who had expressed a desire to see me: could not remain long with him, as it was late: promised to see him tomorrow. The poor fellow appeared in a sad state, both of body and mind. Gave a word to those around. It might almost be said, that he was lying in a den of thieves: it was a pot-house, and a place of resort for characters of the worst description – of drunkards and gamblers.

Dec. 30: Sunday – No strangers at Church. In the afternoon, went to Kororarika, and met a pleasing and attentive congregation. They were engaged at School, on landing. The singing was some of the best which I ever heard in the land. Before the conclusion of the Service, we were disturbed by some Native Youths, who were intoxicated, and were boxing in true English style. The principal persons were, a son of Warerahi, and one of Rewa's. After they were parted, which was effected with difficulty, they fell upon every one they met, like two young bulls, upsetting old and young. This is a new acquisition, and will, ere long, prove destructive to many. Rum is now imported in large quantities, and several of the Chiefs are acquiring a relish for it; but notwithstanding the great opposition made by the enemy of Truth, there are inquirers after the way to Zion. This cheers our spirits, and bears us up.

April 28, 1833: Sunday – This morning administered the Sacrament to the Natives: but five Communicants. After dinner, went to Kororarika: about 40 were in attendance. There were numbers of Europeans on the beach, indulging themselves in the grog-shops, which are now becoming general. Flags of various colours were displayed, bidding welcome to all who would enter therein. The Natives referred to them as the "ware karakia" of Satan, where his followers assembled to do him honour. Passed through the Pa, which was a scene of confusion;. but did not observe any drunken men. A man named Field, who had been engaged to make some furniture, was nearly drowned – a poor miserable wretch, and a drunken professor of Religion. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

Feb. 3: Sunday – Went over to Kororarika with Mr. Brown, after Morning Service. Having been told by Titore and Tareha that they did not wish to have any "karakia" at their places; that they wished the place to remain for the Devil; and that if any of the Natives wished to have prayers, they might go to Paihia or Waimate; we agreed to land opposite to Rewa's abode. The only objection to this place is, that immediately joining it is a public house kept by an Englishman, at which there are generally twenty, or thirty drunken sailors rolling about. At this place, however, we were welcome; and Rewa told us that he had no objection to let the Natives assemble within his fence; but that, at the same time, he did not wish to act in opposition to the other Chiefs. – – - [Rev. W. Williams.

Sept. 29: Sunday – In the afternoon, went over to Kororarika. Grandees attended Service. A number of sailors were staggering about, to the amusement and ridicule of the Natives. But, I lament to say, this people are acquiring a relish for this great evil, I had a long conversation with Moka, whose heart is as hard as a stone. In the evening, we heard that an English Sailor had been stabbed by an American, both intoxicated. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

New Zealand.

New Zealand

The very copious communications received from this important portion of the Australasia Mission are not as yet exhausted. We purpose however, for the present, closing them in this Number; expecting, at a future opportunity, to give a fresh series of communications, in reference both to the old and the newly-forming Stations.

The Rev. W. Williams and the Rev. W. Yate having been desired to make a visit to the Southward – partly for the purpose of returning to the East Cape eleven Natives, who hud been forcibly carried away from thence eight months before, and turned on shore at the Bay of Islands, and partly also to reconnoitre new Missionary Stations at the South – set sail in that direction at the close of 1833.

Making the Journal of Mr. W. Williams the ground-work of the following Report, we shall also interweave some of the particulars in Mr. Yate's communications.

Departure of Messrs W. Williams and Yate, Southward.

Dec. 19, 1833 – We received on board, from Paihia, a cargo of timber, consisting of the frame of a dwelling-house, which has been prepared by Mr. Fairburn; together with various goods for the new Station at the River Thames, to which Mr. and Mrs. Preece and Mr. Morgan are passengers. We have, also, upward of forty Natives, passengers to different places. Mr. Fairburn and Mr. Wilson left Paihia about two hours before us, in a large boat, with the intention of meeting us in the Thames, and returning to the Bay, while we proceed to the East Cape.

Dec. 22: Sunday – Made but little progress during the night. In the morning, we found ourselves between Morotiri, one of the Hen and Chickens, and Hauturu, a small island within the barrier. These islands are only remarkable as being the course by which the Bay of Islanders have so often passed, in their destructive wars against the Natives, south of the Thames. They have also witnessed many murderous exploits of the Ngapuhi, who, falling in with small fishing-parties here, have invariably cut them off, or taken them as slaves. We held two Services on deck with the Natives, and one for ourselves in the cabin.

Dec. 23 – Off Waiheke this morning, with a pleasant breeze carrying us gently up the Thames. In the course of the morning we saw two fishing-canoes, which pulled toward us; and from them we purchased a large quantity of fish. We attempted to enter the narrow part of the river; but the vessel grounding, we were obliged to bring up.

Arrival in the Thames – Remarks on the new Missionary Stations.

Dec. 25 – Mr. Yate and myself left the vessel this morning at five o'clock. The River Thames is perhaps the largest in this island. Its banks are occupied by four principal tribes: the Ngatipaoa, who live on the banks of the river nearest the sea, is the most powerful. The son of the principal Chief has been living at Paihia some months, and we expected the Settlement would have been formed in this district; but, upon examination, we find that the larger body of Natives are beyond them. The next tribe live principally at Kaweranga and Kopu, fifteen miles farther up the river, where it suddenly narrows from fifteen miles to about three-quarters of a mile. Ten miles farther up reside the Ngatimaru, among whom the Mission Settlement is about to be formed. About twenty miles higher up live the Ngatitamatera. Proceeding direct from the vessel to the shore, we landed at Tararu, one of the residences of the Ngatipaoa. This little village is in a romantic situation, on a small tract of land at the water's edge, having a fine range of mountains in the back-ground, covered with every variety of foliage, while several deep ravines contribute to make the scenery truly sublime. The Chief Hauahauru received us with much civility. We spoke to about seventy Natives; and after taking breakfast, we proceeded onward. The banks of the river presented to our view several little villages, at which we were not able to call, owing to the state of the tide. The country, for many miles, is flat on either side, rising but a few feet above the level of the bed of the river. The land appears to be exceedingly rich, and, on one side, is clothed with a dense forest of the white pine, called Kahikatea. A little before dusk, we arrived at Puriri, the principal residence of the Ngatimaru. The spot selected for a Station is on an

extensive plain of very excellent land, and possesses many advantages as an abode for Missionaries. There is a goodly number of Natives living on the spot; the place is central, as far as regards the other tribes of the Thames; and is only two days' journey from Tauranga. We were much pleased with the first appearance of the Natives. The men were, many of them, busily employed upon the houses for the Missionaries. There are three in a state of forwardness, and they are by far the best pieces of native workmanship I have seen in the land.

Assembling of the Natives to Prayer on Christmas Day.

After our tents were pitched, and our repast ended, we called the Natives together. They were, it seemed, expecting to be assembled; and as soon as the hymn was given out, there was a scene presented more striking than I have yet witnessed. It was a beautiful evening, and the clear light of the moon was sufficient to enable us to read without the help of a candle. The utmost attention seemed to pervade the whole assembly, amounting to about a hundred; and every voice among the motley group seemed to join in concert, as though they had long been accustomed to this Service. Indeed, they had been accustomed to it, in their way; for they have had residing with them two Natives, who have been living, for a time, one at Paihia, and the other at E'O'keanga. The recollection, too, that this was the celebration of the natal day of our Blessed Saviour added much to the solemnity of the occasion. We read, that in the morning of this day the multitude of the Heavenly Host appeared in concert with the Angels, praising God, and saying, Glory to God in the highest, on earth peace, good-will toward men, – and sure I am, that the scene of this evening was one which was witnessed with delight by the same blessed company, and by our glorified Saviour himself.

Mr. Yate describes more fully the scene of this truly Christian Festival, He states –

I spent this day in such a way, as I never expected to spend an anniversary of the Birth of Christ. At five o'clock in the morning, Mr. Williams and I left the ship, and proceeded in our boat to visit the various Settlements, while the vessel was being unladen. After three hours' pull, we landed on the beach at Tararu, a residence of part of the tribe, Ngati-paua. We there prepared, and, with much relish, partook our breakfast; and had a long conversation with the Natives, about seventy of whom were present. Hauahauru, the Chief of the tribe, was there, with several people who were on a visit to him from a distance. Speaking to the Natives of our first parents, and telling them that we all proceed from one common stock, and ought, consequently, to love and not to destroy one another, they said, "That is not true: if one had been the parent of us all, every one would speak the same language: we should all be dressed alike, and should resemble each other, as children of the same family, whose skins are all the same colour, not one white and the other black; besides which, we should all tattoo ourselves." I told them the reason of the difference in language; and spoke to them of the state of the Ancient Britons, our ancestors, who, before the introduction of the Gospel, were clothed no better than they now are; that they tattooed their bodies; and were not less cruel in their conduct toward each other than the tribes of New Zealand; but that, when the Gospel was preached and believed, all was set right: they became changed in their very nature: industry took the place of idleness; kindness, of cruelty; peace, of continual war; and happiness, of misery: and that they soon found that godliness is indeed profitable, having promise of the life that now is, as well as of that which is to come. They seemed pleased with my answer. Mr. Williams and I afterward told them still more of the unsearchable riches of Christ. We took our leave, and, proceeding at a very slow rate up the river, the tide being against us, we arrived at Kopu, the fortification of the Ngatiwanaunga. Here were about fifty Natives, all of whom listened to our Message with apparent indifference. They had just drawn their nets, and were preparing to dry in the sun the fish which they had taken. Here we found four Europeans residing, who appeared more decent in their habits and general conduct than most of their class in the land; consequently, we went to their house, and spent a few minutes with them. When the tide answered, we again took to our boat, and proceeded to the Puriri, the place selected for the new Station on the Thames. It is a residence of the tribe Ngatimaru, and is situated

on a plain, or rather valley, of the largest extent of any which I have hitherto seen in this part. Here were about 150 Natives, all of whom received us very kindly. They have been hard at work since the deputation of Missionaries left them, erecting houses for the reception of those who may be appointed to the Station. I was much pleased with this, as it is a token that they really wish some of our number to go and reside among them. There was one circumstance which we noticed here of a very pleasing nature; it was this, that at prayers, when we began to sing, many of the Natives joined in with us, not only knowing the hymn, but also the tune. Upon inquiry, I found that they had been instructed by one of the boys from our School, who had been redeemed from slavery, and had returned to his friends. Thus the leaven spreads, unseen, unknown, and unexpectedly cheers our hearts when it is made manifest. – At night, the musquitoes were so excessively troublesome in my tent, that I found, weary as I was, that it was utterly impossible to sleep. I therefore called up the boys, and made them damp a little fern, put a lighted stick in the middle of it, and place it in the tent. The plan succeeded; and those who did not make an immediate retreat were suffocated with smoke.

Resuming the Journal of Mr. W. Williams, the account proceeds –

Dec. 26 – At sun-rise this morning, left Puriri, and proceeded up the river till we met with Rohu, the Chief of the Ngatitamatera. This man was very busily employed, for some time after our arrival, in tattooing a youth, who was lying before him on the ground. The lad went through the operation with great patience, being well satisfied, no doubt, that this disfigurement of his face would add much to his personal beauty. Rohu is a young man of pleasing countenance: he is nearly related to one of the Chiefs of Tauranga; but last summer he joined Titore, from the Bay of Islands, against that tribe. As soon as the operation was completed, he came up to me, and I had conversation with him for about three hours. He joins in the general expression of all the Chiefs, that now the Missionaries were come to live among them, they will attend to what they say. As soon as the tide favoured us, we proceeded up the river, on the way to Tauranga, until we were about twenty miles above Puriri. This is the first river I have yet seen in the land: there is nothing in the Bay of Islands which deserves the name. The number of Natives we have as yet seen is small; but we may form some idea of the actual state of the population, by the census the Natives give, in which we rarely find them yield to exaggeration. For instance, the Ngatiwanaunga tribe is said to number 400 fighting men: we have seen, as yet, only about 100. Of the Ngatitamatera we have perhaps seen 60 men: the tribe numbers 400. Of the Ngatimaru we have seen perhaps 50: they number 200. The Ngatipaoa is reckoned at 550, of which number we have seen about 50. The whole number of men, therefore, is about 1600: and this, multiplied by 3, will perhaps give the total, including women and children.

Dec. 27 – Parted from Mr. Yate this morning, and set out for Tauranga. Travelled all day over a good road, which, with a little labour, may be traversed on horseback. Brought up, at night, in a vast plain, at a short distance from the Bay of Plenty.

Dec. 28 – Set out at five o'clock this morning; and at nine, reached the Bay of Plenty, at Waihi. A walk of about an hour and a half along the beach, brought us to Katikati, which is one of the entrances to Tauranga. We kindled a fire on the top of the hills, as a signal to the people at Tauranga, to send a canoe to take us across; but, as we descended the hill, we had the mortification of seeing three canoes under sail from Katikati toward Tauranga. We supposed they took alarm at our fire, and thought that an enemy was at hand. At noon, rain came on; and as our fire would not now be visible at Tauranga, we pitched our tents, in the expectation of spending the Sabbath by ourselves.

Dec. 29: Sunday – Spent the day at Katikati. We had a signal-fire made in the morning, intending, if a canoe came, to go over to Tauranga, to speak with the Natives, and to return in the evening. The signal, however, was not noticed, and we held our Service by ourselves.

Dec. 30 – At three o'clock this morning we took our departure from Katikati, by a different road; and having no canoe, we crossed a shoal, at low water, walking through the mud about three miles. We found this road nearer; and much of it may be travelled on horseback. At six o'clock we reached the

inner part of the Thames, and pitched our tent for the night.

Dec. 31, 1833 – We finished our walk this morning by eleven o'clock, when we arrived at the place at which we left the boat; and soon after embarked for Puriri, in a canoe. At Puriri I found Messrs. Fairburn, Morgan, and Wilson, and Mr. and Mrs. Preece. The goods are all landed, and the place at present is in the utmost confusion. Of the three raupo (rush) houses, one, with the roof half made, is occupied by Mr. and Mrs. Preece; in the second, a Native Young Man and his wife, who are domestics to Mr. and Mrs. Preece, take up their abode; in the third, Mr. Morgan sleeps; the fourth is occupied by cocks, hens, ducks, and rabbits. The middle of the dwelling is filled with boxes and furniture, and only wants a few small pigs to complete the picture. Out of doors, on one side, are ranged three tents, occupied by Messrs. Fairburn, Wilson, and myself; Mr. Preece's Natives occupy a fourth; while the crew of Mr. Fairburn's boat make a house with the sails of the boat. In the midst of this confusion, the Natives, who are numerous, are very civil, and occasion no annoyance.

After breakfast, I accompanied Mr. Fairburn up the valley, over the land which it is proposed to attach to the Station. There is abundance of land of the best quality, well watered and wooded; while the many scattered dwellings on every side plainly show that there is, even on this spot, an ample field for usefulness. I had purposed proceeding down to the vessel this morning; but a foul wind, accompanied with rain, obliged me to suspend my movements. In the evening, I spoke to a congregation of about 100, in one of the new dwellings.

Remarks on the Geographical and other Advantages of the New Station.

Jan. 2, 1834 – Had a long conversation this morning with a Chief of Waikato, respecting the number of Natives in that district; and, enumerating the different tribes, according to the rivers and branches of rivers on which they live, I make the number to amount to 6000 fighting-men; which, I believe, is nearly as many Natives as are found in connexion with all the existing Settlements from the North Cape and E'O'keanga to the Bay of Islands and the Thames. This account agrees with what we have always heard from the Natives, and is also confirmed by the Europeans who have lived in that district for the purpose of purchasing flax. From information I received from the mate of the "Fortitude," who has lived some time at Waikato, I imagine, that on the Waikato river is a most suitable situation for a Missionary Station. There are five rivers on the western coast, all belonging to the district of Waikato; viz. Mokau, Kawia, Wangaroa, Waikato, and Manukau. Of these, Waikato is the principal, and upon its banks is the place of general rendezvous for the other tribes. There is no doubt but that the Natives in that direction are equally desirous with the others to welcome Missionaries among them. Indeed, there are many of the Chiefs who have declared their wishes on the subject, and have expressed their wonder that the Missionaries should all be confined to the Ngapuhi tribe. As soon as the tide favoured us, I left Puriri, with Mr. Fairburn and Mr. Wilson, who are proceeding direct to the Bay of Islands. We soon arrived at the vessel; when, finding that she was not quite ready for sea, I went on shore, and pitched my tent at Kopu.

I proceeded from thence, a distance of five miles, to Kaweranga, the residence of Horeta, passing, in my way, the Totara, which I have already mentioned. There I saw human bones still lying by the side of the ovens – the remains of the horrid feast of the Ngapuhi. Horeta is a venerable Chief, and is the principal man of the tribe Ngatiwanaunga. He expressed some disappointment because the Missionaries are not to reside close to him; but he seemed to understand that their labours are not to be confined to the spot on which they reside.

After a variety of excursions and observations at this place, among which we remark with pleasure the mention of a School set up at Puriri, "where 36 females and 60 males attended, from the ages of four to sixty," Mr. W. Williams proceeds as follows: –

Jan. 6 – Left Puriri at four o'clock this morning, and returned to the vessel. A little after noon we weighed anchor, having, for the first time during the last five days, a fair wind. There is much difficulty in getting out of this place, owing to the narrowness of the channel, which has extensive shoals on both sides. We cleared them in safety; and cast anchor some miles down, ready to go to sea at daylight to-morrow.

Jan. 7, 1834 – Set sail at daylight, with a strong breeze from S. W. The Frith of the Thames has a great diversity of scenery; and, as it draws nearer to the open sea, there are many islands, some of them of considerable extent, and fertile. One of them is particularly remarkable, of which we had only a distant view: it is a spent volcano, the combustible matter of which has been, no doubt, many years consumed. It is now one mass of black lava, from the sea-side to the summit, which rises to a considerable height. During the day the wind increased to a gale; but being fair, was so much in our favour.

Jan. 8 – We passed a most unpleasant and sleepless night, from the rolling of the vessel; but we had the satisfaction of finding ourselves near the place of our destination at an early hour, having sailed nearly ten knots an hour all the way from Cape Colville. Before noon, we came to an anchor in Hicks's Bay, the native name of which is Warekahika. We sent all our Natives below, with the exception of two Chiefs, lest the people in the canoes should be alarmed at our numbers; and as soon as the canoes were alongside, a Chief from the East Cape recognised two of his own brothers. It was not long before the whole party was on board, and joy was marked in the countenances of all: this, however, soon gave place to copious floods of tears, which, with the New Zealander, is always the most sincere token of affection. We learnt that the party on shore is assembled for war; and is only waiting the arrival of Chiefs further south, to go and attack their enemies living to the westward; but in some of the speeches made on deck, they said they should perhaps give up the expedition, if the Missionaries told them to do so. Mr. Yate and myself now prepared for going on shore, and were conducted by the two canoes. We had some difficulty in landing, and were nearly upset in the surf. As soon as our party landed, about 300 Natives made their appearance from behind the bushes, to welcome us. They were the wildest set I have yet seen in the land; and gathered around us, to see a sight which was entirely new to them. They were, however, exceedingly civil, and did not attempt to press upon us. The party which has been living at Paihia soon began to give the news to their relatives, and to tell them some of the customs of the Missionaries, carefully distinguishing us from the Europeans they have hitherto had to do with. We had an interesting assembly at Prayers in the evening, when nearly all were present. They used the same expressions as the people at the Thames: "Give us Missionaries to instruct us, and we will leave off our wars. We like what you tell us; but when you are gone, we shall have no one to teach us."

Jan. 9 – Passed a most luxurious night on a bed made with the tender branches of trees. We struck our tents as early as possible; and having again spoken to the Natives, we proceeded on our way to Waiapu, over land, leaving the vessel to follow us. After a tedious walk, which continued till near the close of the day, we arrived at the first Pa at Waiapu. This first village lies in an extensive valley, is large, well fortified in the native style, and, according to their computation, musters 560 fighting men. Many Natives were absent; but in the evening we had upward of 500 men, women, and children, at Prayers, the largest assembly I have yet spoken to in the land. There were many old men in the party, who exercise every kind of priestcraft; but they showed no disposition to cavil, nor any symptom of fear lest their craft should be endangered; on the contrary, they seemed ready to listen to any new thing which might be told them.

Jan. 10 – Passed a good night on a bed of fern, a yard thick; and, after breakfast, set out to visit the Pa, which is situated some distance up the valley. Our companions pointed out several Pas which were taken by the Ngapuhi some years ago, when numbers were killed, and very many taken away as slaves: the present inhabitants consist, principally, of those who escaped to the woods. That desolating war, so far as I can learn, was undertaken without any previous aggression on the part of this people, but solely for the purpose of making slaves. This valley extends many miles, having, at the head of it, two lofty mountains, from which the river takes its rise. The second Pa is about ten miles distant from the outer Pa, and musters, when the Natives are all at home, 2600 fighting men. A great number had gone into different quarters; but, on assembling those who were at home, from 800 to 1000 were present, in which number were at least 400 young children. The village is much larger than any I have yet seen, and is well situated in the midst of extensive

cultivations. Waiapu, as a place for a Missionary Station, exceeds any I have as yet witnessed in the land. The population is not only more numerous than in the Bay of Islands, but the two principal villages are at a convenient distance for being visited in one day.

Jan. 11, 1834 – I took a walk this morning in a different direction from yesterday, and found very extensive cultivation, and a large quantity of good land. From a conviction that we must soon have a Settlement in this quarter, I was induced to pay more particular attention to the peculiarities of the place. Returning to the tent, I got into conversation with a fine old Chief, who, about fifteen years ago, was taken prisoner to the Bay of Islands, but was returned again to this place by the conquering party. He seems to be well versed in all the native superstitions, and has been talking much about the forefathers of the New Zealanders. He has been telling our lads that he can make the thunder, and that he will produce it this evening. He is now sitting at the tent door, wishing me to talk with him about the creation of the world, and the formation of the first man, according to our views. After hearing the old man's history of the New-Zealand antiquities, I gave him, in return, a particular account of the Creation, the Fall, the Flood, and the Confusion of Tongues. He repeatedly observed, that our account was the straight-forward one.

First Celebration of the Lord's Day, at a large newly-visited Village.

Jan. 12: Sunday – This is the first Sabbath which has been observed at Waiapu since the creation of the world; but it has been observed, I believe, as strictly as in any Christian country in Europe. I heard many speaking of it yesterday: they seemed to know that they were not to work, and that their food ought to be gathered beforehand. At about ten o'clock, we rang our bell, and soon had a goodly number of people together – upwards of five hundred. Among them were many hoary heads; but their long familiarity with the superstitions of their forefathers did not seem to make them indifferent to the preparations making for the worship of Jehovah. We had our congregation more conveniently arranged this morning, forming them into an oval, the middle of which was occupied by our party. Mr. Yate read the greater part of the Liturgy, and I then addressed them. Rukuata had taken pains to tell them of our custom onthese occasions, and of the manner in which we spend the day; that, after our Morning Service, the men and boys assembled for School; that the females are instructed by our Wives; and that a Service is held in the evening, similar to that in the morning. After partaking of a little refreshment, the dogs of the Natives having, during the night, devoured the principal part of what we had prepared for this day's provision, I set out for Wakuwitira. I found that a Native who went with me on the 10th had attached himself to my party. He is a man of most forbidding appearance; but in conversation he is much improved. Turning round to me on the road, he observed, that he was in quest of something for himself; and pointing to his own breast, and then to mine, he said that he wished to hear more of what I had to say. The conversation among the Natives, during the greater part of the way, turned upon the new doctrines which were now laid before them. My friend remarked to another, that their god is a killing god, but that ours is a saving God; and he then asked, why there cannot be a Missionary at each of the two principal Stations to instruct the people. – And why can there not? Let the Christian Public answer this poor savage! When we arrived at Wakuwitira, we were told that all the people were gone away: about seven hundred, however, old and young, came together. And here, again, I was asked whether Missionaries would not come and live here. A piece of good advice was given by one of my companions, just before I spoke to the people, which was a little amusing. "Sit quietly," said he, "and do not speak a word: if your children cry, feed them at the breast; and if that does not quiet them, walk away a short distance, and return again when they are still." I had no tent with me, but passed the night in the verandah of a large native house, where I slept comfortably.

Concerning the celebration of this Sabbath, we select, also, the following few particulars from Mr. Yate's account.

The whole village came together, and, with smiling faces, sat down, old and young, high and low, rich and poor, bond and free, indiscriminately, to hear the words of eternal life. We sang two hymns: I read the Liturgy, and Mr.

Williams delivered a short Address. The people were arranged in a square; and, for so very large a number, behaved remarkably well. They presented a most grotesque and savage appearance. Some were perched on the tops of houses; others stretched at full length on the ground: some, again, were squatted with a child upon each knee; and others with one or more children at the back; but all attentive to what was passing. The old men were dressed in their best, and the young ones, for the most part, were naked. Some had their beards plastered with red ochre and oil; others, with blue clay, and a deep mark of red over each eyebrow; which, together with the tattooing, gave them the most ferocious aspect that can well be conceived, and would do well for some of the pictures of Apollyon, in the older editions of Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress. After Service, all quietly returned to their various squares in the Pa. Mr. Williams and I partook of a few boiled potatoes for dinner, as the dogs had run away with our other food during the night. In the afternoon, all the Natives again assembled in the square in which our tents are pitched; and I and my Boys instructed them for two hours in the Catechisms. I then went round, and held some familiar conversations with the Natives at their houses; and concluded the day with another full Service. They seem to understand pretty well that this is the Lord's Day. Though crowded yesterday and the day before with people, anxious to barter their little curiosities for our more useful or more ornamental articles, not one this day made his appearance for the purpose of traffic, or even proposed such a thing; neither did they engage in any kind of labour or pastime. Scarcely any other sound was heard than that of the fern-pounder, who was preparing this species of food; and which was, in fact, a work of necessity, as they had nothing else to eat. I have no intention of saying, that from any principle of Religion they observed this sacred day, but merely because they had heard from their friends that we observe it, and that wherever we go we request and require the people of the place in some measure to observe it also. "Well," said one very old man, when the Services of the day were concluded, "Well, we shall never forget to sit still every seventh day. I will count the nights, and remind the tribes when the sacred day comes round." Thus may we expect that, for a time at least after our departure, a remembrance will be kept up of what we have here said and done; and though it should pass away as the morning cloud or early dew, it will eventually turn out to the glory of God, if not to the everlasting welfare of the souls of men. Late in the evening, a number of Natives came to learn to sing a hymn at my tent door; and the old men, six in number, who act as priests, and are well versed in all the superstitions of the country, came to me, and said, "At last, the words that are straight, and the thoughts that are right about God, the Creation, Sin, Salvation, Man, the Devil, Heaven and Hell, are come to us. You and Parata (that is, W. Williams) must either come yourselves and dwell among us, or send us Missionaries, that we may never forget your sayings, nor turn again to our false thoughts. Till you can come yourselves, or send us others, leave us some of your understanding Boys, that they may teach us; and we will learn from them." These expressions were, to me, very encouraging; as I have no doubt that the people are sincere in their desires to obtain knowledge, though more desirous of having Missionaries to dwell among them.

In resuming Mr. W. Williams's Journal, an account is given of their

Various Intercourse with the Natives on their return homeward.

Jan. 13, 1834 – Set out, on my return, a little before six o'clock this morning; and before sun-set, we were all safely on board, thankful that we had been so far favoured in our course. My Sunday companion, walking with me to the boat, with a seeming wish to profit by the instruction he had received, asked me to repeat to him the prayer which I had recommended him to make use of.

Jan. 14 – Passed by Tokomaru and Uaua, before sun-set. At Tokomaru, the Natives say there are 860 men; and at Uaua, 680.

Jan. 15 – Passed Turanga in the evening, where there is a population, it is said, of 1900 men; and this morning anchored at the Mahia. On our approach to this place, our Natives again pointed out the scenes of the ravages committed by the Ngapuhi. This, I believe, is the farthest extent to which they have travelled in their wars, being a distance of 420 miles from the Bay of Islands. But

the day, I trust, is now arrived, when wars and rumours of wars shall cease in New Zealand.

The appearance of the Mahia is very uninviting; the place at which we are staying being by the sea-side, at the foot of a barren hill, wholly destitute of timber. We did not find so many Natives as we expected. The Chief of the place is Wera, of the Ngapuhi: he came to this place, about fifteen years ago, with a few of his own people; and is now looked up to as Chief, by the conquered party. After the usual forms of salutation were past, the Chiefs had a very long speechifying. A near relative to Wera, who came with us in the vessel, wishing to persuade the old man to return to the Bay of Islands, the Natives had a long crying, in which more persons were concerned than I ever recollect to have seen on such occasions. With some difficulty we collected most of the people together, but not without much confusion. At length, however, they became quiet, and listened attentively. They wished us much to stay a few days, saying, that they could not remember if they heard only once; and pressed us much to send Missionaries to go and live with them.

Jan. 16, 1834 – During the night there was an incessant din and bustle around us; Natives talking, singing, and crying in different groups, so that we had little rest. Soon after sun-rise, another party, of about 100 men, made their appearance from the neighbourhood. They came to see two of the Chiefs whom we brought in the vessel; and after the speeches were over, they, too, felt it necessary to cry with their relations. I was much amused to see how soon most of them were satisfied; one little gash on the forehead, to bring out a drop of blood, was sufficient. In the confusion which prevailed, it was impossible to obtain a quiet hearing from the whole: Mr. Yate and myself, therefore, each got a party together, and gave them a general outline of our Message. I found some of them, particularly a party which comes many miles from the southward, very willing to listen, and desirous of protracting the conversation.

Jan. 18 – Foul wind. We have not proceeded more than forty miles from the Mahia. We are now becoming anxious to see our friends in the Bay of Islands.

Jan. 19: Sunday – At length a favourable breeze has been granted, and we are briskly sailing over the foaming surges.

Jan. 22 – Anchored off Paihia.

We here give a few miscellaneous articles, which were necessarily omitted in our last Number. What man is, in his native state, and without the light of the Gospel, is clearly seen, the more we become acquainted with the habits of Heathen countries. The following extracts will illustrate this view, from an exhibition of the

Superstitious and cruel Practices of the Natives.

July 14, 1833: Sunday – After Service, learnt that our old friend, Tohitapu, was just dead. Went to see the assembled party: all sitting in silence, excepting a few, who were preparing to "tangi:" – a sad spectacle! without God, and without hope. The poor old man had been removed, and laid in state, with his head decorated, as in former days, with feathers, &c. They inquired, if they might not perform their usual ceremonies today, in crying and cutting. We offered a few words; and told them they were no strangers to our wishes, and that we could not permit any uproar in the Settlement. However, as soon as we had retired, they commenced firing, which was soon stopt by taking away their artillery. They concluded to take the corpse to Wangai, beyond the reach of the castle. Gave a word to all. Weather exceedingly cold.

July 15 – Much firing throughout the night. About eight o'clock, Marupo, and the Maloraurau, came, firing. Finding that the Tupapaku was removed, and on the way up the river, they followed; and at length brought it back, and passed on to Waitangi, on the opposite side of the river. There was, for some time, a prospect of disturbance; but it passed off quietly. Drew up poor Tohi's canoes, as they had been given to us many months since; and the slaves were brought into the Settlement, to preserve them from violence. The love and affection of this people are very manifest, as on the present occasion. While this poor man was yet alive, none came to see him, to administer to his wants; but now he is dead, they are even fighting for his body, and all that appertains to him. Learnt that many had given it as their opinion that the old man ought not to have been removed from this place, as he had re-

sided so long with us. In the evening, Pumuka and others came. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

July 30, 1833 – This morning I observed four Natives lamenting the decease of Tohitapu, a Chief of considerable note: the sight was truly heathenish. One of the party, an old woman, who was besmeared with blood wherever her person was uncovered, presented a dreadful spectacle to a Christian eye, and strongly illustrated to my mind those passages of the Old Testament which allude to the idolatrous practice of cutting for the dead, which occasionally existed among the Jews. As the blood flowed from the wounds, the sight of which appeared to augment her lamentation, she wiped it off with a mat, and then made fresh incisions. In this manner they continued to mourn for about three hours, during which period their cries were truly those of men without hope. – – - [Mr. J. A. Wilson,

Temorenga has been to see me to day. Poor old man! I long much after him; but he has much to learn. O that the Lord would save his immortal soul! He told me that some of the people of Taiamai had set apart a day as a Sunday (if I may use the term), in which to worship the god Papahurihia; and that some of them had endeavoured to persuade him to join them; but he said he told them that he had taken the garment of God (an expression I never heard before), and would have nothing to do with them. "Yes," said the old Chief to me, "I know it to be a false way. I once detected the god in the following manner. Having had the top of a spear broken off in my temple, and left just over my eye, I found it very painful. One night, the god came, whistling, saying that he would take it out for me, if I thought proper. I told him to do so; and the next morning I found the top of a spear upon my house, which the god said was that which he had taken out of my head. But even then, I could not believe him; and some time after, the top of the spear, which I had in my head, worked out of its own accord. Besides, I knew it to be a deception, because the spear with which I was speared was of a different timber to that produced by the god." – – - [Mr. R. Davis.

June 30: Sunday – After Service, went to Kororarika; but few were disposed to draw near, though a considerable number were here. Inquired into the cause of their keeping aloof. They replied, that they were contemplating another expedition to the Southward, to Tauranga, in consequence of the death of Kuri, the Chief who was killed by the Nateawa. I told them that Satan was a hard master. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

Dec. 4, 1832 – To-day, by redeeming a slave-girl, who has been living with us, her life was preserved in a very remarkable manner. It appears that she was the slave wife of a Waimate Chief, who, having heard various evil reports concerning her, all of which I am persuaded were untrue, came to day to receive her wages, and also to punish her, even with death, were she found guilty of the accusations alleged against her. As soon as I heard he was in the vicinity of the Settlement, I went to him, and at once agreed to purchase the girl, but not knowing, at that time, the purport of his visit. On our way to my dwelling, whither we repaired for the property in exchange, I was much shocked to meet a man, well known for deeds of horror, posting along with a native weapon in his hand, whom the Chief had sent for to despatch our poor girl; and it is but too probable that she would have fallen a victim to their barbarity, had I not agreed to purchase her freedom, before the arrival of this bloody ruffian.

Dec. 5-7 – Anxiously employed in watching the Settlement, like a sentinel; fearful that the girl, though redeemed, might be taken off by force. – – - [Mr. A. Wilson.

Nov. 27 – Tohitapu made his appearance from the interior. He came down to see Titore, and to attend the meeting of the Natives. The party arrived this morning, with the heads of those who had fallen, both belonging to themselves and their enemies. Many fears of a general assembly of the Natives, as the summer advances. Satan has a strong hold here; but in the Lord of Hosts is our consolation: He will overrule all this for good. Intended to cross over, to learn the state of things; but was prevented by Tohitapu, who proposed to-morrow morning, as more of the Natives would be assembled.

Nov. 28 – Immediately after breakfast, Mr. Brown and I went over to Kororarika, with Tohitapu, in the boat, to see Titore. After a good deal of ceremony and preparation on the part of Tohi, we walked toward the party, who were all tapued, and, consequently, sitting by themselves without the enclosure, with the heads of their friends and enemies in full array before them. There were fourteen

heads belonging to the Nateawa, and three belonging to themselves: the last were a short distance from the others, being worthy of more honour: the sight was most disgusting. The heads were dressed with feathers, and the teeth exposed to view, which gave a ghastly appearance, and was sickening in the extreme. Some of the heads I recognised. The countenances of all around seemed to partake of the image of their father, the Devil: they were truly Satanic: a grin was on every countenance. I could not hold conversation with any of them. Tohitapu, before taking notice of any one present, walked toward the three heads belonging to the Ngapuhi, addressing "Tu," who may be termed the god of war, as from him all the art of war – bravery and cunning – is considered to proceed. Having addressed himself to "Tu," and extolled the acts and brave deeds of these warriors, and viewed the payment – the fourteen heads of the Nateawa – he expressed his approbation, and turned to Titore, fell on his neck, and immediately both began a New-Zealand howl. This lasted a few minutes; after which all began to talk together, inquiring, and relating the scenes of the campaign. We left Tohitapu here, glad to retire, being much cast down at witnessing the apparent joy of these poor deluded people. – – - [Rev. H. Williams.

July 1, 1833: Ploughing all day, with two ploughs. Natives employed in picking fern-root, and carting it off. In the evening, went, by invitation, to see a Hahunga of Tinana's. (A Hahunga is a feast which is kept by the Natives, when they exhibit the bones of their deceased relatives.) When I arrived at the place, which was not more than a mile from my house, I found quite a select family party. They appeared very glad to see me; and soon dealt out to me, and to the people who were with me, a large quantity of cooked food, together with fifteen large baskets of Indian-corn, sweet-potatoes, &c. After a little time, the priest asked me to go and see the bones of their deceased relatives. He accompanied me himself to the spot; and told the old lady, who had them in charge, to point out to me the different people's bones.

The sculls, eleven in number, were the only parts exposed to view, which were decorated with feathers: the other bones were covered over with clean blankets, and a few things of a showy nature. The whole was laid out in a rude shed which had been erected for the purpose; and a fire kept up beside them, by the person who had the whole in charge. As the whole of the Chiefs followed me to the place, I took the opportunity to speak to them of the Resurrection of the body. One of the Chiefs said, "Is it indeed true, what you tell us about the fire of Hell?" I told him, it was true; but that Christ had died in order to deliver us from Hell. They appeared serious. – – - [Mr. R. Davis.

But scenes like that described in the following passage by Mr. H. Williams cannot fail to have a powerful influence on the minds of these fierce Natives.

Public Thanksgiving for deliverance from War.

Aug. 8, 1832 – This day having been set apart as a day of General Thanksgiving, on account of the return of our Natives from their late expedition without being able to accomplish their wicked purposes, we assembled at ten o'clock for Service. The Natives were attentive. The object of our meeting was altogether new, and I trust will be attended with benefit to many.

Inauguration of the British Consul.

The appointment of James Busby, Esq., as the Consul in New Zealand, and his arrival in the Island, have been already noticed (Oct. 1833, p. 238). We give from the Despatches before us a fuller account of his inauguration; an event promising, under the Divine Blessing, materially to promote the protection of the Natives from the outrages to which they have heretofore been exposed from British Subjects; their internal peace; and their consequent advancement in civilization and social comfort. The circumstances of the event are thus narrated by the Rev. H. Williams: –

May 17 – Every one on the move at break of day, in order that all things might be in readiness to give our guests a welcome, due to so great an occasion as the landing of the British Resident, and his introduction to the Chiefs and Nobles of this land, accompanied by the Captain and Officers of His Majesty's Ship, "Imogene." Canoes from Kororarika, Waikari, and the Kauakaua, soon made their appearance, with the principal men

of those districts; who took up their respective quarters, and soon constructed sheds sufficiently good to protect them from the weather, which appeared rather threatening. Each one seemed anxious to learn the nature of Mr. Busby's commission, and whether the man-of-war was to remain in the Bay, and if soldiers were to be landed. The various parties were very busy in rubbing up their muskets, &c; as it was determined to give the visitors a Native salutation. At half-past ten o'clock, observed the boats put off from the man-of-war, under a salute of seven guns. All were in immediate motion, to dispose of their numbers to the greatest effect; and we retired to the extreme end of the Settlement from which the strangers were to enter. At eleven, Mr. Busby, with Captain Blackwood, and the Officers of the ship, landed, and advanced slowly towards the Natives, who were crouching down, ready for a spring at the signal given. They arose with their usual horrid scream, and rushed forward with the utmost impetuosity till within a few paces of our party, when they halted; and, after regulating their ranks with much vociferation, set up a Haka, brandishing their muskets, and distorting their countenances, to the no small astonishment of the strangers. They then delivered their speeches, bidding welcome to their land. This continued for a short time; after which we passed on to the Chapel Yard, where all were soon assembled, with manifest interest, to hear His Majesty's gracious communication. Seats had been provided for the Europeans; and also a table, upon which was placed the Letter from Lord Goderich, the Secretary of State. After silence had been obtained, Mr. Busby broke the Great Seal of this important Document, and read it in English. This, of course, could not be understood, except by the Europeans. A Translation had been prepared, which was then read; also of Mr. Busby's Speech, which he delivered at the same time. Several Chiefs spoke in succession, expressive of their satisfaction at Mr. Busby's arrival. At the conclusion, Mr. Busby presented the leading men with a blanket, and about six pounds of tobacco, each. The Officers of the man-of-war, and the Europeans residing in the neighbourhood, besides several of the Missionaries, partook of refreshment at my house, about fifty in number; – no small party in this distant land, with our means of accommodation. At three, the Natives were served with their repast of beef, potatoes, and stir-about. As our Boys have had some experience in this important duty, at our Annual Meetings, our Visitors were a good deal surprised at the order and expedition with which this assemblage of New Zealand rank was supplied, as the feast consisted of about 800 dishes constructed of a plant similar to the flag. All passed off very agreeably.

The following passages from Mr. Busby's Address evince the good feeling with which he entered on the duties of his office.

At one time, Great Britain differed very little from what New Zealand is now. The people had no large houses, nor good clothing, nor good food. They painted their bodies, and clothed themselves with the skins of wild beasts. Every Chief went to war with his neighbour; and the people perished in the wars of their Chiefs, even as the people of New Zealand do now. But after God had sent His Son into the world to teach mankind that all the tribes of the earth are brethren, and that they ought not to hate and destroy, but to love and do good to one another – and when the people of England learned His words of wisdom – they ceased to go to war with each other, and all the tribes became one people.

The peaceful inhabitants of the country began to build large houses, because there was no enemy to pull them down. They cultivated their land. and had abundance of bread, because no hostile tribe entered into their fields to destroy the fruits of their labours. They increased the numbers of their cattle, because no one came to drive them away. They also became industrious and rich, and had all good things they desired.

Do you, then, O Chiefs and Tribes of New Zealand! desire to become like the people of England? Listen first to the word of God, which He has put it into the hearts of His servants, the Missionaries, to come here to teach you. Learn that it is the will of God that you should all love each other as brethren; and when wars shall cease among you, then shall your country flourish. Instead of the roots of the fern, you shall eat bread; because the land shall be tilled without fear, and its fruits shall be eaten in peace. When there is abundance of bread, men shall labour to preserve flax, and timber, and

provisions for the ships that come to trade; and the ships which come to trade shall bring clothing, and all other things which you desire. Thus shall you become rich. For there are no riches without labour, and men will not labour unless there is peace, that they may enjoy the fruits of their labour.

Choice of a National Flag for New Zealand.

Mr. Busby's inauguration as British Consul to New Zealand is mentioned above. Under his auspices, a Flag has been chosen by the Chiefs, to be recognised henceforth as their National Colours. This event is important, from the protection which the Flag will afford to ships built in New Zealand, and from the consequent stimulus to improve, to their own advancement in civilization and social comfort, the peculiar advantages for commercial enterprise by which the Islands are distinguished. Antipodes, as the Islands of New Zealand are to us, in geographical situations, they enjoy the prospect, under the Divine Blessing, in the means employed for the moral and religious improvement of the Natives, of becoming eventually the Great Britain of the Southern Hemisphere. The particulars of the ceremony of choosing the Flag are thus recorded by Mr. Yate: –

We have had His Majesty's ship the "Alligator" in the Bay the last fortnight. The Captain brought down Flags, that the Chiefs of New Zealand might choose a Standard for their country; which will be laid before the King of England, and orders given to honour it, in the same way as any other National Flag is honoured. Vessels built in New Zealand, carrying these colours, and having a register from the Chief of the district where she was built, countersigned by Mr. Busby, will be no longer liable to seizure; but will be allowed to trade, as other foreign vessels are, in every British port. The ceremony of accepting the Flag was, for this place, imposing. When hoisted, it was received with a royal salute from the man-of-war, and with nine cheers from the Europeans, one hundred and twenty in number, around the Flag-staff. The Natives made several very interesting speeches, and the whole passed off very pleasantly and peaceably.

Sympathy of the Missionaries with Britain, and Unity among themselves.

From the communications of two of our Missionary Labourers, we extract, by way of concluding remark, the following encouraging passages: –

I can only add, that the Mission is going on very prosperously. The blessing of the Lord is resting upon us in our labours, and I trust also in our own persons. We are living in peace and union one with another; and I have no doubt that, with the blessing of our Heavenly Father, we shall continue to do so. There are very many things in this land to harass and perplex; and of a nature so different to what you meet with in civilized life, that you can scarcely form an idea of them. As our day was, so has our strength hitherto been; and I have no doubt you find it so at home. We often, very often, pray for our native country, in her troubles. We daily bear our King in our remembrance, before the Throne of Grace, that he may reign and rule in righteousness, and be preserved, under the wing of Almighty love, from the power of his adversaries, both spiritual and temporal; and that, by the grace of God, he may be made a blessing to the Church and People over whom he presides. We cannot forget, that under the fostering Government of our Native land we were trained, and that it is by the kindness of British Christians that the New-Zealand Mission is supported. Who, then, is there among us, but must feel interested in the welfare of his country! – – - [Rev. W. Yate.

I am thankful to say, that we are all living together in peace and unity. Satan, who has long tried to gain advantage over us, has not been suffered to prevail. I think that we are all absorbed in the one grand object – of spreading the Gospel of Christ; and, oh! that the Gospel may be our song, until, having finished our course, we enter the joy of our Lord, to sing His praises in higher strains! – – - [Mr. C. Baker.

Church Missionary Record

[New Zealand sections only]

1835

[This book was digitised in partnership with Auckland War Memorial Museum]
http://www.aucklandmuseum.com

HOME PROCEEDINGS.

HOME PROCEEDINGS.

Departure of Missionaries.

The Rev. William Oakley (p. 18) sailed from Gravesend on the 23d ult.

The Rev. Robert Maunsell (Vol. V. p. 279) and Mrs. Maunsell left London for Gravesend on the 4th instant, to embark on board the "Florentia," Captain Deloitte, for New Zealand.

HOME PROCEEDINGS.

HOME PROCEEDINGS.

Delivery of Instructions to a Missionary.

On the 13th inst., the Instructions of the Committee were delivered to the Rev. Henry H. Bobart, on occasion of his departure to New Zealand. Mr. Bobart, having acknowledged the Instructions, was commended in prayer to the favour and protection of Almighty God, by the Rev. J. Sandford.

HOME PROCEEDINGS.

The Rev. Henry H. Bobart (p. 84) and Mrs. Bobart, and Mr. B. Y. Ashwell and his Wife, left London for Gravesend on the 11th instant, to embark on board the "Lotus," Captain Summerson, for New Zealand. They sailed on the following day.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

Australasia Mission – From Despatches received from New South-Wales we learn that Mr. and Mrs. Wade, Messrs. Colenso and Flatt (Vol. V. p. 113), safely arrived at Sydney on the 30th of October, on their way to New Zealand. They were all in excellent health; with the exception of Mrs. Wade, whose health, however, had considerably improved.

The Rev. R. Hill, in a Letter dated Sydney, Nov. 3, 1834, states, that an Auxiliary Church Missionary Society was established there on the 14th of September. He adds –

I trust that the inhabitants of this town will emulate the spirit which has occasioned so considerable ah increase to your funds at "home;" and that the stigma which rests upon the Colony, of having done so little to make known the glad tidings of the Gospel to the Heathen Nations by which we are surrounded, is now about to be removed for ever.

We have also just received communications from New Zealand of an encouraging description. Mr. G. Clarke, in a Letter dated Waimate, Dec. 5, 1834, observes –

We have had a great deal of sickness among the Natives, of late. A number have been called to their eternal home, several of whom have given us great hope that they have exchanged the present for a better and brighter scene. I hope that the late afflictions will be sanctified.

Our Schools, and visits among the Natives, have been as regular as our other numerous engagements would admit. Our Congregations at the Native Villages are much the same as when I last wrote. The Means of Grace are well attended; and there are a seriousness and attention which, upon the whole, are pleasing and encouraging to us in our visits.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

Australasia Mission – From Despatches received from New Zealand, down to Jan. 19, 1835, we learn, that Messrs. Wade, Colenso. and Flatt (p. l 11) safely reached New Zealand on Dec. 30, 1834. Mrs. Wade was safely delivered of a son on the 18th of January; Mrs. Hamlin of a son on the 1st of September; and also Mrs. Kemp of a son.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

THE very extended Documents given, respecting this Mission, in the months of August, September, October and November, in last year, left, for the time, little more to communicate. But the continuance of peace in the Missionary Settlements in New Zealand, the formation of new Stations in that Island, and the manifest blessing of Almighty God on the exertions of His devoted Servants, have continued to furnish fresh matter of information, such as is calculated to draw forth renewed expressions of joy and gratitude. The accounts now to be given, are continued from p. 266 of our Volume for 1834.

New Zealand.

The Report of the four Stations, given in a systematic form at pp. 205-211 of our last year's Volume, brought the accounts up to the commencement of 1834. The following statements are, for the most part, carried forward to the month of June in last year, in respect to the Stations generally; although some particulars are added, of a later date.

View of the Earlier Stations, and of the New One Northward.

TEPUNA – The Senior Missionary Labourer, Mr. J. King;, continues with his family at this, the first-founded Station of the Society. He states concerning it –

About 200 Natives are living in the neighbourhood of this Station; and the Natives along the northern coast, for about twenty miles have been visited from this Station. At Tapuetahi, Takou, Waiaua and Matauri, some of the Natives are very desirous of instruction.

Mrs. King and my daughter have instructed the girls. In the Settlement there are 10 girls, and 10 men and boys.

KERIKERI – The native population, and likewise the supply of Missionary Labourers, have both suffered considerable variations at this Station. The following is the general view of their secular and religious employments: –

The chief of Mr. Kemp's time has been taken up in the superintendence of the new Store; the walls of which have been completed, and the roof is nearly ready for shingling. Mr. Kemp has also had charge of the Settlement stores, and has bartered for the Settlement.

Mr. Baker has had charge of the Native Boys' School; and has, for the last five months, devoted two hours each day to the instruction of the English Infants' School: and he has also spent a portion of his time in attention to horticulture, and has trained a considerable number of fruit-trees. The Native Girls' School has been prin-

cipally conducted by Mrs. Kemp, assisted by Mrs. Baker when her health would permit. Mrs. Shepherd has devoted the afternoon of each day to the English Infant Children. Mary Taua and Rebecca Wahanga have taken the Native Infant School, alternately, between them.

The spiritual duties of the Station have been attended to, both on the Sabbath and other days. The Natives too on the banks of the Kerikeri were visited, while any remained. Those too of Tapuetahi, Takou and Wangaroa have been occasionally visited on Sundays. Much time has been taken up in itinerating among the Natives of Wangaroa, Matauri, and Takou.

The Natives living in our Settlement have given great attention to daily instruction and the Means of Grace: those of them who have given themselves up to the Lord in baptism are steadily pursuing their Christian course, and give us sufficient proof that our labours among them have not been in vain. There are others who are anxiously inquiring after the Truth as it is in Jesus. The proficiency made in the Schools, considering the interruptions to which they have been subject, is tolerably good,

The number of Natives living in the Settlement, and attending the Schools, are – women and girls, 17; men and boys, 27; children, 9 – Total, 53.

PAIHIA – Several of the Missionaries and Catechists at this Station have been called forth on exploratory tours to the more distant parts of the Island, with a view to the fixing of the new Stations, since formed. We give, in their general retrospect of the year ending June 1834, a summary view of these tours, as matter of simple record; combined with their account of their other employments in this Station.

In mercy have we been preserved, with little intermission of health; and have been permitted to prosecute our work in the name of the Lord, in the midst of much quietness on every side.

The Settlements which have been generally visited, are, at Kororarika, Te Puke, Puketona, Kauakaua, and occasionally Waikare and Wangai. At the Kauakaua and Te Puke, the attention has been very pleasing; and, at the former place, a School is established among themselves.

Much opposition has, by some, been offered to spiritual instruction; though by others we have been abundantly cheered.

On the 22nd of October last, Messrs. H. Williams, Brown, Fairburn, and Morgan, made a voyage, in two boats, to the various Native Settlements in the Thames, for the purpose of examining a proper situation for a Missionary Station; when Te Puriri was fixed upon for that purpose. They proceeded on to Matamata, which is situated at the head of the Thames, and is a settlement of Waikato. They returned on the 3rd of December.

On the 19th of December, the Rev. W. Williams, with the Rev. W. Yate, made a voyage to Waiapu (East Cape), and the Mahia (Table Cape), for the purpose of returning some Natives who had been brought up, against their will, from thence by the 'Elizabeth,' whaler, of London; and also to explore that neighbourhood with reference to Missionary pursuits. They returned to the Bay on the 22nd of January.

On the 25th of February, the Rev. A. N. Brown, together with Mr. Hamlin, made an overland journey to Waikato, and returned, May 17th.

In each of their visits, the Missionaries have to record, with gratitude to the Most High, the respect and attention paid by the Natives; and the earnest application to them, that some of their body might reside among them.

It was with considerable pain that the Missionaries returned from these visits, leaving the poor Natives without a Teacher; for all was desolation and death, amoral wilderness, a desert waste – every foul passion appeared to reign, the offspring of sin and ignorance. It may be said of the people, they know no God, they fear no Hell, but are daily led the willing slaves of Satan. The hand of each was lifted up against his brother, and jealousy and fear was in every countenance; but though they knew not Missionaries, they had heard of them, and knew that the Missionary was the messenger of peace; and their application for aid was universally concluded with, "We must fight and kill each other, until Missionaries reside among us. Come, and then shall we know the glad tidings of which you speak."

Our Sabbath Service has been gratifying, and the European families residing at the Bay have generally attended; and,

at times, some of the officers and crews of ships.

Our Schools have been held between the Services; and the Missionaries and Christian Natives have, as usual, moved out in various directions, to proclaim the Name of the Lord.

The Schools, five in number, have been conducted as heretofore: –

English Boys' School, 14; English Girls' School, 7; Native Boys' School, 43; Native Girls' School, 29; English Infants' School, 4; Native School, 19.

WAIMATE – This Station, which, besides its spiritual objects, was established with a view to the introduction of an efficient plan of Agriculture, in order to the maintenance of the Missionaries, is thus reported up to June 1834. It should be observed, however, that the Returns, at the close, are of the date of the preceding quarter: –

The calls for instruction in the vicinity of Waimate are daily increasing, and many appear desirous of obtaining a correct knowledge of the things of God. On Sunday, May 4, Mr. Yate admitted 5 adults, and 4 infant Natives, to the Ordinance of Baptism. On the 18th of May, 4 adults; and on the 8th of June, 38 adults, and 16 infants: making, during the quarter, 47 adults and 20 infants at the Waimate. Amongst this number was Paparangi, the Chief of Otuhere; and Atua-haere, the Chief of Kaikohi.

On the 20th of May, an Examination was held of our Schools, at the Waimate; at which time many Natives from the distant residences, and who have formed schools in their villages, were present, and passed a very respectable examination in the Catechisms, and some of them in reading the Scriptures. The Infant School, under the conduct of Mrs. Hamlin, gave very general satisfaction. From 800 to 1000 Natives were present; and about 500 of them passed an examination.

The following places have been visited by one or other of the members of the Waimate Settlement; viz. the Thames, the East Cape, Hawkes' Bay, Waikato, and the western coast as far as Kawia. Kaitaia, on the northern part of the island; Mangakahia, south; and Otaua, 20 miles south-west of Waimate; have been several times visited. Kaikohi, ten miles south-west, and the adjacent villages about Waimate and Taiamai, have been regularly visited. Divine Service has been regularly conducted, at eight of the native villages, in Chapels erected for that purpose by the Natives.

At Waimate, the Native Services continue to be well attended. Several of our domestics have been baptized; and the Christian Natives of the Settlement, with a very few exceptions (in which coldness and indifference are manifested), continue steadfast in the faith: and some, by their holy and consistent lives, continue to adorn the religion they profess, and are living epistles, read and known of all men, and continue to render important services, in the School, and at the native villages.

The Native Boys' School has been conducted by Mr. Clarke, assisted by Christian Natives; and continues pretty well attended, not only by the Natives of the Settlement, but also by a number of Natives from the villages. The Sunday School is conducted by Mr. James Davis: the Infants' School, since Mrs. Preece left the Waimate, by Mrs. Hamlin; the European Infant School, by Mrs. Davis. Mrs. Clarke, assisted by Mrs. Davis and Mrs. Hamlin, has conducted the Native Girls' School. The Schools at the Native villages have been conducted by Christian Natives; where they have succeeded in teaching old and young the Catechisms, reading, and writing on slates. The duties connected with the erection of a water-mill, and with the farming department, have pressed heavily upon Mr. Davis. The uncertainty connected with native labour has rendered Mr. Davis's duties arduous; but he has had the pleasure of seeing the work prosper in his hand, at a comparatively small expense, and exempt from the cares and vexations arising from that immoral conduct, which is an almost universal concomitant of the employment of Europeans in a land like New Zealand, where every man does as seemeth right in his own eyes. About forty acres of land have been cleared during the year; twenty of which have been broken up, and brought into a state of cultivation.

Mr. Hamlin had just commenced the Flax Business, by setting the children of the Infant School to spin, when he was called by his Brethren to make a Missionary Tour to Waikato.

In the Settlement there are 76 men and boys, 55 women and girls; 19 infants at School; and 20 babes.

Mr. Clarke also observes, under date of Dec. 5, 1834 –

We have had a great deal of sickness among the Natives of late: a number have been called to their eternal home: several have given us great hope that they have exchanged for a better and brighter scene; and I hope that the late afflictions will be sanctified to many. Our Schools, and visits among the Natives, have been as regular as our other numerous engagements would admit of. Our congregations at the native villages are much as when I last wrote: the Means of Grace are well attended: and there is a seriousness and attention which is, upon the whole, pleasing and encouraging to us in our visits. I am happy to say, we have just got the water to our mill: we have every prospect of its fully answering our purpose: in a few days we commence grinding. This will form quite an era in the history of New Zealand.

KAITAIA – Of this Station to the Northward, the first formed after the preceding four, we shall present our Readers with a somewhat full account, in the words of the two Catechists, to whom this undertaking was assigned. It will exhibit, as in the instance of the earlier Stations, the inevitable mingling of secular employments in the establishment of Missions in a barbarous land.

The formation of this Station having met with the sanction of the Corresponding Committee, it was finally decided upon by the Committee of Missionaries, in the beginning of January 1833; at which time we were requested to prepare for our removal here. From that period till the October succeeding, our time was fully occupied in attending to sawing, carpentry, and occasionally blacksmith's work; during which time, also, we made five journeys to this place. The first of these was for the purpose of examining the situation of Kaitaia, as to land and water-carriage: – we found the Station to be accessible by water, for a small vessel, within five miles. The design of our second journey was, to explore a road through a forest, extending nearly from Waimate to Kaitaia, lying over a ridge of mountains. We discovered, that a good road might be made in a direct line to Waimate, the latter place bearing east from Kaitaia; and that we should save a distance of 30 miles, the new road being 44; whereas by the old road it is 80: – we also shall secure good travelling, at all seasons of the year; while the old road, from the number of swamps, brooks, and hills, is at all times uncomfortable and laborious travelling, but in the winter season quite impracticable. The object of our third journey was, to ascertain the true state of the minds of the Natives with regard to our settling among them, and likewise the extent of the population. On our arrival, we were rejoiced to find that the Natives, with one heart and voice, said, "Make haste, and take up your abode among us." As to population, we learned, from the strictest inquiry of different Chiefs, that the number of fighting-men within our reach amounted to 1600, not including slaves. We came down the fourth time to prepare our houses, and to abide a few months among the Natives; after which we returned, to fetch Mrs. Matthews and Mrs. Puckey. We took full possession of the Settlement on the 14th of March 1834, when Mrs. Matthews arrived with Messrs. H. Williams and Davis. On Monday the 18th, the land was paid for, and witnessed by the above persons. The quantity of land purchased for the Society and attached to this Station, is upward of 1000 acres, 600 of which is fine alluvial soil. The Chiefs, of whom we purchased the land, manifested great satisfaction on seeing the payment; one of whom made an excellent speech to the assembled multitude on the occasion, in which he showed them the nature of European bargains; telling them, that "the land which they had sold was a weighty article, and the right of possession would never again return to them – it was for ever gone." Mrs. Puckey, who had been detained at Waimate through illness, arrived here on the 18th of April; which completed our number of Labourers for this Station. Since our last arrival, we have built a rush Chapel, in which are performed regularly Morning and Evening Services. We have established a Morning School for males, our number of men and boys being 40. A Girls' School is also conducted by Mrs. Matthews and Mrs. Puckey, the daily attendance at which is 16. At present, we have not seen any fruits of our labours; but, from the attention which our Natives pay to the instructions we give them, we are encouraged to prosecute our work of faith among them with alacrity and delight. On the Sundays, each of us, in turn, leaves

the Settlement, to visit the Natives in their villages, who, on our arrival, assemble for Divine Worship. One very neat Chapel has been built by the Natives; and they have also cut a good road for a horse, to the distance of ten miles; in which space there are no less than eight bridges, one of which is thirty feet over. Up to the present period, a considerable portion of our time, with that of our Natives, has been taken up in making roads, and a bridge over the river in front of our houses, in order to facilitate our visiting the Natives at all seasons; and it is our sincere desire, and hearty prayer to Almighty God, that He would give us grace to be faithful and diligent in this part of His vineyard to which He has been pleased to appoint us.

Mr. Puckey remarks further, under date of June 6th, 1834: –

We have built one bridge over the river in the front of our Settlement; and are now busily engaged in building another over the main river, which will facilitate greatly our progress, in our journeys to visit the Natives; as the land on which we live is nearly surrounded by water. I hope that our bridge will soon be finished, when we shall be able to visit the Natives four days in the week.

We have a Baptized Native, who conducts himself in a very satisfactory manner: he takes his rounds on Sundays, as well as ourselves: and, on his return, he gives an account of his proceedings during the day. His name is Simon, in English: in the Native language, Himiona. After we have concluded Service, the Natives are always very pressing for us to stay and eat.

Mr. Matthews, under date June 8th, 1835, adds –

At present, we have not been able to visit the Natives in the week-days, owing to the badness of the roads, and our time being necessarily employed in the building of two bridges on the Settlement. One we have finished; and to-day, we took down the scaffolding from the large one, which is 6O or 70 feet in length. This only outlet of water for this part of the country is so soon swelled with a little rain, that we are hindered from visiting the Waro Natives on the Western Coast, a body of 500. After these necessary preparations, we intend, with God's blessing, to have each two days in the week, beside the Lord's Day, in order to become fully acquainted with all the Natives, and their many little circumstances, which we cannot hear on the Lord's Day.

Their report for the quarter ending June 1834, is as follows: –

During the last quarter, I have been employed in attending to sawing, in making a bridge, and roads. On the Lord's Day I have alternately held Divine Service with the Natives in the villages, and with the Natives in our Station. I have also been employed in buying food for the Settlement. On the 18th of April, Mrs. Puckey arrived; since which period, she has, conjointly with Mrs. Matthews, been employed in attending to the Native Girls' School. – – - [Mr. W. G. Puckey.

During the last quarter, I have been employed in attending to sawing, in making a bridge, and roads. On Sundays I have alternately visited the Natives in the villages, and held Divine Service at our Station. I have also attended to the School for Native Men and Boys. Mrs. Matthews has in turn attended to the Girls' School. The number of girls, 14; men and boys, 40. – – - [Mr J. Matthews.

New Stations forming to the Southward.

In addition to the Station above mentioned, Kaitaia, which has been established in the Northernmost part of the Island, the Committee have sanctioned the formation of four new Stations to the south of the Bay of Islands. Of these, the earliest is Puriri. We shall be able, at present, to give a detailed account only of this one.

PURIRI – The following particulars, concerning the forming of this new Station to the Southward, are given in the order of the dates of the respective communications from the three Catechists employed in this undertaking.

Mr. John Morgan writes from Puriri, under date March 6th, 1834: –

Yesterday, Titore, the principal Chief of the Northward, landed here from Mahurangi; at which place he has been for the last two months, endeavouring to procure timber for H. M. Ship "Buffalo." He came up here, a distance of 50 miles, in a canoe, on a visit to us, before his return to the Northward. We were very glad to see him: he brought with him

Warekaua, one of the Chiefs of Wakatiwai, the man who has been threatening to strike Mr. Fairburn, for having bled his son, when sick at Paihia. He made a long speech in our yard; and boasted a good deal of what he would do, and what he would not allow the Europeans to do. Titore stood up in turn, and gave him a good scolding: he told him to let the Europeans alone, and allow them to go wherever they choose. The behaviour of Titore, while in the Settlement, was very pleasing: he said to the Natives, "You talk about riches, but the Missionaries bring you the true riches, the words of Jesus Christ."

Under date of June 24, 1834, Mr. W. Fairburn writes from Puriri –

We are, I trust, in a sphere of much usefulness. Our Schools are going on in a manner which affords us much encouragement: we have regularly the Adult, Boys', and Girls' School every day in the week: the Infant School also is well attended: the mothers, and sometimes even the grandmothers, attend, to be taught with the infants. Many of the adult boys and girls are assembled, from the village in the neighbourhood, as also the infants: they manifest a teachable and attentive disposition. The Boys' School commences at half-past seven, during winter, the Infants', at ten in the morning; and the Girls', at three in the afternoon. Our Chapel on the Sabbath is respectably attended; indeed, we are constrained to say the place is too strait for us: it not unfrequently occurs, that numbers are obliged to sit outside, for want of room within. We are now preparing a place, to be built chiefly by Natives, for a Place of Worship, 40 feet by 20. The conduct of the Natives, on all occasions of Public Worship, has hitherto been most attentive and respectful: many of them acknowledge the truth of the Christian Religion, but at the same time frankly declare they dare not break through certain of their customs, lest they die through the anger of their Atua.

I was one evening discoursing with our principal Chief concerning the great love which Christ bare to sinners, in taking our nature upon Him, and in sending His servants into all parts of the world to be the bearers of the glad tidings of Salvation to all mankind: but when I came to dwell particularly upon the state of New Zealand, and the many years Missionaries had been labouring amongst them, and the little effect it had had, in comparison of the people of Tahaite, Tangatapu, &c., "True," said he, "the love of Christ is great in your hearts, to induce you to leave your relatives, country and friends:" but, added he, "why did you all remain at the Bay of Islands so many years? was your love only to them, that you put them in possession of muskets and powder [alluding to their trading with Europeans at the Bay], through which means, so many hundreds of our fathers, wives, children, &c, have been murdered or made slaves? We were once a numerous people, but are now reduced to nothing. Had they not procured those weapons from you, they would never have been able to meet us; or had some of you come to live among us years ago, you would, by your presence, have prevented the Ngapuhi from destroying us." I could not but feel the force of his argument: for I felt conscious, that a Settlement might have been formed here several years ago, with quite as much personal safety as that commenced in the Bay of Islands: indeed, those who are trading for flax manifest no fear to sit down in any part of the island: and shall it be said of those who profess to make the arm of the Lord their trust, that they are afraid?

The whole island lies open before us: Behold the Lord thy God has set the land before thee: go up, and possess it." If there were twenty disposable Missionaries in the land, free of incumbrance, they would find a field amply sufficient before them, to bring into action all their energies: for it is persons of energy that are fittest for New Zealand. We are, it is true, in a land of darkness and death, a darkness which may be felt; and although (blessed be God!) the Gospel Sun has in some measure penetrated into the heathen gloom, yet the great mass still lies in ignorance; and I feel persuaded, from upwards of fifteen years experience in this land, that it behoves the Lord's Servants to be not only on the outskirts of the enemy's camp, but also to penetrate into the very heart of it.

Mr. W. Preece also, from this Station, under date of July 4th, 1831, reports: –

I have been employed much the same as when I wrote last. I have completed a weather-board Store, and am preparing a frame for a temporary Chapel. I also attend, in my turn, to the spiritual duties of the Settlement; and visit the Natives

for some miles round us, to declare to them the unsearchable riches of Christ. I feel very much encouraged in my work. Many of the Natives who are residing with me are in a very pleasing state of mind; two of them Chiefs of some note, who are faithfully proclaiming Christ to their countrymen, and adorning the Gospel they profess, by a holy and consistent life.

Mr. J. A. Wilson writes also, from this Station, under date of July 25, 1834 –

Since our residence at this place, I have been engaged in a variety of ways; in carpentering, building chimneys, superintending the cutting of roads, rendering swamps passable for our horses, fencing-in land for my house and garden, and assisting Mr. Morgan in the school.

We proceed to notice, in reference principally to the longest-established Stations, some of the various circumstances which tend to illustrate their religious, or hitherto-unconverted state. We shall notice, in the first place, the

Varying Religious Fruits of the Mission.

The Rev. W. Williams briefly remarks on that state of self-satisfaction and lukewarmness which sometimes succeeds the first impressions of Divine Truth, in the following terms: –

Feb. 28, 1834 – Spoke to our Christian Natives in the evening. One of their number has lately been removed by death, and another is likely soon to follow. We do not generally find that growth in grace among them which we desire. On admission into the Church, they seem, for the most part, satisfied to remain stationary, feeling that they have advanced a step beyond the multitude.

This is an affecting view of professing Christians; but one by no means peculiar to New Zealand. England, as well as other nominally Christian lands, often exhibits the same Laodicean spirit. Constant inculcation of the same vital truths is requisite, with frequent inquiry and exhortation, to prevent languor in the religious life. The following passage from a Letter of Mr. G. Clarke will show, in some measure, the utility of earnest examination into the spiritual state of the Catechumens. He writes –

April 28 – This evening, twelve of the Natives of one of my little congregations came to spend an hour with me, to tell me the state of their minds. One said, "Mr. Clarke, I have long heard that there is a Heaven and a Hell: I want to go to Heaven, and am come to ask you the way, and how I can get there." I addressed him from the following words, I am the Way, the Truth, and the Life, no man cometh unto the Father but by me. Another said his feet had a long time dragged his heart to attend the Means of Grace, but he was not satisfied, because the heart did not agree with the feet in going to the House of God; how was he to act to make them agree? I directed him to look, by earnest prayer, to Him, who alone can make our duties our delight, and give us to feel His service perfect freedom. A third said he was sensible that the great storm would overtake him, if he continued to live in sin; and he felt himself without excuse, because he had heard of Jesus Christ as a shelter from the storm; but he felt himself so tied to the devil and his works, that he did not know how to get away from him. I replied, One grand object of Christ's coming into the world was to set the captive free, and to destroy the works of the devil; and directed him to Christ, who alone could liberate him. Another was struck with the conversation between our Lord and Nicodemus, upon the subject of being born again before he could go to heaven: he wanted, he said, to go to heaven, but did not know whether he was born again. I endeavoured to point out to him something of the nature of the New Birth, and directed him to Christ, that he might be renewed in the spirit of his mind, and created anew in him. A fifth said, I have no rest day nor night for the wickedness of my heart: it is always contending for evil. Until you came and made known among us the Word of God, we had nothing of this sort: now, one heart is continually teazing the other to do wrong, and the other to do right; and between them both he had no rest. He said he wished to do right, but he did not understand all this quarrelling. I told him, wherever a work of grace was begun there was more or less of this spirit lusting against the flesh, and the flesh against the spirit: if he sought strength it would be given him as he needed it, and, in the end, final victory.

A sixth said he had a desire by faith to come to Christ, and to be a child of His. He had heard that Baptism was nothing; but to him it appeared a great thing, because Christ had commanded his Disciples to baptize in his name. It was his desire to come publicly forward and acknowledge Christ, and seek admission among his people. I pointed out the encouragement to coming sinners, and assured him, from the Word of God, that he was welcome. Several others spoke in a very pleasing way, to whom I gave a word of encouragement and of warning, as it appeared to me needful. Several of the above-mentioned Natives are Candidates for Baptism, and will soon be admitted into the Church by that ordinance. I have every reason to believe they are sincere: they can have no worldly inducement thus to come forward; and several of them are respectable Chiefs, who are, I trust, earnestly seeking an interest in the Lord Jesus Christ.

In a Letter of a somewhat earlier date, March 23, 1834, he also thus describes the effect produced by the performing of Divine Service, as shown by the remarks afterward made by Natives.

After Service, Broughton, who was door-keeper, said he wished to say a few words before the congregation was dismissed. I requested him to speak; which he did, to the following effect: He thought they were like the Jews of old: they assembled as God's people, and sat and listened as His people, yet their actions manifested that all was not right within. The eyes of the whole congregation were upon him while speaking, and many seemed to feel his remarks. I told Broughton and the people, that though it was wrong to rest in the means, yet without the means we could never expect a blessing. I was glad to see them assemble together, for faith cometh by hearing; and if they diligently used the means, they had God's Word to assure them of their attaining the end. After a few more observations, the congregation was orderly dismissed. In the evening, had Service at Tautaka: about 30 assembled, who were attentive, but not so interesting in their general deportment as the other two congregations. On my return home, was followed by one man, who said he wanted some conversation. He was seeking, he said, after God, but was living among those who felt no concern for their souls; in consequence of which, he said, he had made no open profession, for fear of being laughed at. I told him he must not mind laughs; for if he was ashamed of Jesus, Jesus at last would be ashamed of him; and directed him to pray for grace to be delivered from the fear of men. Arrived at Waimate late in the evening, weary.

Mr. Clarke also, under date of Waimate, October 28th, 1831, relates the following instance of the triumph of faith, in the peaceful end of one, who had formerly suffered much from the thoughts of dying. An example of this nature tends greatly to encourage Labourers in the cause of Christ, both at home and abroad. Mr. Clarke writes –

We were called the other day to witness the power of the Gospel in dispelling the fear of death in one of our weak Christian Natives, a woman baptized by the name of Mary, who was naturally a weak and timid woman, often greatly afflicted, and shrinking, as it were, from that dreadful king of terrors. Death. But in her last affliction we observed a great difference in this respect, which we remarked to her. She said, Jesus has made this difference: she was once greatly afraid of dying; but since she had known Him, she was not only not afraid to die, but was waiting with desire for her great change. Her language was, "When will He come (meaning Jesus) to fetch me?" A few minutes before she died, she addressed, in an audible voice, the Natives around her, but more especially her husband, who is a regular attendant on the Means of Grace, entreating them to lose no time, but immediately to flee to Jesus for salvation; and then, in a fainter but still audible manner, said, "Farewell, wicked world! farewell sin and sorrow! for ever farewell, all of you!" and expired in the arms of her husband without a struggle or a groan.

The simple expressions of the Natives, in their Letters to the Missionaries, speak the religious feelings of their hearts. Several such productions have been given in our Volumes for 1832 and 1834, pp. 87-90 and 223-225, respectively. We add the following, communicated by the Rev. Alfred N. Brown, who writes, De-

cember 4, 1834, referring to his long absence in visiting the Waikato –

While I was absent with Mr. W. Williams at the southward, several of the Native Girls living with Mrs. Brown wrote letters to me. I send you a translation of one of them, as a specimen of their style of correspondence. It would be well if the correspondence of all professing Christians breathed the same spirit.

To Mr. Brown. – How do you and Mr. Williams do, walking on the face of the earth? My love is great toward you both, and to all your people. Be courageous, both of you, lest ye be tempted of the evil spirit. Jesus Christ is your guide. Do the Natives of that place where you are like the words of God and of Jesus Christ? He is the only Saviour of the world. Christ alone can make glad the heart of the believer, in all islands. Mr. Brown, our hearts are sorrowful toward the child Perahama, though his spirit is gladly going to heaven. In two weeks after [you went] Mary Peter's and Henry Brother's little girl died. She is the second child that has died since you have been gone; a sign, perhaps, to us, because we are not roused by the words of God. Sir, Mr. Brown, you have seen your girl Rupenga. [This girl was baptized by the Rev. H. Williams the Sunday after my return; she was named Mary Ann Brown.] She was taken ill last summer, and she still continues ill. Be strong to pray for her and for us all. Her heart is to the Lord. It is He alone that takes care of her. She is nigh unto death. Perhaps it is all God's love for her. We two are thinking over the words of God. Perhaps that is all I have to say to you.

The extracts following relate to the Missionaries and Catechists making

Religious Visits around the Stations.

Mr. J. Shepherd, under date June 18, 1834, writes –

I now go near to the Heads of Wangaroa, to a village, the principal Chief of which is Tupe, whose conduct is highly praiseworthy; and both he and his people call out loudly for our attention. They have built a Place of Worship, large enough to hold 200 persons: they have, regularly, Morning and Evening Service therein, previously to which they sound a hoe, by striking another piece of iron against it, to let all around know that the time for Service has arrived. This tribe is, I believe, punctual in keeping the Lord's Day. I have been there on a Lord's Day, when from 70 to 80 persons have attended, whose behaviour has been highly satisfactory and encouraging. From Tupe's place I have bent my course up the river, and have found the Natives in general attentive: their general observation is, "Come oftener, and we shall understand what you say." Another Chief, who lives on the way home from Wangaroa, has built a Place of Worship, and is very anxious for instruction.

Mr. C. Baker writes, December 22, 1833 –

Sunday – Went to Monganui, and held Service with a party belonging to the Nga-te-wiu, who had heard of my going, and were waiting under a large tree, which was richly adorned with scarlet flowers, shedding their fragrance whilst I proclaimed Him whose name is like "ointment poured forth." The situation was in a little bay, which forms a part of Tareha's river: the morning was very hot, and the large spreading tree under which we sat afforded us an excellent shelter, the sea-breeze and the tide coming in at the same time. I read the whole of the Morning Service, and addressed them from John xiv. 6: all were attentive, and the responses were repeated with correctness. It is truly delightful to find that the praises of Jehovah are repeated in this Heathen land.

Mr. Clarke mentions an incident, which shows the benefit of these excursions, as tending to discover and put to shame stragglers. It displays, also, the proneness of the human heart to guile and false excuses. He writes, April 13, 1834 –

Sunday – Set out for Kaikohi. Just before I arrived there, fell in suddenly with three or four Natives, each carrying a musket, which they endeavoured to secrete, the better to deceive me that their intentions were not to break the Sabbath. I spoke to them about travelling in such a hostile manner, and on the Sabbath. They all began to make excuse; saying they lived at a distance from any Missionary Settlement, and did not know it was Sunday: they confessed it was wrong to work on the Sunday, but said travelling was not working.

On a subsequent occasion, he relates a more encouraging circumstance that attended his religious visits.

June 15, 1834: Sunday – In the morning, read prayers, and addressed the Natives morning and evening. After dinner, visited Waitangi, where I have an Afternoon Service. On my return home, was

followed by two old men, who wanted to know if I thought there was room in heaven for them: the child of one of them, he said, was in the way (alluding to a Christian Native living with me), and why should he be left behind? One said he was an old man, had lived many years in the world, but he found nothing stable: he was upon the precipice, and would soon fall (alluding to his approaching end): how could he be saved? I directed him to Christ, the sinner's friend.

A singular circumstance is related by the Rev. Henry Williams, which proves that there is an influence produced by the True Doctrine, inasmuch as the Enemy is aiming to confuse and corrupt the Natives by spurious imitations of it. He describes, under date of June 17, 1834, the following instance of

Tares sown among the Wheat.

In some districts the Word of God is received with gladness; in others it is rejected and opposed. A new doctrine has recently appeared among the people – at least new in name; as they have borrowed no less a name than that of "Nakahi," [the native name for the Serpent, Gen. iii. 1]; also, "Papahurihia," one who relates wonders.] They observe the Sabbath, but not with us, as they keep it on the Saturday. They have service, and baptize, and profess to know the Scriptures. I have not yet been able to meet with any of these leading men, though I have frequently been challenged; but Papahurihia has invariably been out of the way. The new doctrine has been brought forward by some, who, after residing awhile with us, and obtaining a superficial knowledge, have gone forth, we fear, two-fold more the children of Satan than they were before.

Mr. J. Hamlin, writing December 10, 1834, after relating the thirst for religious teaching at the Waimate, adds a short but interesting notice concerning the

Progress of Education.

There are many of the Natives of the Settlement coming forward for Baptism, and some for the Supper of the Lord; and I believe all who have been received into the outward or visible Church of Christ, by Baptism, continue to walk consistently with their profession. Our Chapel on Sundays is crowded to excess; and I think if it were twice as large, it would be filled. What an encouraging sight, to behold so many flocking to the House of God! At a part of the Ahuahu which is visited by myself every Sunday, except when out at Kaikohi, the average attendance used to be about 70, but now it is about 120. At this place there is a School, conducted by the Natives themselves (without any expense to the Society whatever, with the exception of five slates), in which are taught the Catechisms, reading and writing; and there is not perhaps a single individual who cannot repeat the Catechisms without book. There are about twenty who have learned to read, who can read pretty fluently; the others are not so forward. They have not made so much progress in writing, for want of lessons.

We are grieved to have again to report the dreadful consequences produced on the Natives, and others visiting New Zealand, from the

Introduction of Ardent Spirits.

Mr. W. Williams, writing from Paihia, March 25, 1834, records as follows, in his Journal: –

Buried an English seaman this morning, who died from drinking Goulard water, which was standing on the table, in a grog-shop on the opposite beach, he supposing the same to have been spirit. The excesses of the English seamen on the Lord's Day are now becoming truly awful: no less than 200 were at one time on Kororarika beach, most of them in a state of intoxication.

Mr. Clarke also notices the abhorrence, with which, hitherto, this curse of society has been regarded by some of the Natives. He relates, April 20, 1834 –

Sunday – In the morning, conducted the English and Native Services of the Settlement. In the evening, visited Na-te-wiu, with whom I had Service; after which I spoke to several privately, from whom I learned that several of the party had been down to the Bay to trade, and had been led to drink ardent spirits to excess. Such was the abhorrence in which this occurrence was held by the Chief, that, to prevent a repetition of it, he set up a placard in the public road, with the following inscription: – "Mr. Clarke, the Natives of this place have been intoxicated by drinking rum." I hope it will have a happy effect.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

FROM our last Number, page 176, we add a few particulars, which were necessarily postponed to this month.

New Zealand.

Our Readers cannot fail to be interested by the view of those many difficulties, which the Labourers in this Mission have to encounter; which nevertheless, by the singular goodness of Divine Providence, they have been enabled, from time to time, to surmount. A description of all the perils and uncertainties, as well as privations and hardships, which must inevitably occur in the prosecution of their work, would be much too long for the limits of this Publication: occasionally, however, narratives of this kind have been given. In the following extracts our Readers will see something of the nature of these difficulties in an

Exploratory Visit to Waikato.

It having been considered desirable that the Rev. A. N. Brown and Mr. J. Hamlin should proceed from Paihia, to explore the District of the Waikato, in subserviency to the object of forming Missionary Stations, they proceeded, together with some of the Native Youths attached to them, overland, on this difficult expedition. It occupied them from February 25th, 1834, to the following May 17th. The result of their researches is given in an account of the names of various Tribes, with their

Chiefs, and an estimated population of 6580 fighting men. The following passages are from the Journal of Mr. Brown.

Feb. 26, 1834 – Started from Waimate at half past ten A. M. and brought up, at six P. M., at Punaketeri, a branch of the Waima river, and about fifteen miles from Waimate.

Feb. 27 – At half past seven A. M. continued our journey: stopped at Aowarua at half past eleven to dine. About two P. M., entered a long wood, through which a branch of the Mangakahia river winds its course. In three hours and a half we got through the wood, and pitched our tents at Mangakahia, after a walk of twenty miles, rendered tedious by the ground being very hilly.

Feb. 28 – Only proceeded a mile or two to Kaihi's place. Still unable to procure a guide even to Kaipara: they all seem afraid, in consequence of an attack made by them some time since on the Waikato Natives. We hesitated whether it would be right for us to proceed without some Chief from Mangakahia; but at length decided to do so if possible. We have no lad with us acquainted with the road from Kaipara to Waikato; but I trust we are in the path of duty, and under the conduct and protection of an Almighty and unerring Guide. We purchased a canoe of Kaihi for two blankets, and the lads were engaged all the afternoon in repairing it: but it proved to be very rotten and very old, having been taken by Hongi from the Natives of the East Cape, when he went thither on a fighting expedition many years ago. Showery during the day, with symptoms of bad weather. The Natives inclined to be troublesome, pressing into our tents, &c.

March 1 – After lading our canoe with Native food, &c, we commenced our voyage, accompanied by a number of Natives, in addition to our own, to assist in pulling her over the shallows and sunken timbers, which, almost at every hundred yards, impeded our progress. I do not think we advanced more than six or eight miles; but having, in the early part of the afternoon, arrived at a part of the river where Hou was planting winter potatoes, and there being no other Natives for many miles down the river, we pitched our tent for the Lord's Day. After dining, we ascended a high hill at our back (Maunga-Kowatu), from whence we had a magnificent view, and took bearings of our course, &c. That part of the Mangakahia river which we have come down appears to run from W. by N. to E. by S., and then to take a direction N. and S. for twelve miles further. Mangakahia seems to be a very fruitful valley, richly wooded, and watered; and the depth of soil, at some places, is from fifteen to twenty feet.

March 2 – Held morning and evening Service with our Natives and a few strangers: in the afternoon they were engaged in repeating their Catechism, &c.

March 3 – Before breakfast, our Natives were employed in re-sewing different parts of our old canoe. We left at nine o'clock, and pulled down the river till nearly sun-set, our progress being still considerably retarded by the fallen trees in the river. We made, probably, about twenty miles during the day; the winding course of the river bringing us to nearly all the points of the compass.

March 4 – Proceeded about twenty miles to-day to Aotahi, the Pa from which Messrs. Shepherd and Baker were shot at. Our course more southerly than yesterday, but still very winding. Tirarau, and most of the Natives, were absent: those at home behaved very civilly: they did not, however, seem inclined to attend "Karakia" (preaching) in the evening; for, besides the natural enmity of the human heart to the Gospel, they had been told the idle tale, that if they listened to the Missionaries it would affect their lives. Heavy rain during the night.

March 5 – The tide ebbing at ten o'clock, we pursued our course till it began to flow; during which time we went something more than twenty miles. At ten P. M. we left again, and kept on till three A. M., when we made our way up a deep mud-bank, and pitched our tents among some flax-plants. The Natives were so sleepy, and the fog so dense, that we probably did not make more than fifteen miles this tide, and that principally by the strong current which bore us along.

March 6 – Went about ten miles with the ebb-tide, in a S. and S. E. course; and then, as we were approaching one of the crossing-places, and it blew rather strongly, we put ashore. Our Natives were engaged the remainder of the day

in re-sewing our canoe, filling up the cracks, &c. We passed a small hill, with a singularly pinnacled top, called Tokatoka.

March 7, 1834 – Pulled for four hours, tide favourable, but a rather strong wind against us. After dinner, being anxious to reach the crossing-place, we put off again, wind and tide against us, and arrived at our destination soon after dark. Proceeded about twelve miles to-day, principally in a southerly direction.

March 8 – Shortly before sun-rise, walked toward the sea, and ascended the sand-hill at the West Head. The entrance of the river (about two miles broad) is south. About three miles out the breakers were dashing fearfully over a bar, running E, and W., but having a channel through them bearing S. W. by S. Being a fine morning, we crossed to the Kaipara side, and got there pretty comfortably. What renders this crossing-place (which is about three miles over) so much an object of dread to the Natives is the many sand-banks which are about them, and over which, if the wind is westerly, the breakers are very high. It is necessary to cross when the tide is flowing, lest the canoe should be carried out to sea by the strength of the current. As we had to wait till the afternoon for the flowing of the tide, before we could proceed up the Kaipara river, Mr. Hamlin and I walked over the sand-hills to the East Head, from whence we could see Tutamoi N. W. and by N. After proceeding a mile or two in the afternoon, we came to a sheltered spot, where there was water, and put in, to stay over the Sabbath.

March 9 – Service with the Natives morning and evening. In the afternoon the Natives were repeating their Catechism, while we held a Service among ourselves. The songs of Zion were probably never sounded in this spot before. How sweet to anticipate, by faith, the joyful period when Christ's Name shall sound from shore to shore – from the rivers to the ends of the earth!

March 11 – As the lads told us we should have to pull five days longer before we came to the end of the Kaipara river, we decided on concealing our canoe, as well as we could, at this place, and to steer by compass through the broken and trackless country which lay before us in the direction of Waikato. We walked about fifteen miles in a S. E. course, sometimes in an overgrown path, sometimes in a pig-track, and, at others, making our passage through the fern: this took us eight hours. One of our Natives carelessly set fire to the fern near a wood which we passed; and, as the wind was setting in that direction, I fear that it may prove of serious damage.

March 15 – We saw this morning a high hill, bearing S. S. E., about twelve miles off, and made for it; but as our poor Natives' feet were very sore, by forcing their way through the high fern, and the road seemed getting worse the further we proceeded, we did not reach it by two miles.

March 16: Sunday – We held Service with our little band, morning and evening, and by ourselves in the afternoon. I never felt more strongly than to-day how rich a blessing the Lord's Day is, in a temporal point of view. Our lads seemed much to enjoy a cessation from labour: would that they could all anticipate, with us, that endless rest which remaineth for the people of God!

March 17 – Our course to-day seems, from the hills we passed in the morning, to have been S. E. by E.; but, in avoiding the Papakura (a branch of the Manakau), we were often travelling considerably to the eastward of that point. We got so tired of making our way through the high fern, that we went down to the river in the afternoon, to see if we could keep along its side; but before sun-set I think we had both resolved in our minds not to try the river side again; for, in crossing the various creeks of the river, we had to travel a long distance above our knees in mud; and when out of the mud, the sharp shells cutting our feet forced from us many a wry face, to the no small amusement of the Natives. Distance to-day, sixteen miles: in a straight line, ten miles.

March 18 – Travelled about five miles south; when, coming again upon the Papakura, which seemed to branch off a good deal eastward, we agreed to try to pass over, which we succeeded in doing, and then kept on for about ten miles further, in a S. W. by S. direction; when, in consequence of wet weather, we were obliged to pitch our tents. Most of our poor Natives had their feet tied up, being cut by forcing their way through the fern, bushes, &c.; and our stock of food was nearly exhausted. The way was indeed long; and not having a

guide, we were left in uncertainty as to the length of time it might yet take us to reach Waikato. I trust, however, that He who is a very present help in trouble will yet provide.

March 19, 1834 – Continued our course S. W. by S. for about five miles; when, falling in with a native path, we resolved to follow its direction, which we pursued for five or six miles further, principally through woods, our course varying from S. E. by E. to S. S. E. We were detained a good deal by the Natives digging fern-root, and gathering the stems of the palm-tree, Taua berries, and other kinds of food, in the woods, which saved our small stock of flour for another day. At sun-set we pitched our tents on a hillock of fern, between two woods, and caught a first glimpse of the Waikato river.

March 20 – Pursued our path through the woods, Waikato Heads bearing S. by W. At dinner time, it brought us down to the Waikato river, about fifteen miles from the Heads. Our Natives were engaged the remainder of the day, digging fern-root, which is now their principal food.

March 21 – About two miles below us there appeared to be a quantity of raupo (the New-Zealand flag or rush) growing, which we proposed tying up in bundles, to float upon, over the river. After wandering about for nearly three hours in the woods, we came again to the water, about a quarter of a mile from where we started. We then attempted to keep by the side of the river; but were frequently obliged to leave it, and force our way through the thickets; and it took us altogether seven hours to complete our distance of two miles. Our lads were employed the remainder of the day in cutting raupo.

March 22 – The place where we slept last night presented this morning all the bustle and activity of a dockyard, while we were fitting out our ships, or rather tying up our bundles of raupo into ten rudely-shaped canoes. On these we paddled across the river, and found them answer so well, that we floated along for about six miles; when, coming to a place where there was plenty of wild radish or turnips growing, we agreed to stop for the Sabbath.

March 23: Lord's Day – Our Natives having nothing to eat but the wild turnips, thought of proceeding on our journey: it might have been lawful, under such circumstances, but perhaps not expedient, for example's sake; so we rested. Mr. Hamlin addressed the Natives in the morning, and I took the Evening Service.

March 24 – After proceeding a few miles down the river with our flotilla, we espied a boat in the distance, manned by Natives, pulling toward us. There proved to be a European with them, who was going to Waipa (the branch of the Waikato river, on which the principal tribes are residing that we propose, God willing, to visit), and we accepted his offer of taking us thither, understanding that the way to Wangaroa from this place was almost impassable.

One of the Natives in the boat, Mainoa, is a brother of Werowero, and a principal Chief of Wangaroa, whither he proposes accompanying us. He seems very desirous for Missionaries to settle among his tribes; and much amused us by requesting, that, if a Missionary could not be spared, one of the Missionaries' children might be sent to reside with him. In the course of conversation, he observed: "The Missionaries should have come and lived among us years back, and then the large tribes at Taranake would not have been cut off by us; but we shall continue to destroy each other till Missionaries do reside with us." His words fell on my ear as a severe, though, on his part, an unintentional, reproof of the supineness and lukewarmness of the Christian Church. She has not yet taken up her proper position in Missionary exertions; and to a large proportion of her members might our Lord, even in the present day, address the reproof which he gave of old to the shepherds of Israel: My sheep wandered through all the mountains and upon every high hill: yea, my flock was scattered upon all the face of the earth, and none did search or seek after them.

Understanding that it would take nearly a week to pull to the head of Waipa river, we proposed visiting Wangaroa and Kawia by land, reaching the head of the river from thence, and returning to this place down the Waipa. Werowero promised to meet us at Kawia.

March 29 – Left in the European boat, and arrived, in two hours, at a landing-place, from whence there is a road to Wangaroa. Our way lay chiefly through an extensive forest, through which we walked till sunset, and then

pitched our tents, to spend another Sunday in the wilderness. I was detained considerably by the illness of one of my Natives; and an old priest, who stayed behind with us, broke off some twigs of trees, and began to perform Native karakia over him. This I put a stop to at once, and told the old priest that it was not in the power of Wiro to make him better, and that none but the God we worshipped could help him. He persisted however in saying, that if he had been allowed to finish his karakia, my Native would have been better.

March 30, 1834: Lord's Day – The priest mentioned yesterday was engaged this afternoon in learning by rote, from one of our lads, the Lord's Prayer, in the native language.

March 31 – After walking two hours this morning, we arrived at a part of the Wangaroa river where a canoe was waiting to take us to the residence of Maiowa, near the Heads. We called on our way upon a small party by the water side, and entered into conversation with them. A young Chief (Hou), the principal speaker, said that his legs were strong, and he should continue to fight till the Missionaries came, and, by their preaching, broke his feet. How mournfully characteristic are the words of Holy Writ, as descriptive of the state of this people: Their feet are swift to shed blood; the way of peace have they not known! Yet would I trust that the time to favour these poor Natives is not far distant, when our Missionaries, in simple dependence upon Divine strength, will be enabled to "break their feet," and make known among them the only way of peace, even Jesus Christ.

In the evening, at Native Prayers, about 200 assembled; the great majority of whom were women and children, most of the men being absent at their cultivations. They listened attentively while Mr. Hamlin addressed them; and I had a party afterward assembled round my tent door, asking a variety of questions relative to what they had been hearing. We had many anxious inquiries on all sides, as to when Missionaries would come and reside among them.

April 6: Lord's Day – Pehitukorehu, Haupokia, and Rangituatea, with nearly a hundred of the Nga-ti-maniapoto, arrived this morning; and, after the ceremonies of crying and eating were over, we held Service with them. Pehitukorehu, who seems to be the principal Chief, is a tall, stout, venerable-looking old man, with a white beard and hoary head; – not, alas! a crown of glory, for it is not found in the way of righteousness. In a speech which he made, he observed: "The land is large; the men are numerous: come and sit with us. I will listen, if the Missionaries stop among us, and let us see their faces; but if they come but once and do not return, I shall not perhaps attend to what they say." Haupokia told me in the afternoon that his heart was in great haste to go and fight again at Taranake; but if Missionaries came and stopped with them, he would listen to their words, and give up fighting. In the evening, while Mr. Hamlin was holding Service with our Natives, I was engaged conversing with Kanawa and his son, Werowero, and a few other Chiefs. Werowero said that he too would leave off fighting, when Missionaries came and resided with him. He desired to be at peace with the Ngapuhi; and if Pomare and Marunga would come up to Waikato in company with some of the Missionaries, it would put an end to their fighting, for he would be friends with them. May the precious seed which, in weakness and fear and trembling, we have endeavoured to scatter this day in our Master's name, be watered by the dews of the Holy Spirit, and bring forth abundant fruit to the glory of God!

April 10 – Ascended Kakepuku with Mr. Hamlin, from whence we saw Toungariro bearing S. E. by S. about seventy miles off. Our guide informed us that there are Natives living in the neighbourhood of this mountain, which has a crater on the top still burning: the sides are covered with white ashes, and there are hot springs at its base. We saw also Ruapahu, bearing S. S. E. This immense mountain is covered with snow, and looked like a brilliant bank of fleecy clouds cradled in the rays of the setting sun. Ruapahu cannot be seen either from the eastern or western coast, but is visible from Cook's Straits.

Werowero came to me this morning, to ask for some medicine for the toothache. I gave him an opium pill; but as he got no relief from it, he had native "karakia" performed over him in the afternoon. The superstitions of these Natives seem deeply rooted; and they will continue so, till the Great Physician shall reveal himself, and proclaim, as

He did of old, I am the Lord that healeth thee. They have a custom among this people, which I believe does not obtain at the northern part of the island – that of burying with any Chief of note a musket and powder, to fight his way to the Reinga: they also place by his body provision for the journey.

April 11 – Our messenger returned this afternoon, with the pleasing intelligence that a canoe was under weigh for us; and we immediately struck our tents, and walked to the entrance of Puniu (a branch of the Waipa), where the canoe was waiting for us. The tract of land over which we passed seemed very fertile; and as it is not now cultivated by the Natives, there would probably be no difficulty in procuring any part of it for a Missionary Station, should it ultimately be determined to have one in this neighbourhood. There seems, however, a great absence of timber fit for building &c, the wood being nearly all Kaikatea, and even that very scanty.

A passage from Mr. Hamlin's Journal, referring to the meeting mentioned by Mr. Brown, March 24th, will serve to illustrate the constant feeling of alarm and hostility which prevails among the Natives, and which is ready to break out whenever they meet. It exhibits, also, the friendly influence which the Missionaries have acquired. He relates –

This morning set off from Taurangarahi about an hour before the tide began to turn, at the expiration of which I thought I saw a canoe, but said nothing. I told our Natives, before starting, not to run one from another, lest we should fall in with Natives, who would most probably think we were Mangakahia Natives come again to fight. I said, "Let Mr. Brown and me go first, and all will be well:" notwithstanding which, the two Natives who were with us from Waikato pulled on; when the canoe, which I thought I saw, proved to be a boat full of Natives, pulling toward us, in which was a younger brother of Werowero, the principal Chief of Waikato, and a European. When the boat met the moki (our float), the Chief in the boat said to the two men upon the moki: "Where are you from?" "From the Ngapuhis," they replied. Seeing our mokis behind, he said: "You are a fight." He then told the men in the boat to load their muskets and fire upon those in the moki, and take them at any rate. The two men called out: "We are not a fight; but are come on a visit with some Missionaries, who are close behind." He would not believe them; but told the European to sling round the boat. Although I could not distinguish what they said, I could see there was something the matter. I therefore called out to them, as loud as I could, to wait till we came up: the Native with me cried out also, in English, "Halloo!" which the European recognised, and said: "There are some Europeans behind." They then pulled toward us; and when they saw who we were, they entered freely into conversation with us, and said they were very anxious that Missionaries should come among them. They said, we had kept ourselves at the Bay so long, that surely our children were grown large enough to become Missionaries. The Chief said: "If some of you had come among us some time ago, Taranake would now have been alive; but now they are nearly all cut off by us." No Natives could behave better than they did to us, for they offered us a passage in the boat to Waipa; and what was still better, they pulled on shore, and gave us nearly all the potatoes they had, and said that we should not want, while they had any to give us. Thus God provided for our need, in a way and manner we least expected, and was better to us than all our fears.

On a subsequent occasion, Mr. Hamlin relates, under date of April 17, 1834 –

Struck our tents, and proceeded through the wood, at the other side of which sat two men, with their cartridge-boxes girded on, filled with ammunition, their muskets loaded with ball, and they sitting in a fighting position. At the approach of the first of our Natives, the men trembled so much, that they seemed to have no strength left for any thing. It seems that two Natives saw us coming yesterday, at a distance; and, supposing us to be "a fight" from Waikato, went and spread the news that it was so; and hence arose the fears of these men. The Native assured them we were not "a fight", but Missionaries passing on to the Thames. At the Thames it seems they are always expecting Waikato Natives to fight; and at Waikato they are

in dread that the Thames and Ngapuhi are coming to fight; while, in fact, neither party has any intention of so doing.

We add a few extracts from the Journals of the other Labourers in this Mission, descriptive of the circumstances that surround them.

Superstitious Rites.

Mr. C. Baker, describing the diffusive power of Education, mentions a circumstance, which shows the long-lingering influence of Native errors. He writes, Dec. 29, 1833 –

I would observe here, that many of this party have been in the Kerikeri School; some recently, and others eight or ten years ago. The knowledge they had gained has not been lost upon them; and now that they begin to attend the Means of Grace, they have a decided advantage over all who have not been taught to read. They have the Scriptures, Catechisms, &c. put into their hands; and with what they have heard while with us, and the opportunities they now have in our visits among them, they possess a tolerable knowledge of Christian doctrines. May the Holy Spirit guide them into the way of all truth! A circumstance took place here this evening, which clearly proves that they have not yet cast off their superstitions; and even those who have had an opportunity of knowing better are not without a taint of superstition. Tua-auru, a young man belonging to the party, was taken ill: Hongi and others were sent for. On coming to the place where the sick man lay, they discovered the greatest consternation; and though, in my opinion, there was scarcely any thing the matter, the party were so full of excitement, as almost to frighten the man to death. They questioned him, to know what he had eaten last; and when told that he had not eaten any thing during the day, they began to think seriously of his illness, and at length discovered that he had used a pipe which had been tapued, and that this had caused his sickness. They then said that it was the "Atua" that was eating out his inside, and they sent off for an old priestess with all possible haste. I assured them that all they said was a delusion of the devil, and to this opinion the younger of the party paid some regard, but the older ones were wedded to their superstitious principles. The old priestess came in the course of the evening, but she was not successful in driving the "Atua" out. She said that they were many, and therefore required some time to clear them all away. I suppose the old woman will get handsomely paid, whether she effects her purposes or not.

The grotesque appearance of some of the native assemblies, from their combining various articles of European dress with their own, may be given in the words of Mr. Clarke, who describes what he and the other Missionary Labourers must often have had occasion to witness.

March 23, 1834: Sunday – About seven o'clock this morning, set out for Kaikohi. On my way met a party of Natives driving pigs. I addressed them upon the importance of attending to the interests of their never-dying souls; to which they replied in much the same way as the Europeans would with whom they are connected; viz. that they were no worse than those who made a great profession of religion. Precisely the same objections, difficulties, and arguments are used here, as among the unthinking peasantry of our own happy land. On my arrival at Kaikohi, I found about 150 Natives assembled for Service, who manifested, by their attention, that they felt an interest in what they were engaged in. Afternoon Service, at Mawe, was well attended: upward of 200 Natives were assembled together, forming one of the most grotesque assemblages my eyes ever beheld. Broughton, the Chief, I found dressed in a long carter's frock, over which he had two black waistcoats, no trowsers, shoes, or stockings: some of the women had forced their way into gowns of all shapes and sizes: one boy had a shirt on, once white, over which he had the body of a woman's gown, to answer the purpose of a jacket: many of the women, who could not procure a gown, were dressed in men's striped shirts over their native garments: one man had inverted the order of the shirt, and forced his legs through the sleeves, making thus a pair of trowsers; and another, to show that he was not altogether destitute of European clothes, had tied a pair of trowsers round his neck. Such, and much more ludicrous, was the outward appearance of my congregation, and, to crown the whole, they were perfectly unconscious of there being any thing about

them to excite a smile. Grotesque, however, as they were in appearance, they were very attentive to the Means of Grace; and some, I hope, are earnestly seeking the salvation of their souls.

He also gives the following account of

A Wedding, Native Fashion.

As we were sitting at breakfast at Mr. King's (being on a visit there), there came in a Native, saying that Tukanga was seized, and going to be taken for a wife for Taotahi, a lad living at Mr. Wilson's. A party of the Natives, consisting of the lad's father, Ureheke, Hokai, and others, came in a canoe, provoking resistance by bringing a good number with them: they escorted the female to the beach, when they were overtaken by the Natives of the Settlement, who endeavoured to rescue the bride, but in vain. Mr. King exerted himself, and was pushed down by Hokai. The contest was sharp while it lasted, but the party succeeded in taking the girl. They carried her by main strength into the canoe, and pushed off a little; when Ureheke came to Mr. King, and said that they would have a Committee on the subject. It appeared an odd way of proceeding, to take, by main force, the object of their wishes, and then call for a committee to settle the point. The Natives had much to say in committee, but to little purpose; nor was it necessary to examine the propriety of their proceeding, inasmuch as they have the law in their own hands; and when that is the case, it is but of little use to hold a committee.

Atrocities of the Unconverted Natives.

We turn with pain to notice a few instances of that savage and cruel character which formerly marked, without almost any abatement, the Natives of this land; but which the Gospel of Peace has already, in part, subdued; and will, ere long, banish from all the tribes, as they embrace the doctrine that proclaims glory to God, and goodwill to men. Mr. Clarke relates, Feb. 7, 1834 –

After dinner, went to Kerikeri, to fetch Mrs. Clarke, who has been spending a day or two with Mr. Kemp. On my arrival, I was reminded that I was still in a savage land. A Chief, with whom I had but a few hours before had a good deal of pleasing conversation, had just killed his slave wife, it is said for adultery. I little thought, when the Chief took his leave of me with a hearty shake of the hand, that he was about to embrue his hands in the blood of a fellow-creature. I accompanied Mr. Kemp to the spot where the poor creature had been killed, to see whether we could not inter the body, to prevent its being devoured. On our arrival, we found that the body had floated down the river with the tide, and the poor unhappy master and husband had precipitately left, to avoid meeting us.

Mr. W. Fairburn, writing from the newly-formed Station of Puriri, June 24, 1834, communicates the following painful facts: –

Not more than a month ago, a man and his wife, natives of Waikato, came over to our Settlement to see a relative, and had been here for some days, when a young Chief of another party, who lived thirty miles lower down the river, named Koinake (and between whom and the Waikato tribe a deadly feud exists), came to our valley, under the mask of friendship, to see Kapa and his wife (for such was their name), professing to wish all past animosity to be at an end. He succeeded, after remaining three days in the valley eating and sleeping with them, in persuading them to accompany him to his Kainga, down the river. They had not proceeded more than ten or twelve miles, before the vulture landed with his prey, killed them both with his hatchet, and afterwards conveyed the dead bodies in his canoe to his settlement, where, I am informed, they were afterwards eaten. All this was done in revenge for the death of a relative of his, who was cut off by another party in connexion with the tribe to which the murdered man and woman belonged, about seven years ago. This is by no means a solitary instance of their treachery to one another; for such are almost continually occurring in one shape or other. They never forget an injury, and never let slip an opportunity, when they have it in their power to revenge it.

It was reported, some few days after Koinake's murder of Kapa and his wife, that a party from Waikato came by night to Wakatiwai (a tribe belonging to Koinake's party), to plunder the dead body of poor old Rauroha, formerly the principal Chief of the tribe, who died a short time ago. The wife of the

deceased, who is a native of Waikato, after her husband died, returned to her friends; and it is reported that she herself conducted a party of forty armed men by night to protect her, should she be surprised while carrying into execution their revolting purpose, viz. stripping the dead body of its grave-clothes, consisting of blankets, mats, &c, which are always considered sacred, and are buried with the body: this was done from a desire to provoke, and in retaliation for the above-named murder; as, from the time the man had been dead, the things must have been in a state of decay. It is in this way that their endless system of warfare is, and will continue to be, kept up, until the peace-working spirit of the everlasting Gospel, through the mercy of our Heavenly Father, shall illuminate their minds, and bring them to a knowledge of the Truth as it is in Jesus. Satan is struggling hard to keep his ground; but I trust, as long as the promise remains, that Jesus shall have the Heathen for his inheritance, we shall, through grace, march boldly on, in humble dependence on His blessing, who has promised to be with his people always, even unto the end of the world.

From the same Station of Puriri, Mr. J. A. Wilson writes, June 21, 1834 –

The state of this unhappy people at present is truly lamentable: several vessels have of late been plundered by them, though I have not heard that any of the crews have been murdered. A Chief of the Wakatiwai tribe, only a few weeks ago, killed a man and a woman belonging to another party, at a short distance from our Settlement, where they were cooked and devoured by their enemies. This shocking feature in the native character is still very prevalent about these parts, and further south; though at the northward it appears to have nearly ceased, to the praise of the blessed Gospel which they have heard.

We sum up our present accounts of this Mission with a very different subject – a view of the well-founded joy with which the Natives hailed the

Introduction of the Printing-Press.

Mr. W. R. Wade, Superintendant of the Press, writes as follows, on this and other topics, January 10, 1835 –

Every thing here is new and interesting. We already feel ourselves at home, among Christian Brethren and Sisters: and as to the Natives, those I mean connected with the Mission Settlement, both Mrs. Wade and myself were much pleased with them. Their habits seem strange at first to a European, particularly the independence and familiarity of those who act as servants to the Missionaries: but one thing very soon struck me, as speaking volumes as to their improved character – the doors of the Mission-Houses stand open the whole day, so that Natives can come in and go out at pleasure. Frequently a native man or woman will come in, to see any thing new, or to have a little chat; and yet it is a very rare occurrence for a single thing to be missing from the premises. This is not the case near London! It was very gratifying, and I may say truly affecting, to hear the native responses, for the first time, last Sunday morning. Never in England have I heard any thing to come up to it. All the voices seem to join in, and keep exact time together; and the language, with pure native pronunciation, is really melodious. A marked attention was observed during the whole Service. The impression produced on my mind will not be easily forgotten, though I cannot describe it.

The arrival of the Press is, as we expected, hailed by our friends here as a memorable event for New Zealand; and as for the Natives, those who assisted in bringing it ashore shouted and danced on the sand, when told it was "ta pukapuka" (a book-press, or a book-making machine). There is an extraordinary demand for books all around.

A few words are added on the same topic, by Mr. W. Colenso, who went out as a printer; and on whom the exultations of the day, marked by the arrival of the press, appear to have been liberally bestowed.

We found our dear Brethren, who rejoiced to see us, in health. The next morning the Natives surrounded us, crying, "Ra pai Mihanere – Very good Missionary," uttering exclamations of, joy, and tendering us their hands on every side: and when the Rev. W. Williams gave them to understand that I was a printer, and come out, to print books for them, they were quite elated. No hero of olden time was ever received by his army with greater eclat: they appeared as if they would deify me. During the

week, I was busily employed with the Natives in landing the goods; and on Saturday, January 3, 1835, a memorable epoch in the annals of New Zealand, I succeeded in getting the printing-press landed. I was obliged to unpack it on board, but I am happy to say it is all safe on shore. Could you but have witnessed the Natives, when it was landed! they danced, shouted, and capered about in the water, giving vent to the wildest effusions of joy; inquiring the use of this, and the place of that, with all that eagerness for which uncivilized nature is remarkable: certainly, they had never seen such a thing before. I trust soon to be enabled to get it to work.

We add his description of the first impressions made on a stranger's mind, by the solemnities of Religious Worship in New Zealand.

Our first Sabbath in this land was one that will not, I trust, be easily forgotten. After the Service, and a Sermon in the native language by the Rev. H. Williams, a little Native was baptized, by the name of Piripi (Philip). The Rev. A. N. Brown preached a Sermon in English, and we commemorated the dying love of our dear Redeemer. Surely it was a festal day! That, on our first Sabbath in this land, the first in the year, we should be blessed with witnessing the celebration of both Sacraments; and, what is far greater, with feeling an interest in the blood of Jesus; was more than we could have expected.

Throughout the island there appears to be a universal movement, a mighty stirring of the people. The Chiefs of distant tribes come down to Waimate and this place, for books and Missionaries. These seem to be the ne plus ultra of their ambition. I have seen them, myself, gladly bring their store of potatoes for a book.

It is a gladdening sight to see and hear the Natives at prayers. Religious Worship is generally conducted by a baptized Native Christian. Their language conveys in its tones something peculiarly devotional. The Confession, the Lord's Prayer, and other parts of our beautiful Liturgy, sound, in the native tongue, really awe-inspiring. Every morning and evening, the Chief and the slave, the once-cannibal-warrior, and the smiling babe, are to be found together prostrate before the mercy-seat of their Cod and Saviour. If any one's heart wants animating toward Missions, he should witness this sight: if he did not soften, be must be, indeed, harder than the nether millstone. We can now adopt the language of the Prophet: From the uttermost parts of the earth have we heard songs, even glory to the righteous!

Yet every Christian Reader, while he hails these openings, still remembering what human-nature is, and what professedly-Christian England is – perceiving how the good creatures of God, and the best inventions of art, may be abused to the worst of purposes – will, on this occasion, rejoice with trembling; and lift up his prayer, that the introduction of the printing-press into New Zealand may be FOR GOOD, AND FOR GOOD ONLY!

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

THE accounts of the progress of this Mission are continued from page 239 of the present Volume.

New Zealand.

In our Number for the month of September last, an account was given of a visit made by the Rev. A. N. Brown and Mr. J. Hamlin to the Waikato Tribe, with a view to the establishment of New Stations. Subsequently, it appeared expedient that the Rev. Messrs. W. Williams and Brown, together with Mr. J. Morgan, should make a similar expedition, with a view to complete the design. They proceeded, therefore, from the Bay of Islands; and, during an absence of four months and three days, took the requisite measures, as will appear from the following extracts from their Journals, for the

Settlement of a New Station, on the Waikato River.

We commence with the communications of the Rev. W. Williams, at the period of their arrival at Ngaruawahia, at which place it appeared the most expedient to form a New Station.

Aug. 16, 1834 – -As soon as we had breakfasted, we pulled toward the Pa; and had not proceeded far, before we were met by nine canoes, which came out to meet us. There was an immediate discharge of muskets on both sides; which we were glad to have concluded, as many of the balls from the opposite party passed close by us. We remained in our canoes for some time, opposite the Pa; when an old priest, besmeared with oil and red ochre, paddled himself across the river toward us; and having landed, he called Kati and his companions on shore, to have a ceremony performed, in consequence of their narrow escape at Wakatiwai. Before the priest began, they threw off every garment, and even divested themselves of the ornaments in their ears; and remained seated for some minutes before him, while he repeated his karakia. This concluded, we passed over to the Pa; where the usual ceremony of crying was gone through, which was followed by a plentiful supply of food.

Aug. 17 – We pitched our tents last night about half-a-mile above the Pa, near to the house occupied by Captain Kent, who has treated us with great civility. After breakfast, we passed over to the Pa, and assembled upward of 200 Natives to Service; at the conclusion of which, nine canoes, containing about 120 men, came from the higher part of the river. These also heard us with much attention; and we then passed on to another party of equal number. They all said it was very good to listen to our instruction; but that if we staid only for a day or two, and returned, it would be of no service to them. I told them, that I was sent to remain with them, and that others are to follow.

Aug. 18 – To-day I have had much conversation with Werowero, who is the principal Chief of Waikato, relative to the place at which I am to reside. He is anxious for me to remain near him, and is willing to give up any situation I may select; but the body of the Natives live further up the river, and it will be necessary to select a central position.

Aug. 21 – Left Ngaruawahia this morning; and had not proceeded far up the river, before the land was pointed out which Werowero wished to assign to me; but there are no Natives living within three miles, which is a great objection. We proceeded about fourteen miles, the banks on either side being lined with cultivations, nearly the whole distance; but, for the most part, having but few inhabitants, except in the planting season.

Aug. 23 – We continued our course to day up the river, against a strong current; passing, on our way, two places which have been rendered memorable by the wars of the Ngapuhi. The first is called the Rore; and is the spot where Pomare, the last of the Ngapuhi who did any mischief here, met with his death. He had committed many depredations, killing a number of people and destroying much property; when at length a large body of men waylaid him on either side of the river, and succeeded in cutting off the greater part of his people. The second

place is called Matakitaki. It was formerly a Pa, containing 5000 people. It was taken by Hongi, at a time when this people had no fire-arms. They fell an easy prey, not being able to make resistance, and great numbers were slaughtered. We landed in the afternoon at a village called Mangapouri, not being able to proceed so far as we wished. We were afterward much pleased with the spot; so much so, that we considered it a providential circumstance that we were not permitted to proceed further.

Aug. 26, 1834 – This evening, a messenger returned, who had been to fetch the Chief. He says, that, on his arrival, the people were talking about setting off to fight; but that as soon as the Chief heard that the Missionaries had sent for him, he said he would return, and leave the rest to settle the dispute.

Allotment of House and Garden.

Aug. 27 – This morning, Awarahi and his party arrived. He is a young man, with much vivacity in his manner, and his appearance is prepossessing. He says, that if I like to remain here, I shall have a house erected immediately; but that, with respect to himself, he is a man of war, and to war he must go at present. "Perhaps," said he, "you may have one little boy to believe on your preaching now: and by and bye, we may, perhaps, all believe. The Ngapuhi did not listen till the Missionaries had been long with them; neither can we." On telling him I had made up my mind to remain, he directly got up, and asked me to point out the spot for my house; and, in five minutes, about forty men were employed in clearing the ground upon which it was to stand, and the dimensions were marked out. In the evening, I had a long conversation with them: at the close of which, Awarahi observed, that they should soon all believe, and that our instruction is good, because it tends to their benefit.

Aug. 28 – This morning, Mr. Brown and myself were employed in planting the fruit-trees we had brought with us, in a spot of ground near to my projected dwelling, while the Natives of the place were gone in quest of materials for the house. In the course of the day we heard a salute of three guns, which announced the arrival of the Chief; who, hearing that we had arrived, had come some distance, in the dark, to see us. With him I had a long and very interesting conversation. He had previously expressed a wish for Missionaries, and seemed somewhat disappointed that I was not going to live a little nearer to him. But when I explained that we wished to have access to as many tribes as possible, he observed: "You are right: the place you have chosen is the channel of the river," alluding to the position of the Natives on either side. Asking what he had to say to our errand, he replied: "We have nothing to say: it is for you to speak: our part will be to listen to you."

The Missionary Promise performed.

Aug. 30 – We had a good deal of rain in the night; which gave us a bad prospect for the morning, as want of food would oblige us to continue our route to the next village. We were thankful, to be able to accomplish the greater part of our distance this morning without much rain, until we reached the opposite side of Maungatautari: here we found Mr. Morgan, having his tent pitched, at a place where there is a party of 200 mens belonging to the Chief Waharoa. The appearance of the people does not much recommend them; but they have been civil, and have made several inquiries after the Missionary, whom, they say, my brother promised they should have. They say, that when he was here, nine months ago, he requested the old Chief to give up his hatchet, which was an implement of great renown; telling him, that if he gave up fighting he should have a Missionary: – that he gave up his hatchet, and has been living quietly ever since, waiting for the completion of the promise.

Sept. 2 – Arrived about noon at Matamata; where we found old Waharoa, seated at the outside of the Pa to receive us. This old Chief is one of the finest specimens of a Native I have yet seen. He is of middle stature, with small features, well formed: his beard is grey; and his hair, which is partially so, is exceedingly neat; while his dress and general deportment mark him out among the multitude as the superior Chief. He has long been celebrated as a warrior; but his manners are mild, and the expression of his countenance prepossessing. I had expected to find a surly old man, not very well pleased, because he had not yet got a Missionary to reside with him. He soon began to talk upon the subject, but it was in a very quiet way. He said, that he had heard of Jesus Christ; and that, in consequence of what the Missionaries had said to him, he had refrained from

going to fight, under circumstances which called for him to rise up. "But," said he, "how can I believe? I have no one to teach me; no one to tell me when it is the Sabbath Day; no one to direct me what to do: and the people around begin to jeer, and to tell me I am sitting still in vain, for that no Missionary will come." I explained to him our plans for Waikato and Tauranga; and said, that, when a Mission was established at the latter place, we hoped to do something for him. Our Settlement in the Thames, and those projected at Waikato and Tauranga, form a triangle; and Matamata lies between the three, but nearest to Tauranga. The people here behave exceedingly well; and in the evening we had a very attentive audience.

Earnest Requests to increase "the Missionary Tribe."

Sept. 9, 1834 – We passed on to Maungatapu, and met with a better reception from the Chief than at Otumoetai. He seemed to take much pleasure in showing all that was to be seen about his fortification; describing the position held by the Ngapuhi when they made their attack last year, and relating various incidents which occurred at that period. He observed to his people: "Now the Missionaries are coming, we shall, for the first time, become a people. Other Europeans stay for a time only; but if these people come, they will continue with us." At prayers, we assembled about 150 Natives.

Sept. 13 – Arrived within two miles of Matamata, when the rain came on heavily; and we were glad to take refuge in a small village near at hand, where we pitched our tent, and sent to Waharoa for some food. The food came; and was soon followed by the old man, who wished us to have proceeded on: but finding we were comfortably fixed, he staid with us. He soon resumed the subject which seems uppermost in his thoughts – that of having a Missionary. "The Thames will believe," said he, "and Tauranga will believe, and Waikato; but what am I to do?" In the evening we had prayers; when I spoke of the happiness to be enjoyed in heaven, and said that it was God's wish that they should all go there; and that to this end, He had sent His Son to die for us. The old man looked deeply interested, and exclaimed: "That is the reason I wish for a Missionary, in order that I may be instructed."

Sept. 14 – The continuance of rain today has prevented me from going to the Pa, where the body of Natives are; but the few who are at this place came together, morning and evening, and paid very great attention. After the hymn, with which we commenced, Waharoa again exclaimed: "This is the reason I wish for a Missionary, that we may have some one to teach us." Having read the 13th and 14th verses of the 7th chapter of St. Matthew, he observed: "The narrow road is the road to Jesus Christ, and the broad road is the road which leads to Wiro." Speaking again of the great love of God toward us, he added: "And do you show some love to me, by giving me a Missionary: if we are left by ourselves, these people you now see will die, and go the road which leads to Wiro."

Sept. 20 – Proceeded to Waiharakeke; where, though there was time enough to have reached Matamata, we were obliged to remain over the Lord's Day. At prayers in the evening, poor old Waharoa continued in the same strain, directly I mentioned the name of Jesus Christ. "The people at the Thames, at Tauranga, and at Waipa, will believe, and go into the presence of Jesus Christ; but we at Matamata shall be left to go to Wiro."

Sept. 24 – Proceeded to another village, distant about four miles; where we remained, that our Natives might rest their backs. We had thus an opportunity of repeating our Message to many who can but seldom listen to it. I extracted a musket-ball from the thigh of a Chief, which immediately procured me several patients labouring under different complaints. I overheard a man inquiring the number of the Missionary Tribe. "If there are many," said he, "we may have one here."

Sept. 27 – I told Awarahi, our Chief, of the difficulties we have in bringing our supplies by way of the Thames; and that I was ashamed that I had nothing to give, at present, to the people who are at work on the house. "Oh," said he, "we do not think of that: we have got you, and that is the taonga nui" (great possession).

Oct. 18 – Being unable now to reach Waipa by Sunday, I determined to lengthen my stay, and visit the opposite side, where the Ngatimaniapoto live; and reached the abode of Haupokia, the Chief, in the evening. He is a fine young man, of very pleasing manner and

much intelligence; but he is a great warrior, and has been represented as the main-spring of his party, which numbers 1000 men. He told Messrs. Brown and Hamlin, when here a few months ago, that if the Missionaries would come and live with him, he would give up fighting. I reminded him of what he had then said, which he allowed was correct; and I felt myself now at liberty to say, that Missionaries were coming to him. The people paid much attention at prayers.

A brief extract from Mr. Brown's narrative of the same visit will further exhibit the great

Importunity of the Chiefs to have Missionaries.

Aug. 17, 1834 – Went with Mr. W. Williams to the Pa: most of the people were at work upon different houses; but on my going round and telling them that it was the Lord's Day, they left their work, and assembled for Divine Worship. They were very attentive while Mr. Williams addressed them. Many old friends, whom I saw in my last. journey with Mr. Hamlin, were among the group; and they all seem highly delighted at the idea of Mr. Williams residing at Waikato as their Teacher. Nearly 500 Natives, in three parties, have this day had the Gospel proclaimed among them: many have, probably, for the first time heard the glad tidings.

Aug. 22 – Continued our course up the Waipa: called at the Horo Pa, and saw a large party of Natives. After leaving that place, we met Kauae at a short distance, who urged us to return with him to the Horo; but, being pressed for time, we deemed it unadvisable to do so, and requested him to go with us up the river; which he did, to another of his residences, where we staid for the night. Kauae is the Chief who led the fight against Wakatiwai; and, if report speaks true, is a very desperate character. There is nothing however in his countenance which indicates this, although much energy and determination are displayed in it. We mentioned to him the names of the Ngapuhi Chiefs who had embraced the Gospel. "They have Missionaries," was his reply: "can I believe, through the trees?" The indignation which at first it is difficult to repress, at finding ourselves in the presence of a murderer, was softened, on this occasion, by the recollection, that, in past years, no man had cared for his soul; and that he had been left fast bound in the chains of Satan, with little effort on the part of the Church to break them. Now, however, the news of Salvation is, as it were, brought to his house, by the proposed establishment of a Missionary Station in this district; and I trust that that Gospel, through whose power murderers have been saved, will prove effectual to the turning of even him from the slavery of Satan, to His service, whose yoke is easy, and whose burden is light.

Sept. 3 – We went this morning, at Waharoa's request, to a plantation in the woods, near the Pa, where about 600 Natives were assembled. The men were engaged in planting potatoes, with long pieces of wood, answering the purpose of spades; the old Chiefs were sitting under the trees; and groupes of children were playing around. When they had finished planting, Waharoa proposed our returning to the fence of the Pa, in order that his people might assemble there, "to hear the talk of the Missionaries." After sitting a short time, the people rushed from the plantation in native style, and began dancing and making a few speeches, the principal topics of which formed a strange contrast: they were, War, and Missionaries. Old Waharoa said that his residence was at a cross-path; and that, while sitting there, he should see a white man coming toward him, whom he should find to be a Missionary from Tauranga, passing through his place on a visit to the Missionaries at Waipa: that afterwards he should see another white man coming along, who would prove to be a Missionary from Waipa, going to Tauranga, or else to the Thames Station; and that when we passed by him, and saw that there was no Teacher living with him, we should be "bad, with exceeding shame." I feel that something must be done for this powerful and well-disposed Chief.

Mr. Morgan, who had been sent for to join Messrs. W. Williams and Brown in this undertaking, met with some troublesome circumstances on the way, both going and returning; his manner of dealing with which, as described in the following passages, shows the

Necessity of quiet Firmness with the Natives.

Thought it probable that we should find a party of Natives at the river, with their canoe, and be able to obtain a

passage with them to Ngaruawahia, which would save us the trouble we had contemplated of making a "moki" (a kind of rush raft), to go down the stream. Divided our stock of potatoes into three lots. Found one lot, together with my tent, rather a heavy burden; but cheerfully put it on my back, hoping that I had not far to carry it. In about half an hour, we met the party. They informed me that they had come from Ngaruawahia, and had landed from their canoes, to procure potatoes. On inquiring about my Brethren, they told me that they had left that place for Onepaka, and would proceed on to Tauranga, by way of Maungatautari. As they were going to the latter place, I thought it would be better to accompany them; and wait there the arrival of my Brethren; and therefore made arrangements with them to that effect. After spending about half an hour in conversation with them, on looking around, I saw a Chief of the name of Kupa, who appeared to be the leading man of the party, examining a bundle which contained the blanket of one of my Natives. Said nothing to him at the time, but thought I would watch his motions a little longer. In a few minutes he gave a signal to strip me, by saying that I should be "dead for my things," and immediately took up a large corded bundle. I walked up to him, and, taking hold of the cord, took it out of his hand: he gave it up, without offering any resistance. On turning about, I saw two or three others decamping with some articles; but on my following them, they gave them up also.

I then collected my luggage together, and spoke to them about their evil intentions toward me as a Messenger of God; and asked them what evil I had done, as they sought to take the few things I had with me. They replied, that I came from the Thames (the enemy's country), and therefore to strip me would be "straight," as a payment for the stripping of their Chief, Kati, by the Wakatiwai Natives, a few weeks ago. I told them that they were acting wrong; but they replied: "It is quite straight, according to our native custom." I answered: "God says, 'Thou shaft not steal';" and requested them to listen to the Word of God, and not to Satan. From their conversation, they appeared to think that I had with me a number of blankets, and a quantity of tobacco; and, in the absence of the leading man of their tribe, sought thus unlawfully to enrich themselves. After some further conversation, they informed me, that the "Tinorangatira" (principal Chief) was with the canoes, at a short distance. I said: "If it will be well for me to accompany you peaceably to Maungatautari, I will go with you." They replied: "It will be good for you to go peaceably." Engaged two of the party to assist in carrying my luggage, glad to be relieved of my own burden; having been obliged to carry, more or less, every day since I left the boat, as well as to lighten the burdens of my two lads. After a smart walk, reached the canoes. When Puke, and other of the leading men, heard of what their party had done, they were very angry, and said, "It is very bad." There were four or five canoes, and from seventy to eighty Natives, including the women and children, embarked. After contending for some time against a stream, running four miles an hour, we reached the place where they had determined to spend the night. They assisted me to pitch my tent, and spoke of starting in the morning. I told them that it would be the "ra tapu" (sacred day); that God commanded us not to work on His day, and therefore it would be better for us all to sit still. In the evening, assembled them for prayers, in the front of my tent. In the course of my address, I alluded to what they had done in the morning; and told them that I did not fear them; and that if they wished to strip me, to do so. I again said: "Although I have no means of defending myself, I do not fear your anger, because God is the guardian of His Messengers; and, should you kill the body of the believer in Jesus, his spirit would go to its rest in the kingdom of heaven." Kupa, the Chief who gave the signal in the morning, sat on my left hand: he appeared much ashamed, and hung down his head while I spoke.

Oct. 28, 1834 – Morning, prayers with the Natives. I read the Ten Commandments, and closed with the usual prayers. Returned to my tent, and we sat down to breakfast. Sent for Awarahi, and informed him about the tobacco. On my handing out the package from which it had been taken, a Native, who was sitting at the tent door, said: "That is my burden: nothing has been taken out of it." He denied any knowledge of the theft, but his countenance betrayed him. We were then informed that he had given

away six figs yesterday. A small bundle was handed to me, containing a few pieces, with the confession that he had opened the bundle, and had taken out twelve figs. Awarahi said: "Who would steal a little?" Tana, on hearing his confession, pulled his garments from his back, threw them on the ground, kicked and struck him several times, and said: "Had you been one of our party, we would have killed you immediately." We now thought it time for us to interfere; and we told them that their talk was very bad. Mr. Stack, who was sitting near the door, went outside, and told them that they must not hurt him. For some time he continued to deny having taken more than the twelve figs; but at length it came out, that he had taken all, and left them behind at Matamata. It was then agreed, that one of our party and a Chief from that place should return for it, and follow us to Maungatautari. Awarahi behaved very well. We have every reason to believe that neither of our principal Chiefs was concerned in the theft. Struck the tents; and, at noon, reached Maungatautari. When Service was concluded, a man said: "I have listened to your talk, and you ought now to give me some tobacco for doing so." Dined; and proceeded on for about two miles. The Natives then sat down on the grass; and told us that we must pitch our tents, and wait the return of the two Natives from Matamata. Service in the evening. Awarahi requested Mr. Stack to talk about the Judgment; and said: "Since I have heard of the fire to which the souls of the wicked go after death, I have felt concerned for my child, because he died an unbeliever."

While the Misions is thus extending itself through the island, it becomes increasingly important to seek that blessed influence from above, without which they labour in vain who are endeavouring to build the Temple of the Lord in this land. We shall, by a considerable variety of extracts from the Journals of the Missionaries, aim at exhibiting the evidences of

Spiritual Blessings attendant on the Mission.

Aug. 31, 1834 – We came to Hihi's place, and were all greeted with feelings of affection. Their Service was over, which I conjectured would be the case. After a little conversation, and some refreshment, I crossed over to Hiamoe and his people. All well on my arrival. I congratulated them on their change, and exhorted them stedfastly to embrace the offer of the Gospel. I held Service with them, at their especial desire; as the flood was too high to admit of their assembling together for Evening Service. On taking leave, all flocked around, to shake hands, which, in their estimation, is a very necessary evidence of the feeling of the heart: consequently, they require the hand to be fully grasped, and to have three or four good shakes given. This is rather inconvenient, as it occupies a good deal of time, besides rendering the hand "tapued," owing to the filthy state of their habits, which we hope will gradually fall off as the dead leaves of autumn. However, it is cheering to witness their change. They observed, that vegetation was now beginning to show itself, after a long drought; i. e. that the Word was beginning to spring up in their hearts, after the many years wherein they had rejected it. The old man, Hiamoe, desired us not to leave them. I passed on to Pakututu: he and his wife were in their house: they invited me to enter. After some conversation, they desired to have Service. This is one of the places which has been under the particular dominion of Papaurihia, an impostor, who has aimed at making the Natives keep the Sabbath on the Saturday. After Service was concluded, Pakututu said that he must have a relative of his, one of our youths, to live with him, as domestic chaplain. The youth is a Candidate for Baptism, and in a very pleasing state. He observed, that his wife, and nearly all the others, had gone over to us, and he would not be left alone – that the tide was rising higher and higher, and that it was needful for him to flee for his life. This man appeared in great earnest. His wife accompanied us on our way toward the boat. We were required to call at Hoari's house, where a good congregation of about forty were assembled. They had concluded prayers, but waited for me to address them. The portion which they had been reading was Matthew ii. – the Star of Bethlehem; to which I directed their attention. – – - [Rev. Henry Williams.

June 29 – I started early for Kaikohe. In my way, met old and young going to

the native chapels for Morning Service, with their books under their arms: cheerful countenances indicated the pleasures they anticipated from the duties of the day. We passed our usual salutations; and I proceeded on to Kaikohe, where I met about 200 Natives assembled, in a commodious native chapel, for Service, waiting my arrival. Their deportment during the Service was pleasing: there are, I hope, a few decidedly serious Natives in this congregation. From Kaikohe I returned to Mawe, where I found about 150 Natives assembled. After Service, spoke to several Natives privately: one man seemed a good deal concerned at his state as a sinner. From Mawe I returned to Totaka, where from 30 to 50 Natives assembled. In my little congregation, I observed an old Chief, who had formerly very much opposed us, and the cause of Christ among his countrymen. I spoke to him after Service, and told him I was glad to see him at chapel. He asked me if I knew his name; which I repeated. He replied, that that was his old name, but he thought of having a new one. I advised him to seek a new heart.

Nov. 12, 1834 – After breakfast, visited the Natives of the Ahuahu and Maungakawakawa. A Christian Native, who accompanied me from the Ahuahu, proposed some very interesting questions to me; viz. "What is the duty of a Christian with regard to thefts committed in the days of ignorance? Is that the universal principle named by Zaccheus – of restoring fourfold after conversion?" His conscience, he said, had given him a great deal of trouble on this point: he had been a thief, in his days of ignorance; and if fourfold were the principle, he would, as far as he could, adopt it. I told him, that if he mentioned any particular circumstance to me, I should be better able to advise him. He said, when living with us at the Kerikeri, he stole an axe from me: he had also pilfered many little things on board ships which visited the Bay. There, he said, be could make no compensation, not knowing the names of the vessels; but he was very willing to make a fourfold compensation for the axe. Believing the young man to be very sincere, and truly sorry, I gave him St. Paul's advice, viz. Let him that stole, steal no more; but rather let him work, &c. He said he should bring me some corn, in the autumn.

Nov. 14 – After school, visited Ngaitewake Village, to see a young woman, who was suddenly taken very ill. After giving her some medicine, I addressed about twenty Natives, who were gathered around. They confessed they were thoughtless and secure, till aroused by some afflictive dispensation; that we were at all times their friends, in giving them instruction and advice for both soul and body; and promised to be more attentive in future. From thence I visited the Natewiu, with whom I spent several hours, instructing them in their present and future interests: with two Christian Natives I had some conversation on the Ordinance of the Lord's Supper: while they confessed their unworthiness, they saw it a duty and a privilege to become partakers of that Ordinance. – – - [Mr. G. Clarke.

Feb. 2 – This morning, some of our Natives being in from the sea, where they have lived for some time, on account of the scarcity of food, we had a full chapel. At Taiamai, my congregation consisted of about 100 people, including children. This evening I had also a pretty large congregation. At chapel, this morning, I could not but remark the different appearances of the countenances of the Natives. In the middle of the chapel sat a Chief from the northward, who had just arrived with letters from Mr. Matthews, surrounded by a few of his people: this man's countenance appeared sullen and heavy, accompanied with a savage ferocity, such as was depicted in the countenances of almost all the Natives a few years ago; whereas the countenances of the congregation, generally, appeared lighted up with desire after Divine instruction; which had a tendency to produce an appearance of placidity, to which the others seemed to be utter strangers. At Taiamai also, after Divine Service, a young man followed me, to ask me how he should find out Christ.

Feb. 9 – At Taiamai, this afternoon, my congregation consisted of about 130 people. After Service, one man followed me, to ask what a talent was; and what St. Paul meant, when he said, O wretched man that I am! who shall deliver me from the body of this death? Another person followed me further, to express his desire to be made acquainted with the things that pertain to the salvation of the soul. Blessed be God, that they

are inquiring! may His Holy Spirit be poured out abundantly upon them! Temorenga seemed much pleased at the largeness of the congregation, and expressed himself in a pleasing way. Motoi, the Chief whom I before mentioned as coming and sitting at the window during Service, came again to-day. Poor fellow, he sticks very close to his superstitions; but even this Dagon must fall before the Ark.

July 11, 1834 – Several Natives have been with me, and, among them, a lad, who appears to have suffered much in his mind from a sense of sin: he told me he had been much wounded by Satan.

Another young man told me he felt himself like a person who had fallen overhead in a bog; and that his state was such, that every person who wished to help him out, shared the same fate with himself; so that it was in vain for him to expect help from man. – – - [Mr. R. Davis.

Mr. Davis has given the following relation of a scene, eminently calculated to encourage every Christian Labourer who soweth in hope, but who is not always permitted speedily to see the fruits of his labour.

Dying Testimony of a Converted aged Chief.

Nov. 2 – At Broughton's Chapel, the congregation was very large, and somewhat attentive. After Service, they asked me to go and visit a sick man, who was lying in a house near at hand. I went: and found him lying in a verandah, with a dirty garment over him as a covering, and a dirty mat under him, rolled up as a pillow, on which he rested his dying head. He was an old man: his beard was grey: he was fully tattooed. His countenance had been remarkably fine, but it was now being fixed in death. I knelt over him, with deep feelings of regret and sorrow of heart. Surely, thought I, this poor man's glass is run out, and his spirit is about to appear in the presence of the Maker of heaven and earth. Alas! alas! what can be done for him now? After these feelings had passed through my mind as I hung over the dying man, I spoke to him. He tried to speak, but his pale blue lips refused to perform their office: he tried again; and, after a weak hollow cough or two, he at length succeeded. As his power of speech returned, his countenance brightened up: he raised his dying arm, and, letting it fall upon his breast, exclaimed: "My mind is fixed upon Christ, as my Saviour." – "How long have you been seeking Christ?" "From the first," he replied. "Christ is in my heart, and my soul is joyful." I requested him to keep a firm hold of Christ, as the language expresses it, and to beware of the tempter. He replied: "I have no fear: Christ is with me." I read to him a few verses of the 14th chapter of St. John's Gospel; spoke a few words on the great love of God in the redemption of sinners by the death of Christ; and engaged in prayer, in which he appeared to join with earnestness. After prayer, he told me how much he blessed God for sending His Messengers to him with the Message of Salvation. He told me he was dying, and seemed to long to be with Christ. I told him not to be impatient. "Oh," said he, "I shall die to-day: this is the sacred day." We now took leave of each other, until we should meet in our Heavenly Father's house.

The relief which I felt to my mind, while I knelt over the dying man, on hearing him express his faith in Christ, can be better conceived than expressed. I looked upon him as a poor, ignorant, dying savage; but, oh, the infinite riches of sovereign grace! I was kneeling over one of God's dear children, who seemed to be resting firmly on His omnipotent arm, even in the midst of the river of death: his views of the Saviour seemed clear, his evidence bright. During our short conversation, his countenance, which was no doubt previously settled in death, beamed with lively joy, and evidently betokened his faith as being in lively exercise: in short, the savour of the name of Jesus seemed, as it were, to bring him back for a few minutes into life, in order that he might leave a dying testimony behind him, as to the power and value of Religion to support the soul in death. Nearly the whole of my congregation was around me while we conversed and prayed together; and it was remarked, that they had never seen the like before. To God's name be all the glory, for ever and ever! It appears, on recollection, that this poor man came to me, with many more of Broughton's people, some little time since, to make some inquiries respecting the salvation of his soul; but, at first sight, I did not recognise him again. His conversation then, as far as I can recollect, was pleasing and satisfac-

tory; but I cannot recollect particulars. Surely, if this were all, my poor Missionary toil would be fully repaid.

Nov. 3, 1834 – This morning, some Natives came pretty early, with the measure for a coffin for Tupapa, the man mentioned yesterday. It appears his happy soul took its flight to the bosom of his Saviour soon after I left him yesterday. – Happy saint! When I took leave of him, he was peaceful, for he was near his Father's home.

The remaining particulars, given by Mr. Davis, concerning this Chief, present a lively picture of the

Divine Mercy overruling for good the Catastrophes of War.

The history of poor Tupapa is by no means without interest to the observant Christian. He was originally a Chief of considerable note and family, of the Taranaki tribe; but being always involved in war with the large district of Waikato, he was, with his wife and daughter, in one of their engagements, taken prisoner, with a great number of others. At this time, the man and his little family were preserved, by an all-wise Providence, from the general fate of their prisoners of war, viz. from being cooked and eaten. But, however, this does not appear to have been a merciful act on the part of the bloody victors; for he and his family were preserved, with a few others, and brought to the Bay of Islands, where the greater part of them were sold as slaves to the Ngapuhi tribes, for muskets and powder, and other instruments of death. On the arrival of the captive Chief and his family in the Bay, the hand of Providence did not leave him there; for not being able to dispose of the family, or any branch thereof, his merciless victors undertook to march them over the island to the heads of Hokianga, to a Chief called Moitara, when they were to have had some muskets for them: but, as they passed through Broughton's place, being recognised by some neighbours, who had previously arrived there from the southern part of the island, they were persuaded by them to run away and secrete themselves in the woods, until their masters should have returned. This advice they took: and not being found, after the Waikato tribes returned from the Bay, they came forth from the woods; and he put himself under the protection of Broughton's tribe; where he lived in peace; where he heard and received the glad tidings of peace and salvation; and from whence his soul, after having been purified by the blood of Christ, winged its way to the Paradise of God. From what I can learn, it is about four or five years ago that Tupapa and his family were brought to the Bay: his wife did not live long after her arrival: his daughter is still alive; but as she is young, I hope to be able to succeed in getting her to live in the Settlement, in order that she may be brought up in the fear of God. The dying father expressed great affection for her.

We add a few particulars, evincing the manner in which the enemy is permitted to harass and corrupt the Infant Churches of New Zealand. This is to be seen both in

Satanic Delusions, and Persecuting Encroachments.

Sept. 5 – Heavy rain all night. Hamu was evidently much concerned, and had much to say about Wara's dreams. I sent for him, to hear what he had to say. He related, that, in his dream, he heard a voice call to him, saying: "Sanctify the water! sanctify the water!" He inquired, "What water?" but received no answer; and, as many sick people had been restored to health through his speaking to them, and praying with them, he was led to consider that there might be some spring which he ought to sanctify for the benefit of the sick and afflicted. I cautioned him to take heed to himself, lest he be led away in these matters; for though, in old times, God revealed himself in dreams and visions, it was not so now: that he must strictly confine himself to the Word of God, and live in close communion with Him.

Oct. 4 – Several of the strangers came to make inquiries as to the instruction of Wara, who, it seemed, had been putting himself forward as a teacher among them, whereby much confusion had arisen. We met in the chapel to hold our conference, which was conducted in a very quiet and correct manner. I had to correct many serious errors; but all were well disposed to pay full deference. The baptized Natives were present, as a kind of jury: they pronounced Wara's Case bad; to which he submitted in a very proper manner. I took the opportunity to give to all a few words of exhortation,

to watch and pray, that they enter not into temptation. Some applications for books, which are to be paid for at harvest. As they were very earnest, I gave them a few, with the understanding that they would bring their full value. – – - [Rev. Henry Williams.

July 3, 1834 – Visited Taiamai: spent the evening with Mr. Williams.

July 4 – In the morning, at school: after dinner, visited the Na-te-tiru with Mr. Davis. We found them in a good degree of agitation; just returned from a squabble they had had with some of their unprincipled neighbours, who had been destroying their pigs: their neighbours thought, that, because the Na-te-tiru were professed Christians, they might take their property with impunity, without any danger of opposition: they, however, found their mistake; for, though four large pigs were killed by their imposing neighbours, the Christian Natives would not allow them to be taken away. Their conduct in this unpleasant affray was pleasing.

July 12 – Visited Na-te-tiru, to see some sick Natives: went, with a small party of the tribe, to make peace with the Natives who a few days ago came and killed their pigs. I could but admire the influence of the Christian Religion upon these poor Natives. Contrary to all Native customs, the party who went to offer peace were the suffering party; those to whom peace was offered, the aggressors. In going along, they said one to another: "We are commanded to let our light shine before men; and to forgive, as we hope to be forgiven." On our arrival, we were very well received by the offending party; and matters, I hope, were fairly adjusted: there was, however, a moroseness in the appearance of the Chief, who was the principal aggressor; and I afterwards heard, that he would not speak to some of our little party, who have suffered for the Gospel's sake,

Sept. 20 – After Service, a Native followed me some distance, to tell me of the inconsistencies of some of the Christian Natives. I told him I could not listen to whisperers, pointed out to him the unkindness of his proceedings, and charged him with his general vile conduct. "Yes," he replied, "but I make no profession of Religion." How striking the features of all unregenerate men, whether in New Zealand or England! I have a thousand times heard similar remarks by our own unthinking and ungodly countrymen. – – - [Mr. G. Clarke,

At various times, our Readers have been interested by Letters from Natives to their Teachers. The following is a

Letter from a Sick Native, describing his Religious Experience.

Mr. Davis writes –

Jan. 23, 1834 – The following is a literal translation of a letter, which I received, yesterday, from a young man at Kaikohi: –

"Here am I lying ill, praying to God to give me a new heart. I am praying to the Spirit of my Lord Jesus Christ, to give it to me now, whilst I am lying here ill. My prayer to the Spirit of my Lord is, that, if he loves me and wishes to take me to Himself, or to allow me to stay longer here, it is for Him to say. But if he sees fit to take me, I shall be gone in haste from thence: great will be the love of my Saviour to me. 7 My heart thought whether thou wert not a true God; but I have heard now, that thou wipest away the sins of man in this world; and that is the reason why I come to thee, to have my sins rubbed out, and my wickedness washed away.

"Thou camest to this world to fetch me, to purchase me; but if the payment with which I was bought was a perishable one, I should not think toward thee: but it is a payment which endureth unto eternal life; and therein is shown the love of Jesus Christ to this world. My heart thinks, what am I, Lord, that thou shouldst save me, now I have been so sinful towards thee!

"I have been watched over by my God, by the Spirit of my Lord Jesus Christ. And I now pray the God of Heaven, to still spare me, lest I should be carried away by the currents of hell, which are continually running around us in whirlpools: yea, the currents of this world run in whirlpools to hell.

"This is all I have to say to you, Mr. Davis, my Elder, – – - "From MURA."

The following brief extracts may properly conclude our view of the spiritual blessings which the Great Head of the Church appears to be bestowing on this Mission. They exhibit the

Value for the Scriptures, and for Learning, felt by the Natives.

Aug. 22 – In the afternoon, an old man and five youths, from Tepuke, came to have a little conversation. I was very much surprised at their questions and answers: they appeared perfectly acquainted with that portion of Scripture

which they possess. In the evening, I examined, and conversed with the Christian Natives, previously to the administration of the Lord's Supper. Very weary at night; but it is a pleasurable weariness.

Aug. 29, 1834 – My attention was called, in the course of the day, to a blind man reading the Scriptures. Kari, a near relation of Tetuorenga, has for several months been quite blind: he has, nevertheless, paid great attention to the school, in order to learn the Catechism, the Service of the Prayer Book, and the various chapters of the Scriptures in print. He came to me some time since, and requested that I would let him have a complete book. I asked of what use a book would be to him, as he was blind. He replied, that it would be of great use; for though he could not see, he could hear; and by possessing one, he could let others read to him, until he should see it with his heart. I let him have one, desiring him to inquire of the Lord his Redeemer; and have to-day witnessed a gratifying sight. I saw the poor fellow lying on the ground, with his book open before him, as though he was pondering over its contents, repeating aloud verse by verse. I inquired of him what he was doing: he observed, that he was reading the 4th Chapter of St. Matthew. I told him to continue; which he did, with great ease, and much to the gratification of my heart. By this I learnt an important lesson – never to hesitate in giving the word of life to an earnest inquirer, though it might appear as bread cast upon the waters. – – - [Rev. Henry Williams.

Sept. 29 – After morning prayers, we commenced our school. It being a novelty, we had men and women, old and young; upwards of 100. In the course of the day, we moved our tents to the side of the house, and proceeded to mark out the boundaries of a garden. In the evening, our Chief came to the tent to ask for a slate. He made a very good attempt at writing; and was so intent upon it, that he remained until he had filled his slate, though the hour was very late.

Sept. 30 – This morning, the Natives had a greater distance to come to school; but our number amounted to 50. Many elderly men. Chiefs, were present, and seemed to take great interest in learning the letters. We afterwards commenced the cultivation of our garden. – – - [Rev. William Williams.

From the Journals of the different Missionary Labourers, we shall next select a few instances, exemplifying the

Levity and Ferocity shown by Unconverted Natives.

On occasion of concluding the purchase of land in the New Settlement, Kaitaia, in the Northern Part of the Island, Mr. Davis, who had accompanied Mr. Matthews and his son-in-law, Mr. Puckey, thus describes the closing display of the

Fickle and Selfish Spirit of the Multitude.

March 17 – This morning we had purposed to return home; but as Messrs. Puckey and Matthews seemed a little fearful that something unpleasant might take place when the land was paid for, we agreed to stay, and help them through the business.

Early in the morning, the Natives began to assemble from different parts, to see after the payment for the land, which was given out to them in the afternoon. After having staid with them some time, and seeing them in the act of dividing the trade in a very agreeable manner, we went to get a little tea; but had not left them many minutes, before the impatient creatures made a rush upon the trade, and seized, each for himself, as much as they could: but many, being obliged to go without any thing, felt themselves dissatisfied; and some of them jumped over the fence, and went to strip the Missionaries' house: others immediately followed, in order to protect the Missionaries, and their property; so that there was nothing, for some time, but a complete hubbub and uproar. Naked savages were flying in all directions, armed with great pieces of wood, hatchets, &c, holding out threats one to another. This circumstance would have had a most appalling effect on a stranger; and I cannot but own that I felt my own nerves pretty much shaken, during the first few minutes, until I had ascertained the nature of the quarrel. I much fear the effect it may have on my daughter Mary Ann. After the tumult had subsided, the Natives met together, danced, and many of the Chiefs spoke, and all favourably toward the Mission. Thus the Lord, in mercy, preserved us from the jaw, of what appeared to be, the devouring lion. The Natives of the place, and the principal Chief, Panakareao, behaved

exceedingly well throughout the affair; and showed a determination, on their part, to protect the Missionaries, as far as it lay in their power.

Mr. W. Williams has recorded the following singular expressions of a Native Chief, exhibiting a kind of

Savage Reverence for European Bravery.

Oct. 11, 1834 – Proceeded to the village of another tribe, the Chief of which is Pehitukorehu, a very fine old man, with a long hoary beard; but a great warrior, and a desperate savage. He says the people will not listen at present; and that he is going to fight, very soon, at Taranake, to obtain revenge for his relatives. I reminded him, that he had already nearly destroyed the people of that place: to which he replied, that he must go and kill the rest, and then the land would be clear for him and me. Taking hold of my hand, he expressed his admiration; telling his people, that when the Natives of Taranake lately killed an European, and ate him, they could not eat the lower part of the arm and hand.

The following passages from Mr. J. Stack's Journal describe the

Atrocities attending the Belief in Witchcraft.

Dec. 9 – The Native from Port Jackson, said to be bewitched, called to-day, and received some medicine. His coming led to a conversation on witchcraft, and to a further developement of Awarahi's character. He said, Horeta, a Native from the Thames, visited Tamarere's brother (I understood him about four or six years ago); who, during the time of his visit, was taken ill. It was recollected that a child of the sick man had, in childish simplicity (such as it is in New Zealand), talked of eating Horeta's head; it was therefore immediately suspected, that he had been practising incantation against the child's father, out of revenge; and some advised to kill him. His death, however, was deferred, that the result of his witchcraft might be seen. Tamarere's brother, finding himself getting worse, sent for Awarahi, and asked him to kill Horeta, who, he positively asserted, had bewitched him; and added, that his only chance of life was by killing the wizard. Horeta, considering himself among his real friends, felt perfectly safe: and the knowledge of this fact operated upon the feelings of Tamarere so much, that he would not consent to kill a man who was confiding in his honour and friendship, and who, I believe, was in some way related to him. The sick brother's importunity, however, prevailed over all natural sense of right and wrong, and Awarahi was fixed upon as the executioner; who immediately sharpened his hatchet, and prayed to the "atua maori" (native god), for success in his intended bloody design. Tamarere, who is naturally of a less cruel disposition than Awarahi, deferred the deed, from a natural reluctance to deal treacherously with a visitor, till the sick man lost all patience; when, by a previously-arranged signal between Awarahi and Tamarere, by the light of the morning-star, Awarahi rushed into the hut, seized Horeta by the hair of his head, and dragged him outside the hut, who cried, "Ekohuru e-Ekohuru!" (a murder! a murder!) His voice was soon lost in death; the powerful arm of Awarahi burying his hatchet in Horeta's temples. – All that I could say had no effect in convincing Awarahi that he had done wrong, in killing a stranger, who was confiding in his friendship, on mere suspicion.

Dec. 12 – To-night we assembled all our domestics, for private spiritual instruction. Tamarere was present, who, this evening, confessed that he had committed two murders in bis life-time. He said, if Horeta had been killed sooner, his brother would not have died.

Dec. 14: Lord's Day – Mr. Morgan and I travelled together to-day to One-Matua, where we addressed about twenty Natives. Showing them their transgressions, we happened to touch upon witchcraft. As the young man from abroad, who is said to have been bewitched, was present, we urged him not to allow Awarahi to hurt any one on his account, if he valued his character with Europeans. His companions immediately told us, that a woman had been murdered on Friday, not far from where we stood, a slave, wife of one of their tribe – a young woman, who had borne him one child, and of comely person; her only crime being that which we tried to prove she could not commit. We wished to ascertain the fact; and, after declaring our abhorrence of such conduct, and its enormity in the sight of God, and the punishment awarded by Him for such crimes, we took a lad, as guide, to show us the remains of the unfortunate deceased; which we found near a beautiful run of water, about a mile from One-Matua, in a secluded

place; no Natives living in the immediate neighbourhood. The spot, on which she had slept the night before, was shaded by the overhanging of a spreading tree, and tall fern. Marks of a considerable quantity of blood, recently spilt, were visible in the grass near where her head had lain. A few feet from this lay a heap of white ashes, with several pieces of the scull of a human being, burnt almost to lime; here and there a portion of the back-bone, not reduced to powder; and a very small portion either of the intestines or windpipe. The standers by, who were chiefly female slaves from Taranaki, the ill-fated birth-place of this unfortunate young woman, told us, that the murder was committed by a Native from Kawia, by the particular wish of her lord and tyrant, because he supposed she had bewitched another of his wives, who was sick. While our hearts mourned over this victim of cruelty and superstition, we could do no more for her than cover her ashes with large stones, as a tribute of respect, and to mark the infamy of him who had violently cut off, in the prime of life, one who had claimed his protection and safeguard.

But a description yet more terrific is given by Mr. Davis, in the following account of the

Diabolical Bringing-up of the Child of a Native Priest.

June 30, 1834 – Several Natives here for instruction. This evening, one of the Kaikohi young men, who has lived with me from the first, has been here, and given the following interesting account of himself; that is, interesting, as far as a developement of true devilism may be so considered: –

"While I was yet in my mother's womb," said he, "my father devoted me to the Powers of Darkness. As soon, after my birth, as I was able to struggle for my mother's breast, I was kept therefrom, and teased by my father, in order that angry passions might be deeply rooted within me: the stronger I grew, the more I was teased by my father, and the harder I was obliged to fight for the nourishment of my mother's breast: this was done, in order that my angry passions might be fostered in their growth, so that I should be well grounded and, ultimately, become matured in desperate wickedness. "All this," said he, "was done," (to use his own expression) "before I had seen the plants which are produced by the earth.

"As soon as I saw the world, and was able to run about, the work of preparation went on more rapidly; and my father kept me without food, in order that I might learn the art of thieving, and so, at length, become an adept in that vice; not forgetting, at the same time, when opportunities offered, to stir up the spirit of anger and revenge, which he had so assiduously endeavoured to implant in my breast. My father also taught me the New-Zealand Black Art," (his father being a great priest,) "so that I might be able to bewitch or destroy people at my pleasure.

"My father told me, that to be a great man, I must be a murdering warrior, a desperate and expert thief, and be enabled to do all kind of wickedness effectually.

"I recollect, that, while I was a child, my father went to kill pigs. After they were dead, I tried to get a leg, or a limb; but my father beat me away, and did not allow me to eat any part thereof, because I had not shown myself desperate in endeavouring to catch and kill them.

"When the tribe went to war, and I was able to go with them, I endeavoured, in all things, to fulfil my father's wishes, by committing acts of wickedness; and considered that I was quite right in so doing. When I became a man, and capable of committing acts of violence, catching slaves for myself, &c, my father was pleased, and said, 'Now I will feed you, because you deserve it – now you shall not want for good things.'

"In this way I went on, firmly believing I was doing right, until the Chief, Broughton, visited us. Broughton told us we must not work on the Lord's Day. Soon after, Abraham visited us; and told us, that we must not only not work on the Lord's Day, but pray to God, and think of God, on that day.

"The Missionary visits now became more frequent to our tribe; but I still followed my ways of wickedness. When some of the young men began to think on the nature of what they had heard, and to speak about it, I began to listen to them: when they came to Waimate, I came also, but was still held in the bonds of wickedness. After a time, I began to question whether it was right, or not, for me to proceed as I had begun, under my father's tuition; but it was not long before I saw how exceedingly wicked I was, and soon possessed a hatred for the

sins of my past life. My father, finding how matters were going on, separated himself from me; and is now living at a distance from Kaikohi, in order that he may not hear the Word of God."

Mr. Davis adds –

Thus far his narrative goes: his conversation this evening was pleasing; he seems to be now seeking an interest in Christ with all his heart. May the Lord direct him in the way he should go! When he first came to me, he seemed to have the devil's mark on his forehead; desperate wickedness was delineated in his countenance. Such was the effect which the appearance of the young man had on my mind, that it was some time before I could bring myself to speak to him with freedom; but, now, his countenance is quite changed, and, I trust, he carries the mark of the Living God on his forehead. In this case, we may truly say, "Is not this a brand plucked out of the fire?"

The following incident describes the prevalence of a cruel superstition of the Chiefs, in respect to their slaves. It seems to be grounded partly in the pride of human-nature, and partly in the idea of some unseen and malignant influence, of which man, in his unenlightened state, is continually apprehensive.

Sept. 22, 1834 – Reached Matamata at noon. Obliged to leave a few of our things at the Pa, in charge of one of the Chiefs, not having Natives sufficient to carry them. Some of the young Chiefs who accompanied us were very particular as to what burden they carried. One of them said: "If I was to carry a bag of flour, and a slave should afterward eat of it, I should die in consequence of his having partaken of it." Waharoa did not accompany us to day, having heard that a vessel had arrived at Tauranga. – – - [Mr. Morgan.

Considering the character, as it has been already so frequently described, of this people, the following circumstance, mentioned by Mr. H. Williams, will point out the necessity of

Caution, in the Intercourse of Europeans with the Natives.

April 18, 1834 – Two Captains came on shore, to mention that three casks had been seized up the Kawakawa, whither they had been taken for water; and to request some advice, and assistance, if they could be recovered quietly; otherwise, the various crews of the fleet would go up armed, and get them by force. I advised them to let the crews attend to their own ships, and not to attempt so hazardous an undertaking, as they would meet on very unequal terms: they might go up, but would not return. I told them I would accompany them, in our boat; and that what could be done, I would do. We went accordingly; and found one raft, with several butts, much larger than I had expected. We passed on to the Settlement: the Natives soon showed themselves, and told us that the casks were some in one place and some in another. After a long talking, scolding, and joking, we succeeded in recovering all, keeping them in good humour. Their demands were high for the water; and it was not until we were well down the river that I considered we had full possession, as they expected that we should return previously with the required payment. We parted, however, on very good terms. We did not arrive at the ship before we were well wetted, as it rained all the afternoon.

Our readers will again read, with the deepest concern, what is related concerning the

Introduction of Ardent Spirits.

Jan. 17, 1834 – Went to Wangai, to attend the Hahunga, where the bones of our friend Tohitapu were laid in state, beside twenty heads of his relatives. About thirty baskets of potatoes were turned over for us. Pamuka made an especial application for a stream of water on our land: we did not comply with his desires, as it was for the supply of the shipping, and would subject us to encroachments. Learnt that some Natives from Waitangi had been in the Settlement, with bottles of rum, to sell to our boys.

Jan. 18, 1834 – Four women were found in the Settlement, with bottles of rum for sale. Sent out some special constables, to apprehend them; but they were gone, at the first whisper of what was about to take place. I trust this may be our last visit from these disturbers of the peace, for they well know they can expect no quarter, if they are found here. It is grievous to see their growing propensity for spirits, and the pains our countrymen take to show them their delight in this intoxicating draught.

The Missionaries often meet with vexatious and trying circumstances,

which show them the necessity of mingling patience and discretion with zeal. We select an instance.

Jan. 29, 1835 – Left Puriri this evening at five o'clock, with Mr. Wilson, for Matamata. We were previously informed that the Natives at the Kari Pa would not let our boat pass up the river without paying a toll; an imposition which we determined not to submit to, if we could possibly avoid it. When we got in sight of the Pa, we saw the Natives bustling out, with their paddles in their hands, ready to jump into their canoes and give us chase. We therefore shortened sail; and pulled alongside the Pa, to hold a conversation with them. One plea upon which they urged their claim was, that a slave of theirs, who had been at Port Jackson, had seen the pilot there receive some money when the ship entered harbour. I told the Chief, that that was not for the liberty of sailing up the river, but for the pilot pointing out the rocks, &c.; and that, as we were our own pilots, we could not give them any thing. We told them, that we did not mean to speak angrily to them, and we did not wish to excite their anger; – that if they told us we should not pass, we would return, and try to find some other way to Matamata. They at length consented to our passing; but requested that we would not give any information respecting their numbers, the state of their Pa, &c, to the tribe to which we were going, as they were their enemies. We of course promised to comply with their wishes; and endeavoured to explain to them, that, although we were going to reside with Waharoa's tribes, we were Missionaries to them as well as to the Natihaua, and would visit them as we passed up and down the river. I was much pleased that our interview terminated so amicably; because I looked beyond the opposition of these poor Natives, to that wicked spirit who holds them in thraldom, and who would have triumphed at throwing in their way any obstacle to the introduction of the Gospel in another portion of his dominions. We kept on till eight o'clock, and then pitched our tents by the river-side. – – - [Rev. A. N. Brown.

We are obliged to postpone one remaining article, belonging to this Mission, to our next Number.

7 Here the Letter becomes a prayer; and the sense, as I understand it, is, "When I first heard of thee, my heart, &c."

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

Church Missionary Record.

No. 12.] DECEMBER, 1835. [Vol. VI.

AUSTRALASIA MISSION.

WE resume the accounts given in our last Number, page 262, with some Extracts, which were unavoidably postponed.

New Zealand

A fact is related by Mr. Davis, evincing the influence of the Gospel, in a manner which might put to the blush some of the semi-barbarous and licentious festivals of Christendom. It refers to the

Abolition of a Native Feast.

May 30, 1835 – A few days ago, a considerable victory was obtained over the Prince of Darkness. It is the custom of the Natives, at this season of the year, when provisions are plentiful, to call their friends together at the removal of the bones of those of their relatives who have died during the year, and to feast them, for several days together, on pigs, sweet-potatoes, &c.; at the same time, making them large presents of guns, powder, garments, and a quantity of food, when they leave, to take away with them. As much wickedness is practised during these seasons, and as a meeting of the kind has just taken place at Waimate, we used all our interest to endeavour to do away with this fruitful source of evil. In this we succeeded, far beyond our expectation: the greater part of the leading Chiefs paid great attention to every plea made use of to induce them to discontinue the custom; and, finally, agreed among themselves, that this should be the last feast of the kind that should take place among them; and gave notice accordingly to that effect. Some of Satan's more faithful ones endeavoured to make a stir, but were overruled. To the Most High be all the glory, for His loving mercy and truth's sake, so signally displayed toward this poor despised people! Some of the Chiefs made excellent remarks on the occasion. It will be a time long to be remembered, in the annals of this country.

The superstitious feelings of barbarous nations, with regard to places of reputed sanctity or religious awe, are well known. The New-Zealanders have theirs also, in common with other countries of modern or ancient fame. A particular mountain is by them supposed to be the place whither the souls of the deceased retire. Mr. W. G. Puckey determined on performing an exploring visit to this mountain. His account will much interest our Readers: a few such visits may tend to loosen the hold which this superstition has on the minds of the Natives.

Visit to the Reinga, the reputed Dwelling of Departed Spirits.

Having long felt a desire to visit the poor benighted Natives who are living at the very extremity of the island, and who are a remnant of the vanquished tribe, the "Aupouri," I set out on the 4th December 1834, taking with me six of my Natives; and Pacrata, an old Chief, as a guide. This once bloodthirsty warrior and superstitious Heathen, who was partly the means of annihilating this once powerful tribe, is, we hope, through the grace of God, becoming as gentle as a lamb; and bids fair to become as bold and useful in the cause of the Redeemer, as he has been in the cause of Satan. The first day, we walked over about eight miles of land, till we arrived at the western coast; where we took a repast, and commenced our march along the beach, which is remarkably fine, reaching, at low water, 150 yards from the bank; and extends in length, with the exception of rivers, from Cape Maria Van Dieman's nearly to Cook's Straits. We brought up at night at Hukatere, an old fortified place, where our guide (Pacrata) once fought, and was wounded. After prayers with my party, we retired to rest, but were much annoyed by the musquitoes. At five o'clock we were on our

way across the island, to Houhora, on Mount Camel; as we intended to spend the Sabbath at this place. This native village, which is on the eastern coast, is not more than six miles from the western; but the weather being so very hot, and the road lying over sand-hills, which were so soft that we sank in, up to our knees, nearly every step we took, we were from five o'clock in the morning till two in the afternoon before we arrived; during which time we had no water to drink; and we were all so fatigued, and faint with thirst, that when we sat down to rest, it was with difficulty that we rose up again. At this place we were cordially received by Witi, an old venerable Chief, one of the principal heads of the Rarawa tribes. This old man, on learning where we were going, said: "Of what use is your going there; for the people of that place are very few, and they have nothing for you to eat?" We replied, that it was not for food that we were going; that our object was to declare to the Natives of that place the glad tidings of Salvation.

Dec. 6, 1834 – Witi, on learning that we intended, on this our route, to explore the Reinga, communicated the news to a Chief of another village; who immediately came, and said to Pacrata, – "I am come to send you and your white companion back again; for if you cut away the 'aka,' or roots of the Reinga, the whole island will be destroyed; but your white friend will not." He moreover said to Pacrata, "Do not suffer your friend to cut away the ladder by which the souls of our forefathers were conveyed to the other world." The whole body of New-Zealanders, although composed of numerous tribes, who, for the greater part, are living in malice, hateful, and hating one another, yet firmly believe in the Reinga (which is at the North Cape), as the one only place for their departed spirits. It is their belief, that as soon as the soul leaves the body, it makes its way with all speed to the western coast: if it be the spirit of a person who resided in the interior, it takes with it a small bundle of the branches of the palm-tree, as a token of the place where it resided: if one who lived on the coast, the spirit takes with it a kind of grass which grows by the sea-side, which it leaves at different resting-places, on its road to the Reinga. – In the forenoon, the Natives of Mount Camel assembled, and I held Divine Service with them. They were very attentive to the things spoken. We also assembled again in the evening.

Dec. 7 – We returned to the western coast by a much better roed than that by which we came. On our way along the beach, we saw many fragments of the wrecks of vessels, and pieces of skeletons of Whales, which had been driven on the coast. At night, we brought up at a place called Waimahuru, a small creek, where there are a few houses, which are considered sacred. One or two of my lads, in collecting fire-wood, took some wood which was near to those houses; and no sooner was the fire kindled, than the long grass (which was in great abundance) took fire, and one of our packages was burnt; which called forth a remark from our guide, that, had he not begun to believe in the True God, he should have said this accident befel us because we made a fire of some of the sacred wood.

Dec. 8 – At break-of-day, we proceeded on our way, about three miles; when we came to one of the resting-places of the spirits, where we were told we should know if any Native had lately died, as there would be a green "waka-au," or token, of his spirit having rested there, on its way to the Reinga: but we found none. Here we took breakfast, and departed. About three o'clock, we arrived at the end of the beach, where I pitched my tent for the night: at this place, called "Kahokawa," resided all the Natives of the North Cape, not exceeding in number twenty-five. I had Service with them; and talked with them, till late at night, of the things of God. After I had done speaking, one of them observed to another sitting by him, "It will be well for us to pay attention to these things: we can keep the Sabbath, if we can do nothing else."

Dec. 9 – We proceeded to explore the Reinga. After walking about half an hour, we came to another and the last resting-place of the spirits, which is on a hill, called "Haumu"; from whence they can look back on the country where their friends are still living; and the thought of this causes them to cry, and cut themselves. Here we saw many dry "wakaau"; which, as a Native, whom we took as a guide for the last place, said, were the tokens of the spirits who had rested at this place. I asked him, if it were not possible for strangers, who passed this way, to do as my Natives were then

doing; namely, twisting green branches, and depositing them there, as a sign that they had stopped at that notable place – a general custom with the Natives, whenever they pass any remarkable place. After this, we went on our way, over sandy hills and sandy beaches, till we came to a fresh-water river. Here we took breakfast: after which we ascended a very high hill, composed of craggy rocks, on which were growing patches of slippery grass, over which it was very difficult to walk; and the precipice, over which the road lay, hanging over the sea, made the travelling very dangerous. When we arrived on the summit of this high hill, we gradually descended, by a much better road, till we came to the water-edge. Here there is a hole through a rock, into which the spirits are said to go: after this, they ascend again, and then descend by the "aka," which is a branch of a tree (projecting out of the rock), inclining downwards, with part of it broken off by the violence of the wind; but said to have been broken off by a number of spirits, which went down by the aka to the Reinga some years ago, when great numbers were killed in a fight. After we had looked a while at the aka of the Reinga, our new guide took us about 100 yards further along; when he directed our attention to a large lump of sea-weed, washed to and fro by the waves of the sea, which he said was the door which closed in the spirits of the Reinga. This latter place is called Motatau; where, our guide remarked, they caught fish, which always are quite red, from the Kokowai, or red ochre, with which the Natives bedaub their bodies and mats: the Natives believe that painted garments go with the departed spirits.

The scenery around the place where I stood was most uninviting; and not only so, but calculated to inspire the soul with horror. The place has a most barren appearance; while the screaming of the the numerous sea-fowls, and the sea roaring in the pride of its might, dashing against the dismal black rocks, would suggest to the reflecting mind, that it must have been the dreary aspect of the place that led the New Zealanders to choose such a situation as this for their Hell.

We now returned to Kahokawa, and remained there for the night: the following day we began to retrace our steps; and arrived in safety at our Station, on Saturday the 12th.

During the time I was absent, great rumours were spread among the tribes, that I had gone to cut away the aka of the Reinga. Many angry speeches were made; and some said they would go and way-lay us, as we were returning. It, in fact, roused all the affections of those who had any, for their old Dagon; while numbers, who began to feel a little enlightened, would say, "And what of it, if the ladder be cut away? it is a thing of lies: the spirits never went there." On being asked, "What, are you afraid of having no place of torment to go to?" some of the old men would touchingly say: "It is very well for you to go to the Rangi (or Heaven): but leave us our old road to the Reinga; and let us have something to hold on by, as we descend, or we shall break our necks over the precipice." Many, moreover, threatened to take a fight to Pacrata, as they laid all the blame on him: so accordingly, on Monday, the 14th of January, a body of about forty men came, the distance of ten miles, to inquire into the truth of the matter. A notable Chief also, whose name is Huhu, came the distance of twenty miles, in order to see if it were true; and to stop the fights, if there were any. When about 100 Natives had assembled, speeches on the occasion of the visit to the Reinga were made: this was done in a running posture. After two old Chiefs had spoken their minds on the subject, and had declared it was "a very wicked thing to cut away their ladder to the Reinga, and nothing but right that Pacrata's property should be taken as a payment," Pacrata then rose, and made an animated speech in defence of his new belief, which lasted two hours. His audience formed a circle around him, and the attention was profound. His speech commenced with the setting out; and took in every little incident, and every conversation which passed among ourselves, and the Natives with whom we met. He also gave his own ideas at large, on the absurdity of their believing in such a place as the Reinga for their departed souls. He moreover said, with great feeling, "There is another Hell, which I am afraid of – the one which burns with fire and brimstone:" and with regard to the spirits walking along the beach, and leaving tokens at the different resting-places, he asked, sarcastically, which way the soul of the man went who died while we were

on the road, as we saw none of his wakaaus and blood. They replied, "He must have gone the other road," (that is, to Heaven). "No;" said one, "how could that be? for the man was not a believer." Pacrata gave great satisfaction to his hearers, by assuring them that their old Reinga had not been disturbed by us, and that the road still lay straight before them. The Natives were so unarmed by Pacrata's celebrated speech, that they all dispersed to their homes in great tranquillity, not one being able to speak an angry word against him.

Church Missionary Record

[New Zealand sections only]

1837

[This book was digitised in partnership with Auckland War Memorial Museum]
http://www.aucklandmuseum.com

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

Australasia Mission – Mr. and Mrs. Ford, whose vessel, "the City of Edinburgh," had been obliged to put in at Plymouth for repairs (see Vol. VII. p. 304), sailed from thence on the 14th ult.

Despatches have just been received from New Zealand, dated July 1836, from which it appears that considerable disturbance had taken place in the South, in consequence of the wars among the Tribes in that quarter. The Rev. H. Williams, in a Letter dated July 11, 1836, states –

The state of the Mission to the Southward is under peculiar distress at this period, as there appears universal war among the Tribes where our Missionaries are; and it is not improbable but that all of them will be required to leave for a season, if a retreat can be accomplished. The "Columbine" has just sailed to their assistance. We hope to hear from them in a few days; and trust that the Great Head of the Church will not fail to be their protector, as He has ever been.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

Australasia Mission – By a Letter from the Rev. S. Marsden, under date of February 6th. it appears that he had just embarked on another visit to New Zealand.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

Australasia Mission – The painful intelligence has reached us of the death of Mrs. Davis, wife of Mr. R. Davis, on the 1st of February last, after a short illness. We subjoin the following Extracts of Letters to the Rev. J. N. Coleman, dated Feb. 1837, respecting the removal of this valuable woman. The Rev. H. Williams remarks: –

On the 1st instant, the overwhelming news

was communicated to us, mat Mrs. Davis, after about twenty hours' illness, had closed her life. This is the first of our Mission Family that has died, after so many years, in this dark and savage land. Our Heavenly Father has indeed been very gracious to us all, in having thus spared the various heads of families during the years which are past. We could not but sympathize deeply with our afflicted Brother and the family; and trust the solemn season may be sanctified to alL In Mrs. Davis, her husband has lost an affectionate wife, the children a tender parent, the members of the Mission an esteemed and beloved sister, and the Natives around a kind and affectionate mother. She was a mother in our Israel. Her attention to all was very great, particularly to the sick. Her house was alwavs open, and her hand ready to administer to the wants of those who needed. I fear it will be long before our friend will recover from this deep affliction. Though he has long held close communion with his God and Saviour, yet nature appears to yield.

Mr. Davis himself writes –

Death is only the door which admits the Believer's soul to glory. This, I firmly trust, my dear wife – the beloved wife of my youth – experienced on the 1st instant. Her illness was only of about twenty-one hours' continuation: the disease, the common cholera. Several of us had been attacked by it; but my dearest wife has only yet fallen a victim to it. The best medical advice we have was at hand, but all to no purpose: the word was gone forth, and who could reverse it ?

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

Australasia Mission – By the last advices from New Zealand, coming down to May 23, 1837, the Rev. S. Marsden was on a visit to the Society's Stations in New Zealand: he embarked at Sydney, on board the "Pyramus," the 7th of February last, and safely landed at New Zealand in March.

From these communications it appears that the war among the Tribes in the southern part of the island had terminated; but that the Tribes in the Bay of Islands were in commotion, and hostilities in consequence apprehended. The Missionaries were well, and encouraged by many tokens of the Divine Blessing on their labours.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

Australasia Mission – Mr. S. H. Ford, in a Letter dated Sydney, June 24, 1837, informs us of his safe arrival at that place (p. 144). Mrs. Ford and himself had been unwell, but were recovering.

By despatches from New Zealand, dated May 1837, we learn that the endeavours of the Missionaries to effect peace among the hostile Tribes in the northern part of the island had failed; but that no attempts had been made to molest our friends there. It is stated, however, that peace with the contending Tribes southward had been established.

RECENT INTELLINGENCE.

Australasia Mission – Letters from New-South Wales, dated August 1837, inform us of the safe arrival of the Rev. S. Marsden, at Parramatta, from his visit to New Zealand (p. 2-10).

By Despatches from New Zealand, dated July 1837, we have received the satisfactory intelligence, that peace has been made between the hostile parties in the Bay of Islands, and that the different Tribes were returning to their respective Districts (p. 259).

Church Missionary Record

[New Zealand sections only]

1843

[This book was digitised in partnership with Auckland War Memorial Museum]
http://www.aucklandmuseum.com

Obituary of the Rev. J. Mason.

Church Missionary Record.

No. 7.] JULY, 1843. [Vol. XIV.

Obituary.

OBITUARY OF THE REV. J. MASON

OF WANGANUI, WESTERN DISTRICT, NEW ZEALAND. WHO DIED JAN. 5, 1843.

THROUGH the mercy of God, the lives of the Missionaries in New-Zealand have been remarkably preserved. Up to the end of last year, no instance of the death in the Mission of a Missionary or Catechist connected with the Church Missionary Society had occurred during the twenty-eight years which have elapsed since the establishment of that Mission. We are now, however, called upon to mourn over the sudden removal of the Rev. John Mason, who, in the prime of life and in the midst of health, was diligently labouring in his Master's service, and whose successful labours gave promise of extensive usefulness in that portion of the Lord's vineyard. During the two years and a half in which Mr. Mason was stationed at Wanganui he was enabled to communicate religious instruction to many villages on the coast to the north and south, and also up the River Wanganui, in the interior; and he was instrumental in admitting into the Christian Church, by the ordinance of Baptism, no fewer than three hundred adults. At the very period, however, when his increased experience and knowledge of the language were calculated to add greatly to the efficiency of his labours, he was taken from those labours to his heavenly rest. Very mysterious and inscrutable are the ways of God; but we know that He doeth all things well. May we have grace to acquiesce in His wise dispensations, and to profit by the many warnings which are intended to remind us who survive of the solemn injunction, Work while it is day: the night cometh when no man can work!

In the following Letter from the Rev. O. Hadfield, dated Waikanae, Jan. 16, 1843, we are furnished with minute particulars of the painful event: –

It has become my painful duty to acquaint you with Mr. Mason's melancholy death, which took place on the 5th inst., in the River Turakina, about ten miles from Wanganui.

After remaining a few days at Wanganui, where Mr. Mason and I had been engaged in settling our matters of business, I purposed to return hither and Mr. Mason proposed that he should accompany me a part of the way, as he was going to pay a periodical visit to a part of his charge at Rangitikei. At eight, o'clock in the morning we began our ride; and after some delay at Wangaihu, which we succeeded in crossing safely, we reached Turakina about eleven. As it appeared too dangerous to cross in the shallow water, the quicksands being in a very unsafe state, I advised that we should go to the mouth of the river, and try there; but on proceeding further, we found that it was already high-water, and that consequently the water must be too deep to

allow of our crossing. As, however, we proceeded, Mr. Mason, who had on a pair of water-proof over-all boots, walked into the river, and tried the nature of the sand, which he found would not bear the horses. I, not so well acquainted with the river as Mr. Mason, proposed that we should either wait till two Natives, who were carrying some luggage for Mr. Mason, should arrive, or till the tide ebbed; but he thought that we might try the river near the mouth, where it was not more than thirty yards wide, and consequently rode into it. On the horse getting beyond its depth, and beginning to swim, Mr. Mason, to avoid being wet, knelt upon the saddle. The horse at the time took a turn in the water, upon which I called out, "Sit fast: hold on to the saddle." Mr. Mason immediately returned, and said, that had I not called him back he could easily have crossed. I explained, that I did not call to him to come back, but to sit fast, as it was very dangerous to kneel on the saddle while the horse was swimming.

We then proposed crossing together; and I dismounted and took off my boots, and advised him to do the same, repeating the advice: this, however, he did not do. He then said to me, "Will you go first?" to which I replied that I would, and rode into the water. As soon as my horse began to swim, it endeavoured to return, and turned round in the water, and became unmanageable: my hat fell off, and I maintained my seat with difficulty. Mr. Mason, passing me at the time, called out to me to sit fast. Shortly after this, upon looking back, I saw him in the act of falling from his horse, and then endeavouring to swim. By this time I had reached the shallow water; and while dismounting and throwing off my coat and waistcoat, the two Natives, whom we had been expecting, appeared upon the opposite bank of the river. Mr. Mason in the mean time had begun to call out, "Take me out! take me out!" and was gradually sinking. I immediately swam to him, and endeavoured, by putting my hand under his chin, to raise his head above water; but as I raised him, I sunk myself. I then dived under him, and endeavoured to raise him, hoping that he would catch hold of some part of my clothes, and thus leave my hands at liberty for swimming; but he did not do so. I then took hold of his left wrist with my right hand, and tried to drag him through the water; but after trying for some time, and finding that, as the wind and the tide were carrying us further from the shore, it was a vain attempt, I left him, then several feet below the surface of the water, and with difficulty reached the shore, being in a very exhausted state, having swallowed a large quantity of salt water. Had I been allowed time to have taken off my clothes before I swam to Mr. Mason's assistance, I might have exerted myself more; but upon seeing him sink so rapidly, I went into the water with almost all my clothes on, and consequently my efforts were unavailing. Not more, probably, than five minutes had elapsed since we had both entered the water on horseback; but in that short space of time Mr. Mason had sunk, and I had no hope left me of rendering him any further assistance, as there were no materials within our reach to afford us any help. One of the Natives swam across to us; but, being a bad swimmer, made no effort to assist me in my attempt to rescue Mr. Mason from drowning.

I was for a few minutes almost overwhelmed with grief, in seeing one thus snatched away from a life of active exertion in the work of our Redeemer – one who was my only fellow-worker in this part of our Master's vineyard – in a word, one who was to me a sincere and valued friend, at the same time that he was a zealous, diligent, and faithful Minister of Christ: so that I know not whether to consider more mine own loss of a dear and constant friend, or the Church's loss of an active and devoted Minister.

The two Natives now came to my assistance; and having helped me in taking off my wet clothes, they supplied me with their blankets, and kindled a fire. In the course of a few hours I was sufficiently recovered to ride back to Wanganui, a distance of about ten miles, to conclude the melancholy day by relating to Mrs. Mason the distressing circumstance of her husband's sudden death. Though deeply grieved, she bore as a Christian that severe affliction, which Jehovah, her Heavenly Father, had in His wisdom been pleased to put upon her.

Mr. Mason's body was found on the day following that of his death, and conveyed to Wanganui; where, on the 7th instant, we committed it to the grave, in the presence of almost all the English and Native inhabitants then in the Settlement. On the Lord's Day following, I

preached a Funeral Sermon to the Natives, and also to the English; and saw in both congregations many a tear shed, when I alluded to him who on the previous Lord's Day had been present with us, but who was now taken to his Rest.

A few words more, perhaps, concerning my departed Brother may be expected from me. He entered upon his work at Wanganui about two years and a half ago. He had much to discourage him. The people made an empty profession of attending to him, but were really indifferent to the Gospel. Mr. Mason, however, persevered in faith; and now, almost all the inhabitants of Wanganui and the coast, on to Taranaki, profess Christianity; and about three hundred adults have been baptized in the name of the Triune God.

These few facts are of more weight, in my opinion, than many volumes of praise. Let it not, then, be supposed that Mr. Mason's labours, though short, have been useless. Time will never fully develope their extent. He had acquired a fair knowledge of the native language; and had the essential qualifications of a Minister, namely, a clear knowledge of Christ, accompanied with patience, diligence, and faithfulness. To say thus much of Mr. Mason is, I believe, my duty: to say more might be impertinent. My prayer now is, that the Lord may provide for His people Pastors to feed them with the bread of life, and to exhibit Christ to them.

Two Letters from the Bishop of New Zealand.

NEW-ZEALAND MISSION.

TWO LETTERS FROM THE BISHOP OF NEW ZEALAND.

THE Committee have recently received two communications from the Bishop of New Zealand, detailing at large the results of his visits to almost all the Society's Stations in the Island. His Lordship's interesting Letters fully confirm all preceding Reports of the signal manner in which it has pleased God to bless the Gospel of His grace, both to the temporal and spiritual welfare of the Natives. It is, too, very gratifying to find the Bishop's mind so favourably impressed as it has been with the character and conduct of the Missionaries.

The Bishop's first Letter is addressed to the Honorary Clerical Secretary; and. is dated, Brig "Victoria," Gulf of Hauraki, July 29, 1842, the Bishop being on his voyage from Auckland to Wellington and Nelson. It first notices

His Lordship's Sojourn at Sydney.

You may have heard already that I arrived at Auckland on the 29th of May, after a delightful voyage of five months; including a detention of five weeks at Sydney, during which I enjoyed the great privilege of conversing deliberately with the Bishop of Australia upon every subject relating to the New-Zealand Mission. I had also the pleasure of becoming acquainted with several members of the family of the late Rev. S. Marsden, and of officiating in his church at Parramatta. In speaking of our stay at Sydney, I must not omit to mention the great kindness which we received from the Society's Agent, Mr. Robert Campbell, who placed a large house at my disposal for the reception of the party, and thereby enabled me to avoid an expense, on their account, of at least one hundred pounds.

The present state of the native population of New South-Wales is a frightful warning to all who are entering upon the deep responsibility involved in the care of a savage race. They are not deficient in intellect, as some have said, but, from causes too various to be accurately traced, have sunk into a state of the most, abject misery. May God preserve the New Zealanders from such an end as that to which the aborigines of New South-Wales are fast approaching!

Departure from Sydney; and Arrival at Auckland, New Zealand – Arrangements for stationing the new Missionaries.

An accident to the ship "Tomatin," in the harbour of Sydney, led to so much delay, that I left my family and party, and went on in the brig "Bristolian;" in which I arrived at Auckland, as I have said, on the 29th of May. Here I found the Rev. G. A. Kissling and Mrs. Kissling, and Mr. S. M. Spencer and Mrs. Spencer, who arrived in the "Louisa Campbell" about a fortnight before me. Mr. Kissling brought me a Letter from you, in which you suggested a change in the location of Clergymen proposed in your

Letter of December last. I should willingly have acceded to this, if Mr. Kissling had not represented to me that his residence in a hot climate would make it very painful to him to be placed in a very wet and windy situation, which is the general character of the South-Western District of this country. I have therefore consented to his going to the more genial climate of the East Cape; and am now on my way to station the Rev. C. L. Reay in connexion with the Rev. O. Hadfield and the Rev. J. Mason. The exact spot for his Station I cannot decide till I have seen the country, and conferred with those gentlemen on the subject. The Rev. W. C Dudley and Mrs. Dudley have gone to stay with Mrs. Selwyn, at the Waimate, till the return of the "Columbine" from Poverty Bay; after which they intend to go without delay to Wairoa, south of Poverty Bay, a Station at present under the care of the Rev. W. Williams. I have requested Mr. Kissling to continue to give to Mr. Spencer the assistance which he has afforded to him, with good effect, during the voyage; and they hope shortly to go down together, in the "Columbine," to the Station allotted to Mr. Kissling near the East Cape. Mr. Spencer's acquaintance with the mechanical arts will enable him to assist Mr. Kissling very materially in his first settlement.

Interview with Messrs. Maunsell and Hamlin – Commercial Intercourse of the Natives with Europeans.

Soon after my arrival at Auckland I was visited by the Rev. R. Maunsell and Mr. J. Hamlin, two of the best linguists in the Mission. From them I obtained an account of the state of their districts; which seems to be highly satisfactory, with the one exception of the unsettled and wandering habits of the Natives, caused by their frequent visits to Auckland for the purposes of trade. The extent to which this is carried on may he judged from the fact, that nearly the whole population of the town is supplied with pork, vegetables, fish, and firewood, by the Natives, who receive very fair prices for their commodities, and buy, in return, English clothing, tools, and other goods. This free intercourse has had the good effect of encouraging habits of industry, neatness, and cleanliness; but, on the other hand, it has taken the Natives away from the care of their Missionaries for long periods, and has introduced irregularity, especially into their Schools. Still, their habits of Daily Worship remain unchanged; every morning and evening they are still heard singing their hymns, in the temporary huts which they have built in the little bays near the town – and especially near the houses of Mr. G. Clarke, late of the Waimate, and now Protector of the Aborigines, and of Mr. Martin, the Chief Justice, who is a devoted friend to the native people, and is seldom without a little family of his friends encamped under his house in the little bay in which he lives, at the distance of a mile and a half from the town. On my first landing, I was delighted to see a large party of Natives working for him, the conditions being specified in a written contract drawn up by him in their own language. Mr. Swainson, the Attorney-General, another zealous friend of the Natives, lives in the same bay, and has to his employment one of the most intelligent and well-conducted native women whom I have yet seen.

Voyage to Te Puru, in the Thames, to visit Te Raia, a Heathen Chief.

On Monday, June 6th, I left Auckland to a small schooner, in company with Mr. Clarke, to go to the mouth of the Thames, to inquire into the circumstances of an attack made by a Heathen Chief, named Te Raia, upon some of the inhabitants of the district of Tauranga.

Notice of William Jowett, Native Teacher at Waiheke.

On our way, we called at Waiheke, a beautiful island in the frith, where I saw the first specimen of a thoroughly native village; and I can assure you the sight filled me with joy. We were met on the beach by the Native Teacher, William, a man of tall stature, and face deeply tattooed, but with all the mildness and courtesy of a civilized Christian. He showed us his Chapel, a large room, built, after the fashion of the country, of reeds neatly bound upon a strong framework of wood; and invited us to pass the night in a house which he was building for himself, of the same materials, but with glass windows presented to him by the Chief Justice. The house, he says, is to have our rooms; one for eating, one for sleeping, one for cooking, and one for a study – for writing has now become one of the greatest pleasures of the New Zealanders, and it is very unusual to find one who cannot both read and write.

Visit to Orere, the probable Site of a Native College.

We landed next at Orere, a village on the main land, midway between Auckland and the Station occupied by Mr. J. Preece. This may be called a village of Native Missionaries, for the Teachers from this place conduct Public Worship in all the neighbouring villages for several miles around. The exertions of Mr. W. T. Fairburn in this neighbourhood, while his health allowed him to visit the Natives at their own Settlements, have certainly been blessed with very great and lasting fruit. Orere is the place which I have selected in my own mind for the site of a Native College, for the education of the more hopeful scholars from the Mission Schools, with a view to their assimilation in habits and character, as well as in Religion, to the better portion of the English Settlers. The Natives are willing to give me a site for this purpose; and, with the effectual support which I can obtain from the chief persons in the Colony, there will be no lack of means for its maintenance. A radius of twenty-five miles from this place describes a circle comprising the whole of the inhabited part of the estuary of the Thames.

Arrival at Hauraki, Mr. J. Preece's Station.

On Tuesday, June the 7th, we reached Mr. Preece's Station late in the evening; and landed in the midst of a most picturesque party of Natives, bearing lighted torches to guide us to the Mission House. I had been told that the New Zealanders were dishonest, and thought it desirable to look after the numerous articles which we brought with us in the boat; but I soon found that they were bringing every thing up to the house with the greatest care; and I have since learned, that property of the most tempting kind may be left in the hands of the Christian Natives, in the darkest night, without fear of losses from theft. On arriving at the Mission House, we were most hospitably received by Mr. and Mrs. Preece, whose family justify the praise which has been bestowed upon New Zealand as a climate most peculiarly favourable to European children.

Walk to Te Puru – Notices of Te Raia, and another Chief.

On the following morning we walked along the beach to Te Puru, the village of the Heathen Chief Te Raia, one of the few remaining examples of the race of savages, who have now almost entirely passed away before the advance of Christianity. As we walked through the villages which line the coast, we were struck with the goodly sight of a numerous population of infant children, growing up in places which a few years back were overrun and depopulated by the Northern Tribes. The right bank of the frith of the Thames is now so thickly set with villages, that we passed five or six in a walk of not more than twelve miles; and in all we saw the same signs of abundance, if not of comfort, in the English sense of the word. The situation of some of these native dwellings, in the midst of woods, and sheltered under steep hills, was often singularly beautiful. On our way, we learned, upon evidence which could not be doubted, that the bodies of at least two of the persons killed in the attack had been eaten by the conquerors. I fervently pray that this may be the last instance of this horrid practice among the New Zealanders, and I have good reason to think that it will; for this massacre has called forth an expression of indignation from all the Midland Tribes, which the Governor and the Missionaries together have scarcely been able to restrain from breaking out into acts of retribution.

The behaviour of Te Raia was a striking instance of the indirect effect of Christianity, even upon the unconverted. When he spoke of the wrongs and insults which he had sustained from the people of Tauranga, the fury of the savage showed itself in every look and gesture; but after the "korero" (speech), when we conversed quietly on the sinfulness of murder, his manner to us was as mild and subdued as if he really believed and felt all that we said to be true. Many of his own people had become Christians, and had refused to share in the expedition.

The Chief who accompanied us from Mr. Preece's Station was another striking instance of this partial change of character. He was the man who, many years ago, was frustrated by Mr. Fairburn and Mr. J. A. Wilson in his attempt to cut off the inhabitants of a distant village. By great exertion, the Missionaries arrived in time to warn the inhabitants of their danger; so that the last canoe paddled off at the moment when the enemy came in sight. Still, such was the consciousness of this Chief and his party of the truth of the principles upon which the Missionaries acted, that, without express-

ing any resentment, they built huts for the night, and provided food for the men by whom their whole plan had been defeated, before they took any thought for themselves. 8 These, and a hundred similar instances of the influence of the Gospel upon the native character in its worst form, will show how universally the whole mass has become leavened with a knowledge of the Truth. The force of evil habits still remains; but they are not justified or defended: they are known to be contrary to the laws of God and man; and even the most savage of the Heathen Chiefs seem to be waiting only for a fitting opportunity to lay down their arms without compromising their false principles of honour. The interference of the Government will furnish them with the excuse which they desire for living henceforward at peace one with another.

Among the Christian Natives, I have met with most pleasing instances of the natural expression of deep and earnest feelings of Religion. In their affectionate and childlike behaviour to their Missionaries, it is impossible not to recognise their sense of incalculable benefits derived from them. The Missionary is their friend and adviser on all occasions, having gained their confidence by imparting that which they know to be the most valuable of all knowledge. I can only add, in few words, that my experience of the native character, in the highest sense, has more than equalled all my anticipations.

Administration of Baptism at Hauraki.

On the following day, I administered the Sacrament of Baptism to several adults of Mr. Preece's District, in a very large and well-built Native Chapel, capable of containing at least 500 persons.

Visit to Mr. Fairburn, at Maraetai.

On my return to Auckland I spent two days at Mr. Fairburn's house at Maraetai; and performed Divine Service to a small congregation of Natives, the greater number of his people having gone to a more distant Settlement.

Voyage to the Bay of Islands.

On Thursday, June the 16th, I left Auckland in the Schooner "Wave," in company with Mr. and Mrs. Kissling and the Rev. W. Cotton; and reached the Bay of Islands, after a rough passage, on Monday, June the 20th

It Paihia, I had the satisfaction of finding the Rev. Messrs. H. and W. Williams; which gave me the opportunity of the fullest conference upon every department of the Mission with the senior Clergymen of the body. Mr. Williams received me into his house; and placed his boats, and every other kind of assistance that he could command, at my disposal.

Visit to Waimate, calling at the Kerikeri.

On Tuesday, June the 21st, Mr. Williams escorted me in his boat to the Kerikeri; where I was received by Mr. J. Kemp, who kindly undertook to prepare a compartment in the Mission Store for the reception of my library and other goods.

We then proceeded, with the Rev. R. Taylor, to the Waimate; the first sight of which, by moonlight, revived all our recollections of England; the white Church, and the Mission Houses with the neat gardens and fields, presenting an appearance of settled comfort which is scarcely to be found in any other part of New Zealand.

On the following day I walked round the whole of the Mission Station with Mr, Taylor and Mr. R. Davis: first visiting the house lately occupied by Mr. Clarke; which I found to be suitable as a temporary residence for my family, till I can determine the place of my future abode. When I arrived, a negociation was in progress for letting the farm, with Mr. Clarke's house, as a residence, to a Scotch gentleman. The terms which he offered seemed to me to be low; and I shall gladly consider myself as the tenant of the Society on the same terms, if this proposal should meet with the approbation of the Committee. I am anxious that the Mission Farm should not be let, except to persons more or less under the influence of the Church; for otherwise the whole character of the Station, and its effect upon the native mind, may soon be essentially changed for the worse, by the introduction of a promiscuous body of labourers.

I look upon the Waimate as the heart of the Mission. More than 400 Native Communicants. I am informed, sometimes assemble there at the Lord's Table: its Church is at present the best in the Colony. The neighbourhood is chiefly occupied by the sons of Missionaries, all, as far as I could observe, showing the effects of early education, by pursuing a line of conduct far more regular than that of

ordinary settlers. A great effort, I think, ought to be made to maintain and extend the influence of this Station.

School for the Sons of Missionaries: its proposed re-organization – Removal of the Rev. R. Taylor to Wangaroa.

The Northern Committee have made an urgent request to me, and to which I have assented, that I would form a Collegiate School, under my own superintendence as Visitor, in connexion with an Institution of a higher kind, for the education of Candidates for Holy Orders. This, they think, will meet many of the difficulties which they feel at present, in providing for the education of their children. My own views of the necessity of such Institutions, in a new Colony, are quite in accordance with those expressed by the Committee; but I should not have been prepared to take upon myself, at so short an interval, the serious duty of organizing such an Institution, if I had not felt that the representations of the Body were too urgent to be resisted. I have therefore acceded to the wish of Mr. Taylor to be relieved from the charge of the School after Christmas, and to be removed to a Mission Station. The place recommended is at Wangaroa, to act as much in connexion with Mr. J. Shepherd as may be found possible.

I will endeavour, after Christmas, to re-establish the School upon a different basis, if I can meet with a gentleman qualified to undertake the duties of Head Master. I think that the Society ought not any longer to be responsible for the expense of the establishment, which might be made to support itself. I have therefore recommended, that, for the future, the Society should be called upon to do no more than provide the school buildings, and a stated annual sum for the education of every Mission Scholar; leaving it to the Master to augment his own income by the success of his own exertions. In this work he shall have my cordial assistance, and the best advice which I can give him.

Appointment of the Rev. W. Williams as Archdeacon of the East-Cape District – The Bishop's Ordination Regulations.

I have acted upon the advice of the Bishop of Australia, confirmed by my own personal observation, in appointing the Rev. W. Williams to the office of Archdeacon of the District, of the East Cape. I have also requested him to act, in conjunction with the Rev. T. Whytehead, as one of my Examining Chaplains, especially for the native language; a knowledge of which I mean to require from every candidate for Holy Orders, and from every Clergyman licensed to any Station, either in the towns or country: for I find, that, from causes already mentioned, the Natives are becoming so mixed with the English, that every Clergyman must be prepared, when called upon, to minister to the spiritual wants of both classes of the inhabitants. This is already the case at Kororarika, where the Rev. R. Burrows conducts four Services every Sunday – two for the English Settlers, and two for the Natives; and derives his income partly from the English and partly from the Society.

Many of the Society's Catechists have applied to me to be admitted as Candidates for Holy Orders. In answer to these applications, I have told them that I will consider proficiency in the native language, and the visible signs of a blessing upon their exertions among the Natives, as a qualification for Deacons' Orders, without a knowledge of the original languages of Scripture; but that I cannot admit any one to Priests' Orders without a competent knowledge of the Greek Testament. It will be desirable that the Catechists so admitted to Deacons' Orders should be stationed in the Districts least frequented by the English; such as the neighbourhood of the East Cape, Rotorua, &c, where they can be visited periodically by Archdeacon Williams, for the administration of the Lord's Supper. The favourable opinion which you expressed of Mr. Davis has been confirmed by my own personal observation; and I have encouraged him to place himself in communication with Mr. Whytehead, on his arrival at the Waimate.

Administration of the Lord's Supper at Paihia.

On Sunday, June the 26th, I administered the Lord's Supper to 150 Native Communicants at Paihia, and was much struck with their orderly and reverential demeanour. All were dressed in European clothing; and, with the exception of their colour, presented the appearance of an English Congregation. In few English Churches, however, have I heard the responses repeated in the deep and solemn tone with which every New Zealander joins in that portion of the Service.

Visit to Kororarika.

On Sunday, July the 3d, I assisted

Mr. Burrows at Kororarika, where I found a very respectable wooden Chapel, occupied alternately by a Native and English Congregation. His position there is very important, as that place is the head-quarters of the French Bishop; and the best proof of Mr. Burrows' usefulness is, that so little progress has been made by the French Missionaries, even in their own immediate neighbourhood. I have been unable to ascertain the slightest foundation for the Bishop's statement of many thousand Natives having joined him. His converts, as far as I can learn, are not numerous.

Return to Auckland.

On Tuesday, July the 5th, I returned to Auckland in the "Tomatin;" leaving Mrs. Selwyn in the care of Mr. Williams, who promised to escort her to the Waimate, as soon as Mr. Clarke's house should be prepared for her reception.

Further Account of the Station at Waiheke.

Since my return, I have been occupied in visiting the native villages in the neighbourhood of Auckland; among others, the village of Putiki, in Waiheke, already mentioned, in compliance with a well-written invitation from the Native Teacher. Wirima received me in his new house with a natural politeness and good feeling which would not have disgraced an English Gentleman, and provided every thing for our comfort, to the best of his ability. On this occasion I was accompanied by Mr. Maunsell. Saturday evening was spent in reading and explaining Scripture; and the Sunday in Divine Service and School. The School was conducted in the most orderly manner; grown-up men, in full English dress, standing round in classes, according to proficiency, and reading and taking places with all the docility and good humour of children. After the reading, they marched in perfect order into the Chapel; where they repeated by heart a chapter of the New Testament with great accuracy, and were afterward questioned by Mr. Maunsell. All this was the more surprising, because this village is but rarely visited by an English Missionary, since the illness of Mr. Fairburn prevented him from going about among the Natives.

Proposed Formation of a Translation Committee.

The intercourse of the Natives with the English is fast leading to a corruption of their language; and I am therefore anxious, while the language is still spoken in purity, to fix the standard, as much as possible, by a very careful revision of the versions of the New Testament and Liturgy. For this purpose, I am requesting all the Missionaries to send in to me written remarks with reference to any errors in the published versions; which I intend to classify, and then submit them to a Translation Committee, composed of the two best grammarians and the two best oral scholars, with myself as Chairman. Archdeacon Williams, Mr. Maunsell, Mr. Hamlin, and Mr. W. G. Puckey, are generally acknowledged to answer respectively to the above description, and would represent the dialects of a very large portion of the whole country. I am of opinion that we shall not find much requiring to be altered; but, as Bishop Marsh said of Dr. Kennicott's work, it will be well worth the labour to be sure that there is but little to be done.

Projected Route in returning from Wellington to Auckland.

I am now on my voyage to Wellington and Nelson; and if it please God to give me health and strength, I purpose to return by land, in company with the Chief Justice, Mr. Martin, by the following route: –

From Wellington to Waikanai.. Rev. O. Hadfield. .....
.....Waikanai to Wanganui.. Rev. J. Mason.
.....Wanganui by Taupo to Ahuriri, to meet Archd. Williams.
.....Ahuriri to Wairoa..... Rev. W. C. Dudley
.....Wairoa to Turanga......Archd. Williams.
.....Turanga to Waiapu.....Mr. J. Stack.
.....Waiapu to Opotiki.......Mr J. A. Wilson.
.....Opotiki to Tauranga.... Rev. A. N. Brown
..... Tauranga to Rotorua... Mr. T. Chapman.
..... Rotorua to Otawao......Mr. J. Morgan.
.....Otawao to Kaitotohe.....Mr. B. Ashwell.
..... Kaitotohe to Waikato.....Rev. R. Maunsell.
.....Waikato to Orua........Mr. J. Hamlin.
.....Orua to Auckland.

Conclusion.

I hope this Letter will have put you in some degree in possession of my feelings toward the Natives, and toward the Mission. If you have gathered from it that I have imbibed the strongest regard for this native people, and a very high respect and esteem for the members of the Mission in general, you will have drawn a right conclusion from this very imperfect statement of my real feelings. I would rather that you should give me credit for feeling more than I express, than incur the danger of seeming to exaggerate beyond the facts of the case. God grant

that the facts may every day more and more speak for themselves, and prove this country to be, as I believe it to be, the ground-plot of one of the most signal mercies which God has ever granted to the Missionary exertions of His Church.

The Bishop's Second Letter is also addressed to the Honorary Clerical Secretary; and is dated H. M. Colonial Brig "Victoria," off Kapiti, Nov. 3, 1842, his Lordship being on his voyage from New Plymouth to Waikanai, in pursuance of the arrangement laid down in the last Letter.

In a Letter which I wrote to you about the end of July, I gave you some account of my visit to the Stations on the Frith of the Thames and at the Bay of Islands. At the time of my writing, I was on board the above vessel, bound from Auckland to Wellington. In fact, I find very little time for writing, except on shipboard; as my days on shore are much occupied with travelling, or with the business arising out of my duties in the different places which I visit.

Notice of Barrier Island.

On my way to Wellington, I touched at the Great Barrier Island, Aotea; where I found a party of forty Natives in a deplorable state of ignorance, all their intercourse with the English having been confined to traffic with whale-ships. On my return to the Waimate, I hope to send them some books, and, if possible, a Native Teacher.

Visits to Two Villages at the East Cape – Notices of Wellington.

Being detained by contrary winds off the East Cape, I landed on Sunday, August the 7th, in Hicks' Bay, at a village called Kauakaua, where the Natives were just assembling for Afternoon Service, under the direction of a Native Teacher sent by the Rev. W. Williams. The Chapel was crowded with a most attentive and orderly congregation. The change in the habits of the Natives on this part of the coast, since the establishment of the Mission, is so great, that even the master of a small coasting vessel – a class of men not usually favourable to the Mission – spoke of it as exceeding any thing that he could have believed.

As the wind still continued contrary, I landed again on Monday morning, to fulfil a conditional promise that I would bring medicine for some sick in the village. This gave me an opportunity of going to another large village, about a mile from Kauakaua. In both I was particularly pleased to find a large proportion of young children; which is not the case in all parts of the country, especially at the south, near Port Nicholson, where the numbers are decreasing; principally, I believe, from the imperfect adoption of English clothing. The Physician appointed for the care of the Natives at Wellington attributes the mortality principally to the injudicious use of blankets, which are worn day and night, and wet and dry. It is most important to bring up the rising generation to a complete adoption of English habits, for which purpose Boarding Schools are essentially necessary. The proceeds of the Native Reserved Lands, and the Fund arising from the sale of lands by the Government, will probably be applied chiefly in this way.

The state of the Natives at Wellington requires great care. They are there placed in the midst of the town, and exposed to all the temptations to English vices; from which, however, the greater part of them have kept themselves clear. Mr. Hadfield has great influence with them; and Mr. Aldred, the Wesleyan Missionary, is much respected by the portion of the population which has attached itself to him. I have requested Mr. Cole, the resident Clergyman at Wellington, to use all diligence in learning the Native Language; and I have no doubt that he will soon qualify himself to conduct their regular Services, and to act as their friend and adviser.

Visit to Nelson – Necessity of a Resident Clergyman, and Temporary Location of the Rev. C. L. Reay.

From Wellington I proceeded to Nelson, in company with Mr. Reay; the other Clergyman whom I expected from England, for the care of that Settlement, not having arrived. Here I found that the state of the Natives absolutely required the residence of a Clergyman competent to communicate with them. Scarcely a single person in Nelson speaks the Native Language; and, as the Natives were flocking as usual in great numbers to buy and sell at the New Settlement, differences were beginning to arise, which threatened

to be destructive of all good feeling between the two races. In fact, the towns are at present the keys to the native character in the neighbourhood. If the intercourse of the Natives with the English in the Settlements be not carefully watched by some person resident on the spot, the character of the people will soon, I fear, be changed for the worse, over a wide circle in the neighbourhood of the English Colony. My own observation, at every town in New Zealand, has impressed me with the certainty of this fact. I therefore decided to leave Mr. Reay at Nelson, till I can supply his place by another resident Clergyman; when he will go to his Station, which will probably be between Wanganui and New Plymouth, where a large native village is likely to be formed by the return of many of the Taranake Natives, who were expelled from their own country by the irruption of the Waikato Tribes. In the mean time I have undertaken to supply one half of his income from the funds placed at my disposal by the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign Parts, in consideration of his services to the English Settlers. He conducts the daily Services of the Natives who come to Nelson; of whom, during the period of my stay, we had a constant succession of congregations. He also visits the neighbouring Settlements, which formerly belonged to Mr. Hadfield's district.

Return to Wellington – Death of William Evans.

From Nelson I returned to Wellington; where it pleased God to visit me with a heavy affliction, by depriving me of my dear young friend and travelling companion, William Evans. During his last illness he spoke with the deepest feeling of the impression which had been made upon his mind by the sight of the Native Congregations assembling every morning and evening for their devotions.

Departure from Wellington, and Visits to Waikanai and Otaki.

After the funeral of my friend, I made preparations for my land journey, and left Wellington with a party of twenty-eight Natives; and arrived on the second day at Mr. Hadfield's Station at Waikanai. Mr. Hadfield is highly respected along the whole of this coast, not only by the Natives, but even by the sailors employed in the whale-fisheries at Mana and Kapiti. His house is in the native village, a situation generally supposed to be inconvenient, but, I believe, very advantageous for the instruction of the Natives in English habits.

On the morning after my arrival, a large congregation assembled in the Chapel; and I afterward went to the School, at which I saw 400 Natives, arranged in classes in a very orderly manner. I passed through the whole of the classes, and was much pleased with the proficiency of the people in reading and writing, and, above all, by their acquaintance with the Scriptures. In fact, there is scarcely an intelligent Native who will not readily find any passage in the New Testament which may be quoted. A new Chapel is being constructed at Waikanai, the material for which are ready on the ground. Among the rest, I saw the ridge-piece, of one solid tree, 76 feet in length – a present from the neighbouring Tribe at Otaki; who, till Mr. Hadfield's arrival, had been at enmity with the people of Waikanai, but have now forgotten their animosities, and presented them with this appropriate peace-offering.

On the following day I went on to Mr. Hadfield's second Station at Otaki, where another numerous congregation assembled to meet me; but I had not time to see their School arrangements, as I was anxious to go on toward Wanganui. Mr. Hadfield accompanied me part of the way; but was obliged, by lameness, to return; which I much regretted, as his company was a great assistance, and a real pleasure, to me.

Indisposition of the Bishop – His Arrival at Wanganui, and Visits to several Villages.

When I arrived within twenty miles of Wanganui, I was obliged to halt for three days, in consequence of a painful inflammation in one of my feet. Mr. Mason, on hearing of my approach, sent me his horse, on which I reached Wanganui. I rested one day at his house, and assisted at his Native Services. In the evening I had much conversation with the Natives on their disputes with the English Settlers; and advised them to be quiet, and await the arrival of the Commissioner, to settle all their land questions. At present, the Land Claims are a serious cause of dissension between the Natives and the Settlers; but there is now a prospect, I hope, of a speedy adjustment.

My lameness continuing, I left Wanganui on Mr. Mason's horse, to go with

him to visit his various Stations on the west coast, between Wanganui and Taranake. He has houses in many of the principal villages, which will enable him to spend a few days in each of them from time to time – a plan more likely to be productive of permanent good than a succession of short visits. These little dwellings are built, after the native fashion, with reeds; and we found them very serviceable during the bad weather with which we met on the journey. The weather certainly justifies Mr. Kissling's apprehensions; as strong gales are very common on this coast, accompanied with much rain. The population, also, is much scattered, which was another difficulty on his part. His wish is, in the present state of his health, to be placed in the midst of a large and concentrated population, for which the east coast offers the greatest facility.

Admission of the Rev. J. Mason to Priests' Orders.

I forget whether I mentioned, in any former Letter, that I admitted Mr. Mason to the order of the Priesthood, at Wellington, on the 25th of September, in the presence of 300 or 400 Natives. The Ordination Service was translated into the Native Language for this occasion by Messrs. Hadfield and Mason. It was a most interesting ceremony to me, as being my first Ordination; and I was very glad that the first exercise of this function of my office should take place in the presence of a native congregation. After the Service, I distributed among them copies of the small edition of the Gospel of St. Matthew, printed, at my request, by the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, with a small label, containing a memorial of the day.

Journey to New Plymouth.

My journey along the coast was the means of making me acquainted with a very large number of Natives, from all of whom I experienced the greatest respect. At another season of the year the Congregations would have been larger, as this is the time when many of the men are absent at their cultivations.

On Friday, October the 28th, I arrived at New Plymouth; and on Sunday received a very large congregation of Natives in a temporary building used for Divine Service. A Clergyman will shortly be stationed here; to whom I have given the same direction to study the Native Language, and to be ready at all times to minister to the native population of the Settlement, and to all others who resort to it for purposes of trade.

Proposed Station for the Rev. C. L. Reay.

In the present unsettled state of the Tribes in this district, I am unable at present to decide upon the most advantageous position for Mr. Reay to occupy. The Port-Nicholson Natives, who accompanied me on my journey, state, that it is the intention of a large body to assemble and form a Settlement at Mokotunu, twenty miles from New Plymouth, toward Wanganui. These will all be from the congregations of Mr. Hadfield and Mr. Mason; and therefore Mr. Reay may very likely find that the most advantageous centre for his operations. Mr. Reay will then be 110 miles from Mr. Mason, and Mr. Mason 70 miles from Mr. Hadfield.

Future Proceedings.

I am now on my way to Waikanai, from New Plymouth, in order to ascend the Manawatu River, to join Archdeacon Williams on the East Coast at Ahuriri.

We now continue the usual Report of this Mission from page 69 of our Number for March last.

NORTHERN DISTRICT.

The Annual Reports of the different Stations in this District for the year ending June 30, 1842, have at length been received. They all contain expressions of strong satisfaction at the arrival of the Bishop. They refer to a degree of anxiety and excitement which prevailed very generally in the minds of the Natives, on account of the exercise of British authority in the trial and execution of a Heathen Chief of high rank, who had been guilty of a horrid murder; but these feelings soon subsided. They speak favourably of the continued progress of the Gospel; though they lament a degree of indifference to further

instruction, which is manifested by some of the Christian Natives.

The following extracts from the various Reports present a view of the state and progress of each Station: –

TEPUNA.

Report by Mr. John King.

The Word of the Lord is spreading. The Natives see that it is wasting away their heathen gods, customs, and superstitions, according to the Prophet's words – He will banish all the gods of the earth; and men shall worship Him, every one from his place, even all the isles of the Heathen. The greater part are turning to a profession of Christianity; so that those who hold out against it are often at a loss to know how to keep up their old superstitions. At times they prevail – not, as formerly, by threats and force, but by entreaty and persuasion – upon some of the unestablished Christian Natives to aid and assist them. This is a grief to us, and a stumbling-block to themselves and others; but He which hath begun a good work will carry it on.

Upward of one hundred have been baptized at this Station; and others are seeking to be admitted to the Holy Sacrament by the Rev. H. Williams.

Services.

In a Letter dated Feb. 17, 1842, Mr. King enters into fuller particulars respecting the Services at this Station, and the neighbouring Native Villages: –

Divine Service commences at nine o'clock on Lord's Day morning, in the New-Zealand language: about fifty generally attend. The introduction of the Psalms into the Service excites much feeling and interest in the congregation, and adds new devotion to the Litany and to the other parts of the Church Service. Every additional portion of Scripture translated and brought into use increases the interest, and helps to further the spread of Divine Truth among the Heathen. There is English Service at eleven in the morning, for our family and the Europeans who occasionally attend. I hold Service with three or four groups of Natives in the afternoon; and we have also Native Service at the Station in the evening. The Natives are daily coming to read and hear the Scriptures, and to be instructed therein. Here are about 250 Natives, divided into ten parties. Divine Service is generally held with six or seven of these parties on the Lord's Day, and the others are visited by me or the Christian Natives on the Lord's Day, or during the week.

KERIKERI.

Report by Mr. James Kemp.

The cause of Christ has been gaining ground among the Natives. The preaching of the Gospel has been blessed by God to many; although great efforts have been made by the enemy to hinder, if possible, its progress.

During the year, two Services have been held in the Chapel on the Lord's Day, in the Native and English Languages. The Congregation has varied from 50 to 150. The adult Sunday School and Bible Class have, we hope, made some progress in the knowledge of the Scriptures and Catechisms.

The Native Villages in connexion with the Kerikeri are, Tohoranui, Ti, Takou, Waiaua, and Upokorau. Most of the Natives of Tohoranui have taken up their abode at the Ti, belonging to the Church Missionary Society. A large Raupo Chapel has lately been built at this place, by the Chief Tareha and his tribe; and many Natives assemble to attend Divine Service, which is conducted by a Native Teacher in my absence.

The number of Natives, adults and children, admitted to Baptism in Kerikeri Chapel is 195.

The average number of children who have attended the School during the year is 12: they have been instructed by my two daughters. The pupils live in the house, and are clothed and provided for at the Society's expense. I am thankful to say that a steady though slow progress has been made in reading and writing the English Language, which now appears to be an important object to attain.

WANGAROA.

Report by Mr. James Shepherd.

The Rev. R. Taylor has paid us one Ministerial visit during the year. In November last he baptized 33 adults and 16 children. There have now been baptized at this Station 115 souls, including adults and children; 30 of whom have also been admitted to the Lord's Supper. Upward of 300 are favoured with the

means of grace from our Station. There are in connexion with the Station, 9 Native Teachers; who in general, so far as I have been able to ascertain, have preserved an unblemished character.

The Christian Natives connected with the Station have, upon the whole, behaved pretty well, and their attendance on the means of grace has been regular. At the same time, it is proper to observe, that there is an indifference manifested by some of them which is very blameable. One of them remarked last Lord's Day, "I have been baptized into the baptism of Jesus Christ; but where are my fruits? How seldom do I come to you to inquire concerning the words of Christ!" It is, however, with much pleasure that I can look on some who exhibit good evidence of their being living branches of Christ the Living Vine.

PAIHIA.

Report by the Rev. Henry Williams.

The Lord's-Day duties of Paihia have been continued during the year. The Native Services in the Settlement are at 8 A.M. and at 6 P.M. There is an English Service at 11 o'clock in the forenoon. A Bible Class has been met every Monday Evening, of which we have good hope: many attend who are not connected with the Settlement.

The English Girls' School has continued under regular instruction. At this time there are 10 pupils, who are progressing in a pleasing manner.

Ten Native Girls have, every morning, been taught, in the English Language, the Catechism, Reading, and Writing.

The Female Native School has been regularly attended. Although the pupils are few, they evidence a strong desire to be taught.

At the Kauakaua, the congregation has numbered, on an average, 250 persons, whose attendance is regular. The Services are held on Lord's Day, in the morning and afternoon, by one of the Christian Natives, when no Missionary from Paihia is able to attend. From this place several Christian Natives proceed to the outposts every Lord's-Day Morning, as Teachers; from which we have every reason to hope much benefit will arise. The Schools have more particularly been confined to the Lord's Day, when the attendance has been good. All, both old and young, generally attend.

At Waikare the means of grace have been regular. Two Services, School, and a Bible Class, and one English Service, have been held on the Lord's-Day Morning, and Evening Prayers on Week-days. The attendance of the Natives has been fluctuating, and not generally good; while that of the English has been regular and encouraging. Average attendance of Natives, 30; of English, 20.

The Services at Owae have been regularly held, together with Schools and Meetings for conversation, and Morning and Evening Prayers, by the Christian Teachers. Here the good work is proceeding steadily, and affords much encouragement. Average attendance, 30.

At Wangaruru there is a decided change for the better. The means of grace have been well attended. A number of Christian Natives have settled here from other parts, and their good influence is strikingly visible. The Services, Schools, and Meetings for conversation, and Morning and Evening Prayers, have been conducted by the Christian Natives, some of whom have come from Owae. Average attendance, 50.

At Otuihu there has been a general attendance on the Lord's Days of about 50 Natives, who have been tolerably correct in their conduct. Many Natives, in connexion with this place, from time to time join the Christian party, though Pomare has tried much to keep them back. The principal residence of this tribe is up the river Karetu, a branch of the Kauakaua, where there is now a newly-erected raupo Chapel.

At Wangai there is an interesting party of Natives, who are regular in their attendance on religious duties.

Waikino, Waiomio, Tirohanga, and other places, where there are many Christian Natives, have been visited from time to time; and we hope that a blessing has attended our labours.

Much time has been given to the examination of Candidates for Baptism and the Lord's Supper; and it is pleasing to observe their willingness to bring their various difficulties for inquiry and adjustment previous to the Communion.

There have been baptized during the year, in connexion with this Settlement, Males, 116; Females, 87; Children, 49; Total, 252.

The Natives continue to press forward to be admitted as Members of the Visible Church, and the Mission is advancing in all its parts.

Report of the Press, by Mr. W. Colenso.

In the Printing Department, which is carried on at this Station, Mr. W. Colenso reports: –

During the last twelve months I have been partly engaged in editing and compositing 7 sheets of the Large Prayer Book, demy 12mo, and printing 6000 of each sheet; compositing 4 sheets of Exodus and Deuteronomy, demy 12mo, and printing 5000 of each; compositing Almanack for 1842, 16 pp. demy 8vo, and printing 2000; compositing the Small Prayer Book, third edition, 3 sheets demy 12mo, and printing 20,000.

WAIMATE.

Report by the Rev. Richard Taylor.

The English Boys' School, during the past year, has been under the superintendence of the Rev. R. Taylor. The number of pupils has been 23. Some of the boys are making steady progress in mathematical as well as classical knowledge.

The Native Schools are chiefly confined to the Lord's Day; when they are regularly held in every village, after Service. In Waimate, the Rev. R. Taylor and Mr. R. Davis have Bible Classes five times in the week, which are generally well attended. There have been received into the Church, by Baptism, 180 adults and 108 infants. The average number of Native Communicants has been 400; and of Europeans, 16.

In reviewing the occurrences of the past year, we have, on the whole, reason to rejoice, that, amidst all the changes which have taken place, amidst all the efforts of Popery, and the increase of indifference, the Truth still continues to maintain its ground, and progress.

In another communication, dated Dec. 31, 1841, Mr. Taylor states –

At our last Sacrament, the number present was so great, that we were constrained to hold the Service in the churchyard. Upward of 1000 Natives were estimated to have been present, and 487 partook of the Lord's Supper.

KAITAIA.

Report by Messrs. W. G. Puckey and J. Matthews.

Our Lord's-Day duties have been performed as usual. They have consisted in alternately holding Divine Service at the Settlement, and in visiting the adjacent villages for the same purpose. The means of grace have in general been well attended.

Our Sunday Schools, Weekly Meetings in Bible Class, and Quarterly Meetings for the instruction of the Teachers, have been well attended; and we trust they have proved very profitable means of acquiring religious instruction.

Divine Service in English has also been held once on the Lord's Day, for the benefit of our families, and the Europeans in the neighbourhood.

There have been admitted into the Church, by Baptism, during the year, 176 adults, and 78 infants. The number of Communicants is 174. We are thankful to state that the candidates had acquired an increased knowledge of the truths of the Christian Religion; and also, that it was evident our Native Teachers had been diligent in their duties.

The districts of Wangape, Oruru, Doubtless Bay, and Parengarenga, have been visited by us during the year, and our visits have been well received.

We have Native Teachers engaged in most of the villages. They hold Divine Service with the people; and also instruct them in reading the Scriptures, and in repeating Catechisms. Most of these Teachers give their services gratis: some few we assist with articles of trade.

The practice of committing large portions of the Testament to memory still obtains, and, we trust, is a useful employment for the whole of the Baptized Natives.

Baptisms – Decrease of Mortality among the Natives.

In a Letter dated June 6, 1842, Mr. Matthews has given some statistical details of the Station from its establishment. He writes –

We have now been at Kaitaia eight years and a half. The number baptized, including adults and infants, from Jan. 7, 1835, to Feb. 1842, is 706. 179 of these were infants from one to seven years of age: 69 of these have died since their baptism. In 1839, four years after baptisms bad commenced, 30 died out of 184: during the last three years and a half, 39 have died out of 676. Were I asked to give a reason for this decreasing mortality, I should say, that, next to the blessing of God, it must be ascribed to the discontinuance of rotten corn as food, and to the

medicine with which they have been well supplied.

The number of those who have disgraced their profession is very limited. The Christian Natives in general attend very punctually to the means of grace, and are gradually gaining sound Scriptural knowledge. They are industrious in their habits, and would, I have no doubt, grow wheat, if a mill, which would grind twenty bushels a day, were in their vicinity. Several already possess horses and cows: their desire to obtain horses especially increases.

KORORARIKA.

Report by the Rev. R. Burrows, for the Half-year ending June 30, 1842.

Many of those Natives who formerly called themselves followers of the Popish Bishop have, during the last six months, applied for our Testament and Prayer Book, and are now regular in attendance at Church. Some of these have offered themselves as Candidates for Baptism; but five only have been received into the Visible Church. Many more have applied, and are now under examination; but we see the necessity of more than ordinary care in admitting them to this holy rite in this day of great profession, when multitudes are wishing to take upon them the Christian name; especially as we know that not a few of those who are baptized walk inconsistently. The bad example set them in this neighbourhood by Europeans is a great hindrance to their moral and spiritual improvement; and when we consider the many temptations to which they are exposed, we can ascribe it only to the preventing grace of God that many more are not drawn aside into the paths of vice.

Service has been regularly held twice on the Lord's Day; and the Natives who live near have assembled on Monday evenings for reading and conversation.

The Native Teacher has been very diligent, and sets a worthy example. The Sunday School is regularly attended to by him.

Since the commencement of the year several Baptized Natives have been called out of time into eternity, and have left a pleasing testimony behind them that they have gone to Jesus.

The English Services have been performed as usual, and have been better attended: there is, however, a manifest indifference about the one thing needful.

MIDDLE DISTRICT.

A full account of this District was given in our Number for March last.

EASTERN DISTRICT.

No recent accounts have been received from this District. In a Letter dated December 2, 1841, Archdeacon Williams dwells with much pleasure on the steady progress which the inquiry after better things had made among his people during the year which was then drawing to a close. He observes –

At the commencement of the year, the Candidates for Baptism at Toanga were 12: now they are 140. And so also at the other places, though not in the same proportion. Thus, from Ngatikaipoho, on Jan. 13 the Candidates were 29, but at the present time they are about 90.

WESTERN DISTRICT.

WAIKANAI AND OTAKI.

Illness of the Rev. O. Hadfield, and joy of the people upon his recovery.

In the months of December 1841 and. January 1842 the Rev. Octavius Had field was visited with a very severe attack of illness; during which he was removed to Wellington, in order to obtain medical assistance. He was however, through mercy, enabled to return to Waikanai on the 11th of February.

In a Letter dated May 5, 1842, he writes –

Having returned to my beloved people, I was much gratified with the delight which they seemed to exhibit at my return to them, they having despaired of my recovery. I thought, that, instead of their having suffered any loss by my absence, which I expected, they had increased in faith toward the Lord Jesus Christ, and in mutual union and love.

On the 20th of February, at Waikanai, when there was a congregation of more than 600 persons, I administered the Lord's Supper to 57. On the following Lord's Day I was at my other place, Otaki, and had a congregation of about 300. I subsequently administered the Lord's Supper to 24 persons. These people showed, if possible, more joy than the others at my return, and many of them were in tears.

Visit to Queen Charlotte's Sound, D'Urville's Island, Nelson, &c. – Merciful Preservation.

On the 8th of March, I started early in my boat, and reached Okukari, in Queen Charlotte's Sound, in the evening. Here I was again pleased with the feeling manifested toward me by these people. On Lord's Day the 13th I had a congregation at that place of above 700. I baptized 42 adults and 12 children, and afterward administered the Lord's Supper to 28 persons.

On the 16th I proceeded on to Rangitoto, D'Urville's Island; and was gratified, as usual, with my reception. On the 18th I went on to Blind Bay; and on the 19th, Saturday, I reached Nelson, the new Colony. There are very few Natives there, and those not resident. I collected them on the following day, and found that they had already obtained some Scriptural knowledge from Teachers whom I had previously sent them. I had also the pleasure of ministering to a tolerably large English congregation; Captain Wakefield having kindly given personal notice, on the previous evening, of my intention to celebrate Divine Service with them.

I left Nelson on the 23d; and reached Wakapuanga, where I found a few Natives. On the 24th I again landed at Rangitoto; and the people having assembled, on the 27th I baptized 8 adults and 3 children, and administered the Lord's Supper to 21 persons.

I returned to Queen Charlotte's Sound on the 28th; and experienced a merciful deliverance on the following day, when crossing over to this side. The wind, which was fresh when I started, increased to a gale; and as my rudder broke, and my sail was torn by the wind, I expected instant death, the sea at the time running very high; but, contrary to our expectation, the wind became lighter, and we landed in safety. I made up my mind to cross no more in my boat; as the great danger of so doing, of which I had been frequently warned before, became manifest. I afterward found, on returning home, that a small craft had been sent down to me by the Northern Committee.

Since that period I have been engaged at these two places, Waikanai and Otaki. I am happy to say that there is increasing evidence of real faith manifested by the people in their holy and consistent conduct, and in their contempt of worldly goods and wealth. To the God of all grace, the Fountain of all goodness, would I ascribe all praise and adoration for His work of mercy and love wrought among these people.

Visits to Wairarapa and Wellington.

In a subsequent Letter, dated Oct. 1, 1842, Mr. Hadfield describes some hopeful efforts which he had made to extend the knowledge of the Gospel to other places connected with that part of New Zealand: –

On the 19th of July I left Kapiti, to visit Wairarapa, a place about fifty miles to the eastward of Wellington, to which about 600 Natives have lately come from Hawkes' Bay. I passed two Lord's Days at Wellington, one on my way to the above place, and another on my return; and performed Divine Service both to the English and Native Congregations there. I also baptized 27 native adults, and some children; and am able to say that I perceived a considerable improvement there among the native population. I found very few Natives at Wairarapa; for as they had not been there long enough to enable them to cultivate, they were necessarily scattered in the woods in quest of food, such as wild pigs, &c. I passed a few days with those whom I did meet; and found them well inclined, but much in want of instruction.

Labours of Native Teachers.

Some Native Teachers, whom, with the kind assistance of Mr. Hanson of Wellington, I was enabled to send to Chatham Island in December last, have lately returned, having stopped a bloody war, and established peace among the small contending tribes there. Many of the Natives of that place have also made a profession of Christianity, and are only now waiting for further instruction.

A few Natives connected with me have occasionally gone from this place to Port Cooper, requesting me to supply them with Teachers and books, if I would not go with them myself. Being unable to go, I sent some Teachers; who, I trust, through the Divine Blessing, may be made instrumental in conveying the saving truths of the Gospel to many hundreds who are now bowing down to Jehovah, but in ignorance of the true nature of that mystery of Salvation whereby sinners can appear with acceptance before their God.

The Divine Blessing, I think I may safely say, continues to rest on the Natives

of this district. The Lord is gathering together for Himself His elect people from among them, and preparing them, by His Spirit, for glory.

Baptism of One Hundred and Twenty Adults.

We are enabled to lay before our Readers a very recent communication from Mr. Hadfield, dated Waikanai, Jan. 16, 1843, giving a pleasing account of this Station at the commencement of the present year: –

The work of the Lord here, so far as the human eye can discern, is going on well. There can be no question about the power of the Gospel upon these people. The Lord has not sent His Gospel to this land in vain; but is, by the power of His Spirit through His preached word, gathering His elect into the Visible Church. On Christmas Day, and on the Lord's Day previous, I baptized about 120 adults; who, by their apparent interest in heavenly things, and disregard to the things of the world, give me good hope that they are the people of God. I have lately witnessed the deaths of several Christian Natives. The sincere faith in Christ manifested by some of these people is very blessed. They feel that Christ has delivered them from the curse, having been made a curse for them; and that by His fulfilment of the Divine Law He has given them a title to glory.

WANGANUI.

General View – Effects of the Distribution of the Scriptures.

Of this Station, and the district connected with it, the late Rev. J. Mason reported, in a Letter dated June 24, 1842: –

My district has hitherto extended in a northerly direction, about 100 miles along the Taranake Coast, to the south-west point of Mount Egmont. Many of the people on this coast are liberated slaves from Waikato and the Bay of Islands, who have been under instruction at those places. Since our arrival here they have received such attention as, from the distance, it has been in our power to give them. They have been supplied with books and slates for the schools; and have been repeatedly visited both by Brother Hadfield and myself. On the arrival of the Bible Society's Testaments – a timely and gracious boon – I supplied each Pa, eight in number, with 10 copies. Under the Spirit's influence, these Testaments, together with a few efficient Native Teachers, have produced a wonderful change among the people. More than 200 have been admitted by baptism into the Visible Church of Christ, and many others are sincerely seeking the Kingdom of God and His righteousness.

The Gospel is now very generally received and professed. Each party, however small, both on the banks of the river and on the sea-coast, have their Chapel; in which they assemble, not only on the Lord's Day, but every day, for Morning and Evening Prayers. They have also a Morning School, in which the New-Testament Scriptures are extensively read; and, thanks be unto God! His Word has not gone forth in vain. A few, I trust, have been brought into the fold of Christ; and others are earnestly inquiring the way to Zion, with their faces thitherward.

War is entirely given up in this district. In former years, this people were remarkable for treachery and murder; but it is very gratifying to hear some of the old Chiefs express their horror and detestation of their former customs, on which they reflect with amazement: and when I have been conversing with them on the love and death of Jesus, I have frequently heard the following remark: "Yes, this is a good Religion, which will save a man alive; but all our ancestors have been killed in war. Why did you not come sooner, that they might have heard of Jesus Christ?"

Erection of a Church – Baptisms, &c.

At this Station, a new brick Church has been erected by the Natives. The lime-burning, bricklaying, and carpentering, was performed by Natives, under Mr. Mason's superintendence. The walls inside are plastered, the roof shingled, and the floor boarded. It is capable of holding about 600 Natives. Mr. Mason writes, in the Letter just quoted –

On Lord's Day, June 19, 1842, which was the second anniversary of our arrival at Wanganui, our new Church was opened. To celebrate this important event, about 800 individuals assembled at the Settlement – a few from every part of my district, and some even from a distance of

upward of 200 miles up the river. During the Morning Service, and in the presence of this assembly, forty-two adults were admitted by Baptism into the Visible Church of Christ. On the Monday following we had an Examination of the Schools; and in the evening of the same day, a baptism of infants, the children of baptized parents. On Tuesday there was a feast. The day was fine; and the school-ground was strewed with fern and grass. At eleven o'clock, about 600 were seated, according to their Tribes. After the repast, several speeches were delivered; and very gratifying indeed it was to hear the principal Chiefs exhorting their friends and countrymen to repentance, and perseverance in the work of faith and love. "This Meeting," said Te Anaua, "is not like our former meetings for war. We now meet in the presence of God, to love each other, and to strengthen each other in the work of God: wherefore, let your works be right."

Account of Otumatua.

Otumatua is a Pa on the Taranake Coast; and was visited by Mr. Mason, in company with the Bishop, on his Lordship's visit to the district. Mr. Mason writes, in a Letter dated November 1842 –

This Pa contains from 400 to 500 people, and will probably be selected for a Missionary Station. Its position is somewhat central between Wanganui and Taranake, or New Plymouth. It is eighty miles from Wanganui, and fifty miles from Taranake. The land for many miles around is rich and fertile, being covered with native grasses and the flax-plant. The whole population on this line of coast, between Wanganui and New Plymouth, may be estimated at about 2000; three-fourths of whom are attached to the Church of England, and the remainder to the Wesleyans. I have visited these people once every four months since my arrival here; but this is not sufficient to ensure their instruction and edification in the faith which they now profess. For this purpose it will be necessary to have some one residing among them.

Horrible Murder in the Bay of Islands.

Reference has been made to a dreadful murder committed in the Bay of Islands by a Chief of high rank, and the consequent excitement of the Natives. The following account of it is given by Mr. John King, in a Letter dated Tepuna, Feb. 17, 1842: –

Since the removal of the Governor to the River Thames, the Bay of Islands remained in comparative quietness, until an awful murder was committed on an island in sight of our dwelling-house, and about two hours' pull distant. Mrs. Robertson, a widow; her two young children, a son and daughter; a native child, on a visit at her house; and a European servant, an elderly man; were murdered in the afternoon of the 20th of November last, by Maketu, a young Native Chief, about twenty years of age. When he went to the island, Mrs. Robertson looked upon him as a friendly native, as he was living in the neighbourhood; but upon her refusing to comply with his demands, he killed the European servant-man, while he was lying asleep in the garden, and then in a rude manner insulted Mrs. Robertson, knocked her down with an axe, and dispatched her. He then killed the children, dragged Mrs. Robertson's body and two of the children into the kitchen adjoining the house, plundered the house of what property he thought fit, and then burnt it down, the bodies also being very much burnt. We seldom hear of such savage brutality: it has struck the minds of all, especially the female part of the community, with terror. Maketu is to take his trial on the 28th instant, at the River Thames, whither the witnesses have proceeded to appear against him. The end we have not seen; but are drawing near it. It will be a new sight indeed to the Natives, and also to ourselves.

The Rev. H. Williams, in his Report of Paihia for the year ending June 30, 1842, thus refers to the subject: –

The people do not yet clearly understand the intentions of the Government toward them. Many have been their fears, and great excitement has from time to time exhibited itself. In November and December last the whole of this part of the island was in an alarming state, in consequence of a dreadful murder which took place in Paroa Bay, when a whole family was cut off by a young native of high connexions. For some time it appeared doubtful whether a civil

war might not be the consequence; or, indeed, whether it might not lead to a general rise upon the Europeans. A Meeting of the Native Tribes around, including those from Wangaroa and Hokianga, was held at Paihia on the 16th of December, and terminated favourably. The Natives approved of the execution of the murderer, of whose guilt there was no doubt.

Desire of the Natives for the Word of God.

The munificent grant of 10,000 copies of the New Testament, made by the British and Foreign Bible Society two years ago, having been exhausted, another edition has been printed, and an additional grant of 10,000 copies has been liberally made to the Church Missionary Society.

The strong desire of the Natives to possess the Testament still continues, as will be seen by the following Extract from the Rev. J. Mason's Journal: –

Jan. 12, 1842 – Several Chiefs, from a distance of more than 150 miles, applied for a New Testament this morning. As they were strangers to me, they were introduced by another Chief residing at Wanganui.

And in a Letter, dated November 1842, Mr. Mason writes –

During the last twelve months I have received upward of 30l. for New Testaments and Psalters; and if I had had thrice the number of books, I could have disposed of them all at the same price. My Schools, 30 in number, and Teachers, I supply with books gratis.

That many of those who possess copies of the Sacred Scriptures love the Word of God, and desire to profit by it, the subjoined Extracts will show: –

The following instance occurred while Mr. Mason was on a visit to his people along the Taranake Coast: –

March 17 – On leaving Tihoi this morning, half-a-dozen Natives accompanied me several miles on the road, for the purpose of talking over passages of Scripture which they could not understand. Our hearts mutually burned within as, while I endeavoured to tell them the meaning of the Lamb of God that taketh away the sins of the world.

Mr. R. Davis writes, in a Letter dated Waimate, April 29, 1842 –

Some of the Natives appear to be earnestly seeking to be fed with the sincere milk of the Word. They remarked to me the other day, "We do not now so much want to know what, the meaning of this or that portion of the Scriptures may be, as to know the nature of the fatness it contains. We do not want to hear sermons of which this fatness and strengthening portion is not made the subject." The word which I have translated "fatness" implies growth as well as fatness; so that I understand the word, as used by the Natives, to mean something which will cause strong, spiritual growth.

Mr. W. G. Puckey writes, in a Letter dated Kaitaia, June 6, 1842 –

Christian knowledge is increasing fast; for since the shipment of Testaments from England, the Word has been more largely diffused: and although every one has not a Testament, nor perhaps one in every ten, yet it is beyond doubt that they are getting fast acquainted with divine truths; for having no other books to read but Scripture and productions from Scripture, their pursuits in learning must be all of a sacred nature. Here I would observe, that the Natives care not for any book unless it be derived from the Bible. When we have wished to tell them something new, and to us interesting, they have inquired, "Is it from the Bible?" and if not, they seem to feel weariness in listening, which has a sensible effect on the narrator.

On the 2d of this month I was at a Native Settlement about twenty-five miles from home. The Natives had assembled around my tent door before I was up, with their books in their hands, and several marks in them, waiting to ask me to solve passages which were beyond their capacity. Others had questions to ask concerning verses which had been read to them by their companions; while others had portions of discourses which they had heard at this Station from our own lips. The clearness of their memories is quite astonishing: they can remember portions of sermons for years. I can truly say, that very many, with whom I am personally acquainted, do really feed on the Word of God, and delight in doing His will.

And Mr. J. Matthews, writing under the same date, observes –

It appears to be quite a feast to the Christian Natives when they have an opportunity of meeting us at their native residences. A week ago, I visited the Tribes of Parapara, Parakerake, and Oruru, and was much delighted with my trip. I thought, when Daniel Patuware died, that no one would follow me, as he did, from village to village, to ask the meaning of passages of Scripture; but, thank God! two or three have caught Elijah's mantle.

One of the Missionaries, who accompanied the Bishop in a voyage to the south of the island, landed at the East Cape, a place at a considerable distance from any European Teacher. He writes in his Journal, under date of August 7, 1842 –

We came to an anchor in Waitepori Bay, with two large Pas in sight. We went on shore, and it was a source of material pleasure. I believe their large and commodious Chapel was crammed. The Bishop catechized the assembly. The next day we were among them again; when my chief occupation was, to write on their slates short portions of Scripture. Surprised and delighted am I to say, that here, as on other occasions, if I wrote or spoke part of a verse only, some one or other completed the quotation.

Testimonies to the Change effected in New Zealand.

One of the Society's oldest Catechists, Mr. C. Baker, remarks, in a Letter dated Bay of Islands, Sept. l 1, 1842 –

I know that I am not so sanguine as some of my Brethren as to the extent of good done in New Zealand; but this I am constrained to say, that it far exceeds my expectations in coming to this land; and I cannot refrain from exclaiming, What hath God wrought!

Dr. Sinclair, a surgeon in Her Majesty's Navy, having had occasion to visit New South-Wales in the discharge of his professional duties, proceeded to New Zealand at the end of 1841, with the express view of forming his own judgment of the state of things in that country. Amidst many other favourable statements, he remarks, in a Letter dated Glasgow, Nov. 24, 1842 –

By means of the well-directed labours of the Missionaries of your Society, the Natives have become exemplary Christians; and now show an intellectual capacity, which strikes with surprise every one who goes among them

I might mention many circumstances to prove how sincere they are, and how well they seem to be instructed in Religion; but I will state only one, which made a deep impression upon me at the time. While staying for a few days in the hut of an Englishman at a part of the coast very little frequented, where about thirty Natives live, I heard, morning after morning, about day-break – when, as Captain Cook beautifully observes, the warbling of the small birds in New Zealand appears like the tinkling of little bells – the sound of a person striking an iron bolt. On inquiry, I found this to be the call to Morning Prayer, and that, on a small spot of ground cleared for the purpose, all the little village assembled beneath the canopy of heaven, to offer up, in unaffected piety, their grateful thanks and prayers to their great Creator. Their avidity to learn reading and writing, and to possess books, as well as to engage in discussion on Religion and other subjects, is very remarkable. Perhaps no people in the history of mankind has been so completely changed in their religious and moral condition as these Natives have been in so short a time; and more particularly by so small a number of men, and by such peaceful means. From what I have seen myself of those still unconverted, the state of the whole people, before the arrival of the Missionaries, must have been, I should think, more degraded and abject than that of any nation I have seen, whether on the coasts of Africa, on the north-west coast of America, the Sandwich Islands, or any other country which I have visited. The Master of the small schooner in which I went along the coast, touching at different places for the purpose of trade, declared to me that they had changed very much for the better within his experience; and he was on this occasion much pleased with their honesty and the propriety of their conduct. I have observed myself, as well as heard it remarked by others, the great contrast between the modesty and good sense shown in the conversation of those who have been converted, and the ribaldry

and indecency of those who still remain in darkness. Frequently have I heard a Christian Native, when asked to buy or sell on the Lord's Day, or break any other Commandment, make the decided answer, "No – me Missionar;" and that in circumstances when the temptation was great, and the means of keeping the transaction secret not difficult.

Advancement of a Christian New Zealander in Civilization.

Toward the close of the year 1841, and in the early part of the year 184: 2, Mr. W. Colenso, the Superintendant of the Society's Press in New Zealand, made a long journey through a considerable part of the Northern Island. The journey occupied three months. While he was proceeding through a very desolate and thinly-populated part of the country, he passed one night in a hut occupied by two European sailors, who, on the following day, took him in their boat some distance on his journey. Having crossed Kaipara Harbour, the party pitched their tents for the night among some sand-hills, with which this part of the country abounds; and in the morning recrossed the harbour, in the hope of finding a native village of which they were in search. Mr. Colenso writes –

Feb. 11, 1842 – Early this morning we re-crossed the harbour to the eastern shore, a distance of about ten miles; where we hoped to find Otamatea, the village to which we had been repeatedly directed; although we had learned, from the people of Omokoiti, that William Stephenson, the Baptized Native Teacher to whom I had been referred for information and assistance, was absent. We rowed, however, up the creek or river, and sought for some time without finding any habitation. At last, having advanced about two miles, we saw a house on the right bank of the river. We pulled toward it, landed, looked about us, and shouted; but in vain, for no person appeared.

The house, which was open, was very clean and tidy. On a shelf were plates, cups and saucers, seeds in bags, &c.; and beneath were a tea-kettle, frying-pan, buckets, &c. A mattress, bolster, and pillow, were rolled neatly together; a glazed and coloured print, representing the Crucifixion of Christ, hung against the wall; and beneath was a fowling-piece. In a corner, on a shelf, were, a hair-brush, a hat-box containing a hat, a New-Zealand Testament, and other things. On another shelf were paper and pens; while three large and locked chests, a good cane-bottom chair, and a table, completed the furniture of the room. Out of doors, in the garden, were raspberry-bushes and peach-trees, and maize, melons, gourds, onions, &c, in abundance. An out-house contained a fishing-net upon a platform; and in another house on the hill, at about 200 yards' distance, we found wheat in bags and in the straw, oil in calabashes, pit-saws, and carpenter's tools. In front of the house, stakes had been driven to form an embankment against the sea, which came up very near it; while behind the house a way had been cut down the face of the hill, to conduct a small stream of water into the little garden. I was much pleased with the air of neatness that everywhere prevailed; and had already formed a high opinion of the owner, whom we supposed to be some respectable European. I had, indeed, intimated to the Europeans with me, that it would be well if they were to copy from so good an example.

On returning, however, to the verandah of the house, and there sitting in the shade, considering what step I had better take, I perceived a slate which hung on the outside of the doorway. On perusing it, I found it to be a Letter from a Baptized Native to his Teacher, to the effect, that he came to that bouse to look for him, but found him absent; and desiring him not to believe the reports which were in circulation against his character, &c. It was addressed to William Stephenson. On this I again looked inside, more minutely than at first, and found the Testament to bear his name, and the papers to contain many evidences that they belonged to him. So that the neat little dwelling and grounds, which we had been led so much to admire, in reality belonged to a Native! – Without doubt, this was the highest step in civilization which I had seen among the New Zealanders during more than seven years' residence among them.

A First Lord's Day in New Zealand.

The following Account of the celebration of the Lord's Day at Paihia occurs in the Rev. C. L. Reay's Journal: –

June 26, 1842: Lord's Day – A day replete with interest – my first Lord's Day in this Land of Promise. Here it seems to he a delight, the holy of the Lord, and honourable. I joined in Worship with a large body of Native Christians: the Church was more than filled. There is great devotion and decorum in their manner: they enter thoroughly into the spirit of our Liturgy: they were as if actuated by one spirit, and endued with one voice. The Bishop took part in the Communion Service, and preached in the Native Language: he is an astonishment to the Natives. Almost the entire congregation stopped to communicate.

Instance of Deep Spiritual Enjoyment.

In a Letter dated June 6, 1842, Mr. W. G. Puckey gives the following remarkable account: –

A few evenings ago I was conversing with a young man respecting my native land; and quoted a short passage or two from Rowland Hill's Life, remarking upon the effect which his preaching had upon thousands – how many sinners had been converted through it. I then said, "When had the preaching of the Word a similar effect here?" "Stop," said he, "I will tell you something that took place in my own heart about twelve months ago, during the funeral sermon for Robert. The preacher was speaking about the effect of the Holy Spirit upon the believer's heart, and asked his hearers, 'Who would not be filled with the Spirit, and who would not enjoy the Divine presence?' I said, 'O Lord! I would be filled with Thy Spirit: I wish to enjoy Thy Divine presence.' I then felt that I was personally in the presence of God; and continued so full of joy all the rest of the day, that I did not think of my food."

This young man lost his wife and only child a short time since, and lives and acts as a Christian ought. I have seen the struggle between nature and grace, when he has been oppressed by severe outward difficulties, the anxiety depicted on his countenance, and have heard the words of resignation which have dropped from his lips. I could, with all my heart, enter into his feelings; for his only child, a babe of six months, was dying; his wife died three months before; and now he was to be left alone in the world; – yet not alone, for his Heavenly Father still cared for him.

Conversation with Christian Natives at Waro.

In a Letter dated Kaitaia, Dec. 24, 1841, Mr. J. Matthews gives some acccount of a conversation which he had at Waro with three brothers, Ripi Busby, Ford Mahanga, and Kete Burton, in which they expressed themselves in the striking figurative style adopted by the Natives. Mr. Matthews writes –

Ripi Busby had lately been afflicted, aid he spoke in reference to this. He said that in their native state a servant could not be proud, and cross his master's will. He had been afflicted, and he thought, it was necessary to keep him from setting his affections on the things of the world. He said that he found his heart was prone to wander after the things of time; but twice or thrice he had been afflicted, both in his person and in the loss of his child, and he would act like the servant who was nimble and obeyed his master.

Ford Mahanga, a Chief of great note, said, "I will not speak of the things of my own heart, for there are indeed many ways if the heart; but I will speak of the Word if God, which is sure to be true. The verse which I have to say is this, Lift up your hearts, for your redemption draweth nigh." I then spoke on the nature of the Kingdom of Christ, and showed how we mould endeavour to promote that kingdom. I told him that we should shortly sail upon all to show their gratitude to God, by contributing their mites to further the cause of this Redemption.

Kete Burton said that he must be like a dog which had stolen his master's food, and was going to be struck for the offence – he must crouch under, and be humble. He had sinned against God, who had fed him; and he must be like the dog – very humble. I referred him to some passages in the Testament which inculcated that grace.

I have this week had four Tribes to converse with on the things of Eternity.

Missionary Influence available in procuring the Restoration of Stolen Property.

The following instance is from the Rev. J. Mason's Journal: –

June 4, 1842 – Last night a number of Europeans came to inform me that the "Enterprise" schooner was wrecked at Wangaihu, and that a part of the cargo had been taken away by Natives. I accompanied them to the wreck, taking with me several of our Chiefs. When we arrived at the spot, we were informed by the Master of the vessel, that, on the

previous evening, he had mistaken the Wangaihu river for the Wanganui, and had thus ran his vessel ashore with a fair wind. He also said that a party of Natives from the adjacent Pas had first assisted in getting the cargo ashore, and had afterward plundered to a considerable extent, having taken away nine or ten trunks, and a number of iron pots, spades, &c. After this matter had been talked over among the Chiefs who accompanied me, Te Anaua stood up, and addressed his companions in a long speech, in which he observed, "If this wreck had occurred two or three years ago, there would have been some excuse for plundering; but now, since a better light has come among us, and we have heard the Word of God, we know it is not right. The things belonging to the White People must be restored." Early this morning, accompanied by Te Mawae and John Williams, I went to the Turakina and Wangaihu Pas, and succeeded in procuring a restoration of the stolen property, which was re-conveyed to the place from whence it was taken.

Deaths of Christian Natives.

Mr. J. Matthews, of Kaitaia, writes, in a Letter dated Dec. 24, 1841 –

We have lost two very valuable Christian Natives by death, Daniel and Sarah. Each of them was a shining light to all around.

Daniel Patuwaru, a fine young Chief of considerable possessions, was a consistent Christian, and one who had found the hidden manna.... which no man knoweth saving he that receiveth it. Unlike most of his tribe, he was always averse to have any thing to do with ungodly Europeans, lest he should hear their wicked language. Whenever I went to the neighbourhood of his residence, it was his delight to walk with me from village to village, asking the meaning of important passages of Holy Writ. During his illness, I was unable to leave home for several weeks, owing to indisposition; but Richard Kiriwi, my Native Visitor, went to see him, and pointed out some passages of Scripture to which I had referred him. Richard found him in a most happy frame of mind, and very desirous of conversing on the things that accompany salvation. When his attention was directed to those sweet words, I desire to depart, and to be with Christ, and similar passages, he replied, "I have thought of them already." He repeated, of his own accord, the first part of the 14th chapter of St. John. He addressed all who came to see him; and sat upright the whole night, talking to his friends, and repeating passages from the Bible. In this posture, and while thus engaged, he died. All the Christians of our little Church were much concerned at his death. The Natives interred him in a Christian manner, and put up a handsome fence around his tomb. I will only add, that I highly esteemed him, and, Blessed are the dead which die in the Lord.

Sarah was one of the Aupouri Tribe, who had to fly when the Pa called the Mokai was taken, and had lived with us from a little girl. The poor mother named the infant, soon after her birth, "Pa-taken." Sarah was of a disposition so remarkably placid, that Mrs. Matthews had to reprove her but once during seven years in our house. She was remarkably fine-looking, and her countenance expressed the good nature of her disposition. Her last effort was to repeat the 23d Psalm. She did not eat, nor drink, nor speak, during the last, week: her complaint was in the head, and she had been ill for a year.

On the death of a baptized Native at Kororarika, the Rev. R. Burrows writes, in his Report for the half-year ending June 30, 1842 –

I had frequently visited this Native in his sickness, and saw that he was fast hastening into an eternal world. He appealed from the first to be resigned; and before his death expressed a desire to depart and be with Christ. A relative of his called early one morning, and requested me to go and see him, as he was dying; but on arriving at the house, I found he was no more. I listened for a time at the door of the hut, and heard the voice of one who was, in his heathen state, the terror of the neighbourhood, reading 1 Cor. xv. Desirous not to disturb them, I remained at the door. When he had finished reading, he made a few very suitable remarks, and concluded with prayer.

We conclude with a few notices respecting

Popery.

The Rev. J. Mason, writes, in his Journal –

Feb. 9, 1842 – On visiting my people at Te Mawae, I found that a small party of Natives from Waikato had arrived the night before. On questioning them, with others who were sitting around me, I found

they were ignorant of the first principles of Christianity. "Why are you so ignorant?" I said: "have you never seen Mr. Maunsell?" They replied, " Webelong to Pikopo, and have no book." I embraced the opportunity of speaking on the value of the Word of God, which was able to make us wise unto salvation through faith which is in Christ Jesus. After quoting several passages – Search the Scriptures – Blessed are they that read, &c. – I remarked on the great sin of those people who withheld the word of life from them. I recommended them, on their return, to apply to Mr. Maunsell for a book; which they promised to do.

Mr. J. King writes, in a Letter dated Tepuna, Feb. 17, 1842 –

The Papists are active; but so far as I am acquainted with their influence among the Natives, they are now losing what they seemed to have gained while they continued to give gifts. However, it appears that they will be troublesome to those of our Brethren who come in contact with them, and retard the work by diverting the attention of the Natives from the Gospel as much as possible. The 5000 Testaments came in a seasonable time: there was a great call for them throughout New Zealand, and the Papists appear to be much alarmed at their distribution. The Natives receive the Testament as the Word of God, sent to make them wise unto salvation. The Papists, I hope, will not be able to deprive them of it, although they are using means to hinder its circulation. The Natives, young and old, bad and good, are seeking admission into the Church by baptism; so that it requires all diligence in detecting error, guarding their minds, and instructing them in the plain truths of the Gospel.

In a Letter dated Waimate, April 29, 1812, Mr. R. Davis writes –

I am thankful to inform you that the affairs of Popery in the Waimate District seem to be on the wane. The Scriptural education which the Natives are receiving will, I trust, through the blessing of the Redeemer, make them proof against its insidious attacks.

Our last extract is taken from the Rev. H. Williams's Report of Paihia for the year ending June 30, 1842; in which he refers to the discussion of which an account was given at p. 196 of our Number for August last: –

In October last a challenge was personally given to us by some of the Popish Priests, in the presence of several Natives, to a public discussion, in the New-Zealand Language, upon the points of difference between themselves and the Protestants. We met at the appointed time, and continued our discussion for two days. The Papists provided themselves with a large supply of books, and appeared with much pomp and ceremony, to the amazement of the Natives. Their great preparations were altogether negatived by our confining ourselves to the Sword of the Spirit; and as Dagon of old fell before the Ark of the Lord, so did these Papists fall before the Word of the Living God. They were much discomfited, and I expect will be satisfied not to renew the contest. Since the circumstance, I have scarcely heard their name, and we know not any Native who professes to belong to them.

8 See pp. 231-233 of the "Church Missionary Record" for October 1836.

Memoir of Poroake.

Church Missionary Record.

No. 12.] DECEMBER, 1843. [Vol. XIV.

MEMOIR OF POROAKE.

A NEW ZEALANDER, WHO DIED AT ROTORUA IN NOVEMBER 1842.

THE district of Rotorua, in the centre of the Northern Island of New Zealand, may be considered as one of the fastnesses to which darkness and superstition have retired, as unto a stronghold. Yet even in that wild neighbourhood an infant Church is growing up, encouraging the faithful Missionary in his labours, and bearing witness to the mighty power of the grace of God. The subject of the following brief Memoir was a young man of some rank in the tribe to which he belonged; and the opposition which he met from his heathen relatives was great. His conversations with them, when they came to urge him to return to Heathenism, strikingly illustrate the modes of thought and expression which prevail among the Natives. The strong impression made upon his mind by the evidence in favour of Christianity which is derived from the miracles recorded in the New Testament, is worthy of notice. And the blessing which was vouchsafed to the kind admonition of a Christian friend, when a lengthened course of instruction, and even a severe affliction, had failed to induce him to forsake his former habits, should be an encouragement to Christians to admonish one another, and to provoke one another unto love and to good works. "He died," observes Mr. T. Chapman, by whom the narrative has been furnished, "strong in faith, and his memory will long be cherished here."

Mr. Chapman's Letter is dated December 1842, and proceeds: –

His Introduction to the Missionaries.

Poroake first became introduced to the Missionaries by a visit from hence to the Bay of Islands, when he united himself to Mr. R. Davis's household, and continued with him more than two years; returning home, however, without any desire for better things. Ngatewakauwe, Tribes of Rotorua, being in a state of war, Poroake joined his friends in their fighting expeditions, and, in the attack on the Tumu, was wounded: an axe, thrown to him by a friend across a narrow river, inflicted a serious wound on his thigh.

First Serious Impressions.

During the weary solitude of the illness caused by this accident, his thoughts turned upon his opportunities neglected, and his perseverance in sin; and yet, upon his recovery, he again pursued his former courses, and joined a fight against Tauranga.

Decides for Christianity – Opposition from his Relatives.

On his return from this fight, he received a Letter from a baptized woman of Hokianga, named Catherine, calling upon him to reflect. Upon the receipt of this, he visited Catherine; and, on his return, at once enlisted among the professors of Religion at this place, and continued steady in his probation until his death, which happened about seven months afterward. When he was first taken ill, his nearest relatives came to him, and used all the persuasion in their power to induce him to cast away his belief. "No," said he, "I will never turn again to lies;" adding, with much simplicity of faith, "There are no true deeds that are supernatural, save those performed by Jesus Christ:" upon

these his mind appeared much to dwell. His relatives again returned, saying, "You insist upon your belief in this new Religion, and think much of the miracles about which you talk: who knows whether they are true or not?" – He answered, "I have read, and believe; and Christ's first miracle was the turning of water into wine." – They answered, "You were not born in this Religion: this was not your first belief." He replied, "That is true; but I now believe that our first parents were Adam and Eve." – They answered, "Tike was your first father." "Yes," he answered, "Tike was indeed our first father, according to our genealogy; and he told us much about the body, but nothing about the soul. Besides, we have had many fathers who were after him; but all were without wisdom, and all are gone to their own place. Leave me to die in this new faith of Jesus Christ." His friends, finding him fixed in his determination, left him to the care of those who were like-minded with himself.

Visit from a Christian Native.

Some little time after this, a native friend, who had heard that his relatives had been using every means to draw him away from his faith, visited him, and inquired of him if he had yielded to their entreaties. "No," said he, "not at all." – "Is, then, your belief good to you?" "Yes." – "And is Christ really the Physician whom you desire?" "Yes; He only is the Physician good for me." He then said, "My wish is now to go to the Missionary Station, in order that I may hear words of instruction, and know more of Jesus Christ." – His friend said, "And what have you got there, physic?" "Yes; but this is for my body: I want physic for my soul, that I may be cured of sin, and prepared for the Day of Judgment." – His friend replied, "Hold on in this: let it not go." "No," said he, "I will hold on in this, till I die."

Becomes known to Mr. Chapman.

Up to this period I knew little or nothing of him, he not having paid me any visit of inquiry, or in any direct manner called my attention to him. He now came, and obtained much relief from the anodyne medicines given; but his disorder – consumption – received only a temporary check. In my conversations with him, I never discovered any thing to attract particular notice. He always listened with quiet attention, seldom asked even the least question, and was altogether reserved.

Visits the Hot Springs, and returns, to avoid Temptation.

After some time, I recommended him to go to the hot springs inland from our Station, these having been highly recommended by a German Physician who had visited us. Poroake went; but had not been there long before a relative came to him, and so unceasingly importuned him to cast away the profession of his faith, and to return to his former vanities, that Poroake, finding he could not prevail upon his relative to desist, suddenly left the baths, and returned to our Station. I visited him immediately; when he simply remarked that he had returned, making no mention of the cause. I supposed he had received no benefit, and made no further inquiry.

His adherence to the Truth.

During the few days that he remained at our Settlement previously to his finally leaving, a relative called to see him, urging him to cast away his belief. Much conversation took place between them. Poroake said, "Show one who has performed miracles like unto Christ, and then – – -. As for your superstitions and feasts, in which you glory so much, you feast a tribe, but Christ will feed an assembled world." His brother called to see him, and was very urgent with him to go to two great priests, his near relatives. "I go not," said he: "I have a Friend here: His name is, The love of God. I have life here: His name is, The love of God. Whatever I want, I have here: His name is, The love of God."

Removes to the Island Mokoia.

The heavy winter rains having made the house in which he was damp, and his rest being much broken by his returning pains and cough, he was recommended to return to his former residence, upon the island in the lake, a warmer locality than our Station, and where also there are hot baths.

He returned to the island: and many of his relatives hearing that he was daily becoming worse, visited him – most of them to distract, and a few to comfort him. Some brought him garments for his burial – a singular, and perhaps Eastern custom. "Take away these garments," he said: "you need them, I do not: my garment is the righteousness of Christ: I desire no other."

Conversations with Native Christians.

Some time after this, a native friend, who called to cheer him, assured him, that as Christ raised Lazarus, so He would raise his body, if it pleased Him. "Fear not for the body: leave the care of that to God, and fear not its pains: we also shall follow; and if all our belief and trust is in Christ, we shall see Heaven."

The night following this visit, he dreamed that he had seen God, who desired him to be strong in prayer, and he should be delivered; remembering also, that he had an Intercessor in Heaven. This dream appeared to comfort him. After he had related his dream, he said, "I shall now soon die, and my last words to you all are, 'Be strong in your faith, and in your exhortations one to another: be steady, and put away all deceit.'" He was asked where he should like to be buried, the Missionary Station being mentioned. He replied, "When I am dead, I know that my heathen relatives will try hard to obtain my body; but be you all strong to keep it, lest it be defiled by their prayers and ceremonies. Yet bury me not at the Missionary Station. I desire to be buried here: lay me near that old house; and build your Chapel near where I am laid, that my body may hear your footsteps going to the House of God. Bury me here, and let my tomb be a continued sign that I died believing in Jesus Christ. Be strong. As yet you have hardly begun to believe: let my death and burial, therefore, be the beginning of your sincerity and strong belief in God. Raise your first Chapel over (near) my body; a remembrance of you to me, and me to you."

Some time after this, a relative came to see him, and said, "Is your belief in God sincere?" "It is sincere." – "Who, then, is your spiritual guide in this your faith?" "The Holy Spirit." – "And who the Way?" "Jesus Christ. – "And who the Door?" "Jesus Christ." – "And who alone can open the door?" "Jesus Christ." – "And where shall you be in Heaven?" "At God's right hand." – "Is all this true?" "It is true." – "let your words be true." "They are truth."

His Last Words, and Death.

Poroake was now drawing near his end. A friend asked him to give him his last words. He feebly answered, "I have no words." – "Come, be strong, and give us your last words." He said, in a very low voice, "The multitudes return to the earth." – "You are wavering," said his friends. "No," he answered, "I am not wavering." – "What, then, do you mean? You are implying that there are none in Heaven." "Yes," said he, "there are." – "Beside Christ?" "Yes." – "Where, then, did you get those words, The multitudes return to the earth." He could just articulate, "Many are called, but few are chosen," and fell asleep.

His Christian Burial – Opposition of his Relatives.

On the day appointed for his burial, Korokai – an old man, the principal Chief of this place – and his brother, with other Rangatiras (answering to our Gentlemen), all nearly related to Poroake, assembled, both as a token of respect, and in order to express their desire that the corpse might be given up to them, and buried in the native manner. "We are come," said Korokai, "to take away the body, as we intend to bury it in our sacred place. He is our child, and we will not leave his body to be buried by you, who would put it where it would be polluted by your carrying food and iron pots over it. Is he a slave?" One answered, "He is sacred to you, and he is sacred to us also. His body and his grave shall be sacred to us all: why should it not?" – Korokai then said, "No: we will have the body, as a payment for his casting away the religion of his forefathers; and when any of you, my sons, die, we will have your bodies also." He was answered, "Why dispute with us? Had the dead man, when living, in any way turned back to your superstitions, or wavered in his belief, then indeed you might have disputed with us for the body; but you are all witnesses that his wishes were expressed as strongly as they could be, to the effect that he should be buried as a believer in Jesus Christ ought to be buried." – "Hugh!" said the old man; "where did all this new wisdom come from? from your book" – the New Testament – "I suppose." "Yes," was the reply; "our new thoughts, and our better thoughts, are from our book. Why will you still set yourself against God? It was Satan, surely, who put it into your hearts to come to us to dispute about this body, just as be did about the body of Moses." – "Your book," said the old Chief, "makes you very strong to talk. I don't know any other good it has done you. And as for the body, I suppose, as you are so strong to talk, it must be as you say. I have done." Poroake was then quietly and properly buried.

Recent Intelligence [Wairau massacre].

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

New-Zealand Mission – Tidings have lately reached the Committee of a very disastrous collision between the Colonists and the Natives in New Zealand. This afflicting event took place at Wairoa, at the bottom of Cloudy Bay, in the Northeastern part of the Southern Island. The Letter which the Committee have received is dated the 19th of July. It contains an extract of a Letter from the vicinity of the occurrence, the writer of which is represented as being well acquainted with the facts of the case. He thus speaks: –

I received the disastrous intelligence that nineteen of the Europeans were killed; among whom were Captain Wakefield, Mr. Thompson, Police Magistrate, Cotterell, Howard, England, Patchett, Richardson, and several others, who were the leading men in Nelson. A party of them had left Nelson for Wairoa for the purpose of apprehending Rauparaha and Rangihata, who had burnt down two sheds that the Surveyors had put up. They had previously taken all the property of the Europeans out of the houses to a place of safety, and then burnt them down. A warrant was issued, and a party of forty-nine people went to put it into execution. On their arrival at the spot, the Gentlemen I have named crossed the Creek where the Natives were, and told them that they had come to apprehend them for burning down these houses. They replied that they had not burnt any thing of the Europeans; that it was land belonging to themselves, which they had never sold; that the material of which the sheds were made – the grass and sticks – were off their land, and consequently their own property, and that they would not go on board the Brig to be tried. On this, Thompson told them that if they did not come he would order the men to fire upon them. The Natives entreated them not to fight; but to settle the matter amicably. The Europeans, however, fired, and shot three Natives. The Christian Natives immediately rose up and walked away, when Rauparaha got up and said, "Farewell to the world! Farewell to the light! O death, come to me!" and told his men to fire. They had ten muskets, and immediately fired, charged the Europeans, and wrenched the muskets from many of them. They then pursued, and kept up a running fight up the hill. They took prisoners Captain Wakefield, Mr. Thompson, and some other Gentlemen. They first spared their lives; but Rangihata came up, and said his wife, Rauparaha's niece, had been killed, and he must have these Rangatiras [Gentlemen] for payment: they accordingly killed them. Half, or rather more, escaped of the Europeans. None had been sworn in as Special Constables. Several Natives were killed, and some wounded. Rauparaha had two wounds.

The Committee's correspondent remarks: – "The whole affair is a most melancholy one, yet nothing more than might be expected." Rauparaha and Rangihata are spoken of as two of the most powerful Chiefs in New Zealand, and closely connected with Rotorua, the Thames, and a great portion of the Bay of Islands. Much, under God, will depend on the course taken by the Government under the circumstances which have arisen. Much may be hoped for from the prudence and firmness of the new Governor, Captain Fitzroy, who would probably reach New Zealand about the end of November.

Church Missionary Record

[New Zealand sections only]

1850

[This book was digitised in partnership with Auckland War Memorial Museum]
http://www.aucklandmuseum.com

Ordination of a Missionary.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

Ordination of a Missionary.

New-Zealand Mission – On the 24th of June last Mr. John Morgan, one of the Society's Catechists, was admitted to Deacons' Orders at St. Barnabas Church, Auckland, by the Bishop of New Zealand.

Recent Intelligence.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

New-Zealand Mission – The Rev. R. Barker and Mrs. Barker, and the Rev. T. Lanfear and Mrs. Lanfear, at Auckland on the 26th of November (Ibid. p. 185).

New-Zealand Mission.

NEW-ZEALAND MISSION.

WE resume our account of this Mission from p. 300 of our Number for December last. The present review will carry down the history of the Mission during the year ending June 30, 1849.

Northern District.

KERIKERI.

The resident Catechist, Mr. J. Kemp, has continued to give religious instruction to the Natives at this Station, and in its vicinity, and has been generally listened to with attention.

Death of the old Chief Tareha, and two other Natives.

In the earlier history of the New-Zealand Mission, when with great risk the Missionaries were wont to interpose between contending parties of the Natives, the name of Tareha often appears. A war companion of the famous Shungi, he was prominent in many a scene of bloodshed and cannibalism. Mr. Kemp, in his Report for the half-year ending December 31, 1848, thus speaks of his death –

Tareha, the Chief of Mangonui, was taken suddenly ill. I attended, and administered some medicine, which gave a temporary relief; but a few days afterward he was apparently attacked with apoplexy, and died on the third day. For some months before his death he constantly attended the Service on the Lord's-day, and had prayers daily at his house. When dying, he called his sons and other Natives around him, and urged upon them not to omit Karakia (prayers), and to live peaceably with each other. He also requested that the place where he lay should not be tapu (sacred) after his death. Tareha was for many years the dread and terror both of Natives and Europeans in the Bay of Islands. The influence which the Christian Religion had on his mind was the great means of subduing his native ferocious disposition, and leading him to respect the service of God.

Record, July 1850.]

Two other hopeful cases are mentioned in the same Report.

Our native girl Mary, who lived in our family about six years, was in October last called by death to her eternal home. She could read the Scriptures fluently, and had committed various parts, with the Catechism, to memory. She felt herself to be a sinner, and died, I trust, looking by faith to Christ for salvation. Our native lad, Tamati, also, went to see his friends, and, being in a weakly state of health, caught cold, and fell into a decline. I visited him, and urged on him the necessity of the new birth before he could enter heaven. His reply was, that he was a sinner, and he hoped Jesus Christ would pardon his sins. He also said that he felt great comfort in praying to Christ. He died in November last. He, also, could read the Scriptures.

PAIHIA.

General View – Hopeful Death of a Chief.

Archdeacon H. Williams, in his Reports for the half-years ending December 1848 and June 1849, states that a general improvement had been manifested in the temper and feelings of the Natives; that their fears were gradually subsiding; and that there existed among them an increasing disposition to resume their former position of inquiry, and attendance on the Means of Grace.

A Chief named Hohepa Maika has died, it is hoped, in the faith of Christ. He had been a distinguished man for some years past; and during the late war, though surrounded by the contending parties, had kept his tribe in quietness. His place was a pattern for neatness; his Chapel perfectly

clean and in good repair; and his attendance, and that of his people, on the Means of Grace, constant.

The inhabitants of the native villages in the vicinity of Paihia have expressed their desire to be visited more frequently than is practicable from the magnitude of the district, which extends to Bream Bay, sixty miles south of Paihia. The difficulties of seeing the people, even in the immediate neighbourhood, are considerable, as they are scattered up small creeks. The only access to them is by boat, and that only at high water.

WAIMATE.

From the Rev. R. Burrows we have received the following

Report for the Half-year ending June 30, 1849.

The duties of the Station have been carried on with but little interruption. I was absent six Sundays in March and April, for the purposes of the Central Committee, during which time the Rev. R. Davis divided his time between the Waimate and Kaikohi Stations.

Several of our people have been called from us since our last Report, two or three of whom gave evidence of their faith in Christ. One, formerly a Teacher, and a consistent character, who suffered long and severely, died during my absence. When I left, I expressed to him my doubts of our meeting again in this life, to which he replied, "The will of the Lord be done. My trust is in the merits of Christ." Mr. Davis visited him afterward, and reports that he was much pleased with his state.

This is the bright side of our picture: truth requires that we should show the other side also. Amid much lukewarmness and inconsistency among many of our professed Christians, we have to mourn over the sad delinquency of one who for many years took a prominent part among us, as a Teacher, and a regular attendant at Church and the Schools. In an evil hour he was induced to listen to the repeated solicitations of his brother's widow, and has at length taken her as his second wife. This has given great cause to the enemy to blaspheme, and is proving a stumbling-block to many.

Our Girls'-school is still progressing.

There are many discouragements; but we have confident hope that good is being done. The seed is being sown, and, although it may lie long in the ground, we have the promise that it shall spring up. "Cast thy bread upon the waters: for thou shalt find it after many days." There is still room for improvement, both in the system pursued and in the working; but, upon the whole, we have reason to rejoice. There has been less annoyance from the parents than formerly, and the children become more and more attached to the School. Our average number during the half-year has been thirty-eight.

The Institution for Training Native Youths to act as Teachers may now be said to have commenced, with some prospect of going forward. We have five youths at present, and are expecting others shortly.

KAIKOHI.

Report for the Year ending Dec. 31, 1848.

The Rev. R. Davis expresses his hope that, amidst difficulties, the Redeemer's kingdom is advancing. The following remarks are important, pointing out the corrective influence of past trials, and encouraging the hope that a deeper work in the hearts of the Natives will be followed by results of a more permanent and satisfactory character.

The past year has been a period of trial of no ordinary kind; but it has nevertheless proved a season in which our hope has been increased, and our expectations raised, from having witnessed some progress in the re-establishment of Christianity, among our people, on more clear and hopeful principles than those on which it stood in what we considered our more prosperous days. In those days, with few exceptions, the Natives were brought to a stand when they had attained a certain degree of knowledge. Many, when they received Baptism, appeared to congratulate themselves on having thus attained the summit of their wishes: they were now believers, exalted above their former standing, and seemed to expect that by the mere rite, as by a charm, they would be delivered from the power and dominion of sin, and that God in all things would be propitious to them. Some of them became great disciplinarians, and many acquired

much knowledge of Scripture. But where this knowledge did not unveil the corruption and depravity of the human heart, it was ineffectual in the time of temptation, and numbers fell away. What once appeared to shine brightly became dim, and then vanished into deadly superstitious darkness. More recent experience has shown that those who were preserved from falling, and have been blessed up to this time with persevering grace, are even now but very babes in Christ. At that period there was much religious profession, mixed up with a degree of self-complacency which rendered their profession doubtful: now, they complain of their ignorance of Scripture and of the depravity of their nature, and sincerely lament the hardness of their hearts; while here and there one may be found rejoicing in the love of God.

During the year several have been added to the attendants on Lord's-day duties, and some to our Weekly Meetings; and we have witnessed some cases of conviction. Some who joined in the wars, have professedly disconnected themselves with that party, and are again united with the worshippers of God. A few, also, have been recovered from the bondage of native superstitions. Upon the whole there can be no doubt that the great work is advancing, although slowly; but we have learned to think and speak with caution, and to rejoice with trembling. Our present state was thus described a few days ago by a Christian Chief – "The declension from our former state of Christian experience was easy, because it was downward: to regain that state is hard and heavy, because it is upward."

With regard to what is termed civilization, our people are not so far in advance as they appeared to be some years ago. This is accounted for, first, by the late wars; secondly, by the determination of Heki and other Chiefs to revive and enforce their former laws of desolation. While these laws are acted upon, however industrious or circumspect a person may be, if one of the party to which he is attached transgress, his property is almost in equal danger with that of the culprit. The people of Kaikohi, many of them, possess horses, cows, pigs, &c. They have also a fine crop of wheat just coming to harvest, the proceeds of which they intend to appropriate to building a water-mill; but, under the present system, their property is insecure, and their success doubtful.

Independent of Lord's-day Services and Schools, the Congregation of Kaikohi, as many as choose to attend, are met three times a week. To these meetings we attach much importance, especially those for reading the Holy Scriptures; and during the year they have increased in numbers and interest. Within the last few months many applications have been made for Testaments and Prayer-books. Of the former we have given out about 150 copies, but of the latter we have had none for a long period.

Our Schools have been better attended, and have increased in numbers. The Day-scholars attend regularly: they love the School, and generally spend even their holidays in the School-room, or on the premises. Much sickness has prevailed among the children, probably produced by their desire to come to School in all weathers; and, being all but in a state of nudity, they caught colds, which settled on their lungs. Several of them have died, of whom we have hope that the Good Shepherd of the flock has gathered these lambs within His heavenly fold. We were fearful that this mortality might have proved a hinderance to the parents in sending their children; but, from what they witnessed in the deaths of those children who have been taken from us, the reverse is the case. Their general observations are, "Let our children die and go to Christ. Although we love them, and our hearts are filled with sorrow on account of their death, yet they go to Christ and are safe. The sorrow we now feel is nothing to the sorrow we should feel if they were to grow up and become wicked, and be in danger of being lost for ever."

To some of these deeply-interesting cases we shall now refer. They manifest the subduing influence of the Gospel on the New-Zealand character: instead of the bitter wail of hopeless anguish, we find the sorrow that is tempered with Christian hope and pious resignation to the will of God. The family sketches we are now about to give are most touching, and full of instruction.

Charles and Sarah Taurua – Death of their child Jemima.

The first Christian family which we shall notice is that of Charles

Taurua 9 and his wife Sarah. Of four children, one alone survived. This child, a girl named Jemima, about twelve years of age, had long been in attendance on Miss Davis's School, and had made progress, not merely in the general instruction afforded to her, but in the knowledge that maketh wise to salvation. Symptoms of the same disease which had been so fatal to her brothers and sisters manifested themselves in her constitution, and it became evident that Charles and Sarah would soon be childless. Mr. Davis visited them just about the time when the case assumed a hopeless aspect. On communicating to the child her near approach to eternity, her answer was, "I had rather die than live in the midst of a sinful world." Turning to the mother, Mr. Davis inquired of her, "Sarah, how are you prepared for this?" Her answer was, "I am prepared." "Yes," added the father, "I shall be thankful to know my children have gone before me. I shall have no further care for them on account of sin. They will be safe. I know my child must die. I do not wish to keep her in this sinful world. Let her go to be with her Saviour. But do not think I shall not feel her loss. For the last week my grief for her body has disjointed my frame; but when she is gone I shall think of others. I have them in my heart."

The following are the notices of this family which we find in Mr. Davis's Journals –

Sept. 21, 1848 – Jemima appeared this morning to be a little better, but I do not think she is really so. She was asked, if she were restored, on what she meant to fix her thoughts. She replied, "On God."

The tenor of her conversation was, if she were spared it was her wish to live to Christ; if she died, to die to Christ; but she acknowledged that she would rather die than live. She was asked why. She replied, "That my heart may be newly created." Her mother told me that she had expressed to her her desire to die. I hope the dear child is sincere.

Oct. 9 – Jemima is again getting worse. This morning her pulse beat 144. I visited her yesterday, and could not get her to speak a word: this raised my fears. To-day she spoke a few words in answer to my questions. "Are your spirits depressed?" "They are." – "On what account?" "On account of sin." – "This is right; but you know that Christ died for sinners." "Yes." Sarah, the mother, attended the meeting this morning. She remarked, "I have often lamented to you the hardness of my heart, and this I have still to mourn over. God has dealt very graciously with me by again raising me up; but I am looking forward to attend another meeting above, with God. I am quite willing to part with my child."

Nov. 7 – On Sunday evening Jemima was removed from the miseries of this sinful world, and this evening she has been laid in the silent grave, there to await the glorious resurrection morn, when we trust she will arise to life eternal. The evidences the child gave of a change of heart cannot be doubted; yet they were not always so bright as could have been wished. During the last fortnight she had suffered much from pain, and was at times fretful, and scarcely spoke to any one. On Saturday she spoke freely, but with much difficulty. She expressed a fear on account of her sins; but with her fears a hopeful trust in Christ appeared to be combined. At night she felt that she was dying, and proposed to her mother that they should engage in prayer. This her mother prepared to do, but she observed, "I wish to pray myself." On Friday night, also, it appears she prayed much. Her voice was scarcely audible. Among her broken sentences were the following – "O God! Thou knowest that I am a wicked girl: my sins are numerous; sufficient to fill heaven and earth. O Jesus, Thou Son of David, spare me! O God, come to me! O God, enlighten my heart! Let a way be opened [for me] to heaven; to that place where Thou dwellest, in order that I may see Thy glory. O God! O

Thou God of the believing people! I desire to praise Thee! O Lord, come and take me to Thyself!" But nothing will tend to show more clearly the state and bias of the child's mind than the following circumstance. Some days before her death her parents, it appears, were conversing on the deceitfulness of the human heart. Her father lamented that he had two sides to his heart; because, when worldly people were present, and conversed on the things of the world, he entered into conversation with them; and when religious people were present, he was also ready to converse with them. The child said, "My father, that is wrong: let not your heart be divided." When she took leave of her mother she said, "Farewell, also, to my Teachers. They have led me to the present time: they have endeavoured to lead me in a straight path." Thus has the first lamb been gathered into the fold of Christ from the Kaikohi School. May it only be the first-fruits of an abundant harvest! Another will soon follow. May she also leave a bright evidence behind her to the glory of Christ!

Nov. 14, 18 48 – Jemima has left a much brighter testimony behind her than I had imagined, as many instances have been given which evidence what the state of the child's mind was. The other day I went to see the bereaved parents, and found her mother much cast down. I said, "How is this, Sarah? Seeing that all your children have been safely lodged in a better world before you, and you in God's time going after them, how is it that you are thus cast down?" She replied, "A conversation which I had with Jemima some time before her death is the cause. I was lamenting my not being able better to read the Word of God, and the child said, 'How is it? Have you no brains?' 10 I fear your heart is not very great toward God, or He would have taught you by His Spirit. Does not Christ say, 'Ask, and it shall be given you; seek, and ye shall find?' Yes; and if you had so done God would have given you His Spirit, and the Holy Spirit teaches in language understood by the soul.'" I told Sarah what the child had said was true, and that God was always ready to hear and answer our prayers.

Charles and Sarah have not gone back to the world, but have drawn closer to Christ, and given themselves up unreservedly to Him. Mr. Davis writes –

Feb. 6, 1849 – Yesterday we had a refreshing Meeting. 11 As it was wet, but few were present; but Sarah Taurua was there, and spoke of what the Lord had done for her soul. This excited much attention, and I trust will do some good. The work in the hearts of Charles and Sarah is no doubt the work of the Holy Ghost the Comforter. Long have they both been burdened in their minds, and lamented the hardness of their hearts. Relief has now come in a scriptural manner, and according to God's promises. Not that I consider they are only now brought into a state of salvation, for I believe they have possessed a saving faith for many years.

Feb. 14 – As I was at Waimate on Sunday, Charles Taurua took the Service at Kaikohi. From the people I learn that he took for his subject Col. ii. 3, and he seems to have spoken well to the purpose. It is such instruments that the Lord will own and bless. When the person arrived who informed him that I was going to Waimate his wife said to him, "Now you must look to God." "Yes," he observed, "before I open the Testament I will go to the secret place to seek direction from God." He went, and doubtless found what he sought after. It is from such means, so used, that a blessing may be hoped for.

Feb. 22 – On Monday both Charles and Sarah Taurua were at our Meeting: there was also a considerable party present. On Sunday the poor man was in tears during the Services, and so he was on Monday. Jemima, although dead, yet speaketh to the hearts of her parents. Some of the parents complained of the disobedience of their children in not assisting them in their work, particularly in not helping them to get food in the evenings, and said that they appeared to like nothing but their School. Sarah remarked, "How different was my child! Our daily labour was at Waingai" – about a mile and a quarter distant: "when we returned at night, we found Jemima with every thing prepared for our supper; and when I said to her, "Why do you work so hard?' her reply was, 'To

lighten your labours, and to make it as easy for you as I can while I am with you, which will not be long.' And then she used to speak to me so about the Word of God, which made me long to have Jemima's God for my God." Sarah also spoke of many gracious words which proceeded from the child, which she had treasured up in her memory.

On Monday I wished this couple to visit a part of Kaikohi, about four miles distant. This they did, and returned to-day with a very satisfactory account of their reception, and of the state of the people. O that the Lord would regard us in our low estate, and pour out His Holy Spirit upon us!

Nathanael and his Family.

The following are notices of another Christian couple in affliction. Nathanael and his wife had already lost six children, and sickness unto death had again visited their family. Here again we find the same submissive spirit – "It is the Lord; let Him do what seemeth Him good."

Sept. 21, 1848 – Nathanael's child is sinking fast. On Monday I conversed seriously with him and his wife on the apparent danger of their child, and asked them if they could give her up. They both answered in the affirmative. The mother said, "If we were to die, and leave our children in this wicked world, we should feel much: we would rather see our children depart before us, because we then hope they are safe." At present I can do but little else than visit the sick, and they are increasing on my hands.

Nov. 18 – I visited Nathanael and his sick children. It is but too evident that disease is rapidly progressing in them both, especially in the little girl, who is about nine years old: the little boy is about six years old. They both belong to the School. The girl was among our first scholars, was constant in her attendance, and was in the first Testament class. But although Nathanael's house is a house of affliction, it is not a house of sorrow where there is no hope. The parents appear to be endeavouring to bow with submission to the Divine will, and even to take comfort in the prospect of knowing that two of their dear children are about to depart and be with Christ before them. When I entered the hut, the father and his youngest child, a boy of about four years old, the picture of health, were sitting on one side of the fire, and the two children who are ill on the other side. I could not but view the two little ones as set apart for eternity, and soon about to be carried by the Good Shepherd, as lambs of His flock, to the eternal fold. After a little time spent in conversation with the children we engaged in prayer, and I trust felt our souls drawn out in fervent desire, not only for the lambs of the flock, but also for ourselves, that we may be perfectly delivered from the dominion of sin, and have faith to support us in our coming trials. I own I felt it good to be there. How different the scene of the day before yesterday at Tautoro, when I went to see the Chief Heke's wife! There, nothing but the world appeared to concern the mind: here, nothing but the things of eternity.

Nov. 28 – About noon Nathanael's daughter slept in Jesus. She died calling upon her Saviour, "O Jesus, take me! O Jesus, take me!" These were her last words, and I dare not but hope that her prayer was heard. With the bereaved parents I found two other Christian Natives. We considered together our present blessings and our future prospects. We bowed the knee in prayer, and I trust our poor petitions were heard by Him whose ear is ever open to the prayers of His people. The parents appeared cheered by the recognition of the blessedness into which their dear child had just entered. They appeared thankful that she had been delivered from the miseries and dangers of this sinful world. As parents, they feel the removal of their child; but faith in the precious Word of God leads them to look forward when they shall, at no distant period, again meet her in a better world.

Dec. 23 – Last evening I buried Nathanael's second child. Thus in about six weeks we have buried four of our Schoolchildren. When I went to bury the corpse, I found all the bereaved parents assembled together, to condole with each other in their affliction, and to anticipate their speedy meeting with their departed children in the presence of the Redeemer. The three 12 bereaved couples are, I can have no doubt, spiritual members of the mystical body of Christ. I trust that good will arise out of this mortality, and not evil. The death of these little ones has been full of hope; and the bereaved parents

are supported with the sure and certain hope that their little ones sleep in Jesus.

Sad Instance of Superstition.

The following paragraph contrasts strongly with those which have preceded it.

Feb. 22, 1849 – Yesterday I buried a child not belonging to the School, and oh, what a visible difference! The child was about eight years old, and her parents Christians, and I believe serious; but I fear the poor child was utterly ignorant of her state. A holy influence seemed to pervade the other funeral assemblies of the School-children: this was dead and formal. I had been informed that native incantations had been used over the child, and after the funeral I charged the parents with it. They acknowledged it was true, as they considered the child's illness was not of a common nature, nor did she die in a common way: they believed she had been destroyed by a spirit. This made me feel, as I had expected better things from the mother. Alas! the cruel bondage of Satan!

Urgent Need of Children's Clothing.

We particularly request the attention of Christian ladies to the remarks of Mr. Davis, that much of this sickness and early death originates in the anxiety of the children to attend School, while their clothing is not sufficient to protect them from the inclemency of the weather. What more grateful contribution could be forwarded to our New-Zealand Mission, than plain coarse clothing for the use of our Native Schools? What an appropriate undertaking for members of our Ladies' Associations! How much might be done by some, in the spirit of Dorcas, undertaking this kind and condescending work, so truly after the mind of Him who will not be forgetful of such labours of love – "Naked, and ye clothed me."

Visits to sick Adults.

We shall now refer to Mr. Davis's persevering ministrations among the sick adults. Like similar scenes at home, they present a chequered aspect – some rejoicing in hope, some anxious but fearful, others whose life closes in thick darkness. The first is the case of a believing woman named Rahab.

Sept. 19, 1848 – I spent the greater part of this day in visiting the sick near home. The first person visited was an elderly woman. For years she has been a regular attendant on all the Means, and is now, I hope, through Divine grace, prepared to enter into her Master's presence. She says that Christ is every thing to her – that she feels that she is near to Him, and He to her. She was asked how she felt with regard to her sins. She replied, "They are hateful; but I shall lay my sinful nature down with my body: I shall not take that with me: that burden will be laid down, and I shall fly lightly to Christ." She is attended by a little decrepit old woman, hardly four feet high, who appears to have been for a long time blessed with a holy simplicity of mind, and a strong faith in her Saviour, and is always cheerful. As some Natives who came danced their war-dance in the Pa on the Sabbath evening, she said to me this morning, "Oh, Mr. Davis! when I heard them I ran away down here to Rahab." – the sick woman – "and stopped my ears." I hope I felt it good to be with these poor old simple servants of Christ.

Sept. 23 – This evening I buried Rahab. Happy change for her! From her Baptism to her death she was consistent. In looking over my Register, I find that for one birth we have, as nearly as possible, two deaths.

Sept. 25 – At the Meeting with the people to-day it was evident that the peaceful death of Rahab had not been without its effects. The little old woman who took care of her said, "Oh, Mr. Davis! I long also to die and go to Christ. The sin of the world and the sin of my heart are hateful." Another said, "I went to see Rahab. She told me her end was come, that she was going to Christ, but that I must wait longer, and witness the spiritual work of God. I wish to have my heart right with Christ also; but it is so hard and so sinful. But I must persevere." The death of this poor slave has, I hope, been beneficial to many of us. To me it has been encouraging, because she was generally one of the most ignorant, although one of the most persevering, of our Communicants.

Jan. 23, 1849 – For some days past I have had several recent cases of illness to attend, and one of a serious nature. On the 20th I fell in with a poor man, more by what is called chance than otherwise. He is a most subtle Native Priest, and I have often been dismayed when I have found him in company with my patients. Yesterday, anxiety and care were visible in his countenance: his lies, which had been made, doubtless, in many cases a false refuge for others, were no refuge for himself. He endeavoured to remind me of a controversy I had with him many years ago, in which I recommended him to make the Word of God his study, and he said he had carried a Testament with him ever since. This, I fear, has made his delusions much more dangerous, as he professes to hold communication with the spirits of departed Missionaries. He is fearful, and exclaims loudly against his former ways.

Jan. 26 – Yesterday morning Tanaiti, the Priest, died. I shall not soon forget his anxious look, and strong disavowal of all goodness and truth in his former proceedings. Surely this ought to have effect on at least those who heard him! In death he was asked several questions. "How is it now with you, who formerly told us you commanded a number of gods in the sea and on the land? You are dying, but you must wait awhile and converse with us. Tell us to which place you are going. We are taught that there are only two places, a place of pain and a place of joy: to which of these are you going? Are you going above or below?" It is reported that the poor man requested them to let him die; but at length he said, "I am going to my own place, below" – and died. Awful death!

Return of Backsliders.

Mr. Davis is occasionally cheered by the return of some from amongst those who, during the excitement of the late war, had been led astray.

Nov. 7, 1848 – The week previous to the Sacrament is a serious heart-searching period of time, as every Candidate is individually examined and instructed. Among them last week came a poor strayed sheep, not to offer himself as a Candidate for the Holy Supper, as that he could not do, but for conversation. This poor sheep was driven from the fold nearly three years ago by strong temptation. At that period one of his children died from the whooping-cough, and another fine little girl was killed at the same time by the tread of an ox, so that they were both buried at the same time in the same grave. Under this extraordinary bereavement he was tempted to think that God had dealt hardly by him, and that he must have been a great sinner thus to bring down upon him the anger of God. He did not altogether disconnect himself with us, but he shut himself up against all comfort: he continually complained of the hardness of his heart, and spoke of himself as a withered branch. Our conversation was rather long, serious, and candid. On Monday he returned, and told me he spent nearly the whole night after our conversation in examining his heart, and that the result was, that his awful sin of unbelief had been revealed to him. He said he saw that his sin had been suffered to grow nearly to maturity, and that he was only enabled to behold his danger when he was on the very brink of the precipice. Thus has this poor man been restored to us, a monument of the forbearing mercy of God in Christ.

Nov. 14 – The strayed sheep above alluded to has been, I trust, sought out by the Good Shepherd, and brought back to His fold in a most gracious manner. When he left us last week, to go to his work in the woods, it appears his mind was deeply impressed with some conversation he had had with some of the Christian Natives. As he walked with his wife, he asked her what she thought of what they had heard. She replied, she had no thoughts on the subject. He told me he then went into the wood and prayed, and was relieved by thinking of Rom. ii. 7. After this he proceeded to the scene of his labours, and spoke again to his wife, telling her that it was his wish they should seek the Lord together. He again retired for private prayer, and prayed for Divine teaching, that light and knowledge might be given him. After having thus prayed and humbled himself before God, he said he was relieved by having John vii. 37, 38, brought to his remembrance. In the course of the day he again retired for private prayer, and to thank God for his restoration. At the close of this prayer Matt. xi. 28 was presented to his mind. In the evening, when they assembled together, and his friends began to converse about the native gods, he said, "You and your

gods had well-nigh been my ruin." The people were astonished. The return of this man into the bosom of the Church is a cause of joy to the faithful few, and an encouragement for them to endeavour to seek out other poor wanderers.

Jan. 26, 1849 – To-day one of my former promising Natives – one in whose heart the Holy Spirit appeared to work in 1844, but who was led away during the war – came to me from Waimate to converse with me on the Lord's Supper. His return into the bosom of the Church, and the nature of his conversation, acted as a cordial to my soul. Never did I perceive so much of the nature of the Holy Ordinance as to-day, when describing it to this returning prodigal. May the Lord meet him at this fountain of living waters!

Baptism of the Chief Maika.

The baptism of the Chief Maika, of Mangakahia, with which we shall close these notices of Mr. Davis's district, is very interesting. He is a Chief of some note, and in the late disturbances had been one of Kawiti's warriors. Toward the close of the war his heart opened to the Gospel: he became anxious for baptism, and began to exert himself among his people for good. The circumstances connected with his baptism are thus related by Mr. Davis –

March 8 – I left for Mangakahia, seriously impressed with the responsibility of the undertaking. The influence of this impression also rested on the minds of my partners in travel, as they were aware that one of the objects of our journey was to receive the Chief Maika into the Church of Christ. During this day's journey one of the people quoted Gen. xlix. 10, which gave us an opportunity of conversing on the kingly power of Christ.

March 15 – This morning we went down the river to Maika's village. We found him covering the floor of his house with fresh-gathered palm-branches, as he was expecting our arrival. He soon called his young men, some of whom he sent to kill a pig, and others to collect together his friends. As soon as they were collected, we knelt down and prayed for an out-pouring of the Spirit, after which they were addressed and spoken to individually. One old Chief present said, after having been spoken to, "I am only one old man: let me alone: allow me to remain as I am. I see you will have all my children."

March 16 – This morning, at prayer, I addressed the people again, and conversed with them individually on the nature of Christianity; after which the old Chief said, "I told you last night that I wished to be allowed to remain in my native state; but my mind is now altered, and I wish to cast in my lot with you." We then returned to the Pa to prepare for Sunday, and Maika and his party followed us. During our journey, Matthew, the Teacher, related the following circumstance to me. When Maika first turned his attention to the Gospel, a sinful-living man generally read prayers to them. When the Teacher visited them he chose for his subject, "If the blind lead the blind, both shall fall into the ditch." This subject the Chief felt very annoying, and the Teacher, after he had closed, overheard them holding out threats against him, and left as soon as he could in consequence. He said he had not proceeded far before he perceived Maika following him, with his hatchet in his hand. He expected death, and kneeled down to receive the blow. The Chief was angry, but the blow was not given. The Teacher explained his subject fully and fearlessly, and the Chief was silenced, and ever after received him respectfully. The Teacher is a near relative, and a Chief of note. As I missed the Teacher for some time yesterday, I asked him where he was. He replied, "I visited a party further down the river, in the field, where they were planting potatos, and spoke to and prayed with them; and they were attentive. One of them, a son of Kawiti, the old warrior, was present. I told them you had come, and that Maika was about to be baptized. They appeared very glad, and said that they grieved only for their old father, Kawiti, as he had spoken well to them; for when his son told him that he was about to lose all his children, as Maika was going to be baptized, and they appeared all likely to follow his example, the old Chief replied, 'That is good. Hear you! Go you home and unite yourself also to the Church: it is the best thing you can do. I do not wish you to fight any more. I have done with that. I owed to Heke's tribe that assistance which

we gave him, as his fathers, in times that have long past, delivered our tribe out of a difficulty in which it was involved. I have paid the debt. Moreover, I am quite satisfied with the Governor, and I am living on good terms with the Major. There will be no more fighting. Go home, and believe.'" These people formed part of the party we had with us last night.

March 17, 1849 – I had very much conversation with the Chief, and finally examined and set apart four adults for baptism on the approaching Sabbath. At the Prayer-meeting we had a large party present: the season was solemn.

March 18: Lord's-day – Our Congregation consisted of about 200 people, a greater number than we had before seen together at this place. After the Second Lesson, the four adults were baptized. I hope the Lord was amongst us. It appeared to be an impressive season. Many tearful eyes were present, especially the fine newly-tattooed young men: some of the Congregation told me the tears ran freely down their tattooed cheeks. O that the Lord may bring them speedily over, and make them sheep of His fold!

March 19 – This morning I addressed the Natives for the last time, and left them on our return home. During our visit twenty-one adults had been added to the list of Catechumens, principally from among the late warriors against Government.

Since his baptism, we rejoice to say, the Chief Maika has continued to walk consistently, and is diligently exerting himself to promote among his people the knowledge of the Gospel.

July 2, 1849 – During the last month my time has been spent mostly from home. I visited Mangakahia, and spent a fortnight with my people there. Some improvements had been made both in the upper and lower parts of the District, and it is very evident that religious influence is in the ascendancy. At Reweti Maika's place we found a new decent slab Chapel erected, capable of holding a Congregation of upward of a hundred people. The building was fenced in, and the land cleared, and sown nicely down to grass. A house had also been built for his young men to sleep in, apart from the married people. The Chief had evidently been a persevering disciplinarian. Many of the young men could read the Scriptures correctly; and nearly the whole of his people, both old and young, were well acquainted with the Church Catechism. He had also effected a great change in the neighbourhood. But this advance in the Redeemer's Kingdom had not remained unnoticed or untried by the enemy. Two cases had occurred to try his faith and patience. The first was that of a pig, killed by some of his friends when out in a hunting party, which was owned by another tribe. The people to whom the pig belonged demanded a horse as a payment. To this the Chiefs friends would not consent, but gave a manifold payment in pigs and other property – from what we could learn, of more value than the horse. The second case was of a more serious nature, and called for more patience and a greater sacrifice. Some wicked-minded and backsliding young men had made up their minds to possess themselves of some rich land in the neighbourhood, part of which, it appeared, they had been permitted to cultivate some time ago by its rightful owner, an elderly Chief, whom Reweti Maika calls his elder brother. The old Chiefs anger was kindled at the presumption of those young men, and blood would doubtless have been shed. But Maika visited him many times, and told him it was only a stratagem of the great enemy to hinder them in their newly-chosen Christian course; that if they gave way to the temptation they should again fall back upon the work of their old master, the devil; and that he thought the salvation of their souls of more value than the land, and recommended that it should be given up. In these attempts he was assisted by the Teacher, and the result was, that the old Chief agreed to give up the land.

9 An interesting Letter from this man, in reply to the Society's Jubilee Letter to the Native Converts throughout the world, was given in the "Church Missionary Intelligencer" for April last.

10 This is a common question with the Natives, and nothing improper or disrespectful was intended.

11 One of the three Meetings a-week referred to by Mr. Davis in his Report.

12 A third Christian couple, beside the two already mentioned, had lost, about the same time, the last of eleven children.

New-Zealand Mission.

NEW-ZEALAND MISSION.

WE continue our account of this Mission from p. 162 of our last Number.

Northern District (concluded).

KAITAIA.

General View – Administration of the Sacraments, &c.

The Rev. J. Matthews and Mr. W. G. Puckey continue to labour at this Station. We have received their Reports for the year ending June 1849; but as they are merely a general outline of the proceedings at the Station, we have but little information to communicate. The usual duties have been attended to. On Lord's-days the Missionaries have alternately held Divine Service in the Settlement, twice for Natives and once for Europeans, and with the Natives in the adjacent villages. The attendance has been encouraging. On the 26th of November 1848 fifteen adults were baptized. Mr. Matthews, in a Letter dated December 5th, thus writes of them –

These had been Candidates a considerable time, and, for the most part, were elderly people. One, a very interesting old Chief, cannot be less than seventy years of age, for we considered him old sixteen years ago. He chose the name of Job, the name of the deceased blind man of his place. 13

On Lord's-day, the 10th of June 1849, the Lord's Supper was administered to 123 Native Communicants. In the Letter previously referred to Mr. Matthews says –

We now make it a rule to have a collection at the Sacrament, and our people appreciate the measure: we collected, chiefly in produce, about five pounds' worth the other week. We tell them what is doing at home, and in other parts of the world, and they often express their astonishment at the great collections made in behalf of the Heathen and Jews.

The Native Boys'-school goes forward. Mrs. Matthews has commenced a Native-Girls' Boarding-school, with the intention of taking twelve. A weather-board building for this purpose is nearly completed. The Saturday Meetings with the Native Teachers have been continued, the average attendance being fourteen.

The Natives of the estuary Parengarenga, lying between Mount Carmel and the north coast, and of the Native Settlement Oruru, on a river of the same name which flows from the pyramidical mountain Maunga Taniwa into Lauriston Bay, are particularly mentioned as presenting much en-

couragement. At the former place a commodious rush Chapel has been erected, an example about to be followed by the Natives of Oruru.

Middle District.

HAURAKI.

The severe indisposition under which the Rev. W. C. Dudley laboured having been graciously removed, we received from him, in January of the present year, the following

Report for the Year 1848.

I am rejoiced in being able to state that the people of this District have been, during the past year, progressing in all that is good. The heathen population have begun to attend at Divine Service, and to be inquirers after better things, and seeking for instruction in religion. The Christian people – with some few exceptions, as must be expected among a large number of people – have been most exemplary in their behaviour, and such as you would wish Christian men to be. The Communicants have been sincere, earnest, and hearty receivers of the Lord's Supper, and regular in their attendance on the days of preparation for the receiving of that holy rite. The Catechumens have been most diligent in their attendance on every Wednesday for the purpose of being examined, and of receiving instruction in the principles of the Christian religion. The people residing near the Church have been constantly at Morning and Evening Prayers and School.

The children's Daily-school has been a source of much pleasure to me; and I am happy to say that a great improvement in learning, behaviour, and goodness, has been the result of my labours in the School. On every Wednesday evening, when at home, I have held an Adult School for the purpose of teaching the English language, arithmetic, &c, and on Friday evening a Bible Class for the Native Teachers and others.

I have visited Coromandel Harbour, Wairau, Mercury Bay, Whitianga, Piako, Thames, Orere, and every place of importance in my District. On Easter Sunday I was privileged to admit into the Church of Christ, after many days of earnest prayerful preparation, upward of sixty adults. On the afternoon of the same day upward of twenty children were baptized. The adult Baptisms during the year have numbered upward of sixty; the infant Baptisms upward of thirty. The Communicants are upward of forty. May the Lord God Almighty pour out His Spirit upon this people, and raise up a faithful man to take charge of them, should it seem good to Him that I should leave them and return to England for the recovery of my health!

Mr. Dudley has since returned to England.

AUCKLAND.

After the destruction by fire of the Mission premises at Kohimarama, in January 1848, the Rev. G. A. Kissling occupied, for a short time, a small building on the grounds of St. John's College, Auckland. Having obtained a house and premises at Ruareoreo, about a mile from Auckland, he transferred thither the native girls who composed Mrs. Kissling's School, at that time sixteen in number: in July of last year they had increased to twenty-five.

Native Congregation – Education.

In the new Church of St. Barnabas Divine Service is held three times on Sunday – Native Service and School, half-past 9 A.M. to 1 o'clock P.M.; English Service at 3 P.M.; and again Native Service at 5 P.M. The Native Congregation numbers 300, of whom 50 are Communicants.

A new School-building is being erected at Taurarua, about eight minutes' walk from the Native Church, to the erection of which the Government has granted 600l. It will contain apartments for the Principal and his family, an office which it is proposed Mr. Kissling should fill, transferring to the new buildings the present Girls'-school, with the intention of increasing it to fifty pupils. It is proposed that it shall be conducted, as much as

possible, on the self-supporting system.

General View.

Mr. Kissling, in his Report for the year 1848, thus speaks of the people under his charge –

The inhabitants of Okahu, Orakei, and Purewa, whom I have had particularly under my ministerial charge, have conducted themselves consistently with that worthy name by which they have been called, notwithstanding those numerous allurements and temptations to which they are exposed by their constant intercourse with a variety of characters in the vicinity of Auckland. That a few defections should have taken place amongst them cannot be a matter of surprise, since our Lord Himself, from the very establishment of His Church, led us to expect that we should find chaff mixed up with the solid grain, or tares growing with the growth of precious seed. So that, on the whole, I believe I have, as far as this part of my labour goes, in an humble measure experienced the feelings which filled the heart of St. Paul, when, writing to the Thessalonians, he said to them – "Ye are our glory and joy." A glory and a joy indeed it is, when we see our spiritual children walking in the Truth! The Chapel at Orakei, holding from 130 to 150 persons, is generally filled on Sundays; and 30 members have attended the holy Communion.

13 Vide p. 167 of our Number for August 1848.

New-Zealand Mission.

NEW-ZEALAND MISSION.

WE resume our account of this Mission from p. 186 of our last Number.

Middle District (continued.)

WAIKATO.

General View – A Hidden Convert.

The general state of this District is thus referred to by the Rev. R. Maunsell in his Report for the year 1848 –

Of my District I am thankful to be able to report favourably. In no former period of our labours has the attendance on our Services been better; though I must also add, that I am still of opinion that vital spiritual godliness is much more scarce than is commonly imagined. Peace has prevailed amid sounds of disturbance – a blessing which I trust will be further secured by the energy with which the people are devoting themselves to the cultivation of wheat, by the prohibiting the sale of powder, and by the increasing influence of the British Government.

Additional information is communicated by Mr. Maunsell in a Letter dated March 24, 1849.

I am thankful to have to report well of the District in which I am labouring: true, we do not meet with much fervour of feeling, or strong proofs of high spiritual-mindedness; but there is a steadiness of attendance on our Services, which gives hope. We wait for the moving of the waters: God's Spirit alone can effect our desires.

Not unfrequently, however, some remarkable case turns up which excites my wonder. The Sunday after I began this Letter I was returning from a village by a new road, and suddenly came upon a very feeble old man, sitting by himself, naked, on his mat, in the sun. "Why have you not been to Church?" said I. "How can I, who cannot walk two steps?" – "Well, I hope you pray to yourself." "Yes." – "Repeat your prayer." He immediately commenced a very simple, figurative, spiritual prayer, of which I fear I can give but an inferior report. I was struck with the emphatic abruptness of the commencement – "Have mercy upon me! have mercy upon me!" He then proceeded – "Place me upon the mountain's peak! place me upon the rock! place me upon the height where my view may be clear! Christ is Thy Son: He died to save me." This old man, as far as I can recollect, I never saw before, and certainly none other of my brethren, for he is in my District; and yet I was delighted to bear that prayer is his constant practice, and that, a few Sundays previous, my Native Teacher, sent by me to the same village, on returning by that road heard in the house a person loud in prayer, as with a number. He waited to see who they were, and found this old man by himself, without a person near him. On passing by the same place last Sunday week, he stood up, feeble as he was, to meet me, and presented me with two melons. He is not baptized.

Education.

Surrounded as our Missionaries are by the children of baptized Natives, the necessity of enlarged and effective educational measures is undoubted. Unless the rising generation be instructed scripturally and usefully, how shall the great national work, which the Missionaries of the Church Missionary Society have been the honoured instruments of accomplishing, be sustained? We are thankful, therefore, that there is much in New Zealand at the present moment to encourage hope with reference to this important department of labour. One-twentieth of the colonial revenue has been appropriated to the establishment of efficient Schools throughout the island; and Mr. Maunsell, as well as Mr. Kissling, has received pecuniary assistance from the Government for the erection of School-buildings. The Christian Natives are not only willing, but anxious, to place their children under Christian instruction. Thus encouraged, the Missionaries are taking up this object with energy, and effective Schools have been organized and brought into operation in several districts, on the self-supporting principle. These efforts have prospered beyond their expectations. The following statement by Mr. Maunsell, in a Letter dated Jan. 31, 1849, illustrates this.

I began my School with one European Pupil-teacher, and an average, during the first nine months, of between twelve and fifteen children. Now I have three English Pupil-Teachers – Missionaries' children; forty-four native children – boarders; six Native Teachers, with their wives; and a prospect of having in a short time a large increase in both these departments. Instead of my having now to solicit, I am solicited to allow pupils into my Institution.

I began with a rush building, which cost 6l. I am now about to build five board houses, for about 250l., having received that sum from the Government.

This Institution has not cost – and, with the blessing of God, shall not cost – the Society a penny.

The great problem which I have set myself to work out is, the possibility of maintaining Boarding-Schools without burdening the Society. We have now been in operation a year and seven months, and find in the past the strongest encouragement to proceed. Often have we been brought very low for supplies, but as often have donations, almost entirely from the Natives themselves, come in to our aid.

The examination of our School was held last month. The disasters occasioned by the earthquake at Wellington caused the absence of the Governor, but the Bishop very kindly came to conduct it. My senior English Pupil-Teacher was examined in Virgil, Caesar, Euclid, and Logic. He is a young man of considerable ability, and very well disposed.

The following extract from a Letter dated Feb. 9, 1849, is very interesting.

Of the love of this people for instruction you may judge a little from this fact – that though in this Institution I require the adults to teach in the School, and work on the Station, and give them no kind of remuneration, except very plain food, and a duck shirt and jacket, yet I have six young Chiefs most contentedly discharging these duties, and, when travelling lately through the District, received many applications for admittance, which I refused, at least for the present, on the ground that I have no means for supporting them. I expect that they will soon appear, bringing their own food with them. In their own houses they will lie for hours, poring over any book that they may be able to obtain, and in many cases will be able to repeat passages off by heart.

Again Mr. Maunsell writes, under date of May 31, 1849 –

I am deeply thankful to be able to report favourably of our progress here. My Institution is crowded. We are now building with the grant of 220l. given by the Government. The Governor seems to be a very warm and a very judicious friend to the cause of education. With all, however, that he can do we shall not be able to effect all that we ought. I often think with wonder how we are enabled to feed, clothe, and teach such a number – seventy-six souls, children and adults – beside three European pupils, whom I

board and teach, and to the eldest of whom I allow 12l. per annum, in consideration of the assistance he gives me in the School. You may imagine that my grant does not nearly suffice for such purposes; especially when I tell you that a mill, which I have just got out at my own expense, for my Institution, will cost me, I consider, before it is fairly at work, the sum of 90l. I hope, therefore, that you will keep us before the thoughts of our friends at home, and give notice that we shall thankfully receive any pieces of coarse stuff for clothing, blankets, plates (tin), dishes, pots, knives and forks, spoons, paper, pictures, pens, ink, needles, thread, &c. From you we will take nothing, as my principle is, to maintain my Institution without drawing upon you. If others like to give aid, we shall thankfully receive: if not, we shall try and do without it.

As you may suppose, I am obliged carefully to husband my resources; and, with the blessing of Him whom I serve, they are quite available to my wants. I hope and intend to increase my establishment, as soon as our building is finished.

We doubt not many Christian friends will gladly avail themselves of the opportunity thus presented to them, and co-operate with Mr. Maunsell in this good work. In the Letter dated March 24 of last year he says –

You might urge our friends at home to be more liberal in donations of strong rough clothing, blankets, &c.; to send supplies of kitchen utensils, iron plates, dishes, knives and forks, &c.; and to procure for us those valuable aids in the shape of pictures, maps, and other illustrations, from which the infant mind gains knowledge so speedily; and not only the infant, but also the adult, whose ideas, like those of the New Zealander, are confined to the sphere of a small District in a small island. An orrery, or magic lantern, exhibiting some of the more simple motions and relations of the heavenly bodies, and some of those animals and things of which our people have as yet only heard the name – these would be sources of immense attraction to our Institutions, and would most materially aid our instructions.

We add one extract more on this deeply-interesting and important subject, from a Letter of June 12, 1849.

We are all, thank God! well and prospering at this Station. A great excitement has been lately caused in our circle by the arrival of a flour-mill, which I have received from England for our use. You cannot imagine the deep anxiety of all the Natives in and out of the Institution. Two of our leading men were in such a state of feverish excitement, increased by the low opinion they had of the mechanical powers of myself and my English pupils, as we were adjusting the parts, that they left the ground lest they should be witnesses of our work of destruction. I am happy, however, to report that our character has risen, for our mill is ready for work. To this mill I have looked myself with anxiety; for if it fail, I cannot imagine how I can maintain the present large number that are dependent upon me, with so little means for their support.

The happiest days of my life, and yet the most harassing, have been those which I have spent since I have founded this Institution. I earnestly desire to look entirely to God for aid and direction, as none are so well aware as myself of the difficulties I have had to meet. The older I get in Missionary work, especially in New Zealand, the more am I satisfied that a Missionary Station without a School upon it is only doing half its work.

KAITOTEHE.

The Rev. B. Ashwell was ordained by the Bishop of New Zealand on the 24th of December 1848, and returned immediately to his District, from whence he had been absent from the 2d of October.

From his Journals we present the following extracts –

Erection of a Flour-Mill.

On the 5th of January we reached Kaitotehe, our beloved home. We found our Settlement in much better order than we expected. The greatest drawback is the Chapel, which is much dilapidated, and the people are now all engaged in carrying their pigs, goats, &c. – in fact, every thing saleable – to Auckland, to procure money to pay for a large water flour-mill, now being erected here by Europeans at the expense of 330l. sterling, which the Natives have undertaken to raise. They have, however, promised that when they have paid for their mill they will repair the Chapel, or rather I am sorry to say that the

constant intercourse of the Natives of this place with Auckland is productive of carelessness and lukewarmness in their religious duties.

Administration of the Sacraments.

Jan. 15, 1849: Lord's-day – I baptized five children, and assisted the Rev. R. Maunsell at the Services, and administering the Sacrament of the Lord's Supper to eighty Communicants. We had a Congregation of 260 Natives. In the afternoon we proceeded to Kerikeriroa, eight miles distant, where we had a Congregation of 200 Natives, and administered the Sacrament to twenty Communicants.

Jan 16 – Mr Maunsell baptized forty adults. Among these were some of the principal Chiefs of the Ngatehaua, and some who had been among the most bloodthirsty and desperate cannibals New Zealand has produced – now, clothed and in their right mind, allowing even their slaves to teach them their letters and Catechism. Some of these men I met at the Wairere in 1839 on a fighting expedition. They threatened to strip me if I preceded them to Tauranga, whither we were going. Ten years since all these Natives were residing at Matamata, and most of them are known to Archdeacon Brown: for the last eight years, however, they have been living on the Waikato, and only a day's journey from this Settlement. It was in March last they determined to serve the Saviour, and expressed a wish for baptism. These are the same Natives who, four years ago, entered the dwelling-house of an European living near Auckland, and stripped it. Such was the character of these people, that they were universally dreaded by all near them. Is any thing too hard for the Gospel?

They are now anxious for a water-mill: so sure is it that civilization will follow the reception of the Gospel. I have now the names of sixty adults on my list of Candidates for Baptism.

Christian Resignation of Native Teachers.

The following notices of two of Mr. Ashwell's Native Assistants are particularly interesting.

Aug. 3 – I found Hoeta (Jowett), our principal Assistant in the Boarding-school at the Station, had been in much affliction, having been called to bury his youngest son, two years old. He came to me, and said, "I am fearful that I have sinned, for I have prayed so earnestly that my child might be spared, that I have been praying against the purpose and will of God. I grieve over my child, but my greatest grief is my sin of rebellion." I asked him the nature of his prayer. He said, "I did pray that God's will might be done; but I wished for my own: for this I am pouri" (dark). He said this with tears in his eyes. I felt reproved, for I fear I did not feel that degree of submission to the Divine will under similar circumstances – the death of an only son – as this my New-Zealand brother did.

Another of my Native Teachers, Thomas, belonging to the Ngatiwaoroa tribe, manifested the same desire to acquiesce in the Divine will, under even more trying circumstances. It is now eighteen months since he buried his wife, to whom he was much attached. His only child, a little girl about eight years old, was his greatest earthly comfort: however, he did not keep her from our Boarding-school. We feared she would not be spared long, as she appeared to be suffering from an internal complaint, which was gradually undermining her constitution. After being with us nearly two years she became worse, and I thought it right to tell her father that I feared she was in a critical state. He replied, "If my only child should be taken away, I shall not be able to bear it. I have no strength. She is my manawa (breath). But I will trust in God." "Yes," I replied, "He is faithful. He will give you strength according to your day." Soon afterward she was seized with dysentery, and I felt assured she could not survive the attack. We tried various medicines, which appeared for a time to arrest the disease. Thomas then took her home. As she was leaving, she said, "Father, I shall die; but you must teach me continually. If you fall asleep, I shall awake you: you must teach me. Oh, teach me, for I shall die!" The next day I went to see her. I said to her, "Well, Priscilla, do you remember what you have been taught at School?" "Yes," she replied; "I do pray." – I then asked her, "What do you pray for?" She replied, "That God the Holy Spirit may change my heart." – "Do you wish to love the Saviour?" "Yes, that is my desire." – I then asked her, "Do you feel that you are a sinful child?" "Yes, I am," was the reply. – "What hope have you that you will be saved?" "Christ, died for my sins." Soon afterward she died. I believe she was one of the

Saviour's dear little Iambs: "of such is the kingdom of heaven." For a few days poor Thomas appeared paralyzed. The day after her death he said, "My only relief is secret prayer." A few days afterward, the children of our School followed the remains of their young friend to the grave: the four eldest girls were the bearers of the coffin. I trust the lesson will not be lost upon them. Thomas bears his loss as becomes those who do not sorrow as without hope. He said to me after the funeral, "My only desire is now to be useful to my tribe. All my earthly hopes are destroyed, but the will of God is best." The consistent conduct of some few of my people, and the happy deaths of others, cause much greater joy and satisfaction than crowded Congregations of mere nominal professors.

Visit of the Governor to the Station.

The Governor of New Zealand, Sir George Grey, visited the Kaitotehe and Otawao Districts in February of last year. How heartily he interests himself in the efforts of the Missionaries on behalf of the Natives is thus stated by Mr. Ashwell –

Feb. 18, 1849: Lord's-day – The Governor and party attended the Morning and Evening Native Services, and also the School: he questioned the Natives on Scriptural subjects.

Feb. 19 – I accompanied his Excellency through a part of my District. We reached Ngahokowitu, where a great number of the Ngatimahuta, the most powerful of the Waikato tribes, were assembled. They were expecting the Governor, who had promised to settle the dispute respecting land between themselves and the Waingaroa Natives. He was accompanied by Te Wherowhero, the Chief of Waikato. After many speeches from the different Chiefs, it was left for the Governor to settle.

Feb. 20 – The Governor accompanied me to see the new Chapel at Tepuiateia Whatawhata, which he admired very much as a specimen of native workmanship, and showing also the religious feelings of the Natives.

On the 21st Mr. Ashwell accompanied the Governor to Otawao, the Station of the Rev. J. Morgan.

Feb. 23 – I left Otawao with the Governor and party. We reached Whatawhata at four o'clock P.M. His Excellency attended Evening Prayers and the Bible Class. He questioned the Natives on Simeon's Song.

Feb. 24 – After Morning Service we pulled to Kaitotehe, which we reached at six o'clock P.M. The Governor attended Evening Service and the Bible Class, and questioned the Natives on Romans xii. He expressed himself pleased at the Scriptural knowledge of the Natives of Whatawhata and Kaitotehe. He considers the Natives of Whatawhata next to those of Ngauhuruhuru in agricultural progress.

Feb. 25: Lord's-day – The Governor and party attended the Morning and Evening Native Services and School.

Feb. 26 – Our visitors left Kaitotehe for Waikato Heads. I felt thankful for the encouragement given to our people by the kindness and countenance of His Excellency.

OTAWAO.

The Rev. J. Morgan left his Station for Auckland on the 12th of April 1849, and was ordained by the Bishop of New Zealand on the 24th of June. The difficulties which he had to contend with in the superintendence of his large District, in consequence of his not being in Holy Orders, had been very great: this hinderance to the efficiency of his work is now happily removed. The following is his

Report for the Year 1848.

Brought, by the kind providence of God, to the close of another year, I am called upon, in furnishing a Report, to mention some circumstances calling for humiliation, faith, and prayer; and others, calculated to raise our hopes, and call forth our praises, in looking to the future. The blessing of peace is still continued to us, although many disputes have arisen relative to the boundary lines of lands.

With some few exceptions, the Congregations of this District have continued steady in their attendance on the Means of Grace, with some little increase in their numbers. At Ngauhuruhuru and Otoru several deaths have taken place; and some gave good reason to hope that they died in faith.

The conduct of the Native Teachers at

the various villages in my District has been satisfactory. They conduct the Morning and Evening Services, hold Bible Classes, and conduct the Sabbath duties in my absence. Some are entrusted to visit occasionally the outposts. Still, generally speaking, our Teachers are far from efficient; and it is to be much regretted that means cannot be brought fully into exercise for raising up Teachers of a higher cast than those at present employed.

A new Chapel has been raised at Kihikihi, and another is building at the outer part of the plantations at Ngauhuruhuru.

I have paid week-day and Sunday visits to the villages within twelve miles of the Mission Station, and made journeys to all the outposts.

In reference to Schools, there is little to report this year. The new boarded School-house, eighteen by thirty feet, chiefly built by subscription, is finished, save lining. It is highly important that every exertion should be made in the cause of Schools. The deplorable ignorance in which baptized children are growing up cannot be too deeply mourned over. Civilization is rapidly increasing among us, going on hand in hand with colonization. But the condition of the Natives cannot really improve, if instruction be withheld from the rising generation.

Under the head of agriculture it may be reported, that from 800 to 1000 acres of wheat are now in ear in this District, giving the promise of an abundant harvest. The mill, 14 noticed in a former Report, works to the entire satisfaction of the native owners, grinding, when at work, from forty to sixty bushels of wheat a day. It has during the year ground 2600 bushels of wheat. The above mill, and that at Otawao, are under the care of an English miller. Having introduced a good assortment of fruit-trees into the District, and having instructed several of the Natives in the art of budding and grafting, they are now becoming possessed of orchards, adding much to their comfort, and to the appearance of civilization at their respective homes.

Mr. Morgan's District is large; and, in visiting the different villages, he frequently journeys from thirty to ninety miles and upward in the day. It is therefore necessary that our Missionaries in New Zealand should be "in labours more abundant." We find Mr. Morgan holding Morning Service and addressing the Natives at sunrise, at one village; then proceeding to another, where a Bible Class is held; and finally reaching home in the evening, after a journey of ninety miles.

Mr. Morgan is assisted in his District by the Native Catechists Hemi, Blind Solomon, Matenga, Hakopa, Haraka, &c. These men sometimes undertake a journey of 100 miles to prepare the Candidates for Baptism at the outposts.

Administration of the Sacraments – Promising Candidate for Baptism.

In January 1849 the Station was visited by the Rev. R. Maunsell. The Morning Service on the 21st was attended by a Congregation of 500, after which the Lord's Supper was administered to 108 Native Communicants. In the afternoon 70 adults and 32 children were baptized.

The following notice of a baptismal Candidate occurs in Mr. Morgan's Journal –

Sept. 2, 1848 – At Kihikihi I examined the Candidates for Baptism. One of this party is a young Chief named Ngarimu, who has long been a regular attendant at Service on the week and Lord's-days, but, having three wives, could not be admitted to the class of Candidates for Baptism. About a fortnight ago he requested, on condition of his forsaking two of his wives, that he might be admitted into the class of Candidates for Baptism; and on these conditions himself and his three wives presented themselves, all of whom I admitted into the class. When we find the profession of the Gospel accompanied with what, to a young Chief, is a real sacrifice, we have reason to hope that, with the Apostle, he desires to count all things loss for Christ. He has long halted between two opinions, and I have often urged him to profess himself on the Lord's side.

Bible Classes – Romanism.

This useful mode of communicating Scriptural instruction is very

generally employed throughout the District. When the Missionary visits one of the villages, after the conclusion of Divine Service the Natives meet him in class, and the catechetical mode of instruction is sustained with interest for a considerable time. Nor is it only when the Missionary is present: at the different villages the Christian Natives meet in the evening, for the purpose of reading together the Holy Scriptures. The following notice, from Mr. Morgan's Journal, will show the importance which he attaches to these means of mutual edification –

June 19, 1848 – I held Service in the afternoon at Manukarere: the Natives of the village, with the exception of three or four, attended. We also had Evening Service, at which I addressed the Natives; and a Bible Class at night, at the Ruahine, closed my labours for the day. It is very cheering to find so many, living at such a distance from the Station, holding fast their profession, and nightly assembling themselves together to read and converse over the sacred Word of God. These evening meetings, under the Native Teachers, are very general in the District, and I always request that they be held every evening, either in the Teacher's house or some other convenient place.

Diligence in the communication of Scriptural knowledge amongst the people, always necessary, is rendered urgently so in consequence of the active efforts made by the French Bishop and his agents to make Romanists of the people. It is needful, therefore, that the Natives should be provided with a safeguard against the danger to which they are exposed.

At Ngauhuruhuru, in particular, this Bishop has been unceasing in his endeavours. Active measures have therefore been adopted by Mr. Morgan. That place has been divided into three Districts, and select Teachers appointed over them, for the more effectual visiting of the Natives. Lectures on Church history have been given, in order to enable the Natives the better to understand the rise and progress of the Church of Rome, and the periods at which the various errors were introduced and sanctioned by the Popish Councils. In these lectures the Natives have been much interested.

In the administration of baptism, the Romanist agents in this District exhibit a total indifference as to the moral character of the persons whom they receive. A son of one of the leading Chiefs having quarrelled with his elder brother, immediately went and offered himself for baptism to a Priest, by whom he was at once received, without probation. The son of another leading Chief, who had committed adultery with his brother's wife, and then attempted suicide by swallowing poison, a month afterward was baptized by the Popish Bishop.

The Native Tihinui, and his wife Marahera, mentioned in our last notice of this Station, continue stedfast, notwithstanding the unceasing and insidious efforts made to bring them back to the Church of Rome.

Death of Pious Children.

In his Journal Mr. Morgan mentions the following touching cases of early death –

Aug. 3 – I buried Papahia's child. After the funeral, Manewa informed me of the death of two of his little girls, aged about seven and eleven years: one of them died on the Sunday, and the other on the following day. The eldest girl, during her sickness, kept her Catechism bound by a girdle round her waist, and frequently made use of it to instruct her brothers and sisters. She exhorted her parents to continue to seek God. "Mother," she said before she died, "be strong in prayer, and do not neglect to go to hear Nikorima – the Native Teacher – preach about the things of God." The youngest said, on seeing her parents weeping over her "Weep not for me, but for yourselves. I am going to enjoy eternal life. Be strong in prayer for yourselves. Pray to God

to give you new hearts." The father expressed his determination to follow in the steps of his children. I felt cheered at the joyful end of these lambs of Christ's flock. Papahia's child, eight years old, said to his father, "Father, what is the inward and spiritual grace?" Shortly afterward he said to his parents, "Repent, for the kingdom of heaven is at hand;" and having said these words he expired.

The Chief Karaka.

Jan. 27, 1849 – I was very much grieved to hear of the death of Karaka, one of my most worthy Natives at Ngauhuruhuru. He left here for Auckland about six weeks ago, was seized with dysentery at that place, and there expired. He was one of the two Chiefs of the Ngateterai tribe, and from his first profession of Christianity until his death be held steadily on his heavenly course, and is now, I trust, at rest with Jesus. The Government, with their usual kindness, ordered a coffin to be made for him, in which a party of his tribe, Roman Catholics, brought him up from Auckland, a distance of nearly 150 miles.

Advance in Civilization.

The following extracts are interesting, as exhibiting the growth of industrial habits among the Chiefs and people –

Oct. 23, 1848 – At Kimi Hori's request I went down to assist him in the engagement of an European as a farm servant. He entered into an engagement with a man named Carter, to farm and improve the land, and to receive in consideration one half of the standing crop of wheat; the first two ploughs and harness to be purchased by Hori and his tribe, after which Carter is to bear one half the cost of ploughs, &c, purchased in future. The fences, &c, are to be erected jointly, and on the same terms a cart for the use of the farm is to be purchased. A barn, 40 feet by 20, is to be erected. I also engaged an European to make about 10,000 bricks, for ovens for the Natives. Manuka, one of Hori's tribe, engaged a carpenter to build him a boarded house, 12 feet by 16, with a verandah. The cost of the house – including timber, windows, doors, chimney, and painting – will be about 30l. Manuka delivered to the carpenter pigs to the value of 20l., and some sawn timber. This will be the first native boarded house erected in this part of the country. Some months ago I recommended the Natives to take flour down to the Auckland market, and they are now preparing to start with three or four canoe loads. Hori's party are also scraping flax, to purchase the ploughs, &c, for their intended farm. I felt thankful to see so decided a step taken toward civilization; and although these advances must occupy a portion of my time, I feel assured that it is our duty to endeavour to promote both the spiritual and temporal good of the Natives. A few years ago, when visiting them, they rejected the Gospel, and turned a deaf ear to all our entreaties to cease from war and cannibalism. Now, the Gospel is winning its silent way, and civilization adds fresh comforts to their homes. The miller informed me that the quantity of wheat ground at Ngauhuruhuru this season is about 2500 bushels. The wheat-fields are more extensive this year.

Visit from the Governor.

The visit of the Governor to this part of the island has been already mentioned. The encouragement given by him to our Missionaries, in their laborious yet most beneficial efforts among the Natives, will be duly appreciated by our readers. Mr. Morgan writes –

Feb. 22, 1849 – The Governor visited the mill at Ngauhuruhuru, which was grinding at the time. His Excellency proposed that the Chiefs should send two bags of flour to the Queen, and it was agreed to by them. He also visited Manuka's house, and my two Chapels, and rode over part of the Settlement. He expressed himself as being much pleased with the advance made in civilization. He kindly presented the Ngauhuruhuru Natives with a plough and harness, and commissioned me to engage and superintend an European to instruct them to plough, and to draw upon him for the expenses, at the rate of 21s. per week, for the next twelve months. His Excellency also presented the Natives with two bells, one for Ngauhuruhuru 15 and the other for Orakau Chapel. He was very well received by the Natives, and appeared to enjoy his visit, and the fine country over which he rode.

The Governor attended Evening Prayers at Otawao. I requested Blind Solomon to

preach, having previously introduced him to Sir George. He conversed with him, kindly presented him with several articles of clothing out of his own trunk, and promised on his return to Auckland to forward him some warm clothing for the winter, and to renew the gift every year. The evening, before Family Prayers, was very agreeably spent in conversing on the present state and future prospects of the Mission, and the anxiety of the Government to establish Schools.

His Excellency took a great interest in my proposed Half-caste School, and promised to visit the new Schoolroom in the morning, and on his return to Auckland to request the Rev. – Thatcher to draw plans for the extra buildings required, and to make me a grant of money for their erection, and also that the School should receive a portion of the annual Government grant for its support.

The Natives were much pleased with the Governor's kindness to them. Four horses were soon forthcoming from amongst the Natives to draw the plough. But now many became anxious to have their ground broken up, and more work appeared in view than one plough could effect, or than the owners of the horses were willing should be attempted. They resolved, therefore, to scrape 200 baskets of flax – probable value about 80l. – and to place the money in Mr. Morgan's hands for the purchase of a dray, two new ploughs, harness, and four oxen.

The necessity for the Half-caste School mentioned in the above paragraph is thus explained by Mr. Morgan –

Feb. 23, 1849 – In the prospect of shortly opening the Half-caste Schools for boys and girls, I feel the importance of providing them with a suitable library. Donations of books from the friends of the Mission would be most valuable, as the education of these children will be conducted entirely in the English language. A few large maps would also be very acceptable. The Half-caste children are very numerous, and a most interesting race. The parents generally are anxious for their education, but their small means will not allow of their being sent to private Schools. The mothers of these children are generally the daughters of the leading Chiefs; and as they are with their parents, living amongst the various tribes along the coast, and in the interior, these children will no doubt in future years exercise great influence amongst their respective tribes, either for good or for evil. How important, then, that they should receive a Christian education, that hereafter they may not stand in the way, to retard the advancement of the Aborigines, but, on the contrary, some of them be employed as Schoolmasters and Schoolmistresses amongst them, under the Society! To use the language of Sir George Grey, "We may hope that some of the boys will become Ministers of the Gospel."

Mr. Morgan, in his Journal for Dec. 31, 1848, desires thankfully to acknowledge the receipt of parcels of clothing for the Schools, from Mrs. Reddell and family, Leamington Spa; from Miss Farquhar, Highbury Grange; and Miss E. Stephen, Dover Street, Piccadilly.

14 Vide our Numbers for July 1847, p. 160; and October 1849, p. 230.

15 In a previous part of his Journal – Oct. 24, 1848 – Mr. Morgan had recorded – "A party of Natives arrived from Auckland. One of them brought a bell, of about 24lbs. weight, a present from the Governor to Kimi Hori Waru, for our Chapel at Ngauhuruhuru."

New-Zealand Mission.

NEW-ZEALAND MISSION.

WE resume our account of this Mission from p. 210 of our last Number.

Middle District (concluded).

TAURANGA.

This Station is at Tauranga Port, on the eastern coast of the island. The Natives belong to the Ngateawa tribe.

Report for the Year 1848.

Archdeacon Brown thus speaks of the general aspect of the work at the conclusion of the year 1848 –

Journeys through the Archdeaconry of Tauranga have occupied me nearly four months of the past year. I have baptized 85 adults and 99 children, and administered the Lord's Supper to 500 Natives at twenty-two different places, scattered over a surface of 600 miles boundary.

We have had much to try our faith and patience in the indifference manifested by many Natives who "did run well," and then lost their "first love;" but in the closing months of the year an improved tone of feeling, and a better attendance on the Means of Grace, have again encouraged the hope that our labour is "not in vain in the Lord." When we look at the instruments employed, and the results obtained, we feel that we are bound to thank God and take courage. Nor is the remark confined to Tauranga: it is applicable to the whole Archdeaconry. For what is our force? Five European Labourers! while our Chapels exceed a hundred, with Congregations numbering 5980 Natives – of whom 500 are Communicants – and the baptisms during the year have amounted to 393, i. e. 104 adults and 289 children. It may also be noticed, that, while most of the five Missionaries in this Archdeaconry are in enfeebled health, there are four Roman-Catholic Priests, of active habits, labouring in the same field, with a zeal worthy of a better cause, to plant "another Gospel."

The following passages are from Archdeacon Brown's Journal –

Ann Wilson. 16

Nov. 22, 1848 – At Oputao I had an attentive Congregation at Morning Service. I afterward administered the Lord's Supper to 11 Communicants, and then walked to Te Waiiti, where I had a long conversation with my old friend Ann Wilson. She is evidently getting weaker: may her inward man be strengthened as her outward man decays! She is placed in a disadvantageous position – a husband ignorant of the Truth, a sickly frame, and seldom visited by a Native Teacher – yet I would fain hope is growing in grace, and in the knowledge and love of her Saviour. She expressed a wish to receive the Holy Communion, and was joined by another Native.

Congregation at Omaruteane.

Nov. 26: Lord's-day – There being no suitable building in which we could assemble for Divine Worship, I had a retired spot in the wood cleared yesterday, and strewed with small branches, to serve as our temporary Chapel. At Morning Service, which was attended by more than 100 Natives, I baptized 3 adults, and administered the Lord's Supper to 30. Amongst them was an afflicted woman, who was borne on a litter to commemorate once more the dying love of her Saviour ere she entered into that "rest which re-

maineth for the people of God." I preached from John xv. 5, 6, the luxuriant branches which overshadowed us, and the withered branches beneath our feet, affording an apt illustration of our subject. In the afternoon 80 attended School, but only 30 could read in the Testament. At Evening Service I baptized 8 children, and was afterward engaged with the Natives who came to my tent to have passages of Scripture explained to them.

Native Explanation of Repentance.

Nov. 29, 1848 – I walked eighteen miles to Te Waimana, and took Evening Service, baptizing three children. There is no word in the native language synonymous with repentance, and therefore that word has been adopted in the translation of the Scriptures. I had a proof to-day that its meaning is understood. We lost our road in the woods, but, being unwilling to retrace our steps, we forced our way for a time through an unbeaten track, which becoming impassable, we at length turned back, one of the Natives remarking, "This is like repentance. We leave the only path to Heaven: then our hearts tell us we are wrong, but still we keep on till we find our Toad increasingly bad, and our hearts becoming very pouri (dark). We at last turn back to the path we had left, and our hearts are once more marama" (light).

Old Wakatane.

Dec. 8 – I walked to Maraenui, and found old Wakatane in the Pa. He is, I think, the oldest Chief in New Zealand. He recollects the visit of Capt. Cook, and mentions some particulars respecting him which are confirmed by reference to his "Voyages." The old man, though still possessing considerable vigour, is much altered since my visit last year, and his hair having been suffered to grow long, he presents, with his white beard and hoary locks, a most venerable appearance. His "hoary head" is not, however, I fear, "a crown of glory," not being "found in the way of righteousness." Still, he regularly attends the Chapel Services; and I endeavoured, in conversation, to point him to that Saviour whose blood cleanseth from all sin, and who, even at the eleventh hour, is willing to show mercy to the penitent.

Baptisms at Torokai.

In November 1848 Mr. Davies visited Matamata and Torokai, and was much pleased with the state of the people. The following extract from his Journal is very interesting –

Nov. 26: Lord's-day – I arose at five o'clock. I heard the morning hymn of praise ascending from the native houses, as each were conducting Family Worship. By seven o'clock the Natives crowded round my tent, eagerly asking questions from their Testaments. At half-past eight we assembled for prayers: 305 were present, and many were obliged to stand outside. The oppression from the heat was very great. I baptized seven children, and preached from Matthew vii. 13, 14. Immediately afterward Sunday-school was held, at which there were 233 present, of whom 48 were children. After dinner I examined two classes – one for Baptism, one for Confirmation. At half-past three I returned to my tent, the Natives still coming, asking questions from the sacred Book of Truth.

After tea I held Service, baptizing four children, and preaching from Isaiah lv. 1. After prayers I assembled the whole of the classes for baptism: 75 sat around the Chapel. I went to each, asking questions on the Church Catechism, and on the doctrines of regeneration, repentance, faith, and the sacraments of Baptism and the Lord's Supper. Could any of the friends of our Society have been present, I am sure they would have been much gratified to see grandparents, parents, and children, coming forward for instruction previous to their baptism. I addressed them on the necessity of seeking the Holy Spirit to sanctify His Word to their souls. After engaging in prayer for God's blessing on the Services of the day, Hepere, the Teacher, thus addressed them: "My friends, the Ngatihaua" – name of tribe – "we never assembled so many before for baptism. Formerly, it was two or three: now 75. Hear my words. Take care you do not lean upon baptism, or the new name, as the Jews did on circumcision. Seek to be baptized in the heart by the Holy Ghost. That is the great matter. Your names have been written down by Mr. Davies in his book: it may be lost; but we should all remember that God writes down our names in His book, and Christ will open it when He comes to judge us. If our names are written in the Book of Life, that can never be lost." It was half-past nine before I

got to my tent, thankful for the strength vouchsafed to work for my Master.

ROTORUA.

The health of the Rev. T. Chapman has long been suffering from the climate of this Station. He has therefore been removed from it to Maketu, the Rev. C. P. Davies being transferred to Rotorua. The following is part of Mr. Chapman's

Report for the Year ending Dec. 1848.

Of the general state of this District, it is hoped that the Christian party have held on in their former position. We have, perhaps, less cause to mourn over immoralities than over that satisfied feeling, which has embued the native mind so deeply, that few rise high enough to act as a beacon to their weaker brethren, either to warn them of evil or to conduct them to good. I have visited the various places in my extensive District, having been absent from home for this purpose about eighty days during the year. Had my health permitted, I should have been more frequently out on Missionary tours. It remains now to record that our gracious Master has continued to us His care and watchfulness for good. We have little to add of conquest: we have rather to mourn over some aggressions made upon us: yet will we trust, praying that the infant Churches of this District, raised in weakness, may, under the blessing of God, grow in grace, and bring forth the fruits of the spirit.

AHIKERURU.

Mr. James Preece, the resident Catechist, has been much occupied with secular duties inseparable from the formation of a new Station. The completion of these has, we trust, now left him at more liberty to attend to the spiritual instruction of the Natives.

EASTERN DISTRICT.

"Nine years ago" contrasted with "Now."

This District was visited by Mr. G. Clarke in the month of January 1849. The following extract from a Letter written by him on the conclusion of his tour, will present to our readers an interesting view of the rapid progress of Christianity and civilization amongst the Natives of this part of the island. It is dated Feb. 22, 1849.

It will be remembered that a little more than nine years ago the whole of this population, consisting of not fewer than 6000 or 7000 Natives, were entirely heathen; and I doubt whether at that time, including Native Teachers, twenty could read and write. Now, the District is professedly Christian, as much so as our own country, and at least one-third of the whole can read and write. There are more than twenty native Churches, built by Natives, with an average attendance of 4000, 17 of whom 1900 have been baptized, and 800 are Communicants.

But, leaving the subject of the many that have been "turned from darkness to light, and from the power of Satan to God," I proceed to notice the temporal benefits that have grown out of the labours of the Missionaries.

Nine years ago, there was not, that I am aware of, a grain of wheat grown in this District: now, upon a moderate calculation, there cannot be less than 3000 acres grown by Natives. Nine years ago, there was not a steel mill in the whole range of my journey: now, the Natives have more than 200 mills among them. Nine years ago, there was not a ship belonging to a Native: now, they have more than thirty vessels, of from ten to thirty tons burden, which they have purchased at a cost of little less than 8000l. Nine years ago, they had neither a horse nor a cow amongst them: now, they have a number of both, and it must be borne in mind that this property has been procured by their own industry.

Amidst these encouraging indications of outward improvement, we trust the Gospel is going forward on its glorious mission of winning souls to Christ.

OPOTIKI.

This portion of the District has continued under the charge of Mr. J. A. Wilson, the resident Catechist.

General Improvement at this Station – Advances in Civilization.

Mr. Clarke, in the Letter already referred to, says –

When I visited this place about nine years ago, there were only two or three Christian Natives, liberated slaves from the north, who had carried their little stock of Christian knowledge to impart to their countrymen. We assembled a large Congregation at the time, and they have gone on increasing in numbers – and some, I trust, growing in grace – until they now form a Congregation amounting to several hundreds, many of whom have been baptized, and are Communicants at the Lord's Table. They have a large native Chapel, and are an industrious, plodding, and commercial people. They are owners of six small vessels, which they navigate themselves, carrying on a large trade with Auckland and other places in pigs, potatoes, Indian corn, and wheat. They have horses, fine crops of wheat, which they have just harvested, and steel mills to grind it. They make their own bread, and supply their visitors in considerable quantities. There is one, and sometimes there are two Roman-Catholic Priests living here, who claim a small number of followers. From this place they travel into the interior as far as Taupo, and along the coast, carrying the blighting influence of their tenets wherever they go.

Need of more Labourers – Romanism.

We have not received the usual Annual Report from this District. We regret to find that Mr. Wilson's health is far from good, and the difficulties of visiting the more distant parts of this interesting District much increased; and yet, from the efforts of the Romish Priests, the need of continual superintendence is urgent. To the Natives of Tunapahore, eighteen miles S. E. of Opotiki, they gave a bell as an inducement to join them; but the Natives cast it into the sea, plainly telling the Priests that they would have nothing to do with them. At Te Kaha similar efforts have been made to gain over the father of the Native Teacher, the principal Chief: although they have not succeeded, the Natives are aware of the danger, and entreat that they may be more frequently visited.

HICKS' BAY (KAUAKAUA).

Lack of an European Teacher.

This place, on the death of the Rev. C. L. Reay, was unavoidably left without a resident Missionary until the arrival of the Rev. R. Barker in the present year. During this interval the work was sustained by the Native Teachers, with occasional visits from Archdeacon W. Williams and Mr. C. Baker. The information we have received respecting this Station will be found embodied in their Reports.

UAWA.

Mr. C. Baker, the resident Catechist at this Station, has furnished the following

Report for the Year 1849.

The duties of the Uawa Station have been attended to with regularity through the year. Two Services on the Lord's-day with the Natives, and one with the English, have been held, together with morning and afternoon Sunday-school. Morning and Evening Prayers, and occasional Week-day Lectures, have been continued.

The Teachers' Class has been held weekly throughout the year, except the interruptions occasioned by my absence from the Station. During three months I had a daily class of Teachers and Monitors, in parties from the different villages belonging to Uawa, Waiapu, and Te Kauakaua, each party remaining three weeks or a month. The exercises have been Bible-Class Reading, Writing, Dictation, Arithmetic, and Lectures on the leading truths of the Bible.

The Services at the different villages have been regularly and well attended. The Schools have only been partially so, owing to native cultivations. Attention to the sick, and making up medicine, have drawn heavily upon my time.

I have visited the villages connected with the Station several times, catechizing, imparting instruction, and strengthening the hands of the Native Teachers and Monitors in their work.

TURANGA.

Archdeacon W. Williams, being the only Missionary in Priests' Orders throughout an extent of country 400 miles in length, has

been arduously occupied in visiting the different Stations, and endeavouring to meet the urgent wants of the Mission. The fact that the other Missionaries in the District, the Rev. J. Hamlin and the Rev. W. Colenso, are as yet only in Deacons' Orders, is a serious hinderance to them in the prosecution of their Missionary labours, and interferes with the growth of the infant native Church.

Report for the Year 1848.

The subjoined Report from Archdeacon W. Williams is comprehensive of the District generally, as well as of his own special Station, Turanga.

The Natives of Turanga have been left much to themselves, by reason of the pressing calls in other parts of the Eastern District. Still, there is much reason to be thankful that their attention has not fallen off, but has rather been on the increase. The Congregations are kept up to their full number. The Bible Classes are well attended, when they are called together, by the larger number of the Christian Natives; and, were it possible to assemble them more frequently for this kind of instruction, the benefit would doubtless be much greater.

From among the Candidates for Baptism of last year there have been admitted into the Church 92 men and 71 women, who, together with 37 children, make a total of 200. The number of Candidates keeps up to the previous amount by the accession of others who had not come forward. The number of Communicants is not so large this year, because there were several, who had been kept back on account of indiscreet conduct, who would have been subsequently re-admitted had it not been for my absence from the Station.

The Central School for girls has been opened on the Station, and numbers an average of 40. A valuable Native and his wife have the general charge, and Mrs. Williams gives as much time to it as she is able; but unless there be some assistance provided, such as was contemplated by the Central Committee, it is clear that the result will fall much below what is to be desired in a central Boarding-school Turanga affords great facilities for this object, because there are numbers of children to be obtained, and food is abundant and cheap, while a contrary state of things would preclude the possibility of working upon a sufficiently large scale.

The Adult Daily Schools continue in most of the villages, fluctuating in numbers, but presenting an average rather above the numbers given in the Return. The Sunday-schools include the larger portion of the regular Congregations.

On the 31st of January I left home by sea for Wellington, for the purpose of visiting the villages on the whole line of coast between that place and Turanga. The Christian Natives at Wellington appeared to receive with much thankfulness the attention I was able to bestow upon them. I assembled classes for reading and catechizing during five days, and administered the Lord's Supper to 67 Communicants; but they complain much of being "as sheep without a shepherd," having only occasional visits from those who can talk to them.

Leaving Wellington on the 15th of February, I passed up the valley of Wairarapa, spending two Sundays at the extremities of the valley, and another on the coast at Porangahau, administering the Lord's Supper – at the villages of Te Kopi, Huangarua, Te Kaikokirikiri, Mataikona, and Porangahau – to 207 Natives. The whole body of Natives, with few exceptions, came together at their respective villages to read and to be catechized. Their general appearance is gratifying; and it is a cause for wonder and thankfulness, that, with only three visits from Missionaries in the year, the Native Teachers are enabled to keep up the work.

On the 6th of May I set out on a journey to Waiapu. Since the death of the Rev. C. L. Reay this important District has been again left to the charge of Native Teachers, with occasional visits from Mr. Baker and myself. On my way I administered the Lord's Supper at Uawa, on May the 7th, to 140 Communicants, and at Tokomaru, on the 10th, to 110. On reaching the District immediately belonging to Waiapu, I found it was necessary to hold adult baptisms, for that Mr. Reay had intended to go through the District for this purpose at about the time when he was taken from us, and no baptism had been held in the villages south of Rangitukia since the Rev. G. A. Kissling left. The examination of the numerous Candidates was the work of many days. Baptisms were held respectively at Waipiro, Whareponga,

Tuparoa, and Korotere, when 305 adults and 177 children were admitted into the Church of Christ. The Lord's Supper was administered in different villages to 406 Communicants. The attention of the Native Teachers in this District has been good, but as a body they are very deficient in knowledge, and are unable to carry the people beyond the first principles.

Upon a review of the infant Church at Turanga, at Waiapu, and throughout the District generally, there appears to be an extensive field of promise; but we cannot look for that fruit which is unto eternal life, unless it be duly cultivated.

We add some extracts from Archdeacon Williams's Journal, of an interesting character.

Administration of the Sacraments at Turanga and Tokomaru.

Sept. 17, 1848: Lord's-day – I held Service at nine, and baptized 123 adults after the Second Lesson. The appearance of the Congregation, viewed from the Communion-table, was highly interesting – a dense mass of about 700 persons, not, as in our Chapels generally, seated on the ground. In the centre were the children, on two seats running the whole length of the building; then a large number, closely packed, sitting on the ground; while those on either side were raised upon four rows of benches. But the people were so thronged together, that, when seated, nothing was visible except this multitude of heads. Many of those now admitted into the Church are advanced in years, and, though some are very ignorant, they have long continued to give proof of earnestness in their desire for admission to this Christian privilege; and I trust that many have come with sincere repentance and lively faith.

Christian Deaths.

July 6, 1849 – I went to see the friends of a Christian Native who died this morning. The deceased had been long ill, and has always expressed a simple reliance on his Saviour. He is now added to the number of those who have died in the faith. I asked his wife how he expressed himself at the last. His parting words, she said, were, "It is Christ who keeps me afloat" – in allusion to the corks by which a fishing-net is kept to the surface of the water.

July 13 – Being on a visit to Uawa, I went with Mr. Baker to see two Natives who are at the point of death, a young woman and a very old man. They are both in a happy frame of mind, ready for their summons. If these two Natives were the only fruit of the Gospel in this place, there would be much to be thankful for, but there are many such.

Examination of Candidates at Hicks' Hay.

Aug. 8 – I attended School, and at Evening Prayers addressed the Natives. The examination of thirty Candidates occupied the whole of the day. The character of these examinations presents some variety, but there is not much to record. Some are intelligent, and show that, with good early instruction, they would have risen above mediocrity; some are dull, and it is often a point of difficulty to decide whether they should be received or not; and others are woefully ignorant; but often, in the midst of much ignorance, there is shown a sincerity of purpose to cleave to the one solid foundation of Christ. In old people there seldom appears to be a capacity to receive any thing but that which is most simply put before them. Asking one man what was the meaning of a death unto sin, he replied, "You must teach me: I don't quite understand. I am old, and my tongue goes on this side and on that, and gets wrong. It means that sin should be killed, and that will be when a man dies." – "But is there no way in this life? What will destroy sin?" "Jesus Christ: there is no other name but His."

WAIROA.

The Rev. J. Hamlin, with recruited strength, returned from Auckland to his Station on Sept. the 26th, 1848. The condition of his portion of the Eastern District is thus reviewed by him in his

Report for the Year 1848.

I was not a little encouraged to find that the general affairs of the Station, Schools excepted, had gone on in a regular, and, as far as I could judge, in a satisfactory manner during my absence. Since my return I have paid a visit to each of the outposts, and have every reason to be satisfied with the state of the District generally, and great cause for thankfulness to the God of all grace for the steady profession of the Gospel made by our more seriously-inclined Natives, as well as for the zeal and diligence of the Native Teachers in visiting the various places assigned them. By the means and assistance of these, the whole District has been

brought to a better state than formerly existed: a greater respect than heretofore is now paid to religion and its ordinances, by the Natives in general. But, though they are generally acquainted with the leading doctrines of Christianity, it is to be feared that this knowledge, in a considerable portion of them, is mixed with many strange superstitious notions, which savour more of the old system which they have abandoned than of that holy religion which they profess. Nor is this to be wondered at. So many Christian converts, scattered over a large tract of country, need constant instruction and discipline in their new faith; but are nevertheless left to the care of a single Missionary, who can only pay them about four visits in a year. Surely we shall cease to wonder if ignorance and some inconsistencies prevail!

A considerable portion of the two remaining heathen parties of last year has now joined us, and fortunately before the arrival of the Romish Priest, who paid us a visit in November. Though he used his utmost endeavours to draw away disciples after him, yet he did not succeed in a single instance.

Old Walker – Death of a pious Native.

The following are some of those individual instances of the saving power of Divine Grace which are the richest jewels in the work of the Church Missionary Society. Mr. Hamlin writes, in hie Journal –

Oct. 23, 1848 – On my way down the river from Mohaka to Waikari, I called to see a sick man, old Walker, who has always been a consistent Christian ever since I knew him, and, no doubt, long before. On my reaching the spot where he was lying, the pale wasting consumption, which is the Lord's instrument for removing many of this country every year from the land of the living, appeared to be making rapid strides on his constitution. The hollow eye, the distressing cough, and the too-often flattering flush on the cheek, seemed to foretel the approach of death. I held out my hand to shake hands with him: he grasped it firmly in both of his, and held it fast for about ten minutes, addressing me at the same time, and giving it an extra squeeze whenever he mentioned the love of Christ to his soul. It was very edifying to sit by his side, and hear him converse. At first, his voice being low, I could scarcely distinguish what he said, but, gaining strength as he proceeded, he was enabled to converse freely. Looking on his arms he observed, "Though my outward man perish, my inward man is gaining strength day by day. This disease and pain which I feel is very short, compared with that punishment which I deserve. The riches of the love of Christ is great, is great, is great." This is a form of speech in frequent use amongst the Natives when they wish to speak of any thing in the superlative degree – when words seem to fail to express what is felt. "Here," I observed to him, "you find then, from sweet experience, that religion is not a cunningly-devised fable, but a blessed reality, and affords your soul satisfying pleasures while you lie here upon the bed of languishing." "It is so indeed," he returned. I asked him whether he thought he could atone for his sins, or do anything to recommend himself to the favour of God. "No," he replied: "Christ has atoned for my sins; He has done all for me: He will not leave His work unfinished: He will complete it, and take me to Himself."

The Native Teacher of this place informed me that a Native named Tamati had died during my absence, in a very happy frame of mind. The sweet peace which old Walker enjoys, and the happy death of Tamati, have produced a salutary effect on the minds of the Natives of Mohaka generally. Some, who appeared to be wavering, and perhaps halting between two opinions, have been confirmed and strengthened in their profession of the Gospel. A small party, who up to the present time remained heathen, have now joined Christianity. May God give them the inward power to become His children!

WAITANGI.

Report for the Year 1848.

In this Report the Rev. W. Colenso thus speaks of the aspect of Missionary work in his District –

The state of the Natives throughout the District, notwithstanding the great increase of the Church during the year, is not, on the whole, of a pleasing nature. The continual squabbling among themselves, more especially among the tribes of the Wairarapa valley and neighbourhood, concerning the letting their lands, and the dividing their rents, has materially altered the character of many who were once quiet and steady, and promised well. To such

a height did the ferment arise in August and September, that the two largest tribes of the Wairarapa valley very nearly fought. They are now somewhat more quiet, but the leaven is secretly working and spreading. In consequence of their conduct, upward of twenty of those who had been ringleaders in the matter were suspended from the Holy Communion at the last administration at Palliser Pay in November last, which they were fully expecting. Of the four principal Chiefs, with their tribes, residing more immediately about the Station – who had hitherto slighted every overture of the Gospel message – two, with their wives, relatives, and people, came over to the faith during the past winter, and have ever since been most exemplary in attendance upon the ordinances of religion: many of them have already voluntarily come forward as Candidates for Baptism. Of the remaining two Chiefs, the sons and relatives, and several of the people, of the one, and the near relatives and some of the people of the other, have also joined us. The heathen ranks are daily thinning. May God make those who leave them to be Christians in deed and in truth! The number of Communicants might be greatly increased, if any means could be devised by which the Christian Natives living in the many isolated villages – distant from those few places where the Lord's Supper is annually celebrated – particularly the aged, infirm, and poor, could partake thereof. Many, I fear, will never have that privilege.

We shall now introduce, from Mr. Colenso's Journals, an account of some

Interesting Cases of Baptism.

April 16, 1848: Lord's-day – This morning [at Te Kaikokirikiri] I baptized 31 persons – 9 men, 8 women, 5 boys, and 9 girls. A few facts of rather a peculiar nature concerning some of them deserve to be noticed.

First – The baptism of Te Korou, the principal Chief of the whole District of Upper Wairarapa, whose attention, by his own account, seems to have been first directed toward the Gospel in consequence of a conversation which I had with him upon my second visit here in 1845, when I found him ill, and gave him some medicine, which, under God, was blessed to his recovery. This conviction was subsequently strengthened through a remarkable dream which he had; since which he had been a regular attendant on Divine Service. In 1846 I married his daughter to a nice young man, both baptized; and, last year, baptized the fruit of that union. And now this morning the old Chief himself, his only son, and his very aged mother – who, though much bowed with age, is very healthy and of strong intellect – were admitted to that ordinance. A privileged fact of rare occurrence – I have not myself heard of a similar one in New Zealand – the baptizing of four generations, all in health, and nearly at one time, by one individual! The old woman with her bent back was a particularly interesting object: the shrill clearness of her voice, in her answers at the font, and her apparent sincerity of heart, seemed alike to strike all present.

Secondly – The baptism of the aged wife and family of Takitakitu, a determined Heathen Chief. His grown-up children had been some time Candidates for Baptism – the first who came forward being his daughter, whose name was entered in March 1846 – and last year his wife became a Candidate. As the time approached for my present visit, the father, Takitakitu, conversing with his family, besought them not to think of baptism and the Church: they replied, they could not do otherwise. At length he said, "Well, if you do all leave me, I will strangle myself." His eldest son, a married man, remarked, "That is just what Judas did, and now he is in hell." The family endeavoured to draw him over to the faith, but from that he shrunk with abhorrence. Seeing this, his wife said, "Just so, remain: stay as thou art, in order to enkindle the fire of Satan." His eldest son again and again remonstrated, but to no purpose. The father said, "You are all opposed, all angry, all teasing me." The son replied, "No, we wish you to believe." On my arrival, the wife and family came, as usual, to be instructed and examined. When Takitakitu found that his wife, his two elder sons, married daughter, son-in-law, and daughter-in-law, were to be baptized in the morning, and his two youngest children and grandson in the afternoon, of the Lord's-day, he was very much enraged. To the utter surprise of every one, however, he himself came early this morning to Campbell, the Native Teacher, and said he should now turn to Christ! that he had held out long enough; that his heart was a stone, and his ears had been deaf; but that now he should hold out no longer.

We were all glad to hear this; and, at my desire, Campbell brought him to me, and I encouraged him. This morning he witnessed the reception of his wife and family into the Church, and heard the Word preached for the first time. Attending, also, at Evening Service – though several stayed away to cook food, &c. – he witnessed the baptism of three of his little children and grandchildren. May God bless His holy word to his soul!

Thirdly – The number of youths, fourteen, all readers in the New Testament, who, dressed in clean European clothing, and each one clasping his New Testament to his bosom, presented a gratifying spectacle to the Christian. I could but believe, that the sight which we were privileged this day to behold was one on which the very angels of heaven were gazing with delight. May Christ, the great Shepherd of the sheep, graciously enable them to fulfil their vows! Amen.

Aug. 29, 1848 – This morning I went to Te Pokonao, according to arrangement, to baptize Wara – the mother of Noah Huke, a Native Teacher – an old woman and Candidate for Baptism, who has been long ill, and is now dying. I briefly questioned her through her son Noah, and, assembling the Teachers and others, I reminded them of Christ's gracious command (Matt. vii. ) and promise (John xiv. 13: xvi. 23), and called on Leonard, Noah – Wara's own son – and Richard Taki, to pray, I myself beginning. It was an affecting time: many wept: I could not refrain myself; particularly when Noah was pleading, in his simple, child-like way, for his dying parent. I doubt not that his prayer was heard. The present seemed to me to be powerfully illustrative of the case of the poor man who was borne by four into the gracious presence of the Saviour. I afterward baptized her, naming her Tabitha; and expressing my belief and hope that she would hear, the voice of the Son of man, commanding – yet more powerfully than that of St. Peter to her namesake – "Tabitha, arise!" Having again commended her soul to God, in the prayers of the Church, I left her.

16 Vide the "Church Missionary Record" for Oct. 1848, p. 216, and Nov. 1849, p. 255.

17 The entire population, it will be observed, is computed at between 6000 and 7000.

New-Zealand Mission.

NEW-ZEALAND MISSION.

WE conclude our review of this Mission, for the present, from p. 234 of our Number for October last.

WESTERN DISTRICT.

WANGANUI.

General View.

The Rev. R. Taylor continues perseveringly to carry on the work of evangelization in this District. At Putiki, the resident Station of the Missionary, there have been, on Sundays, two Native and two European Services, and, on Wednesdays and Fridays, evening meetings have been held with the Communicants and Candidates for Baptism. Mr. Taylor, in his Report for the half-year ending December 1848, thus writes –

I am thankful in being able to give a generally favourable report of my wide District. All are dwelling in peace, and, I think I may say, are more than usually attentive to the Means of Grace. The great increase of Communicants, and of Candidates for Baptism, is a very satisfactory proof that the great work is progressing. At no former period have I had so many at the Lord's Table, or received so many by Baptism into the Church. At Christmas, 709 commemorated a dying Saviour's love at Putiki; and, amongst those received into the Church, were some of the most influential Chiefs engaged in the late war.

The Wanganui District is one of great extent, stretching along the coast a distance of 130 miles, and into the interior from 100 to 200 miles. In this vast range of country Mr. Taylor has hitherto been the only Missionary; and, in his efforts to meet the spiritual wants of the Natives, has been continually engaged in long and fatiguing journeys along the coast to Waitotara, and up the Wanganui, Manganui-a-te-ao, and Manawatu rivers. Every now and then a native vil-

lage is selected, sometimes in one, sometimes in another part of the District, where it is understood that Mr. Taylor will be on a given day, and where all within a reasonable distance may assemble for instruction. These assemblages are generally of a most interesting character. We shall refer to some of them, as they are detailed in the Journals.

Visit to Hikurangi.

This Pa is situated on the Wanganui, and was visited by Mr. Taylor in September 1848. The particulars of this visit are thus related by him –

Sept. 27 – I left, to administer the Sacrament at Hikurangi, accompanied by Mrs. Taylor and Mr. Baker. The entire population of Putiki had preceded us the day before, so that there were not sufficient left to paddle my canoe. Some of the young men, however, found that out on reaching Tunuhaere, and a crew of eight came back for me. The day was showery, but we managed to reach Parikino for the night. The bank of the river there was quite picturesque. In the foreground a great number of canoes was drawn up, and beyond them was the encampment of those who had arrived thus far on their way to Hikurangi: their little tents, being formed of sheets and blankets of every hue, gave an enlivening effect to the landscape. We pitched our tent in a shed, as it turned out rainy.

Sept. 28 – Examining Candidates for Baptism, &c.

Sept. 29 – I found this morning that the river was flooded: the water had risen nearly eight feet, and covered all the low lands, so that the encampment on the bank of the river was compelled to be broken up during the night, and removed to a higher spot. The scene was very animated this morning when we started, so many canoes leaving at the same time. The rain, however, soon commenced: we had a heavy shower, accompanied with hail, and our canoe was so deeply laden that the water could scarcely be baled out as fast as it came in. On arriving at Koponga, I was obliged to lighten the canoe, by leaving three of our number to proceed by another. A little further on a large canoe from Hikurangi came to meet us. It had Henio, the Teacher of Pukehika, and Aperaniko, the Teacher of Hikurangi, on board. They shot past us, and then wheeled round and came alongside of us. They had come on purpose to meet me and take us on, as they feared the flood would hinder us from reaching our destination this day. The canoe had been the favourite one of Maketu. 18 It was about sixty or seventy feet long, and four or five feet wide, formed of one totara tree, 19 and manned by twenty-five men. I could not help thinking it remarkable that this canoe, belonging to the Chief who had formerly been so hostile to religion, and had openly cursed me as a Minister, should now be sent to fetch me in order to examine his own people for Baptism. The stream ran with great velocity, but the Natives pulled with such vigour as to overcome it, and we proceeded so rapidly, that we reached Hikurangi about 4 P.M., where, after some delay in waiting for my tent, which was left in my canoe, we finally got housed in a shed erected for me near the Church. We had a loud welcome given to us on landing, and found already a very large encampment formed, although none of the canoes from the coast had then arrived. I was obliged to have Service in the open air, on account of the number of people. They remained very quiet, although it was extremely cold and rainy. Afterward, I examined 64 Candidates for Baptism, all from Pukehika, which occupied me until a late hour. I find the number of Candidates is very great from every place. The reaction is general: all declare that they wish to devote the rest of their lives to God, and to live in obedience to the Christian faith. May they be enabled to do so!

Sept. 30 – I held Service in the open air with upward of 1000 persons. This large Congregation was very cheering. I felt strengthened to proclaim the Gospel, which appeared to be listened to with great attention. Afterward, I was occupied until the evening in examining Candidates for Baptism, having not only a great number of those who had been examined by me during my last journey up the river, but also a great number of fresh applicants; so many, indeed, that I found myself compelled to leave more than 100 unexamined, to their great disappointment. In the evening I held a

meeting with the Teachers, when many things for the improvement of the people were proposed, such as appointing magistrates amongst themselves; the giving up the use of putrid corn as food; the putting away all necromancers from among them; the appointing Teachers, &c. It was near 1 A.M. before the meeting terminated.

Oct. 1, 1848 – It was a cold, frosty night, but the morning was lovely: not a cloud was to be seen. My pulpit was carried out on a grassy plain near the Church, which was enclosed with the tents and sheds of my Congregation, built in continuous lines, so as to form a square. On one side was the Church,, and beyond it a lovely grove of karaka trees; 20 on the other side, a beautiful grassy slope, crowned with houses and people; in front, a mountain, forming an amphitheatre, running to the height of near 1000 feet, crowned with verdant grass and trees; and behind, a mountain range, rising abruptly from the banks of the river. Before me was a Congregation of fully 2000 in number. The Lesson for the day (Mark iv.) was very appropriate – Christ preaching to the multitude from the deck of a ship; from the calm surface of a lake, which, though hushed in deep repose while He proclaimed the Word of Life, afterward was milled with storm and tempest. I selected this subject for my text; and I trust I was enabled to speak a word in season. There was something peculiarly interesting in this assembly, it being the first re-union of the tribes which has taken place since the war. Many have assembled here who never before joined the Church. With them this has been the first acknowledgment of their faith in Christ, and this was the case with the great heathen Chiefs of this river; so that I cannot but regard it as a memorable day – one which will have a lasting effect upon these tribes.

After Morning Service, the Communicants, 440 in number, assembled in the square before the Church, which was too small to contain so many. Standing, therefore, at the door, I commenced the Sacramental Service, as far as the consecration of the elements, when half the number entered, and received the Sacrament: they then went out. and the other half took their place. Amongst them was my old friend Wirihana, of Pipiriki, who is perfectly blind. Whilst these were receiving the Sacrament, I caused those who did not partake to hold School with the unoccupied crowd.

After Service, I examined three more Candidates for Baptism, who were deeply grieved at being omitted in my yesterday's meeting, as they had long been on my books; so that I was obliged, though wearied, to give way. I accepted two of them, and then was busily employed in entering the names of infants until it was time for Evening Prayers.

I arranged my Candidates for Baptism, in number 120 adults and 40 children, in a double circle in front of the pulpit. In the middle was laid a poor woman, in nearly a dying state. I never baptized so many Chiefs at once. Among them were nearly all the chief leaders of the late war. It was an interesting sight to see them all kneeling in a large circle, dressed in their best, to be admitted as servants of the living God. I was much pleased with their reverential deportment. The sun had set before the Service was over.

I afterward visited the sick, and baptized a poor dying boy. It is most distressing to see how the children suddenly droop and die: there are several in an almost hopeless state. In the evening I met a number of young men from the late hostile Pas, who had tattooed themselves and fallen into sin. I addressed them affectionately on their evil course, and heard each one promise to give up his evil way, and then restored them to Service, concluding with committing them in prayer to the Lord, that they might be strengthened in their good resolutions. It was 10 P.M. before I concluded this day's work.

Celebration of Christmas at Putiki.

Christmas season, the midsummer of New Zealand, is always observed by the assembling of the Christian Natives at Putiki. The Christmas reunion of 1848 seems to have been marked by circumstances of peculiar encouragement.

Dec. 21 – This is our longest day, and was very warm. In the morning I examined upward of 80 persons for baptism, of whom I accepted nearly 60. I was much pleased with the simple faith displayed by several of the old people who were Candidates. I was assisted by Mr. Baker, and we were occupied the whole of the morning. In the evening I had a very large Congregation, and afterward

held a meeting of the Candidates for the Sacrament; but the number was so great that I was obliged to divide the District, taking those only from Pukehika to Tunuhaere, who completely filled the Church. There was some noise and confusion on entering, which caused me to speak most strongly on the impropriety of Candidates for the Lord's Table acting in such an irreverent way. From that time to the termination of the meeting, which was not until after 10 P.M., nothing could exceed the quietness and decorum of this large assembly, who walked out without the least noise, although, from the excessive heat of so great a crowd, two poor women fainted. I received 267 of those who came, and rejected a woman whom I noticed speaking loudly in the Church.

Dec. 22, 1848 – This morning I had the Service outside in my field, where I had the pulpit carried, the Natives being too many to be contained in the Church. Afterward I examined Candidates for Baptism, and administered medicine, until the evening. It is wonderful to behold such a reaction among the people. I feel jealous of admitting so many into the outward Church, and at the same time afraid of refusing them, when they thus come confessing their faith in Christ, and supporting the declaration by a consistent walk and conversation. Many were very old, some in an almost dying state, and one was deaf and dumb. After the Evening Prayers, I addressed the remainder of the Candidates for the Sacrament, which occupied me until 11 P.M. I have accepted the large number of 672. It is a very gratifying consideration that I have such a body of persons living in my District, who are so consistent, that even the most censorious cannot allege any thing against their moral or religious conduct; for such is the closeness of the examination, that, if it can be proved that any have even given the hand to a known sinner, he is rejected. I have declined receiving those who were baptized at Pukehika until another Sacrament, otherwise the number of Communicants would have been much greater.

Yesterday and to-day the Settlers held their first races, which were attended by the entire European population, and some strangers; but one of the number remarked it as very strange, that, in so large an assemblage of Natives, so very few should have been influenced by curiosity to go and see them. The Natives, indeed, have viewed them as an open profanation of this season of our Saviour's birth, and thus have not been drawn away by this European novelty. I could not help contrasting it with the different way in which this season is celebrated by the Natives. Whilst perhaps near 700 Europeans were assembled at these races, on one side of the Wanganui river, and many of them passing their time in drinking, swearing, and gaming; exactly opposite, nearly 4000 of the lately barbarous Natives had congregated from all parts, some near 150 miles distant, to celebrate a Saviour's birth.

Dec. 24 – I commenced Service a little after 7 A.M. It was a glorious day – not a cloud to be seen; but it was a still more glorious sight to see before me upward of 3000 Natives uniting in the solemn Service of our Church, and listening with deep attention to the Word of God. Around the pulpit stood my band of fellow-labourers, the Native Teachers present – no inconsiderable company, being upward of 100 in number – and amongst them were assembled nearly all the principal Chiefs of this District, gaily dressed in their newly-acquired European clothing.

The Lesson for the day afforded a most appropriate text – Paul's confession before Felix, that, after the way they called heresy, so worshipped he the God of his fathers. After the Sermon, about 360 partook of the Sacrament. The heat was very great, as the Church was quite full. Two poor sick women communicated. They were laid at the rail of the Lord's Table.

During the Evening Service I baptized 162, including nearly 40 children. The sun had set before the Service was terminated.

Dec. 25: Christmas-day – This was a fine day, but very hot, the thermometer being 74 in the shade. I addressed my large Congregation from the Morning Lesson (Luke ii. 14), and afterward administered the Sacrament to about 350, making a grand total of 707, the largest number who have ever assembled in this land to receive the Sacrament.

I called over the list of Teachers for the ensuing year, 150 in number, and also the list of Chiefs who are recognised by the Natives as magistrates – there are about 30; and then I concluded with a discourse from Titus, the Second Lesson for the day, which was most appropriate; exhorting them who had believed in God to be careful to maintain good works, as the most

effectual way of proving their love to Christ, and faith in His salvation. Thus the Services of this interesting Meeting terminated.

Improving Habits of the Natives.

In our Reports of the other Districts we have referred to the progress in civilization which is manifest among the Natives. In the southern Districts the same tokens of improvement may be traced, more particularly in their houses.

Dec. 11, 1848 – I visited Tamehana, Rauparaha's son. His house, which is ornamented in the native style, is divided into three rooms, which are very neatly finished off by an English carpenter. The house is about thirty-three feet long by eighteen wide, well erected, and finished in the native style. The supports are broad totara posts, painted in native patterns, white and red; the intervals between the posts are pannelled with white and black lattice-work, very pretty; the ceiling also being painted, and finished with reeds. There are two centre posts in the house, the lower part of each being carved in the grotesque figure of a Native: so also the posts of the verandah. I found Tamehana, his wife, and a friend, at breakfast. The table was covered with a very clean cloth. They had tea, bread and butter, both the latter of their own make, and also fried pork chops. They were dressed quite in the European manner, nor could the most fastidious have detected any impropriety in their behaviour. Indeed, there is actually more refinement of manner than is ordinarily met with amongst our own countrymen. I could not but notice Ruta, his wife, who really was quite ladylike in all she did. They have been honoured by the company of Governors, Captains, Judges, and all the great men of the colony. I was also much pleased with Martyn's house, which, though far less pretending than the other, was still a picture of neatness and cleanliness. I saw his dairy, churn, milk-pans, &c, all kept in the greatest order.

June 2, 1849 – I went down to the Pa this morning to see my Natives. George King showed me his new house, which is to be a ware wakawa (court-house) as well. It is really a noble building. The verandah is supported on carved pillars, and the inside is beautifully ornamented. This building was erected by the joint labour of nearly all the Wanganui and neighbouring tribes, and is a great mark of respect to this Chief. Indeed, in the native estimation, there are only three grand signs of chieftainship – a carved house, an embroidered garment, and a green jade mere. 21

Visit to Rangatapu.

Sept. 9 – A. lovely morning. We were obliged to hold Service in the open air, on account of the multitude, which completely filled the space before the Church, full 100 feet square; and the sloping sides gave all the people an opportunity of seeing the Minister. In front was a deep precipice, with the Wai-ngongoro flowing beneath; and beyond, a lofty cliff, which shut out the view of Taranaki with its hoary head. The scene was beautiful, and the Congregation most attentive. In alluding to the light emanating from Judea, and gradually spreading over the world until it at last reached this remote country, I compared it to the morning sunbeams, striking first the top of the mountain, and gradually descending and illuming its sides, then the low-lands, and, lastly, the whole surface of the earth. Afterward, I arranged the Communicants in rows round the Church, which I found was the easiest way of administering the elements, and with the least confusion. I went five times round, and 462 communicated. The Church was very hot. After the Service was concluded I distributed all the books I had brought with me to the Teachers, as, a supply of fresh food for the soul.

Sept. 10 – I heard my Natives having prayers by 4 A.M., and before it was light most of them were on their way back. I also arose by candle-light, and held Service with the Natives of Rangatapu, to whom I preached on their privileges as children of God, and solemnly exhorted them to show, by holiness and purity of life, that they were the children of God. I married two couples, and then left, accompanied by some of the Natives.

Prayer-Meetings: their influence for good.

Sept. 14 – At our Prayer-meeting this evening one prayed that his sins might not sink his soul down, like a stone, into the abyss; but that, through grace, it might float like a piece of pummice – the prevailing stone at Wanganui. John

Williams said that Abraham sought for a permanent abode, but, though one was promised his seed, be did not obtain one for himself: so, it was not for the body we should look for a lasting abode, since it was only a perishing body, dwelling in a perishing world; it was for the soul we should seek an enduring habitation, that when the body perished it might have a new and lasting mansion to live in. One mourned that his Minister sowed much seed amongst the rocks, the hard rocks, which was thus wasted, as it did not spring up; but he prayed that I might be enabled to sow all the seed in good ground, that all might bring forth fruit to perfection. I think that a perceptible blessing rests on these Prayer-meetings, and that they act as a great check to the evils arising from bad European example. During my last journey to the Central Committee, at all the Prayer-meetings throughout my District express supplication was made in my behalf that I might return in peace.

Peace on Earth.

Nov. 4, 1849 – We had a very full Congregation, and all very attentive: 107 partook of the Lord's Supper, and amongst them was Tamati Wiremu, who for the first time met Panapa, the murderer of his father Ngarangi, but now, as servants of the same Lord, they both bowed their knees together in prayer. Tamati appeared to be greatly moved, but he went and gave his hand to him, who, but for the Gospel, would have been his mortal enemy.

Native Judges.

Nov. 26 – Several Natives from Pipiriki arrived. They were sent by Pehi to ask George King and the other Kai-whakawa – Native Assessors – to go up to Pipiriki, seventy miles, to try a case relative to a dispute between him and another about the possession of a piece of land. They immediately agreed to go, and at once made their preparations and left. In former days this quarrel would, in all probability, have caused bloodshed; but now, the principal Chief of the river is content to submit the cause to a court of Native Judges. I see every day reasons to be satisfied with the good results of this new system.

Visit to a Sick Chief.

Dec. 10 – Wiremu Kingi Rangitauira came down the river, very ill. I went to see him, and inquired what was his disease. He said it was old age; that he could not expect to be otherwise, but his soul was light; that had he not been a believer he should have been dead before this. The calm, contented way in which he spoke, was a satisfactory token of his spiritual state. Do all in the Name of the Lord Jesus.

We had very few at the Morning Service, all having gone to fish. On these occasions they start before it is light, and when they arrive at their fishing-ground they assemble all the canoes together, and have prayers before they commence fishing; thus invoking, as it were, the Divine blessing on their labours, that they may be enabled to throw their nets on the right side. Even in their heathen state they never thought of hunting or fishing without first offering up their prayers to gods.

We conclude our review of this Station by extracts from Mr. Taylor's

Report for the Year ending Dec. 1849.

By the Divine mercy we have been permitted uninterruptedly to enjoy the blessings of peace, and the Natives generally have made a steady advance in the habits of civilized life. The Pa at Putiki has been laid out by the Government, at the request of its inhabitants, as a town; and they have destroyed the fortifications and pulled down their houses, wherever they interfered with the plan: this they would not have done had they not reposed confidence in the Europeans, and been really desirous of living in peace with them.

The houses and fences now being erected are of a more permanent character, and superior in workmanship to those of former times. Such a decided desire of improvement, and efforts to secure it, warrant the hope that a permanent change for good is taking place; and being sustained in their adoption of European manners by the example of an increasing body of Settlers, there will be little fear of their again relapsing into their former customs.

In taking a view of the religious state of the Natives in the District, I have to report, that they are not only generally living in a quiet and peaceable way, but that they are also using every means to ensure the continuance of it, by the appointment of magistrates among themselves, to whose decision even the highest Chiefs have been content to submit; and thus already several quarrels have been

amicably terminated, which in former times would have inevitably led to war and bloodshed.

The number of baptisms during this year has been less than in the preceding one: still it has been considerable; and I have the pleasure of reporting an increase in the number of my Communicants, as many as 776 having attended the Lord's Table last Christmas-day. Although I am unable to report any signal instances of spiritual advancement, beyond the death of a few whose faith supported them in the last trial, still, the general consistent conduct of the whole may be adduced as a satisfactory evidence that this branch of the Lord's vineyard is not altogether fruitless.

18 This Chief was killed in an engagement with the British troops in 1847.

19 Podocarpus.

20 Corynocarpus laevigata.

21 Vide pp. 276 and 282 of our Number for December 1847.

Church Missionary Record

[New Zealand sections only]

1854

[This book was digitised in partnership with Auckland War Memorial Museum]
http://www.aucklandmuseum.com

Recent Intelligence.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

Ordination of Missionaries.

On Trinity Sunday last, the Rev. E. Ashwell was admitted to Priests' Orders, and Rota Waitoa, a native teacher, to Deacons' Orders, by the Bishop of New Zealand.

Recent Intelligence.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

New-Zealand Mission – The Rev. A. Stock, and the Rev. L. Williams and Mrs. Williams, arrived safely at Auckland on the 30th of November (Vol. xxiv. p. 221).

Recent Intelligence.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

New-Zealand Mission – The Rev. R. Burrows and family left Auckland in July last, for Sydney, on account of ill-health; and left that place on the 13th of January last, arriving in London on the 6th of May.

Ordination of Missionaries. New-Zealand Mission – On Sunday, December the 18th, the Rev. J. Morgan was admitted to Priest's Orders, and Mr. C. Baker, Catechist, to Deacon's Orders, by the Bishop of New Zealand.

Home Proceedings.

HOME PROCEEDINGS.

Departure of Missionaries. New-Zealand Mission – Mr. H. Ireland embarked at Gravesend, June the 19th, on board the "Joseph Fletcher," for Auckland.

Contribution List.

CONTRIBUTION LIST.

... for New Zealand, a Parcel of Clothes from M. I. H.; a Parcel of Clothing from the Ladies' Working Party at Rainham by Mrs. Cole; some Clothing from a Lady in Germany; a Bale of Clothing for Waikato, value 12l. from the Penge Working Party, by Mrs. Ridgeway;...

New-Zealand Mission.

NEW-ZEALAND MISSION.

WE resume our account of this Mission from p. 292 of our Number for December last.

General Remarks.

The profession of Christianity may now be said, with some slight exception, to be universalized over the island. Yet much of this is only superficial; and if those Missionary agencies by which the work was originally begun, and has been hitherto sustained, were to be unexpectedly withdrawn, might soon be erased. It needs to be more deeply graven on the native mind before we can be assured of its permanency; and attention needs now to be directed to the adoption and energetic prosecution of such efforts as may serve to consolidate the results of Missionary labour, and so hasten the period when the Church Missionary Society, having fulfilled its responsibilities, may be enabled to withdraw, with the happy conviction that a work has been accomplished of a durable character, which, with the blessing of God, will not fail to be perpetuated. Our space precludes the possibility of any lengthened review of this Mission; and we can only introduce some pointed extracts from such reports and journals as have reached us.

Arrival of Missionaries – Ordination of the first native.

We are happy to report the arrival of the Rev. W. L. Williams and Mrs. Williams, and the Rev. Arthur Stock, at Auckland, in December of last year. Mr. Williams will assist his father, Archdeacon W. Williams, at Turanga, on the East Coast. Mr. Stock succeeds the Rev. S. Williams at Otaki, who proceeds to occupy Ahuriri, in the Eastern District. To this we have to add an important fact in the history of the New-Zealand Mission – the ordination of the first native. He had been eleven years under tuition at St. John's College, and for the last few months was under the special instruction of the Rev. G. A. Kissling. The following letter from Archd. Brown, dated July 18, 1853, refers to the event –

On Trinity Sunday the first native teacher was admitted to deacons' orders. I consider him a very humble, devoted Christian, one who loves our Saviour, who is fully acquainted with all the leading doctrines of the gospel, and deeply feels the reality and blessedness of those truths that he is going forth to proclaim to his countrymen. Follow him with your prayers, that he may be kept humble and faithful. The ordination service was most solemn and affecting: it seemed the realization of many an anxious hope, and many a fervent prayer which your Missionaries had offered in days when all around was darkness; but when, by the eye of faith, they could see in words of light, beyond the louring cloud, "He must reign – every knee shall bow." May this first-fruits be followed by an abundant harvest!

In a letter lately received from Mr. Vidal, Secretary of the Mission, he writes –

The natives in the Eastern District, where the Rev. Rota Waitoa is located, propose to build, out of their own resources, three wooden churches, and have written to Mr. Kissling and others for the gift of saws for sawing their timber. Hitherto, where they have had European pastors, they have appeared to consider that they should not be called upon to contribute for churches or buildings, and that the European pastors should themselves raise funds for these purposes. It would seem, therefore, that they are inclined to look upon native pastors as differently situated, and as requiring their aid. I consider this another encouragement in favour of a native pastorate.

Northern District.

KAIKOHE.

Our Missionary, the Rev. R. Davis, during the year 1853 has suffered much domestic sorrow in connexion with the prolonged illness of Mrs. Davis, and has been

able to extend his visits to such places only as were within brief distances. Kaikohe, Mangakahia, Otaua, and Matarawa, are the villages under his care. In the superintendence of them he has been ably helped by the native teachers, many of whom he describes as being tried and steady men, of long standing and experience. The congregations include, according to his enumeration, 536 individuals, of whom 250 are communicants. Mr. Davis thus concludes his

Report for the year ending Dec. 31, 1853.

In reviewing the labours of the past year, there appears much to humble, something to encourage, and all to be thankful for. We cannot doubt that the visible border of the church has been somewhat extended during the year; yet we have still to mourn and lament that the work of grace does not appear to deepen in the bulk of the Christian natives, so as to produce fruit to the glory of God. There are but few who walk in the light of life so as to receive comfort and enjoyment from it. This want on the part of the natives of progress in the divine life often gives rise to saddening and painful reflection, and can never prove satisfactory to the Missionary mind.

KAITAIA.

Report for the year ending Dec. 31, 1853.

This district, the northernmost of our stations, continues to be superintended by the Rev. J. Matthews and Mr. W. G. Puckey. In this, as well as in the Kaikohe district, successive epidemics prevailed throughout the year: few, either native or European, escaped, and many died. The annual report of the Missionaries, to which we now turn, refers thus to this state of suffering –

For several months together messengers on horseback arrived daily from the more distant parts of our district for medicine and advice, and other aid. Many have been the opportunities thus afforded of sowing the good seed of the word "beside all waters." We record it with feelings of humble gratitude to the God of all mercies, that our distribution of medicines and other aids, which funds for the sick afforded, have been greatly blessed, for we hardly know of a fatal case when timely aid was sought. The collection for the sick this year amounted to 16l.; and this is showing them, that in loving Christ and keeping His commandment, "Love one another," there is great reward, even in this life.

The statements which our Missionaries are enabled to make of the general condition of the people will be found on the whole satisfactory, and exhibit their progress in industrial and commercial occupations.

With regard to the outward condition of our natives, we have to report of their well-being. They are industrious, and their little properties are increasing; and many of them, as well they may, frequently remark to us how merciful the Lord has been to them, and blessed them, both in regard to their bodies and souls. Few people amongst the heathen have been so liberally dealt with as the New Zealanders; and surely the grace of the Lord has never been more magnified than in their conversion. The savage – "the strong man armed," has been literally overcome and spoiled. The armour of superstition, wherein the strong man trusted, has been, in thousands of cases, taken away; and although Satan is ever trying some new mode to ensnare either the once-escaped, or those not yet liberated, Christ, the far stronger one, "must reign, till He hath put all enemies under His feet."

We feel that the greatest danger now to the spiritual progress of our people arises from the opening prospects of their obtaining wealth. From their well-known honesty, they have been accommodated with goods on trust to a considerable amount. This has been the constant practice of the traders in the neighbourhood, to ensure the produce of wheat and other articles. We have felt it our duty, for the sake of their spiritual welfare, remembering the injunction, "Owe no man any thing," strenuously to oppose this system, and we hope with good effect. One of the appointed native magistrates came and asked to have papers printed on this subject, which he circulated amongst store keepers.

Our people, who have been rather late

in obtaining vessels to take their produce to market, are now in possession of two, and are in treaty for three more; so that they will soon have the full privilege of selling it to the best advantage.

We are thankful for the help which the native teachers have rendered us, or, rather, the cause of Christ, during the year. They have regularly attended the teachers' meetings on Saturdays, which we trust have been greatly blessed to them, and, through them, to their people.

Nor are they without encouragement as to those spiritual results which can alone content a true Missionary.

We have met with much encouragement in our labours during the year. The daughter of the pious chief and teacher, Meinata, after three years of great suffering, died a happy death in the Lord. She was generally shy, and said little; but when death drew near, she spoke out boldly her experience, so that her parents were astonished. However ill this child – of eleven years – might be, she would be carried to church; and many times we have witnessed her mother patiently holding her daughter on her back during service. The daughter would say to her mother, "Is the service for others, and not for me?"

A few months since, we visited a native living eight miles from us, to whom affliction had been sanctified. He said, "It is my desire to give myself, body and soul, to Christ;" and just before we arrived he had been talking to a Christian native. He said, "I have been striving with Christ." The visitor asked him, "What has been your strife?" He replied, "I asked Christ if He had not said, 'Come unto me, all ye that labour and are heavy laden?'" A few minutes before he expired we asked him what Christ's supping with us meant. He said, it was a token for good.

We are thankful to report that we have met with refreshing encouragement at Ahipara, in the reception of the gospel by principal people who were once much opposed to us, and in favour of Popery. The chiefs of the Kohanga have built a handsome room, with glass windows, for a school-house and chapel. There are now three schools kept at Ahipara and the Kohanga: two of these are kept personally by Mr. Puckey, and one by our oldest native teacher, Himiona, and his wife. There is also another school commenced at Okahu, under Meinata's superintendence.

We are happy to find that the Kaitaia natives are beginning to be sensible of the great need of Christian education for their children. The backwardness which exists on this point is one of the great defects discernible in the infant church of New Zealand.

We are labouring to excite all our natives to have schools in all the villages. We hope that some little improvement is taking place in this respect. The parents can see such a difference between those children who attend school and those who do not, that when we lately said to a chief, who had three children in our school, "Some of your children talk of coming home," he immediately said, "Keep them there: what do they want here? what is there here for them?" Another, who had two sons, one of them with Mr. Dudley, said, "Our children think they may be as ignorant as their parents, but it must not be so. Our children must be kept at school." We hope that good will increase from these few witnesses of the value of education.

The communicants throughout the district number about 300. But the fact of Mr. Matthews being only in Deacons' orders interferes very seriously with his usefulness, leaving his people entirely dependent on the visits of a clergyman in Priests' orders for the administration of the Lord's-supper, and depriving many, who are prevented from attending by age or distance, of an ordinance which would be to the strengthening and refreshing of their souls.

Middle District.

AUCKLAND.

Report for the year 1853.

This report, by the Rev. G. A. Kissling, contains an able analysis of the condition of the New Zealanders as a people, the measure of their attainments, and the deficiencies under which they labour. We request the attention of our readers to it, as it is of first importance that we should have cor-

rect views of things as they are in New Zealand. To convey to us such a correct estimate, the Missionaries who have accompanied this people in all their changes from barbarism to comparative civilization, are of all men best qualified.

When a whole nation, so darkly stained and so deeply degraded by vice and superstition as the New Zealanders once were, adopts, almost simultaneously, the Christian worship, professes to believe its sublime doctrines, and assumes to regulate itself by its holy precepts, one can easily conceive that there should be much of tares mixed up with the solid grain; and this mixture of nominal and real converts appears on no occasion more clearly than when they are out of the eye, or no longer under the restraint, of their respective teachers. Such is evidently the case in Auckland, to which the natives from all parts of New Zealand continually and numerously resort. In this busy scene of life – where, on the one hand, the god of mammon, the lusts of the eye and the flesh, and the pride of life, hold forth their diversified attractions, drawing into the vortex of fatal influence men of all classes, and races, and creeds; and where, on the other hand, "the truth as it is in Jesus" is faithfully preached – our baptized natives find a touchstone for the genuineness of their conversion; or, as it were, a balance to weigh the strength of their faith and the sincerity of their profession. If there be no greater joy to a minister of Christ than to see his spiritual children walk in the truth, there can, on the other hand, be no greater grief to him than to see them making shipwreck of their faith, and falling one after another into apostasy.

I would not willingly or needlessly pain you by alluding to the profaneness with which some treat the things of God, who once appeared to appreciate them very highly; nor disgust you by describing the shamelessness of their carnal indulgences, or their growing sins of drunkenness, and neglect of the means of grace, though brought before the very doors of their tents. The spirit of avarice, and the ascendancy of worldliness as their outward condition improves, have almost become proverbial. Over these things the servants of God have to mourn, to pray, and to watch with the utmost constancy and care. The fact seems to be, that the people of these islands, on their first reception of the word of God, formed as it were a heterogeneous mass, of which it was most difficult to discriminate; but its features have now become more distinct by clearer light, and the precious gradually separates from the vile. In other parts of Christ's vineyard the early converts have to go through the ordeal of persecution, or endure other afflictions, to evince their faith, and purify their hearts. In New Zealand, the sunshine of prosperity has become the season of sifting. This is infinitely more dangerous to the people just rescued from the power of sin and Satan, and requires no ordinary solicitude on the part of the Missionaries in the field. But at the very time when our body ought to be strong in the Lord, and prepared with open countenance to meet every danger, and to seize on every advantage to strengthen the stakes of this infant church, Satan has made a breach upon us, and sifted us, so that we have to bow down our heads, and seek in dust and ashes God's forgiving and healing grace. This picture receives an additional gloom from the consideration, that all those besetting sins above alluded to tend directly to a rapid diminution of this noble race. Their internal discords and civil wars reduce from day to day their strength. A visitation of an epidemic – the influenza in its worst type – has come upon the whole population, and swept many away. Either imprudent conduct, or too eager exertions to benefit by the present prosperity of the country, or other untoward circumstances, have, during the last twelve months, brought more than a hundred of them to a watery grave on the several parts of the coast. We cannot otherwise look upon these facts than with feelings of greatest anxiety and gloomy anticipation. There are, however, some bright rays in this dark but living picture, which relieve the eye and cheer the heart of those who are engaged in this work of faith and love.

Many of those old warriors, who formerly wielded their deadly weapons among less numerous or unfortified tribes, are now departing in triumph from the church militant to the saints in glory; or, while their silvery hair and glittering eyes bespeak the peaceful and happy spirit that fills their souls, they are effectual fellow-helpers in the gospel, strengthening the things that remain, or are ready to die. Young men, likewise, are coming forward to be prepared for teachers, in order to form new schools, and conduct them with efficiency among their own

people. One of them, the long companion of the Bishop during his various journeys, has been ordained, and is now labouring at my former station in Hicks' Bay. He is no doubt an humble and faithful child of God, seeking to do the work of his Divine Master with zeal and devotion. A native teacher from Otaki has been placed in my charge, to be prepared for the ministry against the return of the bishop from England.

Mr. Kissling also communicates to us the following information concerning the girls'-school at Auckland, which is under his and Mrs. Kissling's special charge –

Thirty-four girls are under instruction, some of whom we hope will become eventually matrons in similar establishments, under the blessing of God. Six of them have been lately confirmed, giving every reason to hope that they earnestly and faithfully ratified the covenant made between God and them in their infancy, in the spirit of repentance and faith. One girl, about fourteen years of age, was lately brought under our roof, attended by circumstances which are worthy of notice. She is an orphan of a great chief in the northern part of the island, whither whalers frequently resort after a cruise. Her distant relatives wished to place her on those vessels for most unworthy purposes, to gain their sordid object of filthy lucre. A humane friend, being apprised of their intention, took her away in the night in a little vessel, and brought her into school, where, as in an asylum, she rejoices to have escaped the snare of the fowler.

The report concludes with the following notice of the congregation at St. Barnabas, &c. –

The native congregations at St. Barnabas have, as usual, much fluctuated during the year, in proportion to the number of the visiting parties to Auckland. Mr. Wilson, myself, and native teachers, have been attending the morning and evening service at the native hostelry; but we all had cause to complain on account of the apathy and worldliness of its inmates. Mr. Baker, also, has occasionally visited them, as well as the hospital, during his stay in Auckland preparatory to his receiving holy orders. His reading with me several hours almost every day has no doubt been profitable to us both, and it gave me no ordinary pleasure to present such an old fellow-labourer for ordination. With renewed strength we may hope he will become a further blessing as a minister of the Eastern District. I baptized six adults and twelve children during the year.

The Rev. J. A. Wilson's Report for 1833.

Mr. Wilson has forwarded the following report of that portion of the Auckland district which is under his charge. It will be seen that this district is now of a mixed character, containing a mingled population of Europeans and Maories, and that Mr. Wilson's attention is necessarily directed to both sections. At the same time he is unable single-handed to meet satisfactorily the requirements of the district, and he urges the need there exists for well-qualified native teachers.

I regret to commence this report by stating the difficulty which has arisen in visiting that portion of the Auckland district committed to my charge, owing chiefly to the increase of wages, and which has prevented my visiting the various islands, &c, as often as I should otherwise have done. My chief exertions have been directed to the settlements on the island of Waiheke. I have also visited Taupo, Kaipara, Mahurangi, Matakaua, and the island of Kauwau. When residing in Auckland, I have visited the villages of Pukake, Puketapapa, and Orake; as also the jail, the hospital, and the native hostelry. One of the greatest deficiencies in this district is the want of proper chapels. The few which remain are of the worst description, and are fast hastening to decay, two having been destroyed during the present year. There are at present numbers of Europeans scattered through this part of the country, many of whom have families; and as these have no means of any spiritual instruction, I have never willingly passed them by, but have visited them, have carried such Bibles and Tracts as I have been able to procure, and have baptized their children. Nor have these attentions interfered with my primary duty towards the aborigines. Though the general features of this district are by no means so satisfactory as could be wished, they are nevertheless more encouraging than at the close of the last year. The people generally assemble in

greater numbers on the Sabbath, and, in fine weather, few absent themselves. There are also few Papists amongst them, and some of these have joined the congregations during the past year. The great difficulty connected with this people is their exposure to temptations owing to their locality, and the proximity of the islands, &c, to Auckland; and I feel persuaded that the greatest blessing which, at the present juncture, could be conferred upon them, would be a few well-qualified and zealous native teachers, "men able to teach others also," and who, by their life and doctrine, would commend the gospel of Christ to their countrymen, by walking worthy of their vocation. Two or three such men attached to this district, who might be placed at Waiheke and Taupo, would afford every encouragement to anticipate the most favourable results.

HAURAKI.

Native welcome and feast at Koputauaki, near Coromandel Harbour.

We have received from the Rev. T. Lanfear the following account of a native gathering, on the occasion of a feast given by one tribe to another; reminding us of times now past in the history of the New-Zealand Mission, and of customs which have nearly faded away –

Aug. 2, 1853 – After breakfast I found the people preparing to receive Ngatipaowa, the tribe on whose account the feast was to take place. Finding that, according to custom, they were to be welcomed with a war-dance, I withdrew to some distance, that I might not afford it the countenance of my presence. It is pleasant, however, to observe, that if Christianity has not abolished this savage custom, it has at least corrected it, it being no longer performed in a state of nudity, as formerly. In performing, the two stand over against each other in compact ranks of about three deep, in which position they spring with a dancing movement, but without advancing or retreating, and in regular time, which is measured by the war-whoop, a cry perfectly different from any thing which might be expected from the human voice, and more like the roar of some terrific beast, or the laboured snortings of the locomotive. To return. The morning was exceedingly fine, and though August here corresponds with February in your hemisphere, it might have vied with any day of August there. I ascended a hill in order to view the scene and could not but be gratified with the prospect. The light morning breeze scarcely ruffled the surface of the peaceful sea, studded at no great distance with small wooded islands. Already, within the bay, and fast approaching the shore, was a fleet of thirty canoes, all moving abreast, and followed by others, with several small sailing vessels yet further behind. On the shore stood a large party of natives, waving their garments in token of welcome, and prepared to greet them on arrival in the manner already described. On leaving my position, I could not help thinking that the scene I had just witnessed might have furnished no bad subject for an artist.

Aug. 3 – After service, &c, I went out to look at the feast prepared by our natives for Ngatipaowa. It consisted of three thousand baskets of potatos and kumera, with eighty fine hogs laid upon them, and four casks of tobacco. In the evening I again held service, preached, and afterwards conversed with the natives.

TAUPIRI.

We have the satisfaction of announcing that the Rev. B. Ashwell was admitted to Priests' Orders, by the Bishop of New Zealand, on Trinity Sunday of last year. It is necessary to realize the crippled position of a Missionary only in Deacons' Orders, and yet in charge of an immense district where Christian profession is advancing, and Christian congregations are requiring all the aid that can be afforded them, that they may go forward from an infantile condition to one of consolidation and maturity, in order to understand the increased effectiveness with which he finds himself invested on his admission to full orders. Mr. Ashwell's report of his district is on the whole satisfactory.

Report for the year ending Dec. 1853.

It is with feelings of thankfulness to a gracious God that I now report the evidence of His blessing upon the Taupiri station, in the consistent lives and happy deaths of several of the native teachers, who have for many years laboured faithfully in this district. The principal chief of Tukopoto, the pa at Taupiri,

died most triumphantly. When near death, he exclaimed, "If God be for us, who can be against us?" The account of his last hours I forwarded to the Secretaries in June last; 22 also those of Samuel Wahapa, teacher at Rangiriri, who died suddenly, soon after exhorting the people to "watch and pray, for we know not the hour when the Son of man cometh." 23 The happy death of Daniel Uira has afforded much comfort: he was my fellow-labourer and faithful companion in my many journeys soon after the formation of the Waikato station. The remembrance of his cheerful disposition, persevering; labours, many trials, and their happy issue, affords joy even whilst sorrowing his loss. He died as he was entreating his younger brother and cousin to forsake their sins and fly to Christ. The death of Jeremiah, teacher at Wahi, was equally encouraging: his last words to the people around him were, "Be faithful to Christ! oh, be faithful unto death!" Surely we have abundant cause to "thank God, and take courage." To Him alone be all the glory! The congregations at the outposts have increased, whilst those at Taupiri have decreased. The soil having been exhausted by constant cultivation, the natives have removed down the river.

In March last the number of scholars at the Taupiri boarding-school was seventy-seven. I have, however, been obliged to dismiss some, and refuse to admit others, from want of funds. The natives have given a block of good land at Pepepe, containing 1385 acres, for the support of the school, for which a government grant has been issued under the new regulation, and a kindred institution is now formed at Pepepe for native teachers, who, I trust, will render the land available, by cultivation, for the support of both institutions. The latter has been commenced without the assistance of the Society or the government; and the prayers of the friends of the Society are earnestly entreated, that it may prosper, as the permanent maintenance of the Taupiri schools must eventually depend upon its success. Twenty acres of land are already under cultivation. The present number of scholars at Taupiri is fifty, and of native teachers at Pepepe ten.

OTAWHAO.

Education – Native liberality.

The following brief extracts from a letter of the Rev. J. Morgan's, dated Nov. 3, 1853, bring out several points of importance. It is very encouraging to find the natives coming forward with liberal grants of land for the support of schools. Several instances of this have occurred in various localities – Otaki, Waikato, &c. – and we rejoice to find that in this and the adjoining district of Taupiri the same movement is going forward. The boarding-schools in Mr. Morgan's district are now in an advanced state; but then comes the inquiry, which he pointedly presses, by whom are they to be conducted, for it is impossible for the Missionary, who has a large district on his hands, to charge himself with their superintendence.

The block given up at Otawhao for my school, when surveyed, proved to be 870 acres; so that, with the land granted by Sir G. Grey, part of which was a gift from the natives to the Church Missionary Society, three years ago, and a small piece since given, we have now at Otawhao nearly 1100 acres of some of the finest land in New Zealand. I believe the bishop and governor consider that district as the garden of New Zealand. Here, then, we have one of the finest estates in the island at our command for school purposes. When this estate is brought under grass, and stocked, it ought to support, clothe, and educate, a school of 300 children.

Now arises a serious and important question. We are preparing for the opening of the female Maori branch, to be united to our half-caste school at the Mission station; and then, D. V., we shall prepare for the Maori male school on the estate of 870 acres, half a mile from the Otawhao Mission station. The important question then is, who are to teach these schools? I am quite willing to give up, if the Parent Committee approve of it, my undivided time to the schools; but the Parent Committee will agree with me when I say that I cannot alone, single-handed, conduct those schools and also attend to the ministerial and pastoral

duties of a district seventy miles in length. We cannot procure, in New Zealand, suitable masters for our schools. Our great want is trained and married schoolmasters from England. We must either have them, or conduct the schools ourselves, to the neglect of our pastoral duties, or – for I am convinced there is no middle course – after all the anxiety of Sir G. Grey and the bishop to establish these schools, after all our labour and anxiety in founding them, they will fail, and our work will be lost, lost, and the rising generation neglected, at a most critical season in the history of your Mission, for the want of trained schoolmasters and their wives to carry on the good work. We want men, devoted to their work, who will take an interest, not only in teaching in the school, but also in the farm industrial work.

Progress of two new churches.

I am glad to say that the two churches in my district are going steadily forward. The Otawhao church is now being roofed in. I shall feel very much obliged if the Parent Committee will supply me with a large English Bible and Prayer-book for each of the churches. My list of subscriptions for the two new buildings now amounts to 600l.; viz. Church Missionary Society 200l., Aborigines of the district 300l., European friends 100l. I still require 150l. to complete the two buildings. The rise in all descriptions of building materials, from the discovery of gold, has seriously increased the cost of the churches; but I am determined, by the blessing of God, not to cease my exertions until I obtain the last shilling required for the neat and substantial completion of the buildings.

TAURANGA.

Report for the year 1853.

From Archdeacon Brown we have received the following report for the year 1853. It will be seen how strongly he feels the necessity of educational efforts being undelayingly put forth, commensurate with the urgency of the present crisis.

The admission to Priests' Orders of the Rev. T. Chapman has enabled me to avail myself of his assistance in administering the Lord's supper in those parts of the archdeaconry which I have not personally visited. The communicants now number 730, being a small increase on the preceding year. The congregations have maintained the average last reported. We have increased the number in our girls'-school to seventeen, who are boarded, clothed, and lodged at the Mission settlement, and have added English to their former lessons in Scripture instruction, reading, writing, arithmetic, and sewing. We have also five native teachers under daily instruction, and on Saturdays continue to assemble the class of teachers for Scripture exposition. They vary from twelve to twenty in number. Many in this class are middle-aged and old men, who for years have walked consistently in the presence of their countrymen; and, though perfectly incompetent to master the English language, arithmetic, and geography, are yet most efficient teachers of those great truths which can alone make us "wise unto salvation." And here I beg, in passing, to call the attention of the Parent Committee to the fact, that the Board of Education entrusted with the administration of the funds supplied by government have published a syllabus of the course to be pursued at the examination for office of native teachers, embracing inter alia "an outline of Scripture geography, readiness in the rules and tables in English, rule of three, practice, geography, product, climate, possessions, and aspect of countries, accurate pronunciation of simple and compound English sounds." I do not enter into the question of the desirableness or otherwise of insisting upon all these points, even for the next generation; but firmly believing that the exaction of such tests at the present time would exclude from support as schoolmasters a great majority of our most valuable native catechists, I would press upon the consideration of the Parent Committee the expediency of forming one or more humble institutions, independent of the Educational Board, in which the class of natives I have alluded to may be instructed more perfectly in the "things that accompany salvation," but in which some of the subjects mentioned in the syllabus shall not be made essential to the holding of office as a native catechist.

The extravagant prices paid to the natives for labour and provisions in the neighbourhood of Auckland have tended much to unsettle their minds, and draw off their attention from heavenly treasures to those things which "perish with the using." We can only hope that the natives may ultimately be induced, by the

strength of Christian principle, to dedicate some portion of the wealth which they are too rapidly gaining for their spiritual interests, to the service of Him whose are the silver and the gold. The withdrawal of the Roman-Catholic priest from Tauranga more than six months since, leads us to hope that the Papists do not find in the natives the ready reception which they had anticipated for their idolatrous doctrines, and that such of the natives as have been led captive may yet be brought back to acknowledge "the truth as it is in Jesus." We have not been without evidence that our work has progressed during the past year; but we increasingly feel the necessity of adopting as our Missionary motto, "We walk by faith, not by sight."

MAKETU.

Report for the year ending Dec 1853.

The reports from this and the adjoining districts of Rotorua and Tarawera will at once check any tendency which may exist to overrate the attainments of our New-Zealand converts. The war spirit, the outbreaks of tribal animosity, are at he present time like a fire which, by the constant play of the fire-engines, has been repressed, but which, if the counteracting influences were removed, would soon break out again. The following extracts are from the report of the Rev. T. Chapman –

Last year our former quietness was disturbed by a threatened war on account of the island of Motiti (Flat Island). This year we have the truly lamentable quarrel at Tarawera, caused by the disputed possession of the celebrated hot-baths at Rotomahana. About fifteen men have fallen in their several petty fights. The general state of the natives is therefore very unsatisfactory. The above petty warfare now carrying on, and, more or less, bringing every tribe into collision, is a period when "the fruits of the Spirit" are little likely to flourish. Satan has sadly gained advantage over us. Throughout this season of trial, the party attacked – Tuhorangi tribe of Tarawera – have shown great forbearance, and more Christian character than generally belongs to war.

The boarding-school for the present year numbers eleven scholars. Their behaviour has been uniformly good. The school has been examined by Archdeacon Brown. There is little to remark upon the course of the present year, save that I would respectfully say to the Parent Society, "You are looking earnestly upon other lands, but 'slack not thy hand from thy servants' here; for, however great may be the liberality of the government, we have so many points which demand an increase of attention to the baptized children scattered over the surface of New Zealand, that you cannot withdraw any portion of your liberality without retarding the work of education, now so imperfectly carried on, and almost abandoned in districts that are unaided by the direct personal attention of the Missionary.

Need of continued Missionary effort for New Zealand.

We add the concluding paragraph of Mr. Chapman's journal, regretting that our limited space precludes the possibility of more extended extracts.

The close of the year 1853 finds us in a position not easy of explanation. We are like those who "watch for the morning," at a time when the evening shadows had told of victory partially gained, and the enemy dispirited, but nothing had been secured. Such a season must necessarily be one of anxiety and suspense, not of relaxation and lessening the munitions of war. The often-used quotation "Come over, and help us," may, as in a figure, be said to be the cry of every baptized, uncared-for child in our infant churches of New Zealand. "Preach the word... in season, out of season," is St. Paul's injunction; and "feed my lambs" has lost nothing of its force thereby: we may neither disregard the one, nor reject the other; and I do, therefore, respectfully urge our kind fathers at home to throw in such additional means as may collect the scattered seed of the rising churches of New Zealand, and give that impetus to educational efforts which is so largely and so urgently required by the state of the baptized, yet almost heathen, children of this colony. As a Society, you have indeed begun a good work in New Zealand; but beware how you abandon your harvest before the seed for the coming season is secured, lest the ever-watchful enemy should "come in like

a flood," and bear away as spoil that upon which so much painful labour and expense has been bestowed. I remember, in early days, remarks were made (here) imputing an improvident use of funds by building the stone store at the Kerikeri. At the time it was built nothing could have been more suitable, and every pains was taken to secure the strictest economy. But it was not finished, or scarcely so, before rapid changes took place in the country – the Missionary body broke up – Thames, Waikato, Matamata, and Rotorua stations were formed, followed quickly by others, leaving the former scene of our Missionary labours but a small spot when compared with the new fields opened out; and soon your labourers were covering the whole length and breadth of the land. The Kerikeri store stands desolate; not a mark of wasteful expenditure, but a beacon, telling of the rapidity with which opening Missionary fields were filled up, leaving the old encampment with its before necessary appliances, because the long winter had unexpectedly ceased, and a time for action had arrived. But is it forgotten, that we were continually warned to form no more new stations, yet they were formed? We were remonstrated with, yet – more in faith than obedience – were their numbers increased. And so it was, that by the time the Popish Bishop and his emissaries arrived in New Zealand, the New Testament had warned the natives generally of the errors of Popery, giving such a check to Popish efforts, that it was only by receiving, and at once baptizing, the untaught heathen – largely, also, distributing gifts – that the Papists gained a footing in the various places where priests were located. The two parties – Protestant and Papist – under the growth of present circumstances, will soon present the same aspect, for the children of both are growing up in the same lamentable ignorance; while we, as Protestants, will not possess the advantages of prayers to saints, holy water, penances, pardons or indulgences, images, beads, crosses, wonder-working medals, lying pictures, or bits of saints.

We sympathise with you in the difficulties you are feeling from the many calls upon you to enter new fields of holy warfare; but it is matter of very grave consideration as to when is the suitable time to withdraw from infant churches. Permit me to say, surely not when means are required to establish, under God's blessing, the rising generation in their most holy faith.

ROTORUA, TARAWERA, AND TAUPO.

Report for the year 1853.

The Rev. S. M. Spencer, in his report, enters more fully into the circumstances connected with the outbreak of war adverted to by Mr. Chapman.

What I have principally to remark with regard to the Tarawera district is, the trial of faith which the professors of Christianity have been subjected to in a dispute about the possession of the celebrated hot-springs and lake of Rotomahana, originating with a tribe who formerly, with only a mutual hereditary right, forcibly held exclusively all the privileges connected with it. They, presuming upon the Christian forbearance of the other party, again demanded sole and undivided possession.

But the affair has been greatly aggravated by the coming in of a party from Rotoiti, of the Rotorua district, to avenge the death of the principal instigator of the contest, who fell among the first, and was related to the Rotoiti people. This latter party have suffered severely, and, with the original aggressors, were unwilling to come to terms of peace, on account of the great inequality in having suffered the loss of some of their principal chiefs; while the remarkable escapes of the self-defenders have so wrought upon the superstition of the aggressors, that they, attributing the comparative safety of their foes to their having the God of heaven on their side, attempted to join in prayers (karakia), and preached about those "who through faith subdued kingdoms," &c.; but I hope are beginning to see the hollowness of this resource at such a time, and for such a purpose.

I am happy, however, to state, that those hitherto considered hopeful remain stedfast, even though among the most deeply interested, having embraced a better part, and endeavour, to the utmost of their power, to restrain those with whom a desire for war, rather than possession, is a ruling motive.

The towns and coast settlements offer many inducements to the inland natives, so that in our connexion with them we are made to feel the transition process: yet we have to thank God that the blessed gospel has been introduced as a corrective for the evils incident to their coming in contact with a business world; and which,

at the same time, manifests itself as the power of God in counteracting the evil tendencies of the native state.

OPOTIKI.

Report for the year ending Dec. 1853.

The report of this district, by the Rev. C. P. Davies, in several of the features which it presents, assimilates to those which have been already under our consideration – the prevalence of epidemics, alarms from threatened outbreaks of war, and difficulties connected with school arrangements.

It is with feelings of gratitude to Almighty God that I record His sparing mercies towards myself, family, and natives committed to my charge, during the epidemic which has been raging since the end of January last. Only one adult has fallen amidst the many that were afflicted at Opotiki: on the coast there have been many deaths, especially among the aged.

In the month of October we were alarmed by the account that the natives of the tribe Te Wanauapanui were making preparations of a warlike nature, to seek payment for a charge of cannibalism brought against them many years ago, by the tribes (to the eastward) Te Wanauatehutu and Te Wanauatemaru. Lately, the principal calumniator was discovered, who had occasioned this hostile movement. On hearing the above, I immediately set out to visit the contending party; and I have to record the mercy of the God of Peace in restraining the outgoings of the natural heart. To Him be all the glory ascribed!

I am thankful in being able to report that the school for the native teachers, which has been attended by them five times during the past year, has continued. I trust, with increasing desire on their part for a better acquaintance with the word of God. On my return from the country in the month of February, the girls re-assembled at school. During the year we have averaged eighteen, though there were at one time twenty-two in the house, a most inconvenient number for the accommodation. Owing to the floods, the natives lost a great deal of their crops, and I was unable, at any price, to purchase food for the support of the schools: consequently, at the close of October, I was most unwillingly obliged to dismiss the children until the new crops would come in. We regretted this very much, as the children were evidently improving, and were becoming more tractable. Mrs. Davies has attended closely to them in the afternoons, and holding Sunday-school with them.

Some natives, I regret to say, have forgotten the solemn vows made by them in their baptism: others are, I trust, adorning their profession by an increased desire after a further acquaintance in the way of truth. The state of the whole district, with the exception of Te Waimana and Ohiwa, are, I consider, in a promising state. Sunday and day-schools are regularly attended; but still we long to see more cases of genuine repentance, more earnest cries, "What must I do to be saved?"

Eastern District.

TURANGA.

Report from Jan. 1 to Aug. 16, 1853.

The Rev. T. S. Grace continued in charge of this district until the return of archdeacon W. Williams from England in August of last year. Mr. Grace's report, therefore, to which we first refer, is limited to the first seven or eight months of 1853. Archdeacon W. Williams's accounts embrace the remaining period.

Before finally leaving this Station, it becomes my duty to furnish a report for the former part of the year, up to the 16th of August last, at which time archdeacon W. Williams arrived here. I fulfil this duty with peculiar feelings of thankfulness to Almighty God for many special blessings granted to us during our sojourn in this place.

Our Sunday-morning congregation at the station has always been good: that in the evening has, perhaps, lost a little, owing to parties having to return to a distance for food. At the outposts I have always found good congregations. The gospel, which has formerly been preached here, having produced a state of peace which now enables every man to retire to a distance from his village, to cultivate his own peculiar inheritance, without fear, together with the increase of industry, has made it much more difficult now for large numbers to meet for instruction than formerly.

Popery in this district has almost ceased to exist: I only know of one chief, with a very few of his people, who keep up that form of worship.

The industrial boarding-school has continued to meet our fullest expectations. In January last we commenced Hullah's system of singing, and have found the progress made satisfactory. Those of the young people who took a pleasure in it were able, at the end of six months, to take their parts, and sing from notes several of Hullah's songs, and "God save the Queen." So much we cannot say of their English lessons. In sewing, Mrs. Grace reports considerable advance, as well as in their general domestic services. Amongst the young men, seven have learned to plough, some of whom came for that purpose, and afterwards returned to their villages. Four natives have been taught to make the carpenter's work for a plough, two of whom also came from a distance for that purpose, and, having made their plough, returned. These may appear small matters, but, to a people in the present state of these natives, they are most important. Modern improvements in such things should, for the most part, be cautiously avoided, as throwing obstacles in the way of native advancement. In teaching school we begin with A B C; but, in teaching civilization, we too often commence with things analogous to words of seven syllables.

The Sunday evening school has gone on without interruption, having been kept up by Mrs. Grace in my absence. The amount of Scripture that the elder portion of the establishment have committed to memory has surprised us. I have had nineteen years' experience in Sunday-schools at home, but have never had lessons of such a length learned so well, and so long persevered in. In addition to the collect, gospel, and epistle, we commenced the history of Joseph on Advent Sunday, Nov. 1852, and finished it by the middle of the July following, a few weeks before my work here was ended. Upon this Sunday-evening school I look back with greater pleasure than upon any other part of our labour here. We cannot but believe that the amount of Scripture which has been committed to memory, and the great number of Scripture subjects that have, in nearly three years, come under consideration, will, in God's good time, bring forth fruit.

In May last we had a native teachers' school, when twenty-two native teachers and monitors, from this and the Uawa district, assembled for a fortnight. They worked hard whilst here, and, I humbly trust, carried home with them some little information as a reward for their toil. They caused a little more work than usual in our domestic arrangements; but our native girls seemed determined to perform their part well. They provided the food with the greatest willingness and alacrity, and appeared untiring in their zeal to make them understand some of the advantages of a civilized life. Their interest in this subject, I believe, arose out of a discussion which took place at a former native-teachers' school, as to whether such a mode was applicable to natives, and in accordance with Scripture: the conclusion of which, as afterwards reported to us, was unanimously favourable.

The early part of this year was rather full of events of a varied character. In February I fulfilled a long-standing promise to some natives inland of taking Mrs. Grace with me to visit them. Our governess and eldest little girl, with most of the school-girls, accompanied us. The natives provided the ladies with horses, and our whole party with plenty of food. The journey occupied eight days, five of which were spent in travelling, during which time we met with many most pleasing instances of affection, which we can never forget. The natives also were evidently much pleased, and, I trust, benefited. This journey did not cost a farthing in any way, which is a proof that natives are not invariably covetous.

In March we had a flood, much greater than the oldest native remembers to have seen, which caused sad destruction: much food was washed away; many villages were inundated; and a winter of great scarcity has followed. Providentially, no lives were lost in this district.

At this time, also, occurred the death of the greatest woman of this place. Her baptized name was Victoria, and many called her the Queen. She died of consumption, surrounded by friends who did all they could to persuade her that she was bewitched, among whom were, I regret to say, two native teachers. Consequently, my visits to her at first were not very welcome; but as her end drew near, her faith began to revive, and for some weeks before her death she bore testimony, both to Mrs. Grace and myself, of her faith in Christ alone. The night before her death I visited her for the purpose of administering to her the Lord's supper. She then told me that

she was dying, and should soon be with her Lord. She spoke much of her Saviour; but it was impossible to understand all she said, so weak was her voice. She had frequently told me that she did not believe that she was bewitched, but some of her friends believed it. She delivered several exhortations to her people, to give up their quarrelling and bad ways, and to "make strong" their service to God.

Two other happy deaths occurred soon afterwards, in my absence, of which the natives gave most satisfactory accounts.

The death of Victoria had nearly involved us in a war with the great chief, Te Kani a taki rau. The tribe of Victoria, many of whom believed she had been bewitched by an old priest at Anaura, set out on the 11th of April, 150 strong, and well armed, to avenge her death. I felt it my duty to follow the army – for it had set off privately before I was aware. I did so with all haste, and overtook it in the evening. On the following days I kept a few hours' journey before the army, in order to appease the hostile villages before it arrived. After much trouble and many fears, I rejoice to say that our warfare terminated, after five days' march to Anaura, rather for the furtherance of the gospel of peace.

Our stay in this district, though short, has allowed us to mark the changes which are taking place in the condition of this people. Their trading, which is now considerable, has attained a degree of intelligence beyond what might have been expected in so short a time. In March 1852 I attended the first native feast off the station, conducted in English style, to celebrate the harvest-home. The food consisted of roast pork, potatos, and apple-pudding, followed in the evening with a plentiful supply of well-sweetened tea, and good bread. This feast was entirely got up by natives, in imitation of one we had given to the school a little time before, upon finishing our first harvest. After dinner we were entertained with speeches, the tenor of which ran upon temporal advancement; and after having referred to the advantage of the use of money, which at this time they were beginning to appreciate, our motto was, "Ploughs, Sheep, and Ships," as a basis out of which was to spring European civilization. I had had much conversation with some of them individually before; but now they appeared in a body to lay hold of these ideas with a giant's grasp, and have, so far, continued to work it out with a steady perseverance, which I did not think their excitable temperaments capable of. And now the plough is in full operation; sheep have been introduced; four small vessels purchased, and nearly paid for. Flour mills are anxiously desired. Several rough though better kind of houses have been erected, and timber sawn by natives for one substantial European house. A very considerable amount of wheat is now consumed by the natives; and, as they themselves have noticed, a great decrease has taken place in the number of deaths. It is rather remarkable that we have not buried one individual from the school since we came. As regards temporal things, the eagerness for instruction has been great. As regards their spiritual welfare, I may say, "O that there were such an heart in them:" yet, how often are even good men found to be wiser in providing for the things of time, than for those of eternity.

Report from August to December 1853.

We now subjoin extracts from archdeacon W. Williams's report, which contain much that is well worthy of attention.

As the country is daily undergoing great changes, it may be well on this occasion to take a general review of the progress of Christianity at this place, and of other alterations which have been incident upon it. The first visit paid by me from the Bay of Islands was in the year 1838; shortly after which a party of native teachers was located here; and at the beginning of 1840, when I came to reside permanently, the labour of the teachers had been so much blessed, that the body of the people were at once ranged on the side of Christianity. Much of this movement might be the effect of excitement. They heard the word gladly; but by-and-bye many were offended. And yet the falling away among professors was not so extensive as might have been anticipated. There was a relaxation of attention, but seldom did the people abandon the profession of Christianity; and very many, who left us for a time, returned again to a more steady and healthy profession of Christian principles. During an interval of fourteen years, besides the common trials to which new converts are subjected, there have been two causes at work which have put their Christian sincerity to the test.

First, the arrival of a Popish priest among us, introduced by two chiefs of influence, who had taken umbrage at some of the proceedings of the Christian party, and who hoped thus to form a party peculiarly their own. For a time, all that were discontented and all that were in disgrace gathered round them, and the party seemed to assume some importance. But in a little while they dwindled away, and the priest withdrew for want of support.

The second cause which has been at work is one which brings with it greater danger. It is, worldly prosperity. The colonization of the country has had the effect of increasing trade; and the possession of property only increases the desire to possess more. They first cultivated wheat on my arrival amongst them in 1840; and now the demand of the Auckland market has greatly increased, and prices having been raised to an exorbitant height by the supplies required in the Australian colonies, they are stimulated to bestow a great amount of attention upon agriculture. In many respects this is an advantage to them, but still they are exposed to much danger. Our effort must be to influence them, if possible, that their prosperity may tend to their civilization; and that, while aiming at civilization, they do not lose their Christian simplicity. The introduction of the plough amongst them is clearly an advantage. The natives of Turanga have had before them, for some years past, the example of three or four English settlers; but they were slow to take up this improvement. At length, in 1849, I purchased two ploughs for them; and about the same time there was one enterprising native, then in charge of our school, who broke in four of our oxen, which have ever since been employed in work for the school. This native left the school shortly after my departure for England; but he has since broken in to the yoke other oxen for himself and his friends; so that now there are two teams regularly at work, and a prospect of a rapid increase of this assistance to labour. As yet, however, they have made no alteration in the construction of their houses, nor in their style of living, except that their diet is of a more wholesome character, by reason of the increased consumption of wheat.

With an improvement of worldly prosperity, and a consequent desire after the things of this life, it is not a matter of surprise that there should be less attention paid by many to religion. In short, in many cases the seed is choked by the care of this world, and by the deceitfulness of riches. The congregations on the Sabbath-day improve, and the Bible classes are being diligently worked. This is a means of instruction which I think cannot be too much insisted on. To say nothing of the ignorance of the people, which needs line upon line and precept upon precept, I have found, by long experience in this Mission, that it is the most powerful means of attaching the natives to their minister in the closest bonds of affection, and that it gives him a moral influence among them which he would not otherwise possess.

The preparations towards the central establishment contemplated by the Society proceed slowly, but nearly half the amount of building required will be ready for the commencement of the teachers' school on the arrival of the Rev. W. L. Williams.

Our church, with all its elaborate carving, is still in an unfinished state. This is our first object, and the work is proceeding rapidly: the natives have come forward with liberal contributions in wheat to meet the expenses of work which is not within their reach.

The weekly meeting with the teachers has been kept up, when the principal exercise has been the preparation of a subject for the sermon of the following Sunday morning. Upon this we hope shortly to enlarge by the establishment of a regular teachers' school. God has now raised up a church in this land, which was so lately a stronghold of Satan. It remains for us to endeavour to build up and establish, by a perseverance in our work, and by carrying out such new measures as may be proposed.

UAWA.

Report for the Year 1853.

This district was placed under the superintendence of Mr. Grace during his residence at Turanga. He has forwarded a report, from which a few extracts must suffice.

In January I made a journey to Uawa for the purpose of seeing Hakopa, the native teacher, whom consumption had brought near to the gates of the grave. I had three interviews with him, in all of which he expressed the same faith and confidence in Christ his Saviour. To the question, "Are you not afraid to die?" he more than once, without the least hesitation, answered, "No." "Are

you not a sinner?" "Yes." "On what do you rest for salvation?" "On Christ: for His death my sins are forgiven." He also spoke much of the indifferent state of many of his people, and was evidently much concerned about them. From Uawa having been accustomed to have a resident Missionary, the people were no doubt less disposed to listen to him than those of other places who have not enjoyed that privilege: in addition to which, the people of Uawa appear more indolent in both spiritual and temporal things, than their neighbours. On the Sunday evening, according to custom, I had the native teachers and monitors of the neighbourhood to go over the gospel for the day with me at the Mission house; after which we had much conversation respecting the place, in connexion with the approaching death of Hakopa. They appeared much affected, and pressed me very strongly to come and stay with them instead of going to Taupo; "for," said they, "we are left orphans." I reminded them that they had had a Missionary for many years, and that the Taupo people had had none. Poor Hakopa died a fortnight afterwards, witnessing a good confession; all bearing testimony to the strength and clearness of his faith to the last.

When I visited this district again in April, it was in company with the fighting expedition of the Turanga people. 24 I there found the two large pas of Uawa, as well as those of Puatai and Anaura, strongly fortified, at very great labour. Evidently they would not have been able to defend themselves against the army, yet there were a few desperate fellows amongst them who seemed to delight in war. The majority, however, were heartily glad to see me: my coming was to them an omen for good. And when I related to them the peace we had effected at Puatai with Te Kani, they were not a little relieved from the state of anxiety and suspense in which they had been kept. They had been having service three times a day for two or three weeks. No doubt this was, with many, the effect of fear; but some, I feel sure, made prayer their refuge in the hour of danger.

WAIROA.

Report for the year 1853.

The Rev. James Hamlin, in his report for the year 1853, adds the results of his experience to those which we have already presented to our readers. It is impossible to read such documents, and not feel that we have not yet done our work in New Zealand; that much remains to be accomplished; and that the more vigorously we prosecute our labours now, the sooner we shall be enabled to bring them to a termination. We would direct attention to one point which appears prominently in this as well as in other reports – the important fact, that the population are now no longer concentrated in villages for mutual protection, but are being scattered abroad over the face of the country for the cultivation of their lands. If, therefore, adequate Christian instruction is to be continued to them, the number of effective native teachers requires to be increased, the more extended character of the work requiring, of necessity, an increase of agency.

We have no account to give of any new fields of labour having been entered by us; nor have we to record the triumphs of the gospel over any new heathen tribes. The cultivation of the old field is now the great work. To eradicate old and long-confirmed habits and customs, to form the character anew, and to induce the natives to adopt habits of industry, honesty, and cleanliness, is a work of no ordinary kind, particularly in Hawke's Bay, which is now become proverbial for wickedness, where are a number of whites whose words and actions are in direct opposition to the gospel of Christ, and to the well-being of society; and some of whom profess to be led by the principles of Tom Paine, which they fail not to instil into the minds of those by whom they are surrounded, when they have an opportunity.

I have continued to visit the natives at the various residences during the year with considerable regularity; and am thankful to be able to report that there has been an increase in the attendance at the Bible and other classes this year.

In my last visit round the inland parts of the district I was much encouraged to see the people willingly come forward to attend these classes, some of whom, on former occasions, had pleaded various ex-

cuses for absenting themselves from this profitable employment.

The church services on Sundays and on the usual week-days have been regularly conducted; and the congregations have generally kept up their numbers, both at the station and outposts, on Sundays; but the attendance on the week-day lecture has varied considerably. We have to mourn over many who still appear indifferent about the concerns of their never-dying souls; but others are advancing in Christian knowledge, and some, I hope, are growing in grace.

Amongst those who have joined the whaling parties some improvement is discernible. Several young men have left them, and declare that they do not intend to return to that employment; and most of these native whalers appear willing to listen to the word whenever it is spoken to them: but of others it may truly be said that they wax worse and worse. Petty thefts have lately increased at the Wairoa, but they are mostly confined to those who have joined the whaling parties, and their immediate relatives.

The natives are now more scattered than ever. Formerly, the more distant of them were only three days' journey from the station, but now many are distant five days' journey; and they state that it is necessary for them to cultivate these distant places to keep possession of their land. The difficulty, therefore, of visiting them is much increased; and the adult schools, which used to be kept up, have much decreased in their attendance, and at some places have ceased altogether; not from any disaffection on the part of the natives to attend, but in consequence of their being so scattered from each other. At Mohoka, and some other places, where the natives are more concentrated, I have frequently had upwards of seventy adults in the classes assembled in school on Sundays and other days when I have visited them.

Western District.

OTAKI.

Reports for the Year ending December 31, 1853.

This district continues in charge of archdeacon Hadfield and the Rev. S. Williams. It will be seen that the archdeacon, in his report, strikes the same chord which hasbeen continually sounded in out ears throughout our review of this Mission – the danger of concluding our work to be done. We seem, indeed, to have reached that peculiar crisis in the New-Zealand Mission which is the hinge between the past and the future, and on the faithful improvement of which, not slackening our efforts as a Society, but following up the work of past years by well-sustained effort, the character of the future, humanly speaking, will depend. His testimony to the importance of schools will also be marked.

Archdeacon Hadfield's Report.

In reviewing the occurrences of the year now concluded, there appears much for which we should be humbled, but likewise much for which we should give thanks to our Heavenly Father, as tending to afford us encouragement in the work in which we are engaged. At times, improvement seems to proceed slowly: one seems inclined to ask, What has been done during the past year? But reflection brings the conviction, that no very visible religious or moral change can be expected in the population at large in that period of time. And with regard to individuals, while some disappoint our expectations, many give us great satisfaction.

The mortality has been about the average of other years; but this year two of the leading chiefs died within a fortnight of each other. The death of the elder was rather sudden. The younger died after a protracted illness, which he bore with Christian patience: he seemed to depart in the firm faith that a life of eternal bliss with Christ awaited him. On the death of the elder chief, many of his relatives, and, among these, Te Rangihaiata, came from a distance to weep and lament over the corpse; and I was surprised to find lamentations as loud and boisterous as in former years, and some of the people of this place looking on without any apparent attempt to check them. It was certainly twelve years since I had witnessed any scene of the kind. It is the occasional revival of such practices, long after they are supposed to be abandoned and forgotten, which warns us not to relax our exertions, or assume too readily that our work is done.

Considerable improvement has taken

place in the habits of the people: they have made great progress in civilization I have been anxiously watching this change. It has lately been rather unduly accelerated by the high prices they receive both for their labour and their produce, arising out of the stimulus given to trade by the gold-diggings in the neighbouring colonies. On the whole, I am inclined to think that the result will be advantageous. I cannot but think that every thing which tends to raise them above their old native habits must be good in the main. Still, it is needful that they should be guarded and cautioned, lest their hearts should be drawn away from spiritual riches while occupied in amassing earthly goods. This, therefore, has been a new source of care to us. We have cause to be thankful that hitherto no obstacle to our usual work has been caused by this temptation. Though the charge of the converts is now an important part of our work – and, considering the state the natives of this country were in previous to their conversion, a far more important part of a Missionary's work than is probably imagined by those who have had no experience of similar work – we are still able to report some additions during the year. Eighty-three adults have been baptized; and it is satisfactory to observe, that whereas, in former years, males generally exceeded females in number, this number is now composed of twenty-four males and fifty-nine females. It is highly satisfactory for several reasons, but chiefly because it is a proof that women are not so degraded, nor kept in such a state of servitude, as they were in former years, but that they are interesting themselves more in Christianity, and may be expected ere long to occupy that position which is always afforded them where-ever our holy religion produces any permanent impression.

The holy communion has been administered periodically in the district at five different places, as in previous years. The number of communicants has not decreased. They seldom or never absent themselves without coming to inform us that something has occurred which would induce them to remain away, unless we should not consider it a sufficient reason for advising them to take such a step. By this means we keep up a constant communication with them.

Our school arrangements during the year have been very much forwarded; and in no former year have we had so much ground for believing that the good to be done by means of these would be so great and so cheering as it appears to be. Till lately, it was only by the greatest exertion that we could persuade the people that schools were of much use; but now our school seems highly appreciated, and all connected with it appear to be in good spirits. Certainly the foundation of what may, with the divine blessing, become a valuable instrument for the evangelization of these people, seems to have been laid. Fruit is already visible: a great difference can be seen between those who have been under our care, and those who have lived in their own abodes. We trust, also, that higher principles actuate many of them. Nothing, however, requires more attention than such a school as ours: any neglect may ruin it.

Rev. S. Williams's Report.

This report contributes much interesting information respecting the school department.

The close of another year brings with it increased cause for thankfulness to Almighty God for His blessing, which has apparently rested upon our labours. We, however, rejoice with trembling. There has nothing new of any consequence taken place affecting the natives generally. Every thing is quiet and peaceable, and our work has been carried on without interruption, as, heretofore, in all the neighbouring villages.

Touching our school operations in this place. The carpenters have completed the boys' boarding-house, and are now building a substantial barn, which I hope will be ready to receive a portion of our coming harvest. The sawyers are cutting the timber for the girls' boarding-house, and I hope we shall scon be able to commence the erection.

The boys' boarding-house being new open, we have removed them, forty-six in number, out of their temporary dwellings. The change is very striking, and a great comfort, not only to the boys themselves, but also to those who have the management of them. There is accommodation for 100, which will allow of our gradually increasing our numbers. Our whole school, including day-scholars, numbers from eighty to one hundred.

The boarders have, during their working hours, besides carting the timber, bricks, time, &c, for the buildings, and cutting a quantity of draining, put under crop –

A. R. P.

Wheat...

17 2 28

Potatos...

6 0 21

Oats...

1 3 2

25 2 11

Clover and Grass

50 0 0

75 2 11

The native girls, twelve in number, who are boarded in the house, continue to give us great satisfaction; and I hope we shall find the advantage, in opening the girls' boarding-school, of having commenced beforehand with a select number. The first fruit which has been gathered home to her eternal rest in peace and happiness is the eldest girl, who had been with us the greater part of the time we have been in this place. She was always looked up to by the rest of the girls, and her good conduct gained her the respect of all in the village. Her removal was indeed a loss to us, but gain to her.

I have visited the Ahuriri district twice this year, at the request of the bishop; the first of which visits occupied from March 1st till April 29th, and the second from August 13th till Sept. 30th – sixteen weeks in all. The Committee will be pleased to hear that there is much of a very satisfactory nature to be seen. Several of the native teachers, some of whom came originally from Turanga, and one, an old native of Archdeacon Hadfield's, from Manawatu, have been very energetic.

WANGANUI.

For many years the Rev. R. Taylor has been the alone Missionary in the vast district of Wanganui, with Taupo, the central district of the island, annexed, where no Missionary has ever yet been resident. He has had the assistance, for some few years back, of an European catechist, Mr. T. Telford, stationed up the river at Pipiriki; and, more recently, of Mr. James Booth, as schoolmaster, at Wanganui. But still, the continued travelling and arduous efforts which have been unavoidable, in endeavouring to meet the necessities of his district, have been such, that we cannot be surprised – however we deeply regret to learn – that his health is seriously impaired.

The growing importance of New Zealand as the granary of the Australian colonies has placed the Maori race in a new and important position. They are at present the chief producers, and are likely to continue such. They are, therefore, confessedly a valuable element; and this will cause them, we trust, to be dealt with in a manner different from that to which so many aboriginal races have been subjected during the process of colonization. But without the penetrative and corrective influence of the pure gospel, whatever else may be done for them, they cannot be preserved as a people.

The following is Mr. Taylor's

Report for the year 1853.

The close of another year brings with it renewed cause for thankfulness to the Almighty, for all His mercies bestowed upon us as the humble instruments employed in making known His name amongst the heathen; and while we have had much to try and humble us, and cause us to walk with fear and trembling, we have still had sufficient to encourage us to persevere, and assure us that the Lord will not leave the work unfinished which has been so successfully commenced in this land.

My duties during the last year have been similar to those of the preceding ones: I have visited Rotoaira and Taupo, and taken my usual journeys to the other parts of my district. When at home, I have given two daily services, and held a weekly meeting with the communicants. I have administered the Lord's supper nine times in different parts of the Wanganui district. The number of communicants has been rather larger than that of the last year: this has also been the case with those baptized, amongst whom were two of the principal chiefs of the western coast. Mamaku, one of them, commanded the hostile natives during the late war at the Hutt, and also at Wanganui. Since that period he has lived very peaceably, with his tribe, on the Upper Wanganui; and for many years has been a diligent reader of God's holy-word, and I trust a sincere inquirer after the truth. The great obstacle to his being sooner baptized was his having three wives. The sudden removal of them, how-

ever, one after the other, caused Mamaku to view this dispensation as a clear indication of the Divine will, and he immediately presented himself as a candidate.

Respecting the spiritual state of the natives in my district I have to report that they are living in peace; but, I fear, too generally in deadness and indifference to religion. No longer being compelled to live in fortified pas, they are now dispersed, each family residing on its own inheritance; and thus, seldom having an opportunity of attending the means of grace, they gradually become careless and neglectful, and retrograde in spiritual knowledge.

The great increase in the value of food has also interposed a barrier to the continuance of the large assemblies of former years. The high price obtained for native produce has in many instances called forth the worst feelings of the mind, and concealed or choked the best. Too little of the seed now sown falls, it is to be feared, on the good ground. Still, however, there are many exceptions: the increased number of baptisms and communicants must be viewed as signs for good.

My Missionary meeting was well attended; and as the natives had just before been called upon to raise a large sum for the erection of mills, the amount collected – cash, 8l. 10s. promised, 11. 10s. – was good, and great interest appeared to be taken in the proceedings.

From the cause above mentioned, the daily services are not so well attended as in former times, but the Sabbath congregations are generally good.

It is pleasing to behold the rapidly-increasing importance of the native race, which even the tide of emigration now setting into these shores will not diminish: they still continue to be the chief producers; and it is by them that the enlarged consumption of Australia is mainly supplied. Nor is it probable that the European will be able to compete with them, from the extreme scarcity and dearness of labour. We must regard this remarkable fact as being one of the grand providential bulwarks against the exterminating influence of European colonization.

All the energy of the native race is now given to the erection of mills; and the quick-sighted enemy, perceiving this, has made use of it as a means of spreading Popery, by the tempting promise of building mills. The Wanganui Popish Mission is provided with a lay associate, who is also a millwright. The first attack made by the priests on Otaki was by erecting a mill there; and having secured a lodgment in that district, they have now made a similar one on Wanganui, where they have built a small mill. It is not with the bread of life, but the bread that perisheth, they offer to sustain their followers.

We are now preparing for the erection of our new school-house. The building at present used for that purpose is very small, so that we can only accommodate a few as boarders: the number thus received has ranged from seven to nine; but the progress they have made has been very satisfactory. By taking the children at an early age, we are better able to lay a good foundation, and are more likely to avoid the effects of that depravity, which cannot but exist where the sexes are permitted to live promiscuously together. I feel it a duty, as well as a pleasure, to state my full satisfaction with the way of instruction adopted by the master, Mr. James Booth, and my conviction, that, should his life be spared, our school will prove a great blessing to the native race.

We regret to add that Mr. Taylor has been deprived of both his fellow-labourers; Mr. Telford having been obliged to leave the Wanganui district on account of its unsuitableness to his constitution. Mr. and Mrs. Booth have also been obliged to leave New Zealand, in consequence of his broken health, and return to this country.

22 "C. M. Gleaner," Dec. 1853, pp. 135-137.

23 "C. M. Record," Nov.; 1853, p. 264.

24 P. 261.

Recent Intelligence.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

New-Zealand Mission – Mrs. Davis, wife of the Rev. R. Davis, died in the early part of April last: she had been unwell for some years.

Mr. John King, one of the first labourers sent out by the Society to New Zealand, died at Tepuna on the 6th of May last, in the sixty-eighth year of his age and fortieth of his labours in the Mission. His end was calm and peaceful.

Church Missionary Record

[New Zealand sections only]

1855

[This book was digitised in partnership with Auckland War Memorial Museum]
http://www.aucklandmuseum.com

Home Proceedings and Recent Intelligence.

HOME PROCEEDINGS.

Return Home of Missionaries.

New-Zealand Mission – The Rev. W. C. Dudley left Auckland, in consequence of ill health, on the 28th of October, and arrived in London on the 5th of March.

. . . . .

New-Zealand Mission – Mr. H. Ireland has arrived at Auckland (vol. xxv. p. 162).

Home Proceedings.

HOME PROCEEDINGS.

New-Zealand Mission – Mr. and Mrs. Booth left New Zealand on the 22d of September, in consequence of ill health, and arrived at Southampton on the 19 th of March.

Recent Intelligence.

RECENT INTELLIGENCE.

New-Zealand Mission – The Rev. R. Taylor left Wanganui on the 4th of January last, arrived at Sydney on the 14th of that month, and at Gravesend on the 13th of May.

Home Proceedings.

HOME PROCEEDINGS.

New Zealand – Rev. William Ronaldson, returning to New Zealand, and Mrs. Ronaldson.

New-Zealand Mission.

NEW-ZEALAND MISSION.

WE resume our review of this Mission from p. 267 of our Number for November last.

General View.

These islands have witnessed a wondrous transformation. Twenty years ago, and heathenism of a peculiarly dark and repulsive character overspread the great portion of the land. A few from amongst the natives had felt the subduing power of the gospel, and little congregations had been formed in the Bay-of-Islands district; but the main body of the nation remained unchanged. About the year 1839 a spirit of inquiry began to extend itself with unexampled rapidity throughout the island. Hard hearts became softened, and hoary-headed chiefs were willing to be taught; and New Zealand has now become a professedly Christian land. So far, a great conquest has been gained. It has been shown that the gospel of Christ has lost nothing of its power; and that divine truth, which was mighty through God to overthrow the sanguinary rites of the druids, has been equally efficacious, some 1800 years after, to prevail over the sanguinary superstitions of the Maories.

We must not conclude, however, that the god of this world will withdraw himself from the field where he has been so signally overthrown, and suffer us unmolested to enjoy the fruits of our victory. He only changes his mode of operation, and concludes that, although the Maories will no longer serve him as heathen, they may continue to serve him as professing Christians. If he can only succeed in depriving a Christian profession of its spirituality and unction, he may still reign. No sooner, therefore, has a work been accomplished, such as that which we have been privileged to witness in New Zealand, than the adversary addresses himself to mar and spoil it, availing himself with dexterity of every existing influence which can be used to promote his object. It is this which is now being attempted in New Zealand. The work which has

been wrought there is being severely tried by influences of all others the most dangerous – the opportunity of acquiring wealth, and the collateral opportunity of expending it on evil gratifications to which the natives have hitherto been strangers. The discovery of gold fields in Australia, and the increase of settlers there, have very considerably raised the value which attaches to the agricultural produce of New Zealand, and the Maories obtain high remunerative prices. They owe their new position to the gospel of Christ. The fern-root which belonged to their days of heathenism would not have been thus disposable. But Christianity introduced the seed of wheat and other farinaceous crops, and, indisposing the minds of the natives to the cruel wars in which they had been engaged, made them willing to cultivate the land. As their means increase, they have the opportunity of evidencing their thankfulness by helping those Christian appliances which are needed for the consolidation and permanency of a consistent national profession of the gospel, by contributing to the support of educational institutions, such as we find have been organized in all our great Missions – Sierra Leone, Tinnevelly, &c – the building of churches, and the support of native agents: and something has already been done in this direction, especially during the governorship of Sir George Grey, who in every way encouraged the formation of industrial schools throughout the country, to the support of which the natives have in several instances contributed by the grant of considerable estates. The Maories have now an opportunity of expressing their thankfulness to God for the great mercies they have experienced as a people, and their willingness to co-operate with the Church Missionary Society, by charging themselves from year to year, as means are afforded them, with an increasing portion of the Expenses, so as to lessen the expenditure of the Society in New Zealand, and enable it to do more for those in other lands who are yet heathen. But just at this moment the ungodly white man presents himself with his low vices, and grog-shops, opened in increasing numbers, tempt the natives to indulgence in a vice to which, when heathen, they were strangers. The reports of our Missionaries convey to us the mournful intelligence that drunkenness, with its attendant evils, is on the increase.

The victory has not been yet secured. A new and formidable effort is being made to arrest the native race in the path of Christian progress, and to deprive us of the fruits of past labours. It is a time, then, for prayerful, vigorous exertion on the part of all whose influence can be available for good to the New-Zealand race. This must be our prayer, that the Lord would revive His work in the midst of them; this our effort, to strengthen the things which remain and that are ready to die. Compared with the actual numbers of the native race, we have located in New Zealand a strong Missionary force. We have no fewer than twenty-four European Missionaries, one native deacon, and five European catechists and schoolmasters, in connexion with Missionary labours in New Zealand. Let this force be measured with the Missionary strength apportioned to the Yoruba Mission with its density of population – two cities, Abbeokuta and lbadan, alone outnumbering all the population of New Zealand, the first of them occupied at present by two European Missionaries and two native deacons and the latter, lbadan, by two European Missionaries – and the comparative strength of the New-Zealand Mission will be at once perceptible. We do not say that the

number of Missionaries is beyond the requirements of the case. The Maori race is perhaps, at the present moment, in the most anxious crisis of their history, in which the truths of the gospel, with much vigorous and prayerful application, need to be kept close to their consciences; in which energetic efforts are required to bring the rising generation under Christian training and instruction, and to expedite the development of a native pastorate, to which may be eventually entrusted the care of native congregations – -objects which ought to be carried out, so far as pecuniary expenditure is concerned, by a large amount of native co-operation. Taking, therefore, into consideration the peculiar crisis of the Mission, the scattered condition of the native population, and the ruggedness of the country, we are thankful that, at the present moment, there are so many labourers on the spot, some who have grown old in the service of the Mission, others still in the prime of life, and some who have recently arrived. But it is evident that the Society has in New Zealand a force sufficient for all the necessities of the case; so much so, that it is the only one of our Missions in which we have approximated to a parochial apportionment of labourers, the Missionaries being, if equably distributed, to the native race in the proportion of 1 to 4000 nearly. We repeat, that there has been, on the part of the Church Missionary Society, no neglect of the Maori race, and that there is an ample sufficiency of labourers in the islands for all emergencies. To this body of faithful Missionaries we look with confidence. They have the same God to look up to, and the same gospel to use, as of old. That gospel is as powerful to revive as to convert, to bring back the backslider as to bring in the heathen. They have to gird themselves for a new effort, and, by the blessing of God, they shall be permitted to achieve another, and, if possible, more glorious victory.

Already God's providential dispensations are at work, and chastisements, His mercies in disguise, are not wanting, sent, no doubt, to check the immoderate excitement after earthly things, and to re-awaken the native mind to the conviction thai there is "one thing needful." Epidemical diseases, since our last review, have been very prevalent, and many of the natives have been removed, the unhealthy influences pressing with peculiar force on the dissolute and reckless portion of the population. Thus it would seem as if the great Husbandman is bringing into action His own appointed discipline, "I will dig about it, and dung it" – a season of affliction to be followed up, we trust, by an energetic application of gospel truth, in its renewing and invigorating influences, to the hearts of this people, amongst whom there are many who remain faithful, and tenacious in holding fast that which they have, that no man take their crown.

Northern District.

We now proceed to review the various districts, and to place before our readers extracts from the reports of the Missionaries, noticing, in the first instance, the

Death of Mr. King.

Mr. King was one of the two lay settlers who embarked with the late Rev. Samuel Marsden, in 1809, from this country, with the purpose of commencing Missionary operations in New Zealand. Throughout the course of a Missionary life more than usually prolonged, he had witnessed all the changes of the Mission – its night of toil, the dawn of the morning, the full noon of large results, until his own eventide came, and, full of years, he has

gone to sleep in Jesus. The Rev. R. Davis, of Kaikohi, thus speaks of the death of this his old friend and fellow-labourer –

On the 6th of May the angel of death was commissioned to remove our beloved elder brother, Mr. King, to his everlasting rest. For him to live was Christ, but to die was gain. After the death of Mrs. King he could not be prevailed upon to leave the station. A great declension has taken place among his people; and although this declension was not general, yet it doubtless could not but seriously affect his mind – a mind much worn by the difficulties, dangers, and alarming fears he had to sustain, as one among the first heralds of mercy that took up their position among what were then the rude and savage cannibals of New Zealand, for such were the aborigines of this country. But our brother was preserved. He witnessed the great change of the natives from heathenism to the profession of Christianity. This was to him, as it was to us all, as life from the dead. In his last illness, as in former trials, the faith of our departed brother remained stedfast in Christ. He has entered into peace.

WAIMATE.

Retirement of the Rev. W. C. Dudley.

The Rev. W. C. Dudley has been compelled, from ill health, to return to Europe, and disconnect himself from a work on which his heart was set, and his labours highly-valued. In his report for the year 1853, which was received by us July 2, 1855, he mentions the following interesting

Baptism of an aged, blind man.

The baptism of one old man filled my heart with joy. I found him in a village, blind and infirm. I was surprised to hear the prayers which he offered up to God for the salvation of his soul, though he had scarcely ever associated with Christians, or attended divine services, from inability to walk. After some days' teaching he was baptized. When first seen he could scarcely move out of his house, or speak articulately. During those days that we were with him, his strength seemed to come again as the strength of manhood: his heart was literally filled with laughter, and his tongue with joy.

Report for the year ending Dec 31, 1854.

The report for the year 1854 has been forwarded by the Rev. Joseph Matthews. It refers to the practice of spirit-drinking, and the epidemics with which the natives have been visited. The girls' boarding-school, for reasons mentioned in the report, was given up in June last. As regards the natives of the Waimate, and those of Matauri, in the Whangaroa district, the report is not without encouragement.

Since the departure of the Rev. W. C. Dudley, the Waimate district has been as well attended to as the emergency of the case would allow, there being but four acknowledged labourers of the Church Missionary Society north of Auckland. The Rev. R. Davis has shared his time between Kaikohe and Waimate: the Rev. J. Matthews also left Kaitaia twice to assist in the duties of the district.

The past year has been an afflictive one, and many of the natives, especially elderly people, were carried off by the measles and its effects. We trust that many careless professors have been aroused in their consciences. This we are led to hope is the case from the goodly number attending the means of grace, and the increase of communicants at the Lord's table.

The Missionaries in this district have had to labour against a sore evil, lately introduced amongst the natives, viz. spirit-drinking; but we hope that in some degree the evil may have been checked. Divine service on the Lord's-day has been conducted twice for natives and once for Europeans. There has been also a Sunday-school held in the morning for all who choose to attend. On Monday mornings, also, the church has been open for two hours for the instruction of adults and children, among whom is a class of 18 catechumens for baptism, some of whom are making satisfactory progress in the knowledge of Christianity. One of them observed, "When a tree is grafted, the under branches are all cut off and thrown away, for if not the scion would not grow; and so I feel that it will be of no use for me to be baptized unless I leave off theft and all other sins, which have

been to me as the old branches to the stock." This school has been chiefly attended to by Mr. E. M. Williams.

The girls'-school was continued until June 30, when it became our painful duty to give it up, the number of scholars being only nine. This school, for the last two years, has been mainly supplied from the Kaikohe district; and this plan would have been continued, but it was found that, when the girls had resided there for a time, and were growing up, they were written to by the young men of the neighbourhood to become their wives. And not only so, but when these young men found that their proposals were rejected by the parents, as well as by the girls themselves, threats were held out that the poor children would be taken away by physical force, dragged out of the house, and, according to their former barbarous custom, made to become their wives against their will. As three cases of the kind had previously taken place, their parents resolved to remove them, as they wished their daughters to marry only among their own people. This being the case, the local Committee decided that Mr. Williams should give notice, that, unless there was an increase of scholars to warrant its continuance, the school would be given up at the close of the current half-year. At the expiration of this period it was found that the parents continued inflexible, and the Committee deemed it necessary to bring the school to a close. This was a duty amongst the most painful which the local Committee has ever had to perform. Much good, we doubt not, has resulted from this institution, the amount of which we shall not know until "this mortal shall have put on immortality."

The boys'-school commenced with twenty-two pupils, all boarders, and, we are thankful to add, has gone on promisingly under Mr. E. M. Williams.

In accordance, also, with the wishes of the Committee, Mr. Williams has given a full share of his time to the spiritual duties of the settlement, in conducting divine service both for natives and Europeans, and has attended to the sick natives with much success; and it is with thankfulness that we acknowledge his services.

The natives of the Whangaroa district have been visited by Mr. Puckey, from Kaitaia, and by Mr. Matthews, from Waimate. The latter visited Matauri in October last, and found a very interesting people there, some of whom had been candidates for baptism for a long period. Nineteen adults and two infants were baptized, and six couples married. One of the adults had been a Papist, and spoke out very decidedly – "For two years I went about carrying lies for the Popish priests." This people had enlarged their chapel considerably, but it was crowded on the day the baptism was held, and they said all the tribes would have assembled had the Lord's-supper been administered. There was found here an old man of the name of Saul, who was baptized by Mr. Dudley: he said, "I am still striving and fighting against sin, and I put my trust in Christ." He appeared to be full of simple faith and reliance on Christ, and it was indeed a pleasure to visit him.

We were thankful to learn that Mr. Shepherd, of Whangaroa, still continues his Missionary labours since his disconnexion with the Church Missionary Society, and visits Matauri once a month, a distance of twelve miles. He arrives at Matauri on the Saturday, and spends the whole of the Sabbath with this people; and we gratefully acknowledge his services.

In conclusion, we would observe that the natives north of Auckland require the best Missionary attention. Every encouragement should be given to native teachers to be diligent in all their duties, and especial encouragement should be given to those who will keep a week-day school. It appears to us, that, as the northern tribes were the first to "buy the truth," so they should be the last to "sell it." We feel, that, scattered as are the northern tribes generally, and feeble and few as are the labourers, a vast impetus might be given by the strengthening of our hands, by all receiving more largely of the Spirit of Christ, and by calling out the energies of a few prudent native teachers, and fully employing them as such. We pray that God may revive His work in this part of His vineyard!

KAIKOHE.

Death of Mrs. Davis – Other Trials.

The last year has been one of bereavement to the Rev. Richard Davis, Mrs. Davis, after a long and painful illness, having been re moved on April the 6th. In his

journal of the 10th we find the following notice of his loss –

On the 6th instant my beloved wife slept in Jesus. The stroke has been long expected: nevertheless, the blow is heavy, the wound is deep, and in this my solitude will be felt. God has dealt very graciously with us both. I shall miss our former happy evenings of reading and prayer. But she is only gone a little before: we shall, I trust, through the atonement of Jesus, soon meet again before the throne of God. My loss is of no common kind. A more attached wife a man scarcely ever had. In the time of Heke's war with the government she would not leave me, although I often wished to remove her to a place of safety. I never saw her manifest the slightest fear, even when we had reason to expect that fighting between the native parties would take place near our own door: the booming of the cannon, and the report of musketry, were daily sounding in her ears. The Christian natives had long prayed for her, and sometimes by her. As soon as they heard she was gone, they came around me, and did what they could to support and comfort me. From the time of her death they never left her remains till this morning, when they were removed to Waimate, to be deposited in the silent tomb. Early in the morning the natives began to assemble: hardly a man, woman, or child of Kaikohe was absent, nor was there scarcely a dry eye to be seen. About a hundred of them accompanied me. They carried the corpse, and took every thing upon themselves. She had been to them a faithful and tried friend: she did not desert them in their troubles, and they paid her every respect they were capable of showing during her protracted illness: nor did this respect slacken until they had laid her in the grave. The archdeacon, her oldest friend in the country, performed the last rites of the church over her dear remains. Her faith in Christ appeared simple and firm. She is gone: she is entered into rest. She suffered much, but her days of suffering are ended. It is the wish of my heart to be able to say, with Job, "The Lord gave, and the Lord hath taken away: blessed be the name of the Lord."

Subsequently to this, about the middle of August, his own health began to decline, until the 23d of October, when he was obliged to remove from the solitude of Kaikohe to the society of his children and friends at Waimate, and the advantage of medical treatment. In November he was so much better as to be enabled to make once more the circuit of his district, administering the holy communion at Kaikohe, Otaua, and Mangakahia. Mr. Davis reports thus of the state of things in the districts where he has been labouring: –

The natives have been, during the year, visited with the measles and hooping cough. This caused a great mortality, especially among the elderly people and young children, several of whom, we doubt not, have passed into a happy eternity.

At Kaikohe the congregations have increased in numbers by the return of the late Heke's people to the profession of Christianity; but the advance of the natives in the divine life is slow, and the cause of much sadness and perplexity.

Pastoral Visits – State of the People.

From Mr. Davis's journals we proceed to introduce some extracts. As far as the documents forwarded to us afford the opportunity, we propose to do so throughout the stations, with the view of presenting to our readers a faithful transcript of the actual state of the New-Zealand Mission.

Jan. 13, 1854 – Visited the sick. One young woman of Heke's tribe had died a heathen, and I found her lying in heathen state. Two others are drawing near their end. I have visited them several times, but they express no desire, even, to be saved. Oh, how awful is unbelief! I told the party that my heart was too heavy with sorrow to allow me to stay with them, for if they died heathen there was no hope for them, and turned my horse round and rode away from them. One of them replied, "This way will do for us who are sinners." This was perhaps meant as a reproach, and too justly, as many professors live badly.

Jan. 19 – Yesterday the unusual sound of guns was heard, coming over the woods from the place where Heke's widow resides: to-day I have learned the cause. The young woman whom I found lying

in state the other day was the wife of a chief, and had died in giving birth to her first child. They had been informed that the birth of the child had been hindered by malignant spirits. The illness of the two people who are drawing near their end is attributed to the same source. These spirits, it is reported, they were determined to kill if possible, and had therefore taken it into their heads to try to shoot them. The man to whom they made the communication said, "You may shoot and kill the person who is ill, but the spirits you cannot hurt. Leave off such practices, turn to God, and all will be well." "Yes," they said, "we are thinking of living for a time near David, in order that he may be a praying man for us." The reply was, "You must turn to God yourselves, in order for prayer to avail any thing in your behalf."

Visited the sick: poor Mervin is near his end: he appears to be in a dead, supine state. From his childhood he has been taught to know the gospel. His knowledge is correct, he is acquainted with the way of peace, but his head seems dead.

April 20, 1854 – Went to Waimate. Visited Andrew, one of the principal teachers, in my way, to give him notice of a sacrament. He said, "The canoe has been upset, and but few have escaped by getting on its bottom. The house has been burnt, and but few have escaped. I am now alluding to the drunkenness which has been introduced among us. This has led to adultery and much trouble: nevertheless, it is good to look after the few that have escaped." Ardent spirits have also been introduced at Kaikohe, where its awful effects have been but too visible among the late Heke's people.

April 25 – Returned home yesterday from Waimate. Congregations not large there on Sunday, but attentive. There is much sickness amongst the people. Ardent spirits are retailed by the natives themselves there, at seven shillings a bottle, in the face of the prohibitory laws. Alas, poor Waimate!

April 26 – Visited the sick. Many are down with the measles, but hitherto they have passed off lightly. God deals very graciously with them. Today I have learned that there are venders of ardent spirits amongst us: that the bottle is carried about, and sold at a shilling a glass to whomsoever will buy. It is reported that it was offered to a Christian native as being good medicine for the sore throat which he and his son were suffering from, after the measles. He was told the price would be two shillings – a glass for himself, and one for his son. They were told to take the bottle away. Alas! where is vital godliness to be found! My hopes have long been sanguine; but I cannot shut my eyes now against the sinfulness of the natives generally, and the glaring inconsistencies of many of the professors of Christianity.

May 1 – On the 28th ult. went to Waimate. Mr. Matthews also arrived from Kaitaia. On the 28th examined the communicants. On the 30th administered the Lord's supper to sixty-one communicants, chiefly elderly people: the young people have been led away by drinking ardent spirits, and the wickedness resulting therefrom.

Our space compels us to reserve some of the extracts from Mr. Davis' journals for our next Number.

New-Zealand Mission.

NEW ZEALAND MISSION.

WE continue our review of this Mission from p. 187 of our last Number.

Northern District (continued).

KAIKOHE {continued).

We now conclude our extracts from the communications of Mr. Davis.

The Epidemic.

May 8, 1854 – Time much taken up in visiting the sick during the last week. The epidemic has now become general. Yesterday, in the morning, only fifty people at church; in the afternoon, fourteen.

May 22 – Another trying week has passed away. More people at church yesterday. Saw Piko again to-day. She is drawing near her end: she speaks of Christ as her Saviour, but I fear she is not savingly acquainted with Him. I had long visited two poor old heathen – a man and his wife – both very old: the man I found dead to-day, and his wife cannot be long after. Visited others hardened and thoughtless, and returned home in a spirit of heaviness.

June 7 – Buried to-day a child at Tuhuna, and visited Samuel. Found him afraid to die: this alarmed me, but I trust his fears are groundless. Close by, I found a youth very ill. When I saw his state I was fearful, for the youths generally live a wild, playful, and thoughtless life; nor can they be prevailed upon to attend school; nor have their parents any control over them, to make them attend. I sat and looked at his emaciated frame, and his short breathing: his appearance spoke to my soul, in a voice not to be misunderstood, that death was near. When I saw him last I spoke rather severely to him. He was scrofulous, and knew his days were numbered; but the measles will hasten his end. As I did not speak, the youth quoted these words, "Unless we are born again we cannot enter the kingdom of God." This opened a conversation between us, which I hope may be blessed to the dying child.

June 8 – Visited Hira Puri's wife: she is very ill: she speaks well. After-

wards visited Samuel and the poor youth. Samuel is still fearful: talked to him, and prayed with him: the youth was too weak to say much. Samuel's fears concern me: very little affects my sorrowful heart.

June 10, 1854 – Heard Simeon Whakaita was ill. Visited him: found him very ill, but ready to depart and be with Christ: he is in a happy state. As I had a funeral to attend, did not go to see Samuel. This evening, while reading the service over Whahanga's child, another child died in a neighbouring house. Went and spoke to, and prayed with, the bereaved parents: it was the young mother's firstborn son: she feels acutely.

June 11 – Congregation large in the morning, but small in the evening. As I was uneasy about Samuel, I visited him between the services, and tried to find out on what his fears were grounded. I now hope that his fear is not an improper one, not of that nature, I trust, to impede his salvation. The poor youth is worse. I asked him how he meant to escape eternal death. "By working hard, and prayer." I endeavoured to preach Christ to him. O that he may find mercy!

June 12 – Met a few of my people: nervous and low in spirits: sickness and death reign around. The natives were not well of the measles before the whooping-cough got among them; but it is the Lord.

June 14 – Yesterday, buried a child, visited the sick. To-day visited Samuel and the youth. I could understand but little of what the former said. He had ceased to be afraid: the fear of death was taken away. The latter began by saying, "I have thoughts for but one thing, and that is Christ."

June 20 – Buried the remains of Samuel. I was thankful to learn from his son that he had given him strict injunctions to live a peaceful and holy life; but that, in order to attain this, he must believe with the heart. His son told me that his father prayed much. Poor man! the fears which alarmed him were no doubt of the right kind. The youth is sinking: his glass is nearly run: he speaks well. O that his heart may be found right with God! Visited poor Whahanga. Two of his children are better: the third which was ill is marked for death: this will be his fourth. He said, "I sometimes ask myself, Is this visitation in anger or in love? It is my wish to be resigned to the will of God." Heard that Akaripa had lost a second child. Set apart a person to bury it tomorrow at Punaketere, as I shall have much upon my hands.

June 22 – Last night Charles and Sarah Taurua returned from their visit, or rather Missionary tour, to Rotorua, and its neighbourhood. I saw them this morning, Sarah mourns much for my dear departed wife. This evening they gave me an account of their travels among the relatives and companions and friends of Sarah's youth, and their persevering efforts to do good almost shamed me. They give but a poor account of the state of the natives generally, as it regards vital godliness. They report the Missionaries as being all heavy-hearted, in consequence of the worldly-mindedness of their people. Poor Charles expected he should be able to effect much, but he soon found he was disappointed. They took much property with them, but they are returned very poor: their friends, however, appear to have made an abundant provision for them. I am truly thankful to have them home again: here is plenty of work for them. Spoke seriously to my people about their indolent habits. Visited the sick. Benjamin Wahanga has lost another child from the whooping-cough: his wife is in a precarious state. Heavy affliction!

General Review.

Mr. Davis thus expresses himself, in conclusion, as to the state of the natives in his district –

Much, very much, is grievous amongst the natives generally, and the evil is growing; and things must continue thus until the Spirit be again poured out from on high. But bad as the appearance of things is, we have perhaps more knowledge and piety still existing among us, where the people are attended to, than would generally be found in a similar number of the lower order of people in England. The rising generation amongst us, at present, presents the most gloomy picture – I speak of the children belonging to our congregations: but even here, dark as it sometimes presents itself to my mind, I do not despair. The girls'-schools have done much good to many young women in my own congregation who have grown up, and are growing up: the breaking-up of the girls'-school

at Waimate is therefore to be lamented. My people have been addressed most seriously on the subject, but they are determined they will not return their children, nor can they be blamed for withholding them. Our attention will now be turned towards the boys, with a prospect of better success in procuring scholars. But Waimate, even for a boys'-school, does not possess the facilities which it formerly possessed. The enclosed land left to the settlement is in quality very poor, and in quantity limited. Nor am I very sanguine about procuring scholars in Waimate: from this place children will be sent, and a sufficient number procured for Mr. E. M. Williams to commence with.

KAITAIA.

The Rev. Joseph Matthews and Mr. William G. Puckey continue to labour at this station. Divine service has been held three times on the Lord's-day throughout the year, twice for natives and once for Europeans. The communicants number 260. There have been six adult baptisms throughout the year, evidencing the diminution and almost extinction of the heathen element. The distant places of the district, including Wangaroa, Wangape, Parengarenga, Parakerake, Oruru, &c, have been regularly visited. The teachers' meeting at the settlement continues to be well attended on the Saturday, and with accustomed interest. The Missionaries, while acknowledging their obligations to their native fellow-labourers, mention one whom they could cheerfully recommend for ordination. The teachers at the different villages where they are stationed have held divine service twice on the Lord's-day, and generally conducted a Sunday-school.

Report for the year ending Dec. 31, 1854.

The following is the joint report of the Missionaries –

Through the goodness of God we have been brought to the close of another year, and have abundant cause for gratitude for those measures of health and strength, and all other mercies, temporal and spiritual, which our heavenly Father hath bestowed upon us.

The past year is one that will be remembered by the natives as the most afflictive, and perhaps the most fatal, they ever experienced. The well-known epidemic, the measles, broke out in our district in the middle of winter, and the malady, in its fatal effects, increased in proportion to the inclemency of the season. The natives generally were very imprudent, and many were without adequate help, having no one to procure firewood and food while the measles were upon them. We lament to say that about one hundred died in our whole district. It is not improbable that the measles have, from their first breaking out until now, been the proximate cause of two thousand deaths throughout the island.

A few days ago, December 26, Motu, the grandson of the chief Poroa, one of the most promising young men of Ahipara, died through the effects of cold taken alter the measles. Some few of the old heathen tried hard to have an old woman sacrificed as a payment for his death, but he would not consent to it; and, when dying, exerted himself to talk to his people, and advised them to be kind to all, and live in peace. He said, "When my fathers died there was no blood shed, and shall quarrelling and fighting ensue because their child dies?" This is the young man who formerly insisted upon his uncle Morenga and all the tribes not going to join Heke against the government. He was desirous to be baptized; and, when dying, he exerted himself to ask the question, "What is the meaning of outward baptism when all is right within?" This unexpected question gave great interest to the occasion, as all the principal people were there, and the nature of baptism was explained in a simple way, referring him to the Catechism and to Christ's own words as the basis; and, on account of his question, Himiona, our eldest teacher, read out audibly and solemnly the third chapter of St. Matthew's Gospel. One of the teachers asked the dying man, "Is there no part of the Psalms which you make use of as a prayer?" He replied, "This – 'Be not far from me, O Lord.'"

During the height of the epidemic numbers died without our having the chance of visiting them, both owing to

the care our own families and domestics required – for they all had the measles – and also to their distant abodes and the severity of the weather. Calls from all quarters, for three months, were incessant.

We feel it our duty to say a few words concerning two native females, who had lived with us eighteen years, whose deaths were hastened by the measles, each of whom was the mother of a large family of young children. Maraia had suffered intensely from pain in her head, which had caused total blindness for the last two years. She always had the Lord's supper administered to her at her own house, and our visits were most welcome to her. A little before she died, she made use of this remarkable expression, "I now know why I have been so long afflicted. I have only been a true believer in Christ the last month. 'I will bring the third part through the fire.'"

Tipina Newton was the mother of six children, and she had been a Deborah in our families, and her character had been without blemish. She was smitten with the measles, and they were uncommonly severe with her, although she had thought lightly of this disease. She told us, in the commencement, that she did not feel resigned to leave her family at present. She lingered for several weeks; and as her bodily weakness increased, she waxed stronger in spirit, and felt that Christ and His word was her support; and before she died she was enabled fully and cheerfully to resign her husband and children into God's hand. On the question being put, "Are you unwilling to die?" she became animated, and said, "I am not at all anxious. I am as though I had no husband and no children." This she repeated several times, to assure us that it was a reality. It was a delight and spiritual comfort to her to hear portions of the divine word read to her, and to have portions pointed out to her notice. The eighth chapter of Romans was recommended by us for the evening chapter, which was read by a neighbour. The next morning she said, "What a sweet portion that is. I have been reading to myself the last two chapters of the Revelation." Her conduct for many years had been so uniformly good that Europeans and natives showed her marked respect. Our children felt much for this Deborah, and all visited her. She was so blessed during the latter part of her illness, that the tempter had no power so much as to disturb her thoughts. She rested on the strong arm of Christ, and died peacefully. "Let me die the death of the righteous" "the end of that man is peace."

It so happened that one burial service sufficed for these two Christian females, who "died in the Lord." we have continually met with much to try our faith and patience, and to damp our joys; but as our Lord has shown us the worth of a soul, by saying that a whole world would be insufficient to redeem it when lost; and likewise that "there is joy in heaven over one sinner that repenteth," we feel it just to magnify the truth of the promise, "My word shall not return unto me void," and "your labour is not in vain in the Lord."

The temporal prospects of our natives are progressing, and the various tribes have lived in peace with each other. The means of grace have generally been well attended during the year; and many, who for a long time refused to hear the gospel, calling themselves Roman Catholics, have during the last year given their adhesion to the true church of Christ, and have become hearers of the word. The principal chief of the Papists, a very promising character, was baptized by Archdeacon H. Williams during the last autumn. These good fruits we consider to have arisen from the establishment of the schools at Ahipara.

In conclusion, we observe that our people require the utmost attention to bring them on to a state of Christian maturity, especially so in these days of increasing worldly wealth. We witness, to our grief, their too independent spirit, which often leads them astray, and their natural character is altogether that of self-sufficiency. On the other hand, we witness much that is praiseworthy; and, in proportion as their minds are enlightened by hearing what other churches have done and are doing, they seem to feel that it is right for them to help one another. They have done so, in a small degree, the last few years, and if we are spared we shall not cease to lead them on to further exertions. Our own feelings, after twenty-one years, are the same as when we first pitched our tents in the midst of the wild brushwood, "that we have no power of our own selves to help ourselves;" but that our sufficiency and strength and success are altogether in Christ; and that, if any blessing whatever has rested upon our labours, we disdain

any merit, and say, "Not unto us, O Lord, not unto us, but unto Thy name give glory, for Thy mercy, and for Thy truth's sake."

To this we add some extracts from Mr. Matthews' journals.

Teachers' Meetings, &c.

Jan. 7, 1854 – Held teachers' meeting: subject, Acts xvi. 25-34. Our meeting was very interesting. We were asking, "Why is the word of the Lord compared to fire and light?" – speaking of the conviction and conversion of the jailor. Maynard said, "We have been digging kauri gum, and, in setting fire to the bush, we observe that every hole and every hill is discovered by the effects of the fire; and so, when the light of God's word shines into the heart, the evils of sin are seen."

We have received vaccine virus from Dr. Ford, who informs us that the smallpox is raging at the Sandwich Islands. A vessel from Honolulu has just arrived at Manganui, close by us, which reports that 5000 have died on the island, and thirty seamen. Two officers of this ship died. Our government has indeed acted a parent's part, by faithfully warning the people and providing the remedy. God will surely bless a government that acts so mercifully and righteously with an aboriginal people as our government has done from the first landing of Governor Hobson. Mr. Marsden's words will be fulfilled – "God will bless the Mission families, and He will bless the natives." He said this to a large party of Missionaries in my hearing, when he was old and full of days, on his seventh visit to this highly-favoured Mission.

Feb. 4 – Teachers' meeting: nine present. I gave the teachers their allowance of a shirt and trowsers each, and each has had a new copy of the Testament and Prayer-book, which is much esteemed.

Feb. 12 – Four days' rain, after so much fine weather, has ruined three-fourths of the wheat, which is a great calamity to natives and Europeans. The wheat grew standing a full quarter of an inch, and, what is most remarkable, that which was not ripe grew the most. Potatos are very scarce and dear: four pounds per ton on the spot, and nine pounds in Auckland. Twenty-five ships are waiting there for supplies of this edible for the gold diggers. In Hobart Town potatos are 35l. per ton!

RECORD, Sept. 1855. ]

Missionary Journey to Wangape – Value of Native Teachers.

March 1 – Set out for Wangape, thirty miles distant. We were well received at Waitaha; but the people confessed that they had been idle at prayers. We exhorted them to repentance, for God commanded it. We had two interesting prayer-meetings and speaking with them, i. e. in the evening and morning. When I had finished speaking in the morning, and we were just ready to depart, the father of the tribe, a grey-headed old chief, approached the two younger chiefs, and, in a mild and winning tone, said, "My children, commence praying: what should hinder us?" &c. The teacher, William of Ototoiti, was much struck with this incident, and so would any one, I am sure, even if he had been hitherto a cold-hearted Christian.

We passed on until we came to the land-locked harbour of Wangape. The scenery is enchanting, and the land is of the richest description, and would particularly suit the vine, and I think the orange would grow here. The wheat of this district is fine: the country is extensive, and would support a population of many thousands. We crossed over in a canoe to the place of Anga, the chief who was so anxious to be vaccinated. He was not at home; hut his little daughter, who had lived with us, ran and fetched us three fine water melons, which were very refreshing to travellers. They sent off a messenger to Hokianga, about sixteen miles (to the heads), to inform Anga of our arrival; and we went two miles further on, and slept at an old chiefs place of the name of Walker, whom we had visited before. We preached as we went, and every native in the little villages greeted us; and one venerable old lady would cry over and rub noses with the teacher, "because she had once lived where there were means of grace, and she still every day thought of God." She repeated the name of an affectionate son many times. She would have cried over me if I would have allowed it; and she did cry after me as long as she could see me. My tent was pitched in a gathered-in wheat field. About twenty natives came to prayers and preaching; and it is a fact that the teacher and this party kept on talking, principally about spiritual things, until the morning began to dawn. The

teacher said, "They would begin to talk now and then about the things of the world, but I would put in my word and turn the conversation." I found this teacher, William – one of our oldest teachers – a very acceptable help, who combined the wisdom of the serpent with the harmlessness of the dove. My opinion as to what ought to be done immediately I will say by and by.

We left this place, Rotokakahi – a most fertile district – on Saturday morning, the teacher returning by land, in order to converse with all the natives he might meet with in the little villages, and I returned by canoe for the same purpose.

I was much delighted with the excursion; and what made it more so was my having a native who was a near relative of Eleanora, Noble Panakareao's wife, to paddle me along in his canoe. This man was one who spent the night with us, and appeared to be a most amiable native. He can read, and possesses a Prayer-book with the Psalter, and begged a Testament of me when I can send him one, and he promises to read prayers on the Lord's-day. He having four children, I urged him to do this.

We called at two or three places, and spent several hours with the son of the principal chief, a most amiable young man of the name of Henry, but he dues not possess Christian energy to take the lead in having prayers, &c, which is much to be lamented. This young man has a wife and a fine infant. He would make me wait to eat of his oven, and gave me clean honey to eat with my potatos. It was the first time I tried this, i. e. dipping the potato in clear honey; but I found it very nice and agreeable; for the proverb says, "Hunger makes the best cook." The introduction of bees has proved a wonderful blessing to the natives and Europeans. This native asked me, "Have you any tea with you?" I said, "My tea is in my box, with the native who is gone the other road." He said, "I have some sugar but no tea" – wishing to accommodate me with a cup. I could not help feeling thankful for this, as it shows how much the natives have improved in their manners and in their circumstances too, even in the remotest places. I like to notice these things, as they are either directly or indirectly the fruits of the Holy Spirit. What particularly pleased me was, the young chief, whose canoe I was in, would say, when we came to a place where there were any natives, "There is a native; go and speak a word to him." "What!" thought I, "is there a native, and an unbaptized one, who is acting as a prompter to me!" I thanked God for this; and when I related the circumstance at the teachers' meeting, they were delighted, and tears were ready to flow.

March 4, 1854 – We had evening prayers at Anga's place. He is the principal chief of this district. There were twenty-four present, and I preached the word unto them.

March 5: Lord's-day – Had divine service in a long shed: about thirty present, and they were all attentive to the word, "God commandeth all men everywhere to repent." This is a great word. The chief Anga came from Hokianga after the morning service, and was much pleased that we had come to see him; and he said, "Why did you not order a pig to be killed, that you and your natives might have had something to eat?" I told him that we were well off for food, and that his daughter had given me quite a feast of water melons. We had Sunday-school, and the assembly seemed much interested. I was much struck with the simplicity of the chief, who said to me, "Will it be any harm for me to pluck a melon to eat, for I want one much?" I told him it was no harm to do so.

Towards evening the teacher and I were walking on the beach, and I told him the subject I purposed to speak upon in the evening – that of the prodigal son; and he was to speak afterwards, and I would be short. "Well," he said, "I have thought of St. John xii. 44-50." I was delighted with the manner in which William handled this subject; for it was evident that the Spirit had directed him in the choice of this text, and that he fully understood it. He said to me, while walking together, "We spoke last night and this morning on the words, 'God commands all to repent because He hath appointed a day to judge the world,' &c, and I think that these verses will agree and confirm it." And when he was opening the subject to the congregation, he dwelt chiefly on the passage – the 48th verse – "The word that I have spoken, the same shall judge him in the last day." It forcibly brought to my mind the words of Mr. Watson Fox – "The gospel must be preached as a wit-

ness; and where it has been offered again and again it will indeed prove a swift witness." I was led to see that we have great reason to be thankful for the help our native teachers afford; and I thought many of them are far better instructed scribes in the kingdom of heaven upon earth than we are at all times aware of. Many conversations I had with William on the road – sixty miles – led me to reflect on these things; for I found that he was sound in religious principles, and well versed in the New Testament and the Catechism of the church. He told me of a conversation that he and some of the Ahipara natives had had with regard to the Apostles' Creed. He said his opinion was, that the creed divided the works of creation and redemption between the Sacred Persons of the Trinity, which some were confused about. He asked me if he was right. I told him, "Yes." "Well," he said, "I thought so. I take the words, 'I believe in God the Father Almighty, Maker of heaven and earth,' to belong to the Father, &c, and so on."

What I referred to above, that I would give my opinion by and by, is simply this – That some of our best and well-tried Christian teachers, of fifteen or twenty years' standing, should be ordained deacons while we have strength to pursue our work and overlook them, and attend to our work. There should be one ordained native at Whangape immediately. We cannot personally attend to this district more than a very few times in a year; and a native teacher without a salary cannot be expected to attend to the duties required, for those duties would engross all his time. The Whangape district is a fine place to try a native deacon in the ministry. There are a few teachers at Herekino, five miles nearer our settlement; but as they do not attend our meetings but a few times, they are but weak, i. e. they do not visit about. It wants one invested with authority to preach, &c. Himeona is the teacher that I should recommend to be ordained if he would consent, for I have not spoken yet to him on this subject, although I have made it known that I wish him to go to Whangape.

The Lord's supper ought to be administered in all the respectable chapels in the district, and that every three month. Such is the nature of the times for worldly-mindedness, that our Christian natives are in the utmost danger of falling away unless we can often, both in the word and sacraments, set the Lord before them. New Zealand indeed, at this time, wants Bishops and Missionaries who will feel for the souls of the people, and not in any ways seek their own glory, but that of the great Shepherd who has laid down His life for the sheep. Neither bishops, priests, nor deacons, are ordained or consecrated to seek any thing else but the glory of Christ and the salvation of perishing souls; and what is our duty but to lead our people, the sheep of Christ's flock, into green or budding pastures? We, who are witnesses of the state of things, at least in the north of New Zealand, are fully aware that the present state is far from being a healthy one. We are altogether too weak or too short of hands, and a better state of things is needed, i. e. a brotherly and Missionary consultation should take place, and inquiry should be made whether a few of the best of the teachers could not or should not be ordained, &c. May God bless what I have suggested!

Middle District.

AUCKLAND.

Report for 1854, by the Rev. J. A. Wilson.

The report of the Rev. J. A. Wilson will inform us as to the amount of Missionary effort which has been carried on in Auckland and its vicinity. It will be seen that the plan of a Mission boat, to be employed in visiting the islands, is one attended with much uncertainty and expense. The location of native teachers in the different islands, as recommended by Mr. Wilson, is in every respect preferable.

During the winter, the Mission boat under my charge – by the kindness of Mr. Jones, the first lieut. of H. M. S. "Pandora " – was refitted, &c, by some of her crew; but I regret to say was shortly afterwards run foul of, which caused the loss of two masts, rigging, &c. The delay occasioned by this occurrence, added to the previous repairs, caused much loss of time and inconvenience.

In the past year I have visited the native settlements on the island of Waiheke, and Mototupu. Also Taupo, Kai-

para, Pukake, Orake, Onehunga, and the north shore: and, when in Auckland, the native hostelry, the hospital, the asylum, the road parties, and the gaol. These last places have occupied 194 visits.

I have also occasionally assisted at St. Barnabas' on Sacrament Sundays. During the very serious illness of the Rev. G. A. Kissling, and his subsequent voyage to Sydney for the benefit of his health, which included about the space of three months, the services at St. Barnabas' devolved on myself.

The candidates for baptism in this district – most of whom have been three years on the list – have behaved with steadiness and to my satisfaction. Of these, forty-four have been admitted into the Church; also thirteen native children, one half-caste child, and four children belonging to the European settlers. Forty-five adult candidates remain still on probation.

It may further be stated, that there has been a gradual improvement in a few of the native villages, and I may here mention Wakanewa, the East Huruhi, and Rarawara. At these places the recently baptized, and the remaining candidates, chiefly reside: their teachers are the principal men, and possess influence; and to them, under God, the chief instruction of their people is owing.

Throughout this district the Sabbath attendance on divine worship is good, and the Sunday-schools form a fair proportion to the congregations; and yet, notwithstanding these favourable appearances, there is still great indifference amongst the majority. For instance, few will attend a Bible class; nearly all are indifferent to the instruction and general conduct of their children; and at the present there is not a decent chapel in the whole district.

After much observation, it appears to myself that the most effectual method in building up this people in the Christian faith would be, to establish a few well educated native teachers on the different islands and in the larger settlements; men who could not only act as teachers to the people in general, but likewise afford daily instruction to their children as schoolmasters: and which appears the more necessary in this part of the island, from the present increasing difficulty, and great expense incurred, when visiting, either by land or sea, in the vicinity of Auckland.

I feel persuaded, were a plan similar to this adopted we might look forward in hope to some better fruits than the past. The Missionary would then possess – what hitherto he has desired and sought in vain – men who could labour with him, who would carry on the common work in his absence, and whom, in return, he would instruct, counsel, and cheer during his visits through the district.

HAURAKI.

The Rev. Thomas Lanfear has remained in charge of this district throughout the year, having been assisted by Mr. Thomas Volkner during its latter six months.

Report, by the Rev. T. Lanfear.

The following are extracts from Mr. Lanfear's report. It concurs with those already considered by us as to the temptations to which the natives are exposed, their low spirituality, and the need of reviving influences on the Mission.

I have spent one hundred and twelve days in travelling to the various places in my district, including one journey to meet the Committee at Tauranga. I have administered the sacrament to 140 persons, and baptized 12 adults and 19 infants. I have to regret the introduction of temptations to my natives, through increased intercourse with our own countrymen, against which some have been proof. I have also marked an increased determination to maintain the ancient custom of "tapu," even among the baptized; and, upon the whole, I am persuaded that, except in a few instances, there is but little deep-seated religion among the Maoris, although for our comfort we may take the answer of God unto Elijah. The baptisms have not been numerous this year: but fourteen new candidates have lately come forward in the immediate neighbourhood. The Sunday congregations are quite as good as they have been, in proportion to the number of persons living near; but actually less, on account of many having removed for the purpose of cultivating in new places. In conclusion, I feel we have much need to pray that it may please the Lord the Spirit to revive His work among us; and the more so, as a population so widely, and, at the same time, so

thinly scattered, must be under great religious disadvantages.

We add some extracts from Mr. Lanfear's journals, illustrative, amongst other points, of the fatiguing character of Missionary travelling in New Zealand.

Danger from fire.

Feb. 4, 1854 – The bush being on fire, and the wind blowing towards our house, we feared it would have been burnt: providentially, the people had just assembled at a spot near us for a palaver, when, the cry of fire being raised, they came together, and, beating down the fire with boughs, the wind also lessening, succeeded in putting it out, after which we gave them a feast of flour and sugar, and thanked God, who had saved our house from this visitation. All the things were carried out of the house, and there were numbers of people standing about, besides those engaged in putting out the fire, yet we lost nothing.

Missionary travelling.

March 3 – Set off for Kaiaua, on the opposite side of the Frith. Landed at Pukorokoro, but, not having been here before, we could not find the mouth of the river, and got the boat aground on an extensive mud flat, terra firma being at least a mile and a half distant. However, there was no help for it, so, taking off my nether garments and my coat, I made a bundle of them, which I slung at my back – my natives having other things to carry – and set off on my muddy pilgrimage. On I went, sinking knee-deep every step in the black, disgusting mud, well mingled with sharp cockle shells, to increase the trouble. When about half way to the shore it began to rain violently, from which I was glad to shelter myself by sinking in the mud as far as possible, and holding up the umbrella with both hands. My natives, having harder feet, got ashore long before me, though they left the boat after me. We spent the night on the spot where we landed.

Coromandel Harbour.

March 22 – I left for Te Poka, Coromandel harbour, where I arrived in the evening. Held service, and preached. It was a long time since I had visited this place, in consequence of my having been kept from doing so through the death, by drowning, of several of my people at Hauraki, and the consequent gatherings of the tribes there on visits of condolence; and I was much grieved to find things in a very bad state. The teacher, in consequence of a quarrel with some of his relatives, having given up his office, the people were left without any one to conduct their morning and evening worship, though divine service was held on a Sunday by another teacher. Then, since the establishment of the saw mill here, a good many of the whites employed to fell timber, &c., set the natives a most vile example of drinking and debauchery. Shortly after my arrival, a boat came on shore, in which were several of these men, bringing with them large kegs of wine. For my remonstrances they cared nothing; and even in the middle of the night my ears were shocked, and my heart grieved, with their foul oaths and obscene language. I have tried to get the chief of the place to put a stop to it, and hope he will endeavour to do so. After service I called on the teacher, and remonstrated with him on his sin in leaving his charge.

March 23 – After morning service, and catechising the children, I heard that the tribes on the Mercury Bay side, whom I was intending to visit, were coming here on their way to an uhunga, 25 so I resolved to stay in the neighbourhood until after the Sunday, lest, by going first to the other side, I should miss them. In the course of the day I visited some of the settlers and the new saw-mill: whilst there, I heard of a white man in the forest, who had been nearly killed by his companions in a drunken brawl. I went to see him, found him getting better, and made use of the opportunity to call him to a concern for his soul.

Hara Taunga.

March 29 – Set off with the intention of going to Hara Taunga, but the weather would not admit of our getting further than Koputauaki. In the evening had service, and catechised.

March 30 – Siill weather-bound. After morning prayers some of the people came to my tent, asking questions on the Scriptures. Spent the evening as usual.

March 31 – Set off for Hara Taunga. Had a most fatiguing walk through the forest: the path, being little used, was much overgrown, and the mountain side

exceedingly steep; but on reaching the top I considered the toil as well repaid by a most magnificent view, including some of the most delightful scenery I have ever witnessed – Hara Taunga, lying at our feet, being a most beautiful bay, enclosed on all sides, except that towards the sea, by a perfect amphitheatre of wood-crowned hills, intersected with numerous ravines, issuing from one of which a mountain stream winds its way through the plain below, forming, in its progress, a serpentine as regular as could have been produced by art, yet without its stiffness. We reached the settlement just as it became dark, and were received with a most hearty welcome; the people coming out to meet us, and crying, "Haere mai! haere mai!" On our arrival at the pa, I found the fern already cut for my bed; and, having shaken hands with the people, went into one of their houses, glad to warm myself by the fire, and to rest after my walk. I sat conversing with them for some time, and then retired to rest.

Expedition to Motiti.

April 25, 1854 – My natives having determined on an expedition to Motiti – an island on the coast near Maketu – with the proposed object of making up a quarrel with the people there, and being very anxious that I should accompany them as a pledge of their peaceful intentions, and to prevent mischief, I resolved to accompany them, and, having joined them at Manaia, embarked in one of their canoes accordingly. The season of the year was particularly unfavourable, and many of the men were suffering from sickness, the measles prevailing among them. In the course of three days we rounded Cape Colville, and anchored in Charles' Bay, an uninhabited one, where we were detained twenty-three days by foul weather. During this time one of the principal chiefs died, and, in consequence, it was determined that we should give up the expedition.

The chief who died was a heathen, but had always been kind to the Missionaries. As I was one day talking with him about his soul, he desired me to pray with him, which I did morning and evening. I did not, however, feel sufficiently satisfied about his state to offer to baptize him.

This journey has led me to see that the old superstitions of the natives have a much stronger hold over them than I thought they had, and I have been obliged to contend earnestly for the faith. Whilst we were detained in the bay I held daily Bible classes with such of the native teachers as I could assemble, and also taught reading, &c, to some little boys who were with us. This has been an unhealthy season, and many natives have died lately. May these things be a means of inciting me to greater diligence in preaching the gospel, and contending against superstition!

Native Children.

August 28 – Reached Whangapoua after a walk of five hours and a half. Here are only two families, but the head of one of them is a good man named Piripi. He has six children living – this is a rare thing among the natives – and had just buried one. He seemed resigned to God's will in this matter. He had gone over to Hara Taunga on the Saturday, in order to partake of the Lord's-supper, and was our guide thence to this place. After prayers, I catechised the assembled families, and was pleased to find that Piripi's children had been well taught by him: this, again, is a rare thing. Piripi cannot write, but his eldest boy has taught himself, and, with a little help from some more learned Maori, to cypher also.

Future Prospects.

We conclude our review of Mr. Lanfear's despatches with the following paragraph –

Do not think too highly of the state of religion here. Yet consider our disadvantages also. What would an English clergyman think of a flock of sixteen hundred, scattered over coast and river lines one hundred and fifty miles in extent, without a curate, without a schoolmaster, with teachers lamentably deficient in knowledge, and no means of instructing them, and strangers exercising an evil influence settling among them? I have long tried to be hopeful, but I cannot longer resist the conviction, that the prospect of the church in New-Zealand, for the future, is a dark one; and did I not believe in the words of Him who has said that the gates of hell shall not prevail against it, I should not hesitate to affirm that in another generation nothing but the shadow of it will remain.

MIDDLE DISTRICT. WAIKATO.

WAIKATO.

Removal of the Institution higher up the river – Progress.

During the first six months of the year the Rev. R. Maunsell was engaged in the arduous work of transferring his institution, with all its appendages, from Waikato Heads to the new site, higher up the river by nine miles. During the autumn we find him laboriously occupied, as will appear in the following extract from a letter dated April 4, 1854 –

At last, through God's great goodness, we have made a decided move to our new station, a beautiful spot, surrounded by a large and valuable property; the school all busy in preparing their new quarters for the winter – building houses, drawing stone for chimneys, digging ground for gardens, carpentering, ploughing, and preparing our farm for the wheat. At the same time school is regularly conducted, and they all seem contented and industrious. We have, moreover, eight European labourers engaged in different kinds of work, and twenty out-door natives. All these operations give much life to our proceedings here, and create a very large demand upon my thoughts. This is not a little increased by my being obliged to maintain two establishments, at some distance – nine miles – apart, in operation; namely, the boys'-school here, the girls'-school at our old station. I find, however, that young Stack enters with good spirit into his work; and Mrs. Maunsell, whom I was obliged to take to Auckland last February for medical advice, is now, thank God, fully recovered, and is maintaining by herself the girls' and women's-school, in number about forty-five. If our most gracious Lord continues to help us, as He has most wonderfully done heretofore, I hope to bring up the girl's-school, with Mrs. Maunsell, in the course of about three months. This is a point which I much desire, as these divided operations devolve upon me much trouble. We hope this year to grow enough food for our support.

The next letter, dated towards the end of winter, shows the progress which had been made during the intervening time, and enters into some interesting particulars as to the providential circumstances which led to the selection of this new locality.

August 7, 1854 – Through the good hand of our God upon us, we are now on the point of accomplishing the heavy task that lay upon us during the past year. Our new station, with its thirteen houses, has now advanced far enough to receive our whole party, and I am busily occupied in packing up and carrying goods, &c. I hope, before two weeks are over, to have all our party, excepting a few that I must leave outside, collected together in our kohanga, or, as the meaning of the word is, nest.

This division of force has caused much expense and trouble, but not so much as I feared; and I am thankful to add that school operations have been but little interrupted. With our station I am much pleased. It is situated on a little tongue of land projecting out, and causing a bend of the fine wide Waikato river, so that we seem, as it were, to stand sentinel, looking north-east along the banks to the distant mountains and varied scenery, and, facing westward, catching a peep of the mouth of the river and the roaring sea. Inland, an amphitheatre of mountains, not very high, varied with cultivations and woods, heave up to view the tops of little hamlets scattered in all parts around the station. "Every prospect pleases." O for a more thankful heart, and a more spiritual mind to sanctify it!

Many have been the singular providences that I have experienced in my life; but on few do I now more frequently think than on the one which brought me to Kohanga. In April 1853, having been detained by Committees through the summer, and prevented thereby from paying my ministerial visit to the upper part of this district, I was returning from my tour from a place some distance beyond Otawhao. On calling at an European's on the Waipa, I was informed that the governor and bishop had just arrived at Otawhao. I stopped to pay my respects to them, and that evening they arrived at the banks of the river. The next three or four days we spent in discussing the governor's scheme for education, on which his whole thoughts seemed to be absorbed. He was in a great hurry to get to Auckland, but Mr. Ashwell and his interesting school detained him for two

or three days. It struck me that I might also get good for my school by a visit, so I begged him to come a little out of his way to see us.

Immediately on arriving, I summoned some of the chief men to meet His Excellency at tea. In the mean time Sir George went to take a survey of the station, and I, as I was particularly attached to the spot, with its beautiful scenery, dry walks, garden, orchard, old attachments, and, though last not least, being one also formed by myself with great labour and expense, took care to direct his special attention to the fact, that, though there was not much arable land, yet we had very good runs for sheep and cattle. In the evening we met, and Sir George, at my request, applied for more land for the school. The people, though anxious to keep us, and though they could not convert their hilly, barren land to use, yet, to my great surprise, evaded the application, Immediately the owners of the property on which we now are came forward, and made us an offer of this. I accepted the offer, and Sir George stopped with us until twelve o'clock that night, discussing boundaries, and obtaining their signatures to the deed of surrender. I say that I regard this event as a most gracious interference of a good Providence. Shortly after we began operations, food rose to such a high price that, but for this land, we should never have been able to support our school. The population, moreover, has been further diminished at the Heads by sickness and migration, whereas on the present site we are in the neighbourhood of a good population and of two mills, and have every prospect, in coming years, of making the school independent. All this took place just as the opportunity for accomplishing it was about to pass away for ever. The land was surveyed, and a grant given, just before Sir George left. Immediately alter we had concluded to come here, the people of my old station offered to give me any extent of land I pleased if I would remain. I am glad now to think that they were too late.

The many circumstances that brought about this removal at such a critical time – my detentions in the summer; falling in with Sir George when near the termination of such a long circuitous journey from Wellington; his visit to Waikato, though so pressed for time; the withholding, by one party, of land, and the gift, by the other; and all this against mine own wishes and intentions – I regard as an evidence that the good hand of my God is upon me, and desire to thank Him, and go on in my work with courage. The liberality, also, of your Committee will not a little animate me. I feel that I can scarcely now get too much assistance. Carpenters' wages in Auckland are now 10s. and 12s. a day, food and all other labour being proportionately high. Though our crop has been pretty good this year, I had, during the past six months, to pay 100l. for wheat, a sum that makes a tremendous hole in our small income. Still, I am now in better hopes than ever that I shall be able to carry out the rule upon which I founded this institution, namely, not to draw in any way upon the funds of your Society. I fully recognise the propriety of your entering now, with all your power, the open door of China and the East, and look forward, with great delight and hope, to the time when I shall be able to make the Institution self-supporting, and, with my other resources, support its teachers and myself without burdening you. Under ordinary circumstances I should certainly have declined the 100l. which your Committee has been so good as to vote me; but I feel that I must now accept it, and I satisfy my scruples by taking it only as a loan, with a full determination to repay it as soon as our funds will admit. The use I intend making of it is this: I intend, or, rather, am now ordering a reaping machine, a threshing machine, and a machine also for winnowing. These will enable us to put a larger extent of ground under crop, and also to effect a point that I much desire, namely, to save the labour of my young people, whom I am anxious to keep more close to school-work. I thank God, we are getting on very steadily. Our numbers have been a little reduced in these heavy times, but I have great reason to be thankful for the very worthy and steady young people, men and women, whom God has been pleased to place under my instruction, and who lend their help in this institution.

Translation of the Scriptures – Measles.

Translation labours have, during these last six months, been nearly suspended, and I have done nothing more than look into the Hebrew Bible, to keep up our acquaintance I am just now, however, beginning that work again, though I feel

very much discouraged, from the inability of getting any thing printed. Perhaps God will yet provide means, before I die, for printing His precious word. The translating it has been the comfort and joy of my life, and is an honour of which I could only dream in England. As soon as I get both my schools together in fair operation, I will, please God, bend all my effort to finishing the MS. At present I feel it a duty to act upon a theme upon which, as a school boy, I used sometimes to write, "hoc age," and direct all my attention to effecting properly one object.

The measles have committed sad ravages amongst the people of this river, though, through God's goodness, not a member of this institution was carried off. This I ascribe to the abundant use of milk which we were able to provide them with, and which seems to agree with them admirably when suffering from diarrhoea, which was one of the most severe of the subsequent effects of measles.

We now introduce extracts from Mr. Maunsell's

Report for the year ending Dec. 31, 1854.

It commences with a reference to the change of locality which, before the end of the year, had been safely accomplished.

I desire to record my thankfulness to the good providence that has brought us to this place. We are in the midst of a rather numerous population; and have a fair prospect, in another year, of being able to raise sufficient food to maintain the school.

In the spring I proceeded again through the district to administer the sacraments. The number of communicants is on the increase, being fifty-eight more than it was last year.

The number of adult baptisms has been few, chiefly from the fact that the larger portion of the population has been baptized, and because, moreover, I feel but little desire to baptize until the characters of the candidates have been tested by the searching influences now brought to bear upon them by the increase of wealth, and the many stimulants that will be roused into action by the advancing tide of civilization. In the institution are several young people fit for baptism, and who have been upwards of two years under instruction; but I prefer keeping them back until their characters are more developed.

Having had lately occasion to go to Auckland, I appealed to the Bible Auxiliary for help to finish printing the Maori Bible. They decided on making a special appeal to the public, and a meeting was held, the result of which, I have strong reason to hope, will be the raising the necessary funds. It is most probable that the first edition will cost 500l. to complete it. The accomplishment of this object by these means, without burthening the funds of the Society, will be to me a most gratifying termination to my labours in this branch of Missionary work. I am now bestowing all the leisure I can afford to completing my manuscript.

During this month our schools, male and female, were examined by two inspectors appointed by the Education Board; and they seemed to be much impressed with the great importance that these institutions must be to the country. One of them, on learning the state of our finances, was so good as to give us a donation of 10l.

From England I have to acknowledge the receipt of some clothes forwarded by kind Christian friends through the Society, and the sum of 6l., forwarded from three places through the Rev. J. T. Johnston, Association Secretary; also subscriptions amounting to 11l. 17s. 2d. from Ireland, sent direct by Miss Maunsell, county Kildare. In this country I have received for our chapel 18l. 14s. 3d.; collections at Lord's supper, native communicants, 17l. 3s. 0 1/2d.; for printing Maori Bible, from natives, 1l. 10s. Total – 37l. 7s. 3 1/2d.

For the printing of the Bible my people seem very willing to contribute; and I have little doubt but that I shall obtain a considerable sum from them during the coming year.

TAURANGA.

Report for the year 1854, by the Ven. Archd. Brown.

The report of this station, forwarded to us by Archdeacon Brown, is, on the whole, of an encouraging character. Here, as at Waikato, we trace, with much satisfaction, the development of the self-supporting principle, and recognise with gratitude the expenditure of labour on that which is of such vital importance – the in-

struction and increased efficiency of the native agents.

The request preferred to the Parent Committee by the Central Committee, that a second clergyman should be appointed to this station, not having, at present, been complied with, I have been prevented, by the duties of the district around me, from visiting and administering the Lord's-supper at many parts of the archdeaconry; but my lack of service has been again supplied, at Opotiki, and various other places on the eastern coast, by the Rev. T. Chapman. At Rotorua, Tarawera, and Tauranga, I have baptized, during the year, twenty-two adults and eighteen children; and, in addition to the usual native and English services, and examination of classes for baptism and the Lord's supper, much time has been occupied in administering medicines to the natives during the attacks of hooping-cough, influenza, and measles, with which, for several months, they were severely visited. The Saturday class of native teachers, who assemble for the purpose of being instructed in the texts from which, on the following day, they address their countrymen, has maintained an average of from twelve to twenty. For many months I have devoted two hours daily to the instruction of an interesting band of six native teachers who are residing with me. Eleven of St. Paul's Epistles, and the Creed, have been read with them and explained; and the progress of this class in religious knowledge has afforded me great satisfaction. A third hour daily I have given to the religious instruction of the girls'-school, and have been amply repaid by the interest manifested by the children in this important exercise. Their progress, too, in Scripture History, reading in English and native, singing, &c, is very pleasing. One of our school-girls died from an attack of measles, but we are cheered with the hope that she sleeps in Jesus. Our congregations maintain their average of last year, nor has our' number of communicants decreased.

Before Sir George Grey left New Zealand he promised some valuable assistance to our school – two horses and ploughs, harrows, cart, &c. This promise, through the kindness of the acting governor. Colonel Wynyard, was carried into effect some months since. The failure of our potato crop, and the utter inadequacy of the 48l. allowed by the Society as school expenses to meet the high prices demanded for all kinds of provisions, would have compelled us to break up our school, but that a most bountiful supply of apples from our orchard realized, in Auckland, nearly 100l. We were then enabled, not only to carry on our school of twelve girls, but to increase their number; to support, in addition, six native teachers and their wives; to pay for the keep and passage of horses, and freight of agricultural implements, from Auckland; to purchase tin ware and other necessaries for the school; and to enclose land, and lay down crops which afford promise of supplying our scholars with food during the next year.

In the short compass of a report we can do little more than point to a few facts. What conclusion may be drawn from them by others we know not; but our impression is, that though there are many adversaries, a wide and effectual door is opened unto us; that our song should be of mercy as well as judgment; and that we are bound to look at the past with gratitude, at the present with thankfulness, at the future with hope.

TARAWERA.

This inland station, near the lake Tarawera, is occupied by the Rev. S. M. Spencer. The following is his

Report for the year 1854.

The state of warfare at Tarawera, as mentioned in my report of 1853, affecting also the tribes of Rotorua and Taupo, continued until late in last autumn. I do now, however, venture to indulge the hope that a few months of calm reflection will, by the blessing of God, result in the establishment of peace. The party on the defensive (Tuhourangi) are making preparations for a feast, hoping to prevail upon the hostile tribes to join, as a token of reconciliation. Still, the causes of dissatisfaction can only be eradicated by the benign influence of the institutions of Christianity. Twenty-eight, in all, have fallen on both sides, though the death of many others may be attributed to the effects of the war. Two seasons for cultivation having been interrupted, the scarcity of food induced those engaged, and the families dependent upon them, to have recourse to means ill calculated to sustain life; and thus they were incapacitated for enduring the effects of the measles, which prevailed extensively at the commencement of the winter.

But, notwithstanding much that is deeply to be deplored, the triumphs of the

gospel shine amid the darkness. As one of the instances which might be mentioned, I will give the case of Mokonuiarangi, father of the leader in the aggression. He, though principal chief of his tribe, having become aged and infirm, had yielded the active duties of patriarchal rule to his son Pairau, whose desire for exclusive claims were earnestly censured by his father, who notwithstanding, to the grief of the friends of peace, felt himself under obligation to sustain the honour of his tribe, by engaging in the same cause in which his son had fallen. This was the more to be regretted, as he had, at a late visit of the bishop – prevailed upon by the earnestness of his professions – been baptized by the name of Alexander, and was also, at the same time, confirmed. However, before the close of the war he confessed his error, and, I trust, truly repented, for he exerted himself publicly to persuade the people of his own party (Ngatirangitihi) to desist from war, and also went, attended by those who had taken no part in the contest, to the opposite party, to declare his earnest desire that peace might be made. This evidence of his sincerity is the more gratifying as he, soon after the cessation of hostilities, perceiving his end to be near, desired to depart under the consolations of the Christian faith, in the presence of the members of his family and tribe, who had been a trial and hindrance to him while he lived among them.

OPOTIKI.

Report for the year 1854.

The Rev. C. P. Davies, in his report of this station, presents a painful description of the manner in which the thorns, the cares of this world, and the deceitfulness of riches, choke the word in the hearts of many.

After attending the Middle-District Committee at Tauranga, I proceeded to Auckland, to place myself under medical treatment, where I remained till the middle of March. During my absence the hooping-cough and dysentery were raging amongst my own family. One child of the school died from its effects. Early in April the measles attacked the whole of the natives, attended with very obstinate dysentery. Two hundred were attacked at the same time. Great part of my time was occupied in attending on the sick at the pa, and preparing medicines for the sick on the coast. I regret to say it was very fatal amongst the old people. I lost two valuable teachers, who in their lives were consistent followers of Jesus, and on their death-beds exhorted all to follow and cleave to Christ. It is with much pain I must candidly confess I have not seen the fruits of this severe visitation of Providence. The natives everywhere, with very few exceptions, seem more engrossed than ever in laying up for themselves treasures upon the earth. The great price of food at Auckland has induced them to extend their plantations. They have many hundred acres of wheat this year, besides other food. By their over-anxiety for worldly wealth, they have, in too many instances, grown lax in their services towards God. In the month of May I visited Te Kaha, and found the natives on the coast in the state above described.

In the month of November I succeeded in getting the natives to go to the eastward, but was obliged to give them an additional payment. The Rev. T. Chapman accompanied me. I assisted him in the administration of the sacraments: and here I would mention one circumstance to show the unwillingness of the natives to give any thing towards the cause of Christ, shown in their collections at the offertory. At Opotiki there were 94 communicants: offertory, 2l. 11s. 2 1/2d. At Tokata, 46 communicants: offertory, 3s. At Te Kaha, 48 communicants: offertory, 2s. 6d. At Omaio, 30 communicants: offertory, 8s. I mentioned to the native teachers, that the Church Missionary Society expected they would come forward to assist their Missionaries in travelling, as their object was to preach Christ to sinners. They told me, unless they were paid the natives would not go. I invited the native teachers to come to Opotiki, as in past years, for instruction. I regret to say that the excuse many gave was their plantations. At present I have six here who will remain till after Christmas: they are occupied in writing skeleton sermons. The beginning of this month I spent three days at Ohiwa: the same sad complaint, "surfeited with the cares of this life." I regret to say, that, on the 9th of December, the natives of Te Wanauopanui tribe came in a hostile manner to Tunapahore, to drive away Te Ngaetae tribe from that pa. They were armed, and did every thing they could to excite the natives in the pa to come out and fight – I am thankful to say without success.

After remaining three days at the place, they returned to their respective pas. I fear they will return in the autumn.

I am thankful to say our girls' boarding-school has given us more satisfaction this year than formerly. They are getting on very nicely in English, geography, writing, arithmetic, sewing, and singing. Mrs. Davies devotes her afternoons to their service. We have averaged ten during the past year.

WHAKATANE.

Report far the year 1854.

We regret to find that Mr. James Preece has been a sufferer from severe indisposition, which has much interfered with his labours. We extract one brief paragraph from his report.

The great price of provisions at Auckland has increased the natives' desire for worldly riches, and made many feel very dead about their spiritual interests; yet I believe that many are making progress in the things of God. I trust that the word has been faithfully preached, and may sink deep into their hearts, and bring forth fruit unto everlasting life.

Our space compels us to reserve the remaining stations of the Middle District, Taupiri and Maketu, for our next Number.

25 Lamentation for the dead.

New-Zealand Mission.

NEW-ZEALAND MISSION.

We continue our review of this Mission from p. 220 of our last Number.

Middle District [concluded).

TAUPIRI.

Report for the year 1854, by the Rev. B. Ashwell.

The Rev. B. Ashwell's report is characterised by features similar to those of his brethren. It speaks of heavy sickness; of much declension; and yet, amidst all, of encouraging results in no small proportion; of some who continue to be a solace to their minister; and others who, having witnessed a good confession before their countrymen, have gone to sleep in Jesus. Of the three native teachers mentioned in the report as having died in the Lord, a full account has already been given in the pages of the "Gleaner" for April and June last.

The year 1854 will always be remembered by the natives of this district, by the mortality occasioned from the diseases following the measles. Although the epidemic was general throughout the country, I think its ravages were more fatal on the banks of the Waikato and Waipa rivers than elsewhere: it has decimated the population of this district. Some villages have lost nearly a third of their inhabitants. The natives residing inland, and on the coast, appear to have suffered least. It has been particularly fatal to the young. Scarcity of food, occasioned by an unusually dry season, ill prepared the native constitution for the attacks of a foreign disease. All my scholars, fifty-six in number, besides my own family, were attacked by it. Six scholars and a teacher have been removed by death. Although every effort was used to arrest the disease, and every attention paid to the children, the parents became alarmed, and our flourishing boarding school was reduced to thirty five: this has caused us much pain, as some of the children were giving us much satisfaction. Of those who died there is reason to be-

lieve that four were prepared for their great change. Three of our native teachers in the district have been called from time to eternity: they gave evidence, in their lives and deaths, that they loved the Saviour. Although mourning their loss, the loss to the church here, I do rejoice in the power of the gospel as manifested in the dying hours of these our New-Zealand brethren. An account of their last moments I forwarded in my journal of June last. Others of my people, especially among the aged, gave me cause to believe that they had good hope in their deaths. Levi Mokoro, the noted cannibal warrior, just before his death, prayed for himself, children, tribe, his minister, and all Missionaries, and died whilst declaring that Christ was his only hope.

The immediate effect of these visitations was to produce much seriousness throughout the district. It was only, I fear, of a transient nature. Returning health, and the excitement caused by the Ngatiteata and other tribes selling land claimed by the Waikato and Waipa natives, have produced much lukewarmness in their religious feelings, more particularly among the Ngatimahuta, the Ngaungau, and the Ngatiwauroa tribes. The removal of their teachers by death has not been blessed to them. Another cause for their declension is, that their avariciousness has been excited by the immense price for native produce given by traders on the Waikato, and by the merchants in Auckland. Only those who are converted could withstand the many temptations to which our people are exposed from these causes.

In the lower part of my district there is much to encourage us in our work. Last Sunday I baptized twenty-three adults, after a long probation and many conversations with them: this, I trust, is a sign that there is still a little spiritual life among my people. There are still several candidates for baptism, who are receiving further instruction. There are thirty scholars in the girls'-school at Taupiri, and ten scholars at Pepepe, making forty scholars in these establishments. Their expenses are defrayed partly by a grant of 150l. per annum from the government, and partly by local resources and subscriptions. The expense of each scholar is 7l. 10s. per annum. The farm at Pepepe – two miles from the station – has been a considerable help, without which I must have dismissed nearly half the scholars, the price of food being treble, in many instances, what it was two years since. The only expense to the Society has been the salary of the assistant to the girls'-school, whose valuable services have set me free to visit more frequently the distant parts of my district. I have been absent from the station ninety days this year, and I have administered the sacrament of the Lord's supper ten times, viz., thrice at Taupiri and Whatawhata, twice at the Papa, and once at Opuatea and Rangiriri. At the latter place there are several young men and their wives who are desirous to join the monitors'-school at Pepepe. Should it please God to give us a plentiful harvest, I shall be enabled to receive them. When at home, I have daily attended the monitors'-school, which continues to give much satisfaction. Our Missionary prayer meetings are well attended on the first Monday in each month, some teachers coming a distance of twenty and thirty miles – a good day's journey – for that purpose. Our annual Missionary meeting was well attended, and more than six pounds collected. We feel the loss of many of our Christian chiefs, who were with us at the last anniversary, especially Levi Mokoro, William Thomas, &c, who have since joined the church triumphant. During the year I have baptized 46 adults and 30 children, and 420 communicants have partaken of the Lord's supper. Mrs. Ashwell and assistant have been fully engaged in the girls'-school.

Upon a review of this eventful year, although called to pass through many trials – to witness of those we love – the declension of some – the ingratitude of others – to pass through good and evil report – and to experience bitter disappointment from many of whom we had hoped better things – yet the hand of a gracious Father has been and is still with us. God is love: all His will is love, covenant love in Christ. I would therefore call upon my soul, and all that is within me, to bless His holy name, and not to forget His benefits. I would praise Him for all that is past, and trust Him for all that is to come, for He does all things well.

Visitation of the Measles.

Mr. Ashwell's journal of this period of heavy sickness we intro-

duce very nearly in extenso. It places us at once in the midst of this suffering period. The rapid progress of disease; the strong man disabled; the healthy cast down; some glorifying God and confessing Christ in the time of tribulation; others dark and without a hope; the Missionary amongst them as a faithful pastor and friend, ministering to the suffering body and anxious soul – we do not think it possible for any one to read all this without being stirred to earnest sympathy.

May 8, 1854 – It is just a fortnight since the measles appeared in the school. All the scholars – fifty in number – without a single exception, have been attacked.

May 9 – Heard to-day that several cases had terminated fatally among the natives visiting Auckland. We felt exceedingly anxious about the school-children, not knowing what may be the consequences to the school. The parents of the children are so foolishly fond of them, that a slight illness is often the cause of their removal to the native villages, where, by injudicious treatment, serious consequences follow.

Nay 13 – Several of the parents of the children arrived. I cautioned them not to come too near their children: in two instances the caution was disregarded. They took the measles, and returned to their homes, twenty miles up the river, against my advice. One died the day after: another is dangerously ill.

May 14: Lord's-day – A Roman-Catholic party arrived here from Auckland, on their way to Rangiawhio. They had lost four of their number from this disease. I visited them: they were exceedingly glad to see me. Three were exceedingly ill: the eruption having been checked, a malignant dysentery was the consequence, which, I fear, will end fatally with all. I administered medicine, and gave rice, and spoke of the only name given under heaven whereby we must be saved, Christ, and Christ alone. At morning prayers I was pleased to find twenty out of the thirty Papists present. In the evening I visited the sick, and had service. Some of the Romanists attended, others would not. I spoke to them of the only way, the truth, and the life. No other name but Jesus, no other salvation but through Him. Peter could not save them, for he was a sinful man. The Virgin Mary could not, for she felt her need of a Saviour, and her spirit rejoiced in that Saviour. They were attentive, and did not attempt to reply. One poor ignorant man crossed himself, repeating the name of the Father, Son, and Holy Ghost, and said, "That's all my religion: I know nothing more." I asked him if he thought that the mere crossing of himself would save his immortal spirit. He replied, "I cannot tell: I suppose so." I then showed him the necessity of the new birth – a real change of heart – of a simple dependence on Christ. A few minutes after this conversation one of the sick natives died, making the fifth since they left Auckland.

Eight days since I rode after dark to a pa, a few miles distant, to see the sick, two of whom are in a precarious state. With one, Jeremiah, I was much pleased: he said he now felt how vain were earthly hopes and joys. His words were – the only great thing was, the salvation brought by Christ. I returned home late in the night: felt very unwell from fatigue and anxiety.

May 15 – Visited the sick. I found Jeremiah very ill, but calm and happy. He said to me, "I have no goodness of my own: Christ alone is my righteousness, my Saviour, my all."

May 17 – Visited Joanna, a woman of rank. Whilst suffering from the fever occasioned by the measles, she bathed in the Waikato, which brought on inflammation of the lungs, which in a few days proved fatal. I was pleased with her state of mind. She told me that Christ was her only dependence. As she was exceedingly regular in her attendance at church and at the Lord's Table, I feared lest she should, unknowingly to herself, depend upon these outward ordinances. She said, "I am wicked and sinful; but Christ, and Christ alone, is my leaning-post" – i. e. dependence – "my only hope." I called upon another woman, Priscilla. I said, "You are very ill. Are you happy? What is your comfort?" She replied, "Christ is my only comfort." "Do you pray?" She said, "Yes." "What do you pray for?" She then gave me the following prayer – "O my God! send Thy Holy Spirit to change my heart, that I may listen to Thy words. I cannot listen without Thy Spirit. Oh, give me Thy Holy Spirit to turn my heart, for the love of my only Saviour

Christ." I used to think this poor old creature very ignorant, especially as she could not read her Testament. Another woman, named Grace, after expressing her only hope in Christ, died happily.

May 18, 1854 – Joanna died this morning. From these and similar cases it will be seen that a real work is going on in New Zealand. It is true that the love of many has waxed cold. Some who did run well have left Christ, through the love of the present world. Yet among many of the old and despised the marks of a genuine faith are seen, and its power to support on a death bed is felt. Engaged the whole of this week in preparing medicine, visiting and attending to the sick at the school and native villages; and I am thankful to say, that, in each case of measles, where attention has been paid to advice, and the medicines duly taken, recovery has followed.

May 28: Lord's-day – A thin congregation: many of my poor people ill. I felt much grieved at some of the teachers, who had neglected to visit the sick. I pointed out their sin. I gave medicine, and prayed with the sick, and rode six miles after sunset to Makiri and Waipahihi. Had evening service. Visited sick, among whom were Weteni and his wife, a chief who had grievously disgraced his Christian profession by taking another wife. He had many English comforts about him. His house, dress, habits, &c, as far as regards mere civilization, were much in advance of many around him. I said, "You have surrounded yourself with comforts which you are now leaving; what can they profit you?" "Oh! do come and talk with me," was the reply. I went in. He said, "I have given up the woman I took for a wife: God has shown me my sin: it has found me out. I am like Judas. I have betrayed my Saviour. Tell me, O my minister, tell me, may I pray?" My heart was overflowing with joy whilst hearing this proud chief thus confessing his sorrow for sin. (The last time I spoke to him he told me he would not listen to any thing I could say, but that he should join the Romanists.) I replied, "Oh, you may pray. Let us pray now." After pouring out our hearts to a prayer-hearing and prayer-answering God, he said to me, "Pride has been the occasion of my fall." I rejoiced over this, I trust, returning prodigal.

May 29 – Weteni was better, but his wife fast sinking, and appears near death. She most earnestly requested baptism. On examination, I found she was acquainted with the great truths necessary to salvation. I cautioned her lest she should depend on this ordinance for salvation instead of Christ. I told her that outward baptism was not salvation. True salvation consisted in the baptism by the Holy Spirit – a new creation, without which no outward ordinance would avail. I then baptized her. I also baptized two sickly children. Last night another immortal soul was called into the presence of its Judge. This is indeed a serious time among my poor people. The mortality throughout the district has been great. More than fifty have been cut off by the after-effects of the measles, through want of care; and this will be the case with most European diseases. Nothing, under God, but schools on a large scale can save the New Zealanders as a people. Being under the Missionary's care, he can see that they are attended to, while it is impossible to visit all the cases of sickness occurring in his district. Day and night have I been employed, for the last five weeks, in visiting sick at all hours and in all weathers. My earnest prayer to God lias been that this afflictive visitation may be the means of inducing many to fly to a crucified Saviour, and not rest content with a mere nominal Christianity. After visiting the sick I reached home three hours after dark, after riding thirty miles, a merciful providence having kept me in safety whilst passing the swamps in the dark.

June 12 – The tribe of the Ngaungau returned to their pa, Tukopoto, bringing their sick with them. Visited William Otapo, suffering from dysentery. I was pleased with his state of mind. He is the native teacher, and his consistent conduct has afforded me much satisfaction. I fear he will not recover. I visited poor old Martha Wesley, the widow of Wesley Te Pake, the chief of Tukopoto, the account of whose happy death I forwarded in my journal July last. 26 I asked her what hope she had. Her reply was, "I have no hope but in the one salvation, Christ my Saviour." I said, "Martha, after your husband's death you wished some of his things to be 'tapu,' sacred." "Yes," she said, "it is true. It was wrong: great was the sin: but I am dark about it." I asked her if she prayed. She replied, "Yes, this is my prayer – O

God! mine is a native heart. Give me Thy Holy Spirit! Change my heart! Forgive my sins in the blood of Jesus! strengthen me! take care of me, for Jesus' sake!" She died in the night

June 20 – William Otapo is still ill from dysentery, taken from his brother, the young man who died a few weeks since, which I have already mentioned. If my teachers are taken from the district it is true God can and will raise others; but – humanly speaking – I cannot tell who can supply their places. I have been hitherto speciality blessed in my fellow-helpers, many of whom have died most happily – Daniel, Jeremiah, Samuel, and others. I am much distressed and cast down. Several of my best teachers are suffering from this disorder, dysentery.

Never do I remember such a time of sickness and distress among my people: never have I witnessed brighter triumphs of faith.

I fear I shall ere long have to send the account of the death beds of some of my best teachers. Surely God has a controversy with the worldly-minded and lukewarm among our churches. O that we may "hear the rod, and Him that appointed it!"

MAKETU.

The Rev. T. Chapman occupies this station. We are happy to find that, notwithstanding a distressing attack of hooping-cough, his health has been such as to enable him to visit the various stations throughout this part of New Zealand – Te Kaha, Omaia, Opotiki, Whakatane – for the purpose of administering the Lord's-supper. The following is his

Report for the year 1854.

The infant churches of this district, at the close of 1854, present anomalies of an unfavourable nature, difficult to realize, and equally difficult to amend. We have, perhaps, too soon relaxed the common appliances of Missionary warfare. We have succoured, with much assiduity and cost, the mother: her children – the church of the future – are ignorant and bare. But new resources may be opening; munitions maybe – and I trust are – preparing; and all may yet be well. Yet, as we see appearances at the present day, both in relation to adults and children, they are discouraging in the extreme. The unfavourable change which has taken place among the natives arises – mainly perhaps – from the greatly enhanced value of their produce, which, filling their minds with thoughts of gain, seems to have led to much indifference to their religious duties, unaccompanied by any apparent alteration for the better in their social condition, or any desire, in the slightest degree, to assist those who would help forward the education of their children. The war, which for about eighteen months disturbed Rotorua and Tarawera, was concluded last April by a not very satisfactory peace. The evils of this war will, I fear, long show itself in a laxity of discipline. So many were drawn away – teachers among others, belonging to my district, that I know not, in many cases, how to proceed.

I have taken three Missionary tours during the year, occupying sixty-five days; these tours extending, coastwise, from my own location, eastward, to the limits of this archdeaconry. In reference to these visits, I found, as we always do find, causes deeply to mourn over, yet happily not causes of distress only, but little kindlings of encouragement also, lest we should have "sorrow upon sorrow."

Our boarding-school of ten – as assumed, but varying in number, rising as high as fourteen – is of that even character, in attainments and behaviour, which calls for no remark.

Our congregations are become nearly-stationary, making due allowance for the inducements which are presented to the natives, enticing them away to various parts, many to Auckland and its neighbourhood, and some to California and Melbourne.

The past year has been marked by more severe sickness than any I remember during my twenty-four years' sojourn in New Zealand. The severe forms were influenza, measles, and whooping cough.

We have also received Mr. Chapman's journals for the year 1854, containing much of interesting detail. As the documents to which we have hitherto referred have treated principally of that portion of the year in which sickness was so prevalent, we take up Mr. Chapman's journals at a somewhat later period, after the sickness had subsided.

Spiritual state of the congregations.

July 9, l854: Lord's day – Held services and school, which were tolerably well attended. Yet none cry out, "What must we do to be saved?" It is very difficult to know what is the general result of your labours among this people. No opposition; no earnest inquiry. You preach the blessedness of the Christian's portion: none are elated. You declare the judgments of God: none are depressed. And yet you know that the gospel has done, and is still doing, great things for New Zealand. Its moral influence is everywhere seen and acknowledged; its personal, regenerating power is rarely fully exhibited.

Rise in the price of provisions.

Much conversation among the natives upon the subject of the great rise in the price of provisions: 1l. 10s. for a ton of 2000 lbs. was the full price here of potatos. They are now worth 6s. a basket of 80 lbs.; flour from 30l. to 35l. a ton; and rice 6d. a lb., or, rather, none in the market. A young man came to-day to offer eight bushels of wheat, tolerably good, at 6s. a bushel. This I bought, and gladly received.

State of the population.

October – Little to remark during the remainder of this month, save that war and its horrors are gradually being lost in the peaceful occupations of agriculture. Still, there are many restless heathen, whose hearts are not in accordance with the rising changes of this once dreadful country; and these still do, and will, agitate whenever opportunities offer. The plough, and a few more towns and rural European districts, would greatly benefit the natives, if such laws could be enacted, and such persons become inhabitants of the towns and villages, as would generally set the natives a good example. But seldom is this seen. Auckland probably has more of good than is found in most colonial towns; yet there are fearful characters among its inhabitants, as may be expected, and few there are among the natives visiting it who do not receive damage in some shape or other. That the natives, in most parts, are decreasing in numbers is very evident, and that districts of tens of thousands of acres should remain long desolate is unlikely. Indeed, the sooner ample portions are reserved, and allotted to the aboriginals, and the other portions sold for their benefit, the better. So thoroughly loose are many of the native claims, that investigation will soon prove to you that A, B, and C have equal claims, because neither A, B, nor C know any thing really whether they have any claim at all, beyond a vague notion of progenitorship and its ramifications: hence the endless disputes and serious quarrels among them – a very undesirable state of things, and the sooner ended the better.

We shall accompany Mr. Chapman on a

Missionary tour along the east coast. Opotiki.

Nov. 10 – Much conversation with Mr. Davies on the general state of his natives, for here, as in all other places, there is a change taking place; not in a casting off their profession of faith, but in an increasing care for worldly things, and this cannot be without damage.

Nov. 12: Lord's-day – Held morning service, baptisms, and the Lord's supper. I preached the word to a large and attentive congregation, faithfully setting before them life and death, blessing and cursing. The Lord give His blessing! Ninety-four gathered round the table of the Lord, and in quiet solemnity partook of that "bread and wine which the Lord hath commanded to be received." Held evening service as before, and, few having left the pa for their little settlements at a distance, we had again a full congregation.

Tunapahore.

Nov. 14 – Reached Tunapahore in the early part of the afternoon. The natives here are in apprehension of a disturbance relative to their land; indeed it may almost be said of every part of New Zealand – continued disturbances about land. Held evening prayers in one of the compounds, the chapel being in ruins, and the pigs having lately too frequently visited it to make it desirable to hold service there. Nearly all the people of the pa attended, and appeared willing to be instructed.

Tokata.

Nov. 15 – We reached Tokata early in the afternoon, and commenced examination of classes for baptism and the Lord's-supper. The natives here were ready to receive us, a messenger having preceded us. Here, at evening prayers, having well lighted up their handsome chapel, we duly administered the sacraments of

our Lord and Master. I closed these interesting services by an address as solemn as the subject demanded, and, I hope, to the benefit of their souls. It was late when we retired to rest, and in rest and peace we passed the night, rising refreshed, and thankful both for our mercies and our privileges.

Te Kaha.

We reached Te Kaha on Saturday, and summoned the natives for examination. Here we had some difficulties, some disputes having arisen, and these may generally be called "pig and land quarrels," and are interminable. The wonder is, that a people without any acknowledged power or law should live together so quietly as they do. Admonishing some, and requiring others to keep back until the next season for celebrating the holy communion, our classes were arranged for the morrow, the Sabbath-day.

Nov. 19, 1854: Lord's-day – At Te Kaha. Held morning service, baptisms. and Lord's-supper. I considered it no small privilege to preach to a full congregation, in a beautifully-finished native-built chapel, the gospel of our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ. The hearers were attentive, and at the Lord's-supper quiet and solemn. Surely our preaching and our "labour is not in vain in the Lord." The teacher here is attentive, and in himself appears to set a good example. This is a good feature. Mr. Davies preached in the afternoon a plain and practical sermon. Lord, give "the hearing ear and the understanding heart!" Quietness was observed through the whole of this Sabbath-day, and nearly all the natives were well dressed in European clothes. What a pity, that civilization and the public house should ever remove them from their present simplicity of life! More convenient and substantial houses, with the rubbish of old times – tapus and burying-places around their dwellings – removed, and cottages and gardens duly arranged, little more is desirable for them. These and the gospel would, with God's blessing, make them a singularly happy people.

Whakatane.

Nov. 26: Lord's-day – Held morning service, baptisms, and administered the Lord's-supper. A very high wind having blown down the chapel, leaving one end resting on its post, we held service in this nook, the natives sitting round outside. But we slowly and orderly adjourned to Mr. Preece's house for the administration of the Lord's supper. We had our usual English service in the afternoon, but none of the Europeans here attended. They are nearly all a drinking set, and, generally speaking, show a very bad example. In the evening the natives were again assembled for prayers, and were addressed, the attendance being nearly equal to that of the morning. Thus the day was fully occupied in my Master's service, and I was most thankful for health and strength and opportunity to be so engaged. It is a blessed work, and I pray God that the unworthiness of the instrument may be lost in the worthiness of Him who said, "Whosoever shall do the will of my Father," &c.

Death of Maraea.

Having been absent from home nearly a month on this Missionary tour, my return brings many little matters to arrange, and these often mingled with uncomfortablenesses, trying your patience exceedingly – "the Missionary grindstone," so well expressed by that highly-valued man, Dr. Judson. Maraea, a sick married woman, I found very ill, and not likely to live many days. Maraea has long been afflicted with sickness, and has long been one of our pensioners, living with her husband on our premises for the benefit of food and medicine, and such instruction and attention as her case demanded. Finding her drawing very near to death, I led the conversation to the sacrament of the Lord's supper, requesting to know whether she desired to partake of the holy communion in humility, love, and faith. She desiring so to partake, I arranged with her husband and my principal teacher, and on the 8th we, a "little flock," having a large clean mat spread, Maraea being brought out to the front of her little cottage, on the ground, where was spread also the bread and wine, and kneeling upon the cliffy rise upon which their humble dwelling stood, with the broad Pacific stretched out before, and within loud-calling distance of Maketu pa, upon which spot many deeds of horrid barbaric warfare had taken place, and from whence the loud exulting yell of the conquerors had not long since swept over this very ground when Maketu pa fell – there did we partake with this, as I trust, believing and penitent woman the emblems of her Saviour's dying love. A few days after,

Maraea entered into her rest. Thus she, whom I once knew as very "far off," was brought "nigh by the blood of Christ." Some years ago, and just after Maraea had been admitted to the Lord's table, I heard a noise – not a strange noise in those days – in the upper part of my settlement, which, by its volume, appeared to call for my interference. Hasting thither, I found two heathen women, relatives of my natives, who had come hither to settle some dispute, and words had become loud and angry. Maraea was present, and just as I appeared was in the act of rising to take part in the debate. The elder quarreller, putting out her hand so as to rest on Maraea's shoulder, said, in a slow and commanding tone, "Maraea, sit still. If we quarrel and use angry words, we are but heathen. You have lately eaten of that sacred food, and are therefore yourself sacred. Leave us alone: we can quarrel without you." Maraea seemed abashed, and a few words from me quieted the angry party: convincing them might have been another thing. Altogether, this reproof was so striking that I seldom saw Maraea without the scene recurring to my mind. Worse subjects have been the painter's care.

Concluding observations.

Great are the changes which are passing over us here; some for good, many, I fear, for evil. Strange for the natives of New Zealand, so soon after the opening of their country, to find themselves receiving highly-remunerating prices for every article of trade they can offer; resources thus opening to them for obtaining the comforts and conveniences of life; paying no taxes or dues of any kind, save a ten per cent, upon imports; themselves without any enemy to fear around them, or foreign enemy to provide against; their lands their own, unencumbered and untaxed; possessing a country blessed almost beyond compare with alternate sunshine and showers, abounding in rivers, and super-abounding in fructuous streams; its forests inexhaustible, if placed under proper regulations – now yearly devastated on all sides, merely to grow potatos, while tens of thousands of acres of valuable land are lying waste around them, only so because the plough and sheep are still absent; inhabiting an island whose seas teem with valuable fish, and many of whose bays are yearly visited by the whale; enjoying a climate where, save in some few parts, its cold seldom produces even surface ice, and where its summer heat, never oppressive, is almost always succeeded by a night of most refreshing coolness; "fruits of the earth" growing in luxurious abundance with the least common care and help; and where, also, the conservatory would furnish, without further assistance than its shelter and glass, the tropical fruits in all their variety; their land stored with copper, iron, and coal, waiting only the appliances of capital and the industry of the labourer and mechanic; its very swamps filled, not with desolating miasma, but with a plant destined yet greatly to supersede other and present resources for the loom and the rope-walk; its forests, its hills, and its valleys, neither the haunt of ravenous beast nor venomous reptile; by nature, by resources, and by position, a maritime country; its inhabitants – if preserved by righteous and salutary laws from the foul stain of all hitherto effects of colonization and "fire-water" – hardy, brave, and inclined to unite with the foreigner; about, perhaps, three-fifths already under the influence of, at least, a profession of Christianity; without laws – save the administration of them, in two or three isolated places where the white man rules – and yet robbery and murder scarcely known, settlers, who live away from their own countrymen, neither using shutters to their windows and scarcely a bolt to their doors – these, these are some of the features which truly belong to New Zealand, an island, which there are few who visit it, who do not wish to remain or return; whose aboriginal inhabitants, I sometimes fear, will not survive the process of amalgamation, but, engrafting the evils of their own system to the alluring vices of the wicked and unprincipled white man, may, like the millions of others who have disappeared before the Christian invader and the Christian settler, ere another century or two elapses, be found only in the pages of history; their preserved heads or whitened skulls a memento of the past to the curious, themselves obliterated, and their language forgotten. What, then, ought to be done? The Societies have already exceeded their first principles of Missionary action. University students are but little interested in the heathen world. The aged Missionary can pray, but hardly hope; and the infant churches, lately rising out of barbarism, and its many attendant soul-de-

stroying customs and rites, see but dimly the blessings they are called to enjoy, and fail eagerly to "stretch forward to those things which are before;" assailed on the right hand and on the left by alluring follies, vices, and gain; catching at the shadow, the substance gliding away. Yes, to save New Zealand, to save a race whose history is at best only to be gleaned from legends imperfectly understood, but who were found high in bearing, sagacious in many of their views, and independent in their nature – how to save them? Let others tell us this. But truly the aspects of the present day will warrant our fears lest the course of some twenty or thirty years should hear the rising generation say, "The harvest is passed, the summer is ended, and we are not saved."

Eastern District.

The prominent features of the reports from this district are precisely similar to those which have attracted our attention in those portions of the island which have been reviewed. They are, on the whole, of a painful character. They are urgent as to the need of more prayer and continued effort on behalf of this people, lest "the cares of the world, and the deceitfulness of riches, and the lusts of other things entering in, choke the word, and it becometh unfruitful."

The reports of the Missionaries, from all parts of the island, bear testimony as to the increase of wealth amongst the natives, and with this, we regret to say, an increase of worldly-mindedness. Amongst the coast tribes, the evil example of English traders is found to be contagious, and the vice of drunkenness, to which the New Zealander was once a stranger, is rapidly spreading. At this dangerous season, when there is so much to excite the anxious solicitude of all who are interested in the welfare of New Zealand, sickness has rested heavily on the natives, and, with European vices, European diseases to which they have been strangers have committed great ravages. The measles, the first visit of this sickness, has been very fatal. This intelligence will pain many amongst us, but, we trust, will draw forth many fervent prayers for the revival of the work amongst this people. The fire only smoulders, and the breath of the Spirit is needed to kindle it into more vigorous action. Many remain stedfast, and persevere in witnessing a good profession.

It is evident, however, that there never has been a crisis in the history of the New-Zealand Mission when the close application of the word to the consciences of the natives, in all its awakening and sustaining power, was more urgently called, for than at the present moment. They who are engaged in the ministration of the word need to be "instant in season and out of season." Nor is the superintending agency of the European Missionary enough: there is needed the more minute and penetrative action of an effective native agency. To the want of this we are disposed to ascribe, in a great measure, this retrograde movement in the religious condition of the New Zealanders. Zealous the native teachers have been, but, with few exceptions, they have not had the advantage of special training. They were earnest men in the different districts taken up to help the Missionaries when nearly overwhelmed by the desire for instruction and baptism, which some fourteen years ago crowded upon them from every quarter. They have not now the requisite influence. A higher standard of qualification is necessary; and we therefore note, with peculiar satisfaction, the commencement of Central Training Schools, as mentioned in the report of Archdeacon W. Williams.

We now present the reports from the different districts to our readers for their careful perusal.

General Report for the year ending Dec. 31, 1854.

We so classify the report of Archdeacon W. Williams, inasmuch us it refers, not merely to his station of Turanga, but to the district generally.

In consequence of the station at Uawa being unoccupied, it has been arranged that the care of the natives of Table Cape shall he undertaken by the Rev. James Hamlin, while those of Uawa and Tokomaru shall be in connexion with the Station of Turanga.

By the appointment of the Rev. W. L. Williams to this station, the wishes of the Society are in the way of being carried out – of training up a body of effective teachers from among the natives. In the outset there are many difficulties to encounter, but a commencement has been made with every encouragement to look for success. Upon this department Mr. W. L. Williams will himself report.

The past year has been remarkable as a season of unusual sickness. The measles, which for the first time has visited the country, has affected old and young throughout the whole island. At Turanga, Uawa, and Tokomaru, there has been great mortality. Such has been the extent of the casualties, that the natives have been greatly alarmed, and have inquired why they should be thus cut off. But a sufficient answer may be found in the wickedness and indifference which prevails in many. For, indeed, God has not dealt with us according to our deserts, nor rewarded us according to our iniquities. It is painfully evident that the population has seriously diminished.

The measles was quickly followed by whooping-cough, and numbers of young children have fallen victims to it, particularly where the people were far removed from the assistance of medicine.

The natives of Turanga have been generally an industrious people, and the stimulus communicated to them by the large demand for wheat at Auckland, and the high prices given for it, have led them to cultivate more extensively, and has thrown into their hands a large amount of property. Temporal prosperity has led to worldly-mindedness and all its attendant evils. An avaricious spirit has been engendered, and – grasping at more, like the dog and the shadow – they believed that by buying vessels for themselves, and taking their own grain to Auckland, they should realise a much greater gain. About twelve of these vessels, averaging between twenty and thirty tons, have been purchased by the natives between East Cape and Turanga; but nine have been wrecked, partly for want of skill, partly because there are no proper harbours to shelter them along the coast. But this is the least evil. Those natives who have thus been led to hold intercourse with the English towns have always been injured in their morality. They copy from our own countrymen an indifference to religion, and pick up all other vices which are so common in an English community. There is now, unhappily, a disposition to indulge in drinking, which is fostered by the English traders, who, notwithstanding the heavy penalties enforced by the law upon all persons who supply the natives with spirits, nevertheless distribute great quantities among them. Thus, after a lapse of fourteen years since the gospel was brought to this part of the island, there is more apparent difficulty meeting us at every step than when we first came among them. When the gospel message was new to the people, there was astonishing favour shown towards it: "they heard the word gladly." But by-and-bye many were offended, when they found that they were still subject to tribulation and affliction; and in the case of many, we have to mourn that, under the influence of the care of the world, and the deceitfulness of riches, the word is choked, and becometh unfruitful. Hence is seen the necessity of constant exertion, and of the faithful declaration of the gospel. If in an English parish much, under God, depends upon the labours of the clergyman, and, where he is remiss, the people fall back into a state of spiritual darkness, much more is care required where we have to encounter the influence of old superstitions and of new temptations. But what means have we for carrying out that which is required, where one Missionary has an extent of country to attend to which is fifty or sixty miles in

length? Native teachers have hitherto done great service, but they are unequal to the increasing emergency. From the central training schools there is every hope, and it gives much encouragement to see a prospect of improvement in this respect; but time must be allowed for the principle to be carried out.

After what has been said of the evils which have risen up among us, it will not be expected that this part of the Mission is in the state in which it is desired that it should be. Still we take courage. There are many faithful in whom the word bears fruit. These persons are regular in their attendance at the services of public worship, and also frequent the Bible classes as often as opportunity is given them. The average number at the Bible classes has been 500. The communicants during the year have been 804, including those of Uawa and Tokomaru.

In the girls' boarding school at Turanga there has been an avarage of thirty pupils, who are instructed with great regularity. Their general progress has been satisfactory, but there still remains much room for improvement.

Of the numerous deaths which have occurred, some have been of a happy character, and there has been good evidence that the soul has passed to the heavenly inheritance. In such cases the object of our Mission has been attained, and God's name has been glorified in those who have believed. But we need a larger measure of quickening grace, by which alone the things which remain may be revived, and the Christianity of this people may become more hearty and sincere.

With respect to the distant parts of this district, I have paid two visits to Uawa, Tokomaru, and Waiapu – viz. in the months of April and November – for the purpose of administering the Lord's-supper, in which I was assisted by the Rev. Rota Waitoa at Hicks' Bay, and by the Rev. C. Baker at Waiapu. The communicants at the former place have been 224; those at the latter 681; and those at Uawa and Tokomaru 102. I also visited Wairoa and Table Cape in September, and administered the Lord's-supper there, assisted by the Rev. J. Hamlin, to 410 natives.

I am happy to report of our native clergyman, the Rev. Rota Waitoa, that he labours steadily at Te Kawakawa; but he has had his portion of difficulties to contend with, and needs encouragement and support.

TURANGA.

Report for the year ending Dec. 31, 1854.

The report of the Rev. W. L. Williams bears more specifically on the proceedings at this station.

Before speaking of the work in which I have been engaged during the past year, I would first record my thankfulness to Almighty God for the kind care and protection which He has afforded us in bringing us safely to our destination, which we reached on February 18th, receiving on our arrival a most hearty welcome from the natives of the district, to all of whom I was personally known before my departure for England in 1847.

Soon after my arrival, I was much struck and disappointed to see a marked difference in the manner of the people in their attendance on the service of God, as compared with what it was when I knew them before. Great numbers of them now seem altogether indifferent and careless about religion, openly showing their disregard of it, without respect to time or place; whereas, seven years ago, there was always the outward appearance of devotion at least, if not the reality, in the congregations generally throughout the district. In the numbers of the congregations, too, there is a great falling-off; for though the morning service is generally well attended, the Sunday-school and the afternoon service are very much neglected. This indifference may perhaps be traced, partly, to their increased temporal prosperity, which has engendered a more eager desire after this world's wealth, and so drawn off their hearts from the the pursuit of the only true riches. Another circumstance, too, which must give pain to all who have the interests of the natives at heart, is the great prevalence of drunkenness among them, a vice which was almost unknown among them a few years ago, and which they held in great abhorrence, though they had frequent examples before their eyes in many of the European traders.

These things would almost tempt us to despair of doing any good, if we had not known that the work is God's, and that, how much soever Satan may exert

himself against it, God's work must and will be advanced in the end. He has doubtless permitted these discouragements for wise purposes. May they stir us up to greater fervency and diligence in the prosecution of those labours to which He has called us!

The teachers' school, I am thankful to say, has proceeded so far in such a way as to give me every encouragement. There is no lack of pupils who are ready to offer themselves; but our numbers are kept down from want of accommodation, as we have only one building at present, which has not room for more than seven. We began in May, soon after the archdeacon's return from Auckland, but the measles coming on soon afterwards proved a serious interruption. It was its first visit to this country, and therefore both old and young were attacked; and the mortality in our immediate neighbourhood was so great, that for several weeks in succession we had funerals almost every day. Humanly speaking, much suffering, and many deaths, might have been avoided but for the recklessness and want of attention on the part of the natives themselves; for it is difficult to get them to take even the most ordinary precautions against sickness; and yet they wonder why it is that they do not see the same amount of suffering amongst the English residents as there is amongst themselves.

We commenced school again after the measles in July, with four pupils, and in the beginning of August we received a reinforcement of four more from the Waiapu district; one in the middle of September from Wairoa; and six more, on the 29th of November, from Waiapu, making in all a total of fifteen; but of these two have left us, reducing our number to thirteen. Eight of these natives are married, and their wives attend the girls'-school. The hours of school have been from half-past eight to half-past eleven A.M., and from six to seven P.M. Instruction has been given in portions of the Holy Scriptures – viz. in part of the Book of Genesis, and in part of the Gospel of St. Matthew – in the English language, writing, arithmetic, singing, and geography.

May God grant an abundant blessing on this and on all similar institutions, and qualify His servants engaged in them for their important work, since on the character of these undertakings, under His blessing, will depend much of the usefulness of a native ministry, and the future welfare of the Maori church!

TABLE CAPE.

Report for the year ending Dec 31, 1854.

From the Rev. James Hamlin, who has been in charge of Table Cape, lying to the south of Turanga, the following report of that portion of the district has been received –

The work of the Lord, in any country or district, cannot long go on without opposition. In appearance it ebbs and flows according to adverse or favourable circumstances, the number and kind of enemies it has to oppose, and the zeal or lukewarmness of its friends.

This year has been one of trial. Afflictions have been permitted to assail, and through the lukewarmness of some of the professed disciples of Christ, the enemy of souls has been permitted to gain an advantage over us.

The various outposts belonging to the station have been visited with as much regularity as circumstances would permit; and I am thankful in being able to report, that at each the attendance at divine service, on Sundays and other days, and at Sunday-schools, Bible classes, and adult schools on week days, has on all occasions been good when I have been present. I may also add that the conduct of the inland tribes has, generally speaking, been encouraging. Our discouragements lie on the coast, where our fellow-countrymen reside. The schools, however, at the native villages, conducted by the native teachers, have, with one or two exceptions, been nearly discontinued. The high price the natives now obtain for their produce has opened new fields for procuring the things for the body, and has drawn them from the settlements, and scattered them in various directions. The native teachers, in many places, can no longer, with any regularity, assemble their people for school on weekday mornings: they do not now possess that influence over them which they formerly did; but they themselves require to be constantly urged on and encouraged in their work. At Mohaka, and at Te Waiau, the native teachers continue to maintain their position, and the work of the Lord goes on more steadily than at some other places.

When I returned from the northward, in February, I learnt that plans had been laid and steps taken, by the whaling party, to bring a grogseller into the midst of the natives amongst whom we are located. The first liquor was brought on shore in June, and drunkenness, with its attendant evils, were on all sides of us. One white man lost his life in consequence. Liquor is now brought on shore on all opportunities, and is hawked about by both whites and natives for the sake of the profits. Two other houses are now in the course of erection by whites, whose object, as report states, is the sale of liquors. This state of affairs in this bay has been several times represented to the government. I wrote a letter in June to the resident magistrate of Ahuriri, complaining of these irregularities, but no remedy has yet been applied. Instigated by the whites, three or four of the worst of the natives have declared that they owe no subjection to the Queen, governor, or magistrates: their land is their own, and they will do as they like; and that the whites have assured them that no magistrate would ever come to this place to take cognizance of what was done here.

The number of children that have attended the day-school since June has varied considerably; and when the liquor has been about, for a fortnight or three weeks none have attended. The fact is, it is now discovered that the Mission-house is much too near these scenes of riot for any thing to be done successfully in the way of schools; and if this state of affairs is to go on unrestrained, there remains no alternative but to withdraw the station altogether, or to remove it to some other spot.

The measles and whooping-cough were introduced into this district in the beginning of June, when the weather was unusually wet and cold. The measles, and diarrhoea, and dysentery, that followed, carried off many of the old careless livers, and the whooping-cough not a few of the children. Not fewer than 130 in the district have died since June, being about three-fourths more than the usual number of deaths in a year. Several of the disciples of Christ have fallen asleep, we hope, in Jesus. To the one party He has come as a thief in the night, to the other as the messenger of peace. It is worthy of remark, that in those residences where drunkenness and theft were carried on, and where the greatest lukewarmness amongst the Christian party existed, the number of deaths has been about seven to one of other places. The Lord, in His afflictive dispensations, thus warns the careless of his danger, and says to him, "He that, being often reproved, hardeneth his neck, shall suddenly be cut off, and that without remedy." To others He repeats the exhortation, "Be ye also ready, for at such an hour as ye think not the Son of Man cometh."

The natives of Te Reinga have rebuilt their chapel in a very neat manner, and have considerably enlarged it. Materials are also ready for the erection of chapels at Mohaka, Arakanihi, and Waihua, which we hope will be erected in the course of the autumn.

Fifty-six children have been baptized during the year, and eleven adults.

We add a few extracts from Mr. Hamlin's journal; some encouraging, others sadly the reverse.

Death of a Christian native.

Nov. 20, 1854 – The news of Aperahama Hewakewa's death reached me to-day. He was the first-fruits of Te Waiau to Christ. Ever since his baptism his conduct has been very exemplary: indeed he might be held up as a pattern of imitation to his fellow countrymen. During his last illness he was brought to the station, and remained here about six weeks, to see what could be done for him; but as soon as I saw him I told his relations that I feared there was no hope of his recovery. Consumption – the Lord's instrument by which He removes many of His children to Himself – had long ago commenced its work, and had already made considerable progress on his constitution. I conversed with him several times while he was at the station, and always found him in a very happy frame of mind. Several remedies having been tried without any apparent advantage, and it being evident to all that his end was fast approaching, his friends removed him to his own place, where, in about a fortnight afterwards, he died. The native service at his residence was yesterday conducted in the house in which he was lying, and before it was concluded his spirit had taken its flight. "Precious in the sight of the Lord is the death of His saints."

Evil influences.

Nov. 28 – We reached Opoutuma, on

our way to Turanga, at dark this evening. Here we found only a few natives: nearly all had left, and gone to whale. The whaling is the very destruction of every thing that is good and proper: the drunkenness, the vulgarity of manners, the obscenity of language, the horrid oaths and curses which so frequently proceed from the lips of the whalers, must make such abodes the wicked place in miniature. I was in hopes many of the natives would be induced to leave these places of wickedness, and of this there was some prospect some time ago; but I believe more frequent them now than ever. Amongst those who have joined the whaling parties are several native teachers, who have made shipwreck of a good conscience if not of faith.

The Christmas season – A sad New Year.

Dec. 24, 1854: Lord's-day – A large and orderly congregation at the morning service: the responses were repeated in a very audible and devout manner by the majority present, nor did I hear one wrong letter in the whole service. These natives were the last to embrace Christianity; but the last are now first, and the first last. I preached from Acts xxiv. 24, 25. I hope the Lord was present in our midst. The evening service was well attended.

Dec 25: Christmas-day – In the morning I rode to Rangiwatima, a place about five miles distant, where were assembled from 200 to 300 natives. I held service in the open air, and preached from Luke ii. 13, 14. Had a short school, and returned to our encampments. Held service at this place, and preached from the same text as at Rangiwatima. The congregation was not so large this morning as it was yesterday. Here, and at the place from which I returned this morning, the natives had made a Christmas feast. At each place a temporary house, of about sixty feet long by twelve wide, was erected: the roof was a covering of calico. In each the food was laid out in two rows, of which the natives at each place partook without any noise or disorder.

Dec. 26 – At Ahirau I went on shore. I was requested to be present here, as a fight from our natives at the heads of the Wairoa was expected on account of Afatu's wife, who had gone astray, and it was greatly feared how it would end. After addressing a few words to the people of this place, and those assembled with them, advising them to be quiet, and to lay aside all weapons, and all words and actions calculated to irritate, I went to meet our party, who were not far off. These, I found, were well disposed, and had come to make peace and to renew their former friendship rather than to make any ado. I walked on before them till I came up to the other party, and there, between the two parties, I took up my position. A few speeches were made, and all ended in a very amicable manner. This being concluded, I went and held a Bible class with the Ahirau party. I then left, and returned home about seven in the evening. Whites and natives continually intoxicated during the week, though they gave us no personal annoyance.

Dec. 31: Lord's-day – Last day in the year. I took the services at the station, morning and evening, to day, and the school. The morning service was pretty well attended: but few were present at the evening. Whites and natives intoxicated. I preached from Matt. xxv. 34-41. May the seed sown spring up in their hearts, and bear fruit to the praise and glory of God!

Thus closes the old year. Taking a retrospective view of it, how much cause there is to humble ourselves with fasting and prayer for the many sins and wickednesses committed during the year; beseeching God to pardon what is past, and to give us grace to repent and forsake sin, and to seek more earnestly for the cleansing efficacy of His Holy Spirit. How many tares have appeared amongst the wheat this year! O God, do Thou speak, that the dead may hear Thy voice and live! Do Thou cause Thy life-giving word to take root, and it will grow!

Jan. 1, 1855: New-year's day – Most of the whites were assembled at the grogshop, and every one was intoxicated, and many natives too – no fresh natives, the same that I have mentioned several times before. One white man, who was intoxicated day after day, amused himself in interrupting travellers in the public path in front of the grog-shop, and took away one or two horses from them. The only white woman in the district, besides our family, was also there intoxicated, and several of the whites were fighting. What an introduction to the new year! No children have attended our school for several weeks past, and some of the parents have even gone so far as to say

that their children, unless they were paid for attending, shall not attend again.

Jan. 2, 1855 – At ten o'clock, P.M., two whites and a native, all drunk, came into the pa adjoining the Mission premises: their object was to drag away a young widow. One of them was living with two sisters as his wives, and he wanted this as a third: the other was living with a native woman, and wanted this as a second. The brother of the young person was favouring one party, and the native with them was standing up for the other, who was his master in the spirit affair. But being opposed by a man in the pa, the drunken native took up a fire-stick to set fire to the house of his opponent. He made several attempts, but was happily prevented. Had he succeeded in firing the other's house, the pa, the church, and every building on the Mission premises, would have been destroyed. The wind was blowing so strongly in that direction at the time that nothing could have saved them. This affair was not quieted till past midnight. We have passed nearly twenty-eight years in the land without any accident of the kind; but I now begin to fear whether we shall long escape, surrounded as we are by drunkards.

A Christian death.

Jan. 13 – The native teacher from Mohaka arrived at the station, and gave an account of the happy death of his wife, in consequence of a fall from her horse. She died a few days ago. She told them, some days before her departure, she had no fear of death, and desired them net to take any more pains to detain her. She was going to her Saviour, in whom she exhorted them all to confide, and to be faithful to Him.

AHURIRI.

This station lies still further to the southward, in the recess of Hawke's Bay. The Rev. Samuel Williams removed from Otaki to this district in March of 1854. The circumstances of this district necessitate the formation of a new station, the commencement of which has been obstructed by various difficulties, and Mr. Williams has been, in consequence, very unfavourably circumstanced for the prosecution of his work. We introduce one brief extract from his

Report for the year ending Dec. 31, 1854.

With regard to the state of the district, there have been many fearful cases of falling away, but, considering the temptations to which the people are now exposed, there is much cause for thankfulness that the larger proportion continue stedfast in their profession.

WAIAPU.

Report for the year ending Dec. 31, 1954.

Waiapu, to the north of Turanga, is occupied, by the Rev. Charles Baker. He thus reports of this portion of the Eastern district –

With gratitude to an all-wise and gracious God, I have to report my restoration to a better state of health, my appointment to the Waiapu station, and admission into the ministry. I left Auckland, with the chief part of my family, in the month of February, and arrived at the station on the 24th.

The Mission premises I found greatly out of repair; and much, in many respects, that depressed the mind. It is, however, a matter for thankfulness, that the natives continued in the use of those means of grace that had been available to them.

My five visits through the district have given me a tolerable opportunity of knowing the condition of the people. Ninety two adults and 143 infants have been received into the visible church of Christ by baptism. There are a good many adults on the list of candidates for that ordinance, who are under instruction. The archdeacon has paid two visits since my arrival, on which occasions I have assisted him in administering the Lord's supper at five of the chief villages. The number of communicants was 681.

At the station, Bible classes have been attended with good regularity. Numbers come from a distance of several miles, and only were absent from sickness or bad weather.

The teachers and monitors near to the station were for some little time under daily instruction, but their plantations required their attention, and prevented a longer continuance: they continue to have, however, the benefit of one lecture weekly, with few interruptions. I regret that circumstances did not admit of the teachers and monitors from a distance coming up during any portion of the year for instruction.

There has been at the station a day

and sabbath-school, and the attendance has been good throughout the year. I have been able to take the superintendence of the schools, and one of my family has also rendered me assistance. At most of the villages there has been an adult school for reading and rehearsing the Catechisms; but I have been grieved to see the young more generally neglected and overlooked. Sunday-schools have been kept in all the places where divine service has been held.

There is required an industrial boarding school, where a proportion of the young from all the villages should be collected. Preparatory measures have been taken with a view to effect this. There are wanting an efficient teacher, and funds to some moderate amount, to enable me to carry out this very important object.

Four young men, with their wives, have been sent to the teachers' trainirg school at Turanga; and when accommodations there will admit of more pupils, I trust I shall be able to send more. I look with deep interest upon this establishment, in the hope of obtaining therefrom a class of teachers qualified to instruct the rising generation, and to raise the tone and character of the people at large.

The natives have had to endure a severe scourge in the measles in the first place, which, with its effects, has proved fatal to many: and in the second place the whooping-cough has carried off many children. It was lamentable to witness the amount of misery in the abodes of the suffering people, increased by their own imprudence, on the one part, and want of forethought in laying up in store from their grain a sufficiency for the sick and needy.

There has been a considerable advancement in the way of agriculture, and much traffic has been carried on with the Europeans, and, as a consequence, worldliness has succeeded to some extent. Much of the simplicity observable on the first reception of the gospel has declined: some have become slack and indifferent in their attendance on the means of grace. Others have been like Issachar, crouching down between the burdens. There are, however, I trust, a good proportion who, notwithstanding the many temptations to draw them back to the world, are stedfastly fixed in purpose to serve God, and to wait for His salvation. Blessed be God! His word has not returned void in its effects. It has brought the people to an acknowledgment of His name. Not a few have been led to seek reconciliation through His Son Jesus Christ, and His word is by many regarded far beyond all earthly treasure.

Missionary Tour through the District.

The following letter from Mr. Baker, dated July 19, 1854, affords more detailed information as to his labours in this district –

Since my last I have been through my district, and you will no doubt feel interested in receiving some detail.

The natives, having notice of my object, assembled at the chief villages, where teachers are residing. At these places I examined candidates for baptism, and baptized those who appeared proper subjects. Numbers applied who did not give sufficient evidence of their fitness for the sacred ordinance.

At the Korotere I spent two days, and baptized twenty adults and six infants. This is an important place: the oldest teacher in the district is living here. He was one of the first baptized at the Kirikiri, and has been an exemplary character ever since. There was a necessity for my presence at this place. A serious misunderstanding had taken place amongst the principal residents, which was happily put to rights. The people have removed their dwellings nearly a mile from the chapel, and great inconvenience is felt from this. I advised them to take down the chapel, and put it up in the centre of their new village; and also to put up a rush hut for me, for my accommodation on my visits there. They promised to do both.

Tuparoa is the next important village, where many muster from the surrounding villages and hamlets. There is a valuable teacher here.

Between the Korotere and Tuparoa is Reporua, a village of importance. The people are numerous, and they have been a difficult party to manage; yet not indifferent about the means of grace. I found a good many candidates for baptism. The teachers of the Korotere and Tuparoa had visited this place alternately, and rendered valuable service. I found the candidates for the most part well instructed. Twenty-five adults from Reporua, and five from Tuparoa, were admitted to baptism.

At Whareponga there is a valuable teacher, who has been labouring under great discouragements. I have endea-

voured to succour him. His Christian principles give me the highest satisfaction. The people have not treated him well, and they now appear aware of their error. Here I baptized twelve adults and five children, and married three couples.

Waipiro is the next village of consideration. At this place there is a teacher of great experience. He is advancing in years, and does not possess the amount of information that the other teachers do: still he is a valuable man, and of great service. The monitors under his charge have rendered him much assistance. Here I baptized ten adults and four infants.

I have been exceedingly desirous to send some young men with their wives to the teachers' school at Turanga. Three young men and their wives are about to go from Waipiro; also another and his wife from Whareponga: one, too, at Tuparoa, with his wife, has offered to go. I am desirous of sending not fewer than ten of each sex, believing a more important step cannot be taken to promote the extension and perpetuity of the work.

Upon the whole, I feel that there is much cause for thankfulness. God does bless the means of His appointment – the preaching of the gospel.

THE KAWAKAWA.

From this station, where the native deacon, the Rev. Rota Waitoa, has been placed, we have had no specific report.

26 "Church Missionary Gleaner," Dec. 1853.

Conditions of Use

By their use of these ebooks, texts and images, users agree to follow these conditions of use:

These ebooks, texts and images may not be used for any commercial purpose without permission from the University of Auckland Library.

These ebooks, texts and images may not be re-published in print or electronic form without permission from the University of Auckland Library. However, educators are welcome to print out items and hand them to their students.

Users are not permitted to download our ebooks, texts, and images in order to mount them on their own servers for public use or for use by a set of subscribers. Individuals and institutions can, of course, make a link to the copies at ENZB, subject to our conditions of use. It is not in our interest or that of our users to have uncontrolled subsets of our holdings available elsewhere on the Internet. We make corrections, add tags, add images, etc. on a continual basis, and we want the most current text to be the only one generally available to all Internet users.

These texts can potentially be used as the basis for additional TEI tagging or for some other etext or ebook project, but we ask that you let us know before you start, so that we can coordinate work on that text and make sure that we are not working on it simultaneously. We would like a copy of the improved text for our collections.

Request for permission form